<^ .<i2-
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
|50 ""'^^
In
2.5
^ Ug 112.0
UUl.
11-25 i 1.4
1.8
1.6
fiiott)grapmc
Sciences
Corporation
^N^
<V
«
•^-
:\
\
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 145ea
(716) 872-4503
\
i.
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquas
Tha Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibiiographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in rhe
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
ColourcKi covers/
Couvertura de couleur
nn Covers damaged/
D
Couverture endomfnag.^
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture rastaurie at/ou pellicula
I I Cover title missing/
Le titre de couverture manque
I j Coloured maps/
D
□
D
D
Cartes giographiquas en couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encra da couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations an couleur
Bound with other material/
Ralii avac d'autras documents
Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
La re lii/'e serr6e peut causer de I'ombra ou da la
distorsion Ic long de la marge int^rieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties
lors d'une restauration apoaraissant dans la taxta,
mais, lorsque cela itait possible, cas pages n'ont
pas iti filmias.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires suppl^mantaires;
The
to t
L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a it^ possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du
point de vue bibliographiqua, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exigar une
modification dans la m^thoda normale de fllmage
sont indiqu6s ci-dessous.
r~~l Coloured pages/
n
Pages da couleur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommagies
Pages restored and/oi
Pages restaur^es et/ou pelliculdes
Pages discoloured, stained or foxe;
Pages d^colories, tachetdes ou piqudes
Pages detached/
Pages ditachies
Showthrough/
Transparence
Quality of prir
Qualit<k inigaia de {'Impression
Includes supplementary matarit
Comprand du material supplamantaira
Only edition available/
Seule Edition disporible
I I Pages damaged/
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
r~7 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
r I Pages detached/
HT] Showthrough/
I I Quality of print varies/
r~~1 Includes supplementary material/
rn Only edition available/
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure,
etc.. ont iti filmies i nouveau de faqon d
obtenir la meiileure image possible.
The
pos
of 1
filiT
Ori(
beg
the
sio:
oth
firs
sioi
or i
Tht
sha
TIN
wh
Ma
diff
ent
beg
rigl^
req
me^
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est filmi au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous.
22X
10X
14X
1BX
26X
30X
/
12X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:
■National Library of Canada
L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grSce d la
gdn6rosit6 de:
Bibliothdque nationale du Canada
The images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract sp'icifications.
Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de la nettet^ de l'exemplaire filmd, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimis sont filmds en commenpant
par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la
dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second
plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont filmds en commenpant par la
premidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernidre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbole —^ signitie "A SUIVRE", le
symbole V signifie "FIN".
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too larqe to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams iiilustrate the
method:
Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre
reproduii: en un seul clich6, il est film6 d partir
de Tangle supdrieur gauche, de gauche d droite.
et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre
d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes si-ivunts
illustrent la m^thode.
1
2
3
1 2 3
4 5 6
the high school
German Grammar
ANn
READER
miH ELEMENTARY EXERCISES IN C.
AND VOCABULARIES
OMPOSITION
BY
W. H. VAN DER SMISSEN, M.A,
As.ocia,e Professor of aer,na„, Uni..rsUy CoUe,., Toronto.
AND
W. H. ERASER, B.A.,
Associate Professor of Palian an, Spanisk, Uni.ersUy of loronCo.
3lttth0meb it) the ^epurtment of (gb„cation
for (Dittarto
TORONTO
THE COPP, CLARK COMPANY, LIMITED
1900
KIT'
s ■ f
1
Sntered according' to Act of the Parliament ot Canada, in the jear one thousand eight
hundred rnd ei-xhty-ei.^ht, by Tub C .pp, Clark Company, Limited, in the Office o
the Miniatdr oi Agriculture.
PREFACE TO REVISED EDITION.
usand eight
he Offloao
In this edition, tile portion forming Part II f. of the
old edition has been replaced by additional exercises on
tl>e lessons of Part I., and the selections prescribed by the
University for Junior Matriculation have been added as
a Reader, followed by exercises in Composition, based
on the text of these selections.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Preface
Introduction. — Alphabet ..***** *
Examples of Pronunciation
General Remarks on Pronunciation .
Quantity of Vowels
Accentuation .... * ._
Orthography • . , .
German Script
Ill
I
6
8
10
II
'3
PART I.
LESSON
I. Present Indicative of laBcil, to have .
II. Use of Cases. — Definite Article .
III. Xicfcr Model. -Imperf. Indie, of ^oBetl, to
have
IV. mdn Model. - Indef. Article. - Present and
Imperf. Indie, of fcin, to be ...
V. Declension of Substantives : — gjloler Model,"
or -I, -tti, -n, -r Stems . . . '.
VI. Present and Imperfect of toerUcn, to become.
~^°"^*^"'^*^°" °^ ^"""P^^ ^^"tences
VII. Declension of Substantives: — @o^n Model.
— Question Order
VIII. Conjugation of ^oBcit, to have. -Place of
Participle and Infinitive ....
IX. Weak Conjugation : loBcn. - Dependent Sen-
tences. — Prepositions with Accusative only
X. Weak Verbs (continued). — Declension of
Substantives : — $otf Model, or Plural in -er
PAGE
17-
i8.
20.
22.
25-
28.
32.
41.
1,2
3-5
6,7
8-is
16-18
19,20
21-23
36. 24-26
27-3U.
47- 3S-3:
CONTENTS.
LESSON
XI.
XII.
XIII.
A.
XIV.
XV.
B.
XVI.
C
XVII
XVIII
XIX,
XX.
XXI.
XXII
XXIII.
XXIV.
XXV.
XXVI.
XXVII.
D.
Personal Pronouns ....
Possessive Adjectives. - Use of Articles
Construction of Sentences : — Place of Ob^
jects, Adverbs, etc. - Prepositions with Da-
tive only
Additional Remarks on Personal Pronouns
and Prepositions
Conjugation of fein, to be. —Declension of
Substantives: -Weak or n Stems: itnahc
Model
Mixed Declension. -- Double Plurals. — Pre-
positions governing Dative or Accusative .
Anomalies of Declension
• • •
Declension of Substantives : Recapitulation.
— Proper Names. — Prepositions with Gen-
'^^^«
Proper Names. — Foreign Substantives .
Gender of Substantives. — Interrogative Pro-
nouns and Adjectives. — Indirect State-
ments and Questions
. Gender of Substantives (concluded). — Gen-
eral Remarks. ~ Double Gender
Relative Pronouns. — Irregular Weak Verbs
Declension of Attributive Adjectives : Strong
Form. — Conjugation of Strong Verbs
Passive Voice .
Declension of Adjectives : Weak and Mixed.
— Strong Verbs: Bcifecn Model .
Possessive Pronouns.— Strong Verbs: tUlftttl
Model .
Declension of Adjectives (concluded) : Table,
General Remarks. — Strong Verbs : ((^iegcn
and fed^ten Models
Comparison of Adjectives. - Strong Verbs :*
fricren Model
Demonstrative Pronouns. — Strong Verbs :
ftltflcn Model
Indefinite Pronouns. — Strong Verbs : fhin-
licit and ^Clfcn Models ....
On Certain Adjectives and Pronouns
PAGE
52.
S8.
§§
3S-42
43.44
64- 45. 46
70. 47-51
72.
80.
87.
89.
95-
52-59
60 65
66 69
70-75
76-78
97- 79-^8
105. 89-91
III. 92-99
iiS. loo-m
126. 112-U4
134- 115-118
142. 119. 120
147- 121-124
154. 125-131
162. 132 144
171. 145-159
178. 160 162
;,ESSON
XXVIII.
XXIX.
XXX.
XXXI.
XXXII.
XXXIII.
XXXIV.
XXXV.
XXXVI.
E.
XXXVII.
XXXVIII.
XXXIX.
XL.
F.
CONTENT*)-
Numerals : — Cardinals and Ordinals. —
Strong Verbs: fprC(^CII Model
indefinite Numerals. -Strong Verbs: efffli
Model
Derivative Numerals — Time, Measure]
Date. - Strong Verbs : fdilagcn Model .
Adverbs. - Strong Verbs : faOcn Model .
Adverbs (continued): Formation and Com-
parison. — Table of Strong Verbs and
General Remarks on the same
Adverbs (continued) : Idioms. — Irregular
Strong Verbs ....
Modal Auxiliaries
>Iodal Auxiliaries (continued): Idioms
Compound Verbs
On Certain Prefixes .
Reflexive and Impersonal Verbs.
Prepositions governing the Genitive
Prepositions (continued) : — Idioms
Conjunctions. — Interjections
Conjunctions. —Additional Remarks
PAGE
§§
1 80.
163-1(1
189.
168-18
196.
i82-i8t
204.
18-/, iSg
210.
i89-i9<
217.
195. »9t
22:,.
197-199
233-
200-202
239-
246.
203-208
209-213
249.
214 22c
257-
264.
221-22^
225-23^
282.
23S-24C
241
PART II.
XLI.
XLII.
XLIII.
XLIV.
XLV.
XL VI.
XLVIL
XLVIIL
XLIX.
L.
G.
Dative and Accusa-
SYNTAX.
Synta:: of the Cases. — Nominative and
Genitive
Syntax of the Cases
tive .......
Indicative Mood : Syntax of its Tenses
Subjunctive and Conditional Moods .
Imperative and Infinitive Moods.
Infinitive Mood (continued)
The Participles
Concord and Apposition
Apposition (continued): Appositive
jectives. —Syntax of the Preposition
Word-Order .
• • • •
Complex Sentences - Clause-Order .
Ad
286. 242-24;
. 291.
248-255
• 299.
256-262
. 304.
263-268
. 311-
269-272
318.
273-278
• 325-
279 2S4
• 334.
1-
2S5-2S9
• 34r.
290, 291
. 348.
292-301
• 360-
302-306
CONTENTS.
PART III.
SUHFLKMENTAUY ExEKCISKS
PAflK
ao4
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
XX.
XXI.
READER.
^otfappdjen ((SJebrubcr (Sjrimm)
5Ii>ie'^ bev Virte mad)t (^^(uberfeii)
®ag neiie jtleib „
93enebig „
^otl;[d;ilb „
S)er mx
^immelS[rf)luffer (©rtt) .
^as eiferne Slxeii^ (gronimer) .
S^icotiona (33aum6ac^) .
3)er ©olbOaum (33oumbod)) .
2ovdd (^cine)
S)u hift luic eine 23ruine (-Oeine))
©djciferg eonutag^lieb (liljlaiib)
3^0^ ®c^ro§ am ^eere „
3)ag ec^lo^ ^oncouvi (^rjamiffo)
■^k etevne (6loubiu§) .
3)ei- 9iie[c ©olittt^ (glaubiug)
ajJignon (®Detf;e) .
evlfomg M . . .
S)er ©dnger (®oetf)e)
S)er bungling am 33ac^e ((Sc^iUer)
415
419
425
425
427
428
429
434
438
442
448
449
450
450
452
453
454
456
457
458
460
Composition Exercises .
Abbreviations
Vocabulary: /^^^"^^"-English
I English-German
Index
463
484
485
542
569
PAflK
415
419
425
425
427
428
429
484
438
442
448
449
450
450
452
453
454
456
457
458
460
463
484
485
542
669
INTRODUCTION.
(For Rekerenck only.)
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
Characters.
^ a
» h
® c
Narric.
@ e
» f
® B
bay
tsay
dcy
ay
eff
gay
Sound.
Observe the dif.
ference betvyeen
like a in f<zther; never as in
brtll, hrt/, c<zre.
as in Eng., except at end of
word or syll., when pron.
like/.
before h, e, t, and ^, like ts ;
otherwise like /'/ in words
from French, before e and i,
like ss.
as in Eng., except at end of word
or syll., when pron. like /.
long, like a in gr^me; short,
like € in p^n; when final or
in unaccented prefixes, like
short a in Louis^.
as in English.
always hard, before all vowels
and before I, m, n, x, like g
in ^ive ; at end of words and
sylls., or before other con-
sonants, like Germ, d; ; in
words from French, before e
and i, like s in pleasure.
21 and U
S3 and 23;
6, ^, M and
6 and @;
c and e.
% and 0.
G and g;
e and c.
f and f.
© and ©.
I
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
haracters.
^ §
Name.
hah
3 i
3 i
^ f
m, m
9{ n
C
C .]
© fg
ee
yot
hah
cll
em
en
pay
koo
err
sss
Sound.
always aspirated before vowels,
as in //at ; silent before con-
sonants, after t, between
vowels, and when final.
long, like e in he- ; short, like /
in sk/n.
like y in yet; in words from
French, like s in plea.mre.
Observe the dif-
fer<itice betweeu
h, f), to and
as in English.
^ and di.
m and to.
^ and di.
like Eng. rwith strong guttural
roll ; formed by making the
tongue convex, and check-
ing the breath by gently
pressing the middle of the
tongue against the roof of
the mouth.
before vowels, like s in sone,
or s in dai^-y ; before conson-
ants, and when final, like s in
ye.f / but see fch, ft. f^>, below.
^0 is used at the end of words,
otherwise [.
9t and R
X and £.
f and l
c
11
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
Characters.
Z i
U u
8 J
Name.
tay
00
fow
vay
iks
ypsilon
tset
Sound.
as in Eng. ; t^ also like // ti in
foreign words, preceding an-
other vowel, like tse.<^
long, like 00 in hooX\ short, like
00 in ioot.
like Eng. /in Germ, words; in
foreign words, like Eng. v,
like Eng. v, except after [c^ and
I, when pron. like Eng. w.
like ks, even when initial.
like the Germ, vowel i; or
like ii.
like t$.
Observe thu dii-
ference between
U and %.,
35 and 33;
t>, fc, ^, V.
E and r.
Char"cters.
C(Cc) ii
iiaic) ii
MODIFIED VOWELS (UMLAUTSX
Sound.
like the Germ, vowel e. (The forms %t, etc.,
are replaced by %, etc., in modern ortho-
graphy.)
about like u in m//rder; nearly like French eu,
but with lips rounded and nearly closed.
nearly like French u; there is no corresponding
sound in Eng. Pronounced with lips rounded
and po-'nted, as for whistling.
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
DOUBLE VOWELS.
Characters.
%a
aa
like
d
ee
ec
<(
Co
00
((
Sound.
like long a (a in farm).
" e (a " care),
" (never like Eng. oo),
DIPHTHONGS.
Cliarac»era.
Sound.
m
ai
■
m
ei
f like / in f/re.
^it
au
like ot/ in hour.
$(u ($(eu) m
@u eu
ie
like oy in j^j.
like /> in f/t'ld (not found at the beginning of
words) ; in the unaccented sylls. of foreign
words, i and e are pronounced separately.
CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS.
Characters.
^
in
Sound.
after a, o, u, o\x, like ch in Scotch \och ;
softer after d, e, i, 5, u, ciu, eu ; it does
not occur at the beginning, except in for-
eign words, where it is pronounced like k
before a, o, u, and like final d; before e, i.
In French words it has the sound of sh,
as in French ; d;^ when in one syll. =^ x.
THE GERMAN ALPHAJET.
Characters.
m
Sit)
\P
ff6
«
Sound.
like Eng. ck ; when divided between two
lines, is written !-!; not found at begin-
ning.
pronounce both p and f distinctly.
as in Eng. ; in foreign words only.
like s/i in Eng.; but when the § is in a
distinct sylL, pron. separately.
like soft i-///> in Eng, at the beginning ; other-
wise like s/>.
like soft s/it in Eng. at the beginnin
wise like sf.
g; other-
like ss; ^ replaces ff after long vowels in the
middle of a word, and always when final.
Hence gu^ (long u), gen. gugeS ; but glu^
(short u), gen. gluffe§; and beigen, h'xff, ne»
biffen. Diphthongs are always followed by
i. Not found at the beginning.
like ts. It stands for gj. Not found at the
beginning.
EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION.
EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION.
Simple Vowels.
« long : gor, bat, fnm ; short : fait, 3J?onn, ^amm.
^ long : ^cr, ben, bcm ; short : ^crr, bfnn, 33ctt.
In formative sylls. foil, by a consonant shorter still'
genftcr, ^aben, (gfcl.
In final syll. not foil, by a consonant, like a in Louis^^ •
@nbc, .t^abc, ©abc. Also in prefixes, as in the first syll'
of GC^angen, cjcfaffen, @cban!en, Ufalkn, 6cbenfen.
3 long : rnir, btr, mim ; short : ftilT, mit, bitten.
O long- ^on, loben, ^olen; short: ^onne, fommen, fall,
tt long : .^ttt, bu, ^lutcg ; short : SJlutter, bumm, unter.
?) long : ^^mmx% $or^> ; short : Ti^xU, ©^fte'rn.
Double Vowels (all long).
«o : §oor, 3lttl, ©toat. | @e : ^Icc, leer, 93eet.
Oo : SBoot, 3Koo§, 2oo§.
MoDiFTED Vowels (Umlauts).
n long : S3ttr, fame, ^riigen : short : ^atk^ ^amme, fofft.
O long : 01, sriine, ©triime ; short: fiinnte, ©otter, iiffnen.
ii long: m^, fitr, ftbel; short: .m^, fiiffen, miiffen.
ElPHTHONGS (all LONG).
m : mai, §oin, main.
Hi : mctn, ^citer, biciben.
^i: §ttttt, 5lue, bittu,
Sn : §attte, 53aume, riiulen.
®u : l^cute, ncu, iCeute.
it : bie. ^ler, ticf (in somr
foreign words, pron
i-e: gamilie, ©todnicn
Sinle).
examples of pronunciation. 7
Simple Consonants.
b final (=-/). flj,, (SJraB, 06.
c soft {=^ fs) gcifar, €eremonie, Gitcero,
n ftnai (= f) . . gfiai,^ c^oii, Sicb.
r (= ^ in ^ve) ..... geben, beginnen, ^ageg.
^](='^) ^ag, bog, cjiitig, gjlagb.
L (-= 0/^ in French words^ . @ente, ©age, ^age.
f^o^e, So^e, ^ra^e, fii^ren,
^ "^"te •] fa^, Sa§n, 2:^ure, 2;4aler,
( 9tat(i), gjiut(§).
; j (= -'^) jeber, jemanb, ^atoh,
I (= ^/^ in French words) . . 3aloufie, 3ournaI.
t |^*^i>^/ wurren, ^aar, ©tern,
' * * * 1 @rbe, $rebiger.
f i'*itial and medial (= s in
^^^^•^y) (Sonne, biefer, (Sattel, ^aufer.
S fnal (= s in ye^) .... ^auS^ bie0, eg, gafter, legbar.
< m foreign words before i
(= ' national, patient.
jj j in Germ, words (=/) . . tion, $ater, abetter.
( in foreign words(== v) . . SRodember, bitiibieren, STbtiofat.
m j (= Eng. v) menu, mer, too, mie.
( (after fd; and 3 = Eng. w) . ©c^tnefter, fc^ltier, gttiei, 3ttiec!.
X initial (= ^s) leeryeg, a^enop^on.
i (=^^) Sivrbe, ju, jiran^ig, gorn.
^ Remark. — In the above list, only those consonants are
given, which differ in pronunciation from their equivalents
in English. Below are given also certain consonantal com-
binations, most of which do not occur in English.
8
••i-^
♦f
GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION
Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs.
initial (= ^) a^aracter, a^or, a^rifu
" (=(^ guttural) . . aftiru'rg, a§emie'.
medial and final (guttural) \ ^^S^' "^^^^^^ ¥^, Su^ 33Icr^
in French words (-= .-//) . (?,§arlatan, Chicane.
(in same syll. = :r) . . 2)a(^8, D(^§, ^arjg, ^It^fe.
^fcrb, g>fennio, ^ii^ifen.
'^rjaf, Sconce, (»tjiff; but
\^ir=sh) ..
pron. g separately when
it belongs to a different
syll., as; i)du^3=rf)en, ©am5*
fl initial (= sht softened) . . Stanb, >le^en, Stengel, ^i\xU.
f|i initial (= shp softened) . . f^iurcn, (g^riic^e, (S^orn.
jl (preceding vowel short) . . inilffen, fiiffen, laffen, gJZcffe.
r medial (preceding vowel long) grower, fto^en, fvagen.
^ I final (preceding vowel long) g}ia§, gro§, ^-u J (gen. ^ugeS).
final (preceding vowel short) \ ^^^ fe^"' «^^-ff^^)' ^^^^ fe^^-
^ ^ 9^offe^^).gIu§(gen.gluffe^,).
A. GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION.
1. The acquisition of a correct and pure pronunciation of
the vowels is the most important point to be attended to;
especially that of the vowel % which must never have a shade
of the sound of the Eng. a in hat, ha\\ or cr/ne. Look after
your Towels, and the consonants will look after themselves.
2. The most difficult vowel-sounds are the Umlauts, of
modified V07i>els. esoeciallv H nnH "t Ax/hi^h rY^,^^*^ u« i j
from the teacher.
QUANTITY OF VOWELS.
5. The only difficult consonant-sounds are:
r, with strong guttural roll.
f, initial, and medial before vowels, which is like s in
daijy, or e in ^^one.
§ final « ss in English.
l5(and g final), which must be learned from the
teacher.
4. The pronunciation of the following consonants, though
j^)t difficult, differs from the English pronunciation :
h final =/.
C before d, e, i — /j.
b final = A
Q never like g in gesture.
g final see above.
i = jv in >'et.
ti «/in Germ, words.
to= V, except after fc^ and 3.
8 *-^J.
$. There are no silent letters in German, except ^ before
consonants, after t (see below), and between vowels ; thus c
is never silent. Hence (Snb-c, @ab-c are dissylls.; and a, t
in @nabc, ^na6e must be heard.
B. QUANTITY OF VOWELS.
Long: Double vowels and diphthongs are always long.
Simple vowels are long before a single consonant; before a
consonant preceded by ^ ; when not followed by a consonant;
also before and after tj.
Exceptions : Articles, pronouns, prepositions, and other unaccented
monosylfs., also unaccented prefixes, and inflexional sylls. in c and t, have
the vowel short before a single consonant.
Short : Vowels followed by a double consonant (but see
note 2 below), or by more than one consonant, vowels of un-
accented woids and prefixes, and of formative and terminal
sylls., are short ; also most vowels before (t), and all vowels
before jc§.
lO
ACCKNTUATION.
KxcKiTioNiiJ Long v.twtiU lii'foio several ronsonantm ?tb(pr, eagle,
rrfl, 'Inst*; ('•^I'luiil, *l)iill»*5 S}nh, •IumiIIi'; .V.Vibi', Micnl'; ,Vil)'lni,
'touKh'; SdoiU'Y, •(•(Mivciit •; .UioliC, Sr.ih'j ^.l)^1n^, 'maid'; iUfoilb,
•moon"; \U'bH, *hvsU\vH'; Clift, 'fruit'; Off, 'cast'j Oftnil, MCasUr';
'ImU'I'I, 'popo'; fiiXh, 'hoisc'; ^^moIMI, 'prchoiulary'; i2'i1)ii|ln', 'hIioo-
malviM •; ^'>il)Uint, 'swiml'; f|i'lv\ • routinually 'j loM, 'dead' (now
Hprlt toi); Jrolt, 'iunH..Iati.<ii'; '4>ont, 'goveiiK.i'; ^Jl^iiflr, 'desi-rl'; uIho
^ti\M, 'litwn,' wl>ii h has (In- vowfl Hhoit in tlic Hlng., lonp.tluns it in Iho
phn. ^;?fiiMo. I.onj; vowels litiou- H) : flmlini, 'to curso'; l)od), • lii^-.h '
(but sjjoit in .^odl^dt, wcddinj-); *2d)inai1), 'dl.s}>,raco'; ^pnii1)r, 'speech.*
Nori'S. I. Long radiral vowels remain long even before tw»)orjnore
cons.»nants; thus: lolnu, (^||) luh-ft, (cj) loM, iH'-loO t, all vvilli long
vowel, aceonling lo the (piantity of the stetu.
\ lU'fore ff all vowels are short; before § medial, long; before ^
linal, II, 0, II asc sonu-titnes lomv, sonietintes short ; c ami i always short
3. The vowel il is always lonj; beloic v.
KXKKCISK IN QUANITIY OK VoWKLS.
(Accent on fii-st ayU, «)f dlssylls.)
.'i>anvf, 'Jlvt, offru, lobni, lobt, ^nxt, mcc, ^^Mrr, tl)nn, bitnuii, aifoo^
iVclui, Cfni, i^fo^, obo, i-ftev, ndt, juiht, roiiii, Uh\ .Ual)u, ^Miitti-r, iil)iilid),
Vifbf, ilbnv bilmi, i^ilno, Vooct, ^alUl, I^dnc, 01)r, nomoi-brii, Ul)r, ikm,
unlliiYub, niflu-. bn-, bav\ t^, bniii, Afrru. fli'i'm'- mnntnv ^U\t)t, ^imc,
<?tatt. etaat, jyott, t^cct, milffnt, ^Mlf5i, Jvlilffc, I)lm'n, l)cl)r, l)cr, !i^m,
C. ACCENTUATION.
The principal accent is on tlie raJical syll. in simple Germ.
wonis. whothor primitive or derived.
Kxei rrioNs: i. Substantives in -ci have the principal accent on the
tcrnjination.
.\ The followii\g adjectives are .iccentcd on the last syll. but one:
lebcnbi^i, und)il)aftii\, baljainifd}, Intbn-iuli; also verbs in icrrn.
3. Most foreign substantives which have undergone a change of form
are accented on the last syll., unless they end in f, fl, er, Or, when
they are generally .iccentcd on the last syll. but one. Those in -if are
accented on the last syll., except those which, like <V'nnili-t', Jvaillibt-e
«\'>U!0^i-<', i?iiii-c, are directly from the Latin, the t-c being pron. sep/
i»telv.
w
OKTIIOGKAPHY.
il
N"oTr,.s.--i. With ihcHc few exceptions, formative »yll8. are always
IIIKK < Clltcd.
::. Ill toiiiiM. 1111(1 substantives, adjc^ctivcs and verbs, the first component
generally has tlio principal accent; in otiur coni|)omi(I.s (prepositions, ad-
vcrhial conjunctioiiM, c!( .), generally tlu; last component.
3. The following i)rerixea arc never accented: ht-, Ct-, tmp", flit-,
0c > ucr , a"-'
ExKRcrsKs m Acckntuation.
1. Simple words: 9^•lull1Ullll, li()i(ii1)f,'it, (Sfcf, ^inftmilS, flflttfl, fpar-
fain, espiniamfnt, A^'iiiiat, ^Wrlrijtimi, rciiilid), 9i\nnliri)reit, Tuflcnb, tuacnb-
2. Compound words: 9tuv<!iaitn, nufftoI)cn, Vdiflnibrut fut(io{)cu, 3Iuf-
futl)alt, iiiifbcl)altoii, ^^M-rMnift, (MrfrUo, (Sifcn()animfr, nifrfiuiirbifl, l).>rnii«,
l)iiiriiisirl)ni, ed)U)nr.^U)n(b, bal)cr, anfdiinUfl), «rttc(flab, Tloutan, Tlitkib
nin<ni'i-|aiinni. '
3. Foreign: ®(iibiMit, ^;?rofcffor, <|[5rofpffovpii, Wrtobir, J^amttle, ^nftrit.
mnit, VKtar, .^farbiiuil, 9(\ition, national, Uuiucvfitdt, Solbnt, marfcl)lercn,
rdlnl»{?, ajZonnmcnt, nionumontal.
one:
D. ORTHOGRAPHY.
Use of Capitals. Tlic following words are written with
capital letters:
1. W^ords beginning a paragraph or sentence (after a
period), and the first word of each line in poetry.
2. All substantives and words used as such, as : ber 2Bei[e,
'the wise man ' ; biv5 etovbcn, 'dying,' etc.
NoTK. Substantives used as adverbs are not written with capitals,
as: inoriicMU^, abcnb<<.
3. The personal pronoun and possessive adjective of the
third plur. when used in address.
Note. — The pronouns of the second person (sing, and plur.) are often
written with a caj^tal, and must be so in writing to persons.
4. Ordinal numeral.} and pronouns in titles, as: J^riebrid^
bci- (>hujic, 'Frederick tlie Grea iiarl ber gunfte, 'Charles
13
ADDITIONAL REMARKS.
the Fifth'; ^^re ^majeftat, 'Her Majesty »; ©einc 35urc6.
laud)t, ' His Serene Highness.'
5. Adjectives from names of persons, as : bic ©oetbcfAen
©ebtd^te, 'Goethe's poems.'
Notes. -I. Adjectives, with the above exceptions, are never written
with capitals, as: Ijmifjiid), 'Prussian '; eiiglifd), ' English.'
2. The numeral cin, «one,» is sometimes spelt with a capital, to
distmguish It from the indef. art. ein, ' a,' 'an.'
E. RECENT CHANGES IN ORTHOGRAPHY.
These changes relate chiefly to the rejection of lengthening
1^ after i, which takes place :
1. in derivative sylls. : ^onigfum, Ungefiim, etc.
2. after t medial and final : mm, dtai, rot, h)ert, etc.
3. before diphthongs : ^^ier, teuer, 2eil, etc.
4. before short vowels : 2urm, etc.
Note. — In the majority of text-books, the pupil will still meet with
the old orthography; but in the High .School German Reader, and in
the present senior author's editions of texts, the 1| is invariably rejected
F. ADDITIONAL REMARKS.
1. The use of Italics being unknown in German print, an
emphasized word is printed with larger spaces between the
letters, as : id; f)aU nur e i n e n ©o^n, ' I have but one son.'
2. The double vowels never take Umlaut; hence: 93iiiit
plur. mu.
^^ 3. The modified vowels as capitals art 2lways written %
0, U, not (as formerly) «c, Oe, Uc.
I
THE GERMAN SCRIPT.
a
/f^^
^>^
^j'
-^/^
^
^^
^./
^/.
^.
^<^
yM^
w~-
M
THE GERMAN SCRIPT.
//
UMLAUTS.
//
^vi ^: '
//
/^^
/J
y-^/^
DOUJLE VOWELS.
yo-ry
DIPHTHONGS.
a'^
y^^y/^
<^ /^^ ^^//^
CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS.
THE GERMAN SCRIPT.
Observe carefully the Difference between*
CAPITALS.
»5
^
(.nd ♦* .
and
SMALL LETTERS.
y y. and yy y, and -toy ^ and -«
*j^ rtiiu -rp ' -^a. ana -jt,
SPECIMEN OF GERMAN SCRIPT.*
1. C£:-^ ^Z^ J:L.f^yLj^ ^-^JZ'^J
t^L^^^^j^^ ^y^^/ ,i^*^ izf**^^^ -t*.-^^ -^^ j^^y
-»-*»-r«. i»t
•*--»->l». / / C -f'^'^'iCft-M^ *iC-«.
^
y*.
■»-»-*-^ -^wi^-*
"*-*■ J •*■»-
■^-rt-ffi. y*.-,^ y^-g^ty -i^.-Ki-tJ^y^ . 7. c/»^
* These sentences, with the exception of the last two, are idei
with those of Ex. IV , -.4.
cuiica.
i6
THE GERMAN SCRIPT.
/
"^ ■«^^»-«-«i.-».«. ^■tt.-t^-M-^t-n-
iv' y^-iii».»j
^
r*>^'--e«-
^ 9-
V^— - -42^ ^w- :^«- -^-^
-rm-^^-r^ -^a-«A--*-*. 't^-^m-
o/
i^-»>«- ■*-*-*^-*- ^» »- O t-- *.
.-t^
^^»-»-*- ^t^-*-^
t^^,.-^A^J:'/S( lo. ^-^
-*--^«- 'jc-«>'M»-»-«-i
— *3r,.^c^*** X^^ ^/ •»►**♦■».**
<j/
-c*.-*.**.*.*.
Remarks. — i. Observe the angularity of the small letters.
2. Observe the manner in which the letters are joined to
each other.
3- The strokes connecting the different letters should be
made longer than those connecting the different parts of the
same letter. This is particularly necessary where severa)
^^^-'s ox ^///>'^ follow each other.
4. Never omit the hook over/^;/^ , which alone distin-
guishes it from ^//^.
5. The most difficult letters to make neatly are
^^
^
J:
y ^ ^^ y^A^
GERMAN GRAMMAR.
PART FIRST.
1.
LESSON I.
Present Indicative of JoBeit, to have.
Sing, id) ()abc, I have
bu ^aft thcu hast
er ^at he has
fie Ijat, she has
eg \)ai, it has
Piur. trir ^r.bcn, we have
,4' ^ahi, ye have
(te ^abcii, they have
^abe id^, have I ?
ifjaft bu, '-ist thou
IjoX er, has he
'bfxi fie, has she
l^at e§, has it
^aben it)ir, have we
l^abt i^r, have ye
§aben fie, have they
2. Rule i. The verb agrees with its subject in number
and^person, as : ic^ ^abc, I have ; er i^^^i, he has ; fie ^abcil, they
2. Words used in a partitive se.tse, i. e., indicating only a
part^ not the whole, of anything, have no article before them
m German, and the English some or any remains untrans-
lated, as :
Has he {any) bread ? I have {some) gold.
bread, ^rpt-*
meat, <}teifc^-^
gold, @oib 'M
flour, ml^i -M
milk, mW^
Vocabulary
silver, Silber-jirf
water, SBaffertf*
wine, 2Bein^
and, unb
or, ober
X4
also, aud^
what, toag?
but, aber
yes, \a
not, nidpt
f
17
i8
LESSON II.
5?3
I
EXERCISE I.
A. 1. <pat er S[kot? 2. l^a, cr ijat ^vot, aber n)ir Ijaben
^leifc^. 3. .^abeu fie mild) ? 4. ^JJcin, aber fie l;abcu ^Jiel^l.
5. ^at fie ©olbV 6. eie l;at (.M'D imb fie l;at aud; eilber.
7. (Sr l)at 2Baffcr, abcr \d) Ijaht 2Bcin.
i9. 1. Have we any bread? 2. No, but she has some
bread. 3. Have they any gold or silver? 4. They have
some silver. 5. Has he water and wine ? 6. He has only
wine , he has not water. 7. I have milk and flour, but I have
not meat.
ORAL EXERCISE L
(The pupils will supply the answer to each question, with books closed.)
] . Was hat er ? 2. Was haben wir ? 3. Was haben sie ?
4. Was hat sie ?
LESSONII.
USE OF CASES. - DEFINITE ARTICLE.
3. Use of the Cases. — Every declinable word in
German has two numbers, the Singular and the Plural^
and in each number four cases, viz. : Nominative, Genitive,
Dative, and Accusative.
The No?7iinative is the same as the English Nominative, or
Subjective, and answers the question who'i or whafi as:
Who (or what) is there ? The boy (the book).
The Genitive corresponds to the English Possessive, or
Objective with of^ and answers to the question whose? of
whom ? or of 7vhat ? as : Whose book ? The boy's book, the
book of the boy.
The Z?<?//7r corresponds to the Indirect Object in English,
and answers the question to whom ? as : To whom does he
give the book ? He gives you (dat.) the book, he gives the
boy (dat.) the book, he gives it to the boy (dat.).
5]
DEFINITE ARTICLE.
^9
The Accusative corresponds to tiie Direct Object in Eng
lish. and answers the question luhom ? or 7c>/iai ? as; W/ion
{w/iat) do you see? I see the man (the house).
4. Declension of the Definite Article.
MASC.
Nom. ber
Gen. bc§
Dat. bcni
Ace. ben
Singular.
FEM.
bie
ber
ber
bie
NEUTER.
bag
beg
bem
bag
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
bie, the
ber, of the
ben, (to, for) the
bie, the
5. Rule i. The Definite Article, like every determinative
word, agrees with its substantive in Gender, Number, and
Case, as: bcr mmn, 'the man' (masc); bie grau '*the
woman ' (fem.) ; bag 5^inb, ' the child ' (neuter).
2. Articles and other determinative words should be re-
peated before each substantive in the singular, as : 3)er
l^fann unb bie ^rau ; ber Se^rer unb ber ©c^uler.
Vocabulary.*
(N. B. Always learn the definite article with each German substantive.)
dog, bcr |)unb'.x
boy, ber ^nabet
teacher, ber Sef)reri</
teachers, bic Scf)rer
scholar, pupil, bcr fdiuler C
scholars, pupils, bie ©c^uler
stick, ber Stoc!!
mother, bie gjhitterl
pen, feather, bie g^eber WK
flower, bie S3Iume W/k
horse, bn0 $f^rbil
book, bag ^u^ Tir
girl, bag 3}Jabc^enx
girls, bie ^Rabc^en
knife, bag 9J?e[fer r
knives, bie 3Jieffer
who, luer ?
only, nur
* The article is omitted in the English portions of all Vocabularies
bemg mcleclinaljle.
20
LESSON III.
[§§6
EXERCISE II.
A. 1. ^at ficba^iiUic^ obcr bie ^cbcr? 2. 2Bir l^aben ba«
93uc^, nber fie l;at bic gcber. 3. 3)cv ^ei;rcr ^at bic ^iJJefjer ber
©Aiilcr. 4. ^em Scorer bev 5J;dbd;en. 5. 3)ie ©c^ulcr f^aben
ben A>unb, abcr fie I^aben nid^t bag ^ferb. 6. ^c^ f,abc ben
©todf, bag iyu4> unb bie ^eber ; aUx ber ^mU \}ai nur bag 33uc^
unb bie geber.
^. 1. Have we not the book of the mother? 2. We have
the book of the mother. .'J. Have the pupils the dog and the
horse, or have they only the horse ? 4. They have the horse,
but they have not the dog. 5. Has the mother of the girls
the flower ? C^. She has not the flower, but she has the book
of the girls, and they have the pen. 7. To the mother and
to the teacher.
ORAL EXERCISE II.
1. Was hat der Hund.? 2. Wer hat den Hund? 8. Wer
hat Schuler ? 4. Was haben die Lehrer ? 5. Was hit das
Madchen ? 6. Hat er den Stock ?
LESSON III.
liefer MODEL. -IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF ^okn, to have-
6. Declension of bicfcr, this, that. •
Singular. Plural.
FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
biefc biefcg, this biefc, these
bicfcr biefc0, of this bie»cr, of these
biefcr bie[cm,(to,for)this biefcn, (to, for) these
biefc biefeg, this biefe, these
In the same way decline jener, that; ieber, every •
jvtiu;vi^ wiiicn r
MASC.
Nom. biefcr
Gen. bicfcS
Hat. biefcin
Ace. biefcn
[§§6
7]
IMPERFECT OF fjabcn.
21
I
Remark. — The accusative of declinable words differs
in form from the nominative in the masculine singtdar only.
7. Imperfect Indicative of ^abcn, to have.
^ing. ic^ ^atte, I had
bu l^attcfl, thou hadst
er ^attc, he had
fie ^attc, she had
e§ ^atte, it had
Plur. n)ir flatten, we had
i^r ^attct, ye had
fie fatten, they had
Vocabulary
brother, bct ^ruber I
garden, ber ©arten I
gardens, bic ©iirten
bone, ber ^nod^en X
bones, bie ^nod^en
reader, ber Sefer X
readers, bie Sefet_
man, ber 5Kann i^
son, ber ®d{)n n
father, ber ^ater Z
EXERCISE III.
A. 1. ^d; ^atte biefe ^eitung. 2. liefer ^unb ^atte .^nocfien.
3. 2)iefer Sefjrer \^^i bier ©c^iilcr, aber jener 2e{)rer \:)Q^i nur
brei. 4. ^er 33ruber biefer ^rau \:j^iit jene^ §Qug, unb er fjatte
auc^ jene ®drten. 5. ^ebeg ^ud) f)at Sefer. 6. SSelc^eg 33ud;
fatten biefe ^cibc^en 'c* 7. 2)er ©c^mefter unb bem Smber.
B. 1. Which newspaper had the father of these girls?
2. The dog had these bones, but he had not this stick. 8.
W ich stick has this man? 4. Which man has this stick?
5 This father had three daughters, but that woman had only
l^atte i(^, had I ?
^attcft bu, hadst thou
{;atte er, had he
^atte fie, had she
\)<xiiz eg, had it
\l<^\X^XK iuir, had wfe
\)^Vi^i \\jX, had ye
\l^iitXK fie, had they
woman, bic ?^rau ^^'^^^
sister, bie ©c^'ioefter . >
daughter, bie ^pc^ter
daughters, bie 3:od;ter
newspaper, bie 3^itu«0 ^ '
house, ba0 ,^paug fe-
two, jttjei
three, brei
four, bier
22
LESSON IV.
[§§8^
two. 6. The son of that woman had this dog and horse 7 We
had the book of those pupils. 8. To the brother of those girls.
ORAL EXERCISE III.
1. Welches Madchenhatte die Zeitung? 2. Welches Buch
hatten die Madchen ? 3. Wer hatte das Buch dieser Schiiler ?
4. Welche Feder hatte dieser Knabe.? 5. Welchen Hund
hatte jener Mann .? 6. Was hat dieser Lehrer ?
LESSON IV.
Mtin MODEL-INDEFINITE ARTICLE.-PRESENT AND
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF fcui, to be.
8. Declension of mcin, my.
Sifii^Hlar.
MASC.
Norn, mein
Gen. meincg
Dat. meincm
Ace. mein en
FEM.
meinc
metncr
meincr
mctnc
NEUTER.
mein
meincg
meincm
mein
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
meinc, my
meincr, of my
meincn,(to,for)niy
meinc, my
9. The following words are declined like mein- fein 'no'-
[etn, ' his, its ' ; i^r, ' her, its, their ' ; unfcr, ' our.'
The indefinite article ein, eine, etn is also declined in the
same way, but has no plural, thus :
MASC. FKM,
Nom. cin eine
Gen. eine§ einer
Dat. einem einer
Ace. ein en eine
Remark. -This model differs from the bicfcr model only
in having no distinctive ending in the nom. ^ino- „i..sc and
neuter, or in the ncc. neuter. Thus, while we say biefcr
NEUTER.
ein
eineg
einem
ein
a
t(
w
'1
[§§8^
13]
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF fcm.
23
5}?ann, but biefcg 33uc^, we say em (!ein, mein, etc.) mann
■ and also cin (fein, etc.) 33uc^. '
(O. Present and Imperfect iNDrcATivE of fcjn, to be.
^^^^^^^^' Imperfect.
Sing, icf) bin, I am ^ ju^j^ i ^^g
bu bi[t, thou art bu tt)ar[t, thou wast
cr ift, he is g^ jy^^j^ h^ ^,^3
fie ift, she is fie tt,av, she was
^^ i^ ^t is e§ iDor, it was
^/2^r. h)ir [inb, we are ^jir hjaren, we were
i^r fetb, ye are i^r iraret, ye were
fie finb, they are fie n)aren, they were
6in id^, am I ? etc. tt)ar id^, was I ? etc.
11. Time before Place. Rule. — In German sen-
tences, expressions of time always precede those oi place, as.:
This man was here to-day.
2)iefer Wimw umr ^cutc ^ier.
12. Place of the Negative nij^t. Rule. — The nega-
tive nit^t precedes that member of the sentence which it
negatives. Hence :
@r mar geftern nirjt ^ier, he was not here yesterday.
13. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule. — Pronouns
agree in gender, number and person with the substantive
to which they refer, as :
2)cr ^ut (masc.) ift nicbt gro^, cr i[t flein,
the hat is not large, // is small; but
bic ^eitung (fern.) ift nicbt grofe, fie ift flein,
the newspaper is not large, // is small.
The English pronoun it must therefore be rendered by er
when it refers to a masc. substantive, by fie when it refers to
^ fern., and by eg when it refers to a neuter.
«
24
LKSSON IV.
(§§ 14-
14. OnsERVK: In the sentence * the boy is good,' ^<:;£;^/ is
a predicative adjective.
Rule. — J^rcdicative Adjectives are not declined.
15. A substantive following the verb to be is of course
subject, not object, and nuist therefore be put in the nominative^
and not in the accusative, as : (Sv i[t chl (not eincil) 3Jiann, he
is a man.
VoCAI?ULARV.
friend, bcr <^rcunb '
gentleman, bcr .^crr \\\
bird, bcr 'inn^cl
carriage, ) . ,,,,
wagon, > •
carriages, bic iBa^cn
city, bic (Stabt
garment, )
weather, ba^ '^Better j
old, alt
pretty, ^iibfd^
cold, fait
small, little, flcin
tired, iniibc
beautiful, fine, fd;5n
strong, ftav!
idle, trnc^c
warm, Juarm
windy, luinbig
very, very much, fel^r
yesterday, j^c'ftcrn
pleasant, agreeable, anqcncbm to-dav, bciitc
great, large, big, tall, jjrofj still, yet, nod^ (referring to time)
for, bcim
EXERCISE IV.
A. 1. (5in5^atcrunb fcin,slinbimbicl3t flier. 3. @ine fitter
imb ihr Atinb timrcn j^-ftcvn bier. 3. ^3JJciu ^Ikiibcr bat fcin '^wd},
aber er bat ctn Dh-ffcr. 4. Uufcr ^-rciinb Umr bcr :ee^rcr biefcr
edndcr. 5. T^icfc ^^nau ift mcinc Sdnucftcr, unb fie ift auc^ bie
3Jiuttcr biefcr ai?abd>cn. (>. ^^Bir finb flcin, aber fie finb nvofe.
7. Unfcr <li\mx ift miibc, bcnn [cine Sdnilcr Unircu fcbr triige. 8.
llnfcrc .^tabt ift fcbr fduMt, abcr fie ift nid;t fcbr grofi. 9. sicinctn
^atcr unb nteiner 'i)tuttcr.
IS
G
D
A
sii
«7]
DECLENSION : — makx MODEL.
25
^. 1. I am the sister of those girls. 2. Where are my
books and newspaper > ■]. Our brother and his dog are big
and strong, but our sister and h(ir bird are small and pretty.
4. Which gentleman was here ye« terday .? .5. The friend of
our brothers was here to-day, but he was not here yesterday.
«. My sister had her book, but she had not her pen. 7. Our
father and mother have still their carriage, but they have
no horse. H. The weather was cold and windy, but it is
now warm and pleasant. 9. To my brother and sister.
ORA^ EXERCISE IV.
1. Wo ist unsere Mutter.? 2. Wann war sie hier? 3. Wer
war gestern hier.? 4. Was ist sein Vater.? 5. Wer ist die
Mutter dieser Schuler .? 6. Wer sind diese Madchen ?
LESSON V.
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES r-lWtttcr MODEL,
OR -I, -m, -It, -r STEMS.
16. Declension of bcr aWolcr, the painter.
Singular.
Norn, ber 9J?aIer, the painter
Gen. beg 3)ialcr8, the painter's,
of the painter
Dat. bem 5D^ater, (to, for) the
painter
Ace. ben DJJaler, the pointer
Plural.
bie 3JiaIer, the painters
ber 3KaIer, the painters',
of the painters
ben SJlalem, (to, for) the
painters
bie aji'aler, the painters
Observe : The only changes are additional -% in the gen.
sing., and -n in the dat. pi.
1 7. In the same way are declined ;
26
LESSON V.
[§§17
-J- I. Masc. and neuter substantives ending in -el, -cm, -HI,
-^ -cr, and diminutives in -r^eit and -lein (these last being
always neuter).
2. Neuters beginning with @e- and ending in -c, as : 't li
©cmdlbe, the painting.
3. Two feminines : bie iUiutter, the mother, and bie ^od^ter,
the daughter.
4. 2)er ^afe, the cheese.
(a) But many masculines with 0, 0, It in the root, the two
feminines Gutter and Xodjt^v, and' one neuter, bag 5llofter,
'the convent,' take also Umlaut (modified vowel) in the
plural, as : —
Sing. N, D.A. 33ruber, g. 33ruberg; /"/ur. n. g.a. 33rubcr,
D. Sriibcrn.
(d) Substantives in -n do not add n in the dat. plur., as :
Sm£^. N. D. A. mat)6)tn, o. SOJabd^eng; P/ur. n. o. d.a.
3Jidbc^en.
(c) In feminine substantives all cases are alike in the sing.
Hence, MutUx and 2:oc^ter are thus declined :
Srng. N.G.D.A. 9)?utter; J'/ur. n. g.a. mntUx, d. 5D^uttcni.
Sing. N.G.D.A. Xo^Ux; Plur. n.g. a. Siic^ter, d. ^od^tern.
Further examples :
2)er 35ogeI, the bird : Sing. n. d. a. 3Sogel, g. SSogelS ; Plur.
N. g. a. SSiigel, d. SSogcIn.
^er SBagen, the carriage : Sing. n. d. a. 213agen, g. SSogcnS;
/'/«r. N. G. D. A. 2Bagen.
®ag genfter, the window : Sing. n. d. a. genfter, g. genfterg;
Plur. N. G. a. genfter, d. genftern.
T)a§ ©emdibe, the painting: Sing. n. d.a. ©emolbe, o.
©emdibeg ; P/z^r. n. g. a. ©emdlbe, d. ©emdlben.
I«J
DECLENSION : — gjJaler model.
2^
Decline with Umlaut: ber Satcr, the father; ber ©Atoaaer
the b.other-in-law; ber ^i^fcl, the apple; b r ©artt he
garden ; ber 3JZanteI, the cloak. '
^.^nV^^'u """"P''*" "'' °^ Substantives of this declension that
.^ake Umlaut m the plur., see App. A. *
Decline without Umlaut: ber Se^rer, the teacher; ber
ierD^i^h? ^'^ '—'^ ''' ^^"^^^' ^^- winter;
bem @arten, contr. im ©arten ; in brm SBaffer, contr. im Saffcr. '
t.n*.f .1.^'''^^ ?' ^^^^^^^^^^o^- - " the verb is in a simple
tense, the predicate adjective comes at the end.
tree, ber S^aum ^
fire, bag ^euer 1
spring, ber gru^lingTI
autumn, bg'ijerbft ^/
stove, ber Dfen '
diligent, industrious, flei^ig
poor, arm
hot, hd^
ill, franf
rich, reic^
Vocabulary.
ripe, reif
weak, [c^hjad^
satisfied, ) . . ^
contented, I ^"f'^^^^"
quickly, fd^nett
not at all, gar nic^t
not yet, noc^ nid^t
with, mit (gov. dat.)
in, in (gov. dat.>J ^^-
whose, h?effen?
EXERCISE V.
..t' \ !^''^^^'' ^''^'^ ^^^c^en h^aren mube. 2. @g it,ar
malbe biefeg a«alerg finb gar nic^t fc&on. 4. Un^er. mr,.. fi^.
toar arm. 6. aWit ben gliigeln biefer ^ogel. 7. 3)ie ec^uler
28
LESSON VI.
[§§I9
bicfc« Mjxixi iuarcn !ranf. 8. Die "9JJantcl mciner 2'66)tcx finb
alt. 9. X)ic Wartcn in bicfcv Stabt finb [cl;r fd;on.
7^ 1. The father of tliis girl was my teacher. 2. Our
father and mother are old and weak. :}. The gardens of my
brother-in-law are very beautiful, but his carriages are not at
all beautiful. 4. My uncle is not at all satisfied with his
daughters. 5. These apples are not yet ripe. (i. The
teacher of these pupils was not very rich. 7. With the wings
of this bird. 8. The weather is liot in the summer, but it is
cold in the winter. 9. The eagle is a bird.
ORAL EXERCISE V.
1. Wann ist das Wetter kalt.? 2. Mit welchen Schtilern
sind die Lehrer xufrieden ? 8. In wessen Haus sind die
Brlider dieses Madchens .? 4. Wo waren sie im Herbst > 5.
Sind diese Miidchen trage oder Heiszig ? 6. Ist die Blume
schon ?
LESSON VI.
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF iDCrbcIt, to become. - CON-
STRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES.
19. Present and Imperfect of tQCrbcn^ to become.
Present Indicative.
Sing. id5> it)erbc, I become
bu tuirft, thou bccomest
er tuivb, he becomes
Plur. \mx h)crbcil, we become
ii/V Vocvbci, ye become
pe Ujerbcn, they become
Present Siibjunctii^.
id; luerbc
bu tt)i*rbcft
er Jucrbc
to^ 'uerben
\%x ryctbct
fie tuerben
th
at
m€
a s
[§§I9
?tcr finb
2. Our
s of my
i not at
vith his
6. The
le wings
)ut it is
chtilern
ind die
)st ? 5.
\ Blume
-CON-
me.
«o] CONSTRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 29
Jmperfrct Indicative, Imperfect Subjunctive.
Sing, id; hjurbf or tuorb, I became irfi iuiirbe
bu iuuvbcpt or luarbft, thou becamcst bu luiivbcft
er luurbc or luavb, Jie became cr iuiirbe
J'/ur. tuir tuurbcn, we became unv tuiirbcn
if;r iuurbet, ye became i^^ tuiirbct
fic tDuvbeu, they became fie luiiibcn
Observe: i. the persistent c in the subjunctive endings;
2. the Umlaut in the impcrfcU subjunctive ;
^ 3. the second form (juarb, etc.) in the singula, onlv of the
imperfect indicative.
20. Construction of Principal Sentences. — Place
OF Verb and Subject.
Rule. - In principal sentences containing a statement, the
verb IS the second idea in the sentence, as :
SUHjKCr. ™„. PREDICATE. SUBJECT. VEK«. PREDICATE.
^^ ft"t ^ier. ^r ift fran!.
A am here. He is ill.
Observe: i. The verb is the second idea, not necessarily
the second word, in the sentence. Thus the subject with its
attributes and enlargements constitutes but one idea, as :
. * 2 8
SUBJECT AND ATTRIBUTE. VERB. ADVERB.
■' — — — ^
®er Skater b:v(eg Se^verg tuar ^ier.
2. The subject (or subjects) with attributes and enlarge
ments may come either in the first or in the third place as •
SUBJECT. VERB. A'DVERB. ADVERB. VERB. SUBJECT.
^^ ^^» ^H'r; or: §{er bin irj.
3. 'V\i^ predicate adjective is placed last, when the verb is in
a simple tense, as :
30
LK.SSON VI.
20
I ;mi sntislu'd with luv (liiii!.»,hlrrs.
;,\il> bill init mcincii JiWMcvn ,^ufiicticii.
Rkmauks. I. Any otluT incmlxM of llu* sml'Mno u\,\y
occupy (he liisl pl.u r, luit in ihat raso llu* siil»it'('t is thrown
«{//<•/ 1 1 U' V(m1». widrh sdll oviupics (hi' stMoiui phuc. Thus?
AnV. IMIUASK. VI Kit. SU ll lie P. I'U I'l >ICA II'..
'^m 'isvM\n\\ flub Mr (Miirtcii fobihi.
i. In l''n»;lish. on the fondary, (hr snhjrcl pioiH'dcs (ho
\ril>, which is. in snch i.ist>s, in tho ////></ phiro. as:
Ai>v. 1MIKVSK. sunncr. vkkh. ruKnicATK.
In (ho spring {\\c };aiilons arc hoan(il"nl.
^. '/'///> //.\r«//'('.v///( 7; o/f/ir verb iis iltc second idea in every
iietnum f^fitieif^ttf senfenee shou/,/ nerer he fofxoffen.
.}. Tho < o»iinnr(ions iinb, abcv, obcv, bcnii do \\o\. connt as
inonilHMS of (hr scn(onoo.
sloij;h, bcv ^^d^UKcn'jt
(liuiuior slotm. ba\^ (jK'Untlov J
adiMUivo. aiifmcirfam
jjroon. ^x\\\\
now. ncu
your .. iuiij^
inattoniivo, unaufmcvrfam
nnploasant, \
disaiiiocablc, >
unan^V'"'''^''!^
ViH'AlUM.AUV.
dissalisltod. im^ufvlobcu
af'vM-. nad» i^wiih Ua(.)
(hoioloro, on thai account,
bv\^balb
never, nic
so, fi>
why. unu'um ?
ai;ain. luicbcv
well, UHil;!
EXEROISa vt.
A. I. ')i\ui> bcm (>H'UMttcv UMubo bav^ "ilvcttcr fduMi unb toarm.
'J. C^K'ftcvn univbcn mcinc '})iiii(cv unb ibvc c^dMncftcv fvan!, abcr
•ct,u jinb fie voobl '^. <rcin '^mUcv bat 6\\ ^^-^w^ iir.b cincu
liiaitcu unb cv ^at auc^ 'ilsi^jcu unb v^c^ililtcn. 4. rav> '^n'ttct
18 «
•o]
(.ONSTHUCTION Of PRlNClI'Ar. SKNTENCES.
31
mi Wi>,. .n,b m,,u 5. Pec m,m h>itb u,. «f iX„ e„„
"r*./- ""f«'.^J'""« if -"*' i-n, «bcv fie ? J
£2"" ^ '"• ®'' """■^•" •" •^«'''b"vfl. «t« fie ,u«vc„ nie in
/••• I. The brother of these pupils I.ecame our teacher a
oaehers often hocou.e dissatisliocl with their pupils a it
the spr,„K our sar.leu i,eeomes beautiful. 4. Our brothers"
■n-Iaw were u, I'aris; they are now in L„„do„. 5. Thi tree
.eco„,es fjreen very quiekly. 6. The pupils of this tenclier
Loeame very auentive. 7. My dauj;hter are not contnted
wu,he.r cloaks a in the autun.n (the), apples heco.riS
> I .e father of these ^rls becomes old and weak. 10. Vvlth
0. feathers of an ea„e. „. We became rich, but he became
poo.. U. I he eagle .s a bird ; it is large and strong. ]•}
Ihe cloaks of those girls were new, but now they are getting
(say : become) old. ' b^^i'ng
ORAL EXERCISE VI.
iiics OnkcLs? .J. Wnnnwaren seine Briider in Hamburcr?
4. Wann werden die Apfel reif? 5. Wird der Baum Tm
boninier griin ? (>. Wann wird das Wetter kalt ?
ate ouutted m (jcrmaii, but not in English.
^ilNCttCt
32
LESSON VII.
[§§ai-
LESSON VII.
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-(Sojn MODEL-
QUESTION ORDER.
21. Declension of \ '^^^ ®"4«' *^^ ^on ;
( bcr §unb, the dog.
Plural,
bie ©ii^nc, the sons
ber ©bf^ne, the sons', of the
sonj
ben ©iil^ncn, (to, for) the sons
bie ©of)ne, the sons
{a) With Umlaut in the plural :
Singular.
Nom. ber ©of)n, the son
Gen. beg (Sol>n(c)g, the son's,
of the son
Dat. bem ©of)n(c), (to, for)
the son
Ace. ben ©o^n, the son
Observe : i. The -eg of the gen., and -c of dat. sing.
2. The Umlaut and -e of the plur.
3. The additional -n of the dat. plur.
4. The -c may be dropped in the dat. sing., and (except
after sibilants) in the gen sing., but is usually retained in
monosyllables.
{b) Without Umlaut :
Singular. Plural.
Nom. ber §unb, the dog bie §unbc, the dogs
Gen. beg $unb(c)8, the dog's, ber §unbc, the dogs', of the
of the dog dogs
Dat. bem ^unb(c), to the dog ben .^unbcit, (to, for) the dogs
Ace. ben §unb, the dog bie ^unbe, the dogs
22. In this way are declined :
I. Most masculine monosvllables : <ye.neralh> add Umlau*"
(see App. B.)
as]
CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS.
33
2 Masculines in -at, -ic$, -I9, -h,g, -(i„g: ,,,,,^^ .^jd
Umlaut.
3. Many feminine monosyllables with a, U, or au in the
root : a/ways add Umlaut (for list, see App. C.)
4. Substantives in -nU and -jnl : never add Umlaut.
5. Many neuter monosyllables (all those in -r) : ne7'er
add Umlaut, except ^-lo^, Qijox, Boot (335te or ^oote) App. E.
6. Foreign masculines, with accent on last syll., in -nl,
-an, -or: generally without Umlaut; in -aft, with Umlaut J
in -\tx, -on, -or, and foreign neuters in -at : never with Um-
laut (for exceptions, see App. D.)
Further examples :
jDie ^cnb, the hand : Sing, n. g. d. a. §anb ; Plur. n. g. a
^onbc, D. ^onbcii.
(Observe again : Feminines have all cases of the sing, alike.)
1)ag SBegrdbni^, the burial, funeral : Sing. n. a. ^egrabm?
G. 33egrdbniffe0, d. «cgrabnif(fc) ; Plur. n. g. a. Seqrabniffc'
D. 33egrdbmffcn. '
(Observe the doubling of the final -g when a termination is added.)
!Der momi, the month : Sing. n. a. momi, g. 3JJonat(c)8
D. tomtit) ; Plur. N. G. A. momtt, D. ^onatcn.
JDa§ Sa^r, the year : Sing. n. a. ^a^r, g. ,^a§i(e)8, d. ^a^r(e) ;
/'/«^-. N. G. A. ^a^rc, D. ^a^rcn.
2)er Sl^felbaum, the apple-tree: Sing. n.a. 3r)3fet6aum g
2r^fel6aum(c)g, d. 3rpfelbaum(c) ; /y/.n n.g, a. 2tDfelbttume' d.
Sl^felboumcn.
(Observe that in compounds only the last component is varied, and is
declmed as when standing alone).
23. CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS.
Examples :
I. Has the dog meat.? 2. Which man is old.?
Qat ber^unb gleifc^? SBelc^er a)Jann ift att?
34
LESSON VII.
l§23
* « 12 8
3. Who is in the garden? 5. What has the teacher ?
2Ber ift in bcm (Baxim ? %a^ ^at bcr Sel;rev ?
4. Where is my father ? 6. When was the pupil here ?
2Bo ifi meiu^^ater? ilBatm tuar ber ed;uler ^ier?
Ohskrve from these examples :
I. That the construction of Direct Interrogative Sentences
is exactly the same in German as in English, as far as the
position of Verb and Subject is concerned.
^ 2. That in both languages the question-word always begins
the sentence.
Vocabulary.
(An Asterisk (*) after a word signifies that the plural has Umlaut.)
Tuesday, '^mx^s'taQ marsh, swamp, ber ©um^f *
enemy, bcr ^einb day, bcr %aQ
finger, ber giiifler carpet, ber %cppid)
Friday, grci'tag curtain, ber ^oi'(;an9 *
foot, bcr ^u6 * week, bie 2Kod;e
general, bcr (General' room, ba§ dimmer
young man, youth, ber ^iino'lintj thirty, brei^ig
emperor, bcr ^laifer five, funf
acquirements, bie ^cnntniffe long, tang
king, ber SUn'iQ
Wednesday, ber 9)?itf luod^
Monday, ber 9Jion'tiig
officer (military) bcr Dffi^ier'
town, city, btc ©tabt *
Sunday, ber ©onn'tag
S. , i ber (Snim'nli»Mtb
aturaay, s " ~ ^ "'^
( or ©am^'tag
new, ncu
magnificent, \ixad)ixQ
red, rot
seven, fie6cn
white, lueig
where, tuo?
-» 6*
t§23
§23]
CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS.
35
:her?
ev?
here ?
er ^ier?
ntences
r as the
i becrins
ilaut.)
um^f*
EXERCISE VII.
A. 1. (Sin ^a^r \)ai jjublf ^lonatc unb in jebem 3}?onat finb
breijia 2:a3e. 2. ^ie §dnbe biefcr 3Kabd;en finb !Iein. 3. ^ie
©artcn m biefen Stcibten h)urben im griifjling fc^on. 4. 2)ic
2:a0e finb im eommer lang, aber im SBinter luerben fie furj unb
fait. 5. 2)ie 5Jlutter meineg greunbeg h)ar geftern in ber ©tabt.
6. ^ie 5lenntniffebeg Sefjrergfinb groj. 7. ^ie 3Sor^dnge bicfe^
3immerg finb \oi\% aber bie Se^^ic^e finb rot. 8. 2)ie ©c^hjager
biefer Dffijiere finb ©enerale.
B. 1. The horses and dogs of this young man are hand-
some. 2. We have two feet and two hands, and each hand
has five fingers. 3. The emperor and the king were enemies,
but now they are friends. 4. These trees are old, but they
are still beautiful. 5. The curtains and carpets in this room
are new and magnificent. 6. Every week has seven days:
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday. 7. The sons are tall, but the father is not quite
so tall. 8. The funeral of the king was magnificent. 9. My
father has two apple-trees in his garden. 10. Where are the
frogs ? In the spring they are in the marshes.
ORAL EXERCISE VII.
1. Wo waren die Briider seiner Mutter gestern ? 2. Sind
die Vorhange weisz oder rot ? 3. Was hat sein Vater im
Garten? 4. Wer war gestern in der Stadt.? 5. Wessen
Schwager sind Offiziere ? 6. Welche sind die Tage dei
Woche ?
^^
LKSSON VI 11.
I§a4
LESSON VIII.
CONJUGATION OF ^nllCII, to have. -- placE OF
PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE.
24. Paradicm ()!.• ^,lllCll, to hr r
Priucipal Parts.
Pkks. lN,.m. babfii Jm,.k. Ind.c. Inittc Pasp Part. ger;abt
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
id) babe, I hnvo
bu bafi, thou Jiast
cr bat, he lias
Unv babcii, we have
ibv babt, ye liave
fie I;abcil, tliey liave
Pkksent.
id; l;abc, I (may) have, etc.
bu f;abc(l
cr Iiabc
luiv babcn
il;v babct
fie l;abcu
ImPKRI'KCT.
id) ()aHr I had i,„ „jittc, 1 had (mighthave),
bu battcft, thou hadst bu bancft fete
ci- battc, he liad ev l;iittc
luiv battfii, we had jyiv biiitcu
tin- hatH ye had u^, 1^^^^,^
fie batten, they liad |ie inittcu
Perfect.
(Pres. of l)al)cii -f- \\ Part.)
I have had, etc. j (,,,,3.) ,,,,^^ j,^^^^ ^^^
id) babe
bu baft
cr \\\i
h)ir babcn
ibr hK\hi \
fie ^aben J
I
iK^aM
td^ babe
bu babeft
cr babe
ioir baben
ibr babct
fie \)ah^\\ ^
Sr^aM
C§a4
§34]
PARADIGM OF f)ahtn.
37
Indicative.
^iljaU
e, etc.
lave),
[etc.
Subjunctive.
Pluperfect.
(Imperf. of ()abcu + I'. Tart.)
I had had, etc. I had (mi<;ht have) had, etc.
id; \)atic
bu l;attc[t
er ijaiU
tuir I;attcn
il;r (;attct
fie Ijatkn
Hc^abt
id; bdttc
bu l;attc[t
er I;dttc
h)ir (;dttcn
\\)t I;dttct
fie l;dtten
Future.
(Pres. of tBcrUeil + Infin. of \]ah(l\.)
I shall have, etc. I shall have, etc.
id; ttjcrbc 1 id; iucvbe
bu tuirft bu tucrbcft
crtuirb U-^-,. ev Jucrbc
tmrtt>crbeu ^ ^ tvirtocrbcn
^ti^M
\l)x lucrbet
fien?erben ^
if)r tucrbct
fie luerben
Future Perfect.
(Future of {)abcn + P. Part.)
I shall have had, etc.
ic^ h)erbe
^ahtn
bu iuirft
er iDirb
tuir tuerben
if)r iuerbet
fie Juerben
I shall have had, etc.
id; hjcrbe
gc^aBt fjadcu
Simple.
(fmpf. Subj. of Juerbcu -f Infin.
of t)al)cn.)
I should have, etc.
Conditional.
bu iucrbcft
er hjcrbc
toir trerben
ibr iuerbet
fie tuerben
nc^abt i^ahtn
id; miirbc ) ^ ^
buiDiirbeft )
Ctt
Compound.
(Simple Cond. of l)ahm + Past
Part.)
I should have had, etc.
LESSON VIII.
«5-
^ahtn
er hjiirbe
h3trtt)urbcn
i^r n^iirbet
fie it)urbcn ,
Imperative,
l^abc (bu), have (thou)
l)aht (ibr), have (ye)
Conditional.
er ttiiirbe "j
fie hjiirben J
infinitive;
(au) Ijahtn, (to) have
fic^ofit (ju) ^aben, (to) have
had
Participles.
Pres. ^abcnb, having Past, gc^abt, had.
25. Use of Auxiliaries of Tense. — i. gabcn forms
the perfect tenses of all transitive and most ^intransitive
verbs precisely as above. »
In any verb not conjugated with fein (see 4, below) :
The Present of \)ahm + P. Part, of any verb form the
Perfect of that verb.
The Imperfect of ^a6en+ P. Part, of any verb form the
Pluperfect of that verb.
2. mtvhtn forms the Future and Simple Conditional
thus:
The Present of h)erben -1- Infin. of any verb form the
Future.
The Imperf. Subj. of toerben + Infin. of any verb form
the Simple Conditional.
^ 3- The Future of ^aben + P. Part, of any verb (not con-
jugated with fein) form the Future Perfect.
The Simple Conditional of f)aUn + P. Part, of any
verb (not conjugated with fein) form the Compound Con-
ditional.
4. (Scin replaces ^aben in the Perfect Tenses of many
Intransitive Verbs. (See § q.cj.) Comoare the En<rM..h 'W.
IS come.
a0]
CONSTRUCTION OF COMPOUND TENSES.
39
SUBJECT.
(£ngl.) My teacher
1
SUBJECT.
{Germ.) 5Jiein Sef)rer
1 2
SUBJECT. VERB.
{Engi.) We shall
1 2
SUBJECT.
{Germ.) 2Bir
{Engl,)
4
OBJECT.
money.
4
PART.
VERB.
26. Construction of Compound Tenses. Place
OF Participle and Infinitive.
Jiule of Construction. — In every principal sentence the
Participle and Infinitive come at the end; but if both be
present, the Participle precedes the Infinitive, which is always
last, as :
1 S 8
VERB. PART.
has had
9 8
VERB. OBJECT.
f)at ©elb
8 4
INFIN. OBJECT.
have a storm.
8 4
OBJECT. INFIN.
hjerben einen (Sturm l^aBen.
1 2 8 4 6
SUBJECT. VERB. INFIN. PART. OBJECT.
The beggars would have had no shoes.
18 8 4 6
SUBJECT. VERB. OBJECT. PART. INFIN.
{Germ.) ^ie 33ettler iwurben feine (Srfiu^e gc^aBt ^aBcn.
Remember : In compound tenses, the auxiliary is the
verb, and occupies the second place in a principal sen-
tence (see § 2o, Rule i, above).
* Vocabulary.
evening, ber 3I'6enb 7- ^ money, bag ©elb ; ^,^
beggar, ber Settler ; guest, ber ©aft*/ : ..
holiday, ber gei'ertag harbour, ber §afen * i
fish, ber gifc^ I^' glove, ber §anb'Wu^ ^
basket, ber ^oxh *
n
fox, ber guc^g
^
nut, bie^Jul*-^
40
LESSON VIII.
[§§26.
H
R
to be right, JRed^t f)ahm
out of, au^ (gov. dat.)
to become of, m^ . . . toerben
poor, arm
bad, ^d}Ud)t
to-morrow, morcjcn
the day after to-morrow, ii'bers
mo r gen
much, Diet
already, [c^on
when, wann ?
sailing-sliip, ba^ (Bc'gcllcfnff
chair, bcr Btnl)l*
storm, bcr ©turm *
stocking, bcr Strum^f *
shoe, bcr 8rf)u^
table, bcr '^\]d)
animal, ba^ !J'ter
to be wrong, Un'rcd;t ^abcn
pleasure, biv3 33crgnitgcn
wolf, bcr 2BoIf*/,
EXERCISE VIII.
^. 1. ^cl; ^abc ^id (sklh gcf;abt, abcr je^t bin ic^ arm 2
S)ic ^rud;te tucrbcn im ^crbft rcif. 3. 2Birb bcr tnabe einen
2:iW unb etii^Ic in [cincm dimmer f)abcn ? -.' ^r;re §anbfd;ufie
trurbcn fc^tcrf;t, benn fiv toarcn fc^on alt. 5. (?g iff angcne^m
grcunbe gu ^abcn. 6. 2Ba§ hjurbc au§ bcm @o^ne be§ 2et;rcr§?
@r burbe auc^ Scorer. 7. ^d; n)crbe g=einbc unb auc^ grcunbe ^abcn.
8. ®te ©dftc in unfcrcr ©labt hjurben miibe, benn ba« Setter
tvax fc^r f;ci6. 9. Serben wit ^ep^nc^e unb ^Sor^dnge in unferm
3tmmcr ^abcn? 10. @r hatU Srcunbe gc^abt. 11. ©ie ujerben
tn btefem ^a^re bid S3crgnugen ge^abt fjaben. 12. 2)iv^ ©obne
bc§ ^ijnigg ^abcn ^ferbe unb SBagen, aber bie ^ijc^ter be§ ^^tu
Ier§ ^aben fcinc (Sd;u^e unb feine ©trum^fe. 13. 2Bir \}atUn
dttdjt gc^abt, aber er t)atU Unrec^t gc^ M, 14. 3«it meinen
grcunbcn r;Qbe ic^ uiel 33crgnugen ge^abt. 15. Unfere greunbe
lt)crbcn gcftcrn Did ^ergnugen ge^abt ^aben, benn bag better toar
fc^on unb marm.
i?. 1. The sailing-ships are in the harbour. 2. We had
thirty fishes in our baskets. 3. He would have friends. 4.
The evening was fine, but the weather became cold. 5. We
have had two storms, fi Wlipr*^ qre o'lr o-"^-*^- :> t-u^,. l _ .
tired and are now in the garden. 7. To-morrow we shall have
ws^r
[§§ 26^
)
iDerben
31]
PARADIGM OF Io6en.
41
>w. ii'bera
irm. 2,
be einen
nbfd;u^e
gcne^m,
3et;rer§ ?
)e l^abcn.
^ Setter
I unferm
! hjerben
J So^ne
2§ Setts
r l^atten
meinen
Jreunbc
tter \vax
Ve had
ds. 4.
5. We
)ecame
.11 have
a holiday, for it is Saturday. 8. We were in the garden
yesterday and the trees are already green. 9. What has he
had? He has had apples and nuts. 10. Dogs, wolves, and
foxes are animals.
ORAL EXERCISE VIII.
1. Wer hatte Recht und wer hatte Unrecht ? 2 Wann
werden wir einen Feiertag haben? 3. Wo sind die Segel-
schiffe? 4. Wessen Sohne haben Wagen und Pferde^ 5
Warum wurden die Gaste miide? 6. Welche Gemaide'sind
schon ?
LESSON IX.
WEAK CONJUGATION : loBctt. - DEPENDENT SENTENCES -
PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.
27. The stem of a verb is what is left when the termina-
tion of the Present Infinitive (-c„ or -«) is dropped, as:
.^ab-en, stem ^ah ; lob-en, stem Uh.
28. The Principal Parts of a verb are the Present In-
finitive, Imperfect Indicative, and Past Participle.
29. Any verb, when these principal parts are given, may
be conjugated throughout, by using the auxiliaries, precisely
as in the paradigm of ^aUn in Less. VIII.
30. Weak verbs are those which form the Imperfect
by adding -U, and the Past Participle by prefixing «- and
adding -t to the stem, as: lob-en, to praise (stem hh),
Imperfect lob-tc, P. Part.- gc-Iob-t ; tabel-n, to blame (stem
(ttUcI), Imperf. tabeMc, P. Part, ge-tabel-t.
Note. — Weak verbs are also called J^e^z^ar or Mocfern.
31. Paradigm of foBcn, to praise.
Principal Parts.
Pres. Infin. lobtn IMPF. iNDic. lobtc Past Part, ^tloht
43
Indicative.
LESSON IX.
Present.
t§3»
Su Junctive.
ic^ lobe, I praise (am praising, ic^ lobe, I (may) praist
do praise)
bu Iob(e)P, thou praisest, etc. bu lobefl, thou (mayest) praise
er lob(e)t, he praises cr lobe, he (may) praise
h)ir lobcn, we praise h?ir loben, we (may) praise
\l)X Iob(e)t, ye praise i^r lobet, ye (may) praise
fte loben, they praise fie lobeit, they (may) praise
• ■ ■ Imperfect.
(Same form for both moods.)
tc^ lobte, I praised (was praising, etc.)
bu lobtefl, thou praisedst
er lobte, he praised
U)ir lobtcn, we praised
i^r lobtet, ye praised
fie lobten, they praised
Perfect. •
(Pres. of l)aben + P. Part of loben.)
ic^ ^aU gefofit, I have praised (been ic^ l^ahi gelofit
praising)
bu ^aft gelobt, thou hast praised, etc. bu l^abeft gelobt, jc.
» Pluperfect. >
(Imperf. of I)oben + P. Part. loben.)
\6) l[iatte gelofit, I had praised (been \^ ^atU gclaBt, K.
praising), etc.
Future.
(Present of tOCrtCIt + Infin. of loben.)
td^ irerbe (oBen, 1 shall praise (be id^ h)erbe lofien '
praising)
bu mirft loben, thou wilt praise, etc. bu toerbeft loben, K,
ill
t§3»
§30
PARADIGM OF loUtX.
Indicativa.
•Future Perfect. .
(Future of ^o6eit + r. Part, of (cbeit.)
43
Subjunctive.
id^ trerbc gclobt l)aUn, I shall havo
praised
bu toirft gelobt f)ah^n, thou wilt have
praised, etc.
_, Conditional.
• Simple.
(Impf. Subj. of mxtcn -f Infin
of lobeii.)
id} toiirbe lokn, I should
praise(be praising) etc.
■ Imperative.
lobe (bu), praise (thou)
tobe er, let him praise
loben luir, let us praise
lobt (i^r), praise (ye)
loben fie, let them praise
Participles.
^^^. mmb, praising . p^sf. gclobt, praised •
Remarks. _ i. e is sometimes found in the termination, of
he followmg pans . Pres. Ind. b« foKOft, er IoD(e)t, i^r (oKe)t •
Impf (Ind. and Subj.) i<^(ob(c)te, etc. ; P. Part.VeIo6(e)t etc
.nd .s^always retained in certain verbs. (See ] 35 W;,'
2. Note again the persistent e of the Pres. Subj
in GeS nf;^::!'""^'" '°™^ °' *^ ^"'' ^- '° "« --ded
I praise i /_„ • t ^^
* (praise I ?)
ic^ toerbc gelobt ^aben
bu hJerbcft gclobt
i^aben, k.
Compound;
(Simple Cond. of Ijaben -f P. Part.
of loben.)
td^ h)urbe ^tUU f)aUn, I should
have praised, etc.
Infinitive,
(au) loben, (to) praise. •
gctobt (^u) ^aben, (to) have .
praised
}
)
praising )- id; lube am 1 praising? C lobe id; ?
I do praise )
"lii A IJiciismg r >-
do I praise > )
■
44
LESSON IX.
[§§31-
(he pr. ised not) \ ^^ j^^^,^ (praised he not?)
he was not praising > ^.^^^ was he not praising?
he did not praise ) did he not praise ?
J ntc^t?
I have been praising, etc., id) l)abc gelobt, etc.
Had I been praising ? ^atte id) gelobt ?
4. The only true Imperative forms are those of the 2. sing.
and 2. pUir., lok, Mt. For the other persons, the pres. subj.
is used, as: lobe cr, let him praise; loben linr, let us praise;
loben fie, let them praise;— the verb preceding the pronoun!
Construction of Dependent Sentences.
32. The Verb in a Dependent Sentence comes /as/, as :
3c^ c^huh, ba^ er ®elb ^at
I believe that he has money.
Remember : that the auxiliary is the verb in compound
tenses.
33. In compound tenses the Participle and Infinitive
immediately precede the verb; if both be present, the Parti-
ciple precedes, as in principal sentences, thus :
3cl) nl«uk, bap er ®clb gc^oBt Ijat,
I believe, that he has /za(/ money.
3d) Ciian^i, bap er ®elb IftaBcn mirb,
I believe that he will /lave money.
3ci> glaube, bap er ®elb gcjnBt Ijcihn toixi,
1 believe that he will have /la^ money.
Note.— The place of the Subject, in a Dependent Sentence, is
usually the same as in English.
34. Prepositions governing the Accusative only.
95i§, bur^, fur, gcflctt, ajnc, urn, tuibcr.
His, (i) till, until (/me), as: I shall not come until to-
morrow {M inovgcn).
[§§3i-
UUt cr
nic^t?
2. Sing,
es. subj.
praise ;
ironoun.
^asff as:
npound
ifinitive
i Parti-
ence, is
y.
itil to-
34] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 45
(2) up to, as far as (/>/ac6^, as : He travelled with us
as far as (Jig) Montreal.
burrS, through ; as : He rode through the forest (bur*
ben 2BaIb).
fur, for; as: That is for my friend (fiir meinen greunb);
the scissors are not a toy for children (fiir ^inber).
flCgcu, towards, against (not necessarily denoting hos-
tility), as: The enemy advanced towards (or
against) the bridge (gcgcu bte 5Briicfe).
C^m, without ; as : We cannot travel without money (ahnt
©clb). ^ ^^
urn, (i) around, about; as: We drove around the town
(urn bie ©tabt).
(2) at, about (//>;), as : He came at four o'clock
(urn Dier U^r); it happened at (or about)
Christmas (nm 2Bet^nad ten).
toibcr, against {opposiiion, hostility^,, as : He swam against
the stream (mibcr ben ^trom); the soldiers were fighting
against the enemy (inibcr \^txi geinb).
Remark. - ^urc^, fur, and um are generallv contracted
-th the Neuter of the unemphasized Definite Article, thus:
burc^ ba§ = burrjg (burd;'g)
fur bag = fiirg (fur'g)
um bag = urns (um'g)
Vocabulary.
believe, gluuben bve, rie6en
hope^offen make, do, mac^en
^"y' ^''"f^" say, fagen
laugh, \(x^)zx^ send, [d;i(fen
""^^ ^^^^^ play, Ipielcn
learn, remen geH, berfaufen
: t
46
LESSON IX.
[§§34-
weep, cry, \mnm
bishop, bcriBi'[d;of*<^
German, 3)eutfcf)
servant, bcr 2)iener
industry, diligence, bcr ^leig
young lady. Miss, ba^ Jrciulein
cardinal, bcr ^arbinal ~
noise, ber Sarm
Latin, ba§ Satcin
palace, bcr ^ala'ft*
pope, bcr ^a^ft *
Idiom: to take a walk,
Note. — A past tense after UJenn
place, square, bcr ^lal^ "^ '
ring, bcr diiuQ
walk, ber S^ajier'Qang *
time, bie 3nt ,
good, kind, flut
merry, merrily, luftig
sad, traurig
that (conj.), bag
because, hJCil
if, iucnn
why, Jtiarum'?
efiicn Spajfergang ma*en.
('if') is put in the subj. mood.
EXERCISE IX.
^. 1. :Dte ^arbinale unb 33i[(i^ofe h)arcn geftern im $alafle
bc§ ^a|)ftcg. 2. ^a§ ^rciulctn Irirb bicfe SRinge faufen, benn fie
finb fc^on. 3. Dcr ^IKalcr tDurbc bicfe^ ©emcilbc nid^t t)cr!aufcn.
4. ^c^ njiirbe biefcn Diing faufen, hjcnn i^ reic^ irdre. 5. ^at er
eg gegraubt .? ©r ^at e§ gcglaubt, tDcil fctn 3Sater c^ gcfagt ^at
6. ^ie ©c^iiler ^aben bid Sarm gcmac^t. 7. 3Btr roben ben
Siingling, tccil er ftetgig ift. 8. !Der ^onig n){rb feine ©cnc»
rale gegen ben ^einb fc^iden. 9. g^ctne ©d^toeftcr h)irb §anb*
fd^ul)e faufen, benn t^re §anbfc^u^e finb fd^tet^t. 10. SBir Mrbcn
l^cute cincn S^ajicrgang burrf; bie ©tabt mtdjen, toenn bag SSctter
fd^on iuare. 11. 6ie tDiirben auc6 cinc« (S^ajiergang gemad^t
f)abcn, tDcnn fie 3cit gc^abt flatten. 12. ^,e Jmrb fagen, bag id^
^Jlcc^t Ifiabe. 13. Sd) ^abe immcr ge^offt, bag er lerncn h)urbe.
14. 6ic liebt i^rcn SSater unb t^re ^JJutter, benn fie finb gut. 15.
@r hjiirbe ba§ ©cmalbe ntd^t gelobt ^abcn, benn e§ Ujar nid^t fd^on.
B. 1. What were they doing yesterday ? They were playing
in the garden. 2. Thlt gentleman will nrm'cp hi'' ^'-r-^-^Tfe^
for they are industrious. 3. We have taken a walk about
55J
ENDINGS OF WEAK VERBS. '
47
the town. 1. The squares in those cities are very fine 5
Where were the daughters of the officers .? They were livin-
in a convent. 6. Without industry we shall not learn mucir
7. The boy was playing with the dog. 8. The gentleman has
sold his horses and carriages. 9. What are the young ladies
doing now.? 10. Why was she crying.? She was crying
because she was sad. 11. They are laughing because they
are merry. 12. We* shall have learned much in a week. 13.
I am laughing because the child is playing so merrily. 14.
To-day we are learning German, to-morrow we shall learn
Latin. 15. We have bought shoes and stockings for the
beggars.
ORAL EXERCISE IX.
1. Weshalb hat sie gelacht? 2. Wer machte so viel Larm.?
3. Wo haben die Fraulein einen Spaziergang gemacht .? 4
Was hat die Frau gekauft } 5. Weshalb hat seine Schwester
Handschuhe gekauft ? 0. Was werden wir morgen machen ?
LESSON X.
WEAK VERBS (continued). DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES:
— 2)0rf MODEL, OR PLURAL IN -Cr.
35. Endings of Weak Verbs in Simple Tenses.
Indicative.
Sing. 1. — e
3. -(C)t
I>/ur. 1. —en
3. —en
3sent.
Imperfect.
SUBJUNCT.
Ind. andSubj
— c
-(c)tc
-eil
-(c)tcfl
— c
-(c)tc
—en
— (c)tcn
—it
—(e) let
— CIl
-{i)itxi
Imperative.
Sing. 2. — e
Plur. 2. —{c)i
Infinitive.
—en
Participles.
Pres. — enb
Past, ge— (e)t
48
LESSON X.
[§§35-
Imperative.
Plur, 2. rebet (ifjr)
Remarks.— i. Observe the following endings:
{a) Final -t of the 3. sing, occurs only in the Pres. Indie.
{b) The 2. sing, has -ft except in the Imperative.
{c) The 2. plur. has -t throughout.
2. Verb-Stems in -b or -t (tj), or in -m or -n preceded by
another consonant, retain -c throughout after the stem, as :
tcbcn, to speak. *
Imperfect.
Sing. 1. id) rebcte
S. bu rebcteft
etc.
Thus : arbeiten, to work : Irf) arbeitcte ; atmen, to breathe :
bu atmcft ; regnen, to rain : eg regnct.
3. Verb-Stems in a sibilant (§, frj, g, y, j) retain -c ir the
2. sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj. only, as :
tan^en, to dance : bu tanjcft ; reifen, to travel : bu reifeft.
4. Verb-Stems in -cl and -cr drop c of the stem before
terminations in -c (i. e. in i. sing. Pres. Ind., i. and 3. sing.
Pres. Subj., and 2. sing. Imper.), and, except in the Subjunc^
tive^ never insert c after \ or n, as :
Pres. Ind.
Sing. 2. bu rebcft
3. er rebct
I'/ur. 2. il)x rebct
Pres. Ind.
id) tabic
bu tabclft
er ta'btU
wix tabcin
i^r tabcU
fie tabcin
tabclit, to blame.
Pres. Subj.
tabic
tablcft
tabic
tablcn
tablet
Imperfect.
id^ tabclte, etc.
Imperative.
tabic
tabcit
P. Part.
getabcit
tablcn
5. Foreign verbs in -icrcil C-trcn^ do not take th^ nrpfi
, . . - - — ^ — ., ...
gc- m the P. Part., as : ftub-ieren, to study : P. Part, ftubicrt
37]
DECLENSION: ^Otf MODEL.
49
(not gc-ftubtert) ; 6ombarbicrcn, to bombard: P. Part, houu
barbictt.
6. Verbs with the prefixes 6c- cr- cm^- cnt-, flC-, ticr-
aer- also omit the prefix gc- in the P. Part., as : h^a\)Un,
P. Part. bcsa^It ; tierfc^hjenben, tJcrWmenbet.
36. Declension of bttS 2)orf, the village.
Singular.
Nom. bag 3)orf, the village
Gen. beg 3)orf(ejg, of the
village
Dat. bem ^orf(e), (to, for)
the village
Ace. bag 3)orf, the village
Plural.
bie ^iirfcr, the villages
ber 2)iirfer, of the villages
ben ^iirfcrn, (to, for) the
villages
bie ^iirfcr, the villages
Remarks. — I. The Singular is formed precisely as in the
So^n model. (See § 21.)
2. Observe -cr of the Plural, with the additional -n of the
Dative.
3. All Substantives of this Declension with a, 0, u or (x\x
in the stem take Umlaut.
37. In this way are declined :
1. Most neuter monosyllables (exceptions in App.E.).
2. Substantives ending in -t(J)um.
3. Five neuters with prefix @e-, viz. :
bag ©emac^, the apartment bag ©ef^enft, the spectre
bag ©emut, the temper, dis- bag ©etranb, the garment
, P^^^^^^'^ (al3o©eMt; see § 64)
bag @efd;Iecr;t, the sex . ' ^^
4. Two foreign neuters, viz. : \i^.% ^eoiment, the regiment:
bag §o^ital (or ©)3ital), the hospital.
so
5. The following
.5 fiine
bcr ^i)[cluirf)t, the villain
ber ©cift, the spirit
bcr ©ott, the God
ber Seib, the body
bcr 3Kanii, the man,
husband (Lat. vir)
LESSON X.
masculines
f§37
ber ^anb, the edge, margin
ber ^ormunb, the guardian
ber 2BaIb, the forest
ber 2Burm, the worm
(also 3)orn, Drt ; see App.
E.)
Further examples (Sing, like eoF;n) :
^ag 6c^Io|3, the castle, palace: Flur. n.g.a. ^m\\tX
%^i Su4 the book : nur. n. g. a. ©Uc^cr, D. Siic^etn.
Ja« Sinb, the child .- 7y«^. n. g. a. Sinbtr, d. fii„betn
5Da« §aua, the house : /-/^^ n. g. a. §aufcr, d. §aufetn.
Vocabulary.
to row rubern child, bag ^inb 3
shake, fc^iittern dress, bag ^leib 3
waste, t)erfd;h)enben clothes, pi. of ^leib
exercise, task, bie 2rufga6eu>K song, bag Sieb 3
leaf, bag ^latt 3
^gg, bag @i 3
possession, property, bag
(Sigentum 3
earth, bie ©rbe
gardener, ber ©artner I
fowl, bag §u\)n 3
courage, spirit, ber mnt a
woman, wife, bag Seib 3
yellow, gelb
enough, genug
well (adv.), gut
a long while, lange
too, 311
EXERCISE X.
f.ff ■ o' l"l !'!:?^' ?'c^'" "' *'*"" fl^'^' *«"" *">« better ift
f"";..',!'! '"l'^ l'^\5!"^'^^"' -^eil fie i^„ Slufgabe „i«.
,.".iv.. 5)u„». o. ;ym ffiuuer ftubtsrtcn bie Siinglmge; im
f§37
§37l
DECLENSION : 2)orf MODEL.
51
margin
lardian
:e App.
ern.
inner, d
xn.
iferit.
WtiA
b.3
©ommcr arBciteten [ic. 4. „^u rubcvft nic^t ^djmU genug, man
SBrubcr/' ^ac^k id;. 5. Dicjc ^JJiaimcv liebcn i^rc iSeibcr unb
^inber. 6. 2)cr Se(;vcr [agtc, bafj bic i^inbcr 511 i^iel 2dxm ntac^ten.
7. ^er ^onig rebete mit ben ©eneralen, unb lobte ben Tint i^rer
^egimenter. 8. ®ie SSormiinber biefer Hinber finb ^ii5[elt)ic^ter,
benn fie f)aben bag ©igentum ber ^inber toerfc^tvcnbet. 9. 3)ic
SBiirmer leben in ber @rbe, aber bie 0=ifd;e leben im Staffer. 10.
2Bo finb bie Gier ber ^ii^ner? 6ie finb in unferen ilorben. ll!
^^ toerbe mube, h)eil id; gegen ben ©tvorn rubre. 12. ®er ^aifer
l}at bie ©enerale getabett, aber i^re Sf^egimenter i)at er gelobt.
B. 1. The general has bombarded the town. 2. The
woman was buying books and clothes for her children. 3.
The gardener is shaking the apple-tree. 4. The children
were learning songs. 5. The boy is industrious; he has
studied well. 6. The apartments of the palaces are magni-
ficent. 7. It rained yesterday, but it will not rain to-day.
8. We have rowed a long while against the stream. 9. These
men travelled through towns and villages. 10. The hospitals
in London are large and fine. 11. The leaves of these trees
are large and beautiful. 12. This gentleman would buy my
houses, if he had money enough.
ORAL EXERCISE X.
1. Weshalb warden die Blatter gelb? 2. Wessen Regi-
menter hat der Konig getadelt.? 3. Was sagte der Lehrer.?
4. Wo leben die Wi.irmer > 5. Was lernten die Kinder ? 6.
Wurde dieser Herr das Haus kaufen ?
etter tfi
•e nic^t
je; im
52
LESSON XI.
[§§.^8-
38.
LESSON XI.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Declension of Personal Pronouns.
First Person.
S^g' N. id;, I
G. mciner (mein), of me
I>. mir, (to, for) me
A. mid;, me
Plur. N. h)ir, we
G. imfcr (unfrcr), of us
D. ung, (to, for) us
A. ung, us !
Third Person.
Singular.
Second Person,
bu, thou
beincr (bein), of thee
bir, (to, for) thee
bid;, thee
'^¥, ye, you
euer (eurer), of you
tnd), (to, for) you
euc^, you
I FEM.
fie, she
i^rer (i^r),
of her
if)r, (to, for)
her
fie, her
NEUTER.
REFLEXIVE
ev3, it
(all genders).
feiner (fein.
e§), of it
if;m,(to,for)
fidf;, (to, for) himself,
It
herself, itself
eg, it
fid^, himself, herself,
itself
MASC.
N. er, he
G. feiner (fcin),
of him
D. i^m,(to,for)
him
A. i^n, him
XT r ^1 Plural.
N. fte, they ■\
G. i^rer (i^r), of them I
D. i^nen, (to, for) I ^^^
them I ALL GENDERS
A. fie, them J
2. The form t^rti fVio. ^ oi~~ ,„ , .
^ . , " - ^^ ^^ ^'^" ^- •^^"S- gen. neuter is only used in cer-
tarn phrases, as: ^c^ bin cl mube, I am tired of it.
ftc^, (to, for) them-
selves
fid), themselves
[§§s»
39]
IDOMATIC USES OF C8.
53
3. The gen. and dat. of the 3. sing, neuter do not occur,
except when referring to persons (e. g. ^dbc^en, grciulein).
4. The Pronouns of the 3. sing, must agree in gender with
the substantive to which they refer, as :
^aftbubcn^ut?
Hast thou the hat ?
§afti'ubte33Iumc?
Hast thou the flower ?
SBoiftboggJiabc^en?
Where is the girl ?
3a, \i) f)a6e iljn.
Yes, I have it.
Sf^ein, tc^ babe fie nid^t.
No, I have it not.
m ift im ©arten.
She is in the garden.
5. The Pronouns of the 3. person are 7iot used after Prepo-
sitions, when referring to inafiimate objects, but are replaced
by the adverb i)a(r), there, before the Preposition, the r being
inserted if the Preposition begins with a vowel, as :
SBift bu mit biefcm ©ur^e jufrieben? ^a, ic^ bin bamtt
gufrteben. Art thou satisfied with this book ? Yes, I
am satisfied with it {therewith).
How much did you pay for this hat } I paid two dollars
for it, bafiir (therefor).
What have you in your purse ? I have money in it
(bttrin, therein),
■ 39. Idiomatic Uses of c8.
I. Before the verb, representing the real subject, which
follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees, as :
Who is it ? It is my cousin ; it is my cousins.
2Ber ift c§? (|0 ift mein ^Setter ; e§ finb meine ^tiitxn.
@8 leuc^itct bie ©onnc, the sun shines, i. e., it is the sun
that shines.
@S leuc^tcn bic 6terne, (it is) the stars (that) shine.
1
54
LESSON XI.
[§§39-
Remark. - ©^ in this construction is often rendered by
there ' in English, as i ^
There is a bird in this cage.
Crg ift ein ^Bogel in biefcm 53auer.
There are three books on this table.
6-8 finb brei Sucker auf biefem 2:i[c^.
(See also e^3 gicOt, Less. XXXVII.)
2. When the real subject represented b- :§ is a personal
pronoun, with the verb /o be, e^ follows ' the verb which
agrees with the real subject in person and number, as:
It is I, c^c^ Bi„ e^,
( 2)u Bift eg.
It is you, ^ g^r fctb eg.
©ie finb eg.
It is we,
It is they.
Is it you ?
tuir finb eg.
fie finb eg.
finb eieeg?
3. After the verb, representing a predicate or a clause
and corresponding to the English 'one ' or *so,' as :
Is your father a soldier.? Yes, he is one (eg).
We are free, and you shall be so (eg) too.
40.
Use of Pronouns in Address.
I. 3)n is used only in addressing persons with whom we
are very mtnnate, or towards whom we use no ceremony
also m addressing the Supreme Being, as;
So 6ift bn, Hekry^rcunb?
Where are you, dear friend?
SBa-g macBft bn, mcin .tliub?
What are you doing, my child ?
^.. »ji?e» ^tM^, \2}M\,x\ we praise ihee, o Godl
MJ REFLEXIVK and RECiPROCAL PRONOUNS. 53
2. 35r (plur. of bu) is used in aadr-ssing a number of per-
«ons, each of whom we should address by bu, as :
2Ba^ mac^t ijr, ^inbcr?
What are you doing, children?
3. In all other cases we use for 'you' in German, whether
sing, or plur., the pronoun of the Third Plural : (Bit, g^rcr,
3§ncn, (Sic, distinguished by a ^^///^/ /eUer, (See also
§ 43.)
41. Paradigm of (often with Reflexive Pronouns.
Present Indicative.
Sm^. 1. tc^ Io6c mi^, I praise myself
2. bu lobft bidj, thou praisest thyself
3- «r ^ he ^ / himself
she >- praises -j herself
it ) ( itself
we praise ourselves
ye praise yourselves
they praise themselves
So throughout the verb, as :
Perfect : ^c^ ^a^e mic^ gelobt, bu ^aft hid) gelobt, er hat M
gelo&t, etc. '
42, Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns — fclfifl.
1. The Pronouns of the First and Second Persons express
re/exive action without a specia' form, as shown by the above
paradigm, but those of the Third Person have the form firj.
2. These pronouns are also used in the Plural to express
redprocal action, as :
We met each other ; they will see each other again
Wx becjegneten \\xi<i ; fie lucrben ficj li)ieber[e(;en.
fie \ robt fid,,
Plur, 1. \Q\x loSen uns,
2. i^r lobt cui^,
3. fie loben fijj.
56
LESSON XI.
[§4a
Hut when, to prevent amhiornity, it is necessary to dis-
(in;;nish reciprocal from rcllcxive action, we use ciiioilbcr as
Uie reciprocal pronoun for all persons, thus:
We love c.ich other (one another), 2Bir licbcn finoitber.
(ill'ir licbcu um n.ij'ht mean ' we love ourselves:)
3. To eniphasi/e and strengthen the reflexive pronouns,
and j;ive them an t'xcliisive sense, as well as further to distin'
guish them from reciprocal pronouns, the indeclinable word
fdbp (or fclticr) is used, as:
Know yourselves, (5ifonnct cur^i f ,16(1.
((^rfcniict cnrfj might mean ' know one another:)
He has injured himself, Gr \)^i fid; fclbfl befd^abigt.
Remark. — This word fdlift is in apposition to the subject
(or object, as the case may be), as :
^^or m\\\<s fcIDft ift nirf)t innnor flluc!lic().
The king himself is not always happy.
It is also used adverbially (— Eng. * even '), as
Even the king is not always happy.
Scllift bcr Mijuifl ift md;t iimncv flUicflirf;.
Vocabulary.
behave one's self properly (of
children), avtii^ fcin
meet, bcnoiincu (dat.)
visit, bcfurficu
Piiy, lH\^abIcn
have finished (with), fcrticj
fcin mit
belong (to), tvluh-cn (dat.)
be ashamed of, fid; fd;amcn
seat one's self (sit down), fic^
fe|jcn
punish, ftrafcn
work, labour, bic 2(rbcit . /(
parents, bic (?ltcni (no sing.)
patience, bic ©cbulb
gentleman, master, Mr., ber
hat, bonnet, ber §ut*; [§ert't'-'''^
John, :^^obamt
Charles, %^x\
^)0m
[§4a
to dis-
stiber as
inbrr.
onouns,
) distin-
le word
84al REFLEXIVK AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS.
subject
n), ftc^
jing.)
57
artist, bcr ilunftlcr '
Mary, '^Maxk
uncle, bcr D'fjcim ^
dollar, bcr 5:{;alcr /
away, gone, fort
here, l;icr
ever, at any time, jc, jcmalg
never, nic, nicmalg
EXERCISE XI.
^. 1. eci artig 5larl, bu mad;ft 3u Did Sarm. 2. Oenc gjJanncr
[inb fcFjr rcid;, bcnn bicfc ^dufer gefjCrcn i^ncn. 3. ©c^drt ba«
jJfcrb p^iuMi -^ Wm, c^ flcfjort mir nid;t, eg gc^ort bem Offijicr.
4. Unfcr Dljmi \jat ung ^Mc^er gcfauft. 5. .^abt ©cbulb, ^in.
bcr. Id; iucrbc cud; morGcu ^H^fcl ,.ib ^J^uffe faufen. 6. ^c^ hjcrbe
morncncmcuepaaicrflangmit^r^ncnmac^cn. l.QxQlauht bafticfi
mir ba^5 ^fcvb flcfauft l;abc. 8. SD^orgen Jucrben tuir einen ^cicrT
taQ babcn, unb h)ir Jucrbcn unfre (gitern befuc^cn. 9. ^c^ t^erbe ibr
faocn, bafj tf)re 5J?uttcr fort ift. 10. Saren ®ic jemalg in biefer
^lird;c'^ ^d) tuarnie barin. 11. tol unb 3of;ann. begcgneten
fid; gcitcrn im mitc. 12. ^ft ^^r 3Satcr noc^ fran!? T>.in
mcui i^atcr ift jel^t ml)l 13. ^Ofaric, liebft bu bcine (Sltcrn? ^a
unb fic hcbcn mid; aud;. 14. ^d) imirbe einen e^ajiergang mit
^f)ncn mad;cn, itjcnn ic^ 3eit i)atu. 15. .^at bcr Scorer Maxk
gctabca? ^a, er F,at fie getabclt. 16. ^ie et^iUer loben fic6
fclbft, \ml fic ir;re STufgabc fo fc^meff gcmad^t babcn. 17 ^ir
luurben nm felbft auc^ lobcn, menu wiv unfre ^Tufgabe gcmad;t
Flatten. 18. @r it)urbc fic^ fd;amen, h)enn er mit feincr ^lufgabe
mc^t fertig mare. 19. Segf;alb lobcn biefe ^unftler einanber?
6ie loben cmanber, ttjcil i^re ©cmcilbe fc^on finb. 20. einb ®ic
mit memcr STrbeit juf ricben ? ^JJcin, i,^ bin nic^t bamit aufricben.
B. 1. Is the table large? No, it is small. 2. Her father
has bought her a ring. 3. Were the fishes in your basket?
Yes, they were injt. 4. Who has told it [to] her ? 5. John
have you my sho^s ? No, I have them not. 6. We sit down
because we are tired. 7. Even the beggars of this city have
snoes and stockings. 8. Who has bought this hat? 9. I
: it myself in the city, and paid four dollars for it. lo,
^)0U
58
LESSON XII.
[§§43
Charles and his teacher love each other very much. 11.
Mother, have you bought me apples or nuts? 12. Mr. A.,
here is a chair for you ; sit down. 13. Has the teacher blamed
him? Yes, he had not done his exercise. 14. Do you believe
that this milk is good ? Yes, it is very good. 1 5. The teacher
is ashamed of her, because she has not finished (with) her work.
ORAL EXERCISE XI.
1. Wurden sie einen Spaziergang mit mir machen ? 2.
Weshalb ioben Sie sich so viel .? 3. Was sagten Sie mir ?
4. Sind Sie mit meiner Arbeit zufrieden ? 5. Was werden
wir morgen mtichen .? 6. Werden Sie morgen Ihre Eltern
bosuchen .?
LESSON XII.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. -USE OF ARTICLES.
43. Possessive Adjectives.
First Person. Seconi" Person.
Sing, mcin^ my bcilt, thy
Plur. unfcr^ our cucr, your
Third Person.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
Sing, fcin, his (its) i^r, her (its) fcin, its Flur. tjr, their
Poss. Adj. of Polite Address : ^^r.
REMArKS. — I. The Possessive Adjectives are the Genitive
Cases of the respective Personal Pronouns, declined after the
mcin Model. (See § 8, above.)
2. Unfer and euer may drop c of tLe stem wh*»n inflected ;
or they may drop c of the termination, unless the termination
is -c or -cr, as : unferc or unfrc ; unfcrc§, un{rr§ or unfcrg.
3. Observe the correlatives of the Pronoun.s n( Address:
btt — bcin
i§t — - CUiT
44l
USE OF THE ARTICLES.
59
<(
u
Thus -Ne say :
bu l^aft htine ^Tufgabe gelernt, )
ijr f}aht cure „ f you have learnt your
(Sic ^aben 3Jre ,, " j lesson
Adj. ot Third Plural as Pronoun of Address.
4. Observe also the correlatives of the Third Person •
Referring to subst. masc, sing. fcj„ ^whether animate
" fern. " i^y J or inanimate
** neuter " fp|,i
tosubsts. plur.(allgenders) \\x
Thus we say ;
^cr §unb ^at fcincn ^noc^en berroren (lost)
^tc Slume ,, i§rc 33Idtter „
3)tt8 33uc^ „ fcinc , ''
5. The possessive adjectives agree in gender with both the
possessor and the thing possessed. The termination will
depend on the gender (number and case) of the substantive
they qualify (the thing possessed) ; the stem (as above) on the
gender of the substantive to which they refer (the possessor)
lady"gcn7ra^r'"i^ "TT^^^ -^^-= ^a^djen, girl, ^rdurein, young
aoy. generally take the possessive ad ective referring to them in the
feminine, agreeing with the sex rather than the gender, as:
3)ag yjZcibc^eu liebt t^rc 9Wutter.
The girl loves her mother.
For Possessive Pronouns, see Less. XXIII.
**• Use of the Articles.
The Definite Article is required in German, contrary to
English usage, in the following cases : ^
i.^Before^all substantives used in the full extent of
t^^-.* Signincation (i. e. in a general as well as in a par-
ttadar sense); hence :
»
6o
LESSON XII.
[§44
{a) Before nouns (sing, or plur.) denoting a whole class,
as:
$cr SJJenfd^ ift fterblic^, Man is mortal;
^ic 3Sogel ^aben ^Zefter, Birds have nests.
{b) Before names of materials, abstract nouns, etc.,
ased in their unlimited sense, not partitively, as :
^tt§ ©Ia§ ift burc^fic^tig.
Glass is transparent;
^ttg ©otb ift ttjcrtDoder oX% tiag ®i(6cr.
Gold is more valuable than silver ; but :
@o(b unb Silftcr f)abe id) nic^t,
Gold and silver I have not (have none of).
%\t 9^ot ift bie 3Jlutter bcr ©rfinbung.
Necessity is the mother of invention;
^ic m\xS\l ift eine 5lunft,
Music is an art ; but :
%x ftubiert 9Wufif,
He studies music (Hmited sense).
Note. — In Proverbs and Enumerations this article is omitted, as:
9iot tcnnt felii ®cbot,
Necessity knows no law;
gWuflf unb ajlolcrei fiub fd[)i3ne ^unfle,
Music and painting are fine arts.
2. Before names of mountains, lakes, seas, rivers,
^/orests, streets, seasons, months and days of tlie week,
as :
%tX SSefut), Mount Vesuvius.
^cr Ontario, Lake Ontario.
^ic ^^emfe, the Thames.
%tx (Sjjeffart, the (forest of) Spessart.
^ic griebric^ftrafee, Frederick Street.
§44]
USE OF THE ARTICLES.
Oi
Sot ^tixf)lmQ, in spring.
^cr Sanuar t[t fait, January is cold.
»m montaQ, on Monday.
Also before |,immer, @rbe, ^olle, as:
3m ^immef, in heaven ;
Sur @rbe, to earth ;
and before places of public resort, as :
Sur ©c^ule gel;en, to go to school.
3c^ wax in ber 5lirc^e, I was at church.
3. Before names of countries when not npuf^r ^. i,
preceded by an adjective, as: ' ''' ^^'"
2)tc (Sd^toei^, Switzerland.
2)Q§ fc^one granfreic^, fair France.
B^eirr:^^;:;^:^^^^^^ - ^^^ --^^^ .,, proper Names is
Article in German when used distributively (L each) as'
3h)eimar beg ^a^re§, twice a year
^rei 3:^aler bic @ae, three dollars a yard.
5. The Indefinite Article is omitted before the unqualified
predicate after fein or toerben, as : unqualified
^^^ ^^ er ift (hjurbe) ©olbat, he is (became) a soldier ;
@r ift ctn ta)jferer ©orbat, he is a brave soldier
AdieSiv Jl ''''"'' t-'"''' ^^P^^^^^ ^^« Possessive
@r fterfte bic §anb tn bic Stafd^e,
He put his hand into his pocket •
vTi fu;uiien; Qm Ko))f,
He shakes his head.
62
LESSON XII.
[§44
©eben ©ie mir bte §anb. Give me your hand.
{b) With parts of the person, clothing, etc., the Dative of
the Personal Pronoun + Definite Article replace the Pos-
sessive Adjective, as :
@in ©tein fiel tjm auf ben ^o^f,
A stone fell on his head ;
(gill 5?agel ^at mir ben Sffocf gerriffen,
A nail has torn my coat.
Note. — If the subject is the possessor, the reflexive pronoun is
used, as :
®r l)at fti^ in ben finger gefd)nttten, He has cut his finger.
to cost, foften
hurt, wound, Uerle^en
cry, weep, Jt)einen
draw, jeid^nen
doctor, physician, ber Slrjt*^
axe, bie Sljt * 'i~
mountain, hill, ber Serg ^
lead-pencil, ber SBleiftift 5
iron, bag (gifen /
window, bag 5^nfter /
wing, ber ^liigel /
Vocabulary.
master, ber 5!Jieifter '
Mont Blanc, ber 5J?ont Slanc
music, bie 3Ku[if
coat, ber 5Jod *^
Schiller-street, bie ©emitters
ftra^e wk
tailor, ber ©c^neiber /
cloth, bag %\x&) 3
exercise, practice, bie ilBung ^^
hot, (;ei^
light, Iei($t
dear, teuer
as, when, alg
purse, ber ©elbbeutel \
hope, bie §offiiung ^A. ^^, „..^,,,
merchant, ber ^aufmannf^^^^ often, oft
farewell, (bag) 2ebeh?o{)I i
EXERCISE XII.
A. 1. libung mad^t ben 3}iei[ter. 2. 3)ie 9Kufif unb bie 95?alerei
finb ^iinfte. 3. ^inber, 'i)abi x\)x eure Slufgaben gemac^t? ^^a,
tt)ir Baben fie aemacht A 'Tipr Wo«t ^fin" K* -^J- oa^^^ :.. w-„
©c^toeij. 5. ^ft biefeg Stuc^ teuer? ^a, eg foftet brei ^^aler
§44]
USE OF ARTICLES.
63
noun IS
bte @ae. 6. Xk mmux W^dt i^re ^inber gur Sd;ule. 7. §a6en
©le ©olb m Sfjrem ©elbbeutel? ^c^ ^abe !ein ©olb, aber icB
l^abe ©liber. 8. 2Bag lernt bag DJldbc^en ? ©ie krnt i^re 2luf.
gabe. 9. 'Der SSater fd;uttelte feinem ©otjne bie §anb unb [agte
t^m Sebett)o^I. 10. 3)ie gliigel ber 3SogeI finb fe^r leic^t unb
ftarf. 11. ^at ber ©c^neiber ^(jren 9?ocf nac^ ^aufe ge^tcft^
12. 3^em, er l)at i^n noc^ nic^t ge[cf)icft, aber er toirb i^n morgen
[c^icfen. 13. Unfere (gltern reiften in ^eutfc^lanb unb in ber
©c^h^etj. 14. ^m ^uli ift ba§ SBetter oft fe^r ^ei^. 15. !Da§
(Stfen h)irb rot, n^enn e§ ^ei^ mirb. 16. manUn ©ie, bafe icb
^ec^t ^abe? 17. tol berle^te fic^ bie §anb, aU er mit einer
m arbeitete. 18. ^c^ hjiirbe ©olbat tt)erben, n)enn ic^ alt genug
tocire. 19. 2Bir tourben greunbe ge^abt ^aben, toenn Wxv reicb
getoefen i»aren.
^. 1. Gold is yellow, but silver is white. 2. Mary is
studying music and painting. 3. Are your parents still
living in Frederick-Street > 4. No, they are now living in
Schiller-Street. 5. Mont Blanc is a moui. iain in Switzerland.
6. The girl is crying; she has hurt her hand. 7. Is your
father a doctor } No, he is a merchant. 8. Glass is trans-
parent, and we make windows of it. 9. What are you doing
with your lead-pencil.? I am drawing a fiower with it. 10.
The emperor is satisfied with his generals. 11. I blame you,'
because you are not industrious. 12. What are you drawing
now.? I am drawing a bird. 13. Why are you crying, my
child? 14. The doctor shook his head, for he had no hope.
15. Would you buy a horse, if you were rich .? 16. Miss b'
has sent her mother a present. 17. The girl will visit her
parents.
ORAL EXERCISE XIL
1. 1st das Gold weisz .? 2. Weshalb weint das Madchen?
3. W^erdeii Sie sich ein Haus kauten ? 4. Sind Sie Soldat? 5
Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 6. Was machen Sie mj^ Ihrem Gelde ?
64
LESSON XIII.
t§§ 45-
LESSON XIII.
CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES: PLACE OF OBJECTS, AD-
VERBS, etc. - INDIRECT NARRATION. - PREPOSITIONS
GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY,
46. Rules for Position of Objects, Adverbs, etc.
Rule i. (a) Pronouns first of all, unless governed by
a preposition, when they come after all other objects, ad-
verbs, etc.
(/^) Adverbs or Ad^'crbial Expressions of Time precede
everything except Pronouns without Prepositions, thus :
12 8 4 6
{Germ.) ^c^ fc^icfte i^m ftcftcm (bicfc Sotjc) einen 33rief,
12 8 4 6
{Engl) I sent him a letter yesterday (this week);
but:
12 3 4 6
{Germ.) ^d^ fc^itfte gcftcm einen Srief an ijti,
12 8 4 5
{Engl) I sent a letter to him yesterday;
12 3 4 6 6
{Germ.) ^d; f^a^e cs ^cutc meiner (5d;h)efter gefc^idft,
12 3 4 5 6
{Engl) I have sent it to my sister to-day.
Rule 2. Of Nouns, persons (unless governed by pre-
positions) before things, as :
12 8 4 5
{Germ) ^(^ fc^icfte geftern meincm ©otcr dncn «ricf,
12 3 4 5
{Engl) I sent my father a letter yesterday;
but: ^
12 8 4 5
{Germ) ^c^ fc^icfte gc^tem cincn ©ricf on mcincn mUx,
1 2 a 4 5
{Engl) I sent a letter to my father yesterday.
48)
PLACE OF OBJECTS, ETC.
65
Rule 3. Of Pronouns, Personal before all other Pro-
nouns, as :
%^) l;abc i^m bag (Demonstr. Pron.) gecjeben,
I have given him that.
Rule 4. Of Personal Pronouns, Direct Object before
Indirect Object, as :
1 2 » 4 6
{Germ?) % \) \^(xU eg i^m gegeben,
12 8 4 5
{Engl.) I have given it to him.
Rule 5. Adverbs o*" place, cause and manner follow ob-
jects in the order named, as :
12 3 4 6 6 7
{Germ,) (gr ^at ba§ 93u^ ^u .^nufc jc^t f(ci§ig ftubtert,
12 8 4 6 e
{Engl^ He has studied the book very diligently
7
at home.
Remember : i. That in compound tenses all these objects,
adverbs, etc., come between tht auxiliary and the participle or
infinitive.
2. That any of these members of a sentence may occupy the
first place instead of the subject, especially an adverb of time,
etc., and that the subject (see § 20, Obs. 2) is then thrown
after the verb, as :
1 2 ,3 4 5
©cftcrtt fc^icfte it^ i^m einen 33rief.
1 234 5
2)icfc aaSot^c fi^idtc id; einen 33rtef (x\y ifjn.
46. Prepositions governing the Dative only.
nac^, fcit, t»on, 311 \ ^^^^''^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^ase.
tttt§, (i) out of {motion)^ as : He came out of the house (aul
bcm ^aufe).
I
I
456
LESSON XIII.
[§40
(2) of {made of), as: This \v
§015).
'ise is built of wood (ou0
(3) from {origin), as: He comes from England (aiil
Gnglanb) ; from the town (au^ bcr ©tabt).
(4) from {cause), as : I did it from fear {tiU gurd;t).
CUgcr, (i) outside of {rest\ as : The table is standing out-
side of the room (augcr bctti dimmer).
(2) except, besides, but, as: I had nothing except
(besides, but) my stick (ougcr meincm ©todc).
Bet, (i) (near) by, as : The chair stands (near) by the table
(Bci bcm or beim %\\6)t).
(2) at (the house, etc., of, = Fr. chez), with, as : He
lives at the house of (or: with) his uncle (or-
at his uncle's), cr tuof;nt ki [eincm Dnfel.
(3) about (one's person), with, as : I have no money
about (with) me (Bci mir).
VXW, with, as : He is coming with (along with) his friend
(mit fetnem greunbc) ; he struck the dog with a
stick (mit eincm etocfe).
ntt«, (I) after {time, order), as : He arrived after his brother
(naift feinem 33ruber).
(2) to (with names oi places), as : He is going to Quebec
(naiS Quebec); to England (noij ©nglanb); home-
(wards) (naij §aufc\
(3) according to (often follows its case in this sense)
as : This is wrong according to my opinion (naifi
memcr S^eumng, 01 meiner aKeinuiig iiocft).
fctt, since, as : He has not been here si.xe the war (fcU bcm
.^v.vgt, , j,,i vjxxxxM^xi ^af)mi, tor the iab. Hundred
years.
§46]
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY. 67
tion, (i) from, as: He has just come from dinner (don bcm,
Ham 'I>?ittagyc|fen).
(2) of, as : We were speaking of our mother (tioit unferct
mntUx).
(3) by (with personal agent after the passive voice), as :
Children are loved by their parents (Han ibrcit
Jtt, (i) to {persons), as : He went to liis friend, or to his
friend's (jn feincm greunbc) ; he spoke to me (ju
mir).
(2) to {places, if not proper ni^mes ; see nad^, above), as:
He was going to the town (jn ber, or jur ©tabt).
(3) at (with proper names of towns only), as : He lives
at Ottawa (jn Dttatua); at home (jn ^o.\x\t).
Remarks. — i. SBei, tton and ju (and sometimes au^er) are
contracted with the Dative Sing. Masc. and Neuter of the
unemphasizedViQ,^m.x.Q Article, thus : bei bem = Beim, t)on bem =
bom, %\x bem = jum ; ju is also contracted with the Dat. Sing.
Fern., thus : gu ber = §ur.
2. The -c of the Dat. Sing, is never used when a preposi-
tion (except jn) stands before a substantive without an article,
pronoun or adjective preceding, as : aug ^olg, of wood ; mit
;5Iei|, on purpose ; but nnij §aufc, home ; jn §aufe, at home.
3. Observe the following :
{Germ.) 3)er S3rief meincg Dnteig,
{Engl.) The letter of my uncle = My uncle's letter.
{Germ.) 3)er ^rtef )»m meincm Dnfel,
{Engl.) The letter from my uncle.
The English preposition of with a substantive must gen-
erally be rendered in German bv a Genitive case without a
preposition, whenever it can be turned into the English Posses-
eive case, as above ; otherwise by Don, as :
68
LESSON XIII.
He
Oh
[§40
w-'s spca ing of his mother (tioa femci mntUx).
4- Uhscrve niso me iollowin„ .
S''. a"°* "~. ''""^' '■" '"' ^ S"^"^ ■"« 'he book,
' -hn- r'lf"' ^" "'" '""' *"* ^°"'- "'"'<'"' I'-Position).
ever the s^,t.! ^ ^'""'^ »">/'««/<. /..A^V'i.. when-
tive ab've :,," ''-'"r' '"'° "^= ^■■'""^'' '"^'-ct Objec-
tive, as above; otherwise (generally) by the preposition ju/as:
He spol<e to me (jh mit).
Vocabulary.
to answer, anttoortcn - dinner, ba« aSit'tagSeffen T
honour, el;ren "^
show, 3eigen w
picture, ba^ WilhL
letter, ber ii3rief C
Germany, ^cutfdE^ranb
present, ba^ ©efd;en! /
glass, bag ©lag
war, bcr Jlrieg
re
journey, bie JHelfe u
Roman, ber 9tbmer - -
aunt, ok 3:ante
tliankful, grateful, banfbar
(gov. dat.)
ready, finished, fertig
quiet, still, \m
there, bf»
Jdfom.. It 18 I, 3cl, bJit c«.
BXEBCIS.E XIII.
_^. 1. ©eit bem ^ricge ftnb mcine ©d)h)aaer fcBr arm 9
ST "Sfff t *i?*;r ae^L/Vto -Seine
cm ®eM;o„t ge^irft „„b i;^ 6in"J fur fej a„£ " "'s^T,!
« m,t beuKr SfvOeit fertig ? 3ieii ic| L S; „ J b.itfeS
7. air it-erbcn movgcn mit 3j,ncu nad, Montreal teifen so. I
■ "'"^^^" i""r '^auv bafitr bega^Ien. II.
Siicfeer hnahUn •«? cj;x
§46]
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE.
69
Stnb bic STfcibc^en 311 §aufc? ^a, t^re T^utkx [c^irfte fie urn fiinf
lH)x nad) ^aufe. 12. etjre beinen 3^ater unb bcine 3}Juttcr. 13
93ei meinem Onfet rebctoi \mx immer iel uom ^ticgc. 14 ©inb
eie eg, §err od;nubt ? ^a, xc^ hm eg. 15. .s^abcn Si^ in
^eutfchlanb bicf SBergniiBen cjci^abt? 6ic fagcn nidU md
toon 31,rer ^Tieife. 16. S3ci ^f^nen fjalcn h iv immcr Diel S5er.
gnugen. 17. Tiefer ^T^aun lobt fic^ 31. bid. , ^ mm^ Xante
tft je^t bei mir; ic^ h)cioe ibr hie Stabt ^eigcn. 19. 5Jicin 33rubcr
unb mem. ecl;)refter finb ,ni ^au[e. 20. Sl^a^ iiuirbcn eic fur
biefe ©lafev besal;ieji ? ^cb hjurbe md)t mcl ' afiir bc5at)(en.
^. 1. Here is niy uncle's letter. 2. Is he for me o. against
me ? :]. Our servant is from Germany. 4. * Buy me an
apple/ siiid the child lo its mother. 5. Have vou sold your
horses .? 6. The teacher speaks of the , !s of the Romans.
7. Charles, you have answered well, sit down. 8. My son
always sends me the newspaper from Chicago. 9. My friend
showed me his pictures. 10. Buy me this ring ; it is mag-
nificent. 11. Who is in the garden ? It is she. 12. I be-
lieve that Charles Las bought iiimself a hat. 13. Here is the
letter from my uncle, 14. I am nsham-d of you, because you
are not mdustrious. 15. My father woulr^ send me to the
city, if I were old enough.
ORAL EXERCISE XIII.
1. Weshalb srhamen Sie sich meiner ? 2. 1st es Karl oder
sein Bruder > , . Seit wann lernen Sie 1 )eutsch .? 4. Wer hat
mir diese Zeitung geschickt ? o. Was mnchte ich nach de^>^
Mittagsessen ? 6. Wo hat mein Vater c .cses Buch gekauft
m^-M
70
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A.
[§§47
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND
PREPOSITIONS.
'*7. Pronouns in Address.
r. The pronouns bu and ihr irp tu., .. i
2)cr «ccf)cr Ift JicJti,
Uiib btcfcii muQ iiorf) bcflimm' irf) J)|r,
The goblet is thine,
And this ring too I'll keep for thee.
mU »otcr, gcniig fein bag graiifame epiel
©r l)at euj^ bcftanbcn, juas tciiier l)cftet)t
Unb fount iHr be. .r;,er^rn« ©elilfteu nid,t^df,mcn, u. f. r,
iinough, father, of this cruel sport
He has ventured for you what none will venture,
And If you cannot subdue the desire of your heart, etc. l^^ )
2. ^r and Sic (3. sing.) were formerly r.gularlv used 1
address towards inferiors, with the verb agree"^ in / P^°"°r« ^^
are often found so used in th. .1 ""Sr^emg m 3. suig.. and they
Their use ...^ i.^ly contempt so f""T' '""^ ^^"'^ "^^^ ^ ^P'*-'
who is otherwise addressed Tslur:"^' "^' ^° '^^ ^^^-"^^ ^^S-r,
©et er fclii frfjcncnlanter X^or,
Don't be a jingling fool. (Gohthb, „3.auft.«)
dingt:heSm:t:^f^:;j;^;::^rr^^^
^^- P^""^-^' "^y people of the lower orders
substantives, eit'hl i:^^!; :^;:^:'::: - -^-indeclinable
ffiir merben fcmc0flrci,§cn ntc iDi.bcr fel)en,
We ne'er shall look upon his like again.
You are not (a person) like me (my equal).
(For the use of beggleidjcii, bergleic^en, see §§ 97, 139 )
[§§47
If
I
51]
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE.
71
X'uvd)(nu(f)t, 'Your Serene Highness'; (Sure SDfJnieflat, • Your Majesty,'
etc., is used, also without the poss. adj., and with the verb in the plur.
It was this plur. use of complimentary tides that gave rise to the use of
®ie as the pronoun of polite address. The old forms 3t|ro, 2)cro, are
now o])solete.
50. Prepositions with Accusative.
1. The preposition foitllcr takes the accusative, hut is of rare occurrence.
2. ©CflCll has an obsolete form pen, now used only in certain phrases,
as: gen ^illimd, heavenwards; jjcn yiorbcu, northwards, etc.
3. Ol)T J has a dative in the phrase ol)ncbcm, ' at any rate.»
4. 53i8 may be followed by another preposition, indicating motion or
direction to (narf), ^u, an, auf, etc.) ; if this preposition is one governing
dat. or ace, it will always take the accusative when combined with bi«, as :
(Sr ging bis on'g 2;{)0iv he went as far as the gate.
61.
Prepositions with Dative.
The following additional prepositions take the Dative only :
1. Sinncn, within (of time), as: 33initcu },\m\ %a%m, within two days.
Notes. — i. S3innen sometimes governs ihe gcnitw''.
2. SBinnen is used of time only; innerrjalb (see § ) of space and time.
2. ««j0e'0en 'contrary to, as: | ^'''"^^ ^^''*f^""fl ^^tf^^fl^" (^unjiber),
3- .gi'^aiftcr I I contrary to my inclination.
4- ©Cgenuficr, opposite (to), follows the case, as :
Sent 2;i)ove gcgeniiber, opposite the gate.
Note. -The case is sometimes placed between the two parts of the preposition, as:
gegcn bein S^ore iiber; but this is not to be imitated.
5- ©Climg, according to, agreeably to, precedes or follows its case as:
oeincm SBunfAe geina§ (or gemdfj feinem SBuufc^e),
Agreeably to his desire.
6. @let^, like, precedes or follows its case, as :
®ie Idrfielte g(pici) cinent (2ngel (einem (gngcl gleic^),
She smiled like an angeJ.
7- 9lOfS]fl,or ) , ^ ^
Mi'iM i ""'^' '° ^^^ °^ Proximity (= KCoeit),
as
72
LESSON XIV.
[§§ 3X
i^
dt fa§ niirtjft mtr (or mir sunacf)fl),
He sat next to me.
(2) of succession, as :
9^ail)R i)em I'rbeii !iebt cr bie @f)re,
Next to life he loves honour.
no.iH ''''^' ""^-"f *^' r"'"' ^°""^' '*^ ^""'^ ' "«^f* '^ the commoner of the two as pre.
position, especially in the senses under (2) ^
9. 9omt ( *^Sether with, along with,as:
S)cr ,r^crr fain iicbft fetiiem ^^rcnnbe,
The gentleman came along with his friend.
3)cr 'iMitcr faint fciiica .^iiiibcvn,
The father together with his children.
Note ,. Distinguish ncbff, along with, and nebcit (alongside of, near).
2. Snmt is used of objects naturally belonging together, as above.
la 06 is poetical and obsolete for iibciv and denotes :
(1) above (of/^.///,;«), as: Ob Hem 3l(tare, above the altar.
(2) about, concerning, as : Gntruftet ob bicfem ^reUel, indignanf
about (at) this outrage.
Note. — In the latter sense it also takes a genitive.
LESSON XIV.
CONJUGATION OF fcilt, to be. - DECLENSION OF SUBSTAN-
TIVES. -WEAK OR -11 STEMS: - <^nttfie MODEL.
62. Paradigm of fctn, to be.
Principal Parts.
Pres. Infin. fcin IMPF. iNDic. Uior Past Part. geltJCfcn
Indicative.
id; Bin, I am
bu Iiift thou art
er tft, he is
t»ir finb, we are
i^r fcib, ye are
fie f(nb, they are
Present. Subjunctive.
icf; fci, I (may) be, etc.
bu feicft
er fei
U)ir [eicn
t^r [cict
fie feicn
52]
PARADIGM OF fein.
73
Indicative.
id) toor, I was
bu hjarft, thou wast
er Wax, he was
h)ir hjaren, we were
if)r tDaret, ye were
fie tt)aren^ they were
I have been, etc.
id) Bin
Subjunctive.
Imperfect.
id^twarc, (if) I were (might
be), etc.
bu tDjireft, thou wert
er toiire, he were
U)ir tuiiren, we were
ilf>r hjaret, ye were
fie n)(iren, they were
Perfect.
(Pres. of fcin + p. Part.)
bu bift
er ift
n)ir finb
ti^r feib
fie finb
I (may) have been, etc.
ic^fet
' gctccfen
1 had been, etc.
ic^ mot
bu lt»arft
er tx)ar
tt)ir ttjaren
il^r iuaret
fie hjaren
bu feieft
cr fei
U)ir feien
i^r feiet
fie ^mn
Pluperfect.
(Imperf. of (cm + P. Part.)
^ctnefen
^ gctoefen
I had (might have) been,
id) miire ] [etc.
bu toiireft
er WavQ
Wiv hJttren
i^r hjoret
fie tDiiren
gemefen
I shall be, etc.
id) lucvtc ) : ,
bu uirft )
Future.
(Pres. of toerbcn + infin. of fein.)
I shall be, etc.
id; luerbc ) , .
buiBcrhpff }'""
— I- <
74
LESSON xrv.
m sa-
lndicai!V9.
ei Juirb
U)ir irerben
tf)r tt)erbet
fie luerben
fcin
er merbe
it)ir mcrben
Subjunctive.
fetn
I shall have been, etc.
id; luerbe
bu toirft
er i»irb
n)ir hjerben
il^r njerbet
fie lucvben
gctticfcn fcin
gctocfctt fcin
i^r lucrbet
fie itjerben
Future Perfect.
(Future of fcin + P. Part.)
I shall have been, etc
id) n)erbe
bu tuerbeft
er hjerbe
tt)ir trerben
. i^r toerbet
fie tt>frben
Conditional.
Compound.
(Simple Cond. of fcin -f- Pas*
Part.)
I should have been, etc.
id) n?urbe
bu iDiirbeft
er tDitrbe
i»ir iDiirben
i^r JtJiirbet
fie tt)urben
Indicative,
(au) feiit, (to) be
gctticfcn (ju) fein, to have been.
Participles.
J^<fs/, ("jemcfcn, het'»
Remarks. — i. Observe the absence of the Subjuuc-M^e -e
in the I. and 3. sing. Pres.
Simple
Impf. Subj. of luerbcn + Infin
of fein.)
I should be, etc.
id; iDiirbe ^
bu tDiirbeft
er iDiJrbe
Wix miirben
i^r Mrbet
fie iDiirben
fcin
gcwcfcn fcin
Imperative,
fei (bu), be (thou)
fetb (i^r), be (ye)
J^res. feicnb, being
v^
53]
USE OF letn AS auxiliary of tense.
75
^ 2. The above paradigm shows the use of fein in forming
its own perfect tenses, in precisely the same way as f,a6en is
used with most verbs, eein is used in the same way with the
verbs mentioned in the following Section.
53.
Use of fein as Auxiliary of Tense.
Scin replaces f,aben as auxiliary of the perfect tenses with
the following netrter verbs :
(a) With those expressing a change of condition, as:
^*^^^^"' ^'^ U)ac^[cn, grow
genefen, recover (from illness) jucrben, become.
(^) With fl*«4cr verbs of motion when a change of
place is specified or implied, as :
fahren. drive, go (in a conveyance) !ommen, come
gefctn, go, walk ^{,^^11, move, go, proceed.
W Seiit, to be ; breiben, to remain ; Becjegnen, to meet ;
folg?n, to follow. '
(^) The M»personal verbs : gelingen, gliicfen, to succeed;
ge|ct)e^en, to happt-n.
Rkmarks.-i. The proper auxiliary to use with such
verbs is always given in the dictionary.
2 Other verbs of this sort only take fein when the chan-e
of place is specified.
3. Most of them (except fommen) take bahm when they
denote an ac/um merely, and not a specific rh.n-e of place, as:
@r f)at Diet gereift, he has trav^lkd a great deal.
4. Compounds d(, not necessarily take the same auxiliary
as the simple verb. Thus, kgohen, being transitive, takes
l;auen, the prefix ciianging the nature of the verb
76
LESSON XIV
[§§54-
64. Declension of bcr Bnobt, the boy.
Plural.
bie ^naben, the boys
ber ^naben, the boys', of
the boys
ben .^naben, (to, for) the
boys
bie ^naben, the boys
Singular.
Nom. ber ^nabc, the boy
Gen. beg ^naben, the boy's, of
the bov
Dat. bem ^nabett, (to, for) the
boy
Ace. ben ^naben, he boy
Obs:£Rve : i. All cases end in -n, except Nom. Sing.
2. No Umlaut added in Plural.
3. The only change is the addition of -n.
Remark.— The Plural ox-en is a remnant of the -n declen-
sion in English.
51?. Substantiates ending in a consonant add -en, as :
Singular, Plural.
Nom. ber ©raf, the count bie ©rafcn, the counts
Gen. beg ©rafcn, of the count ber ©rafeit, of the counts
Dat. bem ©rafcn, (to, for) the
count
Ace. ben ©rafctt, the count
ben ©rafcn, (to, for) the
counts
bie ©rafcn, the counts
66. Feminines do not vary in the singular, as :
Singular.
Nom. bie Stumc, the flower
Gen. ber 33(umc, of the flower
Dat. ber 33Iume, (to, for) the
flower
Ace. bie Slume, the flower
67. In this way are declined :
I. All masculines endinn^ in c, except bcr ."Rcifc, cheese (see
§ 17), and the doubtful ones in ^Gi.
Plural.
bie 33lumeH, the flowers
ber S3 lumen, of the flowers
ben 33Iumen, (to, for) the
flowers
bie ^(umen, the flowers.
57),
declension: — 5!naBc model.
77
2. Certain masculines which have droppea the final -e, as:
ber §elb, htro
ber §err, g ntleman, master
ber §irt(e), herdsman, shep-
herd
ber gjjenfc^, man (human be-
ins^ = L .t. homo)
ber S8ar, bear
ber 33auer, peasant
ber e^rift, christian
ber ©e[ea(e), fellow, companion,
journeyman
ber ©raf, count
A full List of these Substantives is given in App. F.
3. All feminines, except mxxiUx, XorfUer (§ 17, 3), the
monosyllables under § 22, 3, and those in -niS and -fal
(22,4). '
4. No Neuters (but see §§ 62, ^i).
5. Foreign Masculines accented on the Inst syllable, except
those m -al, -on, -ar, etc. (§ 22, 6).
Further Examples :
Like ^na6e :
Singular,
if. ber ^ott, messenger o. d. a. ^oten
ber gafc, hare
ber ^iefc, giant
ber di\x\\t, Russian
w. ber f&av, bear
ber gurft, prince
ber ^elb, hero
ber 9)tenfc^, man
ber ©tubent', student
ber Solbat', soldier
Plural.
N. a D. A. ^oten
^^V^ .^afen
S^i^feit gftiefeit
Like ©raf :
G. D. A. ^areit n. g. d. a. Sarctt
gurftcn g^urftcit
^^*ben ^elben
^enWen 2J?enWctt
©tubenteit ©tubenten
©olbatcn eolbctcn
Remark 1. 3)er §err, gentleman, master, lord, adds -n nni«
in the smg., but -en in plur. ' ^
76
LESSON XIV.
[§§57-
Sin^ntlar.
N. G. D. A. ^^(iime
Like !:i3lume:
Plural.
N. G. D. A. ^^ lumen
^^'^^^¥^i ed)on^eitcn
2Biffen[cr;aft 9B{[[cnfd;aften
Remark 2. Feminines in -cl, -ft add -n only in the Plur., as:
Sing, bie gebcr, pen piur. gebern
bie ©abcl, fork ©abem
bie e4)lue[tcv, sister (Sd;it)eftern
Remark j. Feminines in -hi double the n in the plur., as:
Sing, bie (^rafiil, countess Plur. ©rdfinncit
admire, 6ett)unbern
hasten, eilen
hunt, jagen
dwell, reside, live, lt)o6nen
astrologer, ber Slftrolog' w
lady, bie SDame v^
influence, ber ©in'flug* r
heathen, ber §eibe "^
comet, ber iRomef ^"^
landscape, bie Sanbfcf;aft ^
Vocabulary.
monarch, ber ?0^onarc^'vAi
news, bie ^Jiad;rid;t ^
nephew, ber ^;)ieffe w
planet, ber ^(anef ^'^
Prussian, ber ^^reuge -
raven, ber 9iabe
valley, bag 3:^al
happy, gludlid^
when, a(§, lt)enn
when ? UJann ?
58. When = )isst\\\\ always with Present, Perfect and
Future ; and also with Imperfect and Pluperfect, of a
habitual or repeated occurrence (= whenever), as :
I ahaays rose, when (i. e. whenever, njcim) the sun rose.
When == aU with Imperfect and Pluperfect only, of a
single, definite occurrence, as :
I rose vesterdav. xx/hen (n\iC\ fho o„« -^^^^
57-
59]
DECLENSION : — gnaU model.
79
When? interrogative = wonn? as:
When was your fatlier liere ?
aBttim tear 3(»r SJatcr tjier ?
Note. - Remember that Wenn also = " if."
59. Wlien a conditional or "if" sentence precedes tlie
principal sentence on wi.ucli it depends, the principal sentence
IS usually introduced by the particle fo, which is not to be
translated into English, or counted as a member of the sent.
Note. -A ]>rinci|>al sentence preceded by a .subordinate clause has
tlie subject after the verb, the si,l,ord. clause l>eim,. reckoned as a single
Idea (see § jo), as : SBJcnn ill) @e|b ijfittf, fo luiiibc id, Srtuiibc I)abcu. "
EXERCISE XIV.
^ 1. aSir luerben morgeii 311 unfercr ZanH in Ottaiua teifcn
-u" ?'"I". ^'* 3Jionar(^en finb mit bet 3iac§ric^t na4 aSarig
gee.It 3. 35.e3Jrmeme8 DJiefen finb fet,r tang unb ftat! 4.
ft !"Z."' ^"^'" ^"''"" f'"* f'^^ f*»" setoefen, abet iefet
fmb bie ©latter gelb getoorben. 5. J)er SJater ift i„ ber Stabt
getoefen unb ^at feinen finaben SBud,et getauft. 6. 3c^ ktounbre
b.e Sdjonbett btefet Sanbfc^aften. 7. Die ©c^uler unb ibr Sebter
tebeten »,el son ben %i,aUn ber §elbe„. 8. 2)ie Sc^uicr t^crben
r; *]"•"' """" f'' ■"" '^"' ^'^"'i f««8 finfe- 9. Sinb bie
Men §eiben? 3!ein, fie finb E^riften. 10. aJlein SJeffe .„ar
angetn SSerltn getoefm unb §atte bort bie SBiffenfc^aften ftubiert.
11. 5SReme ec§»eftet tear mit i^rer attbeit nic^t fertig, a(« i*
geftetn Bet .§r mx. 12. iWe Stftrotoge., rebeten m Jm ginf J
ber Aometen unb 5t5ra>.eten. 13. J..; ^e^ter lobte feine ©cbiiler
!!!!*^^® V]','*r-V'^^' f"* f"^'3 getoefen." 14. Sen,, ic^
nat^JDeutft^Ianb retfe, loetbe it^ ,neine Dijeime unb meine lanteit
befuc^en. 15. ©te finabe,. fatten Biet 58ergniigen, als fie b.e
^afen unb guc^fe burc^ Si^alber unb Ifjaler jagten. le! S,e
©tafmnm toaten fe^r gtiicHicft, at« fie bie 3Ja*ricf,t i^on ibrem
«>a.et t;o«en. 17. m( ^etrcn toerben ar„, rtetbe,., tpenn f.e i^x
So
LESSON XV.
[§§60-
C^clb [0 ucrfc^tDcnbcn. J 8. Unferc 9icffcn [inb lange bei nm
^. 1. The castles of the count are magnificent. 2 The
churches of this city are large and beautiful. 3. When will
your brother be at home ? 4. Are these soldiers Prussians >
No they are Russians. 5. The bears live in the forests,
b. Ihe boys have two ravens and three hares. 7. The
ladies have been in the church, but they are now at home.
8. Who was right.? 9. For a boy of (Don) five years he is
very large. 10. I should be happy, if I were rich. 11 He
has not been at home to-day. 12. When she was in the city
she lived at her aunt's. 13. Would the girl he contented, if
she were with her mother.? 14. The studencs became tired
because they had studied too much.
ORAL EXERCISE XIV.
1. Was hat Ihr Neffe in Berlin gemacht.? 2. Hatte ich
Kecht > 3. Wer eilte mit der Nachricht nach Paris .? 4
Haben Sie jemals Hasen oder Fiichse gejagt.? 5. Wann
wird mein Bruder zu Hause sein ? 6. Wiirde ich glucklich
sein, wenn ich reich ware }
V
LESSON XV.
MIXED DECLENSION. -DOUBLE PLURALS. - PREPOSITIONS
GOVERNING DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE.
Declension of ber 9lamt, the name.
60.
^ Singular,
Nom. ber 9^amc, the name
Gen. bc^ 9Zameng, of the name
Dat. bem Xiamen, (to, for) the
name
Ace. ben Seamen, the name
Plural,
bie ^o,Xi[t\^, the names
ber 9^amen, of the names
ben '^Xo.vci.txi, (to, for) the
names
bie ^JJamen, the names
CU-X^K . , llt^tA-
63J
DECLENSION :— ^amC MODEL.
8i
'B'
ber .^aufe, heap
ber (Same, seed
ber (Sd^abe, harm, injury
[pi. 3d)ttbcn]
ber SiHc, will
Observe: i. -c in the Norn. Sin
2. -cu all other cases.
3. No Umlaut, except in Sd;abe (see below).
Note. — The Nom. Sing, sometimes has -n.
V 61. In this way are declined the following masculines :
ber 33ud^ftabe, letter (of the Al- ber ©eban!c, thought, idea
phabet)
ber ^riebe, peace
ber Junfe, spark
ber ©laube, faith, belief,
creed
Also one neuter : ba§ ^erj, the heart (Ace. Sing. ^erj).
62. Some masculine and neuter substantives follow the
model of maitX (§ 16) or Sol^U (§ 21) in the singular, and
that of gmhc (§ 54) or @rof (§ 55) in the plural, as ;
5Der 9?a#ar, the neighbour: Sing. n.da. 9^acf)bar, g. 5Zac^=
3)a§ £)^r, the ear : Sing. n. a. Df)r, a Of)t(c)0, d. £)^r(c) ;
P/ur. D^reit.
63. In this way decline also :
1. Certain masculines, as :
ber ©taat, state ber SSetter, (male) cousin
ber <3traf)I, beam, ray
2. Certain neuters, as :
bag 2(uge, eye
bag 33ett, bed
(A full List of these substantives will be found in App. G.)
3. Foreign (Latin) masculines in unaccented -or, as :
ber ^rofef for, the professor : g. ^rofefiorg ; J^/ur. ^rofeffo'rcn.
ber ^ortor, the doctor : g. 3;o!toi'g ; Plur. 2)o!to''ren.
bag vSnbe, end
82
LESSOV XV.
64-
O-t. SUUSTANTIVKS WITH DourUK PlURAL.
The follovvin^,^ have double forms of the Plural, with a
aillerent meaning for each :
Sitigular.
ba^ 53anb, ribbon
ba^ 33anb, tie, bond
(bcr 58anb, volume
bie iBanf, bank (commercial)
bie "^(xvX, bench
bag (^cflc^t, face, countenance
bag @efi4)t, vision
ber Saben, shop
ber Saben, shutter
bag Sanb, land, country
bag 2anb, province
PluraL
33ttnbcr
^ttnbc
SBttnbf)
Sanfcn
Sanfc
©efic^tct
©efic^tc
Siiben
Sttben
;?ttnbcr
Sanbc
bag iffiort, ( --'^^■^''^^ ^vo^ds considered separately
word ' / ^''^^f/ '^ords considered comiectedly
\ (as making sense)
Remark. -The plural Sanbc is also used in poetical lan-
guage ; and in the compound bie ^JJieberlanbe, the Netherlands
(= Lower Provinces).
65. Prepositions governing the Dative or
Accusative.
The following nine prepositions govern the Dative when
hey indicate /..^///, „,erely, or answer the question
where?' or 'in what place?'; the Accusative when
they imply motion, direction or tendency (figurative motion)
towards, or answer the question 'whitlier?' or 'to whJ
place or person ? ' ; ^^
<>«^ auf. Winter, in, itcacw,
uftctr, ttntcr, tJor and jmifc^cii.
[§§ 64-
«5] P^ 'OSniOiNS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 83
an.
)f pla<x)
surface
non-
horizontal.
(fl) With DAT. on, upon rndjacent to), as :
The pictur* " 1 the wall (an
bcr 21' mb;.
ip) With ^ c, to, towards, on, as :
I hi ig the picture on the v/all (an
bic 3Banb).
2. (of time, date) with dat. only, on, upon, as :
I was born r ^ the eighteenth of August (am
aci>t5ef)nten ..> ,iu[t).
He will arrive on Monday (mu 5!Jtontag).
Observe : that in this use the Prep, and Article are always
contracted.
onf, (of place) :
{a) With DAT., on, upon {on top of)^ as :
The book lies on the table (auf
bcm %\\&j),
(jf) With ACC, to, towards, on, as :
I lay the book on the table (auf
ben Sifc^).
Winter, behind :
{a) With DAT., as: The dog lies behind the stove
(Winter bcm Dfen).
{b) With ACC, as : The dog goes behind the stove
(Winter ben Dfen).
fn, I. (of place) :
{a) With DAT., in, as : The gardener is in the garden
(tm ©arten).
ib) With ACC, into, as : The gardener goes into the
garden (in bcn ©arten).
surface
horizontal
/ ■ *
}
P'>-»A
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
^
^-A^
'Q.
Cl
%
Wa
%
1.0
I.I
1.25
I4S "
Ui 1^ III
i. ^.
2.5
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.4
1.6
%
V]
c'l
^
>
>%
//
'>>
'^V- v-«
/A
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
#
iV
^^
A^'
\
%
v
^^^
^T
'^.
'■^
73 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, NY. 14S80
(716) 87!2-4S03
^^
W
&».
t/.
84
LESSON XV.
[§65
2. (of fme) in (with dat. only), as : God made the
world in six days (in fec^tf %aQtn).
ntfim, near, alongside of, by ;
(a) With DAT., as : The chair sfands near (by) the
tab:e (ncben bcm 2tfc^c).
(^) With Acc, as : I ^/ace the chair near the table
(ncficn ben ^ifd;).
iifier, i. (of />/a<:e) over, above :
(a) V/ith DAT., as : The bridge /. over the river (nhcv
(^) With ACC, as : I go over the river (iificr bcn ^lug).
2. (of ^^^^x.f) over, above (with acc. only), as • He
remained over (more than) two days (uhtt mi
Xagc).
3. about, concerning (with acc. only), as : He spoke
with me about his journey (ii^r feine 9Jei[e).
Untcr, I. {oi place), under, beneath, below:
{a) With DAT., as : The cat lies under the chair (mitt
bcm etur;Ie). ^
(P) With ACC, as : The cat creeps under the chair
(untcr bcn ©tu^I).
2. (of number) among :
W With DAT., as: The wolf is among the sheep
(untcr bcn ®d;afcn).
{b) With ACC, as : The wolf mingles among the
sheep (nntci* bic ©c^afc).
I. (of place) before, in front of :
(a) With DAT., as : The chair stands before the wiiv
dow (tior licm genfter).
tior.
§65] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 85
(/^) With Acc, as : Place the chair before the window
(lior§ (^cnfter).
2. (of order) before (with dat. only), as: He came
before me (tior mir).
3. (of time^ before, ago (with dat. only), as :
He came before two o'clock (tior "pzx U^v)-
He came two hours ago (tior jmei 6tunben).
JtOifll^en^ between (of two objects) :
{a) With DAT., as : The chair standi between the
door and the window (jtnifl^en bcr ^^iire unb
bcm J^enfter).
(h) With ACC, as : Put the chair between the door
and the window (jltlifr^cn bic Vcjxxxt unb bag
'(^enfter).
Remark. — Observe the following contractions wi:h the
unemphasized Definite Article :
an bem = nm in bem = m '
an ba§ = anS in ba§ = tnS
auf bag = aufg
Also the following, which are of less frequent occurrence:
Winter bem = ^interm unter bem = unterm
Hnter ba§ = f^interg unter bag = unterg
iiber bem = iiberm bor bem = tjorm
iibev bag = iiberg bor bag = borg
Vocabulary.
please, lit., (I) beg, (I) pray, lay, legeu
(id)) bitte
hang (trans.), ^angen ^
fetch, bring, get, f)oIen v/
hear, bbren ^
hunt, chase, pursue, jagen ^
\H
put, place, set (down), fe^en w
put, place, set (upright),
ftetten ^
seek, look for, fud^en ^
kill, tijten w
86
LESSON XV.
[§§65-
wait (for), fvaxttn (auf + acc..^
strawberry, bie Grbbecrc w
fire, ba^ ^euer ^
Netherlands, bic 9^ieberlanbe w
philosophy, bie $^iIo[o|)l^ie' vV
stove, ber Of en*/
school, bic ©d^ule "^
door, bie 3:^ur(e) ^
difference, ber Unterfdjieb '2-
university, bie Hnik)erfitat ^v
dictionary, ba^ ^bxUvhud) 3
open, offen
heavy, hard, [cl^it)er
ten, geBn
thereupon, on it, etc., barauf
first, not before, erft
if you please, gefdaigft
no longer (lit., not more),
nic^t me^r.
where, h)o
in order to, urn (foil, by infin.
with gu at end of clause)
EXEBOISB XV.
^. 1. Sener mam fe^te fic^ gegen meinen SBiaen auf bie
ifAt? r^r^i'f ^^^^- '• ^Barum^cnmeine'^ettern
uber (at) tiTtc^ getac^t? 4. 3J?etn Skater tt)irb «ng am ^ntag
ober (am) ©lengtag in bie ©c^ule fc^icfen. 5. ^er ©oBn unb
3Batbe. 6. aKetnJBater unb meine abutter finb feit brei ^oc^en
auf bem Sanbe. 7. ^ie 33anfen trerben erft morgen um ^efcn Ubr
offen fern 8. Segen eie gefdHigft biefe ianbeUen S a
b^ ^anf. 9. 2)er .^ouig ber ^ieberlanbe reifte burc^ feb
etaaten unter bem 9Zamen eineg ©rafen. 10. ^er ^ri/be beg
§errn ei mit euc^. 11. 2)er ©raf [c^icfte feinen ®ofn anf bie
Um.a:ft tat. 12. ^a. ^inb ift fe^r fran! unb bie LtU Z
S iT 'r^K ''•• ^^'^'^' ^^^^^" ^''' f^ ^«"9e bor ber
Xl)ure ^ 14. 2^ie ^erren jagten ben ^aren Winter ben 2BaIb tt)o
ftc t^n toteten. 15. ^m SlUnter fe^en t.ir un. oft .or faf^eue
unb ben>unbern bic ^unfcn. 16. Unferc .^er,en h,erben imm
raung n,enn nnr 9?ac^rid;t bom ^riege r;oren. 17. m, ift I
I nterfd;teb 3imfd;cn ben sil^ortcvn il^anfen unb^dnfc^ 18 ^ic
migen be., etubcnten finb fd;tuad;, toei( er ju .id ftubieri f;at
19. ^e^en ®te ftc^ auf biefen ©tu^l, benn ^ie finb mube. 20
66]
ANOMALIES OF DECtENSION.
87
33ttte, ^ttUixi 8ie tnir biefen ©tu^l Winter ben Ofen. 21. ^ie
etubentcn lernen bom ^rofeffor bie dhmn ber ©otter ber9f{bmer.
M. 1. The children were playing before the house. 2.
What is the name of this professor > His name is Schmidt.
3. Hang the picture of my father over the door. 4. Every
human being ha-« two eyes and two ears. 5. Why do the
professors praise their students? (5. The professors praise the
diligence of their students. 7. The difference between my
brother and me is not great. 8. I laid the pens upon the
table, but they are no longer there. 1). Our neighbop.rs sent
their children into the wood to search for flowers. 10. Our
cousin lived hnppy and in peace with his neighbours. 11.
The pupils would look for the words in a dictionary, if they
had time. 12. Your eyes are tired, because you have studied
too much. 13. These words are hard to learn, for every
word has ten letters. 14. Place this chair, if you please, be-
hind the stove for me. 15. If Charles is not ready, we shall
go (reifen) without him to Germany.
ORAL EXERCISE XV.
1. Wann wird Ihr Vater Sie auf die Universitat schicken?
2. Weshalb hat die Mutter die Doktoren geholt.? 3. Was
lernten die Studenten von den Professoren > 4. Werden Sie
ohne mich nach Chicago reisen .? 5. W^o reiste der Konig
der Niederlande ? 6. Wann werden die Kirchen offen seini
66.
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B.
ANOMALIES OF DECLENSION.
Substantives without Plural.
The following classes of substantives are used in the singular only :
I. Proper names, unless they denote a class (as: bk ^Knfadc, painters
///r Raphael), or several individuals of the same name (as; bie Oicr erftCU
i)etnrid)f, the first four Henries, i. e., kings of that name).
88
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B.
■
[§§66-
2. Names Of materials, etc., unless they denote different iinjs of the
an,e .natenal (a.. (Stiiirr, ©aljt, diff.renl /.W. of grass^samtthe'
«.ey have a special leaning ^^ .. s,,„, ,„„, „, J^^^J ^^^^ '^^^^
A list of these is giver, in App. H.
For the plural of nouns of measure, etc., see Less. XXX.
67. Substantives without Singular.
The following classes of substantives are used in the olural only
or ;e.teC:hetra^t "'''''"' ""''' ^^^"^^"' ''' ^^""^-^^ ^^^ ^'^f-n
2. The following names of festivals etc • <mpif.n«A+„« r^u •
5af,o„,Len.= Of.«„, Hasten Wnsftenrpteco^SulMt;""""'
'■ '^"'^f'^"' ''i""'»"'>>S. viz.: atpcn, Alps; SBrilltleibcr trm,
sers; 8„rf|d,„f,™ documents, gi„,,i„(,e, incom; tvenul @(, ^
parents; gfneii, holidays; ©liebmofien limh,. ¥,(.„ T '
«.f.m,U„tof,c„,expenseI;'tc„tc,p":^L: ^oto, ctt: ''^''' ^""'
yJLZifz^z';z'u '• '"'"^""^^^ ''""■«-"''"•■ -««=
(a) Regularly when denoting «^& ;W,i.,v/«„& or occupations a,.
ste"sr„"' '"'^"''^' '*"•""""""' -- °^ '-™- ®~'Jr;
(^) By changing -monn into -|cu(e, when used «/to,w„ „, ,„ ,
e(,cl«fe, mamed people; .*Ja»bcl«Icute, trades - people ■ JanS'
country-people; ?anb«le„te, people of the same country/sw ! '
lodgers (male and female). ^ ' -^""®»f"«/
2. ®ic OI|nmad)t, the fainting-fit, and bie 'HoUmn*, ,u^
attorney ,f™n, m,«t, pl. 3KS,f,t.t hive the 1. S- ^ Z^ '
the answer (frotn m «ort, pl. «„v.e and ffiirte,), h« "l. ';;.^"'"'°"'
70] SUMMARY OF DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 89
69, Special Cases, i. A few substantives in m viz • 9rtpm
Obem «robem breath ; «rofam, crumb ; (gibam, son-in-]a;, foil'ow t^e
mux model (§ 16) m the sing. The plur.. if it occurs, ends in -e (6unb
model, § 21, d, no Umlaut), except ^rofam, which is more commonly
wfafi m the plur. (-etl). '
2. Weak feminines are often found with the old weak gen. and dat in
-en, especially when used without article after a preposition, as : ailf
erben, on earth (but auf bcr Gibe, on the earth) ; ju ei)ren, in honour of
lit (dJnabeii/ m mercy, etc.
LESSON XVI.
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-RECAPITULATlON.-PROPER
NAMES. -PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE.
70. Summary of Declension of Substantives.
The following tables show the endings of the various forms
of Substantive Declension :
A, Strong Declension.
I. ^aUx Model.
(Contracted Form.)
Sing.
Nom.
Gen. g
Dat.
Ace.
Plur.
-(n)
II. ©o^n Model.
(Primary Form.)
Sing, Plur.
—t
— e
—en
— c
-(00
-(c)
III. ®orf Model.
(Enlarged Form.)
Plur.
Sing.
-(c)l
-(c)
— er
— er
—cm
— cr
Remarks. — i. The term ♦ Strong Declension ' is applicable
to all the three forms given above.
2. The @o^n Model is sometimes called the Primary
Form of the Strong Declension, and shows the -« of Gen.
Sing, and -c of the Plur. From this are derived the other two
forms, viz. :
90
LESSON y.vi.
7^-
3. By contraction (dropping -c of the termination), the
3JZaIer Model, hence called also the Contracted Form of
the Strong Declension ; and
4. By enlargement (adding -r in the Plur., the Sing, remain-
ing the same), the ^orf Model, hence also called the En-
larged Form of the Strong Declension.
5. Feminines remain unchanged in the Sing.
6. The Umlaut may occur in any of these forms, viz.:
generally in masc. monosyllables, regularly in feminines and
in Enlarged Form ; never in neuter monosyllables of Primary
Form. (See Lists, App. A., B., C, E.)
B. Weak Declension,
^nabe, ©raf, 33lume Model.
Sing. Nom. (e) piur.
Gen. (e)n
Dat. (e)n
Ace. (e)n
■(On
-(c)n
-(c)n
-(c)tt
Observe: i. The persistent -it. 2. The absence of Urn
laut. 3. Uniformity of Cases. 4. Feminines unchanged in
Sing.
C, Mixed Declension.
I. 9?ame Model.
Sing. N. — c Flur, — n
G. — nj — n
D. -tt -n
A. — n — n
II. mc^bar, D^r Model.
Sing. Plur. — (c)n
-(e)8 -(c)n
-(c) -(e)tt
-(e)tt
Remarks. — i. All three follow the ^nabe Model in the Plur.
^. The mme Model is a Mixture of the 3}?a(er and ^nabe
models in the Sing., usually taking -g in the Gen., sometimes
-tt in the Nom.
7a]
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES.
91
3. The Jlaii)hax Model follows the maUv Model in the
Sing.
4. The Dl)v Model follows the Bo^n Model in the Sing.
71. The Essential Parts for the Declension of a Sub-
stantive are :
The Nominative Singular,
The Genitive Singular, and
The Nominative Plural.
These being given, the remaining cases of the noun can be
formed from the above Tables, with the assistance of the
following :
Remarks.— I. All Feminines are unchanged in the Sing.
2. The Nom. and Ace. Sing, are always alike, except in
the Weak Declension (^nabe, ©raf and ^arm models).
3. The Gen. Sing, ends in -g in Masculines (except in
the Weak Declension) and in a// Neuters.
4. The Nom., Gen. and Ace. Plur. are a/ways alike.
5. The Dat. Plur. always ends in -n.
Decline the following substantives throughout :
bcr geiertag, bie @(^n)ener, ber ©laube. ilftamein,
Declension of Proper Names.
72. Geographical Proper Names :
1. If never used without an article, etc. (see § 44, 2, 3), are
declined like common nouns, as : ber dif)m, o. beg m'ein(c)g
D. bem 9t^ein(c); bie (Scanjets, o. ber ©c^ivei^, d. ber ©c^hjets, etc!
2. If not generally used with an article, etc., they take no
•ending except -g in the Gen. Sin^r. rnnl
-.jS tney eriu \ii
lii U
92
LESSON XVI.
[§§ 7a-
sibilant), as: ^cutWIanb, Germany, o. ^cutfcf;ranb0 ; Jranf.
rcid;, France, g. grantrcid;8 ; ))iom, Rome, o. .^K oiii0.
3. If they end in a s/d/Aw^ (», fij, 3, ^ j), the Gen. is
replaced by the preposition Uoii, as: 3)ie iScfcftipngen Hn
$arie', the fortifications of Paris.
4- ©on may replace the Gen. with other names also, and
is always used after titles, as : 3)ic 5li)mgin bott Gnglanb, the
Queen of England ; ber SBurgermdftcr tioit Toronto, the Mayor
of Toronto.
5. When the Name of a Place is preceded by a common
noun, they are in apposition to each other, but the proper
name is not inflected, as : ^ic ®tabt Soitboil (not tion Sons
bon), the City of London, g. bcr etabtSonbon. 2)a§ ^onigreic^
gJrcugcit, the Kingdom of Prussia, g. beg 5li3mgrcid;g ^reujen.
6. Proper Names of Places are not used in the Plural.
73. Proper Names of Persons are now inflected in the
Gen. Sing, only, as follows :
1. If preceded by an article, etc. (which shows the case)
they remain unchanged, as : The letters of Cicero, bie iSriefc
beg Sicero.
2. If not preceded by an article showing case, etc., those
ending in a sibilant, and Feminines in -c, add -(c)ng in the
Gen. ; all others add -§ only, as : Slay, g. Maitm ; Souifc, a
Souifcng ; .^arl, g. !^axU.
Remark. — Surnames and classical names in a sibilant
now commonly take an apostrophe instead of -cnl, as:
Dpi^' SBerfc, Opitz's works.
74. Family Names are used in the Plural with added -g,
as in English, but without article, as : the Schmidts, ©d;mibt^
(meaning the members of the Schmidt family).
Further Remarks on the Declension of Proper Names and of Foreign
Substantives will be found in Supp. Less. C*. below.
[§§7a-
; Jranfs
Gen. is
0cn Hon
Iso, and
an'b, thft
; Mayor
lommon
proper
on Sons
Jnigreic^
Jreugen.
ral.
I in the
; case)
J iSriefe
, those
g in the
>uifc, G.
iibilanl
\^, as:
ied -I
d;inibtg
Foreign
75]
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE.
93
76. Prepositfons Covernino thk Genitive.
I. llOcpCU, on account of, on behalf of, for the sake of
(sometimes foUoivs its case), as : I remained at home on
account of (for the sake of) my child, (tucgett tneinee
i^inbc0).
Note. — SBcgeu always foll<nus the Gen. of the Pers. Prons., which
are then written in one word with the preposition, and have special forms
ending in -t as: mcincttucflcn, for my sake; iljrctlucgcn, for her (their)
sake; unjerttUCfleil, for our sake, etc.; also with the Relative and
Demonstr. bcr: bere(it)tiuegen (Sing. Fern, and Plur. = «for the sake of
whom, which, that,' etc.).
2. aOtt^rcnb, during, as: We went out walking during the
rain (mH^tcnb bc8 Sflugcnfii).
3. <Stott, or anftott, instead of, as : He will come instead
of his friend (ftatt, or oilftott feincg i^reunbcd).
The other preps, with gen. will be found in Lesson
XXXVIII.
Vocabulary.
:^ive, present, make a present Henry, §einricl^
of (foil, by dat. of person
and ace. of thing), fc^en!en
library, bie SiOliotfjef ^^
bookseller, ber 33ud/f>dnbler i
cousin (fern.), bie (Soufine w
Elizabeth, ©lifabet^
Europe, @uro'))a i
festivity, bie geftlic^feit '^
Frederick, ^riebrid^
Fred, Freddy, %x\%
poem, bag ©ebid^t "^
George, ©eorg
Greece, (bag) ©riec^enlanb
capital (city), bie §au)3tftabt*^ clear, !(ar
Ireland, (bag) Srianb
Margaret, SJlargarete
speech, oration, bie 9lebc ^
St. Lawrence, ber ©t. (©anct)
So'renj
Sarah, 8ara
Scotchman, ber (Sd^otte
street, bie ©trafee W
Thames, bie %\jm^\% ^
work, bag 2Ber! ">
William, 5Bil^eIm
broad, wide, &reit
high, j^od^
94
LESSON XVI.
m 75-
turbid, muddy (of water),
triibc
soon, balb
everywhere, iiberaCC
Idioms, to b« on a vl8it at (any one'*), auf «<fu(i, feiii bd; M a birth-
day present, juiii (dcburttftcg.
EXERCISE XVI.
-4. 1. ^er MUv toon ^eutfc^lanu ift aud^ mnxQ Don ^rcujen.
2. 2)ie 33erge ©nolanbg unb ^rlanbg finb nic^t ^oc^, aber bie
33ergc ber ec^toeij finb ^oc^ unb ^rac^tig. 3. SSir f*iibiercn bic
53netc bee; gicero. 4. earag Goufine t^ar bci \{)x auf S3efuc^,
aber je^t ift fie fort. 5. gjiutter^ h)aren oeftern bei un^g, aber
toir n)aren nic^t 3u §aufe. 6. 2Ba^ ift ber ?Jame beg Surfler.
meifterg t)on Sonbon? 1. mm SSater ^at mir Seffin^g 2berfe
unb ^eineg Sieber gum ©eburt^tag gefc^enft. 8. 2luf meiner
9leife befud;te ic^ bie Stabte Sonbon, ^:parig,, Berlin unb diom.
9. 3)ie gluffe Ganabag finb groj, aber bie gluffe ©riec^enranbg
finb flein unb furj. 10. 28ir merben bie 33Iumen fiti eo^(>ie auf
ben ^ifc^ ftetten. 11. griebric^g gjtutter fc^enft l\)m Bop^iod^
aSerfe, benn ^eute ift fein ©eburtstag. 12. ^a^ 2Baf?er be«
©anct Snrens ift flar, aber bag 2Baffer ber ^I^emfe ift triibe. 13.
Souife, f}oU (Bop\)k unb ©lifabetb unb loir toerben einen ©^ajiev*
gang im 2Salbe mac^en. 14. ^;efei (Sd;otte rebet biel 'oon
.^urng' ©ebid;ten. 15. ^einric^g greunbe ioerben balb nac^
©nglanb reifen, unb fie toerben aud) granfreid; befud5>en. 16. ®ie
©tra^en Xorontog n)aren tDafjrenb ber geftlid;feiten fe^r fd^on.
n. aSeg^alb ftubieren ©ie bie 9leben beg :i)emDft^eneg? i8.*
2lm g^reiwg ober ©onnabenb n)erben toir nad; ^ingfton reifen
urn Souifc unb 3}Zargarete gu befuc^en. 19. ©eorg ift je|t bei
feinem 33etter gri^ auf Sefuc^. 20. 2(m ©onntag toaren toir
toegen beg ©turmeg §u §aufe. 21. ^^ ^abe in ber ©d[jn)eia mci^t
biel 35ergnugen gefjabt, loeil ic^ auf ber ^ieife fran! itjar.
B. 1. Charles, bring Freddy and Max, and we shall play
in the garden. 2. We have looked for William's book every-
where. 3. The streets of Paris are wide and beautiful. 4.
[§8 75-
76]
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES.
9S
Who has bought these <r\ovcs for Kmma ? 5. The c^^v of
Ottawa is the capital of Canada, <;. We live in Canada, Dut
our parents live m Germany. 7. We have presented flowers
to Elizabeth and Mary. 8. You have Goethe's works in
your library. 9. I bought Schiller's miiuun Tell at (bei) a
bookseller's in Hamilton. 10. We learn in this book the
names of the gods of the Romans. 11. The Schmidts visited
us yesterday. 12. What is the capital of Switzerland.? 13.
My father sent me instead of Max, because Max was too tired.
14. The city of Berlin is the capital of the kingdom of
Prussia. 15. Would you. be happy, if you were rich ?
ORAL EXERCISE XVL
1. Wer ist Konig von Prftussen ? 2. Wo war Saras Cou-
sine.? 3. Was hat Ihr Vater Ihnen zum Geburtstag ge-
schenkt 1 4. Sind die Strassen Torontos immer schon .? 5.
Weshalb warsn wir am Sonntag zu Hause .? 6. Was ist die
Hauptstadt Canadas ?
18.
4.
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C.
PROPER NAMES. -FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES.
76. Further Remarks on Declension of Proper Names.
1. Proper names of town?, governed by a preposition in the genitive,
do not take -g, as : imUJeit .^ambuvg, not far from Hamburg.
2. Names of persons, even if preceded by an article, etc., take -3 in
the genitive .e/ore a governing noun, as: beS fleinen ^artS 33ii(^er (but
bie 58ud)er bcv? tieiiien ^ad).
3. Feminine names frequently take -(e)n in the dat. and ace, especially
if they end in -e, as : Couife, d. a. Souifen.
4. Family names (and even Christian names) formerly added -{t)n in
the dat. and ace, and re usually so found in the classics, as:
@oetl)e, D. A. ®oett)ett
(Sdlilier, " @cf)iUern
^o.x\, « ^ortii
^effing, " ^effingen
Note. — This inflection b now obsolete and not to be imitated.
I
96
SUPPLEMENTARY I ESSON C
TC-.
■
noun as ^J.r' ""^ ^' ''''"' "'"'' " the ^.;.V^., preceded by a common
enirnVL'^tfr''"''-^.''"''^^'^'^'^^' '^^ P'-^P^^ "^"^^ takes the genitive
endmg the title remaming undeclined and having no article J mZ
§einrid)0 ®ol)nc, King Henry's sons. ' "^'^"^^
{/>) If the governing word precedes, the title has the article anr, th.
^^sSr^: -- -- — undeciined,r;i:e5;:;:
^^^to:^lzi^i:;:i::,^^- ^" ^-^ -- -- ^s: ...
6 In the case of a Christian name without article, connected with a
family name preceded by Don (indicating noble rank) : ^
(^) When the governing word >//...., the family name only is de
chned, as : ^viebtvf) tjon ®c^i(ler5 @cbirf)te. ^ ^"
{^) When the governing word precedes onlv i\^,^ r\..\.^-
declined, as: ®ie @cbid,teViebnd;^ ^^f ^c^Tul '^'"^ ^^
• ,r T^^i "^"''' °^ '''' ^^''^°"'' ^'^"^ ^''^•if^"^/ "dually both follow the
^.ahn declension, thus : n. .^efu0 S{,riftu8, G. ^efi dhriftl d ^fu ffhW .«
_ ^OTE. - Other biblical names, if without article, also follow the Lati-, infl...-
oally n, the gen., as : SDa. (S.angelium St. ^att^a'i, the Gospel of St Matthew"' "'"
77. Declension of Foreign Substantives.
1. Most foreign substantives follow one or other of the regular form,
of declension, all feminines being weak. ^ ""*
2. Most masculines and neuters from the Latin, ending in -«« have
tnmZtt'^''\^' "^^' "^ case-inflection in either^numbe; ^I
ber areobtti?, the mood: n. g. d. a. i».^. a«ob«0, />/«.. ^Jfobi • bei LuV
the case: N. G. D. a. ^/;.^. ^o^vii, Plur. ^aftt^ ' ba« 2:emZ' thlr '
2. 2)er 2rtra3 has pi. bic 2ltranten.
.h/^eltr"" "°* ''""' "' ®™'* -'"' '"' "=^'- "■ '» -'"• -d .ake -, ,„
3- Neueers in -a from the Greek, and in -„„, from .he I.a,i„ ,ak. 8
[§§76^
8o]
GENDER ACCORDING TO MEANING.
espe.
97
theme Plur. ^f,cmcn ; bae ,^nbidibn«m, the individual. G. Sing. 3nbH,i-
bnnn.3, Plur. .s.ibiDibuen ; ba« i^nOum, the verb, />/,,,.. bie i?e4n
Note. -Das ^lima, the climate, has pi. iUimato or .ftUmateil.
4. Neuters from Latin Substantives with plur. in -ia add -% in the Ren
smg., often dropping the Latin sing, termination, and form the plur in
-ten, as: bag 5(bUcrb(ium), the adverb, g. ^/;.^. 5lbm-b(inm)g Plur 9Tb
Plur. Ireinobr"" ^"'' ^«^^f^'"°^' the jewel, has Plur. meinobien as well as the regular
5- Masculines and neuters of recent introduction from modern lan-
guages take -g in the gen. sing., and add -g to form the plur., as : 2ovhS
eiubg, ^ofag, Saiiquierg, ^^ortrait^, ^oB, etc. '
Note. - Italian words are also found with their proper foreign plur., as Soil, Gonti.
78. The Article with Names of Persons.
Besides the cases specified in § 73, i, above, the article is used with
names of persons :
I. Colloquially ^nd familiarly, as: Ucr ^ax\, W ?OUi[e
lingio^^'" *^'^ '^'"°''' ^ '^"''^ ""'' citt SBeUington, a (.,.«« //^.) v/el-
^J;of'^°? "^"''' ""^ P^''"t"^gs, etc., named from a pers., etc, as: cin
Mm, a {A'^-,«^ 4^) Rafael; i,ic 9,^emi8 Don 2)^(0, the {statue of)
Yenus of Milo. ■' '
LESSON XVII.
€NDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. - INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
AND ADJECTIVES.
79. The Gender of Substantives is determined in German ■
T. by Meaning ; or
II. by Form (Ending, etc.).
80. I. Gender as determined by Meaning.
I. Masculine are names of:
{a) Males, as : ber maxin, the man ; tJCr 4)elb, the hero.
I
98
LESSON XVII.
R§8o-
Remap.k : But diminutives in -Afii inrf f.i-
fcaS mmUin or mnnd,m. '" ''' "'"'"' "= =
Dcr 3anuar, January ; bcr Wittmd), Wednesday
W ^««.. ./M. ..«^.„, ,3 : ier 9Jorb(.„), the north.
2. Feminine are names of:
dau^^L^""'"' "•• *"' ^-"' "'^ — „. bie Soc^ter, the
Remark : But baS Sei6, the woman is nentPr . ,i j- ■
tives in -,Jc„ and -Wn as- h«; ^ ^ ,^' '^'""""■
daughter; b«* 2Rab<^ 'the drl b.S^f ,*'"' f' ""'^
lady. ' ^ ' ""^ Swulein, the young
(i) ^'■'^", plants, fruits 3.M flowers z^T^^r-W^, =.. s- ^-^
3. Neuter are names of :
iN GTE. ~ ^Cr @tal)I, Steel, is Masc.
®e6ir8. the Jo'unSS:'^" '^'""'"^ ^'^"^ ®'-' ^^ ^ *««
W G7a«/r/« and /wt,/w^.f almost always as • (i,„i\ ,? .
Europe; (b««) 6„„afc„. j^i.^^s cities totn, ^^f^""'"^^'
<^'-.. as: (b„,) ^«„^„,,,. (ba'^S/w ^"'^'"' ""=•'
Remarks. -I. Names of countries and provinces in „•
s"ar^ '^"""'-' -■ «' ^«'H Tur4:brei"4
82]
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 99
2. Names of countries, etc., when not neuter, always have
the definite article (see § 44, 3).
{li) Infinitives, letters of the alphabet, and other parts of
speech (except Adjectives used of persons, and Cardinal
Numerals; see 2, c, above), used as Substantives, as: bad
Sac^en, the (act of) laughing; bttg % the (letter) A; ba0 ^c^,
the I; bo8 2Senn unb bag 2l6er, (the) *if ' and (the) 'but.'
Give the gender of the following Substantives, assigning the rule in
each case: Slpril, @oIb, (grbbecrc, 3:ocf)tcv, (Suropa, 33ifcf)of, bonbon, 3urQ,
9?ubin (ruby), 2Ballarf)ei (Wallachia), Unredjt, @uben (South), @elb,
^aufen, @ommer.
81. Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives.
The Interrogative Pronouns are :
1. tDcliJcr? which? — Definite.
2. tucr? who? ) ,
•} »«..» Q u ^ ■» r ~~ Indefinite.
3. iDaS f what ? )
82. aSBcl^cr? is declined after the biefer Model, but, as
Pronoun, lacks the Gen., thus :
Singular.
NEUTER.
dLU
Remarks.— I. 2BeIc^er? asks 'which of a number.?' of
persons or things, and agrees in gender with the noun follow-
ing it, as;
SBeld^er i)on biefen 9Wonnern iff f)ier getoefen?
Which of these men has been here >
SSeld^cg Don biefen Siirjcrn ^abcn ©ie
Which of these books have you had ?
MASC.
Nom. ireld^cr
Gen. ■ ■ ■
Dat. n)elc^cm
Ace. iuelc^cn
FEM.
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
h?e(d;c, whiph
toelc^cn, (to, for)which
hjetd^e, which
?
100
LESSON XVII.
[§§83
2. The neuter sing. n,clr^c0 is used before the verb 'to be '
irrcspcct.vely of the gender or number of the subject (com-
pare the snnihir use of e^, § 39, i), as :
Which is your sister (brother)?
2BeId;c0 ift ^Ijxc ©d;h)efter (^sl)v Sruber)?
Which are the children of the count?
2BeId;c£i finb bic ^inbcv bc^ ©rafcn ?
MASC. AND FEM. ^^^^^^
Nom. iuer,who? tt)a§, what?
Gen. iucifcn (or iuc^5), whose, of lucffcn (or h)c^) of
'^'^^^"^ what
Dat. tucm, (to, for) whom
Ace. iucn,whom iuag, what
Remarks. - x. JlBcr is used of persons only, for all gen,
ders and both numbers, as : .r» t gen
^/'/^. An'r fino bicfe gWanitcrV etc.
2. SBttS is not used of persons.
3. Sog is never used in the T^ative. In the Dat. or Ace
With prepositions, mv, is replaced by m (^ov before vowels)*
placed ..>. the preposition (compare § 38, Rem. 5, fS
similar use of btt), as : ^ ' • i> ^^i^
^.rauffi^.., eU? On what (whereon) are you sitting?
aCoton fprcc^c, ^,c? Of what (whereof) are you speaking »
Note. - SB„„„„ , = fo, „;,,,, „,^^^f^^^_ ^^^ , ^^^ ^^^____^^
4. With prepositions governing the Gen., mti is used before
wher^^r^h^; '- "*^"'^' »'*'"'«-'^ - -"- -oun,
5, The u^uter Gen {nr'ffmP I't: ' j
o VTcn. ,v,||vu ,r IS i^iciy used, except as above.
86] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. Id
6. 3Ba§ is sometimes used (as interrog. adv.)ior toarum, why?
(For the use of lya§ for cttvag, see under etltJag, § 149, i.)
84r The Interrogative Adjectives are :
1. ttictr^cr, mclr^C, mclt^cg? which? what ? — Definite.
2. tuaS fi'it citi, tuag fiir cine, mag fiir cin ? j what kind of t
Phir. X(MXi \\\x'i \ —Indefinite.
8S. gBclr^cr, as Interrogative Adjective, follows the
biefer Model throughout, as :
Sitigidar, Plural.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
Nom. h)eld)er
Gen. h)eld)e^
Dat. tuelc^em
Ace. toeld^en
'm^{^^, which
h)eld;er, of which
hje(d)en, (to, for which)
tpeld^e, which
tDcId^er iueld^e^
n)eld;cr meldjem
Examples :
Which man was here ?
SBcli^cr 3Jiann mar fjier ?
What books have you ?
SOelt^c Siid^cr fjaben (Sie ?
Remarks. — i. iBcIc^er is also used in exclamatory sen-^
tences (= what !), sometimes without termination, as :
9!CeI^(c8) SSergniigen ! What pleasure !
2. The stem hjeldfi is also followed by cin, and is unin-
flected, as:
2Bclf^ ein ©turm ! What a storm !
86. In declining n)a§ fur ein, Ira"? remains unchanged,
while cin agrees with the substantive, ai :
N. M. 2Ba§ fur cin §ut? a. 3lia§ fiir eincn §ut? What kind
of (a) hat? D. 2Bag fur eincm §ut? To what kind
of a hat ?
102
LESSON XVII.
t§§86-
c. F. 5Da« fOt eincr S81«mc ? Of what kind of (a) flower, etc.
In the Plur. waS fur is used without article, as •
!>• afi«« fur Rmbern ? To what kind of children >
The etn is also omitted before nam». „f . • .
other words used partitively, as 7 "'''"''' ^""^
What k.nd of wood .' What sort of weather .>
4
Sy* Indirect Statements.
Direct Statement or Quotation :
He said:* I am tired.'
Indirect Statement or Quotation :
He said (that) he was tired.
I. An Indirect Statement is always a su^or^^.afe clause
the imp.), and i./s the same' ^^^'I^^tj^l^ ^^^^
statement were made direafy, as : '
J>res.), They said that it was true" " '
.oJaTa7".^r:t™;:e\rer;,:r *-- '-—
3. The conjunction bag may be omitted in such clause,
wh,ch then have the construction of a principa sentence
(i. e., verb m secofu/ place), as : sentence
®t foflte, er fei gcftetn angefommen.
88]
88.
INDIRECT STATEMENTS AND QUESTIONS.
Indirect Questions.
10.3
Dirbct Question :
Who is there ?
Indirect Question :
He asked who was there ?
1. In Indirect (or Dependent) Questions the con-
struction is that of a dependent clause (verb last).
2. If the verb of the principal sentence be in the Impf.,
that of the question will be in the subjunctive, and have the
same tense which it would have in the direct question, as :
©agen ©ie mir gefatligft, tt)o jener §err too^nt (Dir. Qu. :
2Bo n)of)nt jener ^txx'i pres.), Tell me, if you please,
where that gentleman lives ?
(5r fragtc mic^, toelc^er bon biefen .*perren mein 53ruber fei. He
asked me which of those gentlemen was my brother (Dir.
Qu. : aSelc^er, etc., ifi %\jx ©ruber t pres.)
V0C\BULARY.
*#* The article will be supplied by the pupil, according to preceding
rules, where not given.
to use, braud^en
march, marf(^ieren
save, retten
answering, b^ 2lntit)orten
paying, b*^ ^Beja^Ien
jewel, precious stone, b-^
©belftein
asking (of questions), b-^
S^ragen
Italy, ^talien
fire-place, -b-2^ ^amin'
elm, \i^ Ulme
blue, blau
light, easy, leid^t
useful, m%\\^
buying, b^ 5?aufen
life, b^ 2e6en
learning (act of), b^ Semen
lily, b^ Sitte
market, ber 3Jiar!t
morning, ber 3Jiorgen
afternoon, ber ^fJad^mittag
plum, b-^ ^flaume
emerald, b-^ ©maragb'
winter-month, ber SBintermo'*
nat
valuable, precious, tDertboII
generally, usually, getoo^nlid^
etc., a. [. tt>. (= unb \o ttjeiter,
i. e. " and so further ")
"V-
I04
LESSON XVII.
[§§8a-
Genitive with
adverbial
force.
in the morning, motgen« or be« TOorgenS
in the afternoon, nod^mtttngg or bc« Sfac^mittagg
The Cardinal Poii ts of the Compass (= bie bict §imtnel«.
goflenbei.) : North, (bcr) Siotbcn ; South, (bet) Siiben • East
(bet) Often ; West, (bet) Sffieftm. ' '
bet ai„ta, bet aR«, bet 3u'ni, bet Su'Ii, bet auguft', bet B^p,
tembct, bet Dttobet, bet Siobcmber, bcr Scjember.
Wiom .• I saved hlg nfe. lil. I saved to op for him the life
3* KtrtK 1 1) m b « «(6tji. See § 44, 6 (i).
BXBBCISE XVII.
^. 1 ffiet f)at bos SBilb Bon mcincm 9?cffen u6et bag fiomin
SI ^-^TJl t'"J^^^ ^"'3"^'""" «"f bem TOatfte
gctouft ? 3. 2luf toelt^e S8ont luetben tnit img feften 8 4 ffiel-
^em finaben ge^ott biefc« SDJeffet ? ®s g^Stt Sil^erm'. 5.' SeneS
ajiobclen auf bet Stta^e ift bag Joc^tetc|en unfetes SJae^batJ.
6. ffia« mac^cn Ste gctoii^nlicf;, itienn Sie einen gciettag fcaben'
7. S)es gRotgenS ftubiete t*, unb be« gjacT^mittagg tubte xS auf
mf^t ^- ^'^'^'^ f'"^ ^'' ^'""*" ^« f«6«n S«9e ber
SBoc^e ? Wontag u. f. «,. 9. 2Bem fc^iien Sie biefen Stief?
10. ^(^ fdjtctc ,^„ bem Suc^^anbler. 11. Sffiorubet haitrx be
§etten gelac^t ? 12. fflet ift bie gtau neben meinet $ante auf
bet JBanf ? 13. SffiaS fut Sttugen ^at ber Stitbent ? Seine Slugen
finb Mau. 14. SfBotouS mat^en wit Sdjiiffe? SBir maien fie
au« gifen unb eta§[. 15. fiat! ift tnit bem Setnen feinet 2tuf.
gabe nic^t fettig. 16. Sotauf l^aben bie Sc^uret fic| gefew?
®ie ^aben ftc| auf bie ©ructe gefe^t. 17. SBag fiit @bet teine
^aben Ste ba? 18. 3c| l,aW einen !Diamant(en), einen SRubin
utib etnen Smatagb. 19. 3)aS §eer ift bon Jranfteic^ „a*
^fatten matfc^.ett. 30. 3Jat,oIeon f<^ic(te bem ©rafet. einen Hia-
mont(cn;, U'cil ber ©tof i^m boS Men getettet tiatte.
S. 1. Which of yonr sisters are learning German ? U For
H-hom IS this diamond > It is for the countess. 3. Which
89]
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES.
105
are your pens ? 4. The askingj)f questions is very easy, but
the answering is very difficult. "s.^The north, the south, the
east, and the west are the four cardinal points of the compass.
6. Which of these students is Mr. Braun .? 7^ TheT)oy buys
himself pears and plums in the market. 8. My uncle has
three children — a girl and two boys. 9. June, July, and
August are very hot in Canada. 10. Buying is pleasant, but
paying is very disagreeable. 11. Iron and steel are very
useful. 12. The rose and the Hly are flowers, but the oak
and the elm are trees. 13. I blame Mary because she wastes
her money. 14. What would you do with your money, if you
were rich.? 15. We always hoped that William would learn
German.
ORAL EXERCISE XVII.
1. Wo hangt das Bild von Ihrem Neffen .? 2. Wer ist das
M^^dchen vor unserm Hause .? 3. Weshalb schickte der
Konig dem Biirgermeister einen Diamant(en).? 4. Was fur
Augen hat der Student? 5. Ist das Fragen leicht.? 6. Was
wurden Sie machen, wenn Sie einen Feiertag h^tten .?
LESSON XVIII.
GENDER Of- SUBSTANTIVES (concluded).- GENERAL REMARKS.
-DOUBLE GENDER.
S9. Gender of Substantives as determined by Form.
I. Masculine are :
(a) Substantives in -ittf, -19, -ing, -lit, a/wosf a/ways,
as : bcr ^xani^, the crane ; htv ^ontjj, the honey;
bcr grembHng, the stranger ; bcr %tm, the breath.
(f) Those in -c(, -cil (not infinitives' -cr, generally
(names of agents in -er always), as : bcr 2offeI,
io6
LESSON XVIII.
[§S8^
the spoon ; ttv ©artcn, the garden ; ber &axtntv,
the gardener.
(c) Monosyllal)Ies — generally (but with many excep*
tions), as : bcr ^ricg, the war; bcr %o^<^, the day,
etc.
2. Feminine are :
{a) Substantives in -ei, -^cii, -fcU, -Waft, -Utt0, -in,
always, as : bie ®4)meic^clci, flattery ; bie (Sc^i)n3
l^cit, beauty; btc ^anfbarfcit, gratitude; bie
^rcunbf^ttft friendship ; bic -t^offnunfl, hope; bie
©rcifin, the countess ; bie Jreunbin, the (female)
friend.
Note. — The termination -in is used to form feminine names from
masculines, usually with Umlaut, always so in monosyllables,
{b) Those in -t (especially after a consonant), -cttb,
generally, as: btC Kraft strength; bic 3ufunf<,
the future ; bie Xugcilb, virtue.
{c) Those in -c, generally (but with many exceptions),
as : bic §o^e, height ; bie ©ro^e, size.
{d) Some in -niS (see also under neuters), as : bic
SSilbnig, the wilderness.
ie) Foreign Substantives in -age, -ie (French); -if
(Greek) ; -cn^, -fiit, -(t)ion, -ur (Lat.), always
as : bie Courage, courage ; bic ^Jlelobic', the melody ;
bie ^ufif, music; bic 3lubici^', the audience;
bie Uniberfitat', the university ; bie 3fiatiott', the
nation ; bie 3^atur', nature. '
3. Neuter are :
{a) Substantives in -ijeu and -fcin (diminutives), al-
ways (without regard to sex), as : bn| g3?ann!etn,
bag ^riiufein, bag ^iibj^en.
ftd
GENERAL REMARKS ON GENDER.
lo;
(b) Those in -turn, utmost always, as : bad (S^riftentum,
Christendom, Christianity.
(f) Those in -nil, -f ol, -fcl, generally, as : bai ercigniS,
the event ; bal Sd;ic!fttl, fate, destiny ; bad 9lats
fcl, the riddle.
(«/) Those beginning with the prefix ®c-, unless other-
wise determined by meaning, termination, or
derivation, as : bad ©cmcilbe, the painting ; bad
(Ucmac^), the apartment ; but : bcr ©ebattcr, the
godfather; bic ©cbattcrin, the godmother; bie
©efeHfrJaft, the company; bcr ©ebraur|, the
usage (from bet SSraudj^/ ™asc. monosyll.).
Give the gender of the following substantives, assigning the rule in
each case: i8eilcf)cn, §ut, ^ird)e, ^Ilnftler, l*aubfd)aft, gffig (vinegar),
«lume, ©ejdienf, .tnablein, «cgrabnl«, ^urd)t, ^afen, Oewittcr, ginger,
Stpfel, ^orb, Untocrfttcit', Stftrolog, %m\6), ^^^iIofopl|lc.
90.
General Remarks on Gender.
1. Gender agrees, as in English, with sex, except in bad
SSeib, in Diminutives in -r^cit and -Icilt, and in certain
compounds (see below).
2. Inanimate objects, which in English are all alike neu
ter, may be of any gender in German, as determined by
Meaning or Form, as : btr §ut, bic S3lume, bad Sud^.
3. Each substantive of which the gender is not determined
by the rules should be learnt with the Definite ArHcle as
the sign of its gender.
4. Compounds are of the gender of the last component
(hence bad ^rfluenjimtncr, the woman, is neuter), except
bcr 2lbfi^eu, disgust, from bic 6c^eu.
bic STnttnort^ the answer, from bad ^Bort.
bcr ^itttUOr^, Wednesday, from blC 2Boc^e.
io8
LESSON XVIII.
[§§90
pcmlu r''''" ^^"^P^""^'^ o( mt, Which are given in Ap-
5. The exceptions to the foregoing lists will be found in
Appendix I.
^1- Double Gender.
^ The gender of the following substantives (with others
given in App. J.), varies with their meaning:
Plural,
33iinbc \
53ttnber \ See § 64, above.
Sonbc )
S3auern
Sauer
^eiben
©c^ilbe
bet S3anb, volume
( bond, tie
bcr S3auer, peasant ,
bo8 33auei', bird-cage
bcr Oetbc, heathen )
ble §cibe, heath )
brr (Sc^ilb, shield
b08 (Sc^ilb, sign (of an inn, etc.) ©c^'ilbcr
bcr (2ee, lake y
bic ©ee, sea j ®^^en
bcr 2:(ior, fool, g. beg ^Ifiorcn ^^orcti
bad Vcjtix, gate, G. beg ^^orcg 3:r;orc
Vocabulary.
(The pupil will supply the article in German where not given.)
to visit, study (at a univer- relate, tell, enciMen
sity), befud)en (+ Ace.) paint, malen
collect, gather, fammein ( ieniale> neighbour, b^ 9^ac&.
peasant, country-man, b-^^- * avin
^^"^^^ . orator, b- 9tebncr
•^"^ bedroom, b^ ©c^Iafaimmer
bee, b-^
>^
91)
DOUBLE GENDER.
109
boat, ba^ ?^out
friendship, b^ grcunb[d;aft
inn, b^ (^Hi|t(;aug .
district, locality, b-^ ©e'genb
history, story, b-^ ©efd;ic^te
waiter, b-^ ^^cHner
piano, ba^ ^(05)161/
vice, ba« 2a\icv
lesson, b-i- Seftion'
people, hie Scute Cpl.)
love, b-^ Siebe ,
mathematics, b-^ ajfait^cinati!
(sing.)
so, fo
littie^son, b-^ SiJ^nd^en
sun,^-S^ Sonne
city-j^ate, town-gate, b'^
(Stabtt^or .
ingratitude, b-^ Unbanfbarfeit
way, road, b-^ 2Beg
vind, b^Binb
rage, fury, bie 28ut
sign, ba^ S^^^^^
terrible, terribly, fiirc^terlic^
strong (heavily, of rain, etc.),
ftar!
willingly, with pleasure, gem
Idioms : 1, i like to learn German, 3cl) (erne flcrn iDcutfd),
2. A week affo to-day, ^tuu x>t>v adU Xagcii (Dat).
3. A week from to-day, ^tutt ii b e r caiyt Jage (Ace).
EXERCISE XVIII.
A. 1. D^ne (bie) 3reunbfcf;aft, (bie) §offnung unb (bie) 2ie6c
iuuvbe bag Scben fe(>r traurtg fein. 2. Unfere 3Settern traren ^eute
Dor ac^t %a^^l^ bet un§. 3. (^ie) ©c^meic^elei ift fein 3eic^en bev
Sreunbfc^aft. 4. SSil^elm, lerne Inne Se!tio«. 5. 2Ba§ fur
S3anbe finb auf bem 3:i[c^e in ^()rer ^ibliot^e!? 6. @g finb fiinf
Scinbe Don ©c^itterg 2Ser!en. 7. !Die 2But beg ©turmeg ift
furd;ternd>, a6ev bag (Scf;iff ift frf;on im §afen. 8. Semt ^^r
©ruber gem ^at^ematif? ^ein, aber er levnt gem ^eutfc^.
9. 2BeId;em 3}?abc^en gefjijren biefe 3^inge, ber 9JJarie ober ber
©ara ? 10. 3)te ©an!barfcit ift eine ^ucjenb, aber bie Unbanfbar=
feit ift ein Safter. 11. iRarl ©c^mibt bcfuc^t im SKinter bie Unis
berfitat, aber im ©ommer tt)o^nt ev bet fetnen ©Item auf bem
2anbe. 12. ^ene§ graulein Ijai i^rer 3=reunbin ein Sanb gum
©eburtgtag gefc^enft, unb i^re ^reunbin ift bamit febr mfrteben,
13. 3)iefe §anbfc^Uv^e 0el;oren nic^t mir, fie ge^oren meinem
no
LESSON XVIII.
91-
©cr;tua0cr. U. ^cv m^Ux Ijai cin ecf;tlb fur bag ©aftl;aug m
bcm nov ficmalt. 15. iVado, l;aft bii bic i»^anbcv fiiv boinc
mmUv flcfrtuft V ^J^cin, abcr id; luerbc [ic morjicu obcv am ^)Jfitt.
ItJoc^faufcn. 1<;. McUncr, r;olcn 6ic mir ocfalliaft cin ^3Jfeffer
unb cmcn Sbffcl. 17. (Sr ijat mir !cinc ^Intiuort auf mcinm
^H'lcf flefd)icft. IH. ai^rt^ fiiv cine ^JJJelobic f^iclt ba^ Ti^c^terAen
unfcrcr !iBirtin auf bcm .itlauicr? 1}>. SBcnn id; ©clb l)attc fo
iuurbc Id; cincn Tc^nd; unb 58orI;annc fiir mcin Sc^Iaftimmer
fmifcn. 20. mmx mavk i(;rc ^cftiou nid;t lerut, fo luirb fie in
bcr 6d)ulc nid;t flut antJuurtcn.
B. 1. This country-man lives on a heath near the lake
2. The tempest is terrible, but the ship is already in the
harbour. ;j. The stran-er praises this locality on account of
the beauty of the landscape. 4. What kind of a flower is it ?
It IS .1 violet. 5. We met a stranger on the way to the uni-
versity. (J. Your aunt is my neighbour. 7. Who are these
people ? They are the parents of my cousin. 8. The mother
relates to her litlle^son the story of the little man in the
wood. <). Have you heard the words of the Orator? 10
Dunng the tempest the wind shook the house. 11. The girl
hangs the bird-cage before the window in the sun (ace.) 12
The bees gatlier honey from the flowers upon the heath, and
the peasant sells it in the town. 13. When we hastened
home yesterday, it was raining heavily. 14. I shall not wait
for George, because I have no time. 15. When I resided at
(bci) ni3^ uncle's, 1 was always at home at ten o'clock in the
evening.
ORAL EXERCISE XVIII.
1 W^er war heute vor acht Tagen bei Ihnen .? 2. Was f-ir
Bucher haben Sie auf Ihrem Tische .? 3. Lernen Sie aern
Mathematik? 4. Was macht Karl Schmidt im Winter?
5. Wer spielt jetzt auf dem Klavier? (j w-- — ^-^ o:.
neute liber acht Tage macheii .?
94]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Ill
LESSON XIX.
RELATIVE PRO'AJOUNS.- IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS.
92.
Relative Pronouns.
The Relative Pronouns are :
1. bcr, bic, ba3, > who (of persons), which (of
2. ttjclrjcr, tuclr^e, hiel^eS/ > things) — Definite.
3. met, who (= he who, whoever) )
4. tUllS, what (= that which, whatever) )
Indefinite.
^ w \ '1 i the like of whom or which — Indeclinable.
6. bcrglc:£§cn, >
03. %tx, bit, bo§, as Relative Pronoun, is declined as
follows :
Singular.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER.
Nom. bcr bie ba§
Gen. bcffcn bcrcn bcffcn
Dat. bem ber bem
Ace. ben bie bag
Plural
ALL GENDERS.
bie, who, which, that
bcrcn whose, of which
bencn, (to, for) whom, which
bie, whom, which, that
Observe. — These forms are the same as those of the Defi-
nite Article, except the added -en of the Gen. Sing., Gen.
Plur., and Dat. Plur.
94. JBclrfjer, as Relative Pronoun, is declined after the
bicjcr Model, but, like the Interrogative Juelc^er, lacks the
Genitive.
112
LESSON XIX.
[§§95-
96.
Remarks on bcr and Iticljjcr.
1. ^cr and toell^cr refer alike to both persons and things,
and are interchangeable, except that :
(a) In the gen., bcffen, bcrcn, beffen,//. beren (not twelc^eg,
etc.), are always used (see § 82, above).
(<5) 5)cr is used when the antecedent is of the First or
Second Person, the relative being, in that case, always fol-
lowed by the Personal Pronoun, as:
I, who am your friend,
^d^, bcr i^ ^l)x ^rcunb Bin,
(or : ^c^, bic t(4 ^^re greunbin bin).
O God, (thou) who art in Heaven,
D ©ott, ber btt im §immel bift.
2. 2)cr and mliiitv, referring to inanimate objects, are usu-
ally replaced by tQO (iuor- before a vowel) <^c/^^r^ a preposition
(compare § 83, 3, above, for similar use of too for luag), as:
The table, on which {ivhereofi) the book is,
$Der %\\^, auf mcl4>em, or : morauf bag Suc^ ift.
3. The Gen. beffen, etc., always precedes its case, as :
A tree, the leaves of which are green,
@in 33aum, beffen flatter flviin finb.
96.
Remarks on tncr and tting.
1. aScr and nia0 are declined like the Interrogative Pro-
nouns iuer ? and luag ?
2. SBer is used of persons only, for all genders and both
numbers? te!l§ never of ■tersQtis,
9«]
REMARKS ON WCV AND m§.
113
3. 2Bcr and ttin^ as relatives, are .W.>//. and co.^j^ouud
in meaning, and include the antecedent, as :
aCcr nic^t f)bren iria, mufj fuf)lcn,
(He) who will not hear, must feel.
SBaS ic^ S6ncn ocf*icft fjabe, ift nic^t biet
What (= that which) 1 have sent you, is not much.
4. mv never has an antecedent, since it includes the ante-
cedent Itself ; therefore
never say : ^er mam, totv ^ier tvav,
but: ^er 5J?anji, ttJclj^cr ^ier toar,
(The man who was here).
5. aBnS never has an antecedent, unless the antecedent be
a neu er adjective or pronoun, such as nidm, nothing • ,ttmi
someth,ng- ; aUc. everything ; or a phrase, in which c^a es «.i
always replaces ba8, as:
Nothing (that) I say, etc., 31^^, h,«8 irf; f^g^, etc.
All (that) I have, etc., StlTcS, am t# i,ahc, 4.
1 he best (that) I have, etc., ®a§ SBefte, ms id, i,aU, etc.
He does not learn his lessons, which (i. e. ' th; not
tottS fe^r [cf;abe tft. ^ '
6. Ever = aur^ or immtv after tucr or tt)a§, as :
SSer e§ au^ (immer) cjcfagt ^at, Whoever has said it.
7. The Relative h,a§, like the Interrogative, is not used
a ter prepositions in the Dative or Accusative, but is re
placed m the same way by m(v); with prepositions governing
the Genitive, \m is used (see § 83, 3, above).
OBSERyE.--There/af^^e.n.s, never be omitted \n German,
as It so frequently is in English, hence ;
(Engl.) The man I met,
{Germ,) 2)er mam, m\^m (bent) tc^ Beoegnete.
114
LESSON XIX.
[§§97-
97. ^CSglcidjCil and bcrg(ci(^cn are indeclinable words,
the former referring to a masc. or neuter noun in the sing.,
the latter to fern, or plural nouns, as :
©in Mann, bcggleid^en (dat.) icf) nie begeguete,
A man, the like of whom I never met.
§aben <3ie jemal^o bcSgleicfjen gef^ort?
Have you ever heard the like of that ?
©inegrau, bcrgleic^en, etc., A woman, the like of whom, etc.
^inber, bcrgleic^en, etc., Children, the like of whom, etc.
98. Construction of Relative Sentences.
I. Every relative sentence is of course a dependent sen-
tence, and as such must have the verb at the end, as :
The wine, which I have sent you, is very good.
5Der SBein, ben id; ^f)ncn gcf^irft Jofic, ift fef^r gut.
a. The Relative must immediately follow its antecedent,
when the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of
a principal sentence, or when the separation from the ante-
cedent would cause any ambiguity, as :
!E)er 5}?ann iucld)er geftern ()tcr juar, ift mein DnM. The
man who was here yesterday is my uncle.
S)a^ 33uc^, iueId)ivJ Sic mir [dncftcn, ^a'be \^ nic^t gebraud)t,
I have not used the book you sent me, but : 3^^ ^a\it
ba^ 33u(^ ttid)t gebraui^t, welched «. 0. ».
3. In sentences with lt)er or i»a§, the relative clause will be
counted as the first member of the principal sentence, which
will therefore begin with the verb, e. g. :
aSctr nic^t f)oren iuiff, mufe fufjlen,
He who will not hear, must feel.
Note. — In German, every dependent sentence or clause is separated
from the sentence on which it depends by a comma. The relatives
h)etd)eu and bei must therefore always be preceded by a comma.
99]
IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS.
115
®^» Irregular Weak Verbs.
I. A Few Weak Verbs, besides adding the termination -it
to form the Impf., and -t to form the P. Part., also change
the Stem Vowel in the Impf. Indicative and P. Part., but
nof in the Impf. Subjunctive. They are :
Infinitive.
Brcnnen (intr.), to burn, be
consumed with fire
fcnnen, to know, be ac-
quainted with
nrnnen, to name
rennen, to run (at full speed)
Impf. Ind. Impf. Subj. P. Part.
brannte brcnnte gebrannt
fonnte fcnnte gefonnt
[cnben, to send
U)cnben, to turn
fcnbcte
tccnbcte
genonnt
gemnnt
( gefonbt
1 gejcnbct
( gehjanbt
1 gettjcnbct
ttannte ncnnte
rttnnte rcnnte
( f anbte
( fenbcte
f tt)anbte
( tocnbcte
Observe: i. The double forms of the last two verbs, of
which the shorter are in more general use.
2. The three following verbs have also a consona?it change,
with Umlaut in the Impf. Subj. :
Infinitive. Impf. Ind.
brittgen, to bring ^^a^te
bcnfen, to think bttdjte
biinfen, to seem (impers.) ) ^^^^'^^
(beuc^ten, baud)ten) ) (^f*te)
I biintte
Remarks. — I. Compare the English: bring, brought;
think, thought.
2. The forms baud^te, gebauc^t, are as yet more common
than beud)te, nebeuc6t, but the latter are according to the new
official orthography.
Impf. Subj.
briic^te
bitc^te
bcur^te
(bauc^te)
biinfte
P. Part.
gebm^t
t3ebttrjt
gebcut^t
(gebduc^t)
gebitnft
ii6
LISSSON XIX.
[§99
3. Besides- the Inf. bcud^tcn, there is also a Pres. Ind.
3. sing. bcud;t.
NoTK. — The German Perfect often replaces the English Past or
Imperfect (see also Less. XLIIL), as :
I sent you the book yesterday,
3rf) ^abc M)ncn flcftcvu ba<5 ii3url) gcf^iift.
I was working yesterday the whole day,
S^-l) ^obc gcftevu hm gausen Xci^ gcor&citet.
Vocabulary.
consider, bcbenfen (trans.)
order, bespeak, bcfteltcn
tliink of, benten an (-f- ace.)
or benfen (+ gen.)
recognize, er!cnncn '
like to hear, (jern l;i3ren
divide, share, teilen
burn, consume with fire
(trans.), bcrbrenncn
wish, triinfd^en
apply to, fid^ hjcnben an
(+ ace.)
acquaintance, bie 33efanntfc^aft -^/
postman, ber ^oftbote -^
title, ber S^itel
all, everything, 2(IIe^
unhappy, unfortunate, un=
improbable, untDaijrfc^einlid^
just now, ebcn, foebeu
diligently, industriously, flei^ig
easily, readily, leid^t
really, lt>ir!lid;
Idiom,: It Is a pity, @« ifl fcfjabc (adj.).
EXERCISE XIX.
A. 1. 2)er ^ai[ci* fanbte einen SSoten mit ber ^fZac^rid^t nad^
S3erlin. 2. 2Bcr nic^)t fiir mic^ ift, ift tuiber mic^. 3. ®ie £eute,
bei bcnen ic^ auf ^efud; geiuefcn bin, finb ©c^otten. 4. §at ber
^ettncr 3l((e§ gebvad^t, it)a§ luir brauc^en? 5. 2)er ^oftbote ^at
mir bie '^lad)x\d)t gebrac^t, ti:)orauf id; hjartete. 6. ^d; erfannte
h)ir!Itc^ ben .§crru nid;t, ber cjeftcvii mit meinem Setter in ber
0rd;e Wax. 7. ^a§ ^ferb bc§ (S)cneral§ rannte urn ben $rei§.
8. ^er ?^rembUna, beffcn 33efanutfd)aft icb m mad)en tDiinfcbe,
ttJtrb morgen l^ier fein. 9. ^a§ 3=euer brannte im Dfen unb toers
§99]
IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS.
It;
btamu bas §c(,. 10. SBcnn er ungtecHid; wnr, tranbte er M
b.e ®ef*.d,te bie ®ie mir gcftern er5al,ltcn,t, b J ; ! fe,
baruber aela^t. 12. ^,t i„ jJiener bie Silver 1*12
fiebra^t b.e 4 6eim Suc^^anblcr gefauft ^abe? Is. SOicn^ 3
bu ,c .ba#t, toa« bu bift? 14, Sir i,aL b«« ^olj fcbon i«
kann ba^ m m aijt lagen gcfauft babe,,. 15. i jT^tb
@.e b.e ®eW.<5te, bie .fperr 9ra«„ uns evjaljit r,aty is^"
Stan, beren Jiid,ter<^e„ bei un.3 auf Sefuc^ i t/toirb morgen „!*
'^iVt'i •";■.'"• 2S"«®iein ber Stabt get^ort §aben!itS
«ntoa^rWemI.c^^ 30. @, .egncte geftern, 1^ febr ^^^Xat
ba teir auf bent Sanbe toatcn. '
A 1. Do you hear what X say to you,? 9 Mv fath,.r ,1
ways burnt the letters which were no'longer us^ul 3 H '
has not told me what he wishes. 4. The man, in whose
house we hve:. .s the brother of our neighbour. 5. Here s
the meat wh„; . you have ordered, fi. The honey which the
countryn,an brought us yesterday is not good. 7 Do vou
know the artist who has painted this picture.? \:pJZ
who are not industrious do not become rich. 9. We readUv
beheve what we hope and wish for. 10. What we fy I
thmlcmg of when you met me yesterday.? 11. Have you all
you need? 13. I believe that I know the man who "s in
front of the house. 13. I always bum the newspapers T d"
no need. 14. The students to whom these books beb„' t
not study them diligently, which is a pity. 1.5. I do not
know the song, the title of which you have just named, "g
What was burnmg ? The gardener was burning leaves.
ORAL EXERCISE XIX.
1. Was m.achen Sie gewohnlich mit den Zeitungen, die Sie
n.cht mehr brauchen? 3. Wer hat Ihnen diese Nachricht
ii8
LESSON XX.
[§§xoo^
gebracht? 3. Woran denken Sie ? 4. Was m?chen Sie,
wenn Sie einen Feiertag haben ? 5. Glauben Sie jede Ge-
schichte, die Sie horen ? 6. Was erzahlt das Kind ?
LESSON XX.
DECLENSION OF ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES:- STRONG FORM.
-CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS.
100. Declension of Attributive Adjectives.
The boy is good — Predicative Adjective.
The good boy — Attributive "
Remember: That Adjectives used as Predicates are not
varied (see § 14).
101. Every Attributive Adjective either is or is not
preceded by a determinative word (?. e., article or pronominal
adjective), which shows gender, number and case by distinc-
tive endings.
102. First Form. — If not preceded by any such deter-
minative word, the Attributive Adjective follows the Strong
Declension, which is the same as the biefer Model through'
out, thus :
Strong Declension of ^i, good.
Singular. Plural.
MASC.
Nom. gutcr
Gen. gutcg
Dat. gutciU
Ace. 0uten
FEM.
gutc
fiiitcr
gwtc
NEUTER.
sutel
SUtCg
i3uieitt
Sutcg
ALL GENDERS.
0utcr
Quten
9«te
loa]
STRONG ADJECTIVE DECLENSION.
Substantives with Adjectives.
119
Singular,
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
MASC.
good wine
gutcr 2Bein
9ute8 (en) 2Bein(e)§
0utcm 2Bein(e)
<^\xitxi 223ein
FEM.
good soup
flute <Su^^e
fluter ©u^^e
flutcr (Su^^e
flutc (Su^^e
NEUTER.
good glass
flutes ©lag
flutes (en) ©lafea
flutem 0raf(e)
flutcl ©lag
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
Nom. <^\xit 2Beine, ©u^^en, ©Idfer
Gen. guter aSeine, ©u^^en, ©tafev
Dat. guten aSeinen, ©u^^en, ©lafem
Ace. gute gSeine, ©u^^en, ©lafer
Observe: In this form, where there is no other word to
show the gender, etc., of the noun, this work must be done
by the adjective, which therefore has as full a set of end-
ings as possible.
Remarks. - - i. The Gen. Sing. Masc. and Neuter generally
has -en mstead uf -eg before strong substantives, as: autett
3Bemeg, guten «rote§. ^
2. Adjectives in -e drop the -e of the stem in declension,
as : mube, tired : mub-er, mub-e, miib-cS, etc.
3. If several Adjectives precede the same substantive,
all follow the same form, as :
fluter, alter, roter 28ein, etc.,
good, old, red wine.
Decline throughout in German: sick child, high tree. Jong lesson,
beautiful broad stream, young woman, lazy horse, tired boy. ^ ^
I20
LESSON XX.
[§§ lOS-
103. Conjugation of Strong Verbs.
Verbs in German are either Strong or Weak. The Weak
Verbs, which indicate change of tense by the addition of a
termination (usually without change of vowet)^ as; Io&-en,
lobtc, geloO-t, have been treated in Lessons IX, X.
104. The Strong Verbs, on the other hand, indicate the
change of tense by a change of the Root Vowel with^
out adding a termination, as : fing-en, to sing, Impf. fang;
blciben, to remain, Impf. blicb.
105. The Past Participle in Strong Verbs ends in -ctl
(not -et), usually also with change of Vowel, as: fing-en, P.
Part, ge-fung-cn ; Hciben, P. Part, ge-blicb-cn ; but gebcn, P.
Part, ge-gcbcn. \
Remark. — This change of Root-Vowel is called * Ablaut,
and is common to English and German. Compare Eng. sing,
sang, sung ; give, gave, giv-en.
106. Paradigm of Simple Tenses of fittgctt, to sing.
Principal Parts.
Impf. fang P. Part, ge-fung-en
Subjunctive.
Present.
ic^) firtgc, I (may) sing, etc.
bu jingcft
Infin. fing-cn
Indicative.
\^ fingc, I sing
bu fing(e)ft, thou sing-est
er fing(e)t, he sing-s
\d\x fingcit, we sing
if)r fing(e)t, ye sing
jie fingcn, they sing
id^ fong, I sang
bu fttng(e')tt thou sangst
er fingc
\6\x fingcn
i^r fingct
fie fingcn
Imperfect.
(Ind. Stem withUmlaut, where posiiible.)
id; fiingc
bu fiingcft
xo7l
SIMPLE TENSES OF fingcn.
121
Indicative,
er [ong, he sang
n)ir fttngcn, we sang
i^r fang(c)t, ye sang
fie fongen, they sang
Subjunctive.
er fiinge
U)ir fdngen
i^r fiingct
fie fiingcn
Imperative.
fing(e) [bu], sing [thou]
fingc er, let him sing
fingm \v\x, let us sing
fiug(e)t [ibr], sing [ye]
fingcn fie, let them sing
Observe : The I'erson endings are the same throughout as
in the paradigm of tobcn, in which ~ic of the Impf. is a
Tense ending (see Lessons IX, X) ; this is shown by the
following :
107. Table of Endings of Strong Verbs in
Simple Tenses.
Present.
Indic.
Sing. 1 . — c
2. -(C)ft
3. -(C)t
P/ur. 1. — en
2. — (c)t
3. — Ctt
SUBJ.
— c
-eft
— c
—en
-et
—en
Imperfect.
Indic.
~m
—en
-(c)t
—en
SUBJ.
■— c
-efi
— c
—tn
—ti
—en
Imperative.
-(e)
— c
—en
-(e)t
—en
Observe: i. The changed Vowel of the Imperfect, and ab-
sence of person endings in i. and 3. sing.
2. The Umlaut of the Imperfect Subjunctive.
3. The persistent -c of the Subjunctive (Imperf.
9
as well as Pres.)
r22
LESSON XX.
[§§ 107-
Remarks. — I. The -c of the termination in the 2. Sing,
of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. is only retained in Strong Verbs
after b, i, or a sibilant, as : \dj reit-e, bu vcit-cft ; id; preif-e,
bu prcif-c[t ; and in the 3. Sing. Pres. Ind., and 2. Plur. Pres.
and Impf. Ind. after b, t, as : cr reit-et, '\\)x rcit-ct, \l)x ritt-ct ;
but cr ^reif-t, \l)x ^Jreif-t/ i^r \ixk\-t.
2. The compound tenses of a Strong Verb are formed pre-
cisely like those of a Weak Verb, some being conjugated
with Ijahcn, others with fcin ; hence it is only necessary to
know the Inf., Impf. and P. Part., and in some cases the
2. Sing. Imper.,in order to conjugate a Strong Verb throughout.
108. Parad.gm of Compound Tenses of {Ittgctt, to
sing (with f^abcn) ; fttttcn, to fall (with fcin).
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Perfect.
,Pres.or]^«^;"[+P.Pa„.o.|[X[)
x(i) t)aU gefungen, I have sung ic^ \)aU gefungen
bu f>aft gefungen, thou hast sung, etc. bu babeft gefungen, etc.
\^ bin gefafien, I have (am) fallen, etc. id; f ci gefallen, etc.
Pluperfect.
(Imperf. of | j'^^^^" [ + P. Part, of
J fingen ) \
/ fatten ) J
\6) f)atte gefungen, I had sung, etc. ic^ ^atte gefungen, etc.
i^ ttiar gefaUen, I had (was) fallen, etc. ic^ todxt gcf alien, etc.
Future.
(Pres. of merben + Infin. of i |^"^''" i )
ic^ tDerbe fingen (faHen), I shall sing [^ h)erbe finaen (faKen)
(fall)
bu hJtrft fingen (fallen), thou wilt sing bu it)erbeft fingen (faUen),
(fall), etc. etc,
ktOj
COMPOUND TENSES OF fingcn, faflen.
133
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Future Perfect.
ic^ n)crbe gefungcn ^abcn, I shall have ic^ h)crbe gefungett ^Ben
sung
bu h)irft gcfungen l^abcn, thou wilt
have sung, etc.
tc^ tDcrbc gefaflen feltt, I shall have
(be) fallen, etc.
Conditional.
Simple.
(Impf. Subj. of merben -|- Infin.
of fmgcn, faflen)
ic^ hJiirbe ftngen (fallen), I
should sing (fall), etc.
bu h)erbeft gcfungen
ifahtn, etc.
ic^ tDcrbe gefallen fern,
etc.
Compound.
(Simple Cond. of \ ^?^'" \ +
P. Part, of fmgen, fallen)
id^ h)urbc gcfungcn f)ahm,
etc.
x^ twiirbe gefaHcn fcin, etc.
Infin. Perf.
gefimgen (ju) ^aben, to have sung
gefaHen 3U fein, to have (be) fallen
109. Compound Verbs. — Compound Verbs are con-
jugated like the simple verbs from whic they are derived;
those having one of the inseparable particles ht-, tx-, ttnp-,
tni-, 9c- bcr-, jcr~, do not take the prefix ge- in the P. Part.,
as : k-fingen, P. Part, fic-fungen (compare Je-ja^Ien, P. Part.
Bc-ga^lt, § 35, Rem. 6), and in the Inf. take ju l>e/ore the
prefix ; other compounds take the prefix ge- and the particle
ju between ihe prefix and the verb (Part, or Inf. respectively).
110. The Strong Verbs are divided into classes, according
to the 'Ablautj ' or Vowel-changes, of the root (see § 105, Rem.,
above). These classes, with the verbs belonging to each, are
given in the following Lessons (XXII-XXXI).
124
LESSON XX.
r§"i
111. Shorter Forms of the Conditional.
The Impf. and Plupf. Subj. are frequently used in all
Verbs instead of the Simple and Compound Conditional
respectively, thus:
tdj) ^dttc = \<i) iDiirbe f^aben ; id; fiiitgc = ic^ hjiirbe fingen ;
id^ f^aiit gc^afit = id} tt)urbe Q^ijaht ^aben ; ic^ jjiittc gcfuitgcn =
id} iDiivbe gefungen l()aben.
Note. — These shorter forms are ahvays to be preferred in the Passive
Voice (Less. XXI), and in the Modal Auxiliaries (Less. XXXIV).
Vocabulary.
help (serve) one's self, fid;
bcbienen
acknowledge, confess, hdtrx'
nen
catch cold, fid^ er!dlten
nominate, appoint, ernennen
fill, fiillen
spread out, fic^ toerbreiten
bough, branch, ber 2lft '^
ink, bie 3)iute or ^inte
company, bic ©cfcllfc^aft
governor, ber ©ouberneur'
concert, ba§ £ njert'
queen, bie ^imigin
paper, ba§ ^a^iev'
advice, counsel, ber '3lat
singer, ber (Sanger, bie ©an*
gerin
liberal, generous, freigebig
friendly, kind, freunblid^
fresh, frifc^
glad, fvo^
hard, f>art
hoarse, fjeifer
bad, fcf)Ied)t
black, fd)tt)ar3
brave, valiant, ta^fer
true, faithful, treu
weighty, important, tt)i(f)ttg
at last, finally, enblid)
yes (emphatic), yes indeed,
ja n)D^l
Idioms: To appoint (as) governor, jum @0UDerneur crncnncn ; cheer-
fully, frolKU SOlutCd (genitive with adverbial force); good »Siorning, gutcn Wtotf
gcii (i. e., 3d) tounfd^e Sbnc" eincu quUh SOlorgcn).
EXERCISE XX.
A. 1. Wuin Wh\\^x ift t»on gutem, l;artei!t ©ta^le. 2. §o{;e
SBciume fjaben geh?o^nli4> gvo^e ^ilfte. 3. 2Ba§ fiir ^ferbe l^aben
§"ll
SHORTER FORMS OF CONDITIONAL.
125
©ic geJauft? ^d; ^abe Wirnrje unb n)eif,e ^>ferbe ge!auft. 4.
pKcu 6ie Gcfairigft mcin ®la§ mit fiifd^cm Staffer. 5. STa^fere
eolbaun eileu fvo^en mnU^ in bic ©c^lac^t. 6. 3h?ei glucflic^e
gjlen[d;en iuof;nen in jenem ipaufe. 7. ipaben ©ie etma^ 9?eueg
in beretabt ge^ort? ^a Woi)l biel 9^eue§, aber nic^tg ^nte*
reffante^. 8. ^ier i[t guter ^afe unb frifd^eg SBrob; bitte,
bebienen @ie fic^. 9. 2Cer bu bi[t geigt beinc ©efettfc^aft. 10.
©uten ^JJorgen, .^err ^xam, i^ ^o[fe, bag iuir ^eute fd)dne§
^Better ^aben ioerben. 11. ^n hjelc^em ^aFjre ernannte bie
^onigin ben ©rafen Don 3)ufferin gum ©ouberneur Don ganaba?
12 ^d) ^aU guteg $a^ier, aber meine ^eber ift fc^Iec^t. 13. ^ie
.^inber liebten meinen Dnfel, mil er nie miibc h)urbe, ifjnen fd)one
@efd;icf;ten gu erjafjlen. 14. @ie {jaben enblid^ befannt, bafj ®ie
Unvec^t f)aben. 15. ^c^ ^abe mic^ erfditet ; mm id) je|t fange,
it)urbe id^ fjeifer twerben. 16. ^c^ ^aU fd^on oft ba§ Sieb
gef)ort, h)elc^e§ bie ©dngertn im Ron^^xt gefungen ^at 17.
©ute md)cx ftnb treue O^reunbe, bie immer ^at fiir un§ fjabcn.
18. 2Benn tt)ir fleigig finb, fo toerben unfere Sef)rer ung
(oben.
B. 1. Have you black ink or red? I have black. 2. Rich
people are not always generous, and generous people are not
always rich. 3. What kind^of neighbours have you .? We
have friendly neighbours. 4. Please fill my glass with pure
fresh water. 5. High mountains and beautiful valleys spread
out before our eyes. 6. I have something important to say
to you. 7. New friends are not always good friends. 8.
This mother buys her children something useful. 9. Have
you white paper or blue } I have white, but my brother has
blue. 10. I like to hear the singer, who sang at (in) the
concert yesterday. 11. My sister did not sing at the concert,
because she was hoarse. 12. If she had not been hoarse,
she would have sung.
126
LESSON XXI.
Riia
ORAL EXERCISE XX.
1. Weshalb liebten die Kinder meinen Onkel? 2. Wer
wohnt in jenem Hause ? 3. Was hat die Mutter ihren Kin-
dern gekauft? 4. Was fur Papier haben Sie fiir mich
gekauft ? 5. Warum sangen Sie nicht ? 6. Womit haben Sie
mein Glas gefiillt ?
LESSON XXI.
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
112. The Passive Voice is formed by means of the vailous
tenses of the auxiliary verb Incrbcn, to become (sec § j >)) +
the Past Participle of the Verb to be conjugated, as in
the Paradigm below.
Principal Parts of ttierbett :
iNFiN. tucrbcn Impf. touxht (toarb) Past Part. geiDOrbcn
Note. — The perfect tenses of tDerben are formed with fein (see
S 53. fl), Perf. 3t^ Bin gciuorben; Plupf. irf) toar geirorbeii, etc For the
formation of the future and conditional, see fein (§ 52).
Paradigm of the Passive Voice of loBett, to praise.
'"^'c**'ve- Subjunctive.
Present.
(Pres. of roerben + P. Part, of loben.)
I am (being) praised, etc. I (may) be praised, i*.to
id) tt)erbe ^ id^ njerbe
i>w h)irft bu h)erbeft
er it)irb I er toerbe
toir toerben f 8^^**" tvix toerben f 9^^**^*
t^r iuerbet i^r merbet
ftetoerben J fiehjerben
§iial
PASSIVE VOICE OF loBen.
127
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Imperfect.
(Imperf. of ttjciben + P. Part, of toben.)
I was (being) praised, etc. 1 might be (being) praised,
id) tt>urbe (toarb)
bu tDurbeft (tDarbft)
er luurbe (n)arb)
hjir tr>urben
\i}x ttjurbet
fie n)urben
gc(oH
ic^ tt)iirbe
bu iDurbeft
er tuiirbe
h)ir iDurben
i^r icurbet
fie itjiirben
[etc.
gelobt
Perfect.
(Perfect of irerben + P. Part, of loben.)
(Part, of tDerbcii omits gc-)
I have been pr ased, etc.
id) bin
bu bift
erift
h)ir finb
il^r feib
fie finb
I (may) have been praised.
gclofit hjorben
ic^ fei
bu feieft
er fei
h)ir feien
i^r feiet
fie feien
[etc.
gclafit h)orben
Pluperfect.
(Plupf. of ttjerben + P. Part, of lobcn.)
I had been praised, etc. I might have been praised,
ic^ Wax gclobt it)orben ic^ trare gclobt iuorben [etc.
bu iparft gelobt iDorben, etc. bu n)areft gelobt iporbcn, etc.
Future.
(Future of njerbeu + P. Part, of lobcn.)
I shall be praised, etc. I shall be praised, etc.
ic^ Jtjcrbe aelolit lucrben ic6 toerbe cdahi toerben
bu njirft gelobt n^evben, etc. bu toevbefrgelobt ttjerben, etc.
128
LESSON XXI.
[§iia
Indicative. Subjunctive,
Future Perfect.
(Fut. Perf. of lurrbni + P. Part, of lobcn.)
I shall have been praised, etc. I shall have been praised, etc.
id; iuerbe flclobt iuorbcn fein id; iDcrbe gcloftt tDorben [ein
tu luirft gelobt toorben fein, etc. bu tuerbeft gclobt trorben fein
etc.
Conditional.
(Cond. of JDcrbcu + P. Part, of loben.)
Simple.
I should be praised, etc.
id; luitrbc ge(o&t Juerben
bu it)urbeft geIo6t tuerben, etc.
Infinitive.
(Infin. of iDtxbm + P. Part
of loben.)
J^res. to be praised
gcIoBt Qn) luerben
Per/", to have been praised
gclofit )t)orben (511) fein
Compound.
I should have been praised
id) iDiirbe gdobt tworben fein
bu miirbeft gelobt morben fein
etc.
Participles.
(Pait. of iDcrbeii + P. Part
of loben.)
J^res. being praised
gc(oBt tDcrbenb
Past been praised
gclofit iDorben
Imperative.
(Imper. of tucrbcit + P. Part, of loben.)
be praised, etc.
twerbe gclafit
it)erbe er gelobt
iuerben Irir gelobt
trerbet geIo6t
it)erben fie geloBt
Remarks. — I. The shorter forms, i. e. Impf. and Plupf.
Subj. (see § m, and Note), are commonly used for the
longer forms with miirbe in the conditional.
§112]
PASSIVE VOICE.
129
2. Observe the omission of the gc- in the P. Part, of iDcrbcn
(loorbcn for gc-morbcn) when used as auxiliary of the passive
voice.
3. The personal agent with the passive voice (which is
the subject of the active verb) is denoted by the preposition
Hon (Engl, by), as :
^er unartige ^nabe h)trb Hon feinem 2ef)rer Beftraft,
The naughty boy is being punished by his teacher.
4. The auxiliary participle tDorben is omitted whenever the
state of the subject may be regarded as still continuing, thus :
^a^ ^mi \\i (jebaut.
The hous^ has been (is) built (and is still standing).
5. The Engl. *I am,' * I was,' etc., as part of the passive
Auxiliary *to be,' must be rendered into German as follows:
{a) By the proper tense of tocrbm when they are equivalent
^ *I am being,' ' I was being,* etc., as :
The child is (i. e., is being) punished by its parents,
^a^ ^inb ttJtri Don feinen ©Item kftraft ;
The dinner was being served, when we arrived,
3)a§ ^Httag^effen mnrbc ferbiert, alg h)tr anfamen ;
or when the verb, being turned into the active voice, is in the
Jsresent or imperf. tense respectively, as :
The boy is (was) always punished by the teacher,
Passive: \ ^^^" ^® ^^ ^^^^^ naughty,
] 3)er 5lnabe loivb (tuutbc) immer tjom Se^rer 6e=
ftraft, ioenn er unartig ift (toar) ;
The teacher always punishes (pres.) or punished
Active: \ (^"^P^') ^^^® ^^^^ ^^^^"^ ^^ ^^ (was) naughty,
I Tier 9(>fnvr fipWrnff /'fipflvnWi*^ tmmov hfn '^■^ych^vi
[ hjenn er unartig ift (ipar).
I30
LESSON XXi.
[§§"a-
{b) By the proper tense of fciii (with or without h)orben. see
last Remark), when they are equivalent to 'I have been,
'I had been,' etc., or when the verb, being turned into the
active, would be perf. or pluperf. respectively, as :
Passive: j I ^m (=- have been) invited to the party,
C ^cf; Mn 3ur ©efca[d;aft eingclobett (hjorben) ;
Active: \ ^^^V ^^^^ invited (perf.) me to the par* ,.
( man ^at mid; gur ©efeUfc^iaft ciiigcrobcii.
(The dinner was (« had been) served, when we
Passive: ■< arrived,
( ^a^ 3)?iltag§effen mx \tx\s\txi, al^ trir anfamcn;
Active: \ '^^^^ ^^^ served (plupf.) the dinner, etc.,
( 93Jatt f^tiiit bag gjiittaggeffcn fcrtJicrt, u. f. h>.
The following examples will serve to show more clearly the
proper use of the various forms of the passive :
' {a) 3)ie Saben mcrbcn W r^^\o\\^xt. The shops are
being shut now (present),
(P) 2)ie Sabcn finb biefe Socl^e fru^er Qe^roffen marbcn,
The shops have been shut earlier this week
{perfect),
{c) 3)ie Saben finb je^t sefc^Ioffen, The shops are (and
remain) shut {past state, contijiuing in the
present),
{a) !5)er ©olbat ttiurbe Don einer ^ucjer ticrltjunbct The
soldier was wounded by a ball (a ball wounded
him, i?np/,),
(P) 2)er eolbat hiar bon einer ^ugel berhjunbet morbeit.
The soldier had been wounded by a ball
{pluperf,).
{c) 2)er ©olbat tuar f(^tt)er t)ertt)unbet. The soldier was
severely wounded (and still suffered from his
wound : past state, continuing in the/^j/).
J
2. <
113^
LIMITATIONS OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
I3i
' {a) ^iefc 23ruc!c hJurbe Dor ^cbn ^af>ren grbaut. This
bridge was built ten years ago (they built it
^ then, that is the date of its being built, imp/.)
(b) 2)iefe iBriicfe luttr bor ge^n ^at^ren gebaut. This
bridge was built ten years ago (and is still
standing: past state, continuing in t\iQ present).
Exercise on the Preceding Rules.
A. Turn the following sentences into German: 1. This house was
built by my father. 2. My window is broken (flebrodjcn). 3. The child
Is washed (gcwafd)cii). 4. This man is esteemed by everybody (jebcrnianu).
5. The garden must be sold. 6. The enemy was beaten ((]c|ci)(ogcn).
B. Turn the following sentences into the passive : 1 . 2Boi:au§ madden
h)ir aJieffcr? 2. 9tobert ©tcDeufou I)at bic 55ictoria^Sracfe bci Safontreal
gebaiit. 3. 9«ciu S3ntber {)at mir biefe lU)r gofd)cntt. 4. 2)ie ^ciube bom-
barbtcrtcn bie @tabt. 5. 2)cr ?cl^rer l)attc \iz\\ ^naben bcftraft, hjeil bet
^nabc fein SSucf) oertoren (lost) ^atte. 6. ©ein 33ater iDirb bid^ loben.
113. Limitations of the Passive Voice.
I. Only the direct object of a transitive verb can be-
come the subject of the passive verb ; thus we say in the
Active : 3)Jein 23ater liebt miij ; and in the
Passive: ^^ hjerbc Don meinem SSater geliebt.
But the sentence :
* I have been promised help by him * =
§ulfc ift mir t)ou i^m berf^roc^icn (promised) ioorben,
since in the
Active: @r ):)Oii mir §ulfe berf^roc^en (promised),
§iilfc is the direct, but mir the indirect object. Hence it fol-
lows, that
2. Intransitive verbs can only be used impersonally in the
passive, thus :
132
LESSON XXI.
m nj
He has been helped = (M, iff ((,„, get^olfen luorbcn.
This mpersonnl passive is also used in expressin-^ an action
without specifying any agent, as : " "°"
e» liiuibe goftcrii 3t6enb Bid jtkiiit
IPiir \m cilaubt ; ©cflcrit 3(6cnJi tnuriie, etc.
114. Substitutes for the Passive Voice.
The passive voice is much less frequently used in German
than m Enghsh particularly in the longer forms. It is "en
replaced, especially with intransitive verbs :
withlh!^ 'X^'^'^f/''' P^°"^"" "»•»« (Fr....,see Less. XXVII),
with the verb in the active voice, as :
aWttn gloufif i^m md;t. He is not believed •
man tann x^m nic^t traucn. He cannot be trusted.
W By a reflexive verb, as :
^er ec^Iiiffer Juivb fi,§ fi„ben. The key will be tound-
and particularly with laffcn, as : '
3)a§ im ^ U\d)t mac^en. That can easily be done
Vocabulary.
to conquer, overcome, ero'Bern mill, bte gjiu^le
believe, glaubeu (intr., + dat.
of person)
wait (for), it)arten(auf -I- ace.)
workman, bcr Wbeiter
visit, visitors, b^r m\ud)
beef, bag ^iubfleifc^
courage, bie STajjferfeit
untruth, falsehood, bie Wn't
it)a^r^eit
as, alg
114]
TH^. PASSIVE VOICE.
133
once, cin'mal carefully, forg'faltig
this evening, f^cutc 2l6cnb severely, ftreng
as soon as, fobalb* little, h^enig
Idioms : As a child, when (I etc. was) a child, ali «lnb ; This house
is for sale (lit., to sell, to he sold), bfcfc* ^aud ift ju oerfaufen; to have
visitors, aSefud) tjabeti.
EXERCISE XXI.
A. 1. 3)iefe§S8ilblDurbebonTnemer®c^it)eftergcmaIt,unbe§ift
i)ie( gelobt hjorben. 2. ® ie (Stabt ift bom ©eneral bombarbiert unb cr*
obert iDorben. 3. 2Bir hjerben beftraft hjerben, h)enn tuir unfere Se!*
tion nic^t forgfaltig lerneu. 4. 2)ieSaben finb gefcf;Iof(en, benn f)cute
ift (etn) geiertag. 5. ^ft bag ^an^ neben ber ?!)iu^le bcvfauft?
6. ^ahjot;!, c« tuurbe geftern toon ^^rem ^effcn gefauft. 7. 3^on
lt)em tourbe ba§ ^inb gerettet, aU ba§ §au6 brannte? 8. @g
Itjurbe t)on einem 5(rbeiter gerettet, h)elc^er hjegen feiner ^a^ferfeit
t)on ben Seuten gelobt n)urbe. 9. 3Bare ber ^nabe nad; §aufe
gefc^icft iDorben, trenn er nic^tunarttg geit)efen h)are? lu. 9'^eben
bem ^aufe unfereS 9fJac^bar§ hJirb cine ^irc^e Q^haut 11. ©g
iDurbe geftern SCbenb i)iel bet m^ gefungen imb gef^ielt, benn tuir
\)atUn 53e[uc^. 12. ^ft ba§ Sfiinbfleifc^ gefc^ic!t :t)orben, n^elc^eg
id) beftetrt ^abe? 13. ®er 2ef)rer fagte, bag er mit meiner Strbeit
gufrieben fei. 14. 2)ag 33ilb hjdre toon ben ^liinftlern nic^t gelobt
hjorben, t enn e§ nic^t fe^r fc^on getoefen irare. 15. 211^ ^inb
tourbe id^ tmr..er Don nieinem SSater ftreng beftraft, n)enn icb eine
Untt)a^r^eit fagte. 16. SBirb e§ un3 eriaubt fein, imfere ^(ufgaben
JU berbrennen, tvenn ioir bamit fertig finb? 17. @§ n)trb fjeute
biel gef^iett, aber it^enig ftubiert, toeil iuir morgen feine ©(f;ule
§aben. 18. (S§ ift mir nicf)t§ babon gefagt morben. 19. 2Bir
tourben nic^t gelobt, beil iuir nic^t flei^ig tuaren. 20. ©oDalb bie
Seftionen gelernt finb, iucrben Joir cincn ©^a^iergang mac(Kn.
B. 1. Our parents love us. 2. We are loved by our parents
3. By whom was this letter brought? 4. It was brouo-ht b<
a me.'isenger. 5. Our house is built, and we are already
^ving in it. 6. Is the dinner served ? No, it is being served
-n
34
LESSON XXII.
[51x5
now. 7. Was the soldier in the hospital wounded, or was he
111 ? H. He had been wounded by a bullet. 9. The carriages
of the count will be sold to-day. 10. His horses are already
sold. 11. Why is this boy not believed? 12. He is not
believed because he once told an untruth. 13. It is agreeable
to be praised. 14. My sister is learning the song, which was
sung at (in) the concert yesterday.
ORAL EXERCISE XXI.
]. Wer hat dieses Rindfleisch gebracht? 2. Wann wird
uns erlaubt werden, im Garten zu spielen ? 3. 1st das Haus
neben Jer Kirche verkauft? 4. Wird heute Abend viel stu.
diert werden.? 5. Von wem wurde der Knabe nach Hausa
geschickt ? 6. 1st dieses Bild zu verkaufen ?
LESSON XXII.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES: WEAK AND MIXED.- STRONG
VERBS: Bd§cn MODEL.
116. Declension of Adjectives: Second Form.
If preceded by the Definite Article or by any deter-
minative word of the bicfcr Model, the Attributive Adjective
follows the Weak Declension, and takes -c in the Nomi-
native Sing, of all Genders, and in the Accusative
Sing. Feminine and Neuter; otherwise -en thr ughouti
Weak Declension of ^ut, good.
Singular, Plural,
MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
Nom. gate
Gen. gutcn
Ace. guten
gutc
guten
6utc
flute
^"^it
flutet)
[§"5
§»'5l
WEAK DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
135
Substantives with Adjectives.
Singular.
MASC.
FEM.
Nom,
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
the good man the good woman
ber gutc 3Kanu bie gutc ^rau
be^ gutcn ^Itonneg ber gutcn 3=raii
bem giitftt '^i)lo<\\XK^ ber gutcii J^rau
ben guten 9JZann bie gutc %x<x\x
Plural,
NEUTER.
the good child
bag gute ^tnb
beg gutcn ^inbeS
bem i]iitcn ,V{inbc
bag gute ^inb
ALL GENDERS.
Nom. bie t3utcn 'Didnner, ^rauen, ^inber
Gen. ber gutcn 3Kdmter, grauen, ^inbcr
Dat. ben gutcit 5!Jlannern, grauen, ^inbern
Ace. bie gutcit gjlcinner, grauen, ^inbcr
Observe : Words of the bicfcr Model having (as far as pos-
sible) a full set of endings showing gender, etc., the adjective
has as few of such distinctive endings as possible.
Further examples :
bicfcr gutc 5!Jlann, this good man
biefeg gutcn 9}?anneg, of this good man, etc.
jcnc gutc 3^rau, that good woman
jener gutctt ^^rau, of that good woman, etc.
lued^eg gutc ^inb, which good child
hjelc^eg gutcn ^inbcg, of which good child, etc.
Remark. — Two or more adjectives qualifying the same
substantive follow the same form (compare § 102, Remark 3,
above), as :
ber gutc, attc, rote SSein,
gutcr, alter, roter 3Sein.
Decline throughout in Geimau: the sick child; that high tree; which
long lesson; this beautiful, broad stream; that young womai; this lazy
\iorse ; which tired boy.
■r
136
LESSON XXII.
{§§116.
1 16. Third Form. - If preceded by the Indefinit . Ar-
ticle or by any determinative word of the mtin Model, the
Attributive Adjective follows the bicfcr Model in the Nom-
inative and Accusative Sing, of all Genders ; otherwise
It takes -en (i. e., follows the Weak Declension) through'
Qui, thus : ^ *»
Mixed Declension of gut good.
MASC-
Nom. i^utcr
Gen. tjuten
Dat. QuUn
Ace. gutcn
Singular,
FEM.
0UtC
guten
fluten
NEUTER.
0UtCl
0uten
guten
0UtC0
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
guttn
fluten
Outen
guten
Substantives with Adjectives.
Singular,
MASC.
a good man
Nom. ein gutcr 9[)?ann
^^M' NEUTER.
a good woman a good child
„ . <^^"^ 0"tc 5rau ein gutcg ^inb
Oen. etnec3 o,^xi^x, 9«anne^ einer ^xKi^xi grau eineg guten ^inbe*
Dat. emem gutcn gj?anne einer guten ^rau einem guten ^inbe
-c. emen guten 2)?ann fine gutc grau ein gutcS ^inb
Observe : This form differs from the weak form only in the
Nom. Sing. Masc, and Nom. and Ace. Sing Neut
where words of the mein Model have no distinctive endings'
The adjective must consequently have rhe missing sign of
gender and case. ^
The Plural of this form is the same as that of the Weak
Declension, but, as ein has no Plur., tbe full declension of
Substantives with mein is given here :
B«
"7] COMPOUND VERBS WITH SEPARABLE PREFIX. I37
NEUTER.
my good child
mein gutel 5liub
meine^ gutcn
tneinem gutcn
^inbe
utein 0utc8 ^inb
Singular,
MASC. FEM.
my good brother my good sister
N. mein flutcr 33ruber meine gute @c^h)eftei
G. meine^ guten meiner guten
S3ruber^ ©d;lDefter
D. memem guten meiner guten
Sruber ©c^hjefter
A. meinen guten ^rubermeinc gutc ©d^toefter
Plural.
ALL gb:nders.
Norn, meine guten 33ruber, ©c^tDeftcrn, ^inbei
Gen. meiner guten 93ruber, ©^ioeftern, ^inber
Dat. meinen guten 33rubern, ©c^n)eftern, ^inbern
Ace. meine guten SBriiber, ©djitoeftern, ^inber
117. Compound Verbs with Separable Prefix.
I. The prefixes Be-, er-, etc. (see § 35, Rem. 6), hence
called Inseparable Prefixes, are never separated from the
verb ; other prefixes (chiefly the Prepositions) are Separable,
but only in Principal Sentences with Simple Tense'
as:
2)er ^i)nig f^irftc jhjei 53oten m%,
The king sent out two messengers.
9l?ein SBruber rcifl morgen ob.
My brother sets out (= departs) to-morrow.
Note.— These Prefixes contain an idea distinct from that of the verb
and hence, if retained before the Verb in the cases above, would throu
the verb out of its place as Second Idea of the Principal Sentence.
2. The 9c- of the P. Part, and ju in the Infin. follow the
prefix, making together but one word, as :
^ie 33otcn be-S ^onig^ finb abflcretft.
The messengers of the king have departed.
10
138
LESSON XXII.
XI7-
5D^ein ^aUx hjunfd^t morgcn a6jureifen.
My father wishes to depart to-morrow.
3. The principal accent is on the Ferd when the Prefix is
Inseparable; on the TV^.r when Separable, 2.^-. befu'c6en t)er-
tau'fen ; but aug^c^icfen, ab'reifen.
4. The principal parts of Separable Compound Verba
should therefore be given as in the following examples :
Infin. Impf. p. Part.
an'greifen, to attack griff ...ox^ angegriffen
ab'fc^neiben, to cut off fc^nttt . . . a6 abgefd^niltcn
118.
Strong Verbs: ficigcn Model.
Infin. Impf. P. Part.
Germ, Model: \>tx^^xy bife oebtffen
Engl. Analogy : bite bit
Ablaut: (| \
bitten
w
t
LIST.
Notes. - i. Compounds are only given in the Lists when the slmpl,
Verb IS not found in the strong form.
2 R. = Reflexive; N. = Neuter, i. e, conjugated with feitt onlyj
^ tr, /"'"' ^'"^ ^""''^^^ '- ^" ^**^ '^^^ °^ ^«^^«5 W. indicates that
the Weak form is also used without difference of meaning.
beigen, bite
(er)6leic^en (W. N.), turn pale
(6e)flci^en (R.), apply one's self
9leid;en, resemble, be equal to
gleiten (N.), glide
greifcn, grasp, seize
fneifen, pinch
icibcn, suffer
erblic^
befli^
0"ff
fniff
mt
gebiffen
erblid^en
befliffen
geglic^en
geglitten
gegriffen
gefniffen
QdiiUn
ii8]
STRONG VERBS : BciJeU MODEL.
'39
jjfetfen, whistle
rei^en, tear
teiten (N. A.), ride
fd^Ieid^en (N.), sneak
fd^Ieifen, grind
fd^meijen, fling
fdjineiben, cut
fdjireiten (N.), stride
ftreic^en, stroke
ftreiten, contend
h)etc^en, yield
titt
m^
Mmig
fd^nitt
fd^ritt
ftrid^
ftritt
gejjfiffen
geriffcn
gentten
gefd^lid^en
fiefd^liffen
gefc^miffen
Qcfc^nitten
gefc^ritten
geftridjien
geftritten
geh)id^en
Remarks.— I. The root vowel being shortened in the Impf.,
the following consonant, if single, is doubled; and stems
in -b (fc^neiben, (eiben) change b into it
2. Those whose stem ends in -ft change g into f( in the
Impf. (unless final) and P. Part., as : beigen, ic^i big, toxx biffen,
gebiffen.
3. The following Verbs are weak when they have a different
meaning, as below :
bleic^en (trans.), bleach bletc^te gebteic^t
fc^leifen, drag ; raze (to the ground) frfjleifte gefc^Ieift
ttjeidfien, soften, soak tt)etd^te geh)eid(>t
4. Segleiten, to accompany, is no compound of gleiten, to
glide, but of teiten, to lead (weak, = be-ge-leiten) ; ijerleiben,
to make disagreeable, spoil (not from leiben, but Seib) is
weak.
Vocabulary.
to set out, depart, ab'reifen
cut off, ab';d;neiben
paint (not pictures), a\x- =
ftreid^en
slip, slide, aug'gteitcn
comprehend, understand, be:
QIC t fen
seize, ergreifen
I40
LESSON XXII.
f§ii6
fear, fic^ fiirc^ten (i)or + dat.)
tear (to pieces), §errei|en
pass (time, etc.), gu'bnngen
Cinderella, 3(fc^en^uttel
barber, ber 33arbier'
idea, notion, ber 33egriff
steamer, steam-boat, bag
S)am^ffc^iff
thief, ber 2)ieb
grass, bag ©rag
hair, bag §aar
hay, bag §eu
huntsman, hunter, ber Sager
illness, bie ^ranf^eit
fever, bag gieber '
slipper, ber ^antoffel
rain, ber dtcQm
rheumatism, ber 9fif)eumatigmug
piece, bag <BtM
littlejDiece, bag ©tiidfc^en
traveller, ber SKanberer
tooth, ber^a^n*
toothache, bag 3a^nh)elS>
evil, angry, cross, 6ofe
joyous, merry, fro^Iid^
smooth, slippery, glatt
golden, of^gold, golben
violent, he^vy (of rain), ^eftig
naughty, ill-behaved (of
children), un'artig
true, iua^r
furious, tDii'tenb
on that account, beglregen
of it, bat»on
the day before yesterday, tor's
geftern
H Jf * "" ^^^ P"*"* "^ ^^* *^""* *»^' <»" ^'Srim fcf tt. You are
tired, are you not? ®ic |Tnb mube, nid,t n>al)vl So are we, 2BJr finb ti
and), George has torn my coat, ©corg ftat mir ben mod jerrfffcn.
EXERCISE XXII.
^. 1. ^er ©enerat m. ritt auf etnem [c^hjarjen ^pferbe burcB
he ©tra^en ^Torontog (t)on Toronto) . 2. 2Bie Fjaben ©ie bie 3eit
auf bem Sanbe gugebrac^t ? 3. 2(n hjag fiir einer ^ranf^eit ^at
^^r 3Sater fo lange gelittcn? 4. ©ie finb miibe, nic^t tua^r?
3Bir finb eg and). 5. 2r(g mein S3ruber jung mx, l)atU "r fc^lec^te
3a.^ne unb litt fefjr an ^afjniuef). 6. ®er fc^n)ar^e anb un=
fer(e)g 3^ac^barg ift bofe ; er f)at borgeftern ein fleineg^^inb ge*
btffen. 7. llnf(e)re alien ^c^barn begleiteten ung nac^ bem
§afen, alg Juir abvciftcn. 8. ^o Woljnt ber «nrbicr, ber 5^nen
bag §aar gcfd^nittcn ijat^ 9. %cm alteg meffer fcTmetbet jen
gut, benn ber Wiener l;at eg geftern eefc^liffen. "lo/^llg id; bor
§ii8]
STRONG verbs: bcijen model.
141
ber ©c^ule iiber bie glatte ©tra^e fcJ^ritt, glitt ic^ aug unb jerrife
mir ben neuen 9floc!. 11. %l^ ber !Dieb im 33egriffe Wax, ing
gaug ju fc^leidjien, ergriff i^n ber Wiener. 12. Unfer alter 9iac^«
bar litt lange an (am) 9fl^eumatigmu§, unb hjar beStoegen immer ju
ipaufe. 13. ®er ©eneral rttt mit feinen Dffijieren iiber bie Sriicfe.
14. ^er b5fe ^nabe auf bem Sl^felbaum rig bie reifen ^^)fel
toom SBaume unb fd^mig fie auf bie @rbe. 15. 3Jlein junger ^fJeffe,
ber auf ber Uniuerfitdt toar, ^at am gieber gelitten, aber er ift
je^t irieber hjo^l. 16. Slfcfjen^juttcU ©cl(>h)efter fc^nitt fic^ (dat.)
ein <Biud bom gufee ah, hjeil er 5U grog fiir ben golbenen ^antoffel
toar. 17. ^c^ bin fc^neH nacf) §aufe geritten, ioeil ic^ mic^ oor
bem hjiitenben ©turme fiirc^tete. 18. 2)er 2Banberer fd^ritt frozen
3Jlute§ burd^ ben griinen SSalb unb ^fiff ein froF>lic^eg Sieb.
19. ^iefeg 5iKeffer ift nid)t fd^arf; n^ann trurbe e§ gefc^Iiffen?
20. RaxU fcfjoner, neuer died n)urbe bom §unbe gerriffen.
B. 1. Where is the old knife that you ground? 2. When
Mary was young she resembled her mother. 3. The bears
sneaked (perf.) into the wood, but the hunters followed (perf.)
them. 4. Where does the painter live who painted (perf.)
our house ? 5. The industrious countryman tut (perf.) the
grass yesterday, and is making hay to-day. 6. Why are you
crying, Charles? I am crying because George pinched (perf.)
me. 7. The rain spoiled my (dat. -|- def. art.) journey to the
corntry. 8. The steamer has whistled already. Now I shall say
fc^' r ell. 9. Little Charles is a naughty child; he has torn
his (dat. of refl. pron. -f- art.) new dress. 10. Old people
often suffer from rheumatism. 11. Have you understood
what he said ? 12. The gardener was burning the boughs,
which he had cut from the trees. 13. I have quarrelled with
my old friend, because he was wrong. 14. This blue ribbon
is too long, please cut a little of it off for me. 15. Why is
Charles crying ? He has been bitten by a dog.
142
LESSON xxm.
[|II9
ORAL EXERCISE XXIL
1. Was fiir einen Hund hat Ihr Nachbar? 2. Wie wiirden
Sie die Zeit zubringen, wenn Sie reich waren? 3. Was
machte der Wanderer, als er durch den Wald schritt? 4. Wo
wohnen Sie jetzt ? 5. Wann werden Sie Heu machen?
6. Weshalb sind Sie so schnell nach Hause geritten ?
LESSON XXIII.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: Utihttt MODEL.
119. Possessive Pronouns.
1. The Possessive Pronouns are used when no substantive
is expressed, as : \
The hat is mine (Pronoun) ; but :
It is my hat {Adjective).
2. They are formed from the stems of the corresponding
Possessive Adjectives by adding certain endings, as follows :
{a) Endings of biefer Model (without article), as :
Singular.
MASC.
Norn, meiner
Gen. meincg
Dat. tneincitt
Ace. meincti
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
FEM. NEUTER.
meinc mein(c)0
meincr meincg
tneincr meincm
tneinc mein(c)g
Observe : In the Nom. and Ace. Neuter, -c of the ending
may be omitted.
meine, mine
tneincr, of mine
meincn, (to, for) mine
nteine, mine
So for the other persons :
MASC. FEM.
Sing, beincr beinc
fein?t feinc
i^rer i^re
NEUTER.
beincS, thine
f(>tni>& flic ifo
i^rcg, hers (its)
§"9l
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
143
NEUTER.
ttnf(e)vc0, ours
eu(e)rc0, yours
tf^rei, theirs
^^rc8, yours)
MASC.
N. ber tneine
G. be^ meincn
D. bem meinen
A. ben meincn
So
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
bie meincn, mine
ber meincn, of mine
ben meincn,(to, for)mine
bie meincn, mine
MASC. FEM.
Plur. unf(e)rcr un[(e)rc
eu(e)rcr eu(e)rc
il^rcr if^rc
(S(?rcr ^t^rc
{b) Preceded by the Definite Article, and hence with end-
ings of Weak Adjective, thus:
Singular.
FEM. NEUTER.
bie meinc ba§ meinc
ber meincn be§ meincn
ber meincn bem meincn
bie meinc ba§ meinc
ber; bie, ba§ beinc, thine ber, bie, ba§ eu(e)rc, yours
ber, bie, ba§ feinc, his, its ber, bie, bag ifjrc, theirs
ber, bie, bag if)rc, hers, (its) (ber, bie, bag ^^rc, yours)
ber, bie, bag unf(e)rc, ours
{c) Preceded by Definite Article, with ending -ig -[" Weak
terminations, thus :
Singular.
MASC FEM. NEUTER.
Norn, ber meinige bie meimge bag meintge
Gen. beg meinigen, etc. ber meinlgen, etc. beg meinigen, etc.
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
Nom. bie meinigen, mine
Gen. ber meinigen, of mine, etc.
So : ber, bie, bag beinige, thine
ber, bie, bag feinige, his, its
and so on for the other persons.
Note. — i. In unjrigc and citrige the -e of the stem is always omitted.
144
LESSON xxiir.
f§§ "9
Remark. -I. These forms are interchangeable, without
ditterence in meaning, as :
I have my book, but I have not yours,
Sc^ f)aU mm 33uc^, a6er id; f)ah nic^t J bag g^rc
His letter is here, but ours is not here,
( unf(c)rcr )
©em 53rief ift ^ier, aUvj bcr unf(c)rc f ift nic^t ^ier.
( bcr unfrige )
2. When a Possessive Pronoun is used as pre^icafe, it may
be replaced by the Possessive Adjective w///iou^ ending, as :
This book is mine, ^iefeg 58uc^ ift mcitt.
3. Observe the following idiomatic uses of the Poss. Prons. :
W Sci^ rtJerbe bag aWcinigc (neuter sing.) x^jm,
Is shall do my part, my utmost.
ip) %\t 3J?eimgen, bic ©einigen (Plur.),
My, his friends, family.
{c) A friend of mine = mtitv boil metnen ^reunben.
This friend of mine = J^icfcr mcin ^reunb.
120. Strong Verbs; filcibcii Model.
Infin. Impf.
Germ. Model: biciben blic6
Eng, Analogy : wanting
Ablaut: ei |e
LIST.
Hci6en (N.), stay, remain Hie^
(ge)bei^en (N.), thrive gebie^
leil^en, lend, borrow \x%h
P. Part.
geblicben
le
ge6Iie6cn
acbteBen
Seliei^en
r2o]
STRONG vxHBs: hUxbm model.
HS
meiben, avoid
|)reifen, praise
reiben, rub
f(^eiben (N. A.), part (intr. and trans.)
fdfieinen, shine ; seem, appear
fc^reiben, write
fc^reien, scream, shout
fd^toeigen, be silent
\pmn, spit
fteigen (N.), mount, ascend
treiben, drive
iDetfen, show, point out
^eii^en^ accuse
Vocabulary.
mieb
gemieben
^)rieg
gepriefen
rieb
gerieben
fc^ieb
gefc^ieben
fd^icn
gefd^ienen
fc^rieb
gefc^ricben
'd)xk
gefc^rieen
fc^h)ieg
gefc^hjicgen
frie
gef|)ieen
ftieg
geftiegen
ttieb
getrieben
toieg
geh)ie[en
aie^
flejie^en
to copy, ab fd^rciben
hang up, aup^cingen
ascend, befteigen (trans.)
prove, demonstrate, bes
toeifen
appear, erfc^einen
shine, glitter, glanjen
descend, f)erab'fteigen
guard, keep, {jiiten
rule, reign, govern, regieren
write (to), fd^reiben (dat. or
an -f- ace.)
climb, fteigen (auf + ace.)
pardon, excuse, t)er§eif)en
remain behind, ^uriirf'bleiben
cold, bie (grfaltung
family, bie gamilie
herd, flock, bie §erbe
Idiom: Up to the present
heat, bie §i^e
last, ber Seiften
pepper, ber ^feffer
shepherd, ber ©chafer
shoemaker, cobbler, ber
©d^ufler
silence (act of keeping s.),
ba§ ©d^tDeigen
speaking (act of), bag 6prec^en
throne, ber ^^xon
pasture, pasturage, bie SSeibe
fifty, funfgig, funfgig
bright, brightly, ^ell
loud, loudly, laut
correct, ric^tig
round, lunb
bad, fc^Itmm
strong, severe, ftarf
time, still, noci) immcr.
ti6
LESSON XXIII.
EXERCISE XXIII.
[§§ lao
^. 1. eg tft nid;t mU^ ©olb, m^ cjiim 2. e^rec6cn ift
et^er ©^t^etgcn ift (s)oIb. 3. ®rf;ufter, bletb' 6ei beinem Seiften.
4. ©at a^t Xagcn bm ic^hJegen einer ftarfen ©rfciltung gu §aufe
gebheben 5 @ine bon meinen Gouftnen ift je^t bei ung auf 33efu4
ober fte bleibt nic^t lange. 6. 28ag fur ^iere finb in jenem
3BaIbe? @g ftnb Saren. 7. ^te 9«utter unb i^re ^ocbter
memten ^eftig, aU fie t)on einanbcr fc^ieben. 8. Mm Dbeim
bheb h)egen ber gro§en ^i^e mit feiner ^amilie auf bem Sanbe.
9. ^an l)at an feinen 3Sater gefc^rieben, unb ic^ bin im Seqriffe
an ben meinigen gu fc^reiben. 10. ^er ^5nig fc^imeg unb fcbien
traurtg p fern, alg er bie fc^rimme ^cbric^t i^orte. 11 ^itte
l^ergeiJ^en @ie mir, bag ic^ ^f^nen noc^' nic^t gefc^rieben f}ah,[
12. m t)ah,n 6ie ^f;ren ^nt aufge^dngt ? ^c^ ^aU i^n neben
bm^^ngen ge^cingt. 13. m^ tvxx auf ben Serg ftiegen, fcbien
he eonne fc^on jett. 14. SSelc^e bon biefen Suc^ern n)unfien
©te ? ^^ tDunfc^e bie meinen. 15. 2Bir Mrben auf bem Sanbe
gebheben fem, tt)enn unfere greunbe auc^ geblieben tDdren. 16 ^U
§erben n)urben auf bie Seibe getrieben, aU U)ir bom ^era
^crabftiegen. 17. @§ ift nm bett)iefen h)orben, bag bie @rbe
ninb tft. 18. ^ov funfgig ^a^ren beftieg bie ^onigin Victoria
ben X^ron, unb fie regiert noc^ immer. 19. SSurben ®ie nacb
^uxopa reifen, w^nn id) sumcfbliebe, um 3^r §au§ ju buten ?
20. 3)ie ^naben ^fiffen unb fd;rieen, a(§ fie auf ben SBerg ftiegen.
B. 1. George has black ink, but mine is red. 2. Mary's
sister and mine are learning German. 3. We have looked
for William's books and ours everywhere. 4. Your exercise
is not correct, copy it. 5. Whose gloves have you .? I have
mme and yours. 6. Why did the boy shout so loud? 7. To
whom were you writing the long letter yesterday.? 8. I have
black eyes, but yours are blue. 9. In what year did Goethe's
* Faust' appear.? 10. Waiter, please bring me the vinegar
and the pepper. 11. This lead-pencil is mine, where is
I2(]
TABLE OF ADJECTIVE ENDINGS.
147
yours? 12. Your aunt and mine are neighbours. \'^. The.
professor seemed not to be at home, for his windows and
shutters were not open. 14. I should write to him, if he
wrote to me. 15. I was writing to my mother and Charles
was writing to his when the postman brought us the letters.
ORAL EXERCISE XXIII.
1. Seit wann sind Sie schon zu Hause geblieben? 2. Was
machten die Schafer, als wir vom Berge herabstiegen ? 3.
Wann bestieg die Konigin Victoria den Thron .? 4. Was
fiir Tinte haben Sie.? 5. Fur wen ist dieser lange Brief.?
6. Welches sind die Namen der Monate .?
LESSON XXIV.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES (concluded): TABLE, GENERAL
REMARKS.- STRONG VERBS: fljiegcn AND Mtcn MODELS.
121.
Table of' Adjective Endings.
I. Strong.
Singular,
MASC.
N. — cr
G. — c8(cn)
D. —cm
A. —en
FEM. NEUT.
— C — C8
— ct -c§(cn)
— cr —cm
— c —eg
Observe: -en for -eg in Gen. Sing.
Masc. and Neuter before strong substs.
Plural.
M. F. N.
— C
— cr
—en
— c
II. Weak.
Singular.
MASC.
— C
— Ctt
— cn
—en
FEM.
— c
— cn
—en
— e
NEUT.
— c
—en
— cn
— e
Plur.
M. P. N.
— cn
— cn
—en
~en
Observe: Persistent -n,
except Nom. Sing, of all
genders, and Ace. Sing.
Fern, and Neuter.
I4S
LESSON XXIV.
[§§ lai-
MASC.
Noin. — ei*
Gen. — pii
Dat. — en
Ace. — en
III. MiXF:n.
Siiiirulaf.
■Jiri/^ imir .
FEM.
NKUTER.
— e
— e0
—en
—en
—en
—en
— e
—ti
^'lural.
M. F. N.
—en
—en
—en
—en
Observe: Same as Weak (II), except Norn. Sing. Masc.
Ace. Sing. Neuter.
arv, Nom.
123. General Remarks on Adjectives.
1. Participles used attributively are employed and declined
as Adjectives, as : geliebter 3Satcr, beloved father ; ba^ it)einenbe
^mb, the weeping child ; meine gee^rte 3)Zutter, my honoured
mother.
•
2. Adjectives and Participles used as Substantives vary
their declension according to the rules for Adjective Declen-
sion, but are spelt with capital letters, as: ber ^ranfc the
sick man, patient ; Fern, bie ^ranfe, the sick woman; Plur bie
^tanfen; m. ^rarier, a sick man, patient; pi. S^ranfe sick
people, patients.
Remarks.— I . Many words, the English equivalents of which
are Substantives only, are Adjectives in German, as: ber
^rembe, the stranger, foreigner, PI. bie ^^remben, but m. greht=
ber, PI. grembe ; ber 9?eifenbe, the traveller, nw S^cifenber, etc.
These Adjective-Substantives, when Masc. and preceded by
the Definite Article, have the same inflection as the Weak
Declension.
2. Names of languages from Adjectives are not declined
when used without the article, as :
aSa^ ift bie§ auf ^eutf* ? What is this in German ?
laa]
GENERAL REMARKS ON ADJECTIVES.
149
3. Adjectives of colour used substantively a-e indeclinable,
or add -g in the Gen. Sing., as: ba« GJriin, be^ ©run(«).
4. If the Substantive is not expressed, the Adjective
shows by its ending the gender, number and case, as :
Gin !leiner iUfann unb ein grower,
A little man and a tall one.
Note. — The English ' one ' is in these cases not to be translated
into German.
5. If a Substantive is preceded by a succession of Adjec-
tives, they all follow the same form, as: gutct, alter, rotcr
2Bcin ; ber gutc, alte, rote %un ; eine^S outen, roten SSeineg.
6. Adjectives whose stem ends in -e(, -eti, -er, as : ebel,
noble ; golben, golden ; ^ei[er, hoarse, drop -c of the stem
when inflected ; those in -el, -er may drop -e of the termina-
tmi instead, unless the termination is -e, -er, or -el, as :
ba§ golbne Suuer; ber cblen or ebc(n ^rau; bem f>eifren or
l^eifern ©anger.
7. The Adjective {)oc^, high, drops c when inflected, as :
ber I5)0^e 33aum, the high tree.
8. Adjectives can generally be used without change as ad-
verbs, as : luftig, merry, merrily ; angenefjm, agreeable, agree-
ably ; gut, good, well.
9. Adjectives (so-called) in -er from names of places are
indeclinable, as : bie Sonboner ^^i^ung, the Londqn newspaper;
.hamburger ©d;iffe, Hamburg ships; ein ^^arifer §anbWu^,
a Paris glove.
Note. —These adjectives correspond to the English use of the
I^roper names without inflection. They are really sulxstantives in the
Gen. Plur., thus: bic ^ouboiicr Rcitiiiui is strictly bie Beitiina tierl^niibnnrr;
the newspaper of the Londoners. Hence they are spelt with a capital
letter.
,^ \
150
LESSON XXIV.
rS§ XM
I o. After personal pronouns, the Adjective follows the strong
declension except in the Dat. Sing, and Norn, (and some-
times Ace.) Plur., as :
(for) me, poor man ; yot: good people ; us little children,
mir anncn manm ; i(;r gutcu 9.eute ; un^ f leinc(n) .<Rinber.
11. The Indefinite Pronouns (sec Less. XXVII) ^u^a^
md;t^, biel, are Substantives, and therefore not determinative
words, and the following adjective has the strong declension
as: ctivag ©utcg, something good ; nic^t^ STngem^icg, nothing
plepsant.
Observe : The Adjective is here used as substantive, and
therefore spelt with a capital.
12. After the Indefinite Numerals in the Plural (see
Less. XXIX) aae, all; einigc (etlicf;c), some; manege, many;
mej,rcrc, several ; folc^c, such; bide, many; Jtjenige, few, the
Adjective may have either the weak or the strong ending.
13. After the interrogative Ujelc^e in the plural, the strong
declension is also found in the adjective ; and the exclama-
tory melcB is generally uninflected before an adjective, which
then always has the strong form, as :
aScfrJ jro^el S^ergnugen ! What (a) great pleasure I
123.
Germ. Model:
Engl. Analogy:
Ablaut:
(t)er)bnc|^cn, vex
piemen (N.), flow
gicpen, pour
Strong Verbs : fjjicgcn ModeL
Infin. Impf.
(shoot) shot
ie ii
LIST.
Derbro^
P. Part.
gef^c^offen
shot
berbroffen
gegoffen
laa
104]
STRONG verbs: fc^icjcn model.
151
nlimmen, glow
flimmcu (W.N. A.), climb
fricc^eu (N.), creep
ncnic^cn, enjoy
ricc(>cn, smell (tr. and intr.)
(cr)fcl;aacn (W.N.), sound, resound
faufcn, drink (of beasts)
(dncjen, shoot
fd^Iie^cn, lock, shut
fieben (W.), boil (intr.)
f^ric^en (N.), sprout
triefen (N.), drip
Remarks. — i. Observe, ns under the bei^en Model (§ 118,
Rem. I, 2) the doubling of consonants and the interchange
of 9 and ff : also the change of b into ii (as in letben fcfcnei-
ben, ik Rem. i).
2. dtad)cn/to avenge,' is weak but has also P. Part, gcrod^en.
3- eaufen has also fiiufft, fiiuft in the Pres. Indie. 2. 3. Sing.
4. The simp/e verb [c^aaen is usually weak ([c^attte aes
fcf) attt). '
5. In fieben the weak P. Part, (gefiebct) is rare.
fllomm
Jlnrmi
flenog
xo^
erfc^oH
foff
fott
f|)ro^
troff
Oeglommen
Ocfloumicn
ge!rorf)en
Senoffeu
0evorf;cn
erfc^oHcn
flefoffen
flefcr;o[fen
Oe[d;Ioffen
gefotten
ge^roffen
getroffen
124.
Strong Verbs : fc(Stcn Model.
Infin.
Germ. Model: fcd^ten
Ejigl. Analogy : wanting
Ablaut : (
2.3. S, Pr. Ind.
2. S. Imper.
fic^tft fic^t fid;t
I
LIST.
Impf.
foc^t
P. Part.
gefod^ten
fcd)ten fip-ht
irf?t[t, ^, fid;t
flec^ten, weave, twine fad;t[t, flid;t, flic^t
froc^t
gcfoc^tt'ii
gefloc^tten
152
LESSON XXIV.
[§184
(er)lo[c^cn (N.), be- (erIiWeft) erlifc^t ertofc^ erIoW
queHen, gush forth
[d^meljen (N.), melt
(intr.)
fd;tt)eKcn (N.), swell
come extmguished (erlifd^)
melfen (W.), milk (milfft, mil!t, ntilf) molt gemolfen
(quirift, quiat, queKe) quott gequoaen
(fc^mil^eft) fc^mitgt fc^mol^ gefc^jmoljen
(fc^mil^)
(fc^miaft) fc^'.Diat fc^tooa gefAtDoaen
Remarks. — i. Rare forms are enclosed in ( ).
2. The simple verb Ii3fa;en, 'to extinguish ' (ti.), is weak
(lofc^te, geIofd;t), as are also its separable compounds e ^
3- ec^mclsen (intr.) has also the forms (fc^mergeft), fc^tneht
4. ©c^meljen, ' to smelt ' and [c^h?eaen, ' to cause to swell '
(trans.), are weak.
Vocabulary.
extinguish, put out, au^'Iofc^en
water (flowers, etc.), begie^en
prescribe, ijerfc^reiben
flow past, Uorii'berflie^en
close, shut, j^it/fd^Iief^en
exhibition, bic STu^'fteaung
health, bie ©efunb^ett
drink, beverage, bag ©etrcinf
cow, bie ^uf)*
maid, maid-servant,bte 39?agb*
mid-day, noon, bcr 3)Jittag
pain, bcr 6d)mcr5
snow, ber ©d^nee
^ight, o,6)\
celebrated, famous, beru^mt
blind, bltnb
healthy, healthful, ge[u'..u
dear, lieb
Limburg (adj.), $^-im6urgef
dead, tot
Toronto (adj.), ^Torontoer
thereon, baran
past, by, t)oru6er
Jdiotna : 1. To ero uasf, tht> iw»,<.o ^... r^..*- .
4, In German, auf ^cutfd) or im ^(titfd[)en.
§1241
strong: verbs fe*ten model.
EXERCISE XXIV.
153
^.1. 2Bie tDurben eie biefe 3Borter auf Deutfc^ fc^reiben?
^. ^d; f;abe memen 33ricf gefd^loffcu unb iuerbe i^n jetu naA ber
^oftbrmflcn. 3. ®c§ 3Jiorocu§ ftcicjen bie flcinm 33ogeI sum §im=
inel auf unb finoen luftig. 4. SBetcf; grof^cS qSergniigen. aute ©e-
funb;eit gu oeniefeen! 5. Gin fleincr etrom m tufticj an unfmm
jpaufe i^oriibcr. 6. Xcx ^u^ bc§ ^lran!en ift gelcbtDolIen unb er
Icibet fe(;r baran. 7. Unfcr geef)rtcr ^rofef|or ift feit ad)t ^abxm
tot. 8. S)er 3^o!tor ^at bcm ^Iranfen guten, alten, roten Sein
berf^ricbcn. 9. 2)ie Seitungen tx^Un m wn bcr STorontocr
3Iu§fteaung. 10. ^er S^egen quoK bom §inimel unb lofrT^e bag
ghmmcnbe geuer au§. 11. Unfere Solbatcn fc^Ioffen bie 6tabt-
t()ore unb focf;tcn ta|)fcr gegen ben geinb. 12. ®ie 9}?agbe ^aben
bie Jlu^e gemolfcn unb je^t begiegen fie bie 33rumen. 13 Sitte
frf;iDeigt, i§r gutcn 2^uU, benn bie ^ran!en leiben teM qrofte
ed;mer3en. 14. SBufbe bcr M;rcr bbfe n^erben, h)enn ber ©Iter
^ne STufgabe scrriffe? 15. 5)er ©deafer f^at bem 9teifenben ben
^ii5eg nac^ bcr etabt gemicfcu. hi 2Burbe e^ ^^nen bie ^eife
bcrleiben, tr)enn ic^ gurucf bliebe ? 17. ^ahm ©ie bie ^rdcBitgen
^Mumcn gefcf;cn, bie tt)ir bem ,^ranlen fd;iden? 18. ^er ©cbnee
fc^molg unb bag SBaffcr troff bon ben §du[ern, alg bie Sonne
gegen SJ^ittag tuarm fd;ien. 19. ^er Slinbe, ber neben um
tt)o^nt, floc^t alDci ^orbe fur meine ^^utter. 20. 3)er junge unb
bcr alte grembe, bie im Salbe jagten, ^ben biele 33ogcI ge.
Wfen. 21. a?Dn h)cm finb bie Slumen begoffen toorben?
<5ie fmb bom ©drtner begoffen h)orben.
B. 1. The golden slipper was too snail for Cinderella's
sisters. 2. Paris gloves and Limburg cheese are famous every-
where. 3. The huntsman shot a hare and brought it home
4.^ Our neighbours are not at home, for their doors and
wmdows are closed. 5. I do not believe every story I hear
<>. Please, dear mother, tell us little children somethin- new
and pretty. 7. If Charles tears his new book, his m'other
11
154
LESSON XXV.
[§§ 124-
will be very angry. 8. He seemed not to hear what I said
to him. 9. These flowers are for the patients in the hospitals.
10. (The) green is agreeable for those who have weak eyes.
11. The horse is drinking the water which we have brought
him. 12. Pure fresh water is a healthful beverage. 13. A
week ago I was at (in) a concert, where this singer {/.) sang.
14. When the weather becomes cold, the dogs like to creep
behind the stove. 15. The travellers enjoyed the beauty of
the landscape, when they were ascending the high mountain.
16. Please tell me how this word is written in German.
ORAL EXERCISE XXIV.
1. Haben Sie Ihren Brief schon geschlossen? 2. Wie
lange ist Ihr geehrter Professor schon tot .-* 3. Was hat der
Doktor der Kranken verschrieben "i 4. Weshalb wurde der
Lehrer bose ? 5. Wer hat diese Vogel geschossen ? 6. Was
hat der Jager mit dem Hasen gemacht, welchen er im Walde
geschossen hat ?
I
LESSON XXV.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. - STRONG VERBS?
fricrcu model.
125. Comparison of Adjectives.
In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison are
formed by adding to the Positive :
-cr to form tlie Ojmparative, and
-(c)ft " '' " Superlative, as :
neu, new ncucr, newer neu(e)ft, newest
reid;, rich rcic^cr, richer reidfift, richest
aagenctim^ agreeable aiu-^cucbmcr, more agreeable
angenel;jnft most agreeable
116]
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
155
Remarks. — I. Monosyllabic adjectives with 0, 0, u (not
OU) generally take Umlaut (but with many exceptions, giVen
in App. K.), as:
lang Ittttger ISngft
tnxi fiirjer fiirjeft
2. The syllables -cr, (c)fl are added to every adjective,
without regard to its ler.gth, as in the case of angme^m (given
above, but see § i6i, note).
3. Adjectives used attributively in the Comparative or
Superlative degree are declined, and add the usual endings
fi/Ur the syllables -er, -eft respectively, as :
ber reic^erc aJlann ein reic^ercr 3Jlann
mein cilteftcS llleib liebftcr ^reunb
4. Participles are compared like adjectives, as :
geliebt, beloved geliebter geliebteft
5. -c of the Superlative ending is retained only after b, i
or a sibilant (f, ftj, 3, g, y), as : alt, Superl. altcfi ; but grofe
always has Superl. grojt.
5. Adjectives in -c, -cl, -en, -er drop e of the stem in the
Comparative, as : trcige, trager, tragft; ebe^ ebler, ebelft.
126. The Comparative.
1. 'Than ' = aU after the Comparative.
2. The compound form with me^r (Engl. * more ') is never
(except with the adjectives given in § 161) used in German
(as it is in Engl, with polysyllabic adjectives), unless when two
acl^ectives (i. e., two qualities of the same object) are being
compared, as :
@r tft me^r \6)\qo.^ alg !ran!.
He is more (i. e., rather) weak than ill.
156
LESSON XXV.
[§§1.26
3. Comparison of equality :
I am (just) as ricli as he,
^d) Bin (ebcn) fo reid; ttJic er.
4. * The . . . the ' before comparatives = je^ftcflo or nm
W— |C W^O or urn fo), as :
The longer the nights, the shorter the days,
3c (bcfto) Idnger bic md}H, jc (bcfto) fiivjcr bie 2:age.
5. When the comparative is declined, the omission of c of
the stem takes place just as in Adjectives in -er, as :
ben reid)er(e)n Wann, etc.
Note. — The syllable -cr may occur three times successively at the
end of the same adjective, viz. : i ° as part of the stem, e. g., Ijciict, hoarse*
2° as inflection of comparison, e. g., l)cif{c)rcr, hoarser; 3° as ending of
strong adjective declension, e. g., ein I)eif(e)i-ercr ©anger, a hoarser
singer.
as:
127.
The Superlative.
■
I, The Superlative is not used, even as Predicate^ in the
undeclined form, but :
(a) If the substantive is expressed, or if the substantive of
the preceding clause can be supplied, the (weak) adjective
form with definite article is used, as :
This river is the broadest in America (i. e., the broad-
est river), 2)te[cr glu^ ift bcr fircitcftc in ^merifa (ber
breitefteglug).
The days in June are the longest (days) in the whole
year, ^ie ^age iin ^uni jinb bic innjjftcn (X<x(^<t, under-
stood) im ganjen ^abre.
This earthquake was the most severe that we have
had, 2)icfe^ ©rbbebcn ift ba^ ^cftigftc^ tt)eld;eg toir
flel^abt l^aben.
127]
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
157
r/0 If no substantive can be supplied, the adverbial for fn
pr» ceded by om is used, as :
The lake is broader than the river, but the sea is the
broadest (observe not ' the broadest lake, river or
sea '), ^er ©ee ift breiter al# ber giu^, aber bie See ift am
brcitcflcn.
The days are longest (i. e., 'at the longest,' not 'the
longest days') in June, ^m ^uni finb bie ^age am
Idngftcn.
The earthquake was most severe on Monday, %x^
DJcontag iiuu bag (Svbbeben am ^cftigftcn (not' 'the
severest earthquake ').
Note. - The superlative may be strengthened by prefixing oUer-
as: bag ottcrficftigftc, am ollcrl)cftigftcn.
2. In the preceding examples, the superlative ascribes a
quality to the object in the highest degree in comparison
(expressed or implied) with, or relatively to, a nu nber of
other objects, and is hence called the Relative Superlative.
But the English superlative with most often merely ascribes
the quality in an efninent/y high degree, without instituting
any comparison. When so used, it is called the Absolute
Superlative, as:
Your father was most kind (i. e. = 'exceedingly kind,'
not = ' kindest ')
The Absolute Superlative is rendered in German by an ad-
verb of eminence, such as [c^r, very; f,od)ft, dufjerft, exceed-
mgly, prefixed to the adjective in the positive, as :
Sf)r ^ater tuar fcfir (finrftft, augerft) gutij^^
Your father was most (very, exceedingly, extremely)
kind.
158
LESSON XXV.
[§§ 127
3. The superlative is commonly used in German of two ob-
jects (which is not admissible in Engl), as :
^er (groj^ere or) griigte Don bicfcn aJuci s%\ahm.
The taller of these two boys.
128.
Comparison of Adverbs.
Adverbs are compared like adjectives, the superlative forn.
being that with ottl, as :
angene^m, agreeably angene^mer, more agreeably
am angene^mftcn, most agreeably
129.
gut, good
i}od), high
na^(e), near
Irregular Comparison.
Beffer kft (different root)
^o^er i)od)^t (drops c in Com/>aK)
na^er nciijft (nearest, next; in-
^. r . serts c in Super I \
mel,mucb „iej, mcift (different root)
n)entg, little (of quantity) miitber minbeft (different root)
m^ZT^'^y'l f '^' 1' "''"^ '' '^^''^ °^ ^"^"*^*y °"^y- For the Subst.
mel)rcrc5, Pi. mcl)verc 'some, several,' see §§ 152, 175.
2. Senig also has the regular forms lueniger, liienigft.
130. Defective Comparison.
The following Comparatives and Superlatives are formed
from adverbs, etc. (some of which are obsolete) :
(au6en, without, adv:) ciufeet, outer aufeerft, outermost
utmost, extreme
(e^e, before, conj:) (e^er, sooner, ad7> ) -[ ^^^^^' soonest
( erft, first
(^tttten, behmd, adv.) ^{ntcr, hii-Icr ^{nterit, hindmost
(mnen, withm, .^^z;.) inner, inner innerft, innermost
1
131]
COMPARISON OP ADVERBS.
159
(lafj, late, obsolete)
(mittcl, middle)
(nib, below, obsolete)
(okn, above, adv.)
(unten, below, adv,)
~ leljt, latest, last
mittlci-, middle mittclft, iiaddle
nieber, lower nicbcrft lowest
obcr, upper
unter, lower
(born, before, adv.) \)ox't>^x, fore
oberft, uppermost
unterft, lowest,
undermost
borbcrft, foremost
131.
Strong Verbs: fticrcn Model.
Infin. Tmpf. p. Part
Germ. Model: frjcrcn fror cj'cfroren
Engl. Analogy: freeze froze frozen'
Ablaut: ic^etc. o 5
Note.— The long o is what dlstint(uishes this MnrlrO Ur.r^ fi c^- c
Model (§ 123). fau'^nes mis Moriel fiom the fc^iegeit
LIST.
A. (Infin. ic, ii.)
biegen, bend
bieten, bid, offer
fitegen (N.), fly (on wings)
flic^en (N.), flee (escape)
frieren (N. A.), freeze, be cold
^cben, lift, raise
(er)f{e[en, (er)!iircn, choose
liigen, lie (tell a falsehood)
(ber)neven, lose
[c^ieben, shove, push
fd^JDoren, swear
(be)trugcn, deceive, cheat
ioiegcn, weigh, have weight (intr.)
5ie^en(N.A.), pull(tr.); move antr.) 50
Remarks. — I. ^iegen, bictcn, fliegen,
also the forms (now used only in poetry)
bog
bot
flog
flo^
fror
ijjob, ^Mh
erfor
log
tjerlor
fc^ob
gebogen
geboten
gefrogen
gefloben
gefroven
geboben
erforen
gelogen
t)er(oren
gefc^obcn
fd)loor, fc^touv gc[d;Jooren
^t'ti'og betrogen
ii^og gcloogcn
gejui^en
flie^en, jicben, have
with cu for ic in the
i6o
LESSON XXV.
f§i3»
2. and 3. Sing. Pres. Ind. and 2. Sing. Imper., as : bcuaft,
bcugt, beuG ; Pcud;ft, ficud; ; jcud;ft, jeuc^.
2. SSicc^en, to rock, is weak (micgte, getmegt).
3. Observe the change of f) into g in jie^en, 509, gcjogen.
B. (iNFiN. c, a.)
Weren, shear ^^^^ geWoren
toebeu (W.), weave j^ob geluoben
tt)dgen, weigh (trans.) h,og geiDogen
(be)h)egen, induce, persuade betrog beii)ogen
Remark. — ^ettjegcn, *to move (set in motion)' is weak
(betoegte, behjegt).
Vocabulary.
to offer, an'bietcn
abolish, annul, cancel, aufs
l[)eben
put off, delay, postpone, au^^
fd;ieben
remove (neut.), auS'jie^cn
prefer, bor'sicbcn (dat. of pers.)
fiy away, ItJcg'fUegcn
roof, bag !Dac^
colour, bie garbe
hunger, ber §unger
cook, ber ^06) *
Idioms : 1. I prefer gold to silver,
2. I like the winter in
Janata gem.
metal, bag m^taW
red (subst.), bag dtot
sparrow, ber ©j^erling
part, portion, ber %cxt
shore, bank, bag Ufer
on that account, therefore,
begfjalb
yet, still (in spite of all), bod^
straight, gcrabe (adj.)
exactly, just, gerabe (adv.)
as soon as, fobalb
3* jieljc bai ©olb tern ©fiber ©or.
Canada, yd) (jabe ten aSBfnter in
EXERCISE XXV.
w4. 1. (Sin ©J)erlinq in ber .?Sanb \h beffer ^l& '>^^^^i -..c s.-^
SDac^e. 2. SJiarie ift junger alg Souife, aber fie ift ^od) gvojer.
§131]
STRONG VERBS : frtCrClt MODFX.
i6i
a. §unger ift ber bcftc ^oc^. 4. ^er jun(^c (General S ift ein
ta^frcrcr ^clb aig fein Skater. 5. xk ^Kcifcnbcn fd;oben ba^
«oot Dom Ufcr unb rubcrtcn iiber ben dH- H. 5tufge[dioben ift
m6)t aufaclyobcn. 7. SBcIrfje^ tjon biefcn 9JJabcr;cn ift bag'gri)Bte?
8. 3e ^o^er ein a^oget fliegt je tleiner fc^eint er ju iccrben. 9. 3)er
grembe f)at mir mefjr fur mein ^au^ angeboten aU Bk, aber ic^
QianU m(t)t, ba^ er fo gut be5at)tcn n)urbe. 10. ^e fleifeiger Wix
fmb, befto me(;r lernen toir. 11. :3m Sommer i)ahc ic^ bag £anb
gana gern, abcr im Sinter jie^e i^ bie etabt bor. 12. 3Kir line
glucflid)en ift ber ^ufe erfroren, aU id) md) ^paufc ritt. 13. ©0=
balb h)ir unfer ^am berfauft fjatten, ^^ogcn iuir an§. 14. 211^ ic^
auf bent Sanbe mx, Woq icf; nte^r aU id) je|t n^icge. 15. e§ ift
ml)x, ba^ bie reic^ften $>eute nic^t immer bie gludflic^ften finb.
16. ^er 3iegen, h)elcf)er un§ bie 9^eife berleibet ^t, toar me^r
nii^Iirf; aU angene^m. 17. ^ie 9Jhttter ^ob bie ©tucfe bon bem
©tag auf, h)elc^eg i^r unarttgeg ^inb auf bie (Srbe gefc^miffen
Wt^. 18. 2)iefer ^mhc ^at feine (Sltern betrogen, unb beg^alb
tft er ungliicfac^. 19. grieren (Sie, §err ^rofeffor? ^e|t
nic^t, aber ic^ fror, al§ id) auf ber ©tra^e hjar. 20. ^er ^ager
lS)at ben SBogel gefc^offen, gerabe alg 'er auf h^n ^aum flog
21. 33on h)em twurbe 3^r §aug gefauft? 22. S8on cinem
J^remben, ber feit bierje^n ^agen bei meinem S^etter auf «e=
fuc^ ift.
B. 1. Lead is a heavy metal, but gold is the heaviest.
2. This painter is not so famous as his father, but his pictures
are just as fine. 3. George lost his parents when he was
still very young. 4. Those students have lost a great deal of
time, but now they are studying more industriously. "5. TTie
bird flew away, just as the huntsman was on the point of
shooting it. 6. When is the weather coldest in Canada .? In
the month of January it is coldest. 7. Which bird flies
fastest ? 8. The useful is better than the beautiful. 9. What
kindj)f a dog has the huntsman lost.? 10. Iron is heavy, lead
i62
LESSON XXVI.
(§S 13a-
is heavier, but gold is heavi^ ,t of all. 11. Green is a more
agreeable colour foi the eyeslhTn red. 12. If the stick is
too long, cut a piece of u off. 13. T . , up,>er part of the
city of Quebec is much finer than the l,,wer. 14. The
weather seems to be warmer to-day, but it froze (perf.) yester-
day. 1 5. When I was younger, I weighed more than my
brother, but now he weighs more than I. IG. The upper
part of the city of Quebec was built earlier than the lower
part.
ORAL EXERCISE XXV.
1. Istder junge General ein tapferer Mann? 2. Ziehen
Sie das Land der Stadt vor .? 3. Weshalb ist der Knabe so
traurig.? 4. Wann hat der Jager den Vogel geschossen.?
5. Welche Studenten lernen am meisten? 6. Welches ist
besser, reich und unglucklich oder arm und lucklich (zu)
sein? ^ ^ ^
LESSON XXVI.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS:
fingm model.
132. Demonstrative Pronouns.
The Demonstrative Pronouns are :
1. bcr, hit, bos, that
2. biefcr, bicfc, btcfci this, that
3. jcncr, jcnc, jcncS, that, yonder
4. bcrjcnige, bicjciugc, bagjcnigc, that
5. btr namlufjc, btc namudje, urn namlir^c, the same
6. berfc(6(t9)Pr bicfclli(i9)e, bttgfclKigc), the same
I94l
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
163
7. folr^(cr), fotc^Cf), foIrftCc^), such, such a
a bCffgicil^CII, bcrglcir^Clt, of that kind (of those kinds)
Remark. — These may all be used eitht as Substaative
or Adjective Pronouns, except b^^flfeic^c: (:iee § 139, i,
below).
133. I. 2)er, bie, ba§, used adjectively (i. e„ before a
subbiantive), is declintil like he Definite Ariicle (which is
merely the demnnstvitive adjecti e weakened and un-
emphasized), as :
2)cr' mam, that man. !5)er Tlam', the n.an'.
2. When used substantix ely it is declined thus :
MASC.
Nom. Dcr
Gen. beffcn
Dat. bem
Ace. ben
Singular.
FEM. NEUTER.
Plural.
ALL GEN RS.
bie
bercr (berrn)^^^^^:*^*^^^^
bencn
bie
<^<A\^
bie ba§
bercn befjcii
ber bem
bie bag
Note. — The form bet^n (Oen. PI.) is only used as == «of them,' as:
How many children have y >u ? I have seven of fhem.
Sic oiele ^inber f)nben @io ? 3cf) ^abe bcren fiebeit.
134. 2)tcicr and jciicr both follow the biefer Model fsee
§6), but bie§ is used for biefeg in the Neuter Nom. and Ace.
Sing, when used substantively, as :
^icK iff mein 33uct) (Sr ^atte bic8 md;t gc^^ort.
This is my book. He had not hoard this.
bicfer = this (the 7iearer of two objects, hen also =)
the latter, as:
jcner = that, yonder (the more remote of two objects,
^ence also =) the former :
2)icfcr 33aum ift grofe, a6ei jcucr ift gro^ •.
This tree is large, but that (one) is lai -er.
'wH .
l64
LESSON XXVI.
£§§ 134-
3encr 39aum, yonder tree (pointed out as remote),
Aarl unb Siir;clm finb ^iriibcr; bicfcr ift fleifjin, jcncr ift
tvdflc, Charles and William are brothers ; the latter
is diligent, the former is idle.
135. I. ^crjcnigc is declined in both parts, like the Defi-
nite Article followed by the adjective form jemg with weak
endings, thus :
Singular.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER.
Nom. bcrjcnigc bicjenigc bagjenigc
Gen. bcejcnigcn bcrienigcit bcSjcmgcn
etc. etc. etc.
Plura,
ALL GENDERS.
bicjcuigcn
bcrjenigcn
etc.
2. ^cr or bcrjcnigc is used :
{a) before a genitive case, as :
Sc^ f)abe vl^tcn <r)ut uub bcndcntgen) 3^>rc8 53rubf<8,
I have your hat and that of your brother (youi
brother's);
Note. -The demonstrative may also be omitted in this constructjon.
as in English ; or the simple bcr may be used.
{p) before a relative clause, as :
2)cr(jcnigc), ttJcIticr jufrieben ift, ift glucflic^.
He who is contented, is happy.
^ic(jcnigc) ^rau ift am fd;onften, tuelr^c gut ift.
That woman is most beautiful, who is good.
S^r ^:)^\x$> unb bo§(jcntgc), lnorin iutr n)of)neit,
Your house and that in which we live.
NoTE.-In sentences like the first, where ber(ienigc) is used cubstantivelv
the demonstrative and relative together may be replaced by the compound
relative lt)ci, thus ; *^
SOBer jufrieben ifi, ift gtadUc^.
«39l
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
165
Plural.
ALL GKNDERS.
bicfclbcn
bcr[cI6cn
etc.
136. !DctfcI6e (berfelBicje) =- ' the same,* as : the same
hat, bC(f)clbc ."put ; and is declined like bcrieuicjc, in two parts,
written as one word, thus :
Singular,
MASC. FEM. NEUTER.
Nom. bcrfclbc bicfclbc btt0[elbc
Gen. bcsfclbcn bcrfdbcn bcgfclbcn
etc. etc. etc.
(For examples of its use see § 143, 2-4, below).
Note, — ^elbtg is sometimes used without article, with strong end-
ings : felliigcr, -e, -e8.
137. $cr ttiimiii^c sometimes replaces berfelbe.
138. I. (Sol^, when used alone, follows thebiefcr Model,
as: folc^cr 2Bein, such wine; foIcf)C§ 53rDt, such bread.
2. After cin, it follows the mixed declension of adjectives,
as:
Nom. cin foIrf;cr 3Bein, such a wine
Gen. eine^ folc^Crt 335eine§, of such a wine, etc.
3. Before ein, folj^ is always, and before an adjective, gen-
erally, uninfiected, as :
<SotiJ cin 2i5ein ; foft^ gutcr 2Sein, or foIcf)cr cjutc 2Bein.
Note. —The adjective has the j/^^«^ endings when fold) is uninfiected,
otherwise it has the weak endings, except in the plur., where it some-
times has the strong.
2. ©olc^ with eiu is often replaced by fo, as:
(So ein 2Beiu ; eiu fo guter Sein.
139. I. 'ScSgleid^cn is used as an indeclinable neuter sub-
stantive (never as adjective), thus:
^c^ ^'i^W^. bc0v3lei(^-cn nic %i\)mi,
I had never heard that sort of thing (anything of
that kind).
i66
LESSON XXVI.
[§§ 139-
^^^N0TE.-3)e.greid,cn is also used adverbially, « 'in the .ame way.
2. 1)crglei*en is used both substantively (referring to a
em. or plur. noun) and udjectively. In the latter case it is
Tmber a^f" ' ''''" -bstantives of any gend.r and
£crc3rctc^cn Sein, 2)crgre{c^en SBeine,
Wine of that sort. Wines of that sort
General Remarks on DEAroNSTRATivE Pronouns.
140. The English ' that ' is rendered in German :
I. As Demonstrative Pronoun :
(a) Most generally by bcr or iiicfcr. when there is no
contrast with any other object, thus :
That man, bcr' Wiann or bicfcr mann
W By bcr or bcrjcntgc before a genitive case or a
relative clause (see § 135, 2, above).
(^) By jencr, when the object is distinctly pointed out
as remote (= yon, yonder), or as more remote
than another, thus :
Scilcr 35aum, That tree (over yonder)
^iefcg .^:>aii'^ unb jcncg. This house and that one.
2. As Relative by bcr or hiclrijcr (see § 95), thus :
The book that I have, ^a^ md), ba§ (ttJcIdjcS) i* ijaU.
3. As Conjunction by tafi, thus ;
I shall tell your father that you are dilio-ent
S* lucvbc beincm lUikx ^ac^.n, boft bu ffcifjk^ bift.
riik?/; Jl'l ""'"''' r^'''""' ^•^^^ ^^^f(^^^' j^"f^ ^re used
(like CI, see § 39, i, and mcidicg, § 82, Rem. 2) before the verl>
M3]
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
167
'to be,' representing the real subject, which follows the verb
and with which the verb agrees, as : '
^aS ift mein 33ruber, That is my brother.
2)icf(c§) {ft Sf,re Qd)\vc\kx, This is your* sister.
3enc§ finb feine 33urf;er, Those are his books.
142. 3^cr and jciicr, when referring to inanimate objects
are often replaced by the adverb bo(r), 'there,' before pre
positions (compare § 38, Rem. 5) and biefev by ^m, as :
^cf; baOe md)U$ tmii ,^u ttmn,
I have nothing to do with that (t/ieremth).
0icrmit mu^ tc^ lcf;liejjen.
With this {/leremth) I must close.
Note. — This substitution is not made before a relative, as:
Stf) barf)tc nil tiag {no^ bnraii), njo0 ®ie fagtcn,
I was thinking of that which (what) you were saying.
143. Use of Demonstratives to replace
Personal Pronouns.
1. The neuter gen. beffcit replaces that of the neuter pers
pron. (feiner) referring to things, as :
3c^ erinnrc mid; bcffcn ntc^t,
I do not recollect it (fciner = him, of him).
2. The genitive of bcr and that of bcrfcIOc are frequently
used to replace the possessive adjective of the 3. person, in
order to avoid ambiguity, as :
^er ©raf tuar mit filnem (be§ ©rafen) ^ciger unb beffen
(beg Sagcrg) .t^unben (or mit ben ^unben bcSfciacn) auf
ber gagb. The Count was at the hunt with his (the
Count's) huntsman and his (the huntsman's) dogs.
NoTE.-2«it fejnen Apmibcn would mean 'with the Count's dogs.»
3. ^crfclfie is used in other cases also to prevent ambiguity
(also biefcr in the same way), as :
1 68
LESSON XXVI.
t§§ 143
'mm 33ruber ift &ei meinem greunbe, unb bcrfclfte (or bicfcr)
ad)kt Ifyi fc^r; or: cr (,acm 33ruber) acfitet bcnfelkn febr
My brother is at my friend's, and he (the latter, the
friend) esteems him (my brother) very niuch ; or • he
(my brother) esteems him (my friend) very much.
4. 2)crfc(6c also replaces the personal pronouns, to p/^vent
repetitions like if;n - 3^„en, Sie- fie, etc , as :
liefer 2Bcin ift out, irf; fann ^^nen irenfcrOcn (for IM
30ltcu) cn:^fcl;Ien, This wire is good, I can recommend
It to you.
144. Strong Veres: jtngctt Model.
Germ. Model :
■Engl. Analogy
Ablaut:
Infin,
fingen
sing
w
t
LIST.
btnben, bind
bringen (N.), press
finben, find
llingen, ring, sound
(ge)linGcn (N.), succeed (impers.,
with dat. of pers.)
rtngen, wring (the hands, etc.)
fc^lingen, twine ; swallow
fcf;iDinben (N.), vanish
fd^lDtngen, swing
fingen, sing
finfen, sink
frringen (N. A.), spring, leap
trin!cn, drink (of human beings)
trinben, wind
^toingen^ force
Lmpf.
fong
sang
«
6anb
brang
fanb
flang
gelang
rang
fc^Iang
fc^tranb
fc^iuang
fang
fan!
fprang
tran!
ttjanb
ai»ang
P. Part.
gefitngen
»6ng
gebunben
gebrungen
gefunben
geHungen
gelungen
gerungen
gefc^tungcTi
gefc^iimnben
gefd^jDungen
gefungen
gefunfen
gcfprungen
getrunfen
gemunben
ge^hjungen
^44]
STRONG VERBS : fingeti model.
169
Vocabulary.
to press in, penetrate, ein^ on board, am Sorb
escape, entflie^en [bringen
invent, erfinben
remember, fic^ erinnern (4-gen.
of thing)
drown, be drowned, ettrtnfen
spring upon, Io§'f|)ringen (auf
+ ace.)
mean, suppose, metnen
oblige, ijerbinben
vanish, t)erfd;h?inben
grammar, bie ©ramma'tif
dealer, ber ^dnbler
lion, ber £oit)e
diver, ber ^auc^er
telephone, bag %dtpf)on'
clever, gefc^irft
prudent, cautious, tJor'fic^tig
unfortunately, (eiber
below, mUx\)alh (+ gen.)
never yet, noc^ nie
EXERCISE XXVI.
A, 1. 3)ie§ ift mein ^Setter an^ 3Kontreal; fennen ©te iBn«
2. ^atooM, biefen fenne ic^ ganj gut, a6er nic^t ben, ber mir aeftcrn
ben «nef Q,brad>t f^at 3. @in 6o[er ^nabe fcftt^ang fic^ auf ben
5t^felbaum im r^^arten feineg ^ac^barg unb f($mi^ bte tbfel auf
bte ^rbe. 4. ^n biefem ^elbe ^a6en bie 33auern fc^on bag ©rag
gefc^mtten, aber m >enem trerben fie eg erft morgen fcfeneiben
o. .?;e6et bie, bie eu(^ |«f en/' 6. ^eneg finb meine §unbe, aber
bieg fmb btejemgen, met^e cer ^ager m ad)t ^agen berloren hat
unb bte tc^ gefunben ^abe. 7. ©rinnern eie fic^ beffen, tuag icb
^l)nen i^om alten 2d)lo^ am Ufcr beg eccg er^ciblt l)ah^ 8 8 3; c m
t^urbe ic^ feinen ^^aler leifjen ; b e r iDurbe nie' be^a^Ien. 9 3)ie
©chafer Ineben i^re .^erben liber benfelben 33erg auf ioetcben h)ir
ftiegen iO. 3)er ^kifeube ftieg t)om ^ferbe unb banb bagfelbe an
emen !lmten 33aum. 11. 3)a.i Scbiff ftiefj an mm JVelfen, bag
gaffer brang em, unb bag ®u;iff fan!. 12. 3d, babe n.ic^ be=
fhffen, Satem .^u lerncn, aber eg ift mir nic^t getungcn. 13 ^er
^oiue n>ar gerabe im ^egviffc auf ben ^Hcifenben Hufpringen, aU
ber ^^agcr t^n frf;of3. 14. fennen Sic .^errn ^,U ? md^m <oerrn
m memen ®ie? 15. ^enjenigen, ber bag STele^^on erfjnbea
12
I/O
LESSON XXVI.
[§§ X44-
f)at 10. 2Ba§ ift au§ memer beutfc^en ©rammati! geloorben?
6ie fc^eint (janj t>cr[d)munben gu fein. 17. ®ag finb [c^one
erbbeeren ; Wo IjaUn (Sie biefclben gefauft? 18. @ie finb fd;on,
md)tti?af)r? Soldj) ^racf)% 33eeren finben Sie md;t bei jebem
iQdnblcr. 19. So (jcijieg 3Setter ^aben n)ir nod; nic^t ge^abt.
20. 2Ba§ hjurbe bir gcantlrortet, aU bu nacp bem ^xanUn frags
tefi? 21. gjian fagte mir, er fei ein tt^enig beffer.
^. 1. The patient is just as weak to-day as he was yester-
day. 2. Such happy days I have never yet passed ! 3. Where
do you generally pass the winter? 4. Where is my pen?
Have you found it ? 5. This is my neighbour of whom you
have already heard so much, 6. The ship has sunk, and
the people who were on board have been drowned. 7. I
was lookingjor my coat, but found my father's. 8. I should
be very much obliged to you, if you sang me a beautiful song.
9. Which is poorer, he who has no money, or he who has no
friends? 10. How should we escape if the boat sank?
11. Charles has already finished (the) learning (of) his lesson ;
he is cleverer than I thought. 12. The diver that jumped
from the bridge has unfortunately been drowned. 13. It
will have been a good lesson for us, if it makes us more
prudent in future. 14. Is that a new song? No, it is the
same that I sang a week ago at your house. 15. The St.
Lawrence River is the broadest in Canada ; below the city of
Quebec it is broadest. 10. The patient is better to-day; he
will be allowed to go out to-morrow.
ORAL EXERCISE XXVI.
1. Was ist aus dem Taucher geworden ? 2. 1st Karl ge-
schickter als Johann ? 3. Was hat der bose Knabe gemacht ?
4. Ist der Reisende dem Lowen entflohen ? 5. Ist es Ihnen
gelungen, Latein zu lernen ? 6. Wessen Hunde sind das ?
M5]
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
171
LESSON XXVII.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: f^lltncn AND
§c(fcn MODELS.
1*S» Indefinite Pronouns.
The Indefinite Pronouns are :
{a) Substantive:
1. mm (indecl.), one, they, people (Fr. o?i) "
2. jcbcrmantt, everybody, everyone
3. icmanb, \ somebody, anybody I of persons
( some one, any one | only
4. nicmonb, I "°^°^y' "^ one, no person
( not anybody, etc.
5. eiltia§, something, anything
6. m^U, nothing, not anything
7. etnct, one, some one
8. fcincr, no one, none
") of things
j only
(biefer Mod-
el) persons
^^^^ things
if) Adjective (also used substantively) •
1. cinigC, ctHrJc (plur.), some, a few,
several
2. jeb(tticb)cr (jegli^cr), each (one), every
one
3. manr^cr, many (a one)
4. mejrcrc (pi), several
5. Hid, much, pi. tiiele, n):.ny
6. mcntn, little, pi. itjcniflc, f^w
7. mdc^cr, some
REMARK.-The fndelinite i.onominal Adjectives are also
used as Indefinite Numeral Adjectives (see Less. XXIX).
(biefer Mod-
> el) persons
a7id things
172
LESSON XXVII.
[§§ 146^
146. JWon (spelt with small letter and one Xi, to distinguish
it from Dcr ^JJiann, the man, from which it is derived) is the
Indefinite Personal Pronoun, and is used to make a state-
ment without specifying any particular person. It is equivalent
to Engl. ' one, they, we, you (indef.), people,' etc., (French on),
or to the impersonal use of the passive voice, as :
aWttlt [aflt. One says; they, people say; or it is said.
m<xx\. faun t)\ uub %^k\\\^x nicl^t sufammcn mi[d;cn.
One (we, you) cannot mix oil and water.
Remarks. -I. One's self (refl.) = firfj ; one's = fcin
(poss. adj.), as :
mm [c^cimt ffri^ fcincr ^e'^Icr,
One is ashamed of one's faults.
2. m^xw cannot be replaced by any other pronoun, as :
9J?an iutrb miibe, tuenn man (not er) ^w langc arbettet,
A man (one) gets tired, when he works too long. '
147. 3cbcrmnnn is used in the Sing, only ; it takes -g in
Gen., but is otherwise uninfiected, as :
actiffmnnns eacl;c ift nicmanbeg 6acr;e,
Everybody's business is nobody's business.
!Die S3ibel ift eiu SucT; fiir jebcrmnnn (ace),
The Bible is a book for everybody.
148. 3cmanb and its negative nicillttub are used in the
Smg. only, and are declined thus :
Norn, jemanb
Gen. jemanbcg
Dat. ^ i^"^^^"^"»
'iicmanb(cn)
Ace. jemanb(en)
niemanb
nicmanbcS
( nicuianbcm
( nieinanb(cii)
niemanb(ctt)
:5il
mDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
173
Note. ■ - The uninflected forms are preferable for the Dat. and Ace, as :
i!l5ii- tiabni niemontJ Ucc.) flctabclt, We have blamed nol)ody.
SBcrbcil eic Ci< icmonb (dat.) fagrn ? Shall you tell it to anybody?
149. I. ®tttJa0 is somclimes abbreviated to lung, as :
^c^ iuiU bir lung faocn, I will tell you something.
2. After ctttJOS and m^H, an adjective has the strong
neuter ending -c8 (see § 122, Rem. n, above).
3. ®ttna8 and nidSltS are also used as Indefinite Numerals
(see Less, XXIX, § 168).
160. (finer (bic[cv Model)/ one, someone, anyone,' is used:
1. In the Nom. Sing. Masc. = man.
2. To supply the missing cases of man, as :
e^5 t^ut mm (dat.) Ictb, m\ feinen J^rcunben gu fc^eiben.
One is sorry to part from one's friends.
3. Before a substantive, as :
Reiner mcincr Jrcunbe (tiau meinen ^reunben),
One of my friends.
@in(c)§ Don bicfen 53uc^crn, One of these books.
4. To represent a preceding substantive, as :
^ahcn Bk ein md) ? ^a, i^ I)a6e cui(c)0.
Have you a book .? Yes, I have one.
Note.— The c may be dropped in the ending of the Nom. and Ace. Neut.
151. Reiner (biefcr Model) is the negative of einer, and
is used :
1. As equivalent to nicmanb.
2. Before a substantive, as :
Reiner t)on meinen ^reunben.
None (not One) of my friends.
3. To represent a preceding substantive, as :
^ahm 6ie ein 5Bud) ? ^J^ein, ic^ l)ah^ !cin(e)8.
Note. — Like einer, it may drop c in the Nom. and Ace. Neuter.
% ''^
174
LESSON XXVII.
B§ 15a-
152. mnl^t (ctlirfjc), mcjrcrf , = ' some, a few, several,' as :
eititflc Don mcinen ^rcuuben. Some (a few) of my friends
9«C§rcrc biefcr mdjcv, Several of these books.
153. 3ebcr, jebtoebcr, jegad;er (biefer Model) or cin jcber,
etc. (def. art. + adj. with mixed declension) are used'
especially in the Masc, for jebermann, as : *
^ie ^ibel ift ein 33uc^ fiir jcbcn.
(^m) jcbcr ift feine^ (^Jlucfeg 3c^mieb,
Every man (one) is the architect (lit. smith) of his owp
fortune.
154. i^an^cr, 'many a one, many a pel son '(biefer Model)
IS used to express indefinite plurality, as :
aFianr^cr benft. Many a one (person) thinks.
155. mi^tv (biefer Model) is used for ' some,' referring
to a preceding substantive, as :
^ahm @ie S3rot ? ga, ic^ ^abe mi^n.
156. For Utcl and Incuig see Less. XXIX, § 176.
157. When the Engl. ' anybody, anyone, anything ' ==
'anybody, etc., af alV (indefinite aud general), they' are
rendered by irgettb jemanb, irgcnb einer, irgcnb ti\Q(x^, as :
Anybody (at all) will tell you, where I live,
Srgcnb jemanb (or einer) luivb 31;nen fagen, tuo ic^ tjjo^ne.
Sc^ bin mit trgcitb etiva^ jufrieben,
I am contented with anything (at all).
158. Strong Verbs: f|)inncit Model.
Infin. Impf. p. Part.
Germ. Model: fpinnen f^ann gef|)flnnen
E?igL Analogy: spin span (spun)
(incomplete)
Ablaut: | ^ «
I
t59]
STRONG verbs: \p\min model.
175
LIST.
(Note. — The Impf. Subj. is also given, on account of variations
occurring.)
(6e)ginncn, begin begann
rinnen (N.), flow rann
becjiinne Becjonnen
ranne geronnen
fd;tmmmen (N. A.), swim fc^mamm | If^^^ml S^Wi»ommen
finnen, think fann
fpinnen, spin
fdiine gefonnen
fc ( fpcinne
(ge)n)innen, win, gain gctoann i 9^j^«»"^ geh)onnen
Note. — Observe the subjunctive forms with vowel of P. Part. + Um-
laut, instead of vowel of Impf. Ind.
159. Strong Verbs: Jclfcu Model.
-. Pr. Ind. 2. -?. Sincr. ) ,
^^"'^- Pr. Imper.lsing. [ ^'''^' ^^BJ. P. Part.
Germ. Model: ^clfen ^\\\% ^x\% ^x\\ ^alf ^ulfe ge^olfen
Etigl. Analogy : wanting.
Ablaut : t
w
t
V t» ft tt
a, or u
LIST.
(Note. — The 2. 3. sing. Pres. Ind., 2. sing. Imper.,and Impf. Subj. are
also given.)
bergen, hide birgft, birgt, birg barg barge geborgen
(ber)berben(N.), toerbirbft, etc. berbarb berburbe toerborbcn
spoil (intr.)
hefc^en, thrash brifc^eft, etc. {^J S^f^^^^W-
gelten, be worth giltft, gilt, gilt gait galte gegolten
iy6
LESSON XXVII.
[§159
r;clfcu, help ^ilfft, etc
f;alf r;ulfc gc()otfen
fd;cltcn, scold [d;iU[t, [dult, [d;ilt [duilt [cKilt
Oc[d;uItcu
ftarb [tiivOc gcftovben
gouorben
Gettjorben
Gctrovfcn
fterOcn, (N.), die ftirbft, etc
iuerSen, woo tuirbft, etc ^^
iucrben (N.), be- . . . r ZZ)^
come ^''^^' ^^''^^ ^^^^^ I ;3^ iuiirbe
lucrfcn, throw luirfft, etc. jtjarf imitfc
Remarks. -I. Most of these verbs liave ii or \ in the
Impf Subj. instead of ii, which cannot be distinguished in
sound from the c of the Pres. Ind. ; thus fteibc and ftar&e
would sound alike. '
2 23erber6en, when trans., is both strong and weak (Der.
berbte, berberbt). ^
3. 2Berben has marb or tourbc in the sing. ; hjuvbcn only in
the plur. (see § 19). ^
4. The Imperative never has the final -c in these verbs
except tDerbe. *
5. Observe the omission of (c)t of 3. sing. Pres. Ind. in
the verbs with stem in -f, -b.
Vocabulary.
to be or do (of health), fic^
6efinben
reflect, deliberate, fid; Bes
finncn
accomplish, leiften
remain over, be left, ii'brig
bleiben
hide, conceal, t)crbergen
requite, reward, t)ergelten
complete, finish, boaen'ben
throw away, toeg'toerfm
run aw^ay, vanish, ^errtnnen
the conduct, ha^ 33etrageii
poet, ber ^ic^ter
barley, bie ©erfte
oats, ber §afcr
sailor, ber 3J?atrofc
musician, ber mn\ikv
need, necessity, bie 9^ot*
dove, pigeon, bie Jaube
plate, ber teller
loss, ber SSerluft' *
§159]
STRONG i.i iis: ^rrfen MODEL.
1/7
embarrassment, p picxity, thereto, bnju'
Die ^crlcV»'' -' nolotiL-cr. ntc
wheat, ber Sc. i
evil, b5[e
Xdio) »; I like the country, ^^d*
cr, nid)t mclj^^
as, iDic
III (ircuni) bom Sanbe.
EXBP' ISE XXVII.
-4. 1. 2Bcr 3u biel .cbet, .ciftct WmQ. 2. ^crienige, n)eld;er
gu toiel rcbet, ^"iftet loenin. 3. ®ie^ finb meine Sd;uf;e, aber jencS
fmb (bie) S^re(n). 4. ^x jebcrmann^ ^veimb ift, i[t nicnmnbeg
^^reunb. 5. Gin guter G^iift Deroilt 9^'^[eg niit C^Jutem. 0. @ig
ift fo eben jemanb f)ier gclucfen. 7. .. clc^eg bon bicfcn !:8an*
bernjiefjen eie tjor, ba§ rote obcr bag Mauc? 8. aisen fud)[t
bu? 3d; fuc^e bie arme Jamilic, bcrcn 5?ater jeftorben ift.
9. ^aUn ®ie fd;on ^^ren SKcijen cjebrofc^en? man brifc^t ^eute
ben §afer unb bie ©crftc, aber man imrb erft morgcn ben Seigen
brefc^en. 10. @g ift ein 58erluft [iir ba^ gan^e Sanb, hjenn ein
grower unb guter ^JJann ftirbt. 11. ®er grof^e ^nahc fc^amt fid;
feineg ^Ik-trageng unb be^halb t)crbirgt er fein ©efid;t. 12. „2Bie
getronncn, fo jcrronnen/' ba^. ift, man bcrliert leic^t, tDag man
leic^t geminnt. i:}. ^ie Grbbeercn, ttjelrfte ic^ gcftcin faufte, finb
berborben. 14. 3Jian l;ilft gem einem, ber fid) felbft Hlft. 15.
§iermit fc^ide id; ^^nen bag 0elb, loeld;eg ®ie fo freunblic^
geh)efen finb, mir 311 lei^en. 16. einb ©ie ein greunb bom
©c^ttjimmen? ^e^t nic^t me^r, aber id; fd)ii)amm gern, aU id;
junger tt^ar. 17. ^er Ungliidlic^e hc^am fic^ tange, fd;ritt
aber enblic^ an ben dianh beg Sooteg unb f^rang ing kaffer.
18. 3ft er ertrun!en? 9^ein, er tt)urbe Don ben ^JJatrofen gerettet!
B. 1. Good morning, Mr. Bell, how are you to-day? 2.
Have you any money .? Yes, to be sure, I have some, but not
enough for my journey. 3. Where is the tree to which the
traveller tied his horse.? 4. People take cold easily when they
are tired. 5. Schiller and Beethoven were Germans, the
.S*^,
9u ^ «<>-,
^V^ - „0.
.0^, \^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
4.
A
/.
ii"
f/.
1.0
I.I
1.25
^1^ IM
1.4
1.6
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) e7i2-4503
^
fV
ci^
\
\
%
s
%"■
<^
Qr
h
\
178
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D.
[§§l6o^
latter was a great musician, the former a great poet. 6. Mr.
A. is a lazy man; he would not work at all, if necessity
did not force him tojt. 7. We found the money we lost a
week ago. 8. Many^ajjne begins what he will never finish
9. Mary, my child, Th^ow that apple away; it is spoilt. 10*
Have you shot many pigeons ? We have shot only a few.'
11. Except my brother and me nobody is at home. 12. The
mother is scolding, because her naughty child has thrown a
plate upon the ground. 13. Where is the River St. Lawrence
broadest.? 14. When the children had drunk, the cat drank
the milk which remained over (was left). 1.5. The women
on (an) the shore screamed and wrung their hands, when the
boat sank in which their husbands were. 16. Has the money
which was lost been found ?
ORAL EXERCISE XXVIL
1. Wann wird man den Hafer dreschen .? 2. Warum ver-
birgt der bose Knabe sein Gesicht .? 3. Wem hilft man -ern >
4. Sind Sie ein Freund vom Jagen > 5. Was fur ein Mann
1st Herr Bell.? 6. Weshalb schilt die Frau ?
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D.
ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
160. Adjectives used as Attributes only.
The following classes of adjectives are not used as predicates:
I. Derivatives in -CK, -Cttt (denoting material), as; golbcn, of gold,
golden; filbem, of silver. These are replaced in the predicate by the
substantive with t)on, as :
2)icfe \l\)V ift bon (SUbciV This watch is of silver.
2 Many in -if« and -It^, as : bicbifcf), thievish ; tierifu^, bestial ; fieiicfi.
tcrifd,, hypocritical; tciglid), daily; jdfjrlic^, annual ; hiirflid), actual, real
3. Those in -If, from adverbs of time and place, as: ^cutig, of to-day;
WlXQ, of this place. ^
i6«] .UJJECTIVES USED AS PREDICATES ONLY.
179
161. Adjectives used as Predicates only.
The following classes of adjectives are not used as attributes :
1. Those that are really nouns (though spelt with a small letter) such
2. The following among others :
emgcben , mmdful gemoDr, aware
gar, cooked, done (of food) gram, averse
gang unb gdbe, current (of money,etc.) irre, astray, wrong
tcilf)aft, partaking
Note. — Both these classes of adjectives are innnaV.l» ^f o« • • .
;;3^^W.eco..a.t.ea.s;eHaU.X:S^^
r?r ruurbe^meinem 58rubev immer „.c^r mm, He grew .ore and .... .,,,,, ,„ ^^
®a§ t^at mir am meiPcn leiH, I was most sorry for that (../«,,-.. super!.).
162. Remarks on certain Pronouns.
1. The pronouns tucv, ft)a§arefrequentlyfolIowedby the demonstrative
ierm the ./...clause, and always so when the Ictter'the seemWan^!
cedent) is m a different case from that of the relative, as :
mtV liat, bcm Juirb gegeben, To him that hath shall be (is) given
2. The neuter pronouns eg, ba6, tt)a8, jebeg, alle§ are often used in ihe
Norn, and Ace Smg. in reference to a uumier of persons or things, espe-
cially if of different gender, as : ^ ^
fanner, Seiber, ^inber, aUtS f(^vie urn C)ilfe, fo hut t§ fonnte
Men, women, children, all cried for help as loud as they could •
mull iibt ftrf), toa§ nn ar^eifter twerben toiU,
Those practice early, who would become masters.
Note. —Observe that the verb is singular.
3. 3Sa§ is sometimes used for rtinnim? ('why.?'), as:
aBttSnjeinftbu? Why dost thou weep .?
4. The relative adverb lt)ie ('as ') after folrf) ein or fo eln ('such a') is
NoTE.-The demonstrative folc^or fo is often omitted, as indicated in the above example.
i8o
LESSON XXVIII.
[§§ X63-
«65]
LESSON XXVIII.
60
70
NUMERALS: CARDINALS AND ORDINALS. - STRONG
VERBSi
f v^
80
f^rClJCU MODEL.
90
Numerals.
100
101
163. Cardinals,
104. Ordinals.
123
1. eing; ein(cr), -c.
-(e8)
1st. ber crflc
2. 5t»ei
2nd. „ gtoeitc
3. brei
3rd. , hxiiU
4. ijier
4th. „ ijierte
5. funf
5th. ,, funfte
6. fed;g
6th. „ fecf^gte
7. fieben
(
7th. „ fiebente
8. ad)t
8th. „ a6)tt
9. neun
9th. „ neunle
10. ^e^n
10th. „ ge^nte
11. elf
11th. „ clfte
12. gttjolf
12th. „ gtrolfte
13. breijc^tt
13th. „ breije^ntc
14. mer3ef)n
14th. „ bier^eijnte
15. fiinfje^n or funf^ef
)n
1 5th. „ funfs or funf^ebnte 1
16. fcr^je^u
loth. ,, fed;^e§nte
17. ficiseljn
17th. „ fiebse^nte
%
I]
18. adS>t5e^n
18th. „ ad;t5er;nte
4k
wha
19. ntimjel^n
19th. „ neunje^ntc
20. jlottujig
20th. „ gnjangtgfte
1
21. tin unb shjanjig
21st. „ cm unb gtran^igfte 1
22. jttici unb iWan^xQ
22nd. „ gtoei unb gtoanMte 1
I.
30. breijig
30th. „ bret^tgfte
1
40. i)ier3t9
40th. „ toierjigfte
1
50. funfgig or funfjig
50th. „ funfjigfte 01
• ftiftf= 1
'65]
REMARKS ON THE CARDINAL NUMERALS.
I8l
()0. [cc^jig
60th.
ber fed^jigfte
70. fieD(cn)5i0
70th.
„ fieb(en)3igfte
80. ac^tjig
80th.
„ ad^t^igfte
90. neungig
90th.
„ neungigfte
100. .^unbert
.100th.
„ fjunbertfte
101. t^uiibcrt (unb) einS
101st.
„ ^unbert unb erpe
123. ^unbert (unb) brei unb
^23rd.
„ ^unbert (unb) brei
ghjanjig
unb gtoanjigftc
Cardinalo.
200. jtuei ^unbert
300. brei ^unbert
1000. taufenb
1001. taufenb unb etnS
1036. taufenb (unb) fec^g unb breif^.g
1887 1 ^^"^^"^ (""^) ^^
1 or ad;t3ef)n^unb
&t f)unbert (unb) fieben unb ad^tjtg
ert fie6en unb adj^tSiQ
10,000. jefjn taufenb
100,000. f^unbert taufenb
1,000,000. eine miUM
2,567,849. jtwei miUxoMn,
fiinf Fjunbert (unb) fieben unb
fed^jig taufeni
), a6)t ^unbert (unb) neun unb
toierjig.
Interrogative Ordinal : ber tnicbiclpc ? which (in order) .?
what day of the month.? (See § i66, 3, Note 2).
165. Remarks on the Cardinal Numerals.
I. @tn only is declined throughout, thus :
(a) Before a substantive after the mein Model (§ 8), like
the Indefinite Article, which is the same word un-
eniphasized, as :
©in' 3Jiann, one man ; ein 5!Jiann', a man.
1 82
LESSON XXVIII.
[fiOS
. ^^"^"^^^-7.^^ """^'^''^^ ^"' ^s sometimes printed with a capital, or spaced
out (= Engl. Italics) to distinguish it from the Article, as :
Sir ^abeii @in' (e i n) S3uf(), We have one book.
SBir ^abcn etn 53ud)', Wc have a book.
(P) Used substantively (see also § 150, above) without
article, after biefer Model (§ 6), as :
®tner i)on meinen ?^rcunben, One of my friends.
Hnfcr eincr. One of us {o/oar sort),
(c) After an article or other determinative word, like an
adjective, as ;
5Der einc 33ruber, The one brother.
3«ein eincr ©c^ub, (The) one of my shoes.
alsral:""^'*^ '^' "^^^"^'^ ^'*''^' '' ""^^ ^^ "'"'^ substantively
^er eine unb ber anbcre, (The) one and the other-
and even in the plural (=^ some, one party), asr
^tc eincn faflteii Vm, bic anbern jcncs,
Some (the one party) said this, others (the other party) that.
(d) @in§ is the form used in counting.
2. gtnei and brci may have -tx in the Gen. and -en in the
Dat. when not accompanied by any article, etc., as •
2[u§ gh)eicr ober breicr 3eugen 3)?unb !ommt bic 3Ba^rf;?
Out of the mouth of two or three witnesses cometh
the truth.
"^an lam nic^t gtoetcn §erren bienen.
One cannot serve two masters.
Note. -The Gen. -cr is necessary to show the case, but may be re.
placed by Doit; but the Dat. -eu before a substantive is rare, the -« of
the substantive sufficiently showing the case.
3. «Bni}C= 'both/ refers to two objects taken together
and is declined like an adjective in the Plur.: N. 6eibc'
G. beibcr, etc. ; bie beiben ; meine fceibcn ^ruber. It often
§»6S]
REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS.
183
replaces jtwet after determinative words, as in the last example.
The neuter sing, form beibc0 is also found, as :
SBeibcg ift \oo!)X, Both (things) are true.
Notes. — i. Both 0/ us = h)ir bcibe(n) (we two).
2. • Both ' as conjunction = fottJol)!, etc. (See Less. XL.)
4. Other cardinals are not declined unless used substan-
tively (see next section).
5. The numberi 7rom 13 to 19 are formed by adding -je^tt
(Engl, -teen) to t,ie units (but [ec^jebn drops -g).
6. The multiples of ten (20—90) add -gig to the units,
Jtoangig, breigig being irregular, and fecf)5tg dropping -0.
7. The um'^s always precede the tens in compound numbers
from 21 upwards, both being joined by the conjunction unb
'and ' ; hence 25 = fUnf Uttb gmanjig (Engl. ' five and twenty ');
156 = ^unbert fec^g nnh funfjig, etc.
8. §unbcrt and 2:;ttttfcttb are generally used without ein be-
fore them, and the conjunction unb may be omitted after
them.
9. *One by one, two by two,' etc. = je einer, je gttJei (or
jejiDei unb girei), etc.
10. The Cardinals may be used as substantives :
(a) With a substantive understood (as simp/^ numbers
only), with -c in Nom. Ace, -en in Dat, as :
3lffe mere. All fours.
Mit fed^fcn. With [a coach and] six [horses].
(d) As feminine substantives, of the spots on dice, etc.,
or of the figures i, 2, 3, etc., see § 80, 2, (r), with
plur. in -en, as :
2)ie @ing, the one-spot, figure one, plur. @tnfen.
1 84
LESSON XXVIII.
I§§ 165-
f
1/
(0 <Qur\Uxt and ^aufenb are used as collective sub
stantives, declined after the §unb Model, § 21, (/J),
as:
^m erften ^unbcrt In the first hundred,
^aufenbc toon 3}?enfc^en, Thousands of men.
W MUxon is a fern, subst. of the weak declension.
106. Remarks on Ordinal Numerals
1. The Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals by adding:
(a) Up to 19, -tc, except ber crfic, britte, ad)tt.
Q?) From 20 upwards, -j|e, which in compound numbers
is added to the last component only.
Note. — S)cr oniierc is the older ordinal for 'second.'
2. The ordinals after proper names (of sovereigns, etc.) are
spelt with a capital letter, and must (with the article) be de-
clined throughout, the proper name being undeclined, as :
ilarl bcr @rfte, Charles the Pirst.
©eorg bcl 3Siertcn, 6?/ George the Fourth, etc.
Note. — The Roman Numerals I., II., etc., after names of sovereigns
must always be read as def. art. + ord. num. ia the proper case. Thus-
^eiuvid) IV. = ^cinrid) Uer Picric (Nom.) ; or §einrid) ijcn SBiertcii
(Ace); but: bcr Sljroii i^^eiurid) IV. = bcr Sljron .^einrid) bc0 SBicvten
(Gen.); itiitcv §cumd) IV. = iintcr .§einrid) iiem JBicrtcn.
3. The ordinals are used adjectively before the names of
the months, as :
3)er ad^tse^nte STuguft', The i8th [of] August.
2(m p)d unb jltjangigften ^uni. On the 22d [of] June.
Notes. — I. The figures i, 2, etc., before the months are to be read
as ordinals, thus:
%m 1. 3amiav ^ am crftcii Samiar.
* Toronto, (b.) 25.(fteu) 3(pri( = Toronto, Hen (ace. of time, see
§ 184, 1 ) fuuf unb 3lDati3igflcn 2lpril.
167]
STRONG verbs: fprccjien model.
185
2. • What day of the month is it ? *
2)cr toietiielfle ifl l)eutc ? or: ttn njlebiclfien ^ahtn toir ftcute ?
* It is the fifth,'
e« iH l)cutc ber fanfte, or: mv t|obcn ^eutc Hen fanften.
167. Strong Verbs: f^itcd^cn Model.
I ftc^ren fticl^lft, fticf)It, ftic(;l fto{,I gefto^len
/C«^/. Analogy : speak wanting
Ablaut: \ ^ jj
spake spoken
i I
gebrod^cn
genommen
gef^rod^en
gefto($en
getroffen
LIST ^. a tt, 0.)
Brec^en (N. A.), break Bric^ft, etc. brac^
neimen take nimmft, etc. na^m a.uu,u„K„
(er)jc^rerfen (N.;, be erfc^rirfft,. etc. erfc^raf erfcferorfen
frightened
frrec^en, speak f^ric^ft, etc. f^rad^
ftec^en, sting (trans.) ftic^ft, etc. ftad^
treffen,hit triffft, tnfft, triff traf
Remarks. — I. @r[c^recfen, to frighten (trans.), is^welk (er.
Wredfte, erfc^rerft). ^
2. Observe the dropping of \ and doubling of m in ne^men.
and the single consonant in the Imperfect of erfcBrecfen
and treffen.
LIST J5. (ic, a, 0.)
(The Imperf. Subj. is also given.)
(Ge)Baren, bear, geMerft, etc. gebar gebare geboren
bring forth
J8
1 86
LESSON XXVIII.
r§l67
(em^)fer;tcn, re- empfiel;lft, etc. em^fa^i em^fii^Ie em^fo^len
commend
fM;Icn, steal ftie^lft etc. fta^l iftff
0eftol;le
n
ten(N.), rfommft,fomintK ,
me [fommft,fommtJ^*^'""^ *^*" '^"^^ gefommen
Also:
fomm*
come
Remarks.- i. The simple verb fcl;Ien, to be wanting, to
make a mistake, is weak (fcr;lte, Gcfcljlt),
2. ^omincn drops one m in Impf.
3. All verbs of this Model (A. and B.) drop the final -c of
the 2. sing. Imper.
Vocabulary.
to add, abbieren ' hunting, bag 3agen
arrive (at), an'fommen (in + James, ^atoh
dat.)
obtain, get, befommen
divide, bit)ibieren
celebrate, feiern
multiply, multi^licieren
subtract, [ubtra^ieren
happen upon, meet with,
treffen
care, attention, bie %d)t
railway-station, ber 33a^n^of * about,"ungefa^r
holidays, bie gerien (pi.) twice, i\mmal
hshing, ba§ gifc^en
prison, bag ©efdngnig
mile (German), league, bie
minute, bie Minute
government, reign, bie di^-.
gierung
Reformation, bie Sfleformation'
second (of time), bie 6e!unbe
voyage, bie 6eereife
far, it)eit
as far as, big gu (dat.)
Idioms: 1. He was born twenty.flvo years ago, (St ffl t>ot fiinf unb
jroanjlg 3al)icn gcborcn. »»»•"»
». Please take another apple (1. e., yet one more), ^ittt, neb,
men Zie nod) eimn 2IpfeI. '
8. Take care, yttl)mtn ^it fidf in ^^t.
§««7J STRONG verbs: |t)K(^en MODEL.
187
BXBROISB XXVIII
J. 1. ffite art fmb ®ie ? ^c^ bin in mcincm neun unb man.
3.0ften Sum Jenen. 3. ^ebet 3«onat aufecr bcm Sefetuafba
cnttoebct brcifeifl obct cin unb bve.feig Jaqc 4 25™ Bie ,;,1
b. MJase fmrn h,ir ben 0e6urt.tng ber ijiinigin I Z ber
erfte »on gngtanb .»ar bcr SBafet fiat! II. ,mb Satob II T'^ll
aU e,e biefelbc i,btk. 7. SJai fiinf unb mnMUn t«f ,?toir
eertn Sett auf bem Sa^n^ofc, gerab J aH I in. S S
iwl %.. c ^ *""' 'f' '^ """ ^'" ''*« S»« "Soften Sorfe?
Ungefa^r funf unb jtoanjig e„glifcf;c 3Reire„. U. el najm bi;
12. ®as @,« 6r,(|t, ne^men eie f.c^ in 3r#t. 13. §unterte ion
Sienfc^en ^aben toa^renb be* gvbbebena b«« Sebcn serip e„ 14
englanb. 15. SRe.ne beiben fflriibet reiften am funf unb .im„
8.Bften 3«m .on Siueipool ab unb famcn erft am iSn S
m nuebec an. 16. 3Bann lommt 3^r ®e6«rt«i ? ^"„ ri„
unb 8toa„3.gften JJoBen.bcr. 17. Sie Siegierung fteinri* VIiT
^«r emc ber berii^mteftcn in ber OeWic^te ®ng anb 18 S«
^.r cmen ©paj.ergang marten, ^aben ioir me^rere unferer Lnb!
onsettoffen 19. SSon ,oem ift g^nen geratcn toorb n ife @"
re.fe 3U mac|en? 6, ift mir .on me^reren trjten gerat'en" orten'
2 Ma^ O"^ g«""^'/=o"""a„ds thousands (dat.) of soldiers.
2 Mary has broken her pen, but she has taken Louisa's. 3
The ce IS oreakmg ; take care, Fred. 4. This is mv learf^
pencl, not William's. 5. You have taken only one appk"^ east
otrotr /;,^''-^°- celebrate theQueen'SdJ
On the 24th of May. 7. What day of the month is it to-day?
i88
LESSON XXVIII.
[§§ x67'
To-day is the 3 1st of March. 8. The thief was thrown into
(the) prison, because he had stolen five hundred dollars.
9. Which do you prefer, (the) hunting or (the) fishing?
I like both. 10. A bee stings, but a dog or a cat bites.
11. The days are longest in the month of June, and shortest
towards Christmas. 1 2. When our neighbours w^re at church,
a thief went (fommen) into the house and stole several hundred
dollars. 13. In the year eighteen hundred and eighty-seven
Queen Victoria celebrated the fiftieth ye ir of her reign. 14.
The eldest son of the Queen of England was born the ninth of
November one thousand eight hundred and forty-one. 15. Tell
me how much thirty-two and eighty-eight make. Ifi. There
are sixty seconds in a minute, sixty minutes in an hour,
twenty-four hours in a day, seven days in a week, four weeks
in a month, and twelve months in a year. 17. Would you make
a voyage to Europe if you were advised to do so .? 18. Yes,
I should like very much to make a voyage to Europe.
Read in German: 2 mat 11 ift 22, 3 md 12 ift 36, 4 mat 8 ift 32, 5 mol
9 ift 45, 6 md 7 ift 42, 7X10 ift 70, 8X 11 ift 88, 9X r ift 108, lOX 10 ift
100, 11X11 ift 121, 12X12 ift 144. 5Ibbiert 2,342, 25,891 unb 989,346.
@ubtral)icrt 27,763 oou 31,551. 2«uttipticiert 591 mit 473. 2)it)iblert
2,581,640 mit 61.
ORAL EXERCISE XXVIII.
1. Wie weit ist es von Hamilton nach Toronto ? 2. Wann
sind die Tage am kiirzesten ? 3 Wie viel macht das, wenn
man 337 mit 2 multipliciert ? 4. \A ie viele Tage sind in einem
Jahre f 5. Wann bekommt ihr Ferien ? 6. Wessen Bleistift
haben Sie.?
i69l
INDEFINITE NUMERALS.
189
LESSON XXIX.
INDEFINITE NUMERALS, - STRONG VERBS: cffeit MODEL
168. Indefinite Numerals.
The Indefinite Numerals are :
1. ttfl, all
2. gcnj, whole, all
3. jcbcr, ■)
4. jcbracbcr, ,^ each (bicfcr Model)
5. jegHi^er, J
6. fcin, none, not one
7. cintac, )
8. e«id|e.r°"^^^'^^^^"
9. manii^C, many
10. me^rere, several
11. biel, much (pi. many)
12. ttienig, little (pi. few)
13. ettuaS, some \
14. gcnug, enough C (indeclinable)
15. mcjr, more )
Remark. — All these, except aU and gan^, are used as In-
definite Pronouns (see Less. XXVII).
1.69. I. Wi expresses number as well as quantity, and
denotes that every iv dividual part of a whole is present.
2. Wlien declined, it follows the biefec Model, whether
used v/ith or without a substantive, as :
aaer ^df-* attc SCrbeit tt)ar ijergeblid^ ; aacg 33rot ;
all [the] cheese ; all labour was useless ; all [the] bread.
3. Unless used substantively, it always precedes the deter-
minative word, and then generally remains uninflected in the
sing., and often in the plur., as :
igo
LESSON XXIX.
[§§lCd'
5(ff metn ®elb, All my money.
2111(c) meine greunbc. All my friends.
4. When used substantively and preceded by a determin-
ative word, it still follows the strong declension, s:
3)iefe^5 (ba^:?) aUcg, All this (that).
S3ei bcm aacm. With all that.
5. It is not (as in English) followed by the definite article,
but may be followed by the demonstrative ber, bie, '^o,^, as :
3iae§ ©clb, All [i:he] money.
2ta(cg) bag ©elb. All that money.
VSit ^cn[cf;en, All [the] men.
Me btc 5[Renfc^ert, All those men.
170. I. ©ttttj expresses quantity, not number, and repre-
sents an object as mnplete and undivided, without reference
to its parts. When therefore the Engl. ' all' = ' whole ' it
must be rendered by gaitj, not by att, as :
I have been working all (the whole) day long,
^d; f)abc ben ganjcn ^acj gearbeitet.
2. @onj is declined like an adjective, and always f'^Ilows
the determinative word, as :
3)cr gangc %<x^, The whole day.
3)iein ganger ©igentum, [The] whole [of] my pioperty.
3. Before names of countries and places it may remain un-
inflected, if unaccompanied by an article, etc., as :
All (the whole of) America does not belong to the
United States, C*)ttnj (or boS gangc) 2(meri!a gt^ijrt
md;t gu ben SSevcinigtcn 'Bi<xoX^^^.~ But:
^tc gangc ®d[)h)et5, All Switzerland.
171. I. 3cbcr (biefer Model) is used to denote each ^dh
vidual belonging to a whole, as :
Sebcr 53aum ^at %ii, Every tree has branches.
'75l
INDEFINITE NUMERALS.
191
2. It is sometimes preceded by ein, and then follows the
^.^.^ adjective declension, ^cbiucber and jeglic^er are less
common forms, used in the same way.
1 72. ,tcin is the negative of ein.
173. I. ©imgc (pkir., biefer Model) = 'some a few*
denotes a small number taken collectively, and is used with-
out article, as :
^inigc SSogel fonnen nic^t fingen. Some birds cannot
sing.
9Sor cinigcn Sa^ren, A few years ago.
2. It is used in the sing, only before names of materials to
denote a limited quatitity, as :
.^c^ ^abe einigcg ©elb, I have some money (but not
much).
3. ^tlitjc is a less usual word with the same meanincr and
use. ^
Note - (fin |,nar ' a pair, couple ' (with small ^) is also used in the
sense of « a few,' the eiu being then indeclinable, as :
2«it cin ^oor X^aleni, With a few dollars.
1 74. aWtturJcr (biefer Model), ' many(a),* denotes indefinite
plurality, as :
SKont^cr S^ogel fann ntd;t fingen.
Many a bird cannot sing.
Scf; f)abe nittntjel Unglurf gefiabt,
I have had many a misfortune,
9Wtttn5c Seute glaubcn, Many people believe.
It may remain uninfected, especially before an adj., as:
3}?anc^cr gutc, or in and; gutcr 9J?onn.
175. 9Me^mc = ' several, a few,' taken
aWcJme Seute tuurben franf, Sr
individually,
veral people became
as :
ill.
192
LESSON XXIX.
176'
170. 9?Jcl and mciltj^, in the sing., are inflected (bicfer
Model) when they denote number, and uninflected when they
denote quantity, as :
Seme nic^t titelcl, fonbern bid, Do not learn many
(a great number of) things, but much (a large
quantity) .
They are usually, though not always, declined in the plural.
Note. — The Engl. * little ' = ' small ' is rendered by f lein.
177. ^tltiag is used before names of material, etc., in
the sing., like einigeg (see § 173, 2, above), of a small quan
tity^ as:
©tmoS ©rot. Some bread (but not much).
178. (^ettUg may precede or follow its substantive, as :
©elb gcttug, or gettug ©elb, money enough.
Note. — As adverb, it aXwdiys follows its adjective, as:
!I)a« iBanb ift nic^t tang genug, The ribbon is not long enougl^
179. Wt^X is the comparative of ijiel, and is inde
clinable, as :
S4> f>^&e ntc^f ?^reimbe al§ er,
I have more friends than he.
180. The Engl, 'some, any' are generally omitted be»
fore substantives, unless a small qua?itity (some, but not much)
is denoted (see § 157, above). In answer to a question, without
a substantive, they are rendered by etnigeS (sing.), einige
(plur.) or luelcf) (sing, or plur.), not by ^Wva^ (which = * some-
thing'), as:
§a6en (Sic ©elb ? ^d^ l^aBe einlgcg (tueld^eS).
§aben ©ie greunbe ? gc^ ^abe einifle (mel4)e).
iSil
STRONG verbs: cffeil MOD.TL.
193
181.
Strong Verbs: cffcn Model.
Infin.
Pres. Ind. 2. 3. Sing.
Imper. 2. Sing.
Germ. Model:
Engl. Analogy:
(incomplete)
Ablaut:
cffcn iff eft, ijt, ig
eat wanting
Impf.
ate
P. Part.
C5i:(g)cffen
eaten
\\
lie
LIST.
bitten, beg, ask Bittcft, bittet, btttc lai gcbeten
effen, eat (of man) iffeft, ijt, i^ a^ gegeffen
freffen,eat(ofbeasts) f riff eft, frt^t, frig fra§ gefreffen
geben, give .9i(e)bft, 0i(e)bt, gi(e)b o.ah <^zq,tUxf.
(ber) geffen, forget bergiffeft, bergijt, toers bergag bergeffen
lefen, gather ; read liefeft, lieft, Iic§ Ia§ gelefen
liegen, lie down lie^ft, liegt, lieg lag gelegen
meffen, measure miffeft, mijt, mig mag gemeffen
(ge)nefen (N.), re- genefeft, geneft, genefe genag genefen
cover (from illness)
(ge)fc^e^en (N.), gefc^ie^t
happen (impers.)
fefien, see fiefjft, fie^t, fie^ fa^ gefe^en
fi^en, sit fi^eft, fi^t, fil^(e) fa§ gefeffen
trcten (N. A.), tread trittft, tritt, tritt trat getreten
(tuefen^N., obsolete), — — — 'max geh)efen
to be
Observe. — i. The changes from ff to §; also that § of
the Impf. is retained through that whole tense, the vowel be-
ing long, as : toir ajen, ic^ d§e.
2. That genefen does not change c into it.
gefd^al^ gefd^e^^cn
194
LESSON XXIX.
t§i8i
3. The change in fitjen of i^ into § and ff.
4. That the long c of the root is changed into it, the short
e into short i.
5. The inserted g in the P. Part, of effcn (gejicffen).
6 The doubling of t in 2. sing., etc., of trcten, and omission
of final -tm 3. sing, (tritt).
Vocabulary.
to experience, feel, em^finben telegraph, bcr ^cregra^^'
intend, contemplate, \)ox's
absence He ^IDiuefen^eit
Francis, g^ranj '
century, bag ^a^rfjun'bert
cherry, bie ^irfc^e
province, bie ^rotjinj'
romance, novel, ber Socman'
swallow, bie (Srf;U)aI0e
misfortune, bag Ungliicf
world, bie 3SeIt
pardon, bie SSerjetlfiung
thin, biinn
almost, nearly, betna^e, faft
immediately, (fo)gleic^
lately, not long ago, neulid^
late, ^pdt
while, h)d^renb
Idioms: 1. Therein there wa«, etc. (general statement), c« gfebt. e« <iab,
etc. (obj. in ace. see Less. XXXVII).
2. To cut ono'K haml, f,d, ,„ fcjc ^cinb fd)ncifcen (lit., to cut
one's self .a o the hand). . ^ ^ut
3. To beg pardon, mn »cncil)uiifl bUtctt.
4. To speak to (with), fprcct)cn + ace. of person.
EXERCISE XXIX.
^. 1. ®a§ ganje Sanb em^finbet ben ^erluft eineg guten unb
grofeen 3JJanneg. 2. (^g giebt [d;i3ue $8ogeI, tDeId;e gar nic^t fingen
3. ^ttte, gcben ©le mir nod; einen "Ihakv ; ic^ i)ah^ nx^t ©elb
genug. 4. ^^t ©eorg ben aipfel, ben er gefauft ^at, ober ben=
jemgen, \r)dd)cn id) x\)m gegeben l;a6e? 5. ®er grembe trat mir
auf ben ^^u^, auev gleid; kt er mid) urn SSerseilmng. 6. 2Baftrenb
S^rer STbiuefen^eit finb mefjrere geute gefommen, urn ©ie ju
t§i8i
§i8ij
STRONG VERBS I effcn MODEL.
195
frrccr;en. 7. ©eorg fagte intr neulirf;, bafj er ?^rt| bor etnigen
2Boc^cn ge^en IjaU. 8. ^JJimm bid; in Slc^t, bag (Sig, h)orauf
bu trittft, ift fe^r biinn. 9. ^c^ 6itte urn S^crjei^ung, bag ic^ fo
frat gcbmnicn bin. 10. 3Kenn bu meinen Dnfel fie^ft, fo fage
if)m, hitU, bag ic^ t)orf)a6e, ifjn gu befuc^en, 11. @§ liegt ein
Sftoman bon ©ir SSalter 6cott auf bem ^ifdjje ; lefen eie ben--
felben? 12. 9Sag ift ge^e^en? gJteinc Heine ©c^iuefter ift auf
©lag getreten unb \)at fic^ in ben {^ujj gefc^nitten. 13. 3)iefeg
Ungluc! gefd)af> in ben ^erien, uno fie genag fef;r langfam, h)eir
bag SSetter fo ^eig h)ar. 14. (Sine ©c^toalbe mac^t!einen @om=
mev. 15. (gin ^ier frigt unb fduft, aber ein m^n^d) tgt unb
trinft. 16. ^Durc^ ben ^elegra^^en ^ort faft bie gan^e SSett in
bier unb jiDanjig ©tunben bon bem, ttjag in irgenb einem Sanbe
gefc^ie^t. 17. 3(lg ein 9teid;er aug feinem ^aufe !am, hat t^n
ein Slrmer urn ein toenig ©elb, aber er gab bem Slrmen !eing.
18. ®ag $ferb beg 9teifenben frag ein ix)enig §eu unb §afer,
U)a^renb fein §err bag SJiittaggeffen im ©aft^aufe ag. 19. ':^a^
5?inb ^at fd)on aEeg 33rob unb gleifc^ gegeffen, eg i)at and) affc
mild) getrun!en, bie im ©lafe Wax, 20. ©inem Sitgner n)trb
nic^t geglaubt, felbft twenn er bie Sa^rfjeit f^ric^t.
B. 1. The wholejDf England is not so large as the Pro-
vince of Manitoba. ^2. Henry VIII. of England, Francis I.
of France, and Charles V. of Germany were the greatest
monarchs of the i6th century. 3. Where did you find the
money ? It lay in the grass. 4. Every summer the birds
eat the cherries in our garden. 5. The sick man lay seven
weeks in the hospital, but he has now recovered. 6. The
rich (man) gave the poor (man), who sat before the house, some
money. 7. This youth has read all the books in the library
of his father, but unfortunately hj forgets just as fast as
he reads. 8. Napoleon I. died on the 5th May 1821 ; he was
52 years old. 9. Have you forgotten what I told you two
months ago .? 10. During the rain we sat under a tree and
196
LESSON XXX.
(§§ i8a.
told stories. 1 1 . One forgets easily what one reads too quickly.
12. If you have more paper than you need, please give me
some. 1:J. Nineteen hundred years ago the Romans pos-
sessed almost the whole world. 14. Many young people
read hundreds of novels, and forget after some time almost
all they have read. 1 5. Twenty-five years ago our neighbour
possessed only a few hundred dollars, but now he is one of
the richest men in the city. 16. Speak the truth, whether you
are believed or not.
ORAL EXERCISE XXIX.
1. Giebt es in Amerika Vogel, die nicht singen? 2. 1st
jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen ? 3. Was
haben Sie mei.iem Onkel gesagt, als er hier war ? 4. Was
sagen Sie vom Lesen der Romane ? 5. Welchen Apfel iszt
Georg ? 6. 1st das Telephon eine neue Ertindung ?
' LESSON XXX.
DERIVATIVE NUMERALS. -TIME, MEASURE, DATE. -STRONG
VERBS: fcjiagcn MODEL.
182.
Derivative Numerals.
From the Cardinal and Indefinite Numerals are formed the
following Derivative Numerals :
(a) By adding -ma\, adverbs denoting * so many times,'
as: einmttl, once; bicrmtti, four times; einunb^
ghjanjigmol, twenty-one times; monc^mol, many a
time.
Notes. — I. 2Jitat is neuter, hence iebcSmd, each time; and wi^
Indef. Numerals sometimes adds -g, as: t)iclmQt(0), me^rmalg.
|S3]
DERIVATIVE NUMERALS.
197
2. ©in'mal = * on one (single) occasion,* as :
3cf) \)cbt i^n nur einmat flefel)en, I have seen him only once.
(Sinmar (elnSinalS, einjt) = 'once upon a time,' as:
68 mar cinmor eiu ^buig, etc. (Grimm.)
3. S^ii^t ein'mal, • not once,' as ;
(gr tft nid^t ein'mat ^ier neirefen, He has not been here once.
9?i(i)t cinmo!' (or nirf)t maV), 'not even,' as:
(Sr ifl ni(f)t (ein)mor ^ier gettjcfen, He has not even been here.
(d) By adding -fnc^ or fiiltlg, adjectives denoting *so
many fold,' as : einfttdj, simple ; gloeifttt^ (jluiefac^),
twofold, double; bicrfttij Ofttltig), quadruple; DieU
foij, manniijfad;, manifold.
Note. — ©infcittig = 'foolish, silly.'
{c) By adding -Ici to the gen. fern. sing, or plur., indedi-
nable adjectives denoting 'of so many kinds,' as:
eincrlei, of one kind; breicrici, of three kinds;
melcrici, tnanc^crlct, of many kinds, etc.
Note.— (58 ift mir lincrtci = 'It is (all) the same to me.'
183. From the Ordinals are formed :
{a) By adding -(, the fractional Numerals, as : ein ^rits
tel = \\ ba§ 5Siertel, the quarter; brci 3n)ansigftel
== ^/2o, etc.
Notes. — i. These are substantives formed from the ordinal + %t\\
(= part), and are therefore neuter, thus:
S)a8 5)tittet = ba8 britte S;eit, 'the third part,' etc.
2. 'Half* as substantive — ijie ^olftc ; as adjective or adverb = |ol!^
which is declined like gatij (see § 170, 2), as:
3cf) ^Qbe i>ic §dlftc meine8 (gigentum8 ocrtorcn,
I have lost half (of) my property.
2)er ^nabe war ^alb tot, ate man ii)n fanb,
The boy was bsUf 4ead when be was found
198
LESSON XXX.
l§§ 183
.&0I6 2Saft)inflton, or US fialht SafI)ington,
(The) half (of) Washington.
•Oolb or bas Ijalbt j^ranfrcicf), half France; but
^le Wk <S(f)mei^, half Switzerland.
(^) By adding -JalB, M/xe^/ Numbers with the Fraction
'half/ as: brittcJaK) =2] ; merte^alfi ^aieilen, three
miles and a half; funftc^oia (SEen, four and a half
yards.
Remarks. — i. Observe that the ordinal is one higher than
the cardinal of the Engl, idiom; thus 'two and-ahalf is a
number consisting of three parts, of which the first and second
parts are wholes, but the third is only a half, hence brittc^
bal6.
2. U = onbcrt^alb (not jhJcitc^alB ; see § 166, i, Note), asj
5(nbcrt^alb glafc^en (pi.), A bottle and a half.
3. These are invnriable adjectives.
{,€) By adding -ciij, ordinal adverbs denoting in what
place or order, as :
crftcns, firstly; atoeitcnS, secondly; brittcnS, thirdly,
etc.
184. Expressions of Time.
I. Both point and duration of time are expressed by the
Accusative without a preposition, as :
^cn erften ^anuar, (On) the first of January.
©r !am le^tcn 2)?ontag an. He arrived last Monday.
3c^ toar Ic|tc SBodfie fran!, I was ill last week.
3d; it>ar cine aaugc 2Soc^e franf, I was ill (for) a whole
week.
2. Point of time is also expressed :
i84]
EXPRESSIONS OF TIME.
199
{a) By the preposition on with the Dat. (always contracted
with the article), of date^ as :
tint erften 3anuar, On the first of January.
%VX (Sonntag, On Sunday,
%m ^Jlorgen bie[e^ ^acje^. On the morning of this
day.
{b) By the Genitive case, with Xag, days of the week, or
divisions of the day, when denoting indefinite time
or habitual action, as :
$)Cg ^agc^. In the day time, by day.
©onntagg. On Sundays.
C^CS) 2(benb§, In the evening.
2- The Time of Day is thus expressed :
<a) The quarters of the hour, with reference to the
following hour (not the past hour, as partly in
English), thus:
It is a quarter past twelve = @§ ift (ein) SStertcl ouf
cin§ (i. e., one quarter towards^ or oft the way to^
one).
It is half past twelve = @g ift ^a(6 cinS (i. e., half
one).
It is a quarter to one = (S^ ift brei SSiertet ouf ein§ (i. e.,
three quarters towards one).
{p) The minutes past by uttJ^, as : @§ ift gluanjig 5[Rinuten
nad^ §tx)ei. It is twenty minutes past two.
The minutes to by tior, as : 3e^n ^inuten Hx brei, ten
minutes to three.
(f) at =- um ; o'clock = Ufir. as :
Xivx ein ttjr. At one o'clock.
200
LESSON XXX.
l§§ 184-
Um cltt 3?iertct auf fiinf U^r, At a quarter past four
o'clock.
©8 ift brci 53iertel ottf fiinf (U^r), It is a quarter to five
(o'clock).
(S§ Jttt fcj^g (U()r) gcfrjlagcn. It has struck six (o'clock).
Note. — The impersonal Verb 'to be," in expressing the time of the
day, is always singular^ as in English.
185. Expressions of Quantity.
1. A substantive expressing Quantity (Measure, Weight
or Number), if Masculine or Neuter, retains the form of
the singular, as :
SSier unb 5hjan5ig ^^Vi mad[)en ^toei Jug, 24 inches make
two feet. *
^"(OZX ?Pfunb, Two pounds.
Staufcnb 9Monn, A thousand men. — But:
Slt)ei giafc^cn (fem.). Two bottles.
3h?olf ©Ilcn (fern.). Twelve yards.
2. The substantive, the quantity of which is expressed, is
generally put in apposition with that expressing the quan-
tity, as :
3it)Ct ^\x^ ^O^tcr, Two quires of paper.
5Dreitaufenb 9Jlann Sttfuntcric^ Three thousand infantry
soldiers.
giinf ©Ia§ ©let. Five glasses of beer.
5Diit gtoei ^aar ©c^uFjen (dat.), With two pairs of shoes.
3. But if a determinative word precedes the substantive
measured, etc., use the Gen. case, or tjon with Dat., as :
Sd^ ^a6e feeing ^funb biefeg 0uten3ucJev0 (or: tipn W]tm
/801
STRONG verbs: f(^Tagen model.
20I
4. The measure M weight, distance, etc.) is put in the
accusative, as :
a)ie[er Slciftift ift nur einen 3oir lang.
This lead-pencil is only an inch long.
3<^ ?)a6e einc ganjc 9J?ciIc (ace.) marfc^iert,
I have been marching a whole mile.
2)iefe« ^afet' tDiegt ein ^aI6c8 ^funb (ace),
This parcel weighs half-a-pound.
186. Strong Verbs: fi^Iogcu Model.
Infin. PR.lND.2.3.sing. Impf.
Germ. Model: fc^logcn fd)Ianft, fc^logt Mlug
Engl. Analogy: slay wanting slew
(incomplete)
Ablaut: tt S u
LIST.
barfen (W.N.A.), bake bac!ft, 6ac!t Buf
fasten (N.A.), ride (in faf)rft, fd^rt fu^r
a conveyance;), drive
graben, dig grabft, grabt
laben (W.). invite ; load i^bft, laW
P. Part.
0c[c^lagcn
slain
fc^affen, create
fc^Ittc^en, strike
tragen, carry
tDtt^fen (N.), grow
tDafc^en, wash
Also the irregular :
fteljen, stand
Waffft, fc^afft
Wlagft, fd^Iagt
tragft, tragi
toii'^feft, n)dc^ft
toafc^eft, hjaf^t
fteWt, fte^t
and the usually weak :
N9en, ask \ '^'^\ f "^J;
grub
tub
Wuf
Wn
trug
toudfiS
toufcj
f(ftunb))
Iftonb >
gcBacfen
gefa^rcn
gcgraben
gelaben
gefcbaffen
gefc^Iagen
getragen
getoad^fen
gewafd^en
geftanb
frug
fra0te
I 0«fra0t
202
LESSON XXX.
[§i8r.
Remarks.— i. 33ac!cn is usually weak i. the Impf. (bacfte\
but strong in the P. Part, (gcbacfen). Observe also the single
f in Impf.
2. gabren is conjugated with fcin when intr., with ^a6en
when trans.
3. ed;affcn 'to work' and (Dcr)frf)affcti 'to procure' are
weak. Observe the single f in the Impf.
Vocabulary.
to set out, depart, leave, ah'> minute-hand, ber Wmnkn^
fal;reu
rise, auf[tcl;en
invite, ein'laben
understand, Derftcfjen
dine, ju WittaQ cffen
go for a drive, f^ajieren fasten
absence, bie 2lb'n)efenf)ett
littlejree, bag 33aumc^en
dozen, ba§ 2)u|'enb
yard, bic QUt
multiplication-table, bag (Sin*
malcin^3
thread, ber Jaben *
driving, bag i^a^xm
driver, coachman, berSlutfd^er
hole, bag Soc^
jeigcr
pound, bag ^funb
post-office, bie ^oft
riding, bag dk'xkn
sentence, ber (^al^*
hour-hand, ber ^tunbenjeiger
cup, bie ^affe
tea, oer J^ee
clock, watch, bie U^r
train, ber 3"9 *
two weeks, a fortnight, biers
je^n ^age
then, bann
early, fru()
slow, slowly, tancjfam
at least, iuenigfteng
first, first of all, juerft
night, bie ^ad)t*
Idioms: 1. The Boston train, 5)cr 3ug ( JJJj, gjoftun.
2. What time (o'clock) is it ? SBic oiel Uf)r ifl ed »
EXERCISE ?^XX.
^. 1. @in breifari)»'r }aben bric^)t md)t leid)t. 2. ^^r ^utf c^et
fci^rt [o langfam, b.v- v, tr uirf;t Dor brci IVxcxki auf jludlf an*
lommen iDerben, a. ^R ber einen $dlfte ber S33eli i[t eg %aQ,
§ »86J STRONG VERBS : fd^lagCtt MODEL. 2O3
i^a^ircnb eg in ber anbcrn §alfte m6t tft. 4. ©«§ gicbt c« f)cute
^cucfi? 5 aBe^l;fllb l;a6cn ©ie mi(^ flcftcru nid;t 6efud;t?
(Srftcne n^eil eg regnete, imb ^tueitcng tucil id; [clbft ^k'fud; IjaiU
6.^u t^a[t flut geUfcn, I'm nod) einen ©a^. 7. mc uicl bicaen
6ie? ^cf; imcge unGef% ^imbert unb fiinf^vn ^^funb. H^er
£u0 !ommt um brei ^V^kxUl auf ncim an unb fdl;rt nni fiebcn
3^mutcn nac^ jeFjn ab. 9. .f^aben ©ie ^^re lUjv bci fid)V ^a
aber bie ^^cber ift flcbrod;cn. lo. ^c^ fjahc jl^ei ^u^enb ©Idfcr
bejicUt, abcr [le finb nod; nid;t angefonimen. 11. mx ^abcn
unfere muxn eingclaben, lua^renb ber Jerien bicnebn ^Tacje bei
ung ju^ubringen. 12. 9Bir effcn im ©ommer um ^alb jtrei m
mttaQ 18. Sc^ ttJiirbe gem mit ^\)mn fya^imn faf;ren, tuenn
©le mic^ emluben. 14. ^er §unb berbarg ben ^noc^en in ein
So^, lDeld;eg er Winter bem Slpfelbaum grub. 15. '^i, maah
^k\)t frutj (beg) 5)?orgeng auf, trafc^t bie <RIeiber unb hiidt ^rot
16. So^ann ift ein fe^r einfaltigcr .^nabe ; er \)at noc^ nicbt bag
emmalemg a^Iernt. J 7. SBie biel ll^r mx eg, alg ber gjjinuten.
jciger au, leo.g unb ber ©tunben^eiger ^w^jcn brei unb bier
[tanb? 18. 3)er 53auer frug ben ^teifenben, tuie t)iel Uljx eg fei
(mare) unb biefer jog feine U^r aug ber 2:afc^e unb fagte ibm, eg
^i f)alb eing. 19. Slbbiere brei 2?iertel, t)ier ©iebentel, neun
3)rei3e^ntehmbelf3h)an3igftel;n)iet)ielift(mac^t)bag? 20 3)er
§unb hJiirbe ben ^naben glec^ beifeen, n)enn berfelbe ibn fcbluae
21. ©e^en ©ie jur GefeKWaft ber ^rau 5B. ? 22. ^c^ bin niAt
emgeraben ; mein ^ruber juurbe eingetaben, aber ic^ nid;t.
£. 1. In six days God created Heaven and earth. 2 The
patient drank two glasses of wine and three cups of tea yester-
day. 3. This silly boy has not even understood what I said
to him. 4. Here is good, strong cloth ; it costs two and a
half dollars a (the) yard. 5. This tree grows quickly ; it is
at least four times as high as it was three years ago. (i. This
exercise is very easy; we sliall have finished (witt) it in half
an hour. 7. The dealer showed us many kinds of ribbon.
204
LESSON XXXI.
C8187
red, blue, yellow, etc. 8. Which do you prefer, (the) riding
or (the) driving ? It is all the same to me. 9. Please tell
me what time it is ? It is exactly thirteen minutes after eleven.
10. It is nine o'clock, for the hour-hand is (stands) at (auf) nine
and the minute-hand at twelve. 11. These three school-boys
bought themselves a melon, which weighed almost five
pounds. 12. The coachman drove first to the post-office
and then to the bank. 13. Between April and September
the little tree grew a foot and a half. 14. Precisely at five
o'clock the Boston train left, and at 9.45 we arrived. 15.
Was this house built before you came here.? 16. Add *74o>
%, and «7eo.
ORAL EXERCISE XXX.
1. Wie viel macht drittehalb, fiinftehalb und neuntehalb?
2. Um wie viel Uhr kommt der Zug von Boston an 1 3. Was
sagte der Reisende, als der Bauer ihn fragte, wie viel Uhr es
sei? 4. Wie viel Uhr ist es nach IhrerUhr? 5. Wie viele
Satze hast du schon gelesen ? (3. Ist jemand wahrend meiner
Abwesenheit gekommen ?
LESSON XXXI.
ADVERBS. - STRONG VERBS : fattcU MODEL.
187. Adverbs.
Adverbs may be arranged according to their meaning as
follows, with examples of the simpler and more commonly oc-
curing ones under each class :
L Time.
neuIidEi, the other day, lately
toor'gcftcvn, the day before
■\T-pcfArr1q\7
Moxlfix', before
(a) Fast:
bainal§, at that time
cbcn, just, just now
ge'ftcrn, yesterday
{d) Present:
\)i\xU, to-day
nun, )
ADVERBS.
205
now
(c) Future:
6alb, soon
j^ernad^', afterwards
morgen, to-morrow
nodbl^et', afterwards
nimmer, nevermore
ii'knnorgcn, the day after to-
morrow
(<?) General:
bann, then (past or fut.)
cinft, once upon a time (past) ;
some day (fut.)
enblid;, at last
erft, only (not sooner than)
(fo)g(eic^, at once, directly
inbeffen, ) . .
,.«Jw ff r in the meanwhile
unterbeffen, J
immcr, always, at all times
ie(mal§), ever, ?' anytime
me(mal^5), never, at no time
nodj^' still, yet
oft(malg), often
[d^on, already
felten, seldom, rarely
(</) Interrogative:
hjann? when?
11. Place and Direction.
(a) Demonstrative: (b) Negative:
' [• there, in that place ntrgenb^, nowhere
baferbft, j
(ba)]^in, thither, to that place
bort, there, in that place
(ba)^er, thence, from that
place
IS)ier, here, in this place
^ie(r)^er, hither, to this place
(d) General:
it'genbiro, anywhere
iibcrad', everywhere
III. Measure and Degree,
aitdf), also, ever
iVma, about, nearly
{c) Interrogative and
Relative :
it)0, where, in what place
tDol^in, whither, to what place
h)oF)er, whence, from what
place
faft i" "^^^v> almost
206
LESSON XXXI.
[§§ 187
wholly, altogether
gar, at all, very
genug, enough
gerabe, just, exactly
!aum, hardly, scarcely, no
sooner
nod), still, more
nur, only
fe^r, very
[0, so
ungefcifjr, about
ixUx\)anpt', generally
U)te? how?
5u, too
giemiic^, tolerably
IV. Aflarmation.
ja, yes ; to be sure geit)iJ3, certainly
jatDO^l, certainly natur'Iid;, of course
freilic^V to be sure, indeed lt)ir!lid^ to be sure, indeed
furiuaf^r, truly, really gtDar, it is true, certainly
netn, no
V. Negation.
nic^t, not
VI. Possibility.
etiua, >
h)af)rfd)einlid;, probably
)fDoi)l, perhaps
VII. Necessity,
atterbtngg, certainly buvd)au§, absolutely, entirely
VIII. Cause.
iuaruti
\D<i^\)alh, j (interrog. or rel.j
iuarum, ) wherefore, why
i&, i (
balfier, \
baruiu, >• therefore
be^^alb, )
Note. — These last, as well as many of the others, are also used as
Conjunctions. Sec Less. XL.
t88]
STRONG verbs: fallen model.
207
188. Stronc; Verbs: fottcit Model.
Infin. Pr. IND.2.3. Sing. Impf. P. Part.
(same as Inf.)
Germ. Model: faaen fottft, fallt fid gefattcn
Engl. Analogy : fall wanting fell fallen
(incomplete)
Ablaut: a a ie a
(Note. — This is only a seeming Ablaut ; 3ee § 192, Rem. 4.)
LIST.
Brafen, blow bicifeft, blcift
braten, roast (tr. and intr.) brdtft, brdt
faflen (N.), fall
fangen, catch
F^alten, hold
f)angen, hang
()ttuen, hew
^ci^en, bid ; be called
laffen, let
IttUfen (N. A.), run
fcittft, fdllt
fangft, fdngt
^dltft, ^dlt
ijdngft, f)dngt
f)ttueft, ^ttut
Idffeft, Id^t
(dufft, Iduft
blie§
briet
pel
fi(e)ng
Ijjtelt
geblafen
gebraten
gefaEen
gefangen
gefjalten
(>i(e)ng gefjangen
raten, advise (gov. dat.) rdtft, rdt
rufft, ruft
fd;Idfft, fc^Idft
ftoBeft, fto^t
I5)iefi
lief
riet
rief
fc^Iief
ftie^
ge^auen
gel^cifeen
gelaffen
gelaufen
geraten
gerufen
ge[d;Iafen
geftofeen
oKOng gegongen
rufen, call
fcf)(afen, sleep
ftoften, push
Also the irregular
gejen (N.), go ge^eft, ge^t
Remarks. — I. Observe in ^xo<i^\K, ()alten, raten the con-
tracted forms of the 3. sing. Pres. Ind.
2. ^ttngen is the strong verb (l;ieng, gefjangen) and is proper-
ly intr. (= 'to be suspended'); j^dngen is weak (^dngtc,
ge^dngO and trans., but the distinction is not strictly ob-
eerved.
208
LESSON XXXI.
[§i88
3. Observe that fjei^cn and fto^en, having the root vowel
long, retain g throughout ; whereas laffen varies according to
rule, thus : id) laffe, Gelaficn, but er Idftt, lieg, iuir Uegen.
Vocabulary.
to begin, commence, an'fangen
receive, get, er^alten
please, gefallen
leave, leave behind, laffen
skate, (Sdjlitt'fc^u^ (au'fen
kick, strike, bump, ftojen
cut down, um'l^auen
butter, bie SSutter
play-mate, ber ©efpteic
mouse, bie Wa\x^ * '
man-of-all-work, (farm-) ser-
vant, ber ^nec^t
beef, ba^ S^inbfleifc^
skate, ber ©c^Utt'fd^ul^
skating, ba§ ©c^Iitt'fc^ul^laufen
bacon, ber <Bp^d
language, bie <S^rac^e
study, bag ©tubium
last, preceding, borig
Idioms : 1. What is the name of? 3EBie heif^t ?
8. What is your name? 9Bie ^ei^ett <Zifl
3. My name is Henry, 3cl) I)cige ^cJnrld).
4. I think higlily of him (i. e., esteem, value him highly),
3(() haite t>iel oon itjm.
5. HoTTcloyoudo? (How are you?) SBie geljt ei 3^nen?
6. He has not been here for a long time, @r ifi lange nidyt
hiev gcrocfcn (@r ifi nidyt langc bier gcwefen = He has not
been here I«>ng).
EXERCISE XXXL
^. 1. mit Bpid fangt man 9Jiaufe. 2. 2)er ^na6e fiel, aU
er (Sc^littfc^u^ lief, unb ftie^ fic^ ben ^o^f auf§ @ig. 3. ©in
fc^Iafenber 3ucf)§ fdngt fein §u^n. 4. ^m §erb[t bidft ber SSinb
!alt, unb ^feift burdS> ^^" 3BaIb. 5. ©ffen, trinfen unb f($lafen^
^^eijt (ift) bag leben ! 6. ^m 2iSinter fc^Iaft man gett)0^nlic^ langen
aU im ©ommer. 7. Man Idfet je^t bie genfter offen, benn ba§
SSetter ift tuarm geh)orben. 8. ^c^ laufe nidj^t gem (Sd^littfc^u^,
aber meine @ef^ielen finb groge greunbe batjon. 9. ^ic ^agb
fling gum Saben unb faufte brei ^funb X^ee, gmei $funb Sutter^
§i88]
STRONG verbs: faffeu model.
209
ge^n ^funb 3uder unb jtoei Jtafc^en 33icr. 10. ^ort ftanb ber
33aum, ben ber ^ned;t neulid; umoie^aucn Ijat. 11. (Sacjcn 6ie
tnir, h?o^in 6ie ijorgeftern gingen, al§ id; ©ie in ber ^oniggftrage
traf. 12. ^er Sc^iiler lieg feine Siic^er ju §aufe, aber er ift
gleic^ nac^ §aufe getaufen unb ^at biefelben gcbolt. 13. 3Sorige
SSoc^e er^ielt meine <Sc^n)efter einen 33rief ijon i^rer greunbin ;
faft jebe SSoc^e er^dlt fie einen. 14. 3)iefelbe fc^rieb, bafe fie ben
ganjen Sinter in S3ofton jubringen h)urbe, trenn el ifjr bafelbft
gefiele. 15. ;Der Sinb bliel b e n 2:ag fo ^eftig, ba| ©eorgg 3Sater
ifjm riet, nic^t auf§ SBaffer su gef?en. 16. ^d; bitte urn SSer*
5eif)ung, ba^ id^ (3ie fo lange aHein ge(affen ^abe. 17. 2)a§
!ran!e 0nb hJiirbe beffer gefc^lafen f)aben, n)enn bie anbern ^inber
ireniger Sarm gemad;t fatten. 18. 3Sor jtcangig ^afjren ^ing ba§
S3ilb meineS 3Sater§ an ber 2Banb iiber bem ^amin, unb e§ l^cingt
nod^i immer ba. 19. 3Benn er nic^t fo frii^ gegangen tDdre, fo
t)aiU x^ xf)n gum 50littag§effen eingelaben. 20. ©uten ^JJorgen,
grau SBea ; n)ie ge^t e§ ^^nen ? 21. @l ge^t mir gang gut ; toie
gel^t e§ ^^rer gamilie? 22. griebrid^ II. i)on ^^Jreufeen tDurbe
griebric^ ber ©roje genannt.
B, 1. My father speaks German almost as well as English.
2. Good evening, my little friend ; how do you do ? 3. I have
not seen you for a long time. 4. A cold, cutting wind blew
through the open window. 5. When I was young, I liked
to skate. 6. Do you like (to eat) beef > 7. It was a quarter
past eight when the concert began. 8. That horse kicks;
take care. 9. At what o'clock will you be at home ? I shall
not be at home before half past ten. 10. When we were
going home, we met our friends, who were coming out of
church. 11. What is the name of the long street, which runs
from King Street towards"(nad)rthe north ? 12. My friend, of
whom I thought so highly, died in his nineteenth year. 13. In
September we began to learn German, and the study of that
language pleases us very much. 14. A lost child was crying
aio
LESSON XXXIL
rSiSg
upon the street, and calling after its mother. 15. Some one
asked it what its name was. 10. The poor child answered
that Its name was William, and that it lived in Frederick-
Street 17. I wrote to my cousin a month ago, but I think
he is angry, for the letter has not yet been answered.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXI.
1. Was ist geschehen, wahrend die Knaben Schlittschuh
fiefen ? 2. Weshalb sind diese Fenster offen gelassen worden?
3. Was kaufte die Magd auf dem Markte ? 4. Weshalb ist
dcr Schuler so schnell nach Hause gelaufen ? 5. Wann haben
Sie Nachricht von Ihrem Bruder erhalten ? 6. Sprechen
Sie Deutsch ?
LESSON XXXIL
ADVERBS (continued):- FORMATION AND COMPARISON. -
TABLE OF STRONG VERBS AND GENERAL REMARKS '
ON THE SAME.
189. Formation of Adverbs.
I. From Adjectives (including most adverbs of manner):
ifl) Most adjectives i ay be used without change as
adverbs, as :
%t Iciuft fc^ncDf, He runs quickly.
(b) By adding -lirj (Engl, -ly), sometimes with Urn-
laut, as :
freilt^ of course, to be sure neuK^, lately, the other day
mm entirely \^^,x\^, hardly, scarcely
fur^hi^, recently '
Also to participles, as :
tiJt]]entiidi, knowingly
[§i89
uag]
FORMATION OF ADVERBS.
«II
(0 By adding -HngS^ as :
Blinblingl, blindly
(d) By adding -|, -en0, as :
anbers, otherwise Hnfg, to (on) the left
hmi% already ,ec^t8, to (on) the right
kfonberg, especially a6rigcn0, moreover
Also to participles, as :
eilenbg, hastily
2. From Substantives, by the use of the genitive case
(sometimes with article), to express ;
{a) Time, as :
aSenbg (or bcs Sr^enbS), in the nac^tg (or beg ^c^tg), by
evenmg ^jght (anomalous, ^/acBt
morgeng (or beg iWorgenS), in being fern )
the morning anfangg, in the beginning
(s; Manner, as:
flugg, in haste tetlg, in part
3. From Prepositions, by adding -en, sometimes with b(a)r-
prefixed, as: ^'
au6cn, > outside, out of t,orn(e), before
braugcnj doors oben, above
i""'^"' I within, in-doors ""*"^' ^^^°^
brinncn, f bruben, over there
^inten, behind
Note. -Prepositions in composition with verbs are really adverbs
e« fu^ particles Qb, eiu, empor, \\
(also
guriid).
4. By combination. For these see Part III.
212
LESSON xxxri.
[§§19
190. Comparison of Adverbs.
I. Some adverbs are compared, as:
^t y soon
oft, often
%trn, willingly
mi
e^er am e^eften
ofter am ofteften
Hefier am lith^Un {different root)
)
^ ' I well Jeffer am bcflen (
«
u
2 Adjectives are used as adverbs in the comparative, as
m the positive, without change, as :
@r rauft fr^iicflcr alg [ein 33ruber,
He runs more quickly than his brother.
3. In the superlative degree, the form with am is used fo?
the relaitve superlative (see §§ 127, 2, and 128), as:
@r lauft om frjitcfiften ijon arTen,
He runs most quickly of all.
4. "Tht absolute superlative (see § 127, 2) is usually formed
by prefixing an adverb of eminence (such as fe^r, ^oc^ft,
i*upvv[i/ etc.^, as:
©r fc^reiet au^crfl fc^on.
He writes most (i. e., very) beautifully.
^ 5. Adverbs from adjectives in -ig, -(i,J, -fam use the un-
inflected form for the superlative absolute, as :
@r I'm freunbfit^fi grufeen.
He desires to be most kindly remembered.
Also a few monosyllables, as : langft, long ago ; &5cBft,
most highly.
6. The superlative absolute may also be expressed by auf
bog (aufg) prefixed to the suoerlative adierfivp t^ ^v^r-eo
tlie ntghest possible degree, as ;
19
igaj
TABLE OF STRONG VERBS.
213
®r Bcforgt feine ©efdfiaftc auf baS (auf§) ®eh)iffenf?afte|le,
He attends to his business in the most conscientious
manner (possible).
7. A few superlative adverbs eni in -eitS, with special
meanings, as :
I()0ci^ftcn8, at most
tneiftcnS, for the most part
hjemijftciiH, at least
ndd;[tcn8, shortly
Also the ordinal adverbs, erfteng, etc., see § 183, (c).
191. Position of Adverbs.
Adverbs generally precede the word they modify (except
genug, see § 178, Note).
For further particulars as to their position in the sentence,
see § 45, Rule 5.
192. Table of Classification of Strong Verbs.
German
Model.
Abl
aut.
Class.
Div.
English
Analogy.
In FIN.
Impf.
P. Part.
2. 3. sing.
Pr.Ind.
Lesson.
2.S.IMP.
I.]
a
beifien
bite
et
I
I
XXII.
b
bleibcn
(wanting)
et
ic
tc
—
XXIII.
n.\
a
jd)iegen
shoot
ic,etc.
u
XXIV.
b
frieren
freeze
ic,etc.
—
XXV.
t
a
fmgcn
sing
I
a
U
—
XXVI.
III.)
b
c
jpinnen
spin
(wanting)
I
a
a
w
I
Ixxvii.
IV.
—
fprerf)en
speak
e, etc.
a
t.te
XXVIII.
V.
—
effcn
eat
t, etc.
a
c
t,te
XXIX.
VI.
fd)Iagcn
slay
a
u
a
Umlaut
XXX.
VIL
falieti
■fall
various
Tc
same as
Infin.
Umlaut
XXXI.
I
214
LESSON XXXII.
t§§ iga-
Remarks.— I. The Umlaut of classes VI., VII. does not
occur in the Imperative.
s. The varying vowels of the Imperf. Subj. are given in
the lists, where necessary.
3. The English Analogies printed in Italics a^e incomplete.
4. The vowel-change of class VII. is not an Ablaut
but the result of reduplication. '
5. The lists of the various classes contain only the verbs of
common occurrence ; all others will be found in App. L.
193. Distinguish between the verbs of the following
groups : ^
f eitten, beg, ask f^^t
(a) j htUn, pray (intr.) f^^^^^^
( bteten, bid, offer ^jt
( licgen, lie (be recumbent, intr.) lag
(^) j Icgen, lay (trans.) [egtc
( liigen, lie, tell a falsehood log
geBetcn
gebetct
geboten
flelegm
fielegt
gelogen
gegtc^en
Segeigt
r hitf)irx, pull (trans.), move (intr.) gog
W < m^^^, accuse ^jp^
( setgen, show ge^g^p
194. Remember the Irregularities of:
effen (P. Part gegeffen) ftejen, ftanb (or ftunb), ge=
ISiauen (Impf. ^lefi) ftanben
Qe^en, ging, gegangen giejen, 309, gejogen
Also the double forms in the Impf. of :
^eben (^ub, m fc^j^oren ([rf;tt)ur, fc^h)or)
Note. -There are a few strong P. Parts, from verbs now otherwise
weak as: gemaf,IciK from „,oI)lcn, to grind (Impf. ,nal)Uc) ; qefa(;ctl
rem faljen, to salt (Impf. fal^te); fl.fpaltcn, from fnnffnr. to i,i? ^ "^
fpaltete) J also some strong participles used only as adjectives, viz. ;
194] GENERAL REMARKS ON STRONG VERDS. 215
erijobcn (from crl)cben), exalted, sublime
bcfcl)clbcn ( " bpfcf)fibcn), modest
Ucrnjorrcn ( " oenuirreu), confused
Vocabulary.
examination, bag ©jamen
kitchen, bie ^{\x6)t
place, spot, bie ©teHc
employed, busy, befc^ciftigt
then (conj.), bcnn
hungry, ^ungrig
left, linf
right, i^,d)t
salt (adj.), gefalgen
in spite of, tro^ (+gen.)
improbable, unUJa^rfd^einlicI^
like, tuie
to wind up (a clock, etc.),
aufjiet^en
pass (an examination), bes
ftcl)en .
greet, salute, griifien
go (or be) too slow (of a
clock, etc.), nac^'fje^cn
run after, nac^'Iaufen (+ dat.)
cry, rufen
go (or be) too fast (of a
clock, etc.), t)or'c\e^en
command, ber S3efe^I
visit, visitors, bet 33efuc^
Idioms: 1. I saw your friend to-day ; he wisheg to be remembered
to you, 3cl) I)abc beutc 3f)rcit Sreunb gcfcbcii ; er iafit Sie
griiftcn.
8. How do you like Boston ? mie gcfdHt ti 3fjncn f n ®of»oti ?
EXERCISE XXXIL
A. 1. ©e^t S^re U^r tjor, ober gei)t fie nad^? 2. ©ie ge^t
gang ric^tig. 3. §aben ©ie ^f)re Uf)r aufg'^gogen? 4. ©in
!leine§ gjJdbc^en fragte, n)ie t)tel U^r e§ fei. 5. ©in §err gog
feine U^r au§ ber ^afcf^e unb ^eigte fie bem ^inbe tnit ben
SBorlen: „eage bu mir felbft, iDie i)ie( U^r e§ ift." 6. ^o finb
beine ©c^h^eftern? ^larie ift oben in ber ^ibliot^e! unb ®o|)^ie
ift unten in ber i^iic^e. 7. 2(nfang§ tDo^nten 'mix nic^t gem in
biefer ©tra^e, abcr je^t gefdllt un^3 biefclbe ganj gut. 8. ^d^
glaubc, \m luerben cinen bei^en eommer l^abcn ; iva§ meiucn
©ie? 9. ^ie meiften Seute effeu licber frifd;eg gleifc^ ds ge=
2l6
LESSON XXXII.
[IS 194-
fal^fncg. 10. ^ro§ bc« 39cfcM« be« mnxQ^ betetc 2)aniel jcbcn
a:ag breimal. 11. gjlcine !J:ante, bic in Berlin i»of>nt unb bercn
S3ruber eie !cnnen, ift fc^r franf. 12. ©riijen ©ie freunblic^ft
SN Gltern fur mic^, hjcnn Sic nac^ §au[c fommcn. 13. .^offent-
lidji toirb 5ri| [cin Gf amen gut beftcFjen, bcnn er f)ai aufg gemiffcn-
^afteftc ftubiert. 14. Gr n)irb e« fc^ttJerlic^ befte^en, ba er erft
feit 5h>ei ^a^ren in ber ©d)ule ift. 15. ^er luQt, tvC^tt
toiffentlic^ eine ]Xnwaf)xl)c'ii fagt. 16. ^d) effe gem gebratene«
SRmbfleifc^, befonbcrg tt>enn ic^ rec^t ^ungrig bin. 17. gfJec^tg
'cov. ber ©d^ule fte^t eine ilirc^e, linfg ftc^t ber maxlt 18. 2Bir
l^aben tieber abenbg 33efuc^ al^ morgeng, benn morgeng finb toir
eeh)5^nlic^ befd^aftigt. 19. 3)iefeg ^inb h)irb nac^ften^ fran!
toerben, benn eg Fjat feit brei ^agen faft gar nid^tS gegeffen. 20.
eg ftanb fru^er eine ^irc^e auf ber ©tette m h)ir je^t finb, aber
Tte ift fc^jn Idngft berfd^tounben. 21. 93on toem h)urbc bic
^ird^e gebaut, n)obon eie f))rec^en? 22. ^c^ it)ei§ eg nic^t, eg ift
mir nie gefagt Ujorben.
B. 1. Please show me the way to the post-office. 2. If
George is up-stairs, tell him that I am down-stairs. 3. 1 do not
like London ; I prefer to live in a smaller city. 4. The pen
still lies on the book uponj\^hich I laid it. 5. Please tell me
who lives overjhejvay. gT This boy has been stung by a
bee. 7. Of all animals the horse runs quickest. 8. Give
me what you have in your (the) left hand. 9. Lessing died
on the fifteenth of February 1781. 10. The soldiers ran
blindly into the battle and fought like lions. 11. The train
for (nac^) Montreal leaves (ab'fa^ren) at twelve o'clock at
night, and arrives in Montreal at ten o'clock in the morning.
12. A little beggar ran after a gentleman, and asked him for
some money. 13. ' My father is dead,' cried he, *my mother
is dead, and all her children are dead!' 14. *Who are you
then?' asked the gentleman. 15. What answer was given to
V,-.- --^fy^^z vjj viiv. ^tiincmaii, wiicii iiu was asKeci *ot money?
<95]
IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS.
217
ORAL EXERCISE XXXII.
1. Was wurden Sie sagen, wenn ich Sie fragte, wie viel
Uhr es sei ? 2. Gefallt Ihnen die Strasze, worin Sie jetzt
wohnen ? 3. Hat Fritz sein Examen gut bestanden ? 4. Wo
ist meine Feder? 5. Was fur Sprachen haben Sie studiert?
6. Glauben Sie, dasz der Herr dem Bettler etwas ge-
geben hat ?
LEoSON XXXIII.
ADVERBS (ccntlnued): IDIOMS. - IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS.
196. Idiomatic Uses of Certain Adverbs.
1. nnn, well.
9tm, eg ift mir einerlei.
Well (why), it is all the same to me.
Note. - 9luil is here really an interjection, and hence does not throw
'tie subject after the verb.
2. then, just, exactly.
®a3 ift rten berfelbe mam,
That is the very (exactly the) same man.
SBir fmb (fo)fbcn angefommen. We have just arrived.
5Dag !ann man thtn nic^t fagen. One cannot exactly say
that.
3. gctti, licbct, am liehfien*
3c^ cjfe gctn ^^tfc^, I am fond of (eating) fish.
^^ ejfe lithtt gifc^ M gleifc^, I prefer (eating) fish to
meat.
@r h)urbe c§ ger« t^un. He would be glad to do it.
would do it with pleasure.
^KlpiAyo (^'txrnfka {itM»Jt^»^ /«:^ ^ IT'.CM
'Xr^' W\*/ V
i/v ^jfi. iUfiH
Which language do you
15
prefer (speaking)
?
2l8
LESSON XXXIII.
(§195
4. ctft, first, only, not before, etc. a iW tUl
3)lan mufj crft benfen, bann [prcd^en.
One must think first and then speak.
aWein ^kuber mirb crfl movgcn fommen.
My brother will not come before to-morrow.
9Bir l}anm crft jtoei ^JJctten marfrf)iert,
We had only marched two miles.
9}ktn 33ruber i[t crft gtoei ^af^re alt.
My brother is only (not more than) two years old.
5. sncvft, first of all ; for the first time.
2)icfe^ ©d)iff ift gucrft (Dor alien anbern) im .s^afm arxQt-^
!ommen. This ship arrived in the harbour first
(i. e., before any other).
Sc^ iDcrbe jucrft (or crft^ sum 6d)neiber, bann pm ^u^^
^anbler geben, I shall go first (of all) to the tailor's,
then to the bookseller's.
^c^ f;abc i^n geftern jucrft (^um erften Wial) gefe^en. I
saw him for the first time yesterday.
Note — ^UCrfi refers to time only, as above; cvfi;n0 = ' firstly, in ths
first place,' refers to order only, as in enumerations, thus :
3d) toiuitc iud)t fomnien, crftcnH, roeil e« rcgnetc, jhJCttcttS, moil
id) hanf imir, I could not come, first (in the first place) be-
cause it rained, secondly, because I was ill.
6. fcfjott, already, as early as, etc.
©inb (3te f{Jon ba ? Are you there already ?
Sft ^^r 33ruber fr^on in granfrcicfi gcmcfen ?
Has your brother ever been in France >
'^d) Un frfjon brei ^age in ber etabt,
I have been in the city for the last three days.
2)as Sd>iff i[t fi^uu ijcftcrn angcioiumcn.
The ship arrived (as early as) yesterday.
» '95]
IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS.
219
@r ft)trb ftjott fommen, He will be sure to come (he
will come, no doubt). ^^
Note. - (gffjou is often, as in the fourth of th^ oi
left untranslated in English. ^' ^^'°''' sentences, to be
V^; Ut rime:
©inb eie no^ ^ter ? Are you still here >
3c^ Bin ncij nie in 3)eutfc^lanb getDefen
I have never yet been in Germany. '
@r bar nor^ bor cincr ©tunbc ^ier.
He was here only an hour ago/
IWord^eute Even to-day (while it is yet to-dav not
later than to-day). ^ ^' "°*
Note. - Observe that ^^.^, precedes the negatives nie, nidjt, etc.
{b) Of Number:
IRor^ eine ^affe 3:^ee, Another cup of tea.
5lO(J 5tt)ei, Two more.
5lar5 (ein)mar [0 t)iel. As much again.
. ^ 8. bod^, yet, alter all.
{a) Adversative:
''ort*:;,;™"'^"'«^*'"---^'>°Pe (emphasis
W With Imperatives:
ftommen @ie b«i$ ^ctdn. Pray come in (»r^.^„/).
220
LESSON XXXIII.
(§§ 195^
(c) In answer to a ncgatii'e question or statement:
Have you not seen him? Yes, I have.
^d; I;ak c§ nirjt gct^an. ©ie \:iCkUx\ e« boi| get^an.
I did not do it. Yes, you did.
(For bod; and nod) as Conjunctions, see Less. XL.)
Note. — 2)ocl^ gives an affirmative answer, where a negative one is
expected.
9. auc^, also, even, etc#
$lu(^ fein SSater toar gegen \\)n, Even his father was
against him.
^D^lcin 33rubcr \mx ntdjt miibe, unb ic^ ttjar au(^ nicftt mube.
My brother was not tired, and I was not tired either.
§aben ®ic au^ 6ebad)t', \m^ ©ie fagen. Are you sure
you have considered, what you say ? (emphasis on
bebadjt).
10. ttiofti, indeed, etc.
@r Icugnet c§ ttio^l, abcr e§ ift bodf) iwa^r. He denies it
indeed (to be sure) but yet it is true.
©ie finb ttJO^t ein grember ? I suppose (presume) you
are a stranger (no doubt you are, etc.).
Note. — @ut, not luol)i, is the adv. of the adj. gut, good, when modi-
tying a transitive verb.
11. \a, yes, to be sure, etc.
^^un ©ie e§ jo', Be sure to do it, do it by all means
(emphasis on ja).
©r ift jtt mcin ^atcr'. He is my father, you know (em-
phasis on ^ater).
12. nnx*
(With the Imperative.)
^ommen ©te nur herein. Just come in (reassuringly).
196]
}§ 195'
190.
IRREGULAR STR >NG VERBS.
Irregular Strong Verbs.
22 1
I. ^t^Utt, to do, Impf. iljat, P. Part. getl;an.
Xf^ai, like Engl. * did/ is a relic of the old Impf. by re
duplication, the old form being it-ia, i. e., the stem to- with
reduplicating syll. it- prefixed, then ie-k, tct, ti)at Xfjun
rejects c of the termination throughout, except in i. Sing.
Pres. Ind., and in the Pres. Subj.
II. Imperfect-Present Verbs,
Inpin.
hJtffen, know
biirfen, dare
fonnen, can
miigen, may
miiffen, must
follen, shall
Pres. Ind. Prks.
I. Sing. i.Plur. Sukj.
Imperfect
Ind. Subj.
P. Part.
totii h)ijfen tt)iffe njufjfc tDii^te gehjufet
borf biirfen biirfe burftc biirftc geburft
fonn fiinnen fiinne fonnte fonntc gefonnt
mttg tnogcn tnoge mor^tc mod;te gemodjjt
mufe miiffen miiffe mujtc mii^te gemufet
fott foaen foac foHtc foate gefottt
III. SSoC^cn, will, Pres. Ind. i. Sing. h)t(t, i. Plur. hjollen,
Pres. Subj. <j)oHe, Impf. Ind. mUtt, Subj. "moUtt, P. Part.
geh)0llt.
Remarks. — i. Observe the following peculiarities in the
verbs ui>4er II. and III. :
^) All have the same vowel (mostly with Umlaut) in
the Inf. and the jP/ur. of the Pres. Ind. ; but (except
fotten) a different vowel in the Sing, of the same
tense.
{p) The Impf, Ind, and P, Part, have the weak endings
—it, -i, but the vowel is without Umlaut; U)iffen
changes i to u; mogen changes g into i^.
{c) The Impf, Subj, has Umlaut, except in foUen and
tooUen.
222
LESSON XXXIII,
(//) The Sing, of the Pres. Ind. of these Verbs
toiffen
follows, the Plural being regular :
bu hjci^t
l§ igfl
IS as
mSgen
er tvtii
\^ mag
bu mogfl
er ntog
biirfen
r ic^ barf
-] bu barfft
( er barf
fonnen
ic^ fttnn
bu fttnnft
er fann
follen
bu foHft
er foK
( id) mug
miiffen -j bu mult
( er mu6
r ic^ lt)ill
tooHen-j bu hjillft
( er it)iff
Observe here the different vowel of the Inf. and Indie, (except
foH); also the want of \h^ person-ending in the i. and 3. Sing,
(ic^, er tt)ei§, barf, fami, etc., not \ot\^-i, barf-t, !ann-t ; com-
pare Engl, can, may, etc., not can-s, may-s, etc.).
2. The forms of the Present in the verbs under II. were
originally Strong Imperfects (hence their want of person-end-
ings), which came to be used with a Present meaning ; the
new (weak) Imperfects were formed from these, with vowel-
change.
3. The Present of h)oIIen was originally a Pres. Subj., used
as Indie, and therefore also without full person-endings.
4. The Imperative is wanting in all under II., except
tDiffen, Imper. iDiffe.
Notes.— i. Stiffen (= Fr. savoir) is used of knowledge, and of things
only ; fcnueil (= Fr. cmmaitre) of acquaintance, of persons and things, thus:
{^K. Ajwh'^) SBiffcn @ie ben aScg? Do you know the road.? (i. e., do you
know which is the right road ?)
Jh a^vuOia'/lftennctt @ie ben 5Bcg? Are you acquainted (familiar) with the
road ?
Hcnncn ®ic meiuen 93ruber? Do you know my brother.?
aSiffcn 6ie, mas er gefagt ^atV Do you know what he said?
§1961
IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS.
223
2. All these verbs, except miffcn, govern another Verb in the Infin.
without 311 (see Less. XLV), as:
3(^ barf gel^cn, I am permitted to ga
Vocabulary.
to put on (a hat), auffe^cn
expression, ber Slu^'brucf *
French (language), granjo'fifc^
building, bag ©ebaube
commandment, bag ©ebot'
watch-key, ber U^rfdfiruffel
dwelling-house, bag SSo^ns
^aug
clear(ly), distinct(ly), bcutlic^
although, obgleic^'
Idioms : 1. WUl you be so kind as to lend me your pen ? aBoflen Sfc
fo gut fcin unb inir Sljre fjefccr Iciljcn? (Ut., will you be so
kind and, etc.)
«. I am sorry (I regret), (Si ttfut miv Ulb (leib to be treated
as a separable particle).
8. What is that in German ? fflBfc Ijclftt fca* ouf il>cutfd) ?
4. I do not need to go to school to-day, 3d) bvaudye heutt nidft
6. He knows French, C?r fann giraM^Bjifd).
EXERCISE XXXIII.
A. 1. ^c^ fann bic^ nid;t t)erfte^en; ^pxid) ho6) beutltc^er.
2. ilommen ©ie nur herein, Wmn Bk Wolkn. 3. ^ft eg ^l)nen
fc^on gelungen, granjofifc^ §u lerneii? 4. ^c^ h)erbe noc^ kute
bie[e Seftion lernen miiffen, imb eg i[t fc^on brei ^^ierteRuf ge^nfl
5. 9Zoc^ t)Dr Dierse^n ^Tagen liefen Wix ©c^littfc^uf), unb ^eute ift
bag @ig gefc^molsen. 6, ^ag erfte ©ebot f^eifet (is) : „®u foEft
feine anbern ©otter neben mir ^aben." 7. @g tf)ut mir leib, ba^
tt)ir erft morgen abreifen ; ic^ h)are lieber fjeute abgereift. 8.
%i)ut eg 3f;nen md;t auc^ leib, bajj (Sic big tnorgen bleiben miiffen?
9. 2Bie ^ei^t ber englifc^e 2lugbrucf ' Do you know my friend ? '
auf ©eutfc^ ? „^ennen eie meinen greunb ?" 10. gJietn Dnfel unb
meine 2:ante finb fc^on geftern ange!omnien, aber meine SSettern unb
goufinen lt)erben erft iibermorgen fommen fonnen. 11. SSeiJt
bu. bafe beine ?!Jiutter anacfommen ift? 19 Occh vr^trr s;<>fpt» ^"i
wx^t auffe^en, itjeil er mir gu llein ift. 13. ^^nU barf i^i Idnger
224
LESSON XXXIII.
[§§190-
^ier bleiben ; tc^ brauc^e nic^t Dor ^e^n U^r ^u §aufe ^u fcin.
14. moUcn Bk fic^ nic^t [e^en? 15. ^c^ hjerbe me^r ©elb
^ahm miiffen ; ic^ ^a6e nic^t genug jur 9leife. 16. ^e me^r man
f)at, befto mel;r toia man. 17. 35ie[e§ unartige ^inb h)eig nic^t,
toag e« h)ia. 18. ^c^ l^abe eben ge^ort, bag meine SJiutter fran!
ift, abert(^ toerbe fie nic^t bor morgen Bcfud^cn fonnen. 19. SBoITcn
@te gefamgft meinen S3nef jur ^oft bringen? 20. 2BiIb:Im
iDirb ben ganjen ^ag ju ^aufe bleiben miiffen, tt) ^d^ erfaitel
f)at 21. gjjein Sruber fjjric^t gut ^eutfd^, o% j) er erft m
in feinem ftebje^nten galore ba§ ©tubium biefer ©^rad^c ange.
fangen fjat 22. SSoUen ©ie fo Qut fei.i unb mir fogen (mir ^u
fagen), toic biel U\)v eg ift ?
^. 1. A stranger wants to speak Jo (fjjred^en + ace.) you.
2. That building was first a bank, then a shop, but it is now
a dwelling-house. 3. How do you know that ? I know it be-
cause I have heard it from my father. 4. What shall I do?
I have lost all my money. 5. Do you know who has torn
this book ? 6. No, I do not know who has torn it. 7. Can
you write the name of that stranger? 8. Do you know
German? No, but I know French. 9. Do you know the
difference between the words * fennen * and *n)iffen*? 10. I
had already put on my hat, and was just on the point of going
out, when the rain began. 11. These two ships set sail (ah*
fa^ren) at the same time, but the smaller arrived first. 12. I
could not wind up my watch yesterday evening; I had no
watch-key about me. 13. I cannot remain now any longer;
I must be at home at ten o'clock. 14. I know this street, but
I do not know the name of it (say : how it is called). 16. A
brave man is esteemed by everybody. 16. Cf what is bread
made ?
ORAL EXERCISE XXXIII.
1. Wie heiszt *I am sorry' auf Deutsch? 2. Weshalb
bleiben Sie heute nicht langer? 3. Konnen Sie Deutsch?
198]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
225
4. SoUte man gegen jedermann freundlich sein ? 5. Wie ge-
fallt Ihnen Paris ? (J. Wie viel Uhr ist es, wenn der Stunden-
zeiger zwischen vier und funf und der Minutenzeiger auf zehn
steht?
LESSON XXXIV.
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
197. The Verbs biirfcit. fiinttcn, inogcn, inuffcn, foffeit,
ttioaen (see last Lesson), with the Verb (ajfen (Class VII,
Less. XXXI) are called Modal Auxiliaries, or Auxiliary
Verbs of Mood, since they are used to form combinations
equivalent to various Moods. Thus: Joffct m^ geljen, Met
us go,' is really equivalent to an Imperative Mood i. PI. of
ge^en ; id^ fattn ge^en, * I can go,' to a Potential Mood, etc.
198. These Modal Auxiliaries differ from the English
Auxiliaries can, may, must, shall, 7vill, in having an Infinitive
and a Past Participle, and in the consequent ability to form
a complete set of compound tenses, which are wanting in
the English Verbs, and must therefore be supplied in that
language by equivalent phrases, as shown in the following
partial paradigms (see also Less. XXXV).
burfen, to be per- 1 fiinncn, to be able miigeit, to like, be
mitted | (can) allowed (may)
Present Indicative.
i(J barf, I am pej
mitted, may
id^ fann, I can, am
able
may
I like,
td^ biirfe, I (may)
be permitted,
Present Subjunctive.
ic^ !onne, I (may)
be able
id^ tndge, I (may)
like
226
LESSON XXXIV.
Imperfect Indicative.
t§i98
id^ burftc, I was per-
mitted
id; fonntc, I could,
was able
id^ mod^tc, I liked,
might
Imperfect Subjunctive.
x6) bttrfte, I might
be permitted
i(S} fonntc, I could,
might be able
idE> moc^te, I mighl
like
td^ fjdbt geburft,
I have been per-
mitted
Perfect Indicative.
id^ ^abe gefonnt,
I have been able
id^ l^aBe (^emod^t,
I have liked
id) \)aU geburft,
I (may) have been
permitted
Perfect Subjunctive.
id; .(^aoe gefonnt,
I (may) have been
able
ic^ ^abe gemod^t,
I (may) have liked
Pluperfect Indicative.
id^ f)atk geburft,
I had been per-
mitted
id) ^atU fjefonnt,
I had been able
id; ^atk c\^mo6)t,
I had liked
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
td^ l^atte geburft,
I might have been
permitted
id; fjiitte gefonnt,
I might have been
able
ic^ \:}aiU gemod^t,
I might have liked
Future Indicative and Subjunctive.
id^ tDerbe biirfen,
I shall be permitted
id^ h:)evbc fonnen,
I shall be able
id; iucrbe mogen,
I shall like
[§I98
§198]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
227
id) h)erbe geburft l^a*
ben, I shall have
been permitted
Future Perfect.
id; tuerbc gefonut 1 tcf; tocrbe gemoc^t
l;abcn, I shall i^ahen, I shall
have been able have liked
x^ h)«rbe burfcn, I
should be per-
mitted
Simple Conditional.
ic^ iDiirbe fcvmen, I ic^ n)urbe mSgen, I
should be able
should like
Compound Conditional.
\^ hjurbe geburft ^a»
ben, I should have
been permitted
ic^ hJiirbe gefonnt
^ah^n, I should
have been able
tc^ h)urbe gemod^t
^aben, I should
have liked
muff Clt to be com- f offcn, to be obliged mUttl, to be willing
pelled(must) (shall) (^in)
Present Indicative.
id^ mu^, I am com-
pelled, must
id) foa, bu foaft,
I am (obliged) to,
thou Shalt
ic^ WiU, I will, in-
tend to, am about
to
Present SubjuNCTivE.
t«muffe,I(may)be ic^ », I (may) be tc^ t^oae, I (mav)
compelled obliged be willing
Imperfect Indicative.
ic^ ntu^te, I was
compelled
id; foKte, I was
(obliged) to,
ought
ic^ tt)oUU, I was '
willing
228
LESSON XXXIV.
[§§ 198.
Imperfect Subjunctive.
16} mix^U, I might
be compelled
I have been com-
pelled
I (may) have been
compelled
id; foUtc, I might
be obliged
Perfect Indicative.
id) l)aU gefollt,
I have been
obliged
Perfect Subjunctive.
id^ f)aU gefofft,
I (may) have been
obliged
id) tDoKte, I might
be willing, would
x^ f)aU QiWoUt,
I have been wil
ling
id^ l^abe gchJoITt,
I (may) have been
willing
Pluperfect Indicative.
id; l^atte gefoHt,
I had been obliged
t(^ ^attc gemugt,
I had been com
pelled
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
id; f)atti oelroHt,
I haa been willing
id) \)atU gcmu^t,
I might have been
compelled
id) i)atU gefoUt,
I might have been
obliged, ought
to have
I might have been
willing
Future Indicative and Subjunctive.
id) hjerbe miiffen,
I shall be com-
pelled
id) h)erbe fjcmujt
i)ahin, I shall
have been com-
peiled
id^ h)erbe foffen,
I shall be obliged
Future Perfect.
id^ merbe gefoUt f)as
ben, I shall have
been obliged
ic^ hjerbe tooUen,
1 ohall be willing
id^ hjerbe gettjolll
fjaben, I shall
have been wil
ling
199]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES
229
Simple Conditional.
id^ U)iirbe miiffcn,
I should be con>
pelled
ic^ tDiirbe foUtn,
I should be
obliged
i<^ rottrbc h)offcn,
I should be wil-
ling
Compound Conditional.
(d^ tDiirbc gcmujt
i)ahtn, I should
have been com-
pelled
id) tDiirbe gefoUt ^a*
ben, I should have
been obliged
id^ hjiirbc gehjottt
i)dbin, I should
have been wil-
ling
199. Further Peculiarities of Modal Auxiliaries.
1. They govern an Infinitive without 511, as :
@r mug ge^cn, He must ^o.
2. In the compound tenses, when a governed Infin. occurs,
the weak P. Part, is replaced by the Infinitive (really the old
strong P. Part, without prefix ge-, which coincides in form
with the Infin.), as :
^d^ ^abe gcmu^t I have been obliged ; — but
^6) i)aU c§ i^nn tniiffcn, I have been obliged to do it.
3. In subordinate sentences, their auxiliary of tense does
not come last, but precedes both the governed infinitive and
the participle of the Modal Auxiliary, as :
@r fagte, bag er e§ ^aftc t^un miiffen. He said, that he
had been obliged to do it.
Note. — The foregoing peculiarities are all shared by the verbs ^et§en,
^clfen, pren, laffen, mac^en, fe^en ; for other verbs governing an Infin.
without ju, see Less. XLV.
4. The shorter (and older) forms of the Conditional (viz. :
Impf. and Plupf. Subj., see § 11 1) are preferred to the longer
ones (with toiirbe), thus :
230
LESSON XXXIVt
Simple Conditional,
i^ biirftc — I should be permitted
ic^ fiiiintc — I
id^ itior^tc = I
ic^ mil^tc = I
[1 199
t(
<i
it
id) fome
id) mUit
I
I
<{
«
" able
like
be compelled
" obliged
willing
ti
i{i) ^citte '
Compound Conditional.
' geburft, bar fen
gefonnt, fbnnen
gemod;t, mogen
gemugt, muffen
gcfofft, foKcn
. geiuofft, tDotten
I should have
'been permitted
" able
liked
been compelled
obliged
u
" willing
Remarks. — I. The Engl, auxiliaries also use by prefer-
ence shorter forms of the Comp. Condit., but differently
constructed thus:
fiinitcn
id^^attce^tjun
mo()cn
miiffcn
fottcn
nJoHcn
I <
could
might
must
should
would
have done it
Observe that the Engl. Verbs have the Mo^a/ Auxiliary
C could," might,' etc.) in the Simple Tense (Impf.), and the
governed verb (Miave done') in the Cojnpound Tense (Perf.
Inf^: whereas the Germ. Verbs have the Modal Auxiliary
i^'^ii^ . . . f5nnen, etc.) in the Compound Tense (Plupf. Subj.)
and \hQ governed verb {i^xxx^ in the ^Sm//^ Tense (Pres. InC).'
2. Distinguish carefully between 'could,' Indie. {=^vj2is
able, fanntc") and 'rnnld' Cnij,f;f;ovnl ( • u i-- »'
fonnte) ; and so with the other verbs, thus :
§'99]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
331
®r !onntc e« nic^t t^un « He could not (was not able
to) do it {Indie),
%x fiinntc eS t^un, h)enn er tuoffte — He could (would
be able to) do it, if he were willing {Condit.),
Vocabulary.
toremain up,sit up, auf'bleiOen fellow creature, neighbour,
go out, au^'ge^jen
thank, tanfeu (+ dat.)
bowto, greet, (jrujen (trans.)
depend, r-ly (upon), fic^ Uer.
laffcn (auf + ace.)
moment, bcr Slu'oenblicf
railway, bie @i'fcn6a^n
ber ^Jidc^fte
disaster, baS Un'glucf
untruth, falsehood, bie Un'«
iua(;r^cit
over again, noc^ (ein)mar
whether, if, lO
else, otherwise, fonft
Idioms : 1. WUlyou have a cup of tea? No, thank you, aBontii Sie
tine Saffe SJjee ? 3d) fcanfc Obnen).
8. In fine weather, ©cl fd)oncm SBcttcr.
8. I have heard (It) said, etc., 3d) l)abe ioQen h&rcn. u. f. m.
EXERCISE XXXIV.
A, 1. fDu^tbeineSlufgd' [e^r \d}kd)t gemac^t; bu h)irft
ftc gehjig noc^ (ein)mar matt^en mujfen. 2. ^arf ic^ einen STugen*
Wtcf3^renS5Ieiftift6rauc^en? ^c^ ^ak ben meincu berloren. 3.
Seir milffen glctc^ gur edjjule ge^en, fonft fommen toir gu f^cit.
4. ?maa fcate feinen ^cic^ften lieben, luie fid) fel&ft. 5. 33ongc
aSod^e ^atte mein Skater fein .§au§ toerfaufen fonnen, aber er ^at
c8 nid^it getooHt. 6. ^e^t modi>te er e§ gem berfaufen, aber nie*
tnanb iviCf eg. 7. 3)eine SSettern laffen bic^ freunblic^ft grufeen.
8. Stiffen eie, h)te ber iperr ^eijt, ber mic^ foeben gegrii^t l)at?
9. 2)u foKft 5u beinem SSater ge^en ; er tviU bic^ f|)redien. 10.
^cr^nabetnag fagen, tt)a§ er WiU] id) h)ei^, bafe er cine Un=
h)af>r^eit gefagt fjat. 11. mod)kn ©ie md;t bet biefem fc^onen
SSetter f^agieren fa^ren? 12. §aft bu ben 3ug bon 33uffalo an.
!ommen fei;en? 13. ^a tootjl, ic^ \)aht x\)n anfommen feljen, aber
c8 tear niemanb barauf, ben id) iamU, 14. @r l^at gebnrft, aber
332
LESSON XXXIV.
t§§i9^
tt f)at nM gehJoHt. 15. 3* \)aU in ber ©tabt fagcn l^Sren, bag
ein grofecg Ungliidt auf ber (Sifenba^n gefd^e^en ift. 16. @r foil
toon biefem SBaum gef^ruugen fein, aber id^ fann eg faum glauben.
17. Sd^ barf nidfft fo f^)at aufbleiben aU mein alterer S3ruber ; iri^
mufe jeben Slbenb urn ge^n U^r ju Sette ge^en. 18. ^d) toiH
tl^un, hjag td^ !ann ; barauf !5nnen ®ie fid^ toerlaffen. 19. SSon
toem ttourbe bag S3ud^ gefdS>rieben, ba§ ©ie foeben lafen? 20. @g
ii)\xt xmv leib, bag <Ste fo lange auf mtd^ ^aben ioarten miiffen ;
id^ fonnte meine ^anbfc^u^e nid^t finben.
B. 1. By whom was this picture painted? 2. I should
like to know what time it is. 3. May you go out, if you
want^to? No, we are obliged to stay at home the whole day.
4. I do not like (I like no) tea ; I prefer (the) coffee. 5. Could
you help me with my lesson ? 6. I should certainly help you
with it, if I could. 7. He may say, what he will; it is
all the same to me. 8. My father could have sold his house
last year, but now it is impossible, for nobody wants to buy it.
9. Charles has beaten his dog with a stick ; he should not
have done that. 10. May I offer you a piece of meat ? No,
thank you. 11. Have (let) the messenger wait, till I write
an answer. 12. I should like to read this French book, but
I do not know any French. 13. I am sorry that I have not
been able to come sooner. 14. He will be obliged to study
another year, if he does not pass his examination. 15. Sophia
should not have gone for a walk, since the weather is so
cold. 16. The horse I wanted to buy was already sold.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXIV.
1. Wie heiszt das erste Gebot? 2. Wissen Sie, ob wii
morgen zur Schule gehen miissen ? 3. Darf ich Ihnen eins
Tasse Thee anbieten ? 4. Weshalb haben Sie mir mit meiner
uij^auc liiv-iiL iiciicii vvuiicii f o. vv ic lange werden wir aui
Fritz warten miissen? 6. Sollte man seinen Nachsten lie .en?
199-
2oo]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
233
LESSON XXXV.
MODAL AUXILIARIES (continued) :-IDIOMS.
200. The following are the most important of the various
meanings of the Modal Auxiliaries :
I $)urf en denotes permission, as :
Darf {^ fragen ? May I ask.
@ie bilrfcn Jc^t na^ ^aufe gc:^ctt, You may go home
now.
Sr ^at n{rf>t« fagcn bilrfeit. He has not been permitted
(allowed) to say anything.
2. ^onnctt denotes:
(a) ability {ol persons)^ as :
er fonntc fc^on fct^veibcn, He could (was able to,
knew how to) write beautifully.
3d^ ^ottc nic^t fommctt fiinneit, I could not have (would
not have been able to) come.
{b) possibility (of events), as :
(S^ fttitn fein, It may be (so), it is possible.
3. SRogett denotes :
{a) preference, liking {p{ persons), as :
3^ mag tlcfe^ ©ebit^t nic^t, I do not like (care for)
this poem.
@r tttOJl^te ttt(^t arbcitctt, He did not like to work.
3(^^ ^atte %)xtxi 23vut)er [e^cn mogctt, I should have
liked to see your brother.
Note.— This is the usual meaning in \\iQ first person ; also m the
Impf. (Indie, and Condit.} throughout.
ip) concession, possibility <in 2. and 3. person only),
as :
16
234
LESSON XXXV.
[§200
@r ma^ {je^en, He may go (as far as I am concerned),
or : Let him go.
^ag tnog fein, That may be (for all I know).
Note. — The Engl. ' may ' denoting permission must be rendered by
bfifff n in the first person, as :
May I accompany you? $orf i(^ ®ie bcgleitcn?
(c) Observe this idiom :
^dj) twerbe morgen au^gcfjen, mttj eg rec^nen ober nid^t, I
shall go out to-morrow, whether it rains or not.
4. 99{uf|cn denotes necessity, as :
2ltte 5!}ienfd)en muffen fterben. All men must die.
@g mu§ geftern gefd)el>en fein, It must have happened
yesterday. ,
2Btr tverben au^.q^'^^" muffen, We shall be compelled
(or * obliged,' or ' shall have ') to go.
Note. — '' To be obliged, compelled ' after a negative is rendered by
braucf)cu, as :
T am not obliged to go, 3d) fitau^e nid)t ju ge^en.
5. SoUcn denotes duty or obligation, imposed on the
sfubject dy the will of another.
(a) Imposed by the speaker, as :
^u faflft nic^it fte^len, Thou shalt not steal.
(b) Imposed by some person other than, but recognised
by, the speaker, as:
^ciS> fan ge^en, I am to go.
@r \:}aiit gel^en foflcn. He ought to h ve gone.
2Ba§ fott gefdfiel^en ? What is to be done ?
2Ba§ foilfc trf) i{jm ? What was I to do ?
if) It also denotes a statement on the part of another
as to the subject, as :
@r foU fefjr reic^ fcui, He is said to be very rich.
§200]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
235
6. SBoIlen denotes
(a) the exertion of the will on the part of the subject, as :
(gr ttiia nic^t ge^orc^en. He will not (refuses to) obey.
{d) intention or impending action, as :
(Sr mia morgen abretfen, He intends (means) to depart.
!Da§ @i§ toiU 6red;en, The ice is about to break
(threatens to break).
(Sr mofltc e6en gefjen (= mx eben im SBegriff ^u ge^en),
He was just on the point of going.
(c) a statement or claim on the part of the subject, as :
@r ttitff in 3nbien getoefen [ein, He asserts that he has
been (pretends to have been) in India.
7. fiaffen is used
(a) as auxiliary of the Imperative Mood, as :
Coffcn ©ie un§ ^icr bleiben. Let us remain here.
(^) to express permission, etc., as :
man \)at ben ^ieb entf^ringen laffcn, The thief has been
allowed to escape.
(c) to express the agency of another, as :
^er Dffi^ier Itcg ben ©olbaten Bcfh-ttfcn, The officer
ordered the soldier to be punished.
3rfc^en^iitte(-g SSater Hcg ben Saum nm^amn, Cinderella's
father had the tree cut down.
Note. — The infin. in the former of these examples is rendered by
the passwe infinitive in English, the object of the verb laffen being under-
stood. Supply the ellipsis as follows:
3)er Offi^ier ()at jcmonti (obj. of laffen), ben ©olbatcn (obj. of
beftrnfcn), bcftrnfen lofTctl, The officer has ordered somebodv ta
punish the soldier.
{d') reflexively, as:
I-
236
LESSON XXXV.
[§§20O-
©r Itcg PdJ leic^t betriigen. He suffered himself to be
deceived easily.
3c^ Ucg eg mir gefaaen, I submitted to it.
(SS liigt fi($ ntd^t leugnen. It cannot be denied.
201. How to render shall and will.
1. The Engl. ^ shall ' and ' will ' must both be rendered by
torrben when they express mere futurity, as :
I shall be drowned and nobody will save me,
%^ tticrbc ertrinfen unb niemanb toirb mtc^ rctten.
2. But if they express more than mere futurity (e. g.,
obligation or tie termination), they must be rendered by foKcn
and lnoffrn respectively, as :
I will be drowned and nobody shall save me,
^c^ miff ertrinfen unb niemanb fofl mid^ retten.
202. Observe the following parallel idioms :
(5r IJot eg nic^t i\^m fiinncn, He has not been able
to do it.
@r !nnn eg nid^t gct^an IJaficn, He cannot (possibly)
have done it.
©r ^ot eg nic^t i\^m m%m, He did not like to
do it.
@r tttttg eg gctjan jofien. He may (possibly) have
done it.
@r (at eg t^uil mitffctt. He has been obliged to
do it.
©r mu^ eg gct^on (aBcit, He must have done it.
r @r §at eg tjun fottcn. He should (ought to) havci
J done it.
(Sr foff
W^
(^)
w
{//)
I
done it.
eg gctjttit Jakn, He is said to have
202]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
237
W
©r ^at e« f^un tooWcn, He intended to have
done it.
@r mitt e§ get^an ^oBen, He pretends (claims)
j^ to have done it.
Vocabulary.
to put on, draw on (coat, etc.) Englishman, ber ©nglanber
anjie^en
expect, erh)arten
chat, talk, ^jlaubem
reap, fd^netben
disturb, interrupt, ftoren
try, toerfuc^en
last, continue, toal^ren
American, ber 2lmeri!aner
physician, doctor, ber Slrjt *
beggar-woman, bie S3ettlerin
steam-engine, bie S)am^fs
tnafd)tne
naught, cipher ; zero, bie '^uH
shoemaker, ber ©c^u^mac^er
proverb, ba^ (B]>x\6)Woxt
studying, ba§ ©tubieren
lesson, bie 6tunbe
bunch of grapes, bie ^rau6e
thermometer, ber or ba^ %'i)ZXs
monie'ter
overcoat, ber ttberjiet^er
as far as, big nacij>
dangerous(ly), gefal(>rli^
sour, fauer
Idioms: 1. A doctor has been sent for, Wtan Ifat einen ^rjt f)oIen
laffen.
». Every other day (every alternate day), (Sinen Sag um
ben anbern.
3. Every week, Slllc ad)t Sage.
4. I should think so! !Sad fodte i^ mefnen!
5. In the right way, 2Iuf tie vidytiQC 9Bcffc (ace).
EXERCISE XXXV.
A. 1. ^er ^elegra^^ foil t)on einem 2lmeri!aner erfunben tt)orben
•jein. 2. „2Ber itn ©ommer nid^t mag frf)neiben, mu^ im 2Binter
§unger leiben/' f)ei|t ein beutfd^eg ©^rid^ttjort. 3. 3SDlle nur,
\va^ bu fannft, fo \mx\t bu fonuen, \va^ bu toiUft. 4. 3^ad;fte 2Sorf;e
foUen n)ir einen geiertag l^aben, tt)enn bi§ ©onnabenb fleifeig [tubiert
U)irb. 5. SStaxk hjollte ibre £e!tion in einer balben Stunbe lernen,
aber fie i:)at e^ nic^t gefonnt. 6. SBtr h)iirben alle gliidfUrfier leben,
\t)ixm h)ir immer ti)aUn, tva^ hjir ti^un fottten. 7. ^d^ toerbe bie
238
LESSON XXXV.
[§§ ao2-
Seftion uic Icincu !bimcn. 8. ^u Juirft fie Icrncn tonncn, tucuu
bu c^ mil* auf bic viditii^c '^Bcifc l^crfud^ft. !>. 9Jian bavf nid;t in bcr
Sd;ulc ^>Iaubovu ; ba^ ftbrt bcu ^c(;vcr unb bic 0rf)iilcr. 10. 2Be^=
(iaI6 f)at 3(fd;cn^uttcl^ 33atcr ben 33aum uml;aucn laffen? 11.
©ottte .^crr 33. tudt;rcnb mciner 3l6it)efen^eit fomnicn, fo laffen
6ie \\)n auf mid; tuartcn. 12. ^c^ mod)tc nur luiffen, hjarum
©corg auf fid; tuartcn Idf^t! 13. ^d; mijd;tc ©ie nic^t ftoren,
abcr fagen Sic mir gcfdllioft, Itjic bicfcr Sal} auf gnglifd^ ^eif^t.
14. ©coi\3^ SSatcr foil gcfdbrlid; !ran! fcin ; man {;at jluei Strj^te
f)oUn laffen. 15. ^er 33ogcl JDodtc ebcn bom 33aume flicgen, aU
ber ^dijcr i(;n fd^o^. 1(). ©uten ^)?orgcn, .^err iJ3raun, mein
iPatcr IdfU l^^ncn fagen, bafj er Sic I;eutc 5lbenb eriDartct. 17.
.^a6e id; Sic facjcn (;orcn, ba§ Sic jebcn Xag cine beutfd;e Stunbe
nel^mcn? 18. S^Jcin, icf) nefjme eincn ^ag um ben anbern cine
Stunbe. 19. 353a^ mid; betrifft, fo mbdjU id) licbcr alle brei %aQt
meinc Stunben nefjmen. 20. ^a^o foKtc id; meinen, benn Sie
iDiirbcn me(;r ^nt gum Stubiercn fjabcn. 21. ©^rlid^ \r)ai)xt am
Idngften, unb Unred;t fc^ldgt feincn eigenen §errn.
-5. 1. Let us take a walk; I cannot work any longer. 2.
The beggar-woman, who has just asked us for money, says
that she is (claims to be) a hundred years old. 3. She is not
quite so old, but she is said to be at least above (iiber -|- ace.)
ninety years old. 4. The fox said : * The grapes are sour ; I
do not like them.' 5. The fox said the grapes were sour,
and that he did not like them. 6. Might I ask you how far
you are going ? As far as Montreal. 7. Should I put on my
overcoat ? 8. I should think so ! The thermometer is (stands)
below zero. 9. Is it true that this traveller knows three
languages.? It may be [so], but I do not believe it. 10. If
you should see little Freddy up-stairs, let him come to me.
11. By which shoemaker do you have your shoes made ? 12.
The steam-engine is said to have been invented by an Eng.
lishman. 13. Lazy boys learn only because they are obliged
205]
COMPOUND VERBS.
239
to learn. 1 ]. He must have been very ill, as (ba) he is still
so weak. 15. This house is said to have cost four thousand
dollars, but I should not like to give two thousand for it. KJ.
He has not been able to come on account of the storm,
otherwise he would be here already.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXV.
1. Mochten Sie nicht eine Reise nach Europa machen .?
2. Gehen Sie alle Tage nach der Stadt, oder nur alle zwei
Tage .? .'i. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie nicht mehr studieren
konnen ? 4. Wer soil das Teleplion erfunden haben .? 5. Hat
man einen Arzt holen lassen .? 6. Haben Sie das Geld be-
zahlen miissen }
LESSON XXXVI.
COMPOUND VERBS.
203. The Prefixes of Compound Verbs may be either
Inseparable or Separable.
204. A. Inseparable Prefixes.
Remember : The omission of gc- in the P. Part.
The prefixes k-, tv-, cm|)-, twt- flc-, tfcr-, jcr-, mift-
loibcr- are always inseparable and tinaccented, the principal
accent faUing on the verb.
Remarks. — i. The particle mift- varies in usage, as shown
in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 209, i, below.
2. Remarks on the force and meaning of these particles
are given in Part III.
205. B. Separable Prefixes.
Remember: i. The Prefix is separated from the Verb
only in Simple Tenses and Principal (including Direct
Interrogative and Imperative) Sentences.
^40
LESSON XXXVI.
[§§ aos-
2. The gc- of the P. Part, and m of the
(a) Simple
Verbs.
iin. come between
prefix and verb.
3. The principal accent is on the prefix.
206. The Separable Prefixes are :
1. The simple prepositional and other adverbs, oH-,
an-, auK oug-, etc. ; btt(r)- fort-, cm|ior~, ^cr- ^in-, etc. '
2. The compound adverbs, such as: botion-, baju-, etc. ;
boron-, borons-, etc. ; cntgcgcn-, entjttitK jururf- etc. '
Notes.- I. Observe that these compound adverbs are all accented
on the second syllable.
2. The use of the compound prefixes with \%x- and Ijin- is defined
m the Supplementary Lesson E., § 210, below.
Examples of Verbs with Prefixes.
{fi) Inseparable [c) Separable
Compounds. Compounds.
gejen, go berge^en, pass away | ^wSge^en, go out
f jnriirfge^en, go back
rcigen, tear jcrreifeen, tear to pieces
fommcn, bcfommen, obtain cntgcgenbmmen, come
<^o"^e to meet
pnben, find crfinben, invent ottlfinben, find out
Other Separable Prefixes are :
3. Substantives, forming one idea with the verb,
{a) as objects of the verb, as :
orStgeben, pay attention (attend); bonffagcn, return
thanks (thank); ftottfinben, take place (occur);
teilne^men, take part (interest one's self).
Note.— The substantives in these combinations are usually spelt
with a small letter, and written in one word with the verb when they pre-
cede it.
{b) with prepositions (= adverbial phrases), as :
ao7l
DOUBLE PREFIXES.
241
M in tl(|t ncl^men (refl.), take care (be careful);
JU Ceibc tf)u\h injure, hurt; ^u Stttttbc bringen,
complete; ^u Stonbe fommen, be completed ; im
©tttttbe fein, be able ; jum «arfiftctn fommen, make
one's appearance (appear) ; ju SKutc fein, feel.
Remark.— These substantives occupy the same position
in the sentence as separable prefixes, thus :
^d) ^abe auf fein Setragen orjtgegeben,
I have observed his conduct.
^d) fagte i^m fur feine grcunblid^feit botif,
I thanked him for his kindness.
Note. — Observe that in the above sentences the simple objects with-
out preposition (arf)t, bant) /o//ow the prepositional phrases (auf fein SBe-
tragen, fiir fcine f5reunbli(f)feit), contrary to rule, on account of their
character as separable prefixes.
4. Adjectives as prefixes are usually separable, as :
frcirajfen, set free (liberate) ; fep^attcn, hold fast (de-
tain) ; fic^ logfagen (refl.), renounce.
But many are inseparable, of which fuller particulars are
given in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 212.
For bott- as prefix see § 208, below.
207. C. Double Prefixes.
1. Separable + Separable prefix; these are compound
adverbs, and both separable (see § 206, 2, above).
2. Separable -I- Inseparable ; the former alone is se-
parated, as :
on'crfennen, acknowledge, ic^ crfcnne an (but see Suppl.
Less. E., §213).
3. Inseparable + Separable ; both inseparable, as :
ficttttftragen, authorize, ic^ beauf tragte i^n, I authorized
iiim ; bctottftaltm, arrange, id^ derotlftaltete bieg, I ar-
ranged this.
242
LESSON XXXVI.
I§§ 307-
NoTF.. These are really not compouiul but derivative verbs, from
coini)()uiul nouns (;.Huf'tian, XHll'ftaltj ; hence also the verb (as in the
former example) is always weak, not strong — bcailftraiite, bi'auftiagt.
208. D. Prefixrs Separaplk and Inseparable.
i'he prefixes liurrff-, ^iiitcr , ii^cr-, untcr-, urn-, tJoff- are
sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable. They are :
{a) Separable as long as both prefix and verb retain
more or less of their literal ox concrete meaning;
ij}) Inseparable when both have lost thi meaning, and
form together one new idea. A compound of the
same verb and prefix may therefore be both sepa-
rable and inseparable according to its meaning,
as in the following examples :
{a) Separable and Literal.
(Accent on Prefix, Trans, and Intr.)
buri^'reifen, pass (travel)
through, as:
@r ift geftcru l;ier burrj'gercift,
He passed through here
yesterday.
itn'tcrgel^en, go behind
tt'bcrfe^en(tr. or intr.), cross ;
jump over, ferry across, as:
6r fc^tc mit einem (S^rungc
Ul&er, He jumped over at
a bound,
ga^rmami, bitte, fe^cn 8ie mic^
iificr. Ferryman, please ferry
me across.
(/') Inseparable and Figurative.
(Accent on Verb, always Trans.)
burd)rcrfcn, traverse, travel
over, as :
^r t)at ba^ ganjc Sanb burd;*
rcifl', He has traversed
(travelled over) the whole
country.
f)intergc'Ji% deceive, as:
©r l^intergiitg' feincn greunb.
He deceived his friend.
uberfc^'cn, translate, as :
^c^ iiberfc^/c ein beutfc^eg^uc^,
I am translating a Ger-
man book.
ao8]
PREFIXES SEPARABLt. AND INSEPARABLE.
243
f^
un'tcr[c^rcibcn, write under,
subscribe, as :
S(!^rcibcn 8ie '^i)xc\\ Xiamen
l^ier uiitcr. Subscribe your
name here.
Mtn'gef^en, go round, as :
©ie miiff en um'0c(;en. You must
go round.
tiott'gie^en, pour full, as :
(Sr go^ bag ©lag uoH, He
poured the glass full.
iintcrfd^rci'^cn, sign, as :
'^d) l)aU ben '-Wricf nod; nid^t
antcrfr^ric'ficn, I have not
yet signed the lettef.
umgc'^Cil; evade, as :
^JJian nniging' bag Giefe^, The)
evaded the law.
boCcn'bcM, complete, as :
^c^ \)aU meinc ^itrbeit ijoH*
en'bct I have completed
my work.
Notes. i. These separable prepositional prefixes are only rarely
used with the verbs given above, except di?> prepositions proper, governing
a case, as :
(Sv ging Winter ben Ofen (urn bag §au8),
He went behind the stove (around the house).
2. The adverb toietier is separable, except in ttJtcilCr^o'len, repeat (but
toie'lJCr^olen, fetch again).
3. Many compounds with these prefixes are used as inseparable com-
pounds only ; others ac separable only.
Vocabulary.
to meet with, an'treffen
give up, auf geben
cease, stop, auffjoren
open, aiifmacf)en
leave out, omit, aus'Iafjen
pronounce, aug'f^vec^en
assist, aid, bei'fte^en
go away, fort'ge^en
come out, l^eraus'fommen
come in, ^erein'fommen
set (of the sun, etc.), un'tera
gefjen
read to, i)orle[en (4- dat. of
leave, berlaffen [pers.)
promise, berf^red^en
present', introduce, t)or'fteEen
(+ ace. and dat.)
go past, pass by, ijorbei'ge^en
close, shut, ju'mac^en
come back, juriid'fommen
244
LESSON XXXVI.
[8ao8
marriage (-ceremony), bic
3^rauuni]
pale, bicid;
by heart, au^'tt)enbig
since, feitbem' (adv. and conj.)
closed, shut (predicate), ju
collide, ijufam'mcnftofecn
send to, ju'ft^icfcn (-f dat.)
coffee, bcr ^affce
Northern Railway, bie i)iorb's
cifenba^n
slave, ber 6!Iat)c
even if, Wu\n . . . and)
Idioms: 1. Wh»t la the matter with iJml mai m er?
2. He feelH III, ^Jjjm ift fi^lrdjt )u Wute; or: m {ft i(m filledt m
■nil If*
8. To tranNlste Into German, ^n8 ttumt uberfelirtt.
4. In line weather, glei \(^onm mtttn.
6. If you please, SOcnn ii^ bltttn botf (lit., If I may ask).
iSXBROISE XXXVI.
^. 1. ^iXQx^ nic^t, m ^enfter 3U5umad;en, mm bu ba3
dimmer toerlafet. 2. SBa^ man auffc^iebt, fommt [citcn ju 6tanbe
3. 5l5nnen ©te mir fagen, tt)ie biefe^ 3Sort auf ^cutfcb au^ae.
frroc^en h)irb? 4. 9Keine ©c^h)eftern famen mir entgegeu aber
leiber ^aben fie mic^ nic^t angetroffen. 5. mu ^ahtn berf^rodjen
un« beijufte^en, aber nur lt)emge ^aben ung toirflic^ beigeflanben'
6. SSir fmb je^t mit bem erften iTeile beg 33uc^e§ beinafje fertig ;
na#e SBoc^e fangen tt)ir an, ben gtDeiten 2:eil 5U uberfe^en. 7.
SWix 3uge ftnb auf ber «Worbeifenba^n jufammengeftojen. 8 36
^5rte auf 5U fingen, meil' ic^ ^eifer U)urbe. 9. ^J)?ein ^^ater macbte
ben 53rtef auf unb lag benfelben ber g^amilie bor. 10. Ser ein=
mal liigt, bem glaubt man nic^t, unb luenn er auc^ bie SSa^r^eit
f^nc^t. 11. ^ahtn <Bk bie 3eitung befommen, bie ic^ ^i.nen au^
ber ©tabt augefc^idt hah^ ? 12. (gffen eie getDo^nlic^ in ber ©tabt
iu mxitaQ? 13. 3a h)o^r, ic^ gefje jeben ^ag urn mm Hk fort
unb fomme erft urn fec^g ll^r jurud. 14. ^Kancber f^at angefangen,
bag er mc^t boaenbet \)at 15. Unfere 9^ac^barn muffen hjobr
fort fern, benn affe ^aben ftnb bei i^nen gu. 16. ^ommen eie
"~ ■; > ♦"/ ^^^« ^^^ o^cvui ^raun uoqteuen. 17. ^db
banf^j bielmalg, aber ic^ bin i^m fc^on t)orgefteEt toorben. 18. Sei
§ao8l
COMPOUND VERBS.
245
fd^Bnem 25ettcr gcl^cn hjir unfenn SSatcr cntgcflcn, tocnn cr nadj
."paufc fommt. 19. ginbet bie ^Tranung 3^rc« 9Settet« morgcn
obcr iibcrmorgcn ftatt ? 20. SBoUeu Sie eine Staffc 5C^ce? ©ebcn
6ic mir lieber einc 2:affe ^ajfct.
^. 1. The Reformation took place in the sixteenth century.
2. Have you closed all the doors and windows ? 3. What is
the matter with you ? You look so pale. 4. I do not know ;
since I have come back, I do not feel at all well. 5. In the
year 1865 all slaves in the United States were set free. 6.
Have you opened the letters which have just arrived? 7. The
sun sets earlier now, and the weather begins to grow colder.
8. Mary is learning a poem by heart ; she has already repeated
it ten times. 9. Have you found out at what o'clock the
meeting takes place .? 10. Do you know the gentleman who
has just gone past > 11. When we were going past the church,
the people were just coming out. 12. Pay attention to your
work ; you always leave out words, when you are copying.
13. Why have you closed the window ? I was beginning .0
catch cold. 14. I have tried to learn this poem, but it is
too hard for me, and I have given it up at last. 15. Goethe's
* Faust ' has been translated into English by Bayard Taylor.
16. The marriage of my brother takes place to-morrow at
eleven o'clock.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXVI.
1. In welchem Jahre wurden die Sklaven in den Ver-
einigten Staaten freigelassen ? 2. Lernst du gern Gedichte
auswendig } 3. Glauben Sie, dass unsere Nachbarn fort sind >
4. Kennen Sie den Mann, der am Hause vorbeif^eht > 5. Wer
hat diesen Brief aufgemacht ? 6. Wie sprechen Sie das Wort
G-o-e-t-h-e aus ?
246
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E.
[§§209.
I
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E.
ON CERTAIN PREFIXES.
209. The Inseparahle Prefix mi^-.
The particle mtft- is inseparable, but :
(a) With certain verbs it takes the gc- of the P. Part, and jU of the
Infin. after it, as :
m!§'l)anbcln, act amiss mif^'gchanbett nitf3'jul)anb<'ln
With other verbs nii^- either :
(/;) Has fle- fiifort' it, as:
inif5l)nn'bi1n, ill-treat P. Part. gcmiO'danbctt — or:
{(■) Drops 0C- altogether, as:
mififnricii, displease P. Part, migfaneit
Note. — Observe that the principal accent:
under (,t) is on the/n:/?x throughout;
" (d) is on the /r<'/f.r in the P. Part, only, otherwise on the veri;
" (c) is on the veri throughout.
210. Use of the Prefixes ^tt- and ^n-.
1. The particles ^er (' hither ') and j^in ( ' hence ') are prefixed * » verbs,
both simple and compound, to indicate the direction towards or from
the speaker respectively, as :
itommcn @ic l^cr, Come here (hither, to me).
®fhtn @ie ^tn, Go (there) thither (hence, from me).
Hence, a person standing np-stairs would say to one below :
.H'onimen ^\t l^eraiif, Come up here (up-stairs) ;
but to one up-stairs :
@cl)cu @ic Ijjmuntcr, Go down there (down-stairs).
2. The simple prepositional adverbs 06 > OH-, nuf-, 0U3-, CJn- nrtJer-,
iibcr-, Untcr-, urn-, dor are only used with verbs of motion, when the
compound verb denotes motion in a general w.iy, without specified
direc'-'on, or when it has lost the idea of motion altogether.
§209*
2Zl1
USE OF THE PREFIXES.
247
of the
verbs,
from
11 the
:ifie'i
3. {<z) When, with aitg-andtior-, also with 06- in the sense of 'down,'
the place from which the motion proceeds is implied, but not
specified, the direction to or from the speaker is further indic-
ated by prefixing |jcr- and ()tn- respectively.
(d) When, with the remaining i)refixes (on-, ouf-, etc.), the i)lace to
which the motion is directed 5s impli-d, but not specified, |cr-
or ()in- is similarly j^refixed.
4. The following examples will serve to show more clearly the differ-
ence between verbs with the simj)le prefixes and those with ^cr- or ^in-:
(i) With ^cr-or |)in-:
l)innui<flcl)Cii, go out (from the
house)
j^cruorjicljcn, draw forth
^crabftcigen, descend
Ijctnntommcn, come up to, ap-
proach
liiniibcrfjcl)cn, go ever, across
fjinitntcr(]eI)cn,godown(stairs,etc.)
(a) With Simple Prefix :
OUfifli'()Cn, go out (for a walk, on
business, etc.)
llOrsicl)Cii, prefer
obftcincii, dismount
onfomnicn, arrive
iibersicljcn, desert [perish
Untcrncf}Cn, set (of the sun) ; sink ;
5. When the place from or to which respectively is specified, these words
are used as prepositions proper, governing a substantive, but may be re-
peated as adverbial i)refixes with !)cr or ^in, as :
©r fliufl ttu0 bcm ,Btinmcr (f)inoug).
(Sr ,^og bcu 33ncf au5 bcr 2;a)d)c (^crouS).
Notes. — i. 2lb-, meaning ' off, away,' does not require these prefixes, as:
nbreifcn, abact^cu, to depart, go off; - but: biiiobgcfien, to go down.
2. (Sin- is replaced, when the place to which is specified, by the preposition ttt with the
accusative, as :
Gr ritt in bie Stabt l)iitcfit.
3. Sometimes other prepositions are used to indicate the place from or to which, in which
case the compound prefix is used, as :
Scl^,n)crbe nad) (Suvopa l)ftiubcrgel)pn, I shall go over to Europe.
Gr ift oom Sacf)c berabflcfaaen, He has fallen down from the roof.
Other Prefixes.
211. Verbs derived from compound substantives are treated as
simple Verbs, as :
2)a8 ^riil)'fliiit the breakfast, friil)'ftu(fen, to breakfast; id) friib'^
ftitcfte, gefru^'ftiicft.
248
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E.
[§§axx
2)ie ^anb'^abe, the handle, l^anb'l)aben, to handle; IjsR^'^abte,
Qel)anb'I)abt.
2)fr S^Qt'lrfltag, the counsel, rat'frfjlogen, to take counsel; raf»
frfltogte, gerot'fditagt.
NOTB. — Observe that all such verbs are weak, as in the case of the last two of thff
above verbs, which are not compounds of f)aben or fd^logen respectively.
212. Adjective Prefixes are frequently inseparable, but retain the
principal accent and require gc- before them in the P. Part., as :
toeiflagen, to prophesy, toc!§'ingte, getDcifilogt ; rej^ffertigcn,
to justify, redjt'fertigte, geredjt'feitigt ; lieb'tofen, to caress, Ueb^
loftc, gelicb'fofi ;
also the substantive compound :
lufl'ttJanbeln, to walk for pleasure, gcIuft'tuanbcU.
213. Some verbs with Separable -\- Inseparable Prefix are used
only in constructions which do not require the separation of the former
particle from the verb ; thus we may say :
S§rijlu« iji Ottferftanben, Christ is risen from the dead,— or:
5Ild (S^rifluS Ottferfianb, — but instead of :
er crflanb auf, — we say : (gr panb don Sen %^itxi ouf.
Similarly with OttSertejen, tioretlt^alten, and a few others.
EXERCISE E.
1. Have you answered all the letters ? I have answered all except this
one. 2. I have asked my sister, if (whether) she is ready, but she has
not answered. 3. She has gone up-stairs ; perhaps she has not heard.
4. Let her come down, for I cannot wait for her any longer. 5. I should
like to speak to your father ; is he at home "i 6. Yes, he is up-stairs in his
study ; please go up. 7. Some one is shouting in the street ; go out and
see what is the matter, 8. Are you going out to-day } I am going out, as
soon as I have breakfasted. 9. George, go out of the room ; you have
been behaving badly. 10. Many people say that Mr. B. has acted amiss
in this affair, but he has justified himself. IL We started so early yes-
terday morning thai we had no time to breakfast. 12. Several people were
standing on (auf) the street before a burning house, and were looking up.
13. A poor woman with her child was on the point of jumping down. 14. At
last a fireman went up and saved both [of them]. 15. The boy has abused
his dog, and therefore he was punished by his father. 16. The dog was
howling in the street, but some one went out and brought him in.
2I5J
REFLEXIVE VERBS.
249
LESSON XXXVII.
REFLEXIVE AND IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Reflexive Verbs.
214. I. All Reflexive Verbs are conjugated with f^ahm.
For an example of their conjugation see § 41, and observe
the use of fir^ a.^ special reflexive of the third person for all
genders and both numbers.
2. The reflexive pronoun is introduced as near to the
beginning of the sentence as possible, sometimes even before
the subject, when the latter follows the verb and is not a
pronoun, and especially if the subject has adjuncts, as :
Ckftcrn Ijat fic^ mci.; lieber, alter iktcr befc^dbigt,
My dear old father injured himself yesterday.
215. T. Any transitive verb may be used reflexively, when
the action of the verb is on the subject ; but Reflexive Verbs
proper are :
(a) Those which are used on/y reflexively, especially such
as indicate a s/aU of 7?tmd ox feeling, as :
[id) fjrdmcn (gen , or iibcr +
ace), grieve
fief) befleifecn (gen.), ^ apply
„ bcflei^igen, ) one's self
„ begniigcu (mit), be con-
tented
„ bejinnen (gen.), recollect
„ erbarmen (gen.), take pity,
have mercy
fd)dmen (gen., or uber4-
acc), be ashamed
W\t\\ (nac^), long (for),
yearn
tuunbcrn (iiber + ace), be
astonished
erfditeii, catch cold
(f)) Those which, though used also as transitive verbs,
have a special vieaning as reflexives, as :
frcuctt (impers.), rejoice (tr.), \\^ frcucn(gen., or ubcr-f ace),
rejoice (intr.), fee gl^^j
m^ke glad
17
250
LESSON XXXVII.
[§§2!5-
fiiri^tcn, fear
liitcn, protect
ftcttcn, place
bcrlttffcn, leave
jutragcn, carry (to)
fir^ fiird)ten (t)or + dat.), be
afraid
„ f)utcn(t)ov + dat.), beware
„ fteUcn, pretend
„ tterlafjcu (auf + ace),
rely (upon)
„ jutragen (impers.) hap-
pen, occur
2. Transitive verbs are often used in English with the direct
(personal) ol)ject unexpressed, e. g., 'change, turn, open,
spread,' etc. ; such verbs have the object expressed in German
as the reflexive pronoun, e. g. :
The weather has changed, ®a^35>etter l;atftf^ gednbert.
The wind is turning to the east, ^cr 3Sinb bref)t fit^
wad) Dftcn.
The door opened, Xk %hnx offncte ftr^.
The disease was spreading over the whole town, !5)ie
5lran!l;cit ijerbreitctc fit^ iibcr bie Qaw^c 6tabt.
3. For the use of Reflexive Verbs for the Passive Voice,
see § 114, (/^).
4. From what has been said above, it will be evident that
Reflexive Verbs are used to a much greater extent in German
than in English, which indeed has no Reflexive Verbs in the
strict sense defined above.
I
210. GOVJ.RNMENT OF REFLEXIVE VeRBS.
I. All /;-//(? reflexives take the reflexive (^personal) object
in the accusative ; the remote object (the thing) is in the
genitive, or is governed by a preposition, as shown in the
examples given in § 215, i, above, thus :
ai7]
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
251
S* Wdme mirfj meincS Setrageng, I am ashamed of
my behaviour.
©rinnerft bu bil^ bcffcnnic^t? Do you not remember it?
SBir fefjnten ung narj unferer 3Jiutter, We longed for
our mother.
' Sc^ er&armte mii^ fcincr, I had pity upon him.
2. Some spurious reflexives have the reflexive {personal)
object in the dative, and the thing in the accusative, as :
Sd^ fann mir btv3 bcnfcn, I can imagine that.
3cf; HIbete mir bie§ nur ein, I only imagined this.
Note. - ©id, fd)mcirf)clu takes the dative of the person with a clause
as direct object, thus :
3d) fd)mcid)rUc mir, bag icf) c§ tr)iin fijnnte, I flattered myself
that I could do it. '
^^''* Impersonal Verbs.
Impersonal Verbs Proper are those used only in the
third person sing., with the neuter pronoun eg as subject.
I. Those expressing Natural phenomena, as :
C0 fc^)neit, it snows eg ^Xx%i, it lightens
C0 regnct, it rains eg ^onnert it thunders, etc.
also with the verbs fein or tDerben, as :
dg ift (tDirb) fait ^arm, bunfel, etc., It is (grows) cold
warm, dark, etc.
®8 ift (|cf)IaGt) fiinf. It is (strikes) five.
2. Those expressing bodily or mental alTcctions
id) with accusaiive of person.
G^ fricrt mi(j, I am (feel) cold.
@g bcvlangt mid; {mdj), I am (feel) de8irou^,.
@^ freut mic^, I am glad (it rejoices me).
@§ tt)unbert mid;, I wonder (it makes me wonder).
I
252
LESSON XXXVII.
t§§2i7-
I
@^ jammcrt mid) (gen.), I pity (it moves me to pity).
@§ veut mid) (gen.), I repent (it rues me), etc.
(p) with Dative of person.
gg bunft (beud)t) init, Methinks.
@§ gclingt mir, I succeed, etc.
{c) with fein or ii^erbcn {^Dative of person), as :
©§ ift (Unrb) mir iibel, iuD()l (511 ^^lutc), I feel ill, well
(it is ill, well to or with me in spirit).
(S§ ift mir Ucb, Icib, I am glad, sorry (it is dear, sad
to me).
Note. - - In this class of verbs the subject C8 is omitted when the per-
sonal object precedes the verb, as.- mid) Unnibcrt, etc.
3. Verbs used impersonally with a special sense, as :
2i>ie ftcjt'^ mit ;^l;ncn? How fares it with you ">
@§ fipj^ ii^nt gut, He is prospering.
2Sa§ gicbt'gV What is the matter?
aBagfcP^l;ncn? What ails you?
Also fcin and lt)crben, as under i and 2, (c), above.
4. For the impersonal use of the passive voice, see § 113.
Note. — Of the above classes, those alone are strictly impersonal
which admit only of C? as subject; others, which are used with other sub-
jects, but only in the third person (sometimes plur. as well as sing.) are
properly called unipersonal.
218. Conjugation of Impersonal Verbs.
1. Impersonal Verbs form their various tenses, moods^ etc.,
in precisely the same way as other verbs, but are used only
in the third person singular.
2. Some are weak, others strong, as :
fricrcn, to freeze, Impf. tH5 fror, gcfrorcn ; fdmcien, to
snow, Impf, ^3 fdj^neitc^ Po Part. 0cfd)n?it,
219]
GOVERNMENT OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.
253
3. Most of them are conjugated with fjabcn, as :
(B^ |at gefd)neit, gcfrovcu, etc. ;
but some take [ein, e.g., geliiujcu, gliitfen, to succeed ; cje[d;et;cn,
to happen (compare § 53), as :
©§ ifi gefc^e^en. It has happened.
219. Government of Impersonal Verbs.
1. Impersonal Verbs expressing bodily or mental affections,
etc., take the immediate (^^ersoT^al) object (= Engl, subj.) in
the Dafwe or Acaisative (see § 217, 2, v^, above).
2. Those under § 217, 2, («), denoting a mental affection
may be used
{a) impersonally, with the thing {cause of emotion)
in the genitive, as :
@§ jammert tnirj fcincr^ I pity him (it moves me to
pity of him).
^% reuet mid) meincr 6unben, I repent (it makes me
repent) of my sins.
{b) personally, with the thing (cause of emotion) as
subject, as:
dr jammert mit^, I pity him (he moves me to pity).
3}leinc ©unben reucn (pi.) mitj, I repent of my sins
(my sins move me to repentance).
Remark. — Observe that the English subject is object
in German, the verb remaining always in the third person,
as:
%% freut mtr^^ I am glad.
@8 freut bitj. Thou art glad.
di freut ifiii. He is Had.
^8 freut ung. We are glad, etc.
254
LKSSON xx.wir.
[f^ aao
220, TllKKK IS, IIIKUK ANK, CtC.
1. The lCni;Iish there is, there are (7«v/,s, ivnr^ has hem^
ivill h(\ etc.) must be rcmlcrcd in (Ici'^jan by C0 rticbt (jVib,
(hU . . . j^CjV'Ih'H, UMvb . . . i]cbcil, clc), wlien ;m indcjinite Qyi.-
istence is expressed, or in .i,w/^7v// assertions, as:
(*6 Unli friibcv ImcIc Scute, loclcbc j^laubtcn, etc., There
were formerly many people wiio believed, etc.
(50 mirb bicfcvs :o,abv inclc '^Nflaumai 0c|jcii, There will
be a s^reat many plfnns this year.
Remarks. — i. 'i'iio English subjccf is object of (^icbt in
German, and is in the accusative, as :
(i'<> ijiicbt cincn :'){innan (ace.) uou :ricfcnv% luelcbcr ,.,^cifoliv:{
"9iidtlcb\/' bcifU, There is a novel (nom.) by I )ickens,
called 'Nicholas Nickleby.'
2. The verb (i*\cbcu) is always in the s/Nij^u/ar in German,
beinj; a true impersonal ; and c^^i is never omitted, as :
^ic|\\s %\\}x flicbt eg, etc.
2. There is, etc., must be rendered into German by c8 iff,
H fillb (cv Umr, otc.\ when dcjinitc existence is expressed, or
\Yi particular assertions, as:
^% ifl cin '^sotjcl in bicfcm ^^aucr. There is a bird in
this cage.
^•0 finb siuci -i'ogcl auf bic)ciu il^aumc. There are two
birds on this tree.
Remarks. — i. The English subject is also subject {fiomi-
native) in German, as :
G-S ift cin Slonmn (nom.) non ^ic!cnv3 auf bem %\\^),
There is a novel (nom.) by Dickens on the table.
2. The verb (fcin) agrees in number with the ;^<?^// subject,
and e^ is omitted, unless it begins the sentence, as :
(^ aio]
TIIKKK IS, TUKKK AKK
255
Clin lk\Yl iP in bicj'cm 'l\amv, Thfrc is a bird, etc.
NoTK. Tliis shows that i\^ is the inil,fuiitc (\\ n-plucing Ihu real sulv
joct (sec § JO, I), anil not the iiiiiKTsotuil i\\
VoCAin/I.AKV.
to dross (trans.), an'flcibcn li^Hitiiing, bcr "ilUi^
dross (intr.), [id) antlcibcn
resolvo, docido, fid; cnt|d;lic[HMi
t'xi)l;iiii, cvl'liivon
1)0 mistaken, [id; ivvcn
turn around (intr.;, [id) um%
brcbcn
get married, marry (ititr.), [id;
Ucii;ci'vatcii
marry (trans.), (;ci'ratcn
hurt (wound), Ucrki^cn
thirst, bcr :Dur[t
lemonade, bic I'inionabc
cateri)ill:ir, bic ^Kmipc
slei^diin-;, bio 8d;littcnbal;n
w:iy, mode, bic !:Jlk'i[c
succossful(ly), i^liUtlid;
now-a-days, I;cut,^utagc
long (adv.), Ian(j[t
past, DovDci
in all ages, 511 alfcn ^citcn
Jdioms: 1. I f.M^ w«ll, Whr ift t»u|,( ^u Wutc
it. lUi liiiH iiiarrhMl Mio daiiKhtor ol tli« doctor, (^r [)at fid)
mit *>tv Zodytcv tc« 3^ofti>r« ocihcirntcf.
:J. In ihiH wuy, "Jluf biffc SBcJfc (ace).
4. 1 w»H hiiiiKrry (thirsty), 3d) l)attc .ftutifler (35urf»).
EXERCISE XXXVII.
yi. 1. (5<g bonncrt, unb id; fuvd;tc, cy tuirb balb rcj^ncn. 2. Urn
luie t)icnU;v iuirb bci ^^i;ncn ju ^JJiittag o^O'-lKnV 3. (5^ (;at
lud(;rcnb bcr 9Jad;t cjcfrorcn unb f)cutc luerbcn toir e^^Iittfdm^
laufcn fonncn. 4. 2isc^()alt) bonncrt c^, tucnn c^ bliljtV ^a§
lafjt [id; md;t Icid;t crflcircn. 5. '^^^d) (;a6e mcincn beftcn .^junb
Un-lorcn ; [0 cin .s)uub [inbct fid; nid;t Icid;t tuicbcr. (;. (5^ freut
un<5 fcf;r, ba^ C^cinrid; fcin C5j:mncn cjUidlid) bcftanbcn Ijat 7. ^^d;
filrditc, c-5 tuirb bicfc^3 Gabr nur tucnioc Vlpfcl cicbcn ; bic Jfau^en
(;abcn faft alk iUiittcr bon ben ^^aumcn (^cfrcffcn. 8. ©utcn
gjjorgcn, .<pcrr 33raun; gicbt'g f;cute cthjag ^icuc^? 9. ^UJcin
dltcftcr 33rubcr bat fid) Dcrbciratct. lo. Wit irem ^at er fic^ Der^
i^eiratct? 11. 3)at bcr Xod)tcr bc5 ^o!tor 33. ; crinncrn 6ie \\6)
256
LESSON XXXVII.
l§§ aao-
nid^t ir;rcr ? 13. Sc^mci*cln Sie fic^, ba& €^ ^l;ucn auf bicfc
2Bci[c gclingcn h)irb? 2ic Jjabcn ntd)t (^ielb gcnug. 13. ^c^
^abe t)icl mcl;- (iJcIb alv id; hxaudK ; id; h^urbe tiiic^ mit ber .t)dlfte
bcgnugt f^abcn. 14. (5-^ hjuvbc rii^ i]av md)t munbcrn, lucun )uir
noc^ (jeutc ^)f egen befiimen. 1 ?^. %ii uh an bem ^aufe uoriiber*
ging, offnete fid; bie Sti^iir, unb ein atter §err fam ^crau«.
16. ^ic^ friert; bu foatcft beinen tlbcrjicfjcr anjicfjen. 17. Q^
toaren nod; Diele Seutc auf ber Strafe, aU id; md) §au[e !am.
18. ©>5 Juirb bid; balb beineg Setragcn^ rcuen, lucun l^mid) n\d)t
irre; bu foUtcft bic^ fd;amcn. 19. e^ giebt ^cutjutafje ^^oun,
unb leibcr i;at eg ju alien ^eitenX^orcn get^cben. 20. ©ie fonnen
fidf) benfcn, ba^ eg mid> tounberte, alg id; mid; umbre^te unb
meincn langft Derlornen J^-rcunb Dor mir faf). -
B. 1. Are you afraid when it lightens ? 2. Yes, I am always
afraid of the lightning. 3. What is the matter with you.?
You do not look at all well. 4. I do not know what ails me ;
I do not feel well, perhaps I have caught oold. 5. It has been
snowing the whole night, and to-diy we have fine sleighing.
6. Have you hurt yourself? Yes, I have cut my finger.
7. There are two gentlemen at the door ; do you know them ?
8. I know one of them, but I cannot remember his name.
0. I must dress immediately, or else I shall not be ready at
seven o'clock. 10. If you do not dress more warmly, you will
catch cold. 11. I am thirsty; please give me a glass of
lemonade. 12. I am glad that the thunder-storm is past; the
lightning is dangerous. 13. Do you remember whether he
was here on the 15th or on the i6th of January ? 14. Have you
decided to leave (the) town, and to pass the summer in the
country? 15. I hear somebody shouting in the street ; what
is the matter?
ORAL EXERCISE XXXVII.
1. Sollte man sich vor dem Donner fiirchten ? 2. Wie
lange wolmen Sie schon in dieser Strasze ? 3. Stehen Sie
Mil
% f
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE.
257
gewohnlich fruh des Moi^^ens auf ? 4. Weshalb hast du die
Fenst ir zugemacht :' 5. Wie gefallt es Ihnen in diesem
Hause ? G. Wird es dieses Jahr viele riiaumen geben ?
LESSON xxxvni.
PREPOSITIONS.
221. The Prepositions with the Dative o ily have been
given in §§46. 51; those vith the Accusative only in
^§ 34> 50; those with Dative or Accusative in § 65.
Prepositions with the Genitive.
222. The Prepositions governing the Genitive are chiefly
nouns used ndverbiallv. the following lines contain the
principal ones, and will aid the mt rnory:
Untocii, mittclft fraft unb ttjajrcnb,
Cttut, tJcrmiigc, uiiflca^tct,
C &cr^al6 unb untcr^aI6,
$)icgfcit, jcnjeit, joIJien, megcn,
(Sttttt, auc liingS, ^nfolgc, tr"^
©te^^en mit bcm ©cnititi ;
^od) ift l^ier nic!)t gu ticr^effen,
3)a§ bei biefen kpxn brei
Slud^ ber ^atiti ric^tig fei.
223. The mi iiings of these preposi "ons are as follows:
^ ^ V /' ' ^ for the sake of, on ar count of
2. tticgcn, )
Remarks. — i. ^a^V^n), fjalber, always folloivs the case;
begen may follow or precede a noun, but always follows
a personal pronoun.
258
LESSON XXXVHI.
fSaaj
I
2. .J>nlb Is used only in bfgbalb and Hjc«{;alb ; {jalhttt after
the personal pronouns or sul)stantivcs vvitli a determinative
or attributive word; bafbcr after a substantive used alone, as:
^C0 '^vicbcuvS bvilbcu. For the sake of peace.
33ci[))icl^ l;albcr, For the sake of example.
3. The personal pronouns have a special form ending in -
before l;albcu and lucflcn, thus :
inciuctf;albcn, for my sake
unfcrtluci'jcn, on our account, etc.
3. OUftcrlinlfi, (on the) outside 5. oficrjflib, above
o^ 6. UUtcr^olb, below
4. iimcr^n(6, (on the) inside of
ExA^^»LKs : »
Unfcr C^iaitcn ift au&crr)aI6 (inncrjn!6) bcr ©tabt.
Our garden is outside (inside) of the town.
g)?ontrcat licijt untcr^alb bc«i Cntario=Scc^,
Montreal lies below Lake Ontario.
Remark. — ^uncrfjalb in expressions of time may be fol-
lowed by the dathe of a substantive without article, as :
l^nncvbalb jmci ^aijcu. Within two days.
9. (tJCr)mittcIfl, | by means
10. HcrmijQC, S of
1 1 . jufalgc^ in consequence of
Re^[ark. — ,3iifoK3C governs the genitive when it precedes
its case, but the dative when it follows, as :
@v tl;at btc^5 jufolo^e mcinc§ 5kfebl8, or meincm ^43cfcl)I(
5ufoIgc, He did this in consequence of my order.
12. biclfcit, on this side 13. jcilfcit on that (the other)
side
7. frttft by virtue of
8. laut in accordance with
S aaal
I'REPOSITIONS WITH TIIK CENITIVE.
259
Rkmakk. - - ^ic^>fcit and jcnfcit are prepositions (governing a
noun); bic<S[cit0 and jcn[ctt0 adiwrbs (without a case), as :
v;* njof)nc bic0frlt cr jcnfcit be<J 7s\\\\\<<s, I. live on this,
he on that (the other) side of the river, — but :
aSiir )uu(;ncn bcibc nal;c am J-Uiffc ; id) bic^fcitd, er icn«
fcitg. We both live near the river ; I on this, he on
the other side.
14. flatt, Ollfttttt, instead of
Remark. — iUuftatt is sometimes divided, thus :
5(nftott mcine^ SBruber^, Instead of my brother, — or:
^tt mcincfiJ Slkubcr§ (Statt, (In my brother's stead).
IT). UllflCOf^tct, notwithstand- 16. tro^, in spite of
ing
Remarks. — I. Ungcad;tet may precede or follow its case.
2. Ix^^ governs the dative in the phrase tiot3bcm, * in spite
of that,' and with the meaning of ' as well as,' as :
3^icfcr .Tlnabe reitet Ivo^ eincm gKanne, This boy rides
as well as a man.
17. mo^rcnb, during 18. ranag, ). ,
19. cntLgJ^^^"^
Remarks.— I. Sang^ also governs the dative, and always
precedes its case, as :
SL'Q.\K(^,^ bc0 Uferg, or bcm Ufer, Along the shore.
2.^ ^ntlang governs the ge?iitive when it precedes its case;
but it more commonly follows its case, and governs the accu-
sative, as :
©r ging ben ?^luB cnttang, He went along the river.
To these may be added :
20. onflcft^tfil, in presence of 22. um . . . miflcn, for the sake
21. inmittcn, in the midst of of
26o
LESSON XXXVIII.
[§§223^
Rem^
I. Uin . . . tuillcii takes the case between iim and
*-i\lAKKS.
tuiUVn, as :
Uni wshm SJtttcrd WilUn, For my father's sake.
2. ^\\^ personal pronouns have the same forms with urn . . .
tDttten as v/ith balben and iuegcn, thus :
urn [cinettinUen, for his sake
urn :3f)ret)uiaen, for your sake, etc.
23. ttufcrn, ) ,r,
i^A 1 •! t ^^^ f^J^ from
224. General Remarks on Prepositions.
1. An Adverb of direction is frequently placed after an
accusative, like a preposition after its case, as :
^cn ^crg Ijiimuf, Up the mountain.
2. {a) Some prepositions may govern a substantive clause
with ba^, as :
(§l;rc ^l^ater unb ^Dhittcr, auf bnft eg bir itjof^l gef)e.
Honour father and mother, that it may go well with thee
Notes. -I. Such arc niif, aiijier (also used with Jucnn), bi.^ oliiie,
(an)itatt, iiuiicad)tet, maljiciib.
2. iBi.i, nniiead)tct, nui[)rnib are also used as amJ7nn-fio>isv^\i\-,on\. ba§.
ip) Urn, of)nc, and (an)ftatt may govern an infinitive
with git, as :
@r fam ocftcrn, urn bid> ju kfur^cu,
He came yesterday (in order) to visit you.
%6) !anii nic baian bcnfcn, ojnc 511 (at^cit,
I can never think of that without laughing,
liefer ^Wann foKtc arbeiten, nnfttttt ju ficttcin.
This man ought to work, instead of begging.
Remark. — But if the subject of the infinitive clause is
difierent from that of the sentence on which it depends, bttft
must be used, as :
223-
and
224]
GENERAL REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS.
261
an
USfc
ive
IS
tt6
^cf) fonnte mrf)t iiorbeiGef)cn, o^nc bag cr tnid^ fo^ (not
o^nc inic^ 511 fcf)en), I could not pass by without his
seeing me.
3. Prepositions may govern adverbs, as: nad^ oben, up-
ward ; wad) t;intcn, to the rear ; auf iinincr, forever ; bon fern,
from afar ; and the compounds with ba(r)- and it)o(r)- (se».
§ 38, Rem. 5 ; 8^, s; 9^), 7).
4. A substantive governed by a preposition may be followed
by an adverb, for nearer definition, as :
9la^ eincr 9ttd)tung ^in, In one direction.
ISBoil aUcit Seitcu ^cr. From all sides.
(Bx ritt Winter bem gcinbe ^cr. He rode in pursuit of
the foe.
Urn ba^5 ^a\i^ Return, Round (about) the house.
??an nun an. From henceforth.
95on Sugenb auf. From youth up.
Vocabulary.
to observe, remark, bcmcrfen
elect, crit)df)len (+ ju)
permit, allow, erlauben
inquire (about), fid) cr!unbigen
(4- ncid))
go about, around, bcrum'gef)en
ring (a small bell), flingeln
go for a walk, f^ajieren ge(;en
divide, teilen
let (of houses, etc.), tjcrmiotcn
go away, iucc^gcl^cn
the opposite, ba§ (^5e'(3cutcil
custom, habit, bic ©cluofinl^eit
microscope, Wf Wl\txo\top'
(the) little Red (Riding)
Hood, ba^ S^lDtld^^djen
umbrella, ber 9tegenfc^irm
drop, ber Xro^fen
drunkard, ber STrunfenbolb
will, testament, ba^ Xeftament'
stairs, staircase, bie 2^re^)3e
deceased, ber (bie) ^erftorbene
warning, bie SBamung
living, leben'big
loose, slack, lo^
in^time, punctually, rc($t's
Sciti(^
262
LESSON XXXVIII.
[§224
Idioms
I
For all I pare, SKfJnffhieflm.
2. This house lo for sale, ^\t\ti ^mi \\t )n bcrfflufW (lU., to be
8. He was elerted mayor, (fr Jutirbe jiiin SBtiroermeifier eruialjlt (lit.
to or for a, etc., — jiim =-- ]ii r iitrm).
4. I have been here for a «,.pk, ^ri) bin \t\\ niljt laflen Ijicr.
5. To laugh (at), make sport (of), £irt) liiftig tiintftcn (ii6rr-facc.)
6. What Is the matter? aOnS ift WJd?
7. There is a ring (at the door, etc.), 6s riittflclt.
EXERCISE XXXVIII.
^. 1. ^a^ .s>aib;^, tucIAcg 511 t)crtaufcn if{, ftcl;t auiVa'halb ber
etabt, mrfit Jucit Dom See. 2. Scnn e^ nur iuucrl)aib Dcr etabt
ftimbc, fo iuiirbc id) gern taufcnb Tbalcv mchr bafur ncbcn. 3.
©cfallt c^i 3l;ncn bcffcr bic^ifeit bc^ ^ruffee ^^u tuobncn, obcr jenfcit^?
4. Jro^ bc^5 eturmc§ fam ba^5 3c(nff vcdnititicj in 3(Cit) ;9orf an.
5. liefer ^vunfenbolb \jai urn feincr -^'amtlie miaen ba^' Xrinf en
aufgegcbcn. (i. (5r fiir*tctc, bafj fcine eobnc bie \d)M)U G5ei\?obn=
fjeit (erncn morfHcn. 7. ^cr biuiiirigc Solf ijin^ mebvmale^ urn ba^
^au^ unb fud;tc J)fotfaV|)dicn. 8. ^l^lcrnuttclft fclnc^3 iirojien (Sinfruffeg
bci ben 3{cicbcn \:)ai fid; .f^err 21. gum 33iirijcnneiftcr cnoablen laffcn.
9. @eit iDann tooFjnen eie in bicfer Stvafjc? ®eit brei ^a^ren.
10. Urn tncinettmHen imU er nid^t mit ntir gel;en ; Dieireid^t Irurbc
er urn SfjretSinacn ncbcn. 11. ^ft CMcovb obcn ? ^a, cr ift focben
bie 3:re^))e binaufGc^angcn. 12. ^affen 3ic un^ liebcr nad) oben
gefjen ; e^ imrb m^ bc|fer c^cf arten obcn ;su [il3cn al^ unten. 13. @«
l^at nor einicjcn ^33cinutcn ciemngelt; Jucr \mx ba? 14. ©s tt)ar
jemanb, bcr fid; erfunbicjen luoKtc, ob bicfiH^ ^m^ 3U t)ermieten
fei. 15. ^cm ^Tcftamcntc gufolnc lourbe bcv^ eit>nttum unter bic
bciben Sbr^nc bc^ MU>rftoibcncn gctcilt. Ki. ^JJieinettoegcn mag
er tje^cn, fobalb e^5 ibm gcfallt. 17. ^Hufun- baf^ (sjcorg cin iocnig
grojjer ift, bcmcrft man gar fcincn Untcrfcbicb jJoifdjcn ben bciben
Wbcrn. 18. A^^err X. ift eincr mcinor beften ^^-reuube ; er gcbt
fcft nie am ^aufe ijoriiber ofjne Ijereingufommen. 19. Unhjeit ber
©tabt 33. ftebt bag <oa\x'i, luorin icb gcboren bin.
§2^4]
PREPOSITIONS.
263
B. ]. I shall take my stick instead of my umbrella; I am
not afraid of the rain. 2. Have you been taking a walk
along the shore .? Yes, injpite of the bad road. H.lsfot far
from the school I let my new knife fall into the snow, and
could not find it again. 4. Do you know what was the
flatter ? I heard a great noise down-stairs. 5. I do not know
(it), but I shall inquire. <). Were you allowed (perf.) to stay.?
No, we had (perf.) on the contrary to go away again immedi-
ately. 7. We have been here since yesterday, and we must wait
three days more for the ship. H. One part of the city lies on
this side, the other on that side of a broad river. 0. I do
not think much of this gentleman ; he would do anything for
money. 10. Jiyjiieans of a microscope living animals can be
seen in a drop of water. 11. In consequence of this bad
news we must be back inside of a week. 1 2. Should we make
sport of other people? JH. No, that is a bad habit.
J 1. Yonder is the river; on this side stands my house, on
that side his. 15. Notwithstanding the warning of his father
the youth often went on the water in bad weather. If). In-
stead of taking the large boat he always took the small one.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXVIII.
1. Weshalb hat der Trunkenbold das Trinken aufgegeben ?
2. Auf welche Weise hat sich Herr B. zum Burgermeister
erwahlen lassen ? 3. Haben Sie klingeln horen .? V/er war
da.? 4. Wo sind Sie geboren, und in welchem Jahre?
5. Fiirchten Sie, es konnte regnen ? (k Kannst du mir sagen,
was auf der Strasze los war ?
264
LESSON XXXIX.
I§§ 225
LESSON XXXIX.
PREPOSITIONS (continued):- IDIOMS.
225. Prepositions vary more, perhaps, as to idiomatic usage
m different languages than any other part of speech. Their
proper use must be acquired chiefly by practice and memory,
Dut below are given the German equivalents, in various
idioms, 0I: the most commonly occurring English Prepositions,
more particularly in ases where the usage of the two lan-
guages differs.
220. About.
(a) In the sense of 'around' = uitl, as :
©ie berfammelten fid; nm tf)n. They assembled about
him.
(d) Of time = ungcfii^r urn (urn alone = ' at ' ; see § 227,
(d) I, below), as :
Un9cfajr um ,^ef)n U^r, About ten o'clock.
llltflcfa^r um 2Sei^na4>ten, About Christmas.
(c) In the sense of ' nearly ' (of iiiwiber) = ctttJU, UttgCs
filler (adverbs), as :
@r \}^i ttttJC (ungcfa^r) taufcnb Stealer itbrig. He has
about a thousand dollars left.
(./) In the sense of * with/ ' about ' (the person) = Bci, as :
^d) t)abe !ein ©elb ki mir, I have no money with
me, about me.
227. At.
(ci) Of locality :
I. = in, when the action, etc., is within a building, etc.,
as :
3n ber ©d^ulc, in ber .Tlivd;e, im ::i:f)eatcr, im ^lonjcit
At sqhool, at church, at the theatre, at the concert,
228]
PREPOSITIONS.
265
2. = on, when the action, etc., is adjacent to the object
of the preposition, as :
%VX Senfter, on ber ST^iir, om ^tfcf;c. At the window, at
the door, at the table (but 6ci X\W, at table).
3. ~ OUf, when the action is on the surface, or on an
elevation, as :
STuf bem gjkvfte, onf bem Saac-, ouf ber ^oft, ottf ber
Umicr[itat, ouf bem (Sc^loffc, At market, at the ball,
at the post-office, at the university, at the castle.
4- = Stt or in with proper names of towns (also with
^au§, 'home'), etc., as:
• 3tt (i-0 %o.x\%, At Paris.
3u ^aufe. At home.
{b) Oitime:
1. = vm (most usually), as:
Urn ^a\h bier U^r, At half past 3 o'clock.
Urn Dftcrn, At Easter.
2. = 3U, with 3cit and ©tunbe, as :
3ur red^ten 3eit, At the right time.
■^U biefer 6tunbe, At this hour.
Note. —Urn with the ace. is also admissible with these words.
3. = IJci, as :
©ci 2:age§anl&rud;, At day-break.
{c) Of price = ^u, as :
liefer ^ucfcr ioirb 3U ghjei %^o.Uxn ba§ ^funb Derfauft,
This sugar is sold at two dollars a pound,
228. By.
lyii) Expressing ih^ personal agoit after the passive voice ==
l»U«, as :
^a*^ .flinb tuirb bon feinen eitern geliebt. The child i-
loved by its parents.
18
266
LliSSON XXXIX.
[§s 228-
I
{b) Of a part of the body, etc. = Iici, as :
(Sr nabm bag ^linb ki bcr .^anb, He took the child by
the hand.
(c) Unclassified :
©Ci Jiiid)t, By candle-light.
©Ci ^^Jacl-.t, By night.
Mi ©clualt. By force.
M\i bcr (5ifcnt)af)n, By the railway.
8u Sanb, 311 Saffcr, By land, by water.
229. For.
Rendered usually by fiir, but :
(a) Of purpose = 311 {never \x\x), as :
®icy ift [cboiic^5 '^iiUx ^um Spasierenc^cf^cn, This is fine
weather for taking a walk.
G; vcift jum 'I^cvgniigcn, He travels for pleasure.
{/}) Of time :
1. Fast = fcit as :
iScit cincm ITionatc, For a month (past).
2. Future = nuf + ace, as :
^cf) lucrbc nuf cinicjc 2aQC Derrcifm, I shall go away for
a few days.
3. Duration = ace. without preposition, as :
©r wax eincn oanjcn Wiomt bier. He was here for a
whole month.
(e) Of r^z/^^^r = au^, as :
@r tl;at Ci> ott^ g^uvdit/He did it for fear.
(i/) Unclassified :
jyiiv'^ (rrftc. For the present.
Qmn cvftcn (jlucitcu, etc.) ')M, For the first (second,
etc.) time.
asO
PREPOSITIONS.
267
3um ©eburt^tac^e, ju 2Seif?nac^ten, For (as) a birth-
day-present, for a Christmas-present.
230. In.
Rendered usually by in, but :
{a) ~ ttuf, as :
In the street, 9(uf bcr ©tra^e.
In the country, 9tuf bem Sanbe.
In this manner, ^uf bicfe 2Bcifc (ace).
In German, 5tuf 3)eutfd;.
(^) == litltcr, as :
Unttt (Slifabct^g SfJcgierung, In Elizabeth's reign.
3tt SBacjcn, In a carriage.
231. Of.
(a) By the genitive without preposition, to express the
relation of the possessive case, as :
®er Sillc unferS ^aterl. The will of our father (i. e.,
our father's will).
ib) = tJOn :
1. After verbs, etc., as:
%^ f^red;e lion if)m, I speak of him.
2. Between titles and names of places, as :
!^ie ^onigin Uon ©nglanb. The Queen of England.
3. After Jiiimerals and other partitives, as :
@iner Hon nieineu ^rcunben. One of my friends.
2)er (iltefte tion ineinen ^riibern, The eldest of my
brothers.
4. Replacing a genitive plural without article, as :
@r ift ber :i5ater tion bier ilnaben, He is the father of
four boys.
268
LESSON XXXIX.
[§§ 231-
■
5. To avoid a succession of several genitives, as :
2)ie Jyrau bom abetter mcinc^ Dnfcl^, The wife of my
uncle's cousin.
{c) Of cause, when the cause is a disease = an, as:
(S'r ftarO nn bcr (Sfjolcra, He died of the cholera.
{(i) Oi place, with names of battles:
1. = Bci, if named after a town, village, etc., as :
2)ie Sd;Iad;t ki Sei^jicj, The battle of Leipzig.
2. = on, if named after a river, as :
^ie <3cf^(ad;t an bcr Slhiia, The battle of the Alma.
(e) Unclassified :
^Jiangel on @elb. Want of money.
SicOc gnm ©clbc. Love of money.
3Sa^ foil on§ mir h?crben ? What is to become of me ?
232. Ou.
Rendered usually by ouf, but :
{a) Of time or date = Ace. without preposition, or = on
-f- Dat., as :
J^cn (or om) 3tt)olftcn ^artuar. On the twelfth of January.
{d) Of fnodes 0/ progression = ju^ as :
gu ^ferbc. On horseback.
gn <vu^e. On foot.
(^) Of situation, on a river, sea, etc. :
1. When it means on the water = ouf, as :
SSiele ©d)iffe faf)ren onf bcm ^ubfon. Many ships ply on
the PTudson ; — but :
2. When it means on the s^ore = on, as :
Hamilton Ucgt am £)ntavio=6ee, Hamilton lies on Lake
Ontario.
-33]
PREPOSITIONS.
269
{(l) Unclassified :
W\i Jtcifj, On purpose.
®ci bicfer (siclci3CiU;cit, On this occasion.
ttntcr (or mit) bicfcr ilk^biufluno, On this condition.
3m ^egriffc, On tiie point of.
233. To.
{a) When replacing the indirect object = Dative without
preposition, as :
3* ^o.U meincr ©cl)it)efter ein 33ud; cjccjcbcn, I have given
a book to my sister (i. e., my sister a book).
(b) Of motion or direction to persons = ju, as :
^c^ mia 311 mcincm 3Satcr getjcn, I will go to my father.
if) Of motion to places :
1. With proper names of countries, towns, etc. = nnrj, as :
Scf) oe^e no^ ^ari^5, m^ 2)cutfd;lanb, I am going to
Paris, to Germany.
2. With common nouns (i) = in, ait, or ouf respectively,
with the Accusative, in various idioms, where these
prepositions with the Dative = 'at ' (see § 227,
(«), above), as :
3tt bic ©c^ule, .^irc^e, \m ^fjeater, J^on^ert u. f. b. gef)en.
To go to school, church, the theatre, concert, etc.
%n ^enftcr, an bic 2:f)ur gef^en,
To go to the window, door.
9luf bcu 3JJar!t, iBalT, uuf bic ^oft, Uniberfitiit cje^en.
To go to market, to the ball, post-office, university.
(ii) Frequently = |u, which may usually replace the
prepositions in the above idioms also, as :
er ift jur ©tabt, yxx ^trcbe u. f. tt). gegangen.
He has gone to town, church, etc.
270
LESSON XXXIX.
[§234
234. With.
Observe the following Idioms:
IsBon Gan^cm .t^cvjcu, With all my heart.
(Sr gittcrt bor Sialic, He trembles with cold (cause).
^ag ift bci un^ nicf)t ©ittc. That is not the custom with
(== among) us.
3n bicfcr W\\^)i, With this intention.
Remark. — For the proper use of prepositions after partic-
ular adjectives and verbs, see Less. XLIX.
Vocabulary.
I
to intend, gcbcnfen
be^enough, suffice, fjinreirfnni
bring with (one), mit'bringen
sign, untcr§ciclf»'nen
bring back, jurud'bringen
excursion, pleasure-trip, ber
harvesting, ba§ ©mteit
favour, ber (Defallen
Louis, Lewis, Subivig
measles, bie SJJafern (f. pi.)
account, bill, bie Sf^cc^mmg
dressing-gown, ber©d;lafrocf *
evil, bag itbcl
relative, ber $l>ertt)anbte
treaty, ber 3Sertra{j*
root, bie SBurjel
this evening, fjeiite Slbenb
thorough(^-ly), c^riinblid;
fortunately, t3ludlid;erh)eife
possible, tnoglic^
absent (on a journey), ijerreift
Idioms : 1. To be accustomed, lie WcJuolin^eit ftttficn (+ infin. with ju).
2. In the middle of summer, 9Ritteu im (Soinnter.
3. To take a pleasure-trip (excursion), 6inen Sludflug mod^fn.
4. It looks like rain, Kd firt)t nadft Wcflcn ou^.
5. Two or three, ,'{)uci bi8 brei.
6. He sprang out of the window, (?v fjirntifl jum JJeuftcv l^iuttuS
(point of ingress or exit denoted by jll -f- dat.).
Note : It is customai y, in referring to the relatives of the person addressed, to prefix
$"rr, 'grau or (^raulein, as the case may be, but this is not done in speaking of one's own
relatives, thus:
Sffiie gef)t eS S^rcm §emi SBater? — But : gJlein 9Sater ift ganj iDof)l.
S2i4]
PR1.POS 'TIONS.
271
EXERCISE XXXIX.
A, 1 ^"" i ,ueld>c ^ii^ctfo l^abcn 3ic bic fransbfifd^c S^vadjC [0
gut iielci 3d) l;abv jueiii ic (^rammatit griinblid; [tubiert,
unb bam yai^e \d} anb •tl;af^^ ^a' in ^ranfrcid; 3iu3cbrad;t'.
3. 2I-e lange Mcibt ^^r .Cr^di .,o4) fort? Gr fommt erft
itbermurort nad) .'Qaufe. 4. :iba6 s]cbent[t bu bcutc 3(bcnb 311
tbun? 3d;h)cincfiJ d;t ; fur'^5 Grfte mufi id; mciue ^hifcjabcn
mad;cn. 5. 21' f)a]\ u ben {;ub)c^en ed;lafrod bdommcit ? ^c^
f^abe i^^n jum ©eburtetaoe bcfommcn, unb jiclje i(;n f;eute juni erftcn
5JiaIe an. 6. G^s !Iiniiclt ; tuer i[t an bcv 3:^ur? C5^ ift jemanb,
ber ben iQmw f^jrec^ien it)iir, aber er ift bei 1\\d)t unb lafjt fid;
nid;t ftoren. 7. ®u fi^eft am enfter; fie^ bod; cinmal jum
Jenfter t)inau^5, unb bu iu'rft i^n Diclleid;t fef;en fbnnen. 8. 3u
luelc^er 3eit tebte ^JJ^oIieve? Gr lebte unter b ^ic^ierung Submig
XIV. Don ,'vran!reid;. 9. ^ft e§ moglic^, 3U berfelben 3eit Don
einer Sacf^e ju f)3red;en unb an eine anbereju benfen? 10. ^ie
Siebe ^um ©elbe ift bie iBurjel a\W% libels. 11. Unfer .'oaug
fteOt am et. Sorenj^JluB, unb Don ben ^^enftevn fief;t man bie
Dam^ffc^)iffe uorbcigeben. 12. 2Bi((ft bu mir beine ©rammati!
Icif;en? ^a iDobl, mit ber ^cbingunt3, ba^ bu biefelbe Dor
morgen auriidbringft. 13. ^ft §err «. ju <5aufe? ' 9Jein, er ift
auf brei iKsod;en Derreift. 14. 3:ki ^age^^anbrud; fingen bie
S86gel am fc^onften. 15. %{U i^enfter unb ^f)uren tuerben be§
9fJad)t§au«g gurd;t Dor ^iebcn bei un^ jugefcbloffen. 16. SSe^fialb
finb bie i^inbcr md;t gur ©d)ule gegangen?' 17. G§ finb mebrere
Hinber in ber Sd;ule, bie an ben m(i\tx\\ gelitten l;aben, unb bie
5JJutter fiird;tet fid; Dor biefer J^ranff;eit. 18. 9teifen Oie lic^n^r
p. Sanb ober ^u Saffer ? ^m ©ommer giefje ic^ e^3 Dor, ju SBaffer
l\x reifen. 19. ^Kein 33ater fjatte bie ©etDofjn^eit, m^ iilinber urn
M gu Derfammeln unb un^5 ®efcf)icf)ten §u er§d{)Ien.- 20. 3}?itten
im (Sommer, unb bann tDieber um iBeibnad)ten, ge(;e id) auf§
Sanb, um meine 55ertDanbten ju befud;en. 21. iiJorigen <Sommer
blieb id; mef;r al§ Dierjefjn Xage bei benfelben.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
{./
i
L^.
:a
■" m
1.0
I.I
1.25
ltt|28
^ US,
2.5
22
M
1.6
V
<^
/;
^?
*'
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
<v
<^v
4^
4^s
^^
'r\»
6^
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 87!2-4S03
%
i;
"^'.A'^'''
''q.^
r^^
s 4^
i/.A
^
272
LESSON XXXIX.
[§§834-
B. 1 . Good morning ; you have come just at the right time ;
1 was on the point of going to your house (say : going to
you). 2. There is a ring at the door ; go to the door and see
who is there. \S. When you go to the market, do not forget
to go to the post also. 4. Do you intend to take a pleasure-
trip this summer ? Yes, I intend t5 leave the town for three
or four weeks. 5. Last summer we stayed away only a week.
0. Does it not look like rain t 7. Yes, I am afraid it might
rain, but fortunately I have brought my umbrella with [me].
8. Have you any money about you ? I should like to pay
this bill, and have left my purse at home. 9. I have about
seven dollars and a half with me ; would that be enough (suf-
fice) ? 10. Would you do me the favour to lendrme the half
of it (babon) for two or three days.'' 11. What magnificent
weather for harvesting ; it has not rained for two weeks
[past]. 12. Is the servant going to (the) market ? No, she
was at (the) market (already) two hours ago. 13. The battle
of Waterloo took place on the iSth of June in the year 1815.
14. Some months afterwards the treaty of Paris was signed.
15. When (at what time) and in what war did the battle of
the Alma take place t 16. It took place in tiie year 1855,
during the war between England and Russia.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXIX.
1. Wann gedenken Sie die Stadt zu verlassen .? 2. Wo
steht das Haus Ihres Herrn Vaters ? 3. Auf welche Weise
gedenken Sie diesen Sommer zuzubringen } 4. Wollen Sie
einmal' zu mir kommen und den Nachm»<:tag bei mir
zubringen ? 5. Es hat geklingelt ; wer ist d* ' 6. Was fiir
Wetter bekommen wir heute Abend ?
236]
CONJUNCTIONS.
^71
LESSON XL.
CONJUNCTIONS.
235. Conjunctions are either :
A, Coordinating, or those which connect sentences of
the same rank or order (principal with principal, or dependent
with dependent), or :
B. Subordinating, or those which connect one sentence
with another, on which it depends, or to which it is sub-
ordinate.
A, Coordinating Conjunctions.
236. I. Conjunctions Proper. — The Coordinating
Conjunctions proper merely connect sentences without affect-
ing their structure. They are : ^
Unb, and (^general coft?iective) a^etn
Obcr, or {general disjunctive^ ujj^
bcnn, for {causative^ foitbcm, j
Remarks. — i . ^onbcttt is used after negative sentences only,
and introduces a sentence correcting or contradicting the state-
ment contained in the preceding sentence, in whole or in
part, as :
^d^ bin tti^t \xm\, fonbctn <^<^x\.^, gefunb,
I am not ill but (on the contrary) quite well.
But if there is no inconsistency or contradiction between
the two statements, oficr is used, as :
@r ^at eg nic^t (\,ti^<xxK, ober er toirb e# t^un.
He has not yet done it, but he will do it.
2. $lbct does not necessarily begin the sentence and often
comes after the verb. When abcr does not begin the sen-
tence, it has rather the sense of * however,' as :
]
\ but (adversative)
274
LESSON xr,.
[§§236
2)a^ bofc 9BciO ttBcr c^ing Dor ben ©picf^cf.
The wicked woman, however, went to the mirror.
Note. When there is any other conjunction present, obcr seldom
begins the sentence.
237. II. Adverbial Conjunctions. -Many adverbs and
adverbial phrases have the function of conjunctions, when
they are used to express the relation between sentences,
rather than to modify any particular member of the sentence
in which they occur.
The principal coordinating adverbial conjunctions are :
aud), also, too
au^crbcm, besides
boun, then
fogar, even
b0(S, [ still
jcbar^, J
htnn, unless
bcffcnungcotjtct,
nif^tsbcftanjcnigcr,
inbcffcit, however
fonfi, else, otherwise
njjJ^I, indeed
jtHttr, it is true, to be sure
ba^cr,
bcllittib, therefore
bcghjcgcn, ^
nlfo, ^
folgti^, > accordingly
connective (related to unb)
[• nevertheless
adversative
(related ro
ttkr)
\ causative (related to bcnn)
«37]
CONJUNCTIONS,
275
(0^ SO«
alfo, so, thus
ebcnfO/ just as
beflo, I
Infofent,
the
► comparative
tnfofent, ) . ,
Infotocit I ^"^smuch as, as far 2iS'— restrictive
inbcflcn. I "meanwhile
barauf, afterwards
fchbcm, since then
I
I
time
Remarks.— i. Unlike the conjunctions proper, these adver-
bial conjunctions, if they introduce a sentence, throw the
subject after the verb ; but they may also follow the verb,
thus :
(Sr tft !ranf ; befjcnungcoi^tct tcirb cr fommen (or : er
toirb bcffcnungcnrtitct fommen), He is ill; neverthe-
less he will ':ome.
(gg regnetc, borum (ba^er, bestregen) fonnte ii^ (or: ti^
fonnte borum, etc.) nid^t augge^en.
2. %\x^ and fogar, when they refer specially to the subject
or any other member of the clause preceding the verb, do
not throw the subject after the verb, as :
^UiS) [ein 3Sater mar gugegcn. His father, too, was
present.
(Sogor feinen geinben ^ot er bergeBen, He has pardoned
even his enemies.
3. The verb often comes first in a sentence with boc^, to
express a strong affirmation, as :
§obc ic^ eg bod^ gefagt, Did I not say so }
276
LESSON XL.
[§§ 338-
238. III. Correlative Conjunctions. These are:
Cllthicbct . . . fiber, either ... or )
tticbcr . . . itOti, neitlier ... nor ) '^''J''"'^^''^
nii^i nur . . . fonbcru our^, | not only . . . )
foltioil . . . ofg 0U(5, I but also \ ^onnecttvi
vX&jS. fotOO^I . . . alg, not so much ... as
balb . . . Holb, now . . . now (again), at one time . . .
at another
tcilS . . . tcUg, partly . . . partly
einerfdtS . . . onbcrfcitg, on the one hand ... on the
other.
^ Remark. — The last three are adverbial conjunctions, and
either follow the verb, or throw the subject after it, unless
they modify a particular member of the sentence (compare
§ 237, Remarks i, 2, above).
239. B. Subordinating Conjunctions.
1. Sentences introduced by subordinating conjunctions
are always dependent, and therefore have the verb last (see
§32).
2. Some of these also are adverbial, but, as this distinction
does not affect the construction, they are not separate^
arranged.
3. The principal subordinating conjunctions are as follows
{a) Introducing substantive clause :
bofe, that
ob, if, whether
{b) Introducing «rt^z/^r^/^/ clause :
^^^^ ■) ) Bis (bag\ until )
a39jl
CONJUNCTIONS.
while, whilst
Ittbcff'cn,
inbcm',
untcrbcff'eti,
mii^rcnb (bog),
fcit(bcm), since
fobalb'^ as soon as
fo Initgr, as long as
(fo)lllic, as soon as
teltC, how — manner
bcun, than
tote, I '^'""' ^^
intoicfern', inasmuch as
Jc nnf^bem^ according as
bo, since
bo§, that
tocil, because
bo§, that
urn bai j ^" ^''^^^ ^h^^
bamtt', in order that
toenn, if
ol8 ofi, I
ttlg tocnn, j
toofcrn, j
oliglcir^, tocnn gleit^,
oBfdjon, tocnn fr^on,
ob ourj, tocnn ttur|,
obtoo^I,
toictoo^t,
nngcaj^tct (bog),
tocnn . . . vX^, if not, unless
as if
m case
> time
> degree
* cause
purpose
condition
^although
*=* > concessive
277
2/8
LESSON XL.
[58 «3J-
Remarks. — I. lIBcnn and 06 take the subjunctive when
the verb of the principal clause is in the impf., plupf., of
conditional, as :
^d; toiirbe fommcn, hjenn tdj) tuof^l genug toiirc, I should
come, if I were well enough.
3d; tmijtc nid;t, ob cr gefoinmen ttjiire (fci), I did not
know, whether he had come.
2. 9Bcnn may be omitted in conditional sentences ; the
verb then begins the clause, as in the question order (compare
§ 59). This construction is much more common than in
English, and is generally used when the dependent clause,
containing the condition, precedes the principal clause, con-
taining the consequence, as :
^^attc tift ©elb, fo hjurbe id^ greunbe f)a6en, If I had
(had I) money, I should have friends.
Note. — The particle fo should not be omitted in the latter clause
when the former is without rocmi.
3. In the compound conjunctions dbgletr^, Obff^on, obtOO^I,
etc., the two parts may be separated, and the latter part
placed after the subject, as :
OBgleid^ (oM^on, etc.) cr fran! tt>ar, etc. ; or :
Ob er gleii^ fran! tuar. Although he was ill.
Note. — With tucnu the particles gteid^, etc., always follow the subject.
4. The ob or hjenn may also be omitted in these conjunc-
tions and in nig ob, ol8 tocntt (* as if ') ; the verb then begins
the sentence, or immediately follows al§, as :
3|i er glciij !ran!, Although he is ill.
@§ fdjeint mir, all ob (menn) tc^ ©ie irgenbiuo gefe^en
l^attc ; or : al§ Jiittc i^, etc., It seems to me, as if
I had seen you somewhere.
24©]
INTERJECTIONS,
279
2*^» Interjections,
I. Interjections proper are not, strictly speaking, mem-
bers of the sentence, and consist of sounds expressing
either : ^ ^
(a) Independent outbursts of natural feeling, as : 0, 0^
of various emotions ; o^ ^ei, ^cifo. jui^^e (hurrah)^
joy; fi/ ia, ^ot surprise; o^ oil, pain-, p]m (fie),
disgust ; fta^, contempt ; or
(d) Intimations of will, as: ^ft, fi^ (hush), enjoining
silence; Jc, Fjcbtt', ^0, ^aHo^, ^oaa^, to call attention.
2. Various parts of speech, and even whole phrases are
employed interjecticnally, as: ^cil, hail; m^^ woe (subst.)
i)od), hurrah; brai), bravo; feiber, alas; fort, luea, away
(adverbs) ; Qottloh, thank God; also in oaths and adjurations.
3. Akin to Interjections are imitations of natural sounds
as: jut, ^Ufcj, whizz; |,iff, pafj, |,uff, shot; hau^, tallj
plumps, splash. ^' *
4. (a) The Interjections 0, 0^ ^fui, are sometimes fol-
lowed by a genitive, as :
O ! (ad) ! ))fui !) bcr Sijonbe ! Oh ! (ah I fie !) what
disgrace;
or by u6er + accusative, as :
gJftti ! iificr bid; geigen ! Fie on thee for a coward I
(d) The substantives used interjectionally, as under 2,
above, are sometimes followed by a dative, as :
SBcj mix ! Woe's me !
§etl bcm ^iittige I Hail to the king !
Vocabulary.
to call for, ahfjokn
go in, ^ineinge^en
wear (intr.), ftc^ tragen
prepare, Dor'bereiten
280
LESSON XL.
I§a40
lay up, lay by, jurlirflcgcn
old age, ba^ 21 Iter
joy, delight, bie ^reube
Lord, bcr ^err
price, bcr ^rci^
tortoise, bie Sd^ilbfrbte
guilt, debt, bie (Sd)ulb
to be to blame (for), fcfiulb
(adj.) fcin (an -j- dat.)
cheap, bidig
certainly, in any case, jebens
in vain, bcrgebcnS
even if, although, toenn aud^
IdiomM : 1. I am studying (preparing) for an exaniinatlou, ^d^ brreitc mii(
nuf rill C^ramrn (ace.) tior.
2. Do you consider tliat good! ^alUn Sie baS fitr ((Ul?
8. To make calls, SrftK^r matfjrn.
4. In the world, Kuf ber 3SSt\U
EXERCISE XL.
A, 1. Sir foUten aHe DJienfc^en lie^en, )iotxvn, fie un^ aud^
^affen. 2. ©ie berf^radien, inic^ abjui^olen; allein id^ luartcte
toergebeng, bcnn ©ie famen nid;t. 3. 2Bcnn id> C[.\\ ^tjrem ^aufe
tooriiberge^c, fo gcF^e ic^ 0eit?i)l;nlic^ l^inein. 4. 21I§ ic^ aber geftern
5lbenb tooruberging, fa^ id; fein 2id;t unb ba^er bin id^ nic^t
I;ineingegangen. 5. ^c mefjr iuir lernen, befto nie^r finb hjir im
6tanbe 3u lernen. 6. 3)ie ©dfjuler befommen morgen gerien,
barum Jjjringen unb fingen fie i)or ^reube. 7. 2Bie f e^r ic^ mid^ and;
bemid;e, eg gelingt mir leiber bod; nic^t, alTe 3d^e bie[.er 2(u[gabe
ric^tig gu fc^reiben. 8. ^u tabelft m^, aU ob ic^ fc^ulb baran
tDare. 9. ©in borfid^^tiger mam legt in feiner ^ugenb ©elb
juriid, auf ba^ er in feinem Sllter ntdit gjjangel Icibe. 10. Stumer
Ujenn ic^ fran! ober fc^r befd)aftigt bin, ge^e tc^ jeben 3:ag f)3a§ie=
ren. 11. (gr tft nic^t nur reic^, fonbern aud^ freigebig, unb begs
^alb ^at er fo bielc ^reunbe getuonnen. 12. fatten h)ir geicu^t,
bafe ©ie fjeute Sefu^ ^aben, fo h)aren n)ir crft morgen gefommen.
13. SBoHen ©ie fid) er!unbigcn, ob grau ©. noc^ in bemfelben
iOaufe n)o{)nt? 14. @g giebt nod; mele 'il^wi^ auf bcr 2BeIt, bie
tocber lefen noc^ fd[)reibcn fonnen. 15. ©ie ):)Oiiit\\ mir (>elfen
fonnen, ipcnn ©ie eg gen)oKt {^dtten^ allein ©ie tooUten eg nid^t.
3 04©]
INTERJECTIONS.
281
Uk 'SaU ©ie be« 5?ac{imittaa« nid;t fomnicn !5nncn, fo !ommcn
eic bod; be^ 2rbcnb«. 17. Dbolcicf; 5larl [d)on jcbn ^abrc alt ift,
faun cr tuebcr flut Icfcn nod) gut fc()reibcn. 18. X)ic £d)ilhfrotc
lief, inbcm bcr §afe [c^lief, be^f)aI6 ift fie mic^ juerft anflcfom.
men. 19. §attc bcr .C-jafc nid;t ecfd;Iafen, fo Ware cr jcbcnfatt^
jucrft angcfommcn. 20. Xu follft tcinen ^i^ater uub bcinc ^Jhittcr
cl^rcn, auf bafe bu lange lebeft im Sanbe, ba^ bir bcr ^crr bcin
©ott gicbt.
-ff. 1. We shall come, even if it rains. 2. Before I leave
the town, I must make some calls. 3. Shall we go without
him, or shall we wait till he comes back I 4. Whilst we were
away, a thief ca.ne and stole the money. 5. Do you sit up
late when you are studying.? 6. Not generally; however,
when I was preparing for my last examination I used to sit
up late. 7. Do you consider this cloth dear > The price is
not high to be sure, but it will not wear well. 8. Here is
cloth, which is dear, but I believe that it is good. 9. I do
not, on the contrary, consider it dear, but cheap, since it is
good cloth. 10. Since I have been ill, I am allowed neither
to read much nor to write much. 11. It seems to me that it is
colder to-day than yesterday. 12. It is^alMhe same to_me,
whether I travel by the steamer or by the railway. i:i.^[If]
I had thought of^that, I should have gone to meet you.
14. The hare slept, and in^the_meanwhile the tortoise ar-
rived. 15. If the hare had not slept, he would have arrived
first.
ORAL EXERCISE XL.
1. Die Fenster sind alle auf, wer ist daran schuld > 2. Legen
Sie viel Geld zuriick? 3. Weshalb haben Sie mich nicht
abgeholt .' 4. Konnen Sie mir sagen, in welcher Richtung
von hier der Fluss liegt ? 5. Hast du dein letztes Examen
bestanden? 6. Halten Sie diesen Hut fur teuer?
282
SUPrLEMENTARY LESSON F.
C§a4»
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOPJ F.
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS.
241. I. ^HHrtlt follows and limits, or corrects, affirtnative statements,
as foilbcni aoes ncgativu, thus:
(Sr tft vcid), adein cr ift iilcfit fllilcflid), He is rich, hut he is not
happy.
2. I^efto or um fo (hut not je) may he used with a single compara-
tive, as :
GKni <3ir, bamtt (Sic bcflo (inii fo) fvut)rr an!ommcn, Make haste,
so that you may arrive all the sooner.
3- '^Oft is the n)ost general in meaning of all the conjunctions. It may
be omitted w!ien it introduces a snbstaiiti7'c clause, as in 'idircct state-
ments. The sentence then has the construction of a principal clause
(verb second ; see §87, 3). But bafj cannot be omitted when it expresses
purpose or conseqtfence.
4. The Kngl. if must be rendered by 06 (not tt)eiin) when, it =
whether, as :
I asked him // he could come, 3d) fraflte it)n, 06 cr toimncu foiinc.
5. For the distinction between al8, lueuil (as conjunctions of time) and
itjunn, see § 58.
6. * Than ' should be rendered by alt^ after an adjective in the com-
parative degree, not by UUi.
7. ^Clin = ' than ' is obsolete, except v/hen used to prevent the re-
petition of al8, as :
©r ift gviifeer al9 1)irf)tcr, llCttn a{§ SDfJcufd), He is greater as a poet,
than as a man.
8. In comparisons of equality, as ... as = (e6en)fo . • • iDlf, or alS, iDie
being more common, as:
He is as tall as I, (Sr ift (eben)fa gro§ tnic id^.
After a negative, cbcil is omitted, as :
(Sr ift ni(^t fo gro6 mic id).
9. So . . . fo are used with correlative clauses, containing adjectives
compared together in the positive degree (compare the use of '\t or bcfto
with the compar. degree, § 1 26. 4), as :
§a4»J ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 283
®0 flro[) fv Ifl, fo fflflp ifl er onrf), He is as -owardly as he is
Wg; or: 'equally big and cowardly'; lit.: ,.ig as he is, he
is just as cowardly.
Not. -In the first clause of t'.e above example fo is «,6ora,Haii„jr i in the second
coorainatot^, but does .lot throw the subject after the verb.
Observe also the following construction, where the clauses cannot be
rendered as correlative in Knglish:
@o nern Irf) %)\m\ (oiicl)) l)dfcn inbc!)te, fo unniiinlirt) ift e« mir
However glad I should be to help you, it is quite impossible
for me (or : Glad as I should be, etc.).
10. As, when denotinsr cause (= 'since') must be rendered by
ha, as ; ^
I could not come, as I was nc well, ^A lowwit ulcfat fommcii. ha
id) nirijt luol)! luar.
11. As, in the sense of • while ' = tnbeffen, ar :
He fell asleep, as I was reading to him, Gr )d)Ite; cln, inUf ffcil lA
il)ni oodas. ^
12. Distinguish carefully between the following uses of Engl. since:
(a) Since ^^preposition = fcit (not fcitbcm), as :
Since last Tuesday, @cit (extern 2)icnftag.
(b) Since as ad^'erb or coordinating adverbial conjunction »
feitDcm (not fcit), as:
He was hero the day before yesterday, but I have not seen him
since, i^orgcfteru mx n ()icr, feitficm )^q.U id) ilju abcv nidit
gefelicn.
{c) Since as subordinating conjunction of time = feltbem or
feit, as:
I have not seen him since he recovered from his illness, 3(f) ^abc
it)u iiid)t neicl)eit, fctt(ftem) er gcnefeu ift.
{d) Since as conjunction of cause = Jjo, as :
Since I have no money, I cannot pay you, ^0 id) teiu ®elb f)abe,
.v.nn id) ^\t iud)t bcgalilen.
13. After e|e, BetlOr and mo^renil, tag may be omitted.
14- ScHor expresses time only, efjC may also express preference (=
'rather '), as : ^
e^e i6i bag tljue, jdIU ic^ jierbcn, Rather than do that, I will dis.
284
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F.
[§241
15. Observe that the adverbial conjunctions intieffeit, UntCttlcffen are
coordhiathtg when they = 'meanwhile' (the pronoun beft'cil being
demonstrative), hut subordinating viYiQU. they =* whilst, whUe * (the pron.
being relative), as :
®ic fprarf)eii mit einouber; tnbeffcn (untcrbeffen) ^'7^ t$ '.uf unb
ah, They were speaking to each other; (in the) meanwhile I
was walking up and down ; but ;
®ie jprocI)eu mit einanbciv inbeffcn (unterbeffen) id) aiif nnb q6
gtng, They were speaking to each other, while I was walking
up and dov/n.
In the sense of * however,* inbcffen is coordinating oxi\y.
16. ^nt)Cm is subordinating only, and denotes cause as well as time, as:
^6) braiirf)e mcl)i' ®clb, tnlicm id) oiele @d)ulben ^u bej^a^lcu t)abe,
I need more monty, since I have many debts to pay (having
many debts to pay).
^ntiem cr mir bie .?)anb ^ah, lad)eltc er, As he gave me his hand
(giving me his hand), he smiled.
17. SBcil must be used (not )ia) in answer to the question why? or
wherefore ? as ;
aSorum famen (Sic iud)t? SBcil id) fvant it»ar.
Why did you not come ? Because I was ill.
18. 'Unless' is rendered by ttJCnn . . . tli^t (if- • - not\ or by beitn
{coordinating a.dv. couj.), as:
Sir tcerbeu nid)t au6gel)cu fouiien, tncttii fid) ba§ 3!Setter ni^t
(inbevt, We shall not be able to go out, unless the weather
changes.
^d} taffc bid) nid)t, bit fegneft mii^ iicnit/ I will not let thee go,
except (unless) thou Hess me.
Note. — Xcnn in this sense always follows the verb.
19. * But ' after a negative = al0, as :
3d) ^atte nid)t§ alS Ungliicf auf meiner 9?eiye, I had nothing but
misfortune on my journey.
Note. — 5lid^t§ rcentger al3 = ' anything but ' (not ' nothing less than '), as:
ev ift nid^tS loeniBer ali veid), He is anything but rich.
20. Distinguish between :
(a) ^0 = ' there ' ; adverb of J>/ace, as :
3^ tt)ar tia, T was there.
[§241
§241] ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 285
(f>) Xo = * then ' : adverb of iime^ as :
2)er !Dieb fd)Ud) in« Apaud ; U cigviff id) {l)n, The thief sneaked
into the house ; then I seized him.
{c) ^0 = 'since,' 'as ': subordinating conjunction, as:
3d) !onnte ntd)t tomiucn, Ha id) frant \mx, I could not come,
since (as) I was ill.
21. Distinguish between Jjcffenungcad)tet, 'nevertheless' {coord, adv.
:onj.) and Ungead)tet, 'although; 'notwithstanding that' {subord. conj.).
EXERCISE F.
1. Our neighbour has failed, but he is only the richer on that account
since he has not paid his creditors. 2. The hare was sleeping, whilst the
tortoise crept slowly towards the goal. 3. Rather than accept your con-
ditions, I will give up my position. 4. He has not been here since last
week, and I have not seen him since. 5. Since you have not seen him,
I must either go and see him (say: go to him), or write to him. 6. I con-
sider him an ignorant man ; he is anything but learned. 7. Have you
been at the railway-station.? Yes, I was there as the train arrived.
8. We shall not go out this afternoon, because it looks like rain. 9. We
shall not go out to-morrow either {(\i\d)), if the weather does not change.
K). The whole family was absent yesterday from eight o'clock till twelve
o'clock at night; meanwhile the house took (fangeil )fire.
PART SECOND.
SYNTAX.
LESSON XLI.
SYNTAX OF THE CASES : - NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE.
242, Nominative.
1. The Nominative is the case of the subject^ or of a
word in apposition to the subject, or of a predicate noun quali-
fying it. The nominative is also used in address, there being
no special form for the vocative.
2. Neuter verbs indicating a state or transition, such as
fein, to be ; trerbcn, to become ; bleiben, to remain ; fd)eincn,
to seem, appear ; lj>ei^en, to be called, take a predicate nomi-
native, as :
@r ift Soltiat geiDorbcn (gebliebcn). He has become (re-
mained) a soldier.
3. Verbs of calling take a predicate nominative, verbs of
considerifig a nominative with al^, in the passive, as :
^aifer .*peinrirf) I. iuurbe bcr ^^ogler genannt. Emperor
Henry was called the Fowler.
3}iein ^aier Itjurbe immcr t>on inir ol^ mcin beftcr greunb
betradbtct. My father was always regarded by me (as)
mv best friend.
Note. — Verbs of choosing generally take the preposition ju instead
of the English nominative.
286
§a44)
GENITIVE.
287
243. Genitive.
The Genitive is used chieHy as the complement of sub-
stantives, its use in this respect being much the same as the
English objective with 'of,' and also covering that of the
possessive. Thus we have :
1. The Genitive of Origin, as:
3)ie %xU)it beg iBaumcg, The fruits of the tree.
2. The Subjective Genitive, indicating the agent or
cause^ as :
^cr ©raube eineg 6(;n[tcu, The faith of a Christian.
3. The Objective Genitive, indicating the thing affected, as :
^ie ©ntbccfuncj Stmerifag, The discovery of America.
4. The Possessive Genitive, as :
^er (Garten beg ^onigg. The garden of the king (the
king's garden).
5. The Genitive of Quality, as :
3t»et ^inber eincg ^illtcrg. Two children of one age.
NoTK. This genitive is frequently replaced by Don, as :
(Sill ajiauu \sm l)ol)em %\in, A man of great age.
6. The Partitive Genitive, as :
©tner meiner greunbe, One of my friends.
3)er jungfte meiner Sruber, The youngest of my brothers.
Note. — This genitive is commonly replaced by oon after numerals
and other partitives.
244. Genitive after Adjectives.
Adjectives denoting posssession and interest, plenty, know-
ledge, desire,guilt, or their opposites, govern the genitive, as :
beburftig, needing, in need be^ufet, conscious
begierig (also + \\<x6^), de- eingebenf, mindful
^^^°"s fa(){g (also -f- ju), capable
288
LESSON XLI.
l§§244
frof;, glad
gclui^, certain
gehjo^nt (also + an with ace),
accustomed
leer, empty
lo^ (also + ace), rid
tniibe (also + ace), tired
fatt (also+ ace), satisfied
fc^ulbig, guilty
fic^er, certain
ii'berbruffig, weary
toerbad;tig, suspected
tooll (also + ace, or i"- ijon),
full
tDert (also + ace), worth
luiirbig, worthy
Remarks. — i. The neuter pronoun * it ' after most of these
adjectives may have the form c8, which is the old ge?ittive,
and is the origin of the later use of the accusative, first with
the pronouns bag, inag, and then, by analogy, with substan-
tives, as :
^d; bin Cl (bag) miibe, I am tired of it (that).
2. With log, miibe, U)ert the Accusative is m">re usual than
the genitive.
245. Genitive after Verbs.
I. Verbs of meanings similar to those of the adjectives under
the previous section take a genitive of the nearer object, as:
ac^ten (also + auf with ace), ben!en (generally + an with
pay attention
ace), think
bebiirfen, need
gebenlen, mention
bege^ren, desire
■
genielen (generally + ace).
brauc^en, want
^ (also +
ace)
enjoy
entbe^ren, miss.
bergeffen (generally + ace),
do without
forget
erit)dl)nen,mention ^
Also the following :
l^arren (also -\- auf with ace)
lac^en, laugh at
wait
(gotten, mock
toarten (also + ace), tend.
fc^onen (also + ace), spare
nurse
2471
ADVERBIAL GENITIVE.
289
2. Transitive Verbs of accusing, coftdemning, acquittal,
deprivation, emotion, take a genitive of the remoter ob-
ject, as:
an!(agen, accuse
berauben, rob
befc^ulbigen, accuse
entbinben (also + toon), re
lieve
entflcibcn (also -|- toon), dis
robe
losf^rec^eit; acquit
uberfuf)'ren, convict
iiberjeu'gen (also + toon), con-
vince
toerfid;ern, assure
ttoiirbigen, deem worthy
gei^en, accuse
3. Also many reflexive and impersonal verbs (see §§215,
216, 219).
246. Adverbial Genitive.
For the use of the genitive in forming adverbs from sub-
stantives, see § 189, 2. The adverbial genitive may express
place, time or manner, as :
Sin!cr §anb, On the left hand.
©eincr 2Bege gefjen. To go one's way.
iDiefcr 2:age, During these (last) days.
Slbenbl, In the evening.
^[Rorgeng, In the morning, etc.
SlIlcS ©rnftcS, In all seriousness.
^roc!ncn %\x^t%, Dry-shod.
And particularly with 2Beife, 'manner,' after an adjec-
tive, as :
©IMIid^cr 2Beife, — or: ) Fortunately (lit., in a fortunate
©lucflirf)ert»eife, manner)
247. For Interjections followed by a genitive, see
§ 240, 4, {a).
For the genitive after prepositions, see §§ 222, 223.
290
LESSON XLI.
[§§247
EXERCISE XLI.
A. 1. Guten IVIori^cn, Karl; was hast du fur Eile mein
Junge? 2. Guten Morgen, Herr ]i. ; es ist bald neun Uhr
und ich gehe jctzt in die Schule. '5. So, hast du noch weit
zn gehen? •}. Jiis nadi der Friedrichstrasze ; Herr G
unser Lehrer, besteht sehr auf PunktUchkeit. 5. Steige nur
em, du kannst mit mir fahren, da mein VVeg durch die
Friedrichstrasze fiihrt. i;. Ich bin Ihnen sehr dankbar; das ist
sehr freundlich von Ihnen. 7. Sitzt du da bequem .? 8. Ja,
aber sind meine lUicher Ihnen nicht ini VVege ? «l. Nicht ini'
geringsten, aber was fiir eine Menge Bucher hast du da 1 Du
hast gewiss viel zu studieren. 10. Ich arbeite jetzt s -hr
fleissig, da das Examen nachstens stattfmdet. W. Auf
welches Examen bereitest du dich vor ? 1)1. Auf das Ein-
trittsexamen der Universitat. 13. Was fiir Sprachen stu^
dierst du ? U. Ich studiere Englisch, Latein, Deutsch und
Franzosisch. 15. Natiirlich studierst du auch die Mathe-
matik.? 16. Wir miissen Rechnen, Algebra und Geometrie
lernen. 17. Bist du ein Freund von der Mathematik, oder
ziehst du die Spi-achen vor? 18. Ich lerne sehr gern Ma-
thematik, besonders Algebra; mein Lehrer ghmbt, ich
habe nicht viel Sprachtalent. 19. Deshalb solltest du desto
fleissiger die Sprachen studieren, (auf) dass deine Bildun^^
nicht einseitig werde. 20. Mein Vater ist auch derselben
Meinung. 21. Hoffentlich wirst du dein Examen gliicklich
bestehen ; da sind wir aber schon bei der Schule. 22. Ich
danke Ihnen vielmals fiir den freundlichen Wunsch, wie auch
fiir die Fahrt.
B. 1. " An honest man is the noblest work of God." 2. A
pound of iron is about as large as two pounds of silver.
3. Mr. Cleveland was elected president of the United States
in the year 1884. 4. I was to have taken (made) a journey
to Europe this summer, but my father needs me in his busi-
247
ile, mein
leun Uhr
loch weit
Herr G.,
eige nur
urch die
r; das ist
> 8. Ja,
N^icht iin
da! Du
tzt .«jhr
11. Auf
ias Ein-
len stU'
sell und
Mathe-
ionietrie
ik, Oder
ern Ma-
bt, ich
lu desto
Bildung
:rselben
licklich
22. Ich
ie auch
" 2. A
silver.
States
iourney
is biisi-
448]
DATIVE.
291
ness and I shall be obliged to remain at home. 5. I have
been offered five thoasand dollars for my house, and I shall sell
it, for I am glad of the opportunity of getting (to get) rid of it.
(). The Duke of Wellington, a great English general (^elb*
l;crr), was called the " Iron Duke," as Prince Bismarck, the
great German statesman, is called the "Iron Chancellor."
7. He (the former) has deserved that title not only as a soldier
but as a man. 8. My neighbour, the merchant, has been
accused of forgery, but 1 do not believe that he is capable
of such a crime. 9. He was in^need of money, and is
said to have done it on that account. 10. I hope that he
will be acquitted of this accusation, for I am convinced of
his innocence. 11. The discovery of America by (burd))
Columbus was perhaps the greatest undertaking of any man
or of any age (^citalter). 12. Columbus was a man of great
bodily as well as mental power. 1 8. His whole fleet con-
sisted of three small ships, of which two were very old. 14.
Have you seen you : brother the lawyer ? ] 5. Excuse [me] ;
my brother is not a lawyer, but a doctor. I have not seen
him since Christmas. IG. As a student he always used (^ftcc;en)
to say he meant^to be (it)crbe.n) a lawyer. 17. We are tired
of studying; let us go out. 18. Shall I send for (nad)) a
carriage ? 19. No, it is not worth while (ber 3Jiul)e iuert), I
would rather walk. 20. Unfortunately it has rained and the
roads are bad. 21. We can try (the) walking, and if we get
tired of it, we can take the street-cars (^ferbeba^n, sing.).
LESSON XLII.
SYNTAX OF THE CASES (continued).- DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE.
248. Dative.
The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object.
The Dative is used to denote the person for whose advan
(age or disadvantage a thing is or is done, as :
292
LESSON XLII.
248
Cr ftnt mir eiu 2M.* flcfauff. He has l.ought me a
book. *
240. The Daiive is very freely used in Oerman to denote
the person who lias son,e mtarst i„ an action or thin.r. This
.s ca led the ethical dative or dative of interest and mu
usually be left untranslated n, English, i„ which iaCag"
use IS obsolete, thus: fe^ioC "s
3* ^aK- mir bic eac?.c auflcfcl^cn, I have considered the
thing (for my own satisfaction).
2f)u mit ba.3 nicf;t luicber, Iton't do that again (I tell
For the Aw../,., dative replacing, with the definite ar-
ticle, a gemt.ve case or (with pronouns) a possessive adjective,
260. Dative after Verbs.
verbs^'af ""' ''""'' "' '"'''"■'''■''' Cject of transitire
er 3ie6t mir fcaS «ucf;. He gives me the book (the book
to me).
2. It stands as the sole object after verbs which expre« a
fersonal relation only, such as verbs of :
{a) Approach or remmml, etc., as :
6e3C(^,c,., meet .ji,^,„,^ ^,3^^^,^
ntsK^cit, escape „„i,.,,( ,„_ j^,,^^
nt t,rcrf>-„, correspond to nac^fte^cn, be inferior
rcn, be wanting „,^
forgcn, follow j^f^.^^,,^ ^^^^^
ip) Pleasure or displeasure, as :
c^„."' ' " "7~ broken, threaten
banfen, thank p,^,,^^ ^^^^^
250l
DATIVE AFTER VERBS.
2^3
flcfallen, please tnijjfal'tcn, displease
gcniigen, suffice fcfjmcid^eln, flatter
groUen, be angry ftcl;cn, suit, become
{c) Advantage or disadvantage, as :
bci[te{;cu, assist mangcln, be wanting
biencn, serve nii^en, be useful
t^elfen, help fc^aben, harm
{d) Command, resistance and their opposites, as :
befefjlcn, command troljen, defy
gebicten, order h)eid)en, yield
ge^Drrf)cn, obey tuiberfte'f^cn, oppose
Derbieten, forbid iDiberftre'ben, resist
{e) After verbs expressing possession, trust, and various
other personal relations, as :
anttDorten, answer glauben, believe
beiftimmen, agree with fc^einen, seem
ertoibern, reply trauen, trust
ge^oren, belong gurebcn, encourage
Also with fcin and Vrerben, expre'^:sing a state of feeling
(with ju 9Jiiite expressed or understood), as :
2Bie ift S^ntn ? How do you feel ?
Observe also the idiom : 2Benn bcm fo i[t, * If that is the
^se,' in which bcill is dat. neut.
(/) After many verbs expressing similar relations, com-
pounded with the inseparable prefixes cr-, tXii~,
tier-, luibcr ; with the separable prefixes ttlt-, ttuf-,
BcK etttgcgcn- nttij- tior- gu-, etc., and with
adjectives, nouns or adverbial phrases, such as :
(eib i\jm, be sorry ju ^eit n)erben, fall to one's
tup^lrooKen, be well-disposed share
ju Statten fommen, be of use bag 2Bort reben, defend
294
LESSON XLII.
[§§350-
Rkmarks.-!. The great majority of these verbs have
become transitive in English, on account of tiie loss of dis-
tmction between the dative and accusative; their construe
tion ni Clerman should be carefully observed.
2. Many of the verbs under (./), (.) above take a direct
object, particularly in the shape of a clause or of a neuter
pronoun, as :
(Sf \).M niir l>crbotcn 311 flc^cn. He has forbidden me
to go.
Scf; criuibcrtc, ba^ IrJ fommcn mVit. I replied that I
would come.
3)Jcin i^atcr bat ti mir &cfor;ren. My father has ordered
me (to do) it.
For the Dative with iVr^mr Verbs, see §§ 215, 216- with
Impersonai YtxhSy see §§ 217, 219. '
2^1« Dative after Adjectives.
The Dative stands after adjectives similar in meaning to
the Verbs given in the foregoing section, such as :
{a) Approach^ etc. :
a^nlid;, similar
fremb, strange
fileid;, equal, like
(b) Pleasure^ etc. :
angenehm, pleasant
gndbiij, gracious
{c) Advantage, etc. :
I;eilfaiu, wholesome
fc^ulbig, indebted
(</) Com?na7idy etc. :
folgfam, ) _, ,.
ungleid;, unequal, unlike
na^C (also + bei), near
berivanbt, related
lieb, dear
toiUfommcn^ welcome
treu, faithful
— u"/^''['""/ '-liowucuieiit
toibrifl, repulsive
253]
ACCUSATIVE.
295
{e) Possession, e%:. :
cigcn, belonging {^cmcin([am), common
NoTK. Almost any adjective nioclified by gu or flCiiiifl may take a
dative, as :
2)i(1c A>aubfd)itl)C fiiib mir dU nvof? (iivoft gcnug), These gloves are
too large (large enough) for inc.
For the Dative after Prepositions, see §§ 46. 51.
252.
Accusative,
The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object, Time
and Measure.
All transitive verbs take the direct object in the accusative.
Rkmark. — Many verbs that are transitive in English are in-
transitive in German (see § 250, Rem. i, above), 2iHdi vice versa.
253.
Double Accusative.
The verb Icf)i;cn, ' to teach,' governs two accusatives, one of
the person and the other of the thing ; the verb fragen, ' to
ask,' takes the latter accusative only when it is a neuter pro-
noun, as :
^d; iDcrbc bt(^ bic bcutf((|c ^|)ra((e Icf)ren, I shall teach
you the German language.
%^) tuoUte bit^ ocrnc ctltiag fragen, I should like to ask
you something.
Verbs of callingy etc., have a second accusative as facti-
tive predicate, as :
^d; \\(xx\XKit ijn cincn ^fZarrcn, I called hi .1 a fool.
Of Verbs of considering, etc., some, such as : bctvadUcn
regard'; aufcf;eu, 'to look upon'; barftellen, 'to repre. t,*
take z. factitive accusative with al§, as :
%^ fe^c ben 9legen ale eine 2So^lt§at an, I regard the
rain as a benefit.
296
LESSON XLII.
m a53-
Other verbs of considering, with those of choosing, etc
wh.ch take a second accusative of uhis sort in English, are
followed by apreposition (fur, ju) in CJerman (see Less. XLIX)
254. ACCUSATIVK AFTER INTRANSITIVE VerbS.
I. Intransitive Verl. may sometimes be followed hy an
accusative of a meaning akin to their own, called the ..L/.
accusative, as : *
^cf; ijabc eincii frf>oncn a:roum fletraumt, I have dreamt
a beautiful dream.
_ 2. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative of that which
is effected or produced by the action they express, as :
?ietru^ mciittc bittcre Xf^vhitn, Peter wept bitter tears
3. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative followed by
an adjective, etc., as /aa/fw^ predicate, as :
^d) l)aU miff) \ttii acoeffcn, I have eaten enough (lit
have eaten myself satisfied).
®a^ 5linb JDcinte firj in ben ^rjlof, The child has cried
Itself to sleep.
Remark. -The Accusative in all these constructions, ex-
cept the last which is not used in the passive, becomes a m^i-
tnative in the passive construction ; that of the thing after
e^ren remains accusative; with fragen and mtxy, the ace. of
the thing is not used in the passive.
For the accusative after ReflexiveV^rU, see § 216- a%^r
Impersonal N^xh?., see § 219 ; ^ii^r Prepositions, see §§ L ,0 -
after some Adjectives, it replaces the Genitive (see §'24,'
and Remarks). ^ ^ ^5'
265. Adverbial Accusative.
I. The Accusative i. ^i.ed adverbially to express time (see
§ 184, i) and measur, .^s .c § 185, 4) ; also distance a-.d w.v .fter
verbs of motion, as : "^
ng:, etc.,
:lish, are
XLIX)
i by an
cognate
ireamt
t which
■ tears,
wed by
fh (lit.,
5 cried
ns, ex-
a ?iom-
r after
ace. of
; after
§245,
e (see
v after
255I
ACCUSATIVE.
297
3* bin fcrj8 gutc WxUm sefo^ren, I have driven six
full miles.
2BcIc^en SBcg tvcrbcn 3ie oeF^en ? Which way will you
go.?
The Accusative is used also in absolute constructions
especially with participles, as : '
@r fam ju mir, Oen §ut in ber §anb. He came to me
hat in hand.
(Sr ftanb ba, bte 9rugen in bie §5^c gcri^tct He stood
there [with] eyes uplifted. '
EXERCISE XLII.
A. 1. Also, Sie haben sich entschlossen, uns morgen friih zu
verlassen? 2. Ich muss wohl, da meine Geschaftsangelegen-
heiten mir keinen langeren Aufenthalt erlauben. 3 Sie reisen
naturlich mit dem zweiten Zug ab.? 4. Wissen Sie, um wie viel
Uhr derselbe in B. ankommt .? 5. Ich ka.nn es Ihnen nicht ganz
genau sagen, aber er kommt gegen vier Uhr fdes) Nachmittags
an. 6. Das ist mir viel zu spat. Man erwartet mich schon um
halb 2'A^olf auf meinem Bureau. 7. In dem Falle mfissen Sie
wohl den Schnellzug nehmen, der schon um drei V-rtel auf
sieben abfahrt. 8. Es lant sich nicht andern. 9. Gut ich
werde Sie Punkt sechs Uhr wecken lassen. 10. Ich danke
Ihnen ; das wird durchaus nicht notig sein, da ich meine Weck-
uhr bei mir habe. 11. Wie viel Zeit brauchen Sie, sich anzu-
kleiden? 12. Zwanzig bis fiinfundzwanzig Minuten ; aber ich
werde noch mehreres einzupacken haben. 13. Dann ware es
jedenfalls besser, die Weckuhr auf halb sechs zu stellen. 14
Bitte, sagen Sie mir genau, wie viel Uhr es jetzt ist ; ich furchte
meme Uhr geht nach. 15. Es ist gerade neun Minuten vor elf
1 «.. 1st es moglich ! Dann geht meine Uhr ja vor, anstatt nach
oiiid Sic gewiss, dass Ihre Uhr richtig geht? 17. Jawohl • ich
habe sie heute nach der Stadtuhr gestellt. 18. Es wird spat •
298
LESSON XLII.
[§§ 255-
Ich muss mich schlafen legen, 11m morgen friih aufstehen zu
konnen. li). Also machen wir es auf diese Weise : Sie stehen
um halb sechs auf, urn fiinf Minuten nach sechs friihstiicken Sie,
um funfundzwanzig Minuten nach sechs wird der Wagen vor-
fahren und in zehn Minuten sind Sie auf dem Bahnhofe. Dann
haben Sie noch zehn Minuten librig, um Ihr Billet' zu losen
und Ihr Gepiick einschreiben zu lassen. Jetzt, gute Nacht !
20. Gute Nacht, schlafen Sie wohl !
B. 1. Do not trust those who flatter you. 2. Do not be-
lieve them, for flatterers are liars. 3. I always considered my
father as my truest friend. 4. The general commands the sol-
diers : the soldiers obey the general. 5. What is^the_name
of the gentleman whom we have just met ? His name has
escaped me. (5. You should never forget to thank those who
help you. 7. How does this hat, which I bought myself yester-
day, please you ? 8. It does not become you very well ; it is
too large for you. 1). When I was going to the railway-station,
a boy met me and gave me a telegram. 10. May I ask you if
Mr. H. is related to you ? 11. He resembles me very much,
but he is not related to me. 1;2. Mr. B. has been ordered, on
account of ill-he ilth, to go to a warmer climate. He has been
forbidden to pass the winter in the North. 1 3. How long does
he remain absent .? 14. He is to remain absent at least four
months. 15. Last week I ordered (myself) an overcoat at the
tailor's, which he was to bring me to-day. l(i The Niagara Falls
are considered (one considers, etc.) as one of the greatest
wonders^of^the^world. 17. People say of one who sleeps
very soundly that he sleeps the sleep of the righteous. 18.
May I ask you to assist me, or at least to advise me.? 19. I
should be very glad to be able to help you. '20 1 am in need
of money, and should not like to ask any one else for it.
257]
THE PRESENT.
299
LESSON XLIII.
THE INDICATIVE MOOD:-SYNTAX OF ITS TENSES.
256. The Indicative is the mood of reality and direct
statement. As the tenses are used with reference to time
in the Indicative only, their proper use is given here.
^^'7* The Present.
The Present Tense answers to all the English forms of
that tense (e. g., id; lobe = I praise, am praismg, do praise),
and is used :
1. To denote action now going on, as :
^a^5 Rinh ftjliift. The child is sleeping (now).
2. To state a general fact or custom, as :
S)er ©c^nee ift Wd% The snow is white.
^tx Dc^fe frip (sJra^, The ox eats grass.
3. For the imperfect in historical narrative, to give greater
vividness, as :
©efc^tDtnb 5cBt er einen etein auf unb tuirft benfelben bem
§unbe, ber if)n beif^en mia, an ben Ab^f, Quickly he
picks up a stone, and throws it at the dog, who is
about to attack him.
4. For the English perfect (as in French), when the action
or state continues in the present, the past beifig inferred and
the present alone expressed, as :
2l>ie lange ift cr [rf;on !ranf ? How long has he been
ill .? (N. B. — He is still ill.)
S* OP^P f^'it ac^t %z^,y^^\\ luteber gur @c6ule, I have been
going to school again for the last week (and am still
going).
Note. This construction is very common w
fcit.
300
LESSON XTJII.
(§§257-
5. For the future very commonly, where no ambiguity
would arise, particularly to replace the English form ' am
going to,' as:
^c^ fj^rctfic moreen einen 33ricf an meincn SSater, I am
going to write a letter to my father to-morrow.
258.
Tin: Imperfect.
The Imperfect is used :
1. As the historical {narrative^ preterite, when an event
is told in connection with others, as :
^m 3(nfang f^uf ©ott .s>imincl iinb Grbc, unb 3l(lc^5 mar
li)ii[tc unb Iccr u. f. \q., And in the beginning God cre-
ated heaven and earth, and all was waste and
void, etc.
2. To denote customary, continued or contempo-
raneous action, replacing the English forms * was doing/
'used to do,' as:
@r ging jeben ^ag lun bier Uf)r (xv&, He used to go out
every day at four o'clock.
3lUr juljrcn an bcv 5lirdie ijorbei, al§ bie Uf>r elf fr^Iufl,
We were driving past the church, as the clock
struck eleven.
259. The Perfect.
1. The Perfect indicates a past event as complete and
no longer continuing, thus :
^d> ^ttBc gclcbt imb gcUcBct, I have lived and bved
(and both my life and my love are ended).
2. The Perfect is used of an event as a separate and
independent fact, simply asserted as true without refeience
to any other, ns :
(^3ott ^at bic Selt crjrfinffcn, God created the v^orld ;
26l]
THE PERFECT.
301
but in the sentence :
©ott frjuf bic 2BeIt in [cc^^ 2aQcn unb ru^tc am
fiebenten, God created the world in six days, and
rested on the seventh,
the imperfect is used, because the two events are connected.
3. The Perfect is used (apart from historical narrative), in
preference to the Imperfect, of an event which has not been
witnessed or participated in by the speaker, as :
©eftern ift ein Hinb crtrunfen {Pcrf.), A child was
drowned yesterday ; — but :
©efterncrtranf {Impf.) ein ^inb, al^ id; am Ufcr ftanb,
A child was drowned yesterday, when I was stand-
ing on the shore. .
Remark. — This distinction between the use of the Perfect
and Imperfect is not accurately observed, but it is always
better to render the English forms ' was doing,' 'used to do,'
by the Imperfect.
4. The Perfect replaces the Future-Perfect, as the Present
does the Future, as :
Sc^ iuerbe !ommen, fobalb id; meine ©efd^afte obgcmor^t
^ok, I shall come, as soon as I have (i. e., shall
have) finished my business.
^®^' The Pluperfect. •
The Pluperfect is used, as in English, of a past action
•mpleted before another was begun, thus :
Gr ^nttc feine STufgabe tioacnbct c^c Sie famen. He had
finished his exercise, before you came.
^^1* The Future.
The Future Is used ;
X. Of an action about to take place, as :
Unfer SSater ttiirb un§ loficn, Our father will praise us.
302
LESSON XLIII.
[§§261-
2. To denote probability or supposition, as :
(S§ mirb mciit ^i^rubcr fciii, bcr aui^efummcu i[t. It is
probably my brother who has arrived.
262.
The Future-Perfect.
The Future-Perfect is the Perfect in the Future, and
expresses probability even more frequently than the simple
Future, as :
^er 33nef tuirb fc^on ge[tern gcfommcn jcin. The letter
probably arrived yesterday.
EXERCISE XLIII.
A. 1. Diese Hitze ist unertraglich ; ich glaube, nie einen so
heissen Sommer erlebt zu haben. 2. Und wie schwiil es ist !
Sieht es nicht sehr nach Regen aus ? 3. Richtig, da sind
schon die ersten Regentropfen, und ich meine, vor einigen
Minuten Donner in der Feme gehort zu haben. 4. Das macht
mir einen Stri^h durch die Rechrung. Bei diesem Wetter
kann ich unmoglich zur Stadt gehen. 5. Fiir's Erste allerdings
nicht, aber das Gewitter wird nicht lange anhalten. 6. Das ist
ein vvahrer Platzregen ; so ein Regen ist dem Lande sehr notig.
7. Ja, ^\ ir haben diesen Sommer iiberhaupt sehr wenig Regen
gehabt, aber vorigen Winter desto mehr Schnee. 8. Horen
Sie, das war ein Knall ! 9. Ja, und wie schnell der Donner
auf den Bhtz folgte ! Furchten Sie sich vor dem Blitze? 10.
Seitdem es voriges Jah" ixi unserer Nahe eingeschlagen hat, bin
icn ein wenig angstUch. ] 1. Das glaube ich schon, aber sehen
Sie doch, jetzt hagelt es noch sogar! 1;>. Das braucht das
Land gewiss nicht, aber die Hagelkorner sind nicht grosz
genug, um viel Schaden anzuriciiten. 13. Es fancrt schon an.
sich aufzuhellen ; das schhmmstfi ist vorbei. 14. Wie sich die
Luft abgekiihlt hat ! 15. Und wie schnell ! Das ist oft der
Fall hier zu Lande. 16. Jawohl; <siinner» Sie si<:t ni^ht df^s
262]
SYNTAX OF THE TENSES.
303
letter
vvechsclliaften Wetters, das wir vorigen Friihling gehabt haben ?
17. Besonders im Marz unci Anfang April. IS. Eincn Tag
thaute es, den nachsten fror es, und am dritten Tage regnete
Oder schneite es gar. 19. Dann gab es wieder eine Ilitze
wie mitten im Sommer; schon im April hatten wir fast
achtzig Grad Fahrenheit. 20. Da scheint die Sonne wieder ;
ich sagte Ihnen ja, dass das Gewitter nicht lange anhalten
wUrde. 21. Da haben Sie Recht ; jetzt muss ich mich auf den
Weg machen.
B. 1. A misfortune seldom comes alone. 2. Schlegel trans-
lated Shakespeare's works into German. 3. Is your father at
home } No, he has been away for three weeks, but he is (prob-
ably) coming back to-morrow morning. 4. As soon as I have
news of his arrival, I shall come again. 5. During my illness
I used to go for a drive two hours every day. 6. Are you
going (to go) to the concert this evening .? I do not think I
shall go. 7. Have you an engagement elsewhere ? No, but I
am going to bed immediately, as I start for Boston to-morrow
morning at seven o'clock. 8. People (man) are often con-
scious of bad habits, which they cannot get rid of. 9. Have
you been long in America? I have Wn here since my fifteenth
year. 10. This is probably a letter from my mother, for tl:iat is
her hand-writing. 11. We had hardly been at home half an
hour, when it began to rain. 12. Shakespeare is considered
the greatest poet of the English nation. ] 3. He was born at
Stratford-on-Avon, and passed his youth in that place. 14. As
a young man he went to London, became celebrated there, and
died in the year 16 16 in his native^town. 15. The sun was
setting, and the long [and] desperate combat was not yet
decided. 16. For the third time our brave soldiers throw
themselves upon the batteries of the enemy. 17. Nothing
could resist this attack ; the enemy wavers, and the victory is
ours. 18. But what a dearly-bought victory! 19. He, who
304
LESSON XMV.
[§§263
led the soldiers into the rombnt, comes not h.uk with them.
liO. Yonder he hes cold and silent, and our triunip' becomes
bitter mourning.
LESSON XLIV.
THE CONDITIONAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE.
2^»^. TnK C'oNDirioNAi,.
1. 'i'he Conditional tenses are, in form, subjunctive pc^A
tenses, answering to the initure as a present.
2. They indicate possible futurity, and coincide with the
Inipf. and IMupf. Subj. in their use in conditional clauses, and
\vill therefore be treated conjointly with them (see § 267,
below).
NoTK. The Tenses of the Conditional are a new formation; the
Impf. and Thipf. Subj. having, in the older stages of tlie hmguage, per-
formed the function of the Conditional.
2(»4. 'I'he Subjunctive Mood is used much more fre-
quently in German than in Kn«;lish, the distinction between
Indicative and Subjunctive being almost entirely obliterated
in the latter language.
2(>5. The Surjunctive in Indirect Statements.
The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Statements or
Quotations (^see also § 87), i. e., when the words used are
quoted in substance only, and not as they were spoken, espe-
cially after a verb in the principal clause signifying :
{a) Imparting of information (statement, report, con-
fession, reminding, etc.), as:
aitttuortcn, answer crjaf^lcn, relate
behauptcn, assert ctcftcBcn, confess
beric^ten, report jageit, say
2661
SUHJLJNCTIVK IN INDIRECT STATKMKNTS. 305
con-
(^) Apf^n'hcnsiofi, as :
bcnfcn, th>iiU
cvinncvn (rell.), remember
fu()lcn, feel
(;5ren, hear
(c) CoHtemplation with
fiird^tcn, fear
frcucn (rell.), rejoice
niaubcn, believe
()offcn, hope
(//) Re(]ucst, command ^
befcl^lcn, command
bitten, ask
crmal)nen, admonish
mcincn, be of opinion
mcrfcu, observe
fcfjHcfKMi, conclude
luiffcn, know
various emotions, as :
h)imbcrn (refl.), wonder
Juitufiten, wish
jtueifcln, doubt
advice, etc., as :
raten, advise
bcrlangcn, demand
266. The Tensk in Indirect Statements.
7'he verb of the Indirect Statement is, as a rule, in the
sanse tense as it would have, if the statement were made
dijf:ctly (see § 87, 2), i. e., the tense of the Indirect Statement
is the same as that of the Direct.
Remarks. — i. An Indirect Statement is always a subordi-
nate clause.
2. The conjunction ba^ may be omitted in such clauses,
which will then have the construction of a principal se?itence
(i. e., verb second ; see § 87, 3).
3. The Indicative may replace the Subjunctive in Indirect
Statements, when the speaker wishes to represent his own
belief in the correctness of the statement, as :
^d; I^abc ge(;bvt, bajj mciu ^ruber \x(xxd i(i, I have
heard that my brother is ill {and he is ill).
©ie mujtc, \}a^ ber Spiegel Jeine Unmat^r^eit \^X(i^, unb
merlte, ba^ ber ^dger fie betrogen jatte, etc. (Grimm,
3o6
LESSON XLIV.
266-
1
Sneeii'iffc/irn, p. 52, I. i), She knew that the
mirror did not tell a lie, and saw that the huntsman
had deceived her {an ii lie had deceived her).
But the Subjunctive is used, when the truth of the state-
ment is not vouched for, or when any doubt is cast upon
it, as ;
%(x^ bo^baftc SSeib <\\\ ftc. auf imb mdntc, fie l^attc
0nccmittd;cib5 l^uiuic unb Scbcr ot'oeijon {ibid., p. 49,
1. 8), The malicious woman devoured them, and
thought she had eaten Sneewittchen's lung and
liver (whereas she had not eaten them).
4. The tense of the Indirect Statement does not depend on
that of the principal clause, and the sequence of tenses ^\\\Q\i is
observed in English is not found in German, as :
{Engl.) He said he was not ill.
{Germ.) @r facjtc, cr fci nic^t !ranf.
Notes. — i. The Subjunctive is unusual after the verbs under (3) and
(c) in the previous section (except pvcn), if the principal clause has a
present tense.
2. The rule as to tense is not always strictly observed, the tense used
being sometimes determined by the want of distinctive subjunctive forms.
Thus in the following sentence two different tenses are used :
5lud) fd)Io(3 cv, c8 miiffc bie earje Dom @(a§mdnnlehi nid)t \t\)x
bcfainit fciii, nub biii'epnid) mit^tfitnur tuentgcn)i[fcn(HAUFF,
Das kalte Herz, p. 8, 1. 7), Further, he concluded that the
legend of the Glass-manikin could not be very well known, and
only a few people could know the verse.
3. After an Impf. in the principal clause, the Subjunctive is usual in
the Indirect Statement, except as in the second exami)le under Kemark 3,
above.
4. The verb of the principal sentence sometimes remains unexpressed,
or is replaced by a noun of kindred meaning, as :
(Sr X\z% mid) abmcifen, tuetl ev franf fef, He refused to see me,
because {as he asserted) he was ill.
266-
that the
luntsinan
he state-
ast upon
fic mtt
(/., p. 49,
em, and
mg and
;pend on
which is
367I
HYPOTHETICAL PERIODS.
307
er (6) and
use has a
mse used
ive forms.
nid)t fe^r
t (Hauff,
that the
lown, and
usual in
emark 3,
xpressed,
) see me,
3d) (icf fo fd)iicU \\)k niogliri), am J^urr^t, id) moiitt jit fpcit foiii.
men, I ran as quickly as possible, from fear that I might come
too late.
55o« f^dttt id) flcfant? (Do you mean to say that) I said that?
This last construction is very frequent In German, to express empha-
tically a doubt as to the truth of a statement.
267. The Subjunctive and Conditional in
Hypothetical Periods.
Example of a Hypothetical Period:
If I had followed your advice, I should have been
happy.
1. The above sentence consists of two parts. Of these the
one expresses a condition, conceived, in this instance, as unreal
or impossible, viz. :
If I had followed your advice {which I did not^\
the other expresses a result, also unreal or unrealized, whirh
would have followed, had the condition been realized, viz. :
I should have been happy {which I am not).
2. In both parts of the above period (in the condition and
.n the result), the verb is in a past tense (Impf. or Plupf.)
of the Subjunctive Mood, as :
SBenn ic^ ^^ren gffat Bcfolgt ^attc (Plupf. Subj.), fo ttiin
\^ gliidiid; gctucfcn (Plupf. Subj.).
Remarks. — I. Either of the two clauses may stand first;
thus, the sentence given above may have the form :
^c^ h)are glu^Iic^ geirefen, it)cnn u. f. U).
2. The conjunction juenn may be omitted, especially when
the condition precedes the result, in which case the verb will
begin the sentence, as :
giittc \^ 3()ren ISi^i befolgt, fo todre ic^ glucffic^.
3o8
LESSON XLIV.
f"(2'7
3. If the result clause follows the condilional clause it.,
usually .ntroduced l,v the particle fo, and a;,aa,. when ,„ ,m
Js^o..t.ed m the preceding conditional clause Jee S 5c, and
Suti ■^''' *=°"''"'°"»' t«"«" '"''y rep-ace the Impf. and .'lupf.
Subj. m the apodosis, result or conclusion onh- as •
2Benn ic§ S^rcn Slat bcfolgt Ijattc, fo wUrbe ic^ gludli*
gcucfen fciit. '
• K^\ *u^ condition is stated without its unreality bein-
.mphed, the verb is in the Pres., Perf., or Fut. mJhT^:.
■ Senn er immi, fo luetbe ic^ fortge^eu. If he comes, I
Shall go away.
•as'if^Zs?"" ""^ *" '""■°'^"'''' •'>""«"'«"« or «I8 ,i,
et fie^t aug. Bis locnn (oi) et trani wate. He looks as
It he were ill.
(Sr fiefit a\i^, ale hjorc cr tranf.
268. Other Uses of the Subjunctive.
1. The Pres Subjunctive replaces the missing persons
(1 and 3.) of the Imperative Mood, the subject bein<. then
put after the verb, except in the 3. person, where it m^y al
precede, unless the pron. eie is used for the 2. person as •
@c^c er (or er Gef)e) nac^ ^an\t, Let him go home
a wis Jt .'"''''' "' '''"^^* Subjunctive are used to express
2Bare ic^ Bei g^nen ! Would that I were with you !
Note. .-This is really an elliptical conditional c\zn^^, with the result
unexpressed ; the full form may be supplied thus :
Sore ic^ bet 3i,nen, (fo ttjcire id^ gluda^).
nafi?
a68]
USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
309
use, It ij
>en jucun
i 59> and
id I'lupf.
ty being
^/'?v, as :
)mes, I
r 0(8 oli,
ooks as
, and the
persons
g then
ay also
, as :
Dme.
express
ou !
e result
3. The Subjunctive is used in clauses expressing purpose^
with the conjunctions baf^, auf ba^, bamit, as:
6r eilte, bn^ (auf bafe, bamit) or ,^uv rcd>tcn 3^tt onfiimc,
He hastened, (in order) that he might arrive in
good time.
4. It is also used after a negative or an indefinite relative, as :
^ier ift mcmonb, bev mid) nidU fcnnte, There is nobody
here, who does not know me.
^d; luerbe eg \kj\xxK, itJOg ttur^ bai?on fommen moflc, I shall
do it, no matter what may come of it.
Note. — The Indicative is also admissible in these constructions.
5. The Impf. Subjunctive is sometimes used to express
possibility y as :
%oA gingC tt)of)I, That might (possibly) do.
3^ bar^tc, ba§ hiarc gut, I should think that might
be good ;
and especially with the Modal Auxiliaries, as :
^a§ miit^tc (fiinntc, biirftc) tt)af)r fein. That may (pos-
sibly) be true.
6. Observe the following idiom :
2Bte bcm audj) [ei. However that may be.
EXERCISE XLIV.
A. 1. Teh habe gehort, dass Sie Ihr Haus verkauft haben ;
ist das wahr ? 2. Ja, meine alte Wohnung gefiel mir nicht
mehr. 3. Wie kommt das ? Ihr Haus schien mir immer eine
sehr elegante und bequeme Wohnung zu sein. 4. Ein besse-
res lasst sicli nicht leicht finden; allein, seit(dem) die vielen
Fabriken in der Nahe gebaut worden sind, gefallt mir die
Umge'bung nicht mehr. 5. Das kann ich mir schon denken.
Der Rauch von den Fabriken muss sehr unangenehm sein.
6. Das ist nicht das Schlimmste ; das fortwahrende Gerausch
310
LESSON XLIV.
[SS>e8-
bnngt cncn oft zum Vcrzweifeln. 7. Haben Sie ein andcres
H.1US geknuft ? H. Nein, vorlaufig habe ich ,nir ein Haus in
der Sch,Ilor.strasze gemietet. sobald id, aber einen passenden
nauplatz f,„don kann. werde ici, bauen. !». Haben Sie sich
sclion nach einem lianplatz umgeselien? lo. id, habe die
ganze Stadt durchsud,t, aber ohne Erfolg. II. Sie mUssen
sehr scliwer /u befriedigen sein. V>. Das gemde nid,t, nur
bestehe ,ch auf dre. liedingungen : Frische Luft, dne ruhige
btrasze und eine schone Aussicht. i;i. Warum bauen
Flusses? 14. Daran habe ich schon gedacht, nur sind mir
die re,se ein vvenig zu hoch. 15. Das wHrde «;V/. nicht
abl,alten, so lange ich nur bekanie, was ich wiinschte. 1 fi Es
w,rd m.r wohl nichts iibr.g l,Ieiben, als mich dore anzukaufen.
17. he..bsicht,gen S.e, mit Backstcin oder mit Quaderstein zu
bauen? 18. Ich muss das erst mit meinem Architekten
besprechen. 1<.. Welchen Architekten haben Sie gewahlt.^
^0. Herrn Kalk, der den I'lan meines alien Hauses ent-
worfen hat. 21. Dann bekommen Sie jedenfalls ein gutes
Haus. Ich wiinsche Ihnen GlUck zu Ihrem Unternehmen.
^4. Danke vielmals.
^.1. An old beggar-man said: "When I was youn^r I
could have worked if I had wished (M,n), and now I should
be glad to work, if I could, but I cannot. Alas ! had I only
been more industrious." 2. A certain French king is said to
have died of hunger, for fear that he might be poisoned. 3 I
wish my house were not so far from yours. 4. I too • if the
way were not so long, we could visit each other oftener
5. We were astonished to see Mr. B. on the street this
mornmg, as we thought he was still in England (J They
say he mtended to remain three months longer in En-land
but that he was obhged to come home on account of business
matters. 7. What did the gentlemnn wh-»r — M-f --^ ]
[§§ 208-
a69j
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
3"
1 anderes
Haus in
iissenden
Sie sich
fiabe die
rnUssen
icht, nur
le ruhige
J bauen
seit des
iind mir
<:h nicht
i6. Es
ikaufen.
stein zu
litekten
ewahlt ?
>es ent-
n gutes
ehnien.
5ung, I
should
I only
said to
i. 3. I
if the
iftener.
2t this
They
igland,
isiness
let ask
you ? He asked me how far it was to the town-hall. 8. The
messenger asserted that he could not wait longer because
he had no time, but I believe it was for (au^ + dat.)
another reason. !>. A certain gentleman wanted to set his
watch, and asked his servant what o'clock it was. 10. The
servant answered that he had no watch, but that he had
seen a sun-dial in the neighbour's garden. 11. To^this
the gentleman replied absent-mindedly: "Go immediately
and ask him for permission to bring it up here." 12.
Do you believe thu. tiie (German language is as difficult
as the French? l.'i. When I began to study German, I
thought it was not so difficult as French, but now I believe
otherwise. 14. I should be very sorry, if the news were true
which I heard this morning. 15. The boys must not skate
to-day ; the ice is too thin, and they might break through
and be drowned. Hi. Please tell me who translated Shake-
speare's works into German. 17. Would it be worth while to
take a carriage to drive to the bank ? No, I do not think so.
18. He said that of us ! I should never have believed it.
H). I asked the bookseller: "Have you Schiller's works.?"
He answered : " \ have not_a single copy of them left.
20. I asked the bookseller if he had Schiller's works, and he
answered that he had not^a single copy of them left.
LESSON XLV.
THE IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE MOODS.
269. ' THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
The Imperative expresses a coimnand and corresponds
precisely to the English Imperative. The Imperative proper
occurs only in the 2. person, the otiier persons being supplied
by the Pres. Subjunctive (see § 26^;, i, above).
X.'
3^2
LESSON XLV.
[§§269-
Remarks. — 1. The pronoun of the 2. Pers. is only ex-
pressed for the sake of emphasis or contrast, as :
©inge bu. Do jou sing,
©e^t ijr, h)ir iDerben bleiben, Vou go, we shall remain.
Note. — The pronoun, if expressed, always /o//ows the verb, as above.
2. Where no definite person is addressed (e. g., when an
author is address'ng his readers), man should be used with
the Pres. Subj., as :
9Kttn benfe fic^ meinen ©c^recfen. Imagine my fright.
3- The Modal Auxiliaries [oaen, tniiffen, laffen are used with
imperative force, as :
®u fottft nic^t toten. Thou shalt not k
@r muf^ fc^reiben. He must write.
Cog (lagt, laffen ©ic) ung cjefjcn. Let us go.
4. The Present and Future Indicative are sometimes used
with emphatic imperative force, as :
^u hUibfi ^ier ! You are to stay here !
®ie mcrbcn bie ©iite ^oficn, morgen fritfjcr §u fommen,
■ You will have the goodness to come earlier to-morrow!
5. The Past Participle and Infinitive are also used in ex-
clamatory clauses with the force of an Imperative, as :
Sugcfoircn, ^utf c^er ! Drive on, coachman !
©tiir ftc^cn ! Stand still !
©infieigcn! All aboard!
6. In elliptical and exclamatory clauses a command is fre-
quently expressed by an adverbial prefix or prepositional
phrase, without a verb, as :
5rtf(J ouf ! tameraben, oufg «?fcrb ! ttufg ^fcrb !
Up ! comrades, to horse ; to'horse ! (Schiller.)
3)rauf unb bran ! Up and at them !
#er 311 mir I (Come) hitner to me ! (Goethe, J^ausf.)
\/
[§§269-
only ex«
remain.
as above,
vhen an
sed with
ight.
sed with
VO
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT JU.
313
Bs used
ommen,
sorrow.
in ex-
is fre-
itional
LLER.)
^aust.)
THE INFINITIVE MOOD.
2 70. The Infinitive as Substantive.
The Infinitive is a verbal substantive, and any infinitive
may be used as a substantive of the neuter gender, declined
after the Maht Model (§ 16).
Remarks. — I. The tnfin. as Subst. indicates action, as:
^a^Sefen, ' (the act of) reading,'— but: gute Sectiire, ^good
reading, good literature.*
2. Some Infinitives have become substantives entirely, as :
ba§ Seben, life ; bag ©ntfe^en, horror.
3. The Infinitive, either with or without ju, is often used as
subject of a verb, and as such may have an object by virtue
of its verbal character, as :
©ute Jreunbe (ju) ^akn ift 6effer aU reic^ (ju) fein.
271. The Infinitive without m.
The Infinitive without ju follows :
{a) The Modal Auxiliaries (see Lesson XXXIV); also
toerben in the formation of the future tense.
{b) The following verbs :
blei6en, remain taffen, let, allow, permit
finben, find lefjren, teach
^ei^en, order, bid lernen, learn
^elfen, help mac^en, make
^oren, hear fe^en, see
and, in certain phrases, i^aben, as :
Tsc^ ^abe nic^t i)iel @elb auf ber '^awi liegen, I have not
much money lying in the bank.
^.^ ,.,i... yvi^vU diivi vtixci verbs ot motion in such phrases
as frajieren ge^en, reiten, fasten, ' to go for a walk, ride, drive ' ;
21
314
LESSON XLV.
[§§271-
fc^Iafen gefjen, 'to go to bed' (not = 'go to sleep,' which is
einfd;Iafcn), etc.
(d) As predicative subject, with beif^en, and as object with
ncnncn, ^cif^en, as :
®a^ f}ci^t fcf)ne(l fo^rcn. That is quick driving.
^a§ nennc (bci^c) id; fd)Iec&t aitfttiigcn, I call that be-
ginning badly.
Note. — The Past Participle is also admissible in this construction;
see § 281, 6, below.
Remarks. — i. After luiOen, Hcibcii, finben, f)i3ren, feben,
gc^cn, in the constructions given above, the German Infin.
corresponds to a Present Participle in English, as :
(5r blieb ftcjcn, He remained standing, etc.
2. The verbs under (/;), except bleiben and l;eiJ3en, also
admit of a ba§ clause after them, as :
^d) babe gebort (gefel;cn), bnjj er angefommen fei, I have
heard that he is come.
3. The verbs {;elfen, Ief)ren, lernen also take an Infin. with
jtt after them, as :
3d; '\)QiSiz gelernt, ^u Gef)ord)en, I have learnt to obey.
4. For the use of the Infin. for the P. Part, with these
verbs, see § 199.
Note. — The verbs f)c(fen, lcf)reit, lerncii do not substitute the Infin. for
the P. Part, when followed by an Infin. with ju (see Rem. 3, above, and
example).
. 5. For the Infin. with passive sense after laffen, see § 200,.
7 (r), Note.
272. The Infinitive with gu.
The Infinitive with ju is used after other verbs, such as :
{a) Those implying something to be attained, done, or lejl
undone^ as :
272]
THE INFINITIVE WITH JU,
315
anfangen, ) .
6eginnen, I ^"^^"
berfuc^en, J ^^
unterneF) men, undertake
Derbieten, forbid
h)agen, venture
hjarnen, warn
h)un[d;en, wish
befe^Ien, command
bitten, beg
erfauben, allow
fiirc^ten, fear
l^offen, hope
raten, advise
(^) Tnose implying a suspe^ision of judgment, as :
befc^ulbigen, accuse fc^einen, seem
eiubUben (refl.), imagine fc^meic^eln (refl.), flatter one's
glauben, believe self,
leugnen, deny
{c) The se indicating various states of mind, as •
bereuen repent neb [ein, be acceptable (be
fmien (impers.), ) .^.^^ glad)
freuen (refl.), I jeib [ein (t^un), be unaccept-
able (be sorry)
Remarks— I. With most of these verbs the Infinitive may
be replaced by a bajj clause, and ..../ be so replaced unless
the subject of the action in the dependent clause is either
subject or direct object of the principal clause, as :
Gr gtaubt, febr gefc^icft ju fcin, He believes himself to
be very clever ; — or :
©r gtaubt, i)ttg er fe^r ge[d;icft ift.
©r ^offte, 3u fommen. He hoped to come ; — but :
^J^ ^offte, ba§ fein SSater !ommen hjerbe, (see § 26c o
He hoped that his father would come. '
@g i\l<xi mir leib, eie nid)t ge[d;en ^u ^aficn, I was sorry
not to have seen you ; — or ;
®g i\}^i mir reib, ba§ ic^ ®ie nid;t gefc^en \i^ii^ ;-but:
3i6
LESSON XLV.
[§272
m
@§ ift mir lieb, btt^ 3ic* gefommen finb, I am glad that
you have come.
2. The Infinitive clause as f/i'recf object is often represented
in the principal clause by the neut. pron. C0 (with prepositions
by brt, see § 277, below), as :
3d} nnaoc C0 nid;t, alleiu ju !ommen, I do not venture to
come alone.
Observe the idiomatic use of the Infinitive with ju after
t^akn, fcin, ftcf)cn, in the following examples :
^d; TjalJC ibm cincn 33ncf ju iibercjebcn, I have a letter
to deliver to him.
(S^5 ift (ftcl;t) ju cricartcn. It is to he expected.
Note. — In the latter example, the infin, has a passive signification.
EXERCISE XLV.
A. 1. Guten Morgen, alter Freund ; nichts konnte mir gele-
gener sein, als dich anzutreffen. 2. Ich freue mich herzlich,
dich zu sehen ; ich habe schon lange einen Besuch von dir
erwartet. 3. Du soUtest doch wissen, dass man wenig Zeit
hat, Besuche zu machen, wenn man sich auf ein Examen vor-
bereitet. 4. Das ist wahr, aber lass dir gratulieren ; du hast ja
ein glanzendes Examen bestanden. 5. Es ist mir freilich vicl
besser gelungen, als ich erwartete. (i. Was gedenkst du jetzt
zu thun, da du promoviert hast ? 7. Gerade das wollte ich mit
dir besprechen ; du kannst mir vielleicht mit gutem Rate bei-
stehen. 8. Ich habe mich entschlosser, auf ein Jahr nach
Europa zu gehen ; ware es nicht auch fiir dich sehr vorteilhaft,
ein Jahr dort zuzubringen ? 9. Sehr vorteilhaft, besonders
wegen meines Sprachstudiums, aber ich fiirchte meine Verhalt-
nisse erlauben es mir nicht. 10. Das sehe ich nicht ein, es
wird nur wenig mehr kosten dort zu leben als hier. 11. Bist
du deiner Sache gewiss ? 1 2. Ja wohl, weisst du, ein Vcttcr von
mir ist kiirzlich von Europa zuriickgekommen, und ich habe
[§272
glad that
presented
^positions
venture to
1 ju after
e a letter
ification.
mir gele-
L herzlich,
h von dir
^enig Zeit
amen vor-
du hast ja
•eilich vicl
t du jetzt
te ich mit
Rate bei-
ahr nach
'orteilhaft,
besonders
e Verhalt-
ht ein, es
11. Bist
V^cttcr von
ich habe
§272]
THE INFINITIVE WITH JU.
317
mich bei ihm genaii nach Allem crknndigt. 13. Wo hat er die
Zeit zugebracht? 11. Tclh in England, teils in Frankreich
(undj teils in Deutschland, und er behauptet, dass man in Eu-
ropa wenigstens ebenso billig lebcn kann wie in Amerika. 15
Ab.er du hast die Reisekosten nicht mit eingerechnet. l(i. nL-
ttirlich nicht, aber man reist jetzt viel billiger als man fruher
reiste. 17. Hast du dein Billet schon gelost ? IH. Noch nicht
aber ich habe mich darnach erkundigt und finde, dass man fiir
hundert Thaler oder vveniger uber New York nach Liverpool
reisen kann. 19. Zweite Klasse natiirlich. 20. O nein, erste
Klasse, und mit einer sehr guten Dampferhnie. 21. 1st es mog-
lich ? Du hast mich fast iiberredet, die Reise zu unternehmen
22. Komm nur heute Abend zu mir und vvir werden die Sache
welter besprechen. 23. Gut ; also bis Abend.
B. 1. Have the goodness to read this letter for me ; I have
left my spectacles up-stairs, and cannot see very well. 2 Please
read pretty loud, for my heanng is bad. 3. Help me to do my
work, and I will help you to learn your lessons. 4. When you
(man) do not know what to say (what you shall say), say nothing
5. You will now close your books ; we have read enough for
the present. 6. -To err is human; to forgive, divine," is a
verse from a poem by the English poet Pope. 7. I have so
much work to do that I do not know where to begin. 8 Show
the child how it is to learn its lesson. 9. I am tired of read-
ing, and must now retire to rest. 10. " Eat, little bird eat "
said a child to her bird. 11. " Thou shalt not stea^ is (called)
the eighth commandment. 12. The habit of rising early is of
great importance when one has a^great^deal of work to do.
13. If one wants to rise early, one siiould go to bed early.
14. An old, well-known proverb says : " Man does not live to
eat, but eats to live." 15. Another proverb savs .- " Speal-ing
IS silver ; silence is gold.' 16. When I arrived at the railway-
station I found that I had no money with me ; imagine my
3i8
LESSON XLVI.
[§§ 273
embarrassment. 17. The art of making glass was already
known to the ancients. 1 8. Are there any houses to sell or to
rent in your neighbourhood? 1*). I wish to speak to Mr.
Bell. 20. Have (laffcn) John black my shoes, for I am in a
hurry. 21. I have heard say that the celebrated bishop of G.
is coming ; would you not like to hear him preach .? 22. Yes.
I should like very much to hear him pro: c> when is (ioUcn)
he to come here? 23. We have had -■.- good^fortunc to
shoot three hares. 24. Some people would rather die than beg.
LESSON XLVI.
THE INFINITIVE MOOD (continued).
273. Infinitive of Purpose.
The Infinitive with ^u is used to express purpose, as :
9Jicin J-rcunb !am, mid; gu marncn. My friend came to
warn me.
Remarks. — i. The Infin. expressing purpose is generally
governed by the preposition um (see § 276, i, below), which
begins the clause, as :
^d; fomme, um Sic nac^ §aufe 511 Bvingcn, I come to fetch
you home.
2. An Infin. clause with ju is always preceded by a comma
in German.
3. This Infin. is also used, with or without 311, after adjec-
tives preceded by Jil, ' too,' or gcnug, ' enough,' as :
^d) it)ar ju miibc, (um) au^c3ct;en ju fiiuucu, I was too
tired to be able to go out.
©V i[t tcid; gcuui^, (um) icicle 'J)iener batten ju Xmsrw,
He is rich enough to keep many servants.
[§§ 273-
already
sell or to
k to Mr.
am in a
lop of G.
22. Yes.
s (iot(cn)
)rtune to
:han beg.
875]
INFINITIVE OF PURPOSE.
is:
came to
;enerally
'), which
: to fetch
. comma
;r adjec-
was too
fiinirit,
319
274. The Infinitive after Substantives.
The Infinitive with ju is used after substantives, nouns and
adjecuves, akin to the verbs in § .73, to express purpose,
m ^aU 8ufJ, cincn Qpa^kxQanQ ^u madjen, I have a
mind to take a walk.
%^\)^ii^ fcinc Scit mic^ mi^ if;m umjufclicn, I had no
time to look after him.
©r ift ftet^ krcit ben ^frmen ju Ijcrfcn, He is always
ready to help the poor.
275. The Accusative with the Infinitive.
mo'Hern ""p''"'"' ."'' ''' '"'"^^^^" ^^ inadmissible in
modern German; hence verbs denoting statement, know-
ledge, perception, etc., must be followed by a boft clause, as :
{E7igl) I know him to be a good man,
{Germ) ^6) \q^x% baft cr ein outer 9}hnn i|l.
{E?igi:) I perceived her to be inattentive
{Germ) ^d; merfte, ^^^ ftc unaufincrffam mir.
^ Remarks. - i. in such sentences as those in the examples
given m the above section, the passive construction with the
Infin. IS also madmissible in German except impersonally, as :
{Engl) He is known to be a good man
{Germ) mm tocii ba§ cr mx outer mm ift; -or •
^^ ift befannt, baft cr u. f. lu.
2. Observe the different relations of the accusatives in the
fcjliowing sentences :
320
LESSON XLVI.
[§§275-
{E?igl.) I begged him {obj. of * begged ') to come,
{Germ.) ^c^ bat t^n ju fommen.
{Engl.) I wish to see him {ohj. of * see '),
{Germ.) ^d; h)unfd;e, t^n ju [eF^en.
(^«^/.) I wish him {subj. of * come ') to come,
{Germ.) ^c^ iDunfd^e, ba^ cr fommc.
3. After glauben, the Infin. is admissible in German, but
not in English, when the subject of the action is the same in
both clauses, as :
{Germ.) ^c^ cjlaubte, redfit ge^ort ju ^ahtn,
{Engl.) I believed that I had heard aright.
When, on the contrary, the subjects are different, the Infin.
(with accus.) is admissible in English, but not in German, as;
{Engl.) I believe him to be an honest man,
{Germ.) 3c^ cjtaube, bag cr ein el^rlic^er 50^enfc^ t|!.
4. The English Infin. in objectiv indirect questions is
unusual in German, and should be replaced by a finite
clause, as :
{Engl.) He did not know where to go,
{Germ.) @r tt)u|te nic^t, too^in er geJjen folltc.
{Engl.) He told me what to do,
{Germ.) (gr fagtc mir, trag ic§ t^un fotttc.
276. The Infinitive governed by Prepositions.
I. Only three prepositions can govern an infinitive (with gu)
directly, viz.: uvx, 'in order,' ojne, 'without,' and (on)Ptttt
' instead of,' as :
©r fam, urn mic^ bon btefcm Unfatt ju fietttt^niSttgcn,
He came, in order to inform me of this accident.
I could not look at him, without laugh/«^ heartily.
277] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 32 1
9lnfla^t mic^ cjebulbicj aujuF^orcn, unterbrad; er mid)
bc[tdnbig, Instead of listen///^ to me patiently, he
kept constantly interrupting me.
Remarks. — i. Observe that in each of these examples the
preposition stands at the beginning of the clause, the Infini-
tive at the end^ with the words dependent on the Infinitive
between.
2. The Infinitive after obrtc and (an)ftatt may be replaced
by a ba§ clause. This is always the case when the subject of
the action is different in the two clauses (compare § 224,
2, b^ Rem.). Thus we may say :
Sc^ fuc^te borbeisufommen, ot?ne gefe^en ju tticrbcn (or :
o^ne ba^ ic^ gefe^en hjurbe), I tried to go past without
being seen ;
but we must say :
^d^ fudflte borbeigufommen, o^ne bag man mid5> fo^, I tried
to go past without any otie^s seeing me,
because the subjects of the two clauses are different.
277. With other prepositions, the Infinitive or btt§ clause
is represented in the principal clause by the adverb ba pre-
fixed to the preposition, as :
%^ begniigte mic^ bttmit, i^n meine Unjufriebenljeit mer!en
Jtt loifcit, I was contented with showing him my
dissatisfaction.
SSir Derlaffen un§ borauf, ba§ ©ie fommen, We rely on
your coming.
3c^ !onnte if)n nic^t btttan ber^tnbern, au^^ugc^cn, I could
not prevent him from going out (or : his going
out).
@r ioar eiferfiic^tig borauf, bafe tuir eingelaben hjorben
hJaren, He was jealous of our having been invited.
322
LESSON XLVI.
a77-
bannc^, ©ie itiicbcrjujc^cu.
ong to
2Bir fc^ncn uno
see you again
(Sx finbct ^i^cirtnuflcu boraii, tinbcr ju ntdtn, He finds
pleasure in teasing children.
©ie drc^erte fid; boriidcr, baft Juii [o fpdt tamen, She was
angry at our coming so late.
Remarks. — I. The preposition 'of ' is often omitted, as:
SDic md)xi<i)t, ba^ bcr ^yriebe unter5eid;nct luorbcn )oav,
The news of the peace being (having been) signtd.
2. The Infin. clause is only admissible when the subject of
the action is the same as in the principal clause (compare
§ 276, Rem. 2, above).
3. The English Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, must be
carefully distinguished from the Presexi^ Participle, with
which it has no connection.
4- The genitive or possessive adjective in English before
this Gerund will become the su/?/ea of the baf; clause in
German, as :
She was angry at our coming late, ©ie \\)ax bofe
baruber, bajj rtjjr 311 fpat famen.
He insisted on his sister's learning Latin, (Sr beftanb
barauf, bafe fcine Sr^lucftcr 2atein Icrntc (lernen foUtc).
5. In an itidirect question, oB takes t! j place of ba§, as :
@^ ge^t mic^ nic^t§ an, 06 er foinmt ober nid;t It does
not concern me, whether he comes or not.
6. V/nen the Gerund expresses an adverbial relation (time,
cause, etc.), it must oe expanded into an adverbial clause, as :
Before concluding, I shall make one more obser-
vation, ^^i; iii^ laiiicf^i:, ipevve id; nod; erne ^emerfuna.
mac^en.
277-
e long to
He finds
She was
itted, as :
ben )oar,
signtd.
ubject of
compare
must be
le, with
h before
lause in
oar bofe
: beftanb
n foUtc).
, as:
It does
n (time,
use, as :
I obser-
tierfunij.
278] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 323
On seeing me, he held out his hand to me, %U cr
mirfj fn^, ijklt cr mir bic §anb t)in.
In persuading others we persuade ourselves, ^ubem
toil* aubcrc iibcrrcbcn, ubcrrcbcu luir u\hi fclbft.
278. The Infinitive in Elliptical Constructions.
1. "he Infinitive is used, as in En<;lish, in various elliptical
constructions, without being dependent on any other word, as ;
Sarum mid) luocfcn? Why waken me ?
3lad) fcincm Slu^fc^en ju urtcilen. To judge from his
appearance.
2. For the Infinitive with the force of an Imperative, see
§ 269, Rem. 5, above.
EXERCISE XLVI.
A. 1. Nicht wa.ir, Fraulein B., Sie waren gestern Abend im
Konzert ? 2. Ja, waren Sie auch dort ? Ich habe Sie nicht
gesehen. 3. Das ist gern moglich ; unter so vielen Menschen
findet man sich nicht leicht. 4. Der Saal war gedrangt voll,
wahrscheinlich weil das Konzert zum Besten des neuen VVaisen-
hauses gegeben wurde. 5. Nicht allein das, sondern auch weil
die neue Sangerin, Fraulein M., zum ersten Male auftrat.
6. Das Publikum schien von ihr ganz entzuckt zu sein, und die
Zeitungen sind heute Morgen voll ihres Ruhmes. 7. Ich hahe
nie eine so klare und starke Stimme gehort. 8. In der Arie
aus Lohengrin hat sie sich besonders ausgezeichnet. <). Das
Lied von Schubert mit Harfen-Begleitung gefiel mir am besten.
10. Frau S. sang auch sehr gut, aber Sie schien e" 1 wenig
heiser zu sein. 11. Trotz dera, was die Kritiker sagen, gefiel
mir ihr Gesang besser als der von Frl. M. 12. Ich finde auch,
dass rAe. mit mehr Gefuhi singt und dass ihre Stimme geschulter
ist. 13. Was halten Sie vom Geigenspiel des Herrn K. ? 14. Es
muss sehr gut sein, dem Beifall nach zu urteilen, aber ich ver-
I
324
LESSON XLVI.
r§§a78
stehe mich nicht auf die Geige. ir>. Teh zich^ die Gc-gc jedem
andern Instrumenle vor. hi. Spicit Ihr ahcstcr l^ruder nicht
die Geige? 17. Ncin, aber er spicit die Klote und beglei.^et
mich oft, wenn ich auf dem Klavier sj)iele. 18. Hire Familie
.St uberhaupt sehr musikalisch. ]<,. Ja wohl, wir spielen fast
al e mehr Oder weniger. 20. Selbst Jhre kleinen Geschwister?
jl. Ja, Mane spielt die Guitarre, Anna die Geige und Frie-
dricb nimmt seit einigen Monaten Stunden auf dem Violon. cU
2:2. W.ssen Sie, ob viel fur das Waisenhaus iihrig bleibt, nach-
dem alle Kosten bestritten sind? till Etwa flinf hundert
inaler, doch beabsichtigt man, ein zweites Konzert im Laufe
des Wmters far denselben Zvveck zu gebcn.
B. h Let us (indef.) not return evil for evil. 2. Do what
IS right, let It cost what it may. 3. The eighth command-
ment says that we are not to steal. 4. He was punished for
havmg neglected his duty. .5. The teacher told us we should
close our books, we had read enough for the present.
u ^^^^'r ^°'' ^^^'''^' ^""^ ^^^^ y°"" ^i"'« brother your
Chair. 7. In German they say of one who buys anythin-
without seeing it that he buys a cat in a bag. 8. Do you
care to go for a drive with us ? 9. No, thank you. Do you ride
mxjn); I prefer to walk. 10. Who has left these books Ivinr
on the table .Ml. John ; and he says he forgot to take them up.
1^. Bid him carry them up immediately into the study, and
then let him come down here. 13. Every one thought Mr.
N. to be a rich man, but he failed (perf.) lately. 14. I have not
^ single pen fit to write with, and I have a dozen letters to
>-rite 15. Do not allowyourself to be disturbed by my com-
ing ; do not stop writing. ] 6. The beggar, of whom we were
speaking m another exercise, passed his youth in idling
instead of working. 17. Little Frederick had the misfortune
to break an arm while skating, and he was obliged to remain
lying in bed a week. 18. Alfred the Great divided the day
s8o]
THE PARTICIPLES.
325
into three parts : one part was devoted to business, the
second to reading, praying rnd studying, and the third to
eating, sleeping and pleasure. 1 9. We wished our friends to
come in, but they had no time. tiO. I am glad to have made
your acquaintance, ii I . If you go hunting without your father
knowing it, he will be very nuich displeased. 22. Our teacher
used to insist on our writing a German exercise every day,
pnd it was impossible for us to neglect this duty without his
knowing it. 23. Before going home we must go to visit your
old friend L. If you went away without his seeing you, he
would be very sorry. 21. We heard some one coming behind
us on the street, and we remained standing at the corner to
see who it was. 25. Our old neighbour has three sons, but
instead of their supporting him, he is obliged to support them.
Is he not very much to be pitied ?
LESSON XLVIL
THE PARTICIPLES.
279. The Participles are properly Verbal Adjectives, and
their uses and constructions are those of Adjectives. There
are three Participles, the Present, the Past and the Tuture-
Passive or Gerundive. The English compound Perfect Par-
ticiple (e. g., * having praised '; has no corresponding form
in German, and must be rendered by a clause (see § 284,
below).
280.
The Present Participle.
The Present Participle has active force, and, like the
Present Indie, marks a present or continuing state or action,
the substantive which it qualifies being the subject of the
action, as :
I
326
LESSON XLVII.
[§§ 280
'^a^ Wkfcnbe ilinb.. The sleeping child (= 'the child
that sleeps ').
@ine l;aarftrflu!icnbc G5efd;ic^te, A story that makes
one's hair stand on end.
The Present Participle is for the most part used only
attnhuttvely, as in the above examples. It is used predica-
tively only :
{a) When it is a true adjective in function, without any idea
of time^ as :
eeine ^ranf^cit ift mrf;t ficbfutcnb. His illness is not
serious.
3)ie ©d)onf)eit biefer Sanb^afl ift cntjurfcnb. The beauty
of this landscape is enchanting (1. e., delightful).
{h) In apposition with the subject (sometimes also with
the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, when
the action of the Participle is ^multaneous with that of the
principal verb, as :
©id; fcfmea m6^ mir umttJcnbenb, fa^ er mtr in§ ©efic^t,
Turning quickly around, he looked into my face. '
Gprriitcnb fd;lu3 fie bie 2(ugen nieber, Blushing she
dropped her eyes.
gjrcifcnb mi Did fc^-.ijnen ^eben
S^rer Sdnber 3Sert unb ^aU,
©r^,en bietc bcutfc^e giirften
(Sinft ju SBonn^ tm <Raiferfaar. (Kerner.)
Praising with many fine speeches the worth and num-
ber of their territories, many German pnnces were
sitting one day in the Imperial Hall at Worms.
Remarks.— I. This construction is more usual in poetic
or exalted diction than in ordinary language, where it is .P,en
erally replaced by an adverbial clause (see § 284, below). '
38x]
THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
327
2. The Present Participle is not used in German, as it is
in English, with the auxiliary ' to be ' (see § 31, Rem. 3).
281. The Past Participle.
The Past Participle of a tratisitive verb has passive
force, not necessarily with any distinct reference to past
time, as :
2)a§ gcricBtc ^inb, The beloved child (i. e., the child
that is or was beloved).
But when the participle indicates a single action, it has
perfect force, as :
2)a§ flcfio^lcnc $fcrb, The horse which has been
stolen.
The Past Participle of an intransitive verb has active
force, as :
®ie 2J?u[if %(xi oufgc^ort. The music has ceased.
Remarks. — i. The Past Participle of transitive verbs may
be used attributively as well as predicatively, as in the first
two examples above.
2. The Past Participle of intransitive verbs conjugatjed
with fein is sometimes used attributively and denotes a state
produced by the action of the verb, as :
Tiag nicggctaufcne ^fevb, The horse which had run
away; but not: 2)a§ flcfoufcttC $ferb.
3. The Past Participle, like the Present (compare § 280 /;,
above), may be used predicatively in apposition to the sub-
ject (or sometimes to the direct object) 6i the sentence in
which it occurs, as :
2)ao 33dI!, bom ?^urften unterbriirft, em|3orte ficb gegen
if?n. The people, oppressed by the prince, revolted
against him.
328
LESSON XLVII.
[§§ 281.
4. For the Past Participle with Imperative force, see §269, 5.
5- The Past Participle replaces the English Present Parti-
ciple after fommcu to specify the manner of the motion, as •
©r fain ncftirngcu, gcfoufcn u. [. Ju., He came walking,
running, etc.
6. After verbs of calling, it is used for the Infinitive, as :
3:a^ bcifjt (ncnuc id>) fiir bie ^ufunft gcforgt That is (I
call that) caring for the future.
7. It also replaces an Infinitive in such phrases as the
following :
Scf; mufj fort ! Sicbcr F)ier Siaca tm ©tic^e gcloffcn ' I
must go ! Rather (would I) leave everything in the
lurch here. (Lessing.)
8. It is used in a few absolute constructions, with or with-
out a substantive, which is usually in the accusative when
present, as :
SwgcgcBcn, baj bieg ira^r ift. Granted that this is true.
3J?eincn 33ruber ttuSgcnommen, iuaren aHe sugegen, Ex-
cept my brother, all were present.
282. The Future Passive Participle.
This Participle, also called the Gerundive, has the form
of the Present Part, preceded by ju. It is formed from transit
//z^erbs only, and is only used attributively, being replaced
m the predicate by an infinitive with gu, as :
(Sine 3u lobcnbc ^anblung, An act to be praised ; but*
©me ^anblung, icelrfjc 311 loficn ij;
283. General Remarks on the Participles.
I. Many words with the form of Participles have the value of
adjectives. Some occur as adjectives only (see also § 194
NoteV others with a special meaning, as: ^m)xi, learned,'
befannt, acquamted; i)C^fc^ieben, different j beja^rt, aged, etc.
[§§ 28x.
e§269,5.
mt Parti-
on, as t
v^alking,
itive, as :
tiat is (I
3 as the
offcn! I
ig in the
or with-
/e when
3 is true,
len, Ex-
le form
n tratisi-
eplaced
d; but*
k^alue of
3 § 194,
earned ;
i, etc.
284] GENERAL REMARKS ON THE PARTICIPLES. 329
2 All Participles (except the Past Part, of some intransitive
verbs, see § 281, Rem. 2, above) may be used as pure adjec-
tives, and as such may be compared or used as adjectival
substantives (see § 122), frequently with concrete meaninc.
as: bcr gieifenbe, the traveller; ber Scfcnbc, the man wh"
reads; ber SSor[i^cnbe, the chairman; bag ©elcfcne, what one
nas read.
3. Participles, unless they have become pure adjectives are
used sparingly as adverbs; but the Participle in apportion
(see §§ 280, /., 281, 3, above) may sometimes be construed as
an adverb, e. g. :
Sr^lBcigcnb briicfte er mir bie §anb. Silently (in
silence) he pressed my hand.
Remark. -This participial adverb of manner may be
replaced by an adverbial clause with inbem.
4. The Participle, when used attributively, always follows all
words qualifying or modifying it, and immediately precedes
Its substantive ; as predicate, it sometimes, especially in
poetry, precedes them (see § 280 b, above), but generally
and more correctly follows, as : ,
2)ag t)on feinen ©Item tnnig gcltefitc Jlinb, The child '
dearly beloved by its parents. '
m ber einen §anb fdimunmenb, mit ber anbern bag
^tnb uber bem 2l^a[fer cm|ior^ortcnb u. f. tt). Swim-
ming with one hand, with the other holding the
child above water, etc.
2)ag 3SoIt uom ,^urften untcrbrurft u. f. to., The people
oppressed by the prince, etc. '
284. English Participial Constructions.
I. The Present Participle is never used in German, as it so
frequently is m English, to express adverbial relations of time
22
330
LESSON XLVII.
[§284
or cause, and must be replaced, where so used, by a regular
adverbial clause, introduced by the proper adverb or con-
junction, as follows :
{a) To express time, the conjunctions ba, al§, 'when,'
iubcm, tuiiJjrcub, 'while,' must be used, as :
Seeing him turn pale, I hastened to his assistance,
^tt (ttig) \d} ibn crblcidk'n fa^, ciltc id; ibm jur .s^^Ife f;crbci.
Recovering himself, the orator continued, ^H^i^ni
cr fid) fammclte, \\\{}x bcr ^Hcbncv fort.
Remarks. — i. The English Perfect Participle is replaced
by a clause with narfjbciU (or n(6^, with the Pluperfect, as :
Having examined his papers, they let him go, Slnf^s
bcm man fcinc ^^sapierc untcrfud;t Jattc, Iicj3 man il;n
gelicn.
2. The clause with inbcm, indicating simultaneous action,
may be replaced by a participial clause in the case specified in
§ 280, b, above.
(p) To express cause, the conjunctions ba, tnbctn, *as,'
* since,' or hicif, 'because,' must be used, as:
Being an honest man, he may be trusted, SBcK er ein
e^rlid^^cr ^33iann i[t, fo tann man il;m Irauen.
Hoping to see you soon, I remain ever yours, ^itbcitt
icf) l;o[fc, 3ie balb ju fehcn, i^crbletbe id; [tct^5 bcr l^j^rigc.
Not having found him at home, I went away, ^0
ic^ \hn nid;t 511 §aufe gcfuubcn ^attc, oi»a icf; fort.
2, The Present Participle qualifying a preceding sub
stantive or pronoun is changed:
{a) Into a regular ?rhitive clause with finite verb, as ;
A loaf was found at Herculaneum, still retaining
its form, uiri 'i'vot iintitc 5U .'perculanuni ycfunbeu,
toelf^cg uDc^) bie gorm bcibc^iclt.
[§284
I regular
or con-
* when,'
sistance,
fe f;crbei.
replaced
:, as :
o, 9ln(^»
man il;n
; action,
jcified in
cm, * as,'
i( er ein
, Snbem
r S^ricjc.
vay, 2)0
iort.
ng sub
as;
taining
iCfunceu,
§284] ENGLISH PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 331
The ship, having come straight towards us, showed
the black flag, Xa^ ed;i[t tucldicd gcrabe auf m^
augcfommcn tuar, scigtc bie \d)\vaxic jragge.
with ?r; ~; T' *'"'" ''^, '^' ''''^ ^" ^'^^ ^^'""^'^''-^^ '^^"^'^ ^^''^' correspond
with that of the principal verb, as shown above, the Pluperfect, however
generally replacing the English Perfect Participles.
(/^ Into an attributii^e participial clause, in wiiich the
Participle will immediately precede the substantive
(see § 283, 4, above), as :
A man passing on the street, ©in auf ber etrafec tiot*
Dcigcjcnbcr gjiann.
3. A Participle preceded by an adverbial conjunction is
replaced by a finite clause with the corresponding coniunc-
tion, as : => J
While travelling in Europe, we met a great many
Americans, ^ Juir m Guro|)a reiften, trafen iuir mit
biclen 5lmertfanern aufammen.
For the Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, and its German equi-
valents, see § 276, above.
EXERCISE XLVIL
A, 1. Haben Sie Ihr Billet schon gelost? 3. Nein, noch
nicht. 3. Dann mussen wir uns beeilen ; wir soUten erst etwas
gemessen, ehe wir abreisen. 4. Hier ist der Schalter : soil ich
auch ein Billet fiir Sie nehmen > 5. Danke, ich habe meins
schon gelost. (J. Jetzt bin ich fertig, aber wir haben kaum drei
Viertelstunden Zeit, bis der Zug abfahrt. 7. Dann mussen wir
nachder ersten besten Restauration gehen. 8. Dort druben ist
eine 9. Das trifft sich gut; gehen wir gleich hinein. 10.
Kellner, wir haben es sehr eilig. 1 ] . Nehmen Sie Platz, meine
Herren; ich werde Sie sofort bedienen; hier ist die Speise-
karte.^ 1:>. Geben Sie mir gefalligst einen Teller Suppe.
I0. Uiid Sie, mein Herr? \\, Bringen Sie mir zuerst eine
Serviette. 15. Entschuldigen Sie, hier ist sie. IG.Ichnehme
332
LESSON XLVII.
[§284
eine Forelle. 17. Eedaure, es ist keine mehr da. 18. Nun,
dann bringen Sie mir ein Sttick Lachs. 19. Hier ist die Wein-
karte ; trinken die Herren Wein ? 20. Bringen Sie eine
Flasche Rotwein und Glaser. 21. Wie schmeckt Ilinen der
Fisch? 22. Ausgezeiclinet. 23. Diese Suppe schmeckt mir
gar nicht. 24. Lassen Sie sicli doch Fisch kommen. 25. Ich
mache mir nichts aus Fisch ; — Kellner ! 26. Zu Befehl. 27.
Eine Portion Entenbraten mit griinen Erbsen. 28. Wiinschen
Sie keine Kartoffeln ? 29. Javvohl, gebratene Kartoffeln. Brin-
gen Sie auch Brot. .HO. Noch etwas? lU. Nein. Was wiinschen
Sie, Herr B. ? 32. Bitte, reichen Sie mir die Speisekarte. Ich
bestelle mir Kalbskoteletten mit Kartoffeln und gelben Riiben.
.33. Sonst noch Gemiise ? 34. Etwas BUimenkohl. 35. Erinnern
Sie sich schon f riiher hier gespeist zu haben, Herr B. ? 30. Nicht
dass ich wusste ; die Restauration scheint neu zu sein. 37. Des-
halb wird man vielleicht so gut bedient. 38. Ist den Herren etwas
gefalHg ? 39. Bringen Sie mir eine Portion Eis und eine Tasse
Kaffee. 40. Und mir eine Tasse Chocolade und eine Portion
Erdbeeren mit Sahne, und schreiben Sie alles auf meine Rech-
nung. 41. Hier ist die Rechnung, mein Herr. 42. Wie viel
betragt sie ? 43. Sieben Mark funfzig Pfennig. 44. Hier
sind acht Mark; das Ubrige ist Ihr Trinkgeld. 45. Jetzt
miissen wir fort ; es hat soeben auf dem Bahnhofe zum ersten
Male gelautet.
B. 1. A sleeping fox catches no chicken. 2. Sleeping
dogs do not bite. 3. The past cannot be helped (changed) ;
let us rather think of what is to come. 4. It is much better
to think without speaking than to speak without thinking.
5. Man is a speaking animal, a fire-using animal, a laughing
animal : these are some of the definitions which have been
proposed by philosophers. G. We learn to speak German in
speaking German. 7. Well hit (trcffcu) ! I call that well
played ! 8. I wanted to show you an article in yesterday's
[§284
§284] si;-tlish participial constructions. 333
paper, but it is nowhere to be found. 0. Let me know when
you think of coming to town. 10. The skill of ants in the
building of their nests is astonishing. 1 1. Smiling, he began
to read the letter, but before having read the half of it, he
threw it furiously on the floor. 12. A hussar came galloping
down the street and said the battle was beginning. 13. The
Paradise Lost of Milton is one of the most important works
of English literature ; it was written in the seventeenth cen-
tury, but this does not prevent its being still much read.
14. After having been so well received by us, I wonder that
he is not ashamed to speak evil of us. 15. The morning was
cool and charming, but towards noon the heat became
oppressive, and we saw great clouds rising in the west.
16. He says the matter is perfectly clear, but his saying so
does not make any difference. 17. He went away complain-
ing that there was no use talking to people who did not want
to understand. 18. That was because he was angry, and
because he had not succeeded in making himself understood
(Dcrftdnblic^O- 19. Make no mistakes in copying your exercise,
or else a second copying will be your punishment. 20. Besides
making mistakes the last time, you wrote very badly. 21. " The
danger to be avoided," said he, "is not yet past." 22. Going
(^inge^en) to visit our friends in Schiller-street this afternoon,
we met them coming to visit us. 2:3. His being rich is no excuse
for his being lazy ; we do not need to be idle merely because
we are not forced to earn our bread. 24. A certain man, just
before dying, called his sons to him, and told them there was
a treasure lying hidden somewhere in his field. 25. Believing
they would find it, they began digging everywhere, but
without finding the wished-for (erhjunfd;t) treasure. 26. One
of them, wiser than the others, finally guessed what his father
had meant by having told them this. 27. This son said that
since digging the ground the crop had been much better, and
that this was the treasure the father meant.
I
334
LESSON XLVIII.
LESSON XLVIII.
CONCORD AND APPOSITION.
t§a8s
285.
Concord of SunjKcr and Verb.
1. The predicate verb {t\\Q /inite part, or that containing
the copula) agrees vvitli its subject in number and person.
2. Two or more subjects require the verb in the plural, as :
'M'iwx 'iHitor luib nicinc %'uttcr finb l;icr gcluefen. My
father and mother have been here.
Remarks. — i. If the suliject nearest to the verb be singu-
lar, the verb is sometimes in the singular, especially if the
subjects folloiv tiie verb, as :
ecuic .v»abfmtit, fcinc iipvioc Sckn^art, fcin l;o*fabvcnbc§
3lU'fcn brodjtc bic (vrbitterunt^ n^'O*^" i^;» «"f^ i)ocf;[te.
His avarice, his luxurious mode of living, his arro-
gant behaviour, excited the animosity against him
to the highest point. (Schiller, Egmont's Lcben
unci Tod.)
Dbcu bci bcm ^brone log ber 5lonig unb bic AUnicjin,
Above near the throne lay the King and Queen.
(Grimm, Doniroschen.)
Note. — This is especially the case when the subjects, indicating
things or abstract ideas, are regarded as forming together one idea, or
are more less synonymous, e. g. :
.C»0Ui1 unlJ §of tit Ucrfaitft, House and home are sold.
@clD untl OJut mai^t nid)t ghutlid), Money and property (= wealth)
do not make [one] happy ;
or when particular attention is called to the last (as forming q
climax), e. g.:
-Mnw 3)ermi3gen, mciii Oiuf, mcin «clien fie^t nid)t auf bem ©pirle,
My property, my reputation, my life (the most important of all),
are not at stake.
I§38s
§285]
CONCOKD OF SUBJECT AND VERB.
335
itaining
son.
iral, as :
'en. My
i singu-
' if the
ihvcnbcg
!s arro-
nst him
r Lcben
lonigin,
n.
he?i.)
idicating
idea, or
: wealth)
ming q
: ©pirle,
t of all),
2. If the subjects be of different persons, the verb agrees
in person with the first rather than the second or third, and
with the second rather than the third, tiie plural pronoun of
the proper person being usually (always with the second per-
son) expressed before the verb, as :
SDu unb tc^ (mcin il^rubcr unb id;), mir Gingcn aug. You
and I (my brother and I) went out.
SDu unb bcine Sd;i»c[tcr, i^r fcib au^gcgangcn. You and
your sister went out.
3. With titles of rank and compliment the verb is usually
in the plural (see also § 49), as :
©cine gjiajeftcit fjoku geru^t u. f. \o., His Majesty has
been pleased, etc.
4. Collectives, if singular, take a verb in the singular, unless
followed by a plural substantive in apposition or in the geni-
tive, as :
©inc gro^e ^J^mfdjenmenge ttjor jugecjen ; — but :
eine gvofjc HKenge gj?enfd)eu hjorcn gugegen, A great
number of people were present.
^ Notes.— I. The singular may also be used in such cases as that
given in the second example above, unless the collective is considered
with reference to its component parts individiMlly.
^ 2. With nouns of Number in the sing, (see § 185, i) the verb is used
m the plur. only when an mdefinite quantity is meant, as :
<Sin ^oor (= einige) 2:age tnorcn Dcvgaugcn, A few days had
passed ; — but :
(Sill ^aar ©tiefel fofict ftcben 2;f)Qlcr, A pair of shoes costs seven
dollars.
5. When the real (logical) subject is represented by c8, or
some other neut. sing, pron., before the verb (see §§ 39/82,
Rem. 2 ; 141), the verb agrees with the logical, not with the
fframmatippl cnKiA/^f 00 .
©^ finb meinc Sriiber, It is my brothers.
336
LfissoN xi^rnt.
W(
[§§285-
NoiK, \Vitha/^j<?«a/
, „ - pronoun as subject, tl:-:. t5 follows the verb
(sec § 39, 2).
6. If the subjects be sepai -d by a disjunctive conjui. .-
tion or conjunctions, the verb regularly agrees with the" last
only, but this rule is by no means so strictly observed as in
English, even by the best writers, e. g. :
tffiebcr bie Union tioi^ bie Sigue mifijtcn fidfi in biefen
etreit. Neither the Union nor the league took part
in this dispute.
©omojl bie Sage nU bie 93efeftiguncj bie^er Stabt fdjicncn
jebem Stngriffe ^ro^ ju bietcn. The situation, as well
as the fortification, of this city seemed to defy
every attack. (Schiller, i<^jahriger Krieg.)
Notes. — i. Constructions like the following :
(Snttt)eber bu obcr id) bin taub, Either you or I am deaf,
are in German, as in English, felt to be awkward, and are therefore
avoided by substituting some other construction, e. g. :
(gntttJebertc^bintaub,oberbubift e8, Either I am deaf, or you are.
2. The sing, is used after expressions of the time of day, and in the
multiplication-table, as :
S8 ifl ge^n lU)r, It is ten o'clock.
^eci^ mat df tfi (mod)t) ^unbert unb sel)n, Ten times eleven is one
hundred and ten.
28^« Repetition of Subject.
When several connected sentences have a common subject,
the subject must be repeated (as pronoun) when the order of
the words is changed, as :
5)er 3ug fommt urn neun U^r axK, unb fa^rt urn ^alB ge^n
h)ieber ab. The train arrives at nine o'clock, and
leaves again at half-past nine; — but:
5Der 3ug fommt um neinr U^r an, unb um f)alb je^n fa^rt
er h)ieber ab. The train arrives at rine o'clock, and
at half-past nine it leaves again.
389]
THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE.
3V
287. Omission of Predicative Verb.
§abcn and fcin, as auxiliaries of Uuisc, may be oniitted in a
subordinate sentence, as :
3'2a4)bein fie ben 33ricf gclefcit, tueinte fie. After she had
read the letter, she wept.
288. Other Concords.
1. TheAttributive (or Determinative) Adjective agrees
with the substantives it qualifies in gender, number and case
(for inflections see Less. XX, XXII, XXIV); the Predica-
tive Adjective has no inflection (see § 14).
2. For the concord of Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives
with their antecedent (in gender, number and person) see
§§ 38, Rem. 4; 39 ; 43, Rem. 3, 4; 82, Rem. i, 2; 83, Rem.
I ; 86; 95, I (^) ; 162, 2.
Note. — A Relative Tronoun referring to an antecedent of the first
or second person takes the verb in the third person, unless the relative is
foi.owed by the personal pronoun, as stated in § 95, i {b), e. g. :
S3ift bu eg, bcr fo sittertV — or: 33ift \^\\ cci, bcr bu jo 3itterf|?
Is it you that tremble ?
289. The Appositive Substantive.
I. A substantive or pronoun may have another substantive
attached to it attributively, giving a further description or
definition of the person or thing spoken of. This latter sub-
stantive is said to be in apposition to the former, as :
3J?ein ^reunb, bcr fie^rcr, trug feine ein^ige 2Baffe, ctncn
birfcn Storf, in ber .Spanb, My friend, the teacher,
carried his only weapon, a thick stick, in his hand.
^ 2. A substantive or pronoun may also be placed in appo-
sition to a sentence or clause, as :
@r fagte, bag er loieber gang gefunb fei, cine ©c^ou^tung,
U)e*u/ei($- be^iuCifeUc, or: ititt& icft be^iueifelte, He said he
was quite well again, a statement which I doubted.
338
LESSON XLVIII.
[SSaSg
3. The appositive substantive is in the same case as the
substantive which it defines, thus :
Ruxl (Norn.), mciu \m^\itv Z^xnUx, ift franf, Charles,
my youngest brother, is ill.
^ie i{ranfi/C!t iUrU (Gen.}, meinci jiingften 33rubcr», The
illness of Charles, my youngest brother.
©ine gcfal)rlid)e Alranlvcit brot;tc (intr.) Marl (Dat), meis
ncm jiinc^ftcn ii3rubcr ; or : k'bvo^tc (trans.) ilarl (Ace),
meincn iiingftcn ii3rut)cr, A dangerous illness threat-
ened Charles, my youngest brother.
Notes. — i. A substantive in apposition to ? sentence is put in the
Nominative, as in the example under 2, above.
2. An appositive genitive without a determinative word before it,
especially when governing another genitive, is uninflected, as :
2)ic ^ivaufl)cit bcs ^h-ouprin',en, (So^n bc« bcutfd)cn .foiferg, The
illness of the Crown-Prince, son of the German Emperor ; but:
2)ic ^iranfl)cit bc8 ftronpiin.^cn, tied dltcftcn (Sol)iiea u. [. w., The
illness of the Crown-Prince, the eldest son, etc.
4. The appositive substantive generally agrees also in
number with the v/ord it defines, except in the case of abstract
substantives and collectives, as :
6ornelien§ ^inber, i(;r Stolj unb i^re 5t*cubc, Cornelia's
children, her pride md joy.
S)a lebten bic §irten, eiu fjarinlog ©cfj^lcijt, There lived
the shepherds, a harmless race. (Schiller.)
5. The appositive substantive agrees in gender when there
is a special form for the feminine, as :
2)ie ©rabitation ift bie Senfcrin ber 33af)nen aHer ipims
tnel^!bv^er. Gravitation is the director of the courses
of all heavenly bodies.
6. These rules are also applicable to an apposition intro-
duced by al«, ' as,' e. g. :
[§§a8g
se as the
Charles,
Dcr8, The
at.), mcis
il (Ace),
s threat-
put in the
before it,
ifer«, The
ror ; but:
f. \V., The
also in
abstract
Amelia's
re lived
jn there
[er ipims
courses
n intro-
UB9]
THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE.
339
I^d; (auutc ibn aU Mnabc ( NtMii.), I knew him as (when)
a boy (i. e., vviicn / was a boy) ; — but :
^d) fauntc il;u al^ .(IikiIk'U, I knew him when (/i^ was) a
boy.
EXERCISE XLVIII.
A. 1. Konnen Sie mir cine gute Buchhand^ung empfehlen?
2. Was fiir Blicher wollcn Sie kaufen? ,'{. Ich mochte mir die
Werke einiger von den bcsten deutschen Schriftstcllern an-
schaffen. 4. Sie sollten zu llerrn liraun gehen ; er hat einen
sehr groszen Vorrat, besonders von den deutschen Klassikern.
5. Wo ist das Gesciiaft? (>. Nur einige Schritt(e) von hier,
Nummer fUnf, um die Kcke ; ich werde Sie begleiten. 7. Das
wiire mir sehr angenehm. H. Sic schdnen ein groszer Biicher-
freund zu sein. 9. Ja, das ist eine Schwiiche, die mich viel Geld
kostet, aber mir auch viel Vergniigen mac^t. 10. Hier ist der
Laden ; ich erwarte Sie auf meinem Bureau, wenn Sie fcrtig
sind. 11, Ich danke vielmals fiir Ihre Aufmerksamkeit. Also,
auf Wiedersehen. 1;2. Zeigen Sie mir gefalligst einige Exem-
plare von Schillers W:'rken. 13. Gebunden oder ungebunden ?
14. Zeigen Sie mir beides. 15. Aus wie vielen Banden besteht
dieses Exemplar? 16. Aus zwolf, und ich mochte Sie arf den
ausgezeichneten IjtucV aufmerksnm machen. 1 7. Der Druck
ist sehr klar; haben Sie noch sonstige (andere) Ausgiben > 18.
Wir haben Ausgaben in groszerem Format', aber nur gebunden.
Hier sind sie. 19. Das Format gefallt mir besser, aber ich
mag den Einband nicht. 20. Dem ist leicht abzuhelfen. Ich
bestelle Ihaen em Exemplar und lasse es nach Ihrem Ge-
schmack einbinden. 21. Gut, ich mochte es in braunem Leder
niit Titel gebunden haben ; aber wie viel soil ich Ihnen dafur
bezahlen? 22. Die Ausgabe kostet zehn Thaler, der Ein-
band fiinf. 23. Bekomme ich Rabatt'.? 24. Ja, zehn Prozent
^Qgen bare Bezahlung. 25. Ich bczahle bar ; das macht zwei
und vierzig Mark. 26. Wiinschen Sie noch etwas ? 27. Ich
^''$'%
340
LESSON XLVIII.
§289-
mochte auch (^oethes saniiiuliche Werke in demselben Format
unci Kinband hal)cn. 2.S. Es thut mir leid, dass wir keinc nichr
haben, aber icli kann sie bestellen und gleich mit der anderen
Ausgabe einbinden lassen. 29. Zum selben Preise? 80.
Nein, es wird mit Einband aciitzelin Thaler netto betragen.'
31. Dann besorgen Sie es gefalligst, und scliicken Sie mir^'die
Werke nebst Rechnung an diese Adrcsse ; liier ist meine Karte.
32. Icli besorge alles aufs Sorgfultigste ; binnen acht Tagen
sollen Sie die Biicher haben.
B. 1. "Books," said Alfonso the Wise of Spain, "are
my most honest councillors : neither fear nor hope prevents
them telling me what my duty is." 2. "It is not my courtiers,"
said this king, "who tell me most honestly what my duty is,
it is my books." 3. "No courtier dares to say to a king!
* Your Majesty is wrong,' but my books tell me so every day!"
4. I as'ced a gentleman standing near me, if he knew what
time it was, and he answered me that it was exactly twelve
o'clock. 5. More than two hours have passed since then, so
it must now be between two and three o'clock. (>. Was it
you that came to see me yesterday, when I was away from
home } 7. Yes, my brother and I wanted to visit you, and
we were sorry not to find you at home. 8. Margaret, the
eldest daughter of Henry VII. of England, married James
IV. of Scotland. 9. These were the grand parents of Mary
Stuart, Queen of Scotland. 10. To do whatjs^right, and
to be huppy, is one and the same, for virtue is its own reward,
n. Dear father and mother, do you remain sitting here until
I go for a carriage to drive you home, for I know you are too
tired to walk. 12. Twelve and twelve make twenty-four, and
twelve times twelve is one hundred and forty-four. \\\.
After having seen London and Paris, we had not much desire
to see other cities. 14. I wrote to K., inviting him to pass
his holidays with us, and by return of post received a letter,
§289-
n Format
:inc nichr
■ anderen
se ? 30.
jetragen.
mir die
le Karte.
t Tagen
in, " are
Drevents
Lirtiers,"
duty is ,
a kinjj :
ry day."
2w what
I twelve
then, so
Was it
ay from
oil, and
ret, the
James
)f Mary
ht, and
reward,
re until
are too
Lir, and
r. J 3.
I desire
letter,
^90]
THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE.
341
saying we might expect him in a fortnight. 15. I asked you
first as my oldest friend to assist me in this embarrassment.
1(). I know we should avoid asking our friends for help until
we have done our utmost to help ourselves. 17. The hunts-
man whistled, and his dogs came running from the wood.
18. Our teacher was^in^the^habit^of telling: us we should
do what was right, let it cost what it would. J 9. Is your
teacher still living ? Yes, he is still living, but he is getting
very old now. 20. Goethe and Schiller are the two greatest
poets of Germany : it is difficult to say which of the two is
most beloved by the German people. 'fV. If you think we
are right, give us some sign of approval : a word, a smile, a
glance v/ill suffice. 2:2. All the rest of our party arrived at
the top of the mountain before sunset, but my friend and I
arrived only at nine in the evening. '23. Expect us on Thurs-
day next, health and weather permitting. 24. The gentleman
coming out of that shop is Dr. B., and the lady accompanying
him is his niece, Miss L. 25. Did you ever see the Emperor
William ? I have never seen him as Emperor of Germany,
but I saw him many years ago as King of Prussia.
LESSON XLIX.
APPOSITION (continued): -APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVES. -
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION.
290, The Appositive Adjective.
I. Attributive Adjectives and participles are said to be
vised appositively when they are separated from their substan-
tive, as :
%zx ^agc, jung, (jiiOfffj unb gcifireic^, \o<xx bcr Stebling
be§ .'patifcv^. The page, young, handsome and
clever, was the favourite of the house.
342
LESSON XLIX.
[§290
^n ber Sc^tac^t fcurlg unb furr^tlog, Wav monmontf)
fonft iibcrafr meicf^Iirf; unb un[(^Iu[fig, Ardent and
intrepid in battle, Monmouth was everywhere else
effeminate and irresolute.
2. This appositive adjective or participle is, like the pre-
dicate adjective, uninflected, and is placed at the end of its
clause. It is used much more sparingly in German than in
English, and is almost wholly confined to apposition with the
sufijea of the sentence (sometimes also with the ^irea object).
In English the attributive adjective or participle is generally
used appositively ^hen it has more than one modifier, and
always when il; has a complement (as in the second example
above). In German on the contrary the attributive adjective
is freely used in all such cases before a substantive. All such
appositive adjectives or participles, unless referring to the
subject (or direct object) of the sentence, must be rendered
in German either by an attributive or by a relative clause. The
following examples will serve to illustrate to what extent the
appositive adjective can be used in German, and to show how
it is to be replaced in German in various connections.
(a) English Appositive = German Appositive (see also the
examples under i, above) :
' {Engl.) Beleaguered with present distresses and
the most horrible forebodings on every side
roused to the highest pitch of indignation, yet
forced to keep silence and wear the face of
patience, Schiller could endure this constraint no
longer. (Carlyle, Life of Schiller)
{Germ) 33on GecjenlDarttocn 9^oten unb ben fc^rerflic^ften
9a;nungcn toon aacu ecitcn ^cimgcfujjt, 6t§ auf ben
r;ocr;ften ©rab cntriiftct, gc^njuitocn jebod;, ftirfju.
frftmcioeu unb bie SJJaefc bcv ©ebulb gu ix^<^^^xi, tunnte
@c^iaer bicfcn 3n)ang mrf;t Idnger erbulben.
<
[§290
?nt and
lere else
the pre-
id of its
than in
with the
t object).
enerally
fier, and
example
djective
'^ll such
• to the
mdered
5e. The
tent the
ow how
s.
also the
es and
^ side,
5n, yet
ace of
int no
•lid^ften
[uf ben
ftirrju.
tunntc
§390]
THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE.
343
(})\
Note.— In this example, as in those under i. above, the adjectives
(participles) beleaguered, etc., are in apposition to th-^ subject ' Schiller.'
{d) English Appositive Adjective = German Attributive
Adjective or Relative Clause :
{Engl.) To judge from the quantity of light emitted
from the brightest stars, there is (one has) reason
to suppose that some of them are much greater
than the sun.
{Germ.) ^^Ud) ber 'om ben fieHften 6ternen ouSgcflrtt^ls
ten Sic^tmaffc 311 urteilen, \:)ai man ©runb angunefjmen,
ba^ einige bauon biel gri^f^er finb aU bie Sonne ; or :
nacf; ber Sicbtmafie 3U urteilet], tticlr^e u. f. it), m^u
jlro^It tuirb u. f. to.
' {Engl.) In Ihe Isle of Man vast trees are found
standing firm on their roots.
{Germ.) %i\\ ber ^nfel 5)?an finbet man mad)tige 33aume,
tticlrjc auf ben SBur^eln fcftftc^cn ; or : mdc^tige, auf
ben SSurjeln fcflfte^cnbc 33aumc.
— I. The participles in these examples are in apposition to the
objects 'quantity (of light)' and 'tree' respectively.
2. Observe the position of the Germ, attributive adj. immediately before
the substantive.
{c) English Appositive Adjective = German Attributive
Adjective :
{Engl.) Bruce caused his men to lie down to take
some sleep at a place about half a mile distant
from the river.
{Germ.) 33ruce tte^ feine ^<t\xit firf; an einer ungefaF^r
cine I)albe 3)lei(e bom ^-luffe cntfcrntcn Stelle niebers
legen, urn ein toenig ju fc^Iafen.
Note. — An attributive clause is preferable here, since a relative
clause would separate the clause of purpose (mil, etc.) from the infin.
(uicberlegen) on which it depends.
(ii)
Notes.
0)-{
344
LESSON XLIX.
[§§ ago-
I
Note,
{Eng!>) During the eruption of the volcano, the dark-
ness occasioned by :he ashes was so profound,
(ii) \ ^^^"^ nothing like it was ever experienced.
{Germ.) Sl^af^rcub bc^3 %\x^hx\x^t^ beg 5l?ulfang tear bie
'^mi:) bic 3()d;c bcrurfarfjtc Jyinftcrnig [o ticf, hJte man
nic ctlDag ^ir^nH^cg tuabrgenommen f)atte.
.K , • -.^'^^""Sh the participle « occasioned ' is here in apposition to
Uie subject 'darkness,' yet the position of the subject afUr the verb for-
bids the use of the appositive construction in German, as also in the
followmg sentence :
(iii) j <^^'''^^-) ^t was a place advantageous for defence.
( {Gcrm.^ Cr^ luar einc gur ^i^erteibiguno flunftiflc ©tette.
(./) ^//^V/V/ Appositive Adjective = 6?,r;;/^// y?.r/^//z;^
Clause :
{Engl) This plant has changed into two distinct
vegetables, as unlike each other as is each of
^ them to the parent-plant.
{Germ) 2)ic[e %\\<x\\iz Ui fic^ in jtuet berfc^iebene ©e.
niiifcaiftcn bcrU)anbeIt, nicrtfjc einanber [o unajnii*
ftnb, mie iebe berfelbcn bcr gj^utter^jflan^e ift.
NOTK -Here the attributive construction is inadmissible on account
ot the subsequent clause luic jcbc ii. f. ui.
291. Syntax of the Prepositions.
The cases governed by the various Prepositions are fully
treated of in Lessons IX, XIII, A, and XXXVIII, and their
idiomatic use is further defined in Less. XXXIX.
The object of many verbs, as well as that of substantives and
adjectives corresponding with them in signification, is ex-
pressed by prepositions. The proper use of prepositions
after verbs, etc., must be learnt from practice and from the
dictionary ; but below is given, for convenient reference the
regimen of particular clnsses of verbs, etc., wliich diifer most
widely from their English equivalents.
291]
SYNTAX OF THE I'REPOSITIONS.
345
I. at, of = iikr -j- Ace, of sorrow, joy, ivonder. etc.
as :
Verbs.
fief) drgcrn, be vexed
errotcn, blush
crftauncn, be astonished
fid; freuen, rejoice
fic^ grdmen, grieve
Hagcn, complain
ladS'^^i^/ laugh
firf; frf)amcn, be ashamed
f^otten, mock
(t)er)iuunbevn, wonder
Substantives.
%x<^^<iX, vexation
Grri)tun0, blush
(Svftauncn, astonishment
grcubc, joy (also o^w -J- r3at.)
©ram, grief
^llac^e, complaint
©eldd;tcv, laughter
6c^ain, 53efd;dmunn, shame
(S^ott, mockery
^crlDunberung, surprise
Also the Adjectives cirgcvlid), vexed ; bofc, angry (at things)-,
em^finblid), sensitive ; frot;, hiftit3, merry.
Note.— 53ofe takes auf + Ace. when referring to persons.
2. for = auf + Ace, of expectation, etc., as : gefa^t, pre-
pared; f)Dffen, .«pDffmmg, hope ; luarten, wait.
3. for = na^, of longing, inquiring, etc., as :
Verbs. Substajitives.
biirften, thirst 2)ur[t, thirst
forfcfien, inquire 3orfd;ung, inquiry
f)ungern, hunger .^unger, hunger
jagen, hunt ^agb, chase ^
fud;cn, search Suft, ^ .
fid) fef)nen, long ^erlangen, \ ""'
berlangen, desire
Also the Adjectives burftig, thirsty ; e^rgeigig, ambitious ; gie.
rig, greedy ; ^ungrig, hungry.
4. for = urn, of entreaty, etc., as : bitten, ask ; bufjlen, court ;
flet^en, beg ; fic^ fummern, concern one's self.
■
46
LESSON XLIX.
[§291
5. from = t)or + Dat., of protection^ etc., as : beiraf^ren,
preserve ; l;uten, protect ; rcttcn, save.
6. in = an -f Dat., of plenty, want, etc., as : arm, poor-.
frud)tbar, fruitful ; reid), rich ; fc^nuacf), weak ; ftar!, strong.
7. in or on = auf + Ace, of confidence, etc., as :
Verbs. Substantives.
fic^ briiften, boast 6tol§, pride
fid; berlaffen, rely SScrla^, reliance
bertraucn, trust SSertraucn, confidence
8. of = on -4- Dat., of plenty, want, doubt, etc., as:
Substantives.
5Rangel, want
9teid)tum, wealth
tlberfluJ3, superfluity
3tt)eifel, doubt
Verbs.
feblen (impers.), ) , • .
' -^ , ,, [ be wanting
jhjeifeln, doubt
berjtDeifeIn, despair
Also the Adjectives !ran!, sick ; leer, empty.
9. of = ait + Ace, of remembrance, etc., as :
Verbs. Substantives,
benfen, think ©ebanfe, thought
erinnern, remind ©rinnerung, recollection
fic^ erinnern, recollect
Note. —These verbs also govern the Genitive. See § ?|5.
10. of = auf + Acc. of suspicion, em^y, pride, etc., as
Substantives. Adjectives.
3((^t ( geben), (pay) attention acf)tfam,
3Irgit)D^n, suspicion
(Siferfuc^t, jealousy
Jtcib, envy
attentive
aufmerffam,
argtrofjnifd), suspicious
eiferfiic^tig, jealous
eitel, vain
neibifd}, envious
jtolg, proud
[§29I
291]
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSIiiONS.
347
II. of = Uor + Dat., of fear, etc., as :
,^, , ^'''^'' Substantives.
\x^ furcf)ten, be afraid 5urd)t, fear
„ Ci*Wrec!en, be terrified (Scf;rcrf, terror
" grauen, dread (^vmicn, dread
Also the adjectives Bange, afraid ; ficBer, certain, sure.
12. to = on + Ace, of address, etc., as: abrcffiercn, ad-
dress; Wreibcn, wri-; firf. rt*ten, turn; fid; itjenbcn, apply.
13- to = gcgCU, after Adjectives signifying an affectio7i of
the mind, as : barml^ergig, merciful ; feinblicf), hostile ; freunb.
Itc^, friendly; geredu, just; olcicbrriaig, indifferent; gnabig
gracious ; graufam, cruel ; nac^fid)tig, indulgent.
EXERCISE XLIX.
1. My sister is vexed at not receiving an invitation to
the party. 2. I am tired of waiting for Charles ; let us go
without him. 3. Oh no, do not let us go yet ; he will be angry
at us, if we do not wait for him. 4. Charles has many good
qualities, but you cannot rely upon him. 5. The boy is proud
of the watch given to him by his father. 6. If you lose your
way in a city, it is always safest to apply to a policeman. 7.
I have no doubt that this is good advice. 8. Mary is angry
at Sarah, because Sarah has made sport of her. 9. Our
neighbour has been ill for some days ; he complains of rheuma-
tism, and says he has caught cold. 10. I am less vexed at
his not coming than at his not sending us word. 11. The war
had already lasted more than four years, and people were long-
ing for peace. 12. Diogenes is said to have gone once in day-
hght through the streets of the city, carrying at the same time
a lantern. 13. People began to laugh at him and mock him,
asking him what he was looking for. \\. He replied that he
was looking for an honest man. 15. The general postponed
attacking the enemy, because his army was weak in artillery.
34^
LESSON L.
I§ij 29a
10. Mr. Kalk, the architect, promised that my house should be
finished before the 1st July, but I doubt it. 17. The Province
of Ontario is rich in iron, but is wanting in coal to smelt it.
18. We have been thinking for some time of selling our house,
but we cannot find anyone who is willing to buy it. 1!). Be
good enough to remind me to buy some postage-stamps, wlien
we go past the post-office. 20. We may learn as much by pay-
ing attention to what we see and hear as we can learn from
books. 21. The horses, frightened by a passing train, shied,
and were on the point of running away. 22. The first settlers
in this country had much to endure: they lived for the most
part in houses built of [the] trunks^of^trees and covered in
many cases with bark. 23. (Just) as many people lost their
lives (the life) by the famine occasioned by the earth-
quake, as by the earthquake itself. 24. The bad news re-
ceived yesterday has prevented our going to town to-day.
25. There are men who grow richer by giving than others
[doj by receiving.
I
292.
LESSON L.
WORD-ORDER.
The Essfatial Parts of a Sentence.
I. Every sentence contains three essential parts, viz : the
Subject, or that of which something is asserted, the Predi-
cate, or that which is said of the Subject, and, thirdly, the
Verb or Copula, the word which makes the assertion, and
which may include the Predicate (as in the simple tenses of
a verb), but does not necessarily do so. Thus, in the sen-
tence : ' He sings,' ' he ' is the Subject, while 'sings ' contains
both the ]^erh or Copula and the Predicate, i. e., it not only
asserts something of the Subject, but also says what that
something is, being equivalent to ' is smging.' In the sen-
)i) 29a
293]
POSITION OF THE VKKlJ.
349
tcnce: 'He has sung,' on the other hand, 'has' is the Verb
(or Copula), ' sun<T ' is what is asserted, or the PnuiicaU.
2. The Verb (orCopuhi) is in German the member of the
sentence, the position of which is most absolutely fixed; it is
the cardinal point or hinge on which the sentence turns.
203.
Normal Position of the Vkrh.
In German, there are three normal positions for the Verb,
according to the nature of the sentence.
(^) The Verb stands first :
1. In Interrogative Sentences expecting the answer 'yes*
or * no ' (i. e., when the verb is the question-word, see
§ 23, 2), as :
3ft %^x ^ruber n?o{;l ? Is your brother well ?
aBirb er fommcn? Will he come.?
0cigcn (Sie ^larl? Is your name Charles.?
2. In sentences expressing a co7nmand or wish, as :
©CjUC^cn 8ie mid; movcjen, Come.^and_see me to-
morrow.
aaStire id; §u .^aufe ! Were I (would that I were) at
home !
Note. The verb may either follow or precede the subject in the
3. Sing. Subj. used as Imperative (see § 268, i), as:
®ott bet)utr bid) ! or: '^M]\K\.t bid) @ott! God preserve thee!
3. In Co7iditional clauses, when the conjunction \X)^\\\\ is
omitted (compare § 59), as .
JBBtirc ba§ SBetter fd)i3n, [o toiirbe ic^ au§ge()en, If the
weather were fine, I should go out.
{h) The Verb comes second (is the second idea) in all
principal assertive sentences (compare § 20), as :
^er ^enfc^ ift ftevblic^, Man is mortal.
350
LESSON L.
[$a93
i f
r
I
l^cv jiiiuicrc ^^^n-bcv mcincvo ^i^itcr^?, JDclcfu'v «o frnnt Wax,
i(l t:t. My t .ther's younger brotbf^r, who was so ill,
is dead,
Cycfta-ii iJlbcnb ftovb bcr \>^ntbor iticine^ 3?atCv«, Yesterday
evening my father's brother died.
Soluol;! (nid)t nur) mciu ilsatcr, Juie (fonbcni auc^O "H^in
•i^rubcr lunr .^luicncii, IJoth (not only) my father, and
(but also) my brother were (was) present.
Remarks. — i. As in the last three examples above, the
first membsr of the sentence may be complex, with several
attributes, complements, etc. ; the verb is still the second
idea.
2. The coordinating conjunctions proper (§ 236) do not
count as members of the sentence (see the last exaniple above),
but r^^/wr/^/V// conjunctions throw the subject after the verb.
Note. Certain adverbial phrases, of a ni re or less interjectional
nature, such as: fvcilid), true; \<x, yes; ja »t)Ol)l, to be sure; ucill, no;
titr^, in short ; mit CUinu Sort, in a word; gut, well, are not regarded as
part of the sentence, and do not throw the subject after the verb, thus:
gfrcUid), id) ^abc c§ md)t fclbft gefcl)cn, True, I did not see it
myself.
ilurj (mit cincm aBort), id) glouftc ti nid)t, In short (in a word),
I do not believe it.
®ut, id) ItJcrllC tommcn, Well, I shall come.
3. In assertive sentences of an emphatic or exclamatory
character, the verb sometimes comes first, especially when
the particle bod) is present, as :
3ft ba^5 ein il^cttcr ! (= SBa^ fur ein 21' vtter ift ba§!)
What weather !
§abc id)'v5 bir bor^ n^f<^9t ! I told you so I
4. If a dependent clause or a quotation precede the prin-
cipal sentence (compare § 294, b, Rem. 2, below), such clause
or quotation is regarded as a single member of the sentence,
and requires the verb immediately after it, as:
th
Wl
SOI
or
de:
sin
393
;< 2931
POSITION OF THE VERB.
351
3)a ic^ fclbft n'^i fomnicn fonntc, ffiiirftc ic^ meinen 3ot?n,
As I could not come myself, I sent my son.
211^ id) anfani, ttjor eei jduni nncf) 10 U^r, When I arrived,
it was after 10 o'clock.
2Benn or fommcn foatc, tocrbr 'ffi 511 .^'^aufe fein. If he
should ( ->me, I shall be at iiome.
,,'^d) w'lU iiicinc 5(ufAabe nidit leiucn/' jrfjric ber unartii^e
ATnabc " I will hot learn my Lst^on, CTi d the naughty
boy.
Notes. - i. After dependent conditional and adverbial clauses (except
those of iimc) the particle fo usually inuouuces the pinapal sentence, as :
S)Q td) iiid)t iclbft fonuiieu fonntf, fo fd)idtc iu, meinen e<^[\i\.
Senn ev fommon joUtc, fo mxbc id) jn .^->anfe jein.
2. This particle fo should alw. vs be inserted after ac nditioi al clause
with tnenn omitt. d ; in coli:.quial usage, however, ^he principal sentence
sometimes I^ is the subject de/ore the verb, fo bein, .mitted, as:
Sdre IT fviil)a gcfonimcn, fo l)atte ef mid) Gcfcl)en ;
or (colloquially) :
2B(ue ci frul)er gcfommen, cr Jjiilte mid) nc|e{)cn.
This latter cor.struction, however, should not be imitated.
3. lnproporiio7itl clauses introduced by jr, Ucfio, or umfo, the depen-
dent clause comes first, .nd the verb is preceded by the word expres-
smg the comparison, as well as by tlie particle j", etr is:
3e (angci- bie 9fead)te finb, JjcfJo fiirjfv fma ^ Jujie, The longer
the nights are, the shorter are the days
if) The Verb is last in dependent sentences and ques-
tions (en pare §§ 32 ; 88), as:
S* n^ei^, 0o§ r)c ^Dfenfd^ fterblic^ ift, I know that man
is mortal.
@in 9Jiann, hjclijer neftern fjter ttittr, A man, who was
here yesterday.
Sc^ Ge^e, tticiJ e<o [c^on fpdt ift, f -o because it is late.
Sd; ioei^ nic^t, mx ^.cr gehjefen tft, I do not know who
has been here (%). question)
9
352
LESSON L.
[§§293
Remarks.— !. Indirect statements with baf; omitted
have the construction oi principal sentences (verb second-
see §§ 20; 87, 3), as:
er fantc, cr ^abc c«( Dcrgcffen, He said he had forgotten it.
2. Conditional clauses with lucim omitted follow the
question-onier (verb Jirst ; compare § 59), as :
SBiirc biv5 n^iUx fd)on, fo tuiirbo id) au^gcben, If the
weather were fine, I should go out.
3. The Verb precedes two infinitives (o infinitive and
part.; see § 199, 3), as in the compound te.ises of Modal
Auxiliaries, thus :
Gr fagtc, bafi er nid;t ^abc fommcn moaen. He said that
he had not intended to come.
4. Clauses with bcnn (=*unless,' § 241, ^^.\i7ivmg negative
force, follow the construction of a principal sentence (verb
secotid), as :
Scl) laffc ^id; nid)t, 3^u fcgncft mid; bcttit, I will not let
Thee go, unless Thou bless me.
%^ Jucrbe nid;t fommen, c^ fci bcnn, bag ba§ Setter \^U
h)erbe, I shall not come, unless (it be that) the
weather should become fine.
5. §abcn and fcin, as auxiliaries of tense, arc frcv-juently
omitted at the end of a dependent clause, as :
©r leuonetc, bafj cv ba^ ^cnfter gcrK-odjcn (^odc under-
stood), He denied that he had broken the window.
S(^ fragtc il;n, Ks\i er jur r chten ^eit anocfommen (fci
understood), I asked him if he had arrived in good
time.
294. Position of the Subject.
The Subject is placed :
{a) In Direct Questions, if it be the question-word, at
the begmnijig; otherwise immediately after the Verb, as;
. :S /
(§§293
omitted
second;
jotten it.
low the
, If the
ive and
Modal
aid that
negative
:e (verb
not let
ter fd^an
lat) the
quently
under-
nndow.
ten (fci
n good
1194)
POSITION OF THK SUUJIX'T.
aCcr ift r;icv rtciDcfcnV VViio has hi«en here?
353
:;^[t Cr I;icr flCtUCfcn? lias lie been I
)ere
ord, at
s:
ayann fommt 3^rc (Sd)ttief*cry When does your sister
come ?
{b) In Principal Assertive Sentences, the normal po-
sition of the Subject \^ fust ; but if any other word precede
the Verb, the Subject immediately follows the Verb, as :
3j^ lucrbc morgcn nid;t auoiicben ; or :
m^x<^<\\ Juci-be id| nirf)t au<joi'cf)cn, I shall not go out to-
morrow.
Rxi-MARKs.— I. In point of fact it may be said that, in a
principal sentence, the Subject follows the Verb quite as often
as it precedes it.
2. A preceding dependent clause, or a quotation, always
throws the subject after the verb, except when, after a con-
ditional clause with lucun omitted, the principal sentence is
not introduced by the particle fo (compare § 293, 4, Note 2
above). '
3. When the real {logical) subject is represented bv eg
before the verb as grammatical subject, the logical subject
immediately follows the verb, as :
@^ ift mcinc SrJttJcftcr getucfen. It was my sister.
ic) In Dependent Sentences, the Subject, if a relative
pronoun, begins the sentence, otherwise the Subject imme-
diately follows the connecting word, as :
2^er m<xm, ttjcli^cr geftcrn bier loar. The man who was
here yesterday.
®er m^m, ben ijj geftern [a^, The man, whom I saw
yesterday.
^sc^ fagte ibr, baf? ii^ fommen \otx\^x, I told her that I
should coitie.
354
LESSON L
294.
NoTK. — Tersdnal Pronouns, and es))ccially the reilective fid), some-
times precede the Subject, both in principal sentences with the Subject
after the Verb, and in dependent clauses, as :
iyioviicu toill jid) mcin SPnibcr oer^ciraten, My brother is going to
get married to-morrow.
©r jafltc, ba6 i^li bicjrr 3)?cnfd) bclribigt I)abf, He said that this
fellow had insulted him.
296.
Position of the Predicate.
I
1. The Predicate, if not included in the Verb (see § 292,
I, above), may consist of a participle or infinitive (as in tiie
compound tenses of the verb); or it may be a substantive, an
adjective, or the separable prefix of a compound verb.
2. The Predicate is placed last in Principal Sentences
and in Direct Questions ; in Dependent Sentences it
immediately precedes the Verb.
3. If the Predicate is compound, consisting of two or more
of the elements under i, above, they will occur in the follow-
ing order : I. Predicative adjective (or substantive) ; 2. Sep-
arable prefix ; 3. Participle ; 4. Infinitive ; thus :
Pred. Adj.
@r foU ftet^j gegcu fcinen armen 33ruber fei^r frcigcMg
Part. Inf.
gCiQCfcn fciu. He is saii to have always been very
liberal to his poor brother.
Pref. Part. Inf.
Bk tciirbe fcl^on geftern ah -- gcrcift fcin. She would have
departed yesterday.
Remark. — Any one of these elements of the Predicate
may, for emphasis, occupy the normal position of the subject
in i}[i^ first place {before the Verb), as :
(Sr^iitt ift ba» 3Settcr I;eiite nid)t. The weather is not (at
all) fine to-day (i. e., it v^ far from fine).
ig$]
POSITION OF THE PREDICATE
355
Solbot i[t mcin 33rubcr, nid;t ^^O^atrofc, My brother is a
soldier, not a sailor.
Singcn iuia id; tuof;!, aber nic^t frielen, I will sing, but
not play.
Note. The Separable Prefix and the Participle are, however, rarely
placed in this position, except in elevated or poetic diction, or for con-
trast, as:
iRIeUcr ftcig' icf) 311m ®cfcrf)tc, I descend (down I go) to the ll-ht.
(Schiller.)
Suriirfc blcibt ^er ^nappeu '^xo% The retinue of squires remains
behind Jbid.).
®ntf(^Ioffcn ift er alfobalb, He is resolved at once {fbid.).
©CflcDcii I)al)e id) il)m '^^^ «urf) nid)t, joiibeni iiur gcUetjeii, I did
not give him tlie book, I only lent it to him.
296. Position of Objects and Cases.
1. Objects (not governed by a preposition) precede adjects
(objects governed by a preposition), as :
%^) ^ak einen 33rief on i^n {<x\k mcinen 3Sater) gc[d;ricben,
I have written a letter to him (to my father).
2. Pronouns (unless governed by prepositions; precede
substantives, as :
%^ ^abe i^m einen 33rief gefd^riekn, I have written him
a letter.
3. Of Pronouns, Personal before other Pronouns, as :
^c^ f)a6e ijm bo^ {si\Q(x€) gegebcn, I have given him
that (souiething)„
4. Of the cases of Personal Pronouns, the Accusative precedes
the Dative, and both precede the Genitive ; but the reflexive
fi{^ usually precedes all others, as :
@r \i<x\. fir^ (Dat.) c^5 genierft. He has taken^^a^note^of
it (for himself).
356
LESSON L.
I§§ 296^
c; Of Substantives, the Person (unless governed by a pre-
position) precedes the thing; the Jndirect precedes the Direct
Object, and the Remoter Object (in the Genitive) follows
botli, as :
^c^ ^abe 35rcr (iijtticfttr ba^5 ^ud) acliebcn, I have lent
your sister the book.
Gr \)^\\ bicfcu aWann beg 2)ie6ita^bi l)e[d;ulbi9t, He has
accused this man of theft.
6. 'Wi^ personal {ox subjective) Genitive (compare § 243, 2)
may either precede or follow the substa^itive which governs it,
as:
SKcincS ajaterS^aug, My father's house; or:
Ta^^aug mcineg 95tttcrs.
7. The limiting Genitive (see §243,3) follows, except in
elevated or poetic diction, as :
3:ag (Snbe be^ ^ricgc^, The end of the war.
8. Cases governed by adjectives precede the adjective, but
a substantive with a preposition may follow the /m//<;(2//z/^ ad ■
jective, as :
3c^ bin i^m ban!6ar fiir fcinc ©citm^ungen, I am grate-
ful to him for his exeition.
297. Position of Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions.
1. In general, adverbs precede the word they modify, as:
Oc^ bin \t\x miibc geiuorben, I have become very tired.
@r \j^i ba<g 33ud; iiir^t gelefen, He has not read the book.
2. Adverbs of Time precede objects (except pronouns) and
all other Adverbs or Adverbial expressions, as :
Time. Object. Place. Manner.
©r^at j^eftcrn ba^ ^^nid; 311 §au[c febr fkn^ig ftubicvl,
He studied the book very diligently at home yesterday,
298]
POSITION OF ADVERBS, ETC.
357
i
3. Adverbs of place precede those of manner, and both
follow objects, as in the above example.
4. Of several Adverbs of like kind, the more general precede
the special, as :
9)Jurgcu iiin jcbn \XljX, At ten o'clock to-morrow.
Remarks. — i. Any object, adject, adverb or adverbial
phrase may occupy the normal position of the subject at the
head of a principal sentence (before the verb, compare § 295,
Rem., above), as :
QWcincn 9>tttcr haU \d) nid;t cjefefien, I did not see my
father.
©cftcrn fam id) 511 f^>dt, I came too late yesterday.
2. The relative position of objects, abverbs, etc., is the same
in principal and subordinate sentences.
'JS^S, Position of othb:r Members of the Sentence.
1. Attributive Adjectives and Participles immediately
precede the substantive they modify, as :
©lit pf SSerteibic^uui^ fcfjr giinftigcr ^xi, A place very
fa^oisrable for defence.
^a^ auf bem .^piigel ftc^cnbe §au§. The house standing
on the hill.
2. Prepositions precede their case, with the exceptions
given in the lists (see §§ 46 ; 51 ; 222^).
3. Conjunctions come between the words or clauses they
connect, as :
5DUnn 33rubev uilb feinc Jatnilic finb bier. My brother
and his family are here.
%^ \c>^\% bofj 3ie ntd}t !omtrten merben, I know that
you will not come.
■
35^
LESSON L.
[§§298-
NoTE. — In dependent clauses that precede the sentence on which
they depend the conjunction is first, as:
SBcir id) franf nmr, fonnte id) nid)t fommcn, Because I was ill, I
could not come,
29f). Construction of Incomplete Clauses.
The \\'ord-order of Incomplete or Elliptical Clauses is the
same as that of Complete Clauses, there being no Verb in the
former. In Infinirve Clauses the Infinitive comes last; and in
Appoiiitive Clauses, the Adjective or Participle comes last, thus :
&nU Jreunbe (311) fjndcii ift cin gvof^e^ Giliicf, To have
good friends is a j^reat blessinji.
3)ic iliinft in Dl i^n malcn. The art of painting in oil.
S* lucrbe mid) fveucn, Sie morgen ju fcjcn, I shall be
glad to see you to-morrow.
^ic§ arrcf> bei mir bcnfenb, fc(Uicf id; ein. Thinking all
this to myself, I fell asleep.
3?on bcm £drm nufgcfrfjrcift, frrang er au§ bem 33ette,
Aroused by the noise, he jumped out of bed.
300.
Interrogative Sentences.
1. Direct Questions always /?e^m %vith the questio7i-word, the
other members of the sentence occupying the same relative
position as in principal sentences. For the position of the
Verb and Subject, see §§ 293, 294, above.
2. Questions in German very frequently have the form of a
principal assertive sentence, the question being marked only
by the rising inflexion of the voice, as :
1^u fjoft bcine Settion nic^t gelevnt? You have not
learnt your lesson .?
Notes.— I. This constru::tion often occurs with a Doi^ in the sen-
tence, as :
[§§298-
on which
[ was ill, I
301]
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
359
IS is the
rb in the
t ; and in
ist, thus :
o have
g in oil.
shall be
king all
m ^iik,
d.
'or^, the
relative
I of the
irm of a
ed only
ive not
the sen-
• 2)u tuirf! to^ fommen? You will be sure to come (will you
not?).
6r ift tlO^ nic^t fraiif ? He is not ill (is he ? I hope not).
2. Exclamatory sentences frequently have the construction of depen*
dent questions, but may also have that of direct questions, as :
2Bcr iuit(]cl)en tiirfte ! (Happy he) who might go with you !
Sle ifl bag SScttcr fcl)bn ! How beautiful is the weather !
RECAPITULATION.
301. General Remarks on German Construction.
The following are the principal points in which German
differs irom English Construction :
1. The Verb (containing the Copula) is the hinge on
which the sentence turns, and has its position most absolutely
fixed.
2. The Subject does not, as in English, necessarily precede
the Verb in Principal Sentences ; but if any other member of
the sentence precede the Verb, an inversion of the subject
takes place, and it is thrown after the verb.
Notes. — i , The terms invcrsioyi, inverted sentence, often used by
grammarians, refer to the Subject only, not to the Verb.
2. This inversion of the Subject is also found in Interrogative and
Imperative Sentences (see §§ 293 ; 294 ; 300, above).
3. The relative rank of sentences is marked by the varying position of
the Verb, which is last in Dependent Sentences.
4. All the other parts of the sentence, except what precedes the Verb,
are included ox bracketed h^Xv/^en the Verb and the Predicate.
5. Dependent Sci^;:ences (including Infinitive and Appositive Clauses;
see § 299, above) are niifked off from the sentences on which they depend
by commas.
^6o
suppli:mentary lksson g.
[§^302
I
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G.
COMPLEX SENTENCES. -CLAUSE-ORDER.
303. Compound and Complex Sentkncks.
1. A sentence is n>;;t/>oum/ when it contains more than one cdfly,iinatt
cl.iiuse ; complex when it contains a subordniatc clause^ thus :
Compound: Cvrf) iiiun nn il)m VHn-[)pi, faniitc i()n nbrr iuii)t,
I went past him, hvA did not know him.
Complex : tSr f oa^tp iiiir, bnft or fomiiion Uicrbc,
lie told me that he would come.
2. Any subordinate clause may itself he com|^lex, having another clause
dependent upon it, as:
3rfi n-maiti'te ilm ncftcnt, toni cr niir ncfrfjviolicn I)attr, &nft \n\\z
C''Hl'i1)aftr balb luu'iibi;it inii Uu'ironi, I expected liim yesterday,
because he had written nie, that his business would soon be
finished.
NoTK. -In tlR. ah(«vf .xaniplc, the clause lucil cr, etc., depends on t\\& princif>al
clause nremli.r it; Nvlien-as the clause bafifciuc ©cfcDiifte, etc, depends on the clause
tucil <x, etc., which is itself subordinate.
Rr.MARK. — Tn the following o])servations as to the relative position
or order of clauses, the term "principal sentence " includes all sentences,
though themselves subordinate, which occui)y the relation of a principal
or governing sentence to the clauses dependent upon them.
.*503. I. Tn Complex Sentences, the position of the various depen
dent clauses is regulated by the following general prir.ciple:
Finish the principal sentence before introducing the sub-
ordinate clause.
2. Thus, in the example in if 302, 2, above, it would be wrong to insert
the last clause (baf? . . . miirbni) within the preceding clause on which
it depends, thus :
Scil cv mir, \i^% fcuic ®cjd}dfte bccubigt fciu luilrbcii, gejd)rieben
I)attc.
3. Similarly the following construction would make the complex serv.
tence quite unintelligible:
Xie (?VMiioI)u()i'it mufi bic (5ci-tici!rit cine @ad)c o{)ne iibcr bic 9tegel
Sit bcnfeii ju t^uit Uerlci^cn.
The oliservance of the above rule will require the clauses of this sen
tence to be arranged as follows :
305 1
COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES.
361
S5ic ©fit)or)iil)cit muO btc ?fcrtiflfdt dcrlci^en, cine @arf)r ju tf^un,
ohnc liluT bic ^1i\nirl nacli^nbciifon, Habit fpraciicc) must bestow
the readiness of doing a thing without reflecting upon the rule.
4. In the following sentence, again, the isolation of the separable prefix
is very objectionable :
.^•)cita- fliitfl bic eonuc an leitcm Tlovqcn, an brm rv'iv abrelftru, ouf,
The sun rose cheerfully on that morning on which we set out.
The prefix nuf should be inserted after iyior(]cn.
804. Appositive ClauscL^, must, however, stand immediately after
the particular part of the sentence to which they refer, as:
®ie ^lUicftrriu, tion tftrcr muin fcllifl octaiililct uitb fledeiliBt,
|pra1)t ^U bir, The priestess, chosen and consecrated by the
goddess herself, speaks to thee.
Sas tbnncn Mm; cin frf)luo(^cg !i?oIf Ucr #irtcn, ncqcn mbudm
Apfcrc ? What can we, a weak people of herdsmen, [do] against
Albert's hosts >
Sd) I)iibi' Urn bicint Mjkv, i)aft cr jcbc .^ttnMuit0 migticutc, fcl)ou
oft liorocuunrni, I have often reproached him with this mis-
take of misinterpreting every action.
Srf) fomite bic Jmin', ob toir fiimcn, nic!)t bcantmortcu, I could
not answer the question, whether we were coming.
305. Relative Clauses must immediately follow the antecedent :
(a) When the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of a
principal sentence, as :
3:cr Tlami, inclf^cr gcficrn ^icr iaat. ift I)cute irlcbergcfommeit,
The man who was here yesterday came again to-day.
S)cii Tlami, tuclificr 0C|lcvn l)icr ttiar, Ijabc irf) itirf)t gctaimt, I did
not know the man, who was here yesterday.
Note. -If the antecedent docs not precede the verb, the relati- , is introduced after
the conchision of the principal sentence, except as under (i), below, thus:
fQcntc ift ber Tlann tuicbergcfommeu, lucldjer 11. f. 10.
^d) l)abe ben DJanit nid)t flcfannt, mcUbcv a. f. m.
(d) When their separation from the antecedent would cause ambi-
guity, as:
©eftcrii l)abc id) ineiucu grcuiib, bcii ic^ Iniiflc nid)t .Kiel)en, Bei
mciitcm i^ntbcr flctroffcn, Yesterday I met at my brother's my
fnend, whom I had not seen for^ajong^time.
isToTR - If the relative clause were placed after the conclusion ot7he principal sentence
the rehuive ben might refer to Sruber.
$62
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G.
[§306
I
306. A Subordinate or Dependent Clause (with the exceptions
specified in Remarks 3, 4, below) may also, whether subjective, objective
or adverbial, precede the principal clause, in which case it throws the
Subject after the Verb, as :
Ob id) fommcn fonn {subjective clause), ifi ijttjeifel^aft, It is
doubtful whether I can come.
aBcr gar ju Uiel bebcnft [subjective clause), trirb lucnig Iciften, He
who considers too much, will accomplish little.
^o§ er mir ntdjt gefdirlcficn {subjective clause), morf)t mir ®orgen,
[The fact] that he has not written to me, causes me anxiety.
C6 ti^ tDcrftc fommen fbnncn (objective clause), njeig ic^ nici)t,
I do not know, whether I shall be able to come.
$0ft er fron! ifl (objective clause), \)a\it \&j gcftern ge^ort, I heard
yesterday, that he was ill.
^Q icf) fronf toor (adverbial clause), fonnte if nicf)t fommen, As
I was sick, I could not come.
Remarks.— I, Such a clause takes the place of a subject, object or
predicate, as the case may be, before the verb (compare §§ 293, b,
Rem. 4; 294, Rem. 2; 295, Rem.)-
2. Adverbial clauses in this way bring expressions of time, place, etc.,
but more especially those of cause, nearer to the verb, which is the part
of the sentence they modify.
3. Or\\y subjective relative clauses with the compound relative Xntx, tt)Q8,
can stand at the head of a sentence, as in the second example above.
Note. — The relative ber is sometimes used instead of roer as compound relative
(including both relative and antecedent), especially in the plural, as :
!Dlc fic^ 8U l^art oergangen fatten, flo^en au3 bem 2anbc. (Schiller) ; i. e.,
iCieicnigcn, weldje u. f. nj. ; or : aBer ftc^ ju tjort cergangen ftatte (sing.),
flof) u. f. to., Those who had committed too great offences, filed from the
country.
4. Clauses which modify not the whole sentence but a particular
member, cannot stand at the head of the sentence, but stand either
immediately after the word to which they refer, or after the conclusion
of the sentence (compare § 297, above). This remark applies especially
to relative clauses (but see Rem. 3, above, and Note), and to camparative
clauses with oIS, as :
@cin Unglucf voax grower, aid er erttogen fonttte (or : ju grog,
0l§ OaH er eg u. f. W,), His misfortune was greater than he
could bear.
[§306
§306]
COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES.
363
Note. — Comparative clauses with nit may precede, u:
ffiie im 2aub ber SBogel ftitgt,
"JJla^] fic^ jeber fliitlid) t^im,
As the bird sings amid the boughs, let every one enjoy himself. (Schiller).
EXERCISE G.
1. It seems impossible, says a great botanist, to give, in the present
state of our knowledge, a complete definition of what (= that which) is to
be considered as an animal, in contradistinction to what one must regard
as a plant. 2. The good king Robert Bruce, who was always watchful
and prudent, had received information (.Hllllbc) of (uoii) the intention of
these men to attack him suddenly. 3. Bruce caused his men to lie down
to take some sleep at a place about half a mile distant from the river
(see § 290, r, i), while he himself, with two attendants, went down to watch
the ford through which the enemy must pass, before they cair.e to the
place where king Robert's men were lying. 4. " If I go back," thought
the king, "to call my men to (the) arms, these men will get (fommcu)
through the ford unhindered; and that would be [a] pity, since it is a
place so advantageous for defence." 5. In the confusion, five or six of
the enemy were slain, or, having been borne down by the stream, [were]
drowned. 6. With the natural feeling of a young author (2c!)riftftcUcr),
he had ventured (it) to go (fief) niifmadjcu) secretly and witness (bcUuol)neii
4-dat.) the first representation of his tragedy at Mannheim. 7. He
resolved to be free, at whatever risk (ailf jebc @efal)r l)iii); to abandon
(=give up) advantages which he could not buy (eriaufeil) at such a price ;
toquithisstepdame (fticfmiitterltd), adj.) home, and go forth (fortmanbcrn)'
though friendless and alone, to seek his fortune in the great market
(3al)rmarft) of life. H. Having well examined the place (Crt), the soldier
reported his discovery to Marius, and urgently (briugcilb) advised
(anraten + dat.) him, to make an attack upon the fort from that side
where he had climbed up, offering (fid) evbictcu) to lead (=show) the way.
9. He ordered his men to advance against the wall with their shields held
together in the manner which the Romans named ' testudo ' or tortoise
(9cf)ilbtri3tc). 10. His mother was present on (bci) this joyous occasion,
and she produced (==: showed) a paper of (= with) poison, which, as she
said, she meant to have given her son in his liquor (©ctrciuf, ace.) rather
than that he should submit (himself) to personal disgrace-
I
En
PART THIRD
GERMAN R It A I ) E R
WITH
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION
Entered according to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand
nine hundred, by Thk Copp, Clark Company, Limited, Toronto, Ontario, in the
Office of the Minister of Agriculture.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
/>
//
rM^ mp..
:/.
&
^
^^
1.0
I.I
1.25
I "- IIIIM
12.0
1.8
U IIIIII.6
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
:\^^
^
L1>^
:\
\
^.\.
;\
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
m
.^\^^
>;^
'^
Q,
6
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
[The references at th<' head of the exercises are to the sections
in the Grammar on which the exercises are based.]
EXERCISE I, a. (§§ 1-2.)
A. Continue the following, conjugating the verb throughout
the singular and plural : 1. ^d^ 'i:)ahi @olb unb ©il&ev, bu l^aft
®Dlb unD (Silkr, tc, 2. 2Bag ^abe ic^ V, rooS ^a\t bu ?, jc.
3. §abc id) 33rot unb miid) ?, ^cft bu 33rot unb 3Jlilrf) ?, 2c.
£. Supply the proper form of the present indicative of
^ben in the blank spaces: 1. ^ol^ann (John) — 33rot. 2.
6r — 23rot. 3. mark (Mary) — gOiilc^. 4. (Sic — 5mitd).
5. 2Ba§ — er? 6. 3Bq§ — fie? 7. ^o^ann unb aj^aric — 33rot
unb Wil^, 8. (Sic — 23rot unb SUJild). 9. 2Ba§ — id) ?
10. ^u — gleifd). 11. 2Ba§ — wir ? 12. mx — ®olb
unb (.Silbcr.
C. 1. John has milk. 2. Mary has some bread. 3. He has
some milk. 4. She has br-vad. 5. They have bread and milk.
6. What have we 1 7. We have water and wine. 8. Have
I gold or silver ? No. 9. Hast thou also bread and milk 1 Yes,
I have bread and milk. 10. What have they ? 11. They have
some meat, some bread, some wine and some water. 12. Ye
have silver, but we have gold.
EXERCISE II, a. (§§3^5.)
A. Continue the following, as in Exercise I, a. above : 1.
^0) l)ahe bag 33uc^ unb bic geber, bu })a\t, jc. 2. §abe 16) ben
@tod ?, Ijaft bu ?, jc. 3. ma§ ^abe i6) ?, raaS 'i)a\t bu ?, 2c.
B. Supply the proper form of the definite article in the
blank spaces : 1. ,^abc i6) — 33ud) ? 2. §aft bu — geber ?
♦These exercises are more elementary than tnose in the body of the Grammar, and
may be used as a prelimihary course.
364
EXERCISES II-III.
lS,
sections
365
oughout
. bu ^aft
ni ?, 2c.
id) ?, 2C.
itive of
rot. 2.
- 5mitcl).
— 33rot
— id) ?
- ®olb
He has
id milk.
i. Have
c? Yes,
ey have
12. Ye
3ve t 1.
tc^ ben
u ?, 2C.
in the
geber ?
Ulnar, and
5.
3. .^at mavie ~- 231ume ? 4. ^cr ^at — a)?e[[cr (sing.) ?
^aben roir — aHeffcr (plur.)? 6. S:)aht i^r— q3ferb ? 7. ^abcn
fie — ^unb ? 8. — §unb ^at e^eifc^. 9. — ^e^rcr t^at —
<Btod. 10. — Se^rer ^oben ed)iiler. 11. _ @d,uier ^abcn
^e^rer. 12. — ^nabe ^at — (Btod. 13. — ajJdbc^en ^at —
Slume. U. — $mabd)en ^aben Mrer.
6\ (Oral Exercise— questions to be answered in German
by the pupil.) 1. Was hat der Knabe ? 2. Was hat er?
3. Was hat Marie ? 4. Was hat sie ? 5. Wer hat die Messer ?
6. Wer hat das Buch ? 7. Was haben d.e Lehrer ? 8. Was
haben die Schiiler ? 9. Wer hat die Feder der Mutter ?
10. Wer hat die Messer der Lehrer? 11. W&s hat die Mutter
der Madchen? 12. Wer hat den Stock? 13. Hast du das
Buch Oder die Feder ?
D. I. I have the book. 2. Thou hast the pen. 3. Mary
has the flower. 4. We have pupils. 5. The tershers have
pupils. 6. They have teachers. 7. Who has gold and silver?
8. The girl's mother has gold and silver. 9. The mother of
the girls has bread and meat. 10. To the teacher, to the
mother, to the girl, to the girls. 11. John has the stick and
the knives. 12. The girl has the pen.
EXERCISE III, a. (§§ 6-7.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^c^ l^atte biefe Beitung, bu
l^atteft biefe Beitung, k. 2. Static ic^ hen ©tod ?, ^tteft bu ?,
K. 3. §ttbe ic^ bicfeS 8uc^ ?, ^aft hu ?, jc. 4. ^^ ^be siuei
@d)iiler, bu ^aft, k.
£. Supply the proper form of biefer in the blank spaces :
1. ^c^ ^atU — <Btod, 2. SDu l)atteft — Beitung. 3. — ^nabc
f)at — SBuc^. 4. — %xan f)attc — 33lume. 5. ^o^ann unb ic^
l^attcn — 5meffer (plur.). 6. — Sel^rer l^atten ©c^ulcr. 7. S^cr
S?rubcr — ^rau ^at jtoei toc|ter. 8. SDer ©ruber — a^dbc^en
366
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
(plur.) f^at ba§ 33ud). 9. ^c^ gebe feive) — ed)ulev, —
%xau, —- ma'txhen, — aJicibc^en (plur.) bie ^^eitung.
C. (Oral.) 1. Welcher Kmabe hatte den Stock ? 2. Welchen
Stock hatte er ? 3. Welche Frau hatte die Zeitung? 4.
Welche Zeitung hatte sie ? 5. Welches Madchen hatte die
Blume ? 6. Welche Blume hatte sie ? 7. Welcher Lehrer
hatte dieses Buch ? 8. Welches Buch hatte er ? 9. Welchem
Schuler giebt er {does he give) die Feder ? 10. Welcher Frau
giebt er das Brot ? 11. Welchem Madchen giebt er die Blume ?
12. Welchen Madchen giebt er die Zeitung 1
D. 1. Which boy had this stick? 2. Wliich stick had this
boy? 3. This woman has two daughters. 4, This girl has
the flower. 5. These teachers have pupils. 6. The father
of these girls had this house. 7. Who had these gardens?
8. To which father, to which mother, to which girl, to which
girls, does he give gold ? 9. He gives this father (this mother,
etc.), gold. 10. Who had this newspaper? 11. Which news-
paper had John ? 12. Which book had he ?
I
EXERCISE IV, a. (§§ 8-15.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^c^ bin niiibe, \iu btft miibe,
2c. 2. 33in \6.j fd;on ?, bift bu fc^on ?, jc. 3. ^c^ ruor \)z\iit
^tx, U nmrft, k. 4. SBar x6^ gefteni ntd;t l;iev ?, \mx\i 'an I
2C. 5. ^d) l)ahe etnen ^reunb, bu ^aft, jc. 6. ^dj Ijattt eine
SBlunie, bu Ijattcft, k. 7. ^aik id) dn ^d) ?, ^attcft bu ?, jc.
B. Supply the proper form of niein and ciu in the blank
spaces: 1. Wl~ 3Sater Ijat e— ?}reuub. 2. 9}Z-- a}hitter ^at
c— 23lume. 3. 3)tefe^ 9JJabdjeu Ijot e— ^kib. 4. 3)^— Server
j^aben e— 2Bagen. 5. ^d) gebe ni— ^ater e— ^eitung, 6. ^d)
gebe m— 9JJutter e— S3ud). 7. ^d; gebe e— tinbe m— geber.
8. ^c^ gebe m— ^inbe e— §ut. 9. C?— ^inb Ijat m— ^ut
10. SDag 33uci^ m— @d)n)efter ift nid;t (jier.
EXERCISES IV-V.
367
liilev, —
W'elchen
ng? 4.
atte die
■ Lehrer
V^elchem
er Frau
Blume ?
had this
girl has
i father
ardens ?
) which
mother,
li news-
(t miibe,
ir l^eute
]t hu ?,
itte eine
)u ?, JC.
3 blank
tter l^at
- lOel^rer
6. 3d)
- ^eber.
0. (Oral.) 1. 1st sein Haus klein od(!r gross? 2. War
das Wetter gestern warm oder kalt? 3. Sind diese Madchen
reich oder arm? 4. Waren die Madchen hier ? 5. Waren
sie gestern hier ? 6. Hat dein Vater einen Wagen ? 7. Sind
sein Bruder und seine Sch wester hier? 8. 1st unser Lehrer
miide? 9. Sind seine Schiiler trage oder fleissig? 10. Wo
ist die Fede. meiner Schwester ? 11. Wer hat meinen Stock ?
12. Hat Marie kein Buch ? 13. Hat sie auch keine Feder ?
14. Hat sie ihre Feder ?
D. 1. The weather is cold to-day. 2. It was warm yester-
day. 3. I was tired, he was tired, we were tired, they were
tired. 4. My brother and sister are not idle. 5. My sister's
dress is pretty. 6. Is her dress pretty? 7. No, it is not
pretty. 8. Our friend and his brother are here. 9. Our
teachers are tired, 10. The pupils are not i'rvA 11. Has
Mary no pen? 12. She has a book, but she has no pen.
13. Who has my stick? 1 4. Has John a friend ? 15. I give
(gebe) my friend my book and pen.
EXERCISE V, a. (§§ 16-18.)
A. Decline the following throughout : biefer SJJalev, biefe
mutkv, biefeg 9JJ(ibd;cn, biefe Zodjtcv, mein U3nibev, inehi 5lpfet,
fein mantd, it)x ©emdlbe, unfer 3Kagen, ber WiaUx, bie Zod)Uv[
'oa^ ^enfter.
B. Give the genitive singular and the nominative plural of •
Ofen, 55Dger, ©arten, Onfel, 5lbler, Wli^^ev, 5lpfel, ®d)iiler,
Server, ©djruager, 'mutkx, Zo6)kx, ^tdfe, ^agen.
C. 1. !3)ie tpfel flub |d)on. 2. ®ie ^enfter finb Hein. 3. Xk
abutter biefer 9J?dbd;en tft arm. 4. :;^r;rc Vodjtcx finb frant
5. T)k Xodjter meineS 33ruberg max gcftern tranf. 6. "^k
Se^rer [tub fletttg. 7. 2)tefe ©diiiler finb nid)t trdge. 8. SDie
gliigel Mefer i^oger finb grof^ 9. ^m 8ommer finb bie ©drten
feljvfdjou. 10. 3)ie ©drten finb grun. 11. Unfere 'itpfel fthb
368
SUPPLKMSNTARY fiXERClSES.
jc^t rcif. 12. Xiiefe SO^iittcr luorcn mit it)vcn ^Dd)tevn o^av \ud}i
jufiieben. 13. ^d) f)aU ^loei 33ruber. 14. WUhi 33ruber \)at
D. (Oral.) 1. Wann sind die Apfel reif? 2. Wann sind
die Garten griin ? 3. Wer hat meinen Mantel ? 4. Wo sind
unsere Briider ? 5. Sind diese Maler reich oder arm ? 6.
Sind ihre Gemalde gut (good) oder schlecht ? 7. Hab^n diese
Madchen zwei Briider oder drei ? 8. Hat dein Vater einen
Wagen? 9. Sind die Fliigel des Adlers klein oder gross?
10. Waren die Miitter mit ihren Tochtern zufrieden ? 11.
Wo sind die Madchen ? 12. Wer hat deine Messer ? 13. Hat
dein Vater zwei Garten ? 14. Sind seine Garten in der Stadt ?
15. Wo sind die Garten deines Vaters ?
E. 1. These apples are very large. 2. The apples in our
garden are ripe. 3. I give the apples to these girls. 4. These
paintings are beautiful. 5. My brother has three daughters.
6. His daughters are very industrious. 7. He is satisfied with
his daugliters. 8. The gardens are beautiful in summer.
9. The trees in this garden are very large. 10. My brothers
were here yesterday. 11. These painters are poor. 12. Their
paintings are not good. 13. A bird has wings. 14. These
windows are very small. 15. In (the) spring, in summer, in
autumn, in winter.
EXERCISE VI, a. (§§ 19-20.)
A. Continue the following : 1. ^d^ werbe fait, bu, JC.
2. aSevbc id) inube?, toirft bu, k. 3. ^d) bin mit meincm
S3rubcr ^ufriebcn, \i\x, k. 4. ©eftern xoax id) 5U §aufe (at
home), — raarft bu, jc. 5. ^m SBintcr h\v. idj) ju ^aufe, —
bift bu, jc. 6. ^m (Somnter roerbe td£) immcr txcLXit, — wirft bu, k,
B. 1. ©tefcr ® chiller rairb }e^t flci^ig. 2. ^vx 3S inter wax
cr trage. 3. ^m (Sommcr roerbc id) oft franf. 4. SBirft bu tm
.^crbftc ratcber rao^l ? 5. 3a, im .^erbfte wcrbe ic^ raiebcr rool^t.
EXERCISE VI.
369
6. SBir luevbcu reici), abcr fie tuevbcu orm. 7. Xcx Wlakv loavb
arm. 8. ©cine (^emcilbc luuvbeu fd)leci^t. 9. 2Bir tuuvben uiit
[cinen ©emcilbcn unjufviebcn. 10. ^m ^crbftc lyerbcn bie ?tpfel
reif. 11. ^m ©ommer rcurben bie ©drtcn [c{;r fd)6n. 12.
^ic ©cirten raerbcn je^t grun. 13. §eute wirb bag ^Better fe^r
unangene^m. 14. ©eftern roar ber 23ruber bie[er 9Jldbd)en i)kx,
15. ^cr 33ater unfereS Se^rerg ift jc^t ()ter. 16. ^ier ift er.
17. SKir finb l^ier ; l^ier finb tutr. 18. ^ie lOe^rcr finb mit i^rcn
(Sd^iilern oft unjufvieben.
C. (Oral.) 1. Wirst du miide? 2. Wer wirdmiide? 3.
Wer ward gestern krank ? 4. Wirst du im Herbste oft krank 1
5. Wirst du im Winter wieder wohl ? 6. Werden wir reich
Oder arm ? 7. Wurden unsere Briider auch arm ? 8. Werden
die Schiiler jetzt fleissig? 9. Wann wurden sie trage? 10.
Wann werden die Garten griin ? 11. Wann werden die Apfel
reif? 12. Wurden die Apfel im Friihling reif? 13. Wer
ist unzufrieden? 14. Wird dein Vater jetzt schwach? 15. 1st
er sehr alt? 16. Wann war der Bruder des Malers hier?
17. Waren seine Tochter gestern auch hier? 18. Sind wir
mit den Gemalden dieses Malers zufrieden ?
Z>. 1. I am tired. 2. I am getting (I become) tired. 3. In
summer I often got tired. 4. We often fall (become) ill in
summer. 5. In autumn we get well again. 6. My father fell
ill in the winter. 7. In spring he got well again. 8. The
weather is getting fine again. 9. He will get well. 10. You
(2 sing.) are getting large and strong. 11. My father and
mother are getting old. 12. You (2 plur.) are getting old.
13. In spring the garden became beautiful again. 14. In
summer the leaves were green, and the apples were getting
large. 15. We were idle, but now we are becoming attentive.
16. When were the brothers of these girls here? 17. They
were here yesterday. 18. They are here now. 19. Here they
are. 20. Are they getting tired ?
370
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
EXERCISE VII, a. (§§ 21-23).
A. Dcclino tlio f()llo\vin«,' tlirrni^ri„)ut : bev ^o\}n, inein
.r^uiib, bie ,f>anb, bicfcv momt, eiii ;\oljv, lucldjcr ^^lpfcl6auiu,
fcin ^eiiib, uufcv .Uoiiig, i(;v Xcppicf;, fciii ^^iimjUng.
£. Give the «,^('nitivo .sinjnrular and tlio nominative plural
of : ^rcunb, rvetiib, <viiH, O^cnernl, ^V'ninling, Offijiev, etabt,
C. 1. ^ie 'Inge bcr mod)c fhib eonntag, jc. 2. (Sine
2Bod)e l)nt fiebcii 3:agc. 3. 5)vci ,C^q(;vc. 4. "eicbcn aJhmate.
5. mY Ijahcn siuei .):)aiibo iiiib jiuci -i^iiile. 0. ^ebc .t)aiib l;at
iiinf 3-ingcv. 7. Tk ,»)i!ubc Ijnbcii uicv ^•iif^c. • 8. 2)ie g-iifje
ber ^unbe fiub f Iciii. 9. Sir \)abcn bvci ^^Ipfclbaunie in uu)erem
©artcii. 10. S)ie ^Kpfclbdume unferc^^ &ai'tm<-S [tub gvo^. 11.
3ol)Qnn l)ai feiiie <>ciiibc. 1l>. 3Jiciue '(\ieuube luaven gefrern
nid;t 511 ,r>au)c. 1.3, l^ic SIH-iibcv mcijic:; grcunbc^ fiub jel^t l;iev.
14. ^ie (>5euevalc bc^^ Siai^cv-S (iub \ci\t in bicfcv etabt. 15. ^^Tic
®o(;nc meiue^S edjiuagci^^ fiub jcbt groH. 16. ®ie ^^orI;ange
meine^ Bimmcvo fiub rot. 17. .^dj Ijabe eiuen leppid) in meiuem
Bimmev. 18. '^Diefc Xeppid;e uub ^orl)duge fiub fe^r fdjiin.
I>. (Oral.) 1. Wie viele (how mmiy) Tage hat eine Woche?
2. Wie viele Monate hat ein Jahr? 3. Wie viele Hande
habenwii'? 4. Wie viele Fusse haben die Hunde? 5. fSind
die Fiisse der Hunde gross? 6. Hat dein Vater Apfelbaume
in seinem Garten ? 7. Sind seine Apfelbaume gross 1 8. Wie
viele Sohne hat der Kaiser ? 9. Haben die Hunde Fleisch 1
10. Was haben sie? 11. Wo sind die Generale ? 12. Wann
waren die Offiziere in dieser Stadt ? 13. Haben sie viele
Freunde hier ? 14. Hat Johann viele Feinde ?
^. 1. A week has seven days. 2. The days of the week
are Sunday, etc. 3. A year has twelve months. 4. I have
two hands and two feet. 5. A dog has four feet. 6. My
father has apple-trees in his garden. 7. His apples are getting
EXEUCISES VII-VIII.
371
11.
ripe now. 8. The king lias thrt^o sons and two daughterH.
9. The ofRc(3rs are in tlie city. 10. Wliero is tlie gcnoral's
Hon ? 11. llo is in the city too. 12. Have you many friiaids?
13. I have many fricjida and no enomios. 14. My windows
have curtains. 15. The carpet of my room is red. 16. These
cari)ots are rod. 17. Kings have generals. 18. Generals
have officers.
EXERCISE VIII, a. (§§ 24-26.)
A. Continue tlio following: 1. 3d) I;a6e ?ficd)t C[ef)aU, bit
I)nft, jc. 2. ^obe id) dkd)t Q,ci)abt '^, l)i\ft bu, :c. 3. ^d)
l)i\tte ben ©tocf nid;t c^cljaht, bit, jc. 4. S:)atk id) ben ©tocf
uid)t getjabt?, jc. 5. ^d) wcvbe md &dh Ijabcn, bu, jc.
fi. ^veibc id) Did Cklb ^ahcn ?, jc. 7. ^c^ tDeibe vid 'ikvc^-,
uiir^cn (\d)aht l)ahcn, bu, jc. 8. ^d) raiirbe fern ^ergniigen
o,d)aht l)ahcn, hn, ?c.
B. 1. ®er Jlnak I)ot eincn 5lvfcl gefjabt. 2. liefer .^err
Ijatte oiel (s5elb geljobt. 3. Xic 33ettler l)aben fciue Sdju^e
geljabt. 4. 9[isiv luevbcn Ijeute ein ©eiuitter Ijabcn. 5. ^ie
edjiiler luevbeu tnorgeu eincn ^ctertag Ijokn. 6. 3Sivft bu
morgen bein 33nd) Ijoben ? 7. ^er ^aij'er luiirbe uiete C^Jenerale
Ijaben. 8. 'Xiejev 2d)m' miirbe Dielc (Sdjiiler l)aben. 9. 3!J?ein
^•vennb mivb in ber (Bia'i)t vid 33evgniigen geljobt ^aUn, 10.
^sd) ^Qbe in biefev eiobt t)iele gvcunbe geljobt. 11. ^iefe
iJJiabdjen lucvbcn ntovgen $onb] djulje ^ben. 12. aSir fatten
^kd)t gel)Qbt. 13. S:^aft bu 9^edjt gef)abt ? 14. SBiivbe id)
))kd)t '()ahcn ober llnvcd)t? 15. ^u tuitrbeft Unred)t ^ben.,
16. 3c^ roevbe morgen einen ^eiertag Ijaben, benn id) bin miibe.
C. (Oral.) 1. Wer hat mein Buch gehabt ? 2. Wer hat
den Stock meines Bruders gehabt ? 3. Was hast du gehabt ?
4. Was haben Johann und Marie gehabt ? 5. Habe ich deine
Feder gehabt ? 6. Haben wir gestern ein Gewitter gehabt ?
7. Werden wir morgen ein Gewitter haben ? 8. Wann werden
die Schiller einen Feiertag hal^en ? 9. Warum hatten sie
372
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
einen Feiertag gehabt ? 10. Wird deine Sch wester morgen
ihro Ilaiulschuho Iial)en ? 11. WVrden wir morgen Geld
halK'n? 1"J. Wie viole Hunde Miirdo Johann haben ? 13.
Wirst du vi(4 Vergniigen in der Stadt gehabt hal)en ? 14.
Hatte ich Rodit gehabt? 15. Wer hatto Unrecht gehabt?
16. Wiirden wir Rt^eht oder Unrecht haben ?
D. 1. Tlio girl haa her book. 2. Tlie girl has had her book.
;5. We liavo had many friends. 4. They have had gold and
silver. 5. The bc^ggars have had no money. 6. Had they had
bread ? 7. They had had no bread. 8. My friends had had
much pleasure in the city. 9. Will they have much pleasure
to-morrow ?XiO. I shall have money to-morrow. 11. We
shall have a holiday tomorrow. 12. Will our friends have
had much money ? 13. The emperor will have had generals
and officers. 14. We shall have had friends and enemies.
15. I should be rijrht. 16. I should have been right. 17.
18. You would have been wrong.
You would be wronjr
EXERCISE IX, a. (§§ 27-34.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) lobe nieinen ^^reunb, \i\x,
}c. 2. 9J?ac^e id; einen epa^iergang ?, mac^ft bu, k. 3. ^d) ^abc
etn ^aug gefauft, 'tiw, jc. 4. ^d) irerbe ntorgen einen ©pajier;
gang madjen, bu, jc. 5. ^d; luurbe fpielen, raenn \6) '^txi ^atte,
bu, K. 6. 2Benn id) 3eit geijobt ^cittc, roenn \)Vi, jc. 7. ^d^
^atte Dier geternt, bu, jc. 8. ^^ glaube, bag er @elb \)Cii,
bu, JC.
B. 1. !5)er Sit%xtx lobt ben (S^iiler. 2. !Die Setter (oben bie
(Sd)iUer. 3. SBir loben unfere ©c^ulev. 4. 3»ir ^aben unferc
Sel^rer gelobt. 5. 3Der ^aifev luirb [eine ©cncrale loben. 6. 2)ic
©enerale luerben il^rc Offisieve lobeu. 7. SBtr fpielten geftcrn
im (^^xitw. 8. W\x \)(x\it\\ uiel gckdjt. 9. ^^er ^mU fpielte
mtt feinem J^unbe. 10. 'Oi^ivft bn morgen einen i2)pa ^liergang
mad)en? 11. ;^d) madjc einen epa^ieigang burd; ben 3i3aH).
EXERCISE IX.
373
12. ^rf) mac^tc gcftcrn cincn ©pajicrgang. 13. ^6) rotirbc einen
©pagicrgang mad)en, tocnn id) ^eit Ijdttc. U. ^6) gluube nid;t,
ba§ ic^ 3eit l^abcn rocrbc. 15. .5)cutc Icrncn tuir 3)cut[d).
16. aJJovgen tuevbcn rair I'atcm Icrncn. 17. 2Bir lucrbcn old
gclernt l^abcn. 18. 3)ie JJiuttcr l)attc ^anb[d)u^e fiir t^re Zo(i)c
tex gcfauft.
C. (Oral.) 1 . Lernst du heute Deutsch otler Latein ? 2. V7a.s
wirst du morgen lernen ? 3. Was haben wir gestern gelernt 1
4. Ilat Johann Deutscli gelernt? 5. Wird er auch Latein
lernen 1 6. Wird er in einem Jahre viol gelornt haben ?
7. Spielten die Miidchen gestern im Garten ? 8. Haben nie
viel gelacht ? 9. Werden wir morgen einen Spazlergang
machen? 10. Wiirden wir einen Spaziergang machen, wenn
wir Zeit batten? 11. Wtirde der Kaiser seine Generale loben?
12. Was hat die Mutter fiir ihre Tochter gekauft? 13. Was
hatte unser Vater fiir den Bettler gekauft? 14. Hat der
Bettler Geld? 15. Glaubt dieser Herr, dass er Geld hat?
16. Glaubt der Lehrer, dass wir Larm machen ?
D. 1. The pupil is praising his teacher. 2. The teachers
are praising their pupils. 3. I was praising my brother because
he was industrious. 4. I have bought shoes for the becirar.
5. We should buy a house if we had money. 6. We are
studying (lernen) Latin to-day. 7. We shall study German
to-morrow. 8. We were studying German yesterday. 9. We
shall have learnt much in a year. 10. To-morrow I shall take
a walk through the town. 11. Yesterday I was taking a walk
in the garden. 1 2. Why was your brother laughing ? 13. He
was laughing because he was merry. 14. Will he laugh if he
is merry ? 15. Shall we lau.srh if we are merry ? 16. Do we
laugh if we are merry? 17. We shall cry if we are sad.
18. We have ci'ied because we were sad,
374
8UPPLKMKNTAUY KXEKC18KS.
I i
EXERCISE X, a. (SS 35-37)
A. Continin, tl.ofoilowii.^.: 1. ;\cl; nvbeitcte ,^u oict, bu ^c
2. Xaiv.c id) ^n uicl y, taii^cjf bu, ,c. 11 M) tnblc bic .Uiubcr
nid;t, bu, K. 4. ad; l)abc in bcr ^la'ot ftubicvt, bu, jc.
5. ^d; Ijabe mciu Wclb uer)\i)!ucubci, bu, jc.
/?. Decline tho following tlir(.i,<.l„.ut : bicfcci 'ITovf bnc$
^ crt.nieut, mciu .Ulcib, [ciu .Uinb, il;r ii^ud;, uufer .Oau., feiu
mann, ciu .r^uf^u, lueldicv ili^nlb V
C. 1. !Der (Martncv id)iUtcU ben ^^IpfcKmum. 2. Tcr etunn
Ijat bie matta von bcii ^^^.iuntcu qc)d)uttclt. 3. Xcr Vcl)icv
tQbcU bic .Uiubcr. 4. mv tabclu bicfcu Offi^icr, lucil cr bao
(^5elb uid)t bc3n()(te. 5. maxmn Ijat cr bao (Mclb uid)t hc^Mt V
6. aScil cr fcin O^clb t^attc. 7. ih' l)at [ciu (s'iqcutuui ucr.
[d)U)cubet. 8. !3)ic .Uiubcr rcbctcu ^n mcl. 9. ITcr i^ef^rcr tabcltc
bic .Uiubcr, u,cir fie 5u uicl rcbctcu. 10. Tcr .Uouin Ijat [ciuc
(«cucralc ^ctabclt. 11. ^icfe ^Jiauucr fiaOcu .Ulciber fiir iftrc
SBeibcr uub ^iiubcr gcfauft. 12. ^JJ^ciu ^?atcr fiat aiuci .i>au[cr
gefouft. 13. ^d) rubrc gccjeu ben etroui. 14. 'jd) gc6c mciucr
@d;u)cftcr bic ^^iid)cr. 15. ^IDic (ficr bicfcr .»>iiljucr"fiuD cp-nH
U. ®ie ^Matter bicfcr U3aume fiub gclb. 17. 3)ie .r^ofpitalr
m bicfcr etabt fiub grof^ uub fd)ou. 18. Tcv .Tloifcr Irnt roci
@d;li)ffer in bicfcr ^Btaht,
D. (Oral.) 1. Wosinddio Kinder? 2. Fiir wen (whom)
kauft der Mann Kleider ? 3. 8ind die Blatter der Baume
grun Oder gelb ? 4. Waiuni sind sie ^h ? 5. Wie viele
Haiiser hat dieser Herr gekauft ? G. Warum tadelt der Lehrer
die Kinder ? 7. Wie viele 8chl6sser hat der Kaiser in dieser
Stadt ? 8. Hat der Offizier das Geld bezahlt ? 9. Warum
hat er das Geld nieht bezahlt? 10. Hat deine Mutter die
Eier verkauf t ? 1 1 . Hat sie aiu^h die Hiihner verkauf t ? 1 2.
Arbeitete Johann gestern ? 13. Sind diese Manner reich oder
arm? 14. Studierten die Jijnglinge im Winter oder im
Sommer ? 15. Wer hat die Regimenter gelobt ?
KXKHCISKS X-XF.
S'^.'i
K. 1. Tho tcadier blames 'lici childron. 2. Tlio inothfTs
did not bla.no their dauKhtors. ;i. I },la,„..d this man In^cause
ho ha<l wasted liis money. 4. J am rowing against thv, stream.
6. We were rowing against tlio stream. 6. The garciener was
working in the garden. 7. My father has paid tlio gardener.
H. Tliese booics are very fine. 9. I am giving tliese l,<H,ks to
the children. 10. These men were buying clothes for their
children. II. My mother has sold the eggs. 12. She has
not sold the fowls. 13. The men in the village were working
yesterday. 14. These young men have studied a long while.
15. The hospitals in London are very large. 16. The emperor
has two regiments in these villages. 1 7. (llie) birds live in the
f eats. 18. (The) worms live in the earth.
EXERCISE XI, 8. (§§ 38-42.)
A. Continue the following : 1. ^J^iefed Si^U) geljoit miv, bicfcS
ii3ud) geljhrt bir, jc, 2. S^^^^t icfi mid; ^tUWi, ^afi bu bid;,
jc. 3. ^d; bin bamtt jufviebeu, bu, jc.
B. 1. ^iefe ^eber ge^ort mir. 2. %\t\t SBiidiev ge^rcn
lueiner (gdiraefter. 3. 33a^ ^^m^ geprt unS, aber ber ©avtcn
gefiovt ^^nen. 4. ®{e ^mutter fauft i^ren ^oditcrn ^feiber ;
fie fauft if^ncn ^leiber. 6. ^g \\i ein $Buc^ m\ bem Z\\^)l
6. ^c^ gebe e^ bem ilinbe. 7. ^d) gebe eg i^m. 8. .^^^htw ^ic
meinen §ut ge^bt ? 9. ^c^ ^^U i^n nic^t ger^abt. 10. ^er
l)at unfere §anb[d;u^e ge^abt ? 11. Slavic ^at fie gebabl. 12.
^c^ bin uut meinev Hufgabe yertig ; ic^ Im bamit fertig. 13.
®tnb ®ie mit meiner ^^(ufgabe ^ufrieben ? 14. ^^ bin bamit
Sufrieben. 15. 33iefev @d)itler [d;amt fic^, meit er feine ^lufgabe
nic^t gemad)t ^t. IG. ®er l^e^ver fd)oiut fid; feiner.
6'. (Oral: use pronouns in answering.) 1. Wem (^o ?r/iom)
gehort dieses Buch ? 2. Gehort dir diese Feder % 3. Gehori
Ihnen diese Feder ? 4. Gehoren diese Handschuhe Marie ?
5. Wer hat meine Feder gehabt % 6. Wer hat mein Buch
37G
SUPPLEMENTAKY EXERCISES
:\ • ..
gehabt ? 7. Wo ist das Buch ? 8. VVem gebe ich das Buch ?
9. Wo habon Sie die Biicher gekauft ? 10. Wie viel haben
Sie dafur bezalilt ? 11. Haben Sie zwei Thaler dafiir bezahlt ?
12. Wo ist das Madchen ? 13. Wo sind die Madchen ?
14. Haben sie ihre Arbeit gematiht ? 15. Ist der Lehr«;r mit
ihrer Arbeit zuf rieden ? 1 6. Lobt sich dieser Jiingling zu viel ?
D. 1. This knife belongs to me; it belongs to me. 2. These
gloves belong to Mary ; they belong to her. 3. This house
belongs to us. 4. The carriage belongs to you. 5. The teacher
has blamed the pupil ; he lias blamed him. 6. The teachers
have praised them. 7. My father has bought two houses ; he
has bought th-ni. 8. How much did he pay for them ? 9. This
young man praises himself kj much. 10. I am ashamed of
him 11. Who has had my hat? 12. John has had it.
13. We shall visit our parents to-morrow. 14. We shall visit
them if the weather is fine. 15. It will b.3 fine to-morrow.
EXERCISE XII, a. (§§ 43-44.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) moclje meiuc 5{ufgo6e,
bu modift beine 5(ufga6c, :c. 2. 9}Zein m)xtx Y^ mic^ gelobt,'
bein l'el;rer \)^i bic^ gelobt, k. 3. ^^ luurbe ©olbat, bu trurbei"^
©olbQt, K. 4. 3d) ftedle bie ^anb \\\ bie Safc^e, \iVi, k» 5.
%^ [djiitteUe irjiu bie $anb, bu, :c. 6. ^d; uerle^te inir bie
S^^\\\i, \i\x Derlel^teft bir, jc.
B. 1. 9JZein ^ktev liebt mid). 2. 3^etn qSater lieBt bic^. 3
eein sax^itx lie&t \\)Xi, 4. 3(;re 9J?utter liebt fie. 5. Itnfere
(Sltevn liebeu \x.\\^:>, G. (Sure (Slteru lieBeu i.\x6), 7. ,3§ve (SU
tern liebeu fie. 8. ^Ijve eUern lieben eie. 9. 3)a§ 9}Mbd)eu
liebtif)ie 9}?utfcv. 10. ^d; lundje mcine 5lufgak. 11. JTsanu
u)irft bu bciue ^lufgnbe niadjeu ? 12. ^avl mad;t [eiue 5lufgak;
er madjt fie jel^t. 13. '4^ie tiuber flub \\\ ber ed)ule. 14. (gie
inad)en tljve ^luigavcu. 15. 8ie luaieu geftevn in ber ^tvd;e.
16. !5)a§ @il6ev ift lueig, baS ®otb ift gel6. 17. 3)ie SCo^el
EXERCISE XII.
IS Buch ?
el haben
bezahlt ?
[adchen ?
hr«)r mit
? zu viel ?
2. These
lis house
e teacher
teachers
uses ; he
9. This
lamed of
had it.
hall visit
•rrow.
?Iufgok,
^ gelobt,
I wuxht't
f 2C. 5.
mix bte
)ic^, 3.
. Itnfcre
\^xc (St=
3}Mbdjeu
. mann
tufgak;
14. ®ie
: Jlti'd;e.
e SCogel
377
^oBen ^riigcl. 18. ^^ve J^Higel finb reicr;t unb ftaxf, 19. ^-cr
^ater biefe^ ^iinglingg ift ^^aufmann. 20. Gr reift oft in bev
©cfiiDeij unb in 3^eut[c^ranb. 21. (Sx m^nt in ber ed)iaer.
|tro§e. 22. ^er %xit fd)itttelte ben ^lopf. 23. (Sr Ijatte feine
^offnung. 24. ^arl ^at fic^ bie §anb uerle^t.
C. (Oral.) 1. Wer liebt uns? 2. Lieben die Eltern ihre
Kinder ? 3. Liebt die Mutter ihre Tochter. 4. Lieben sie
ihre Mutter ? 5. Liebt das Madchen ihre Mutter ? 6. Hast
du deine Aufgabe gemacht ? 7. Haben sie ihre Aufgaben
gemacht ? 8. Wann machten die Madchen ihre Aufgaben ?
9. Wosind die Kinder heute? 10. Wo waren sie gestern ?
11. 1st sein Vater Arzt oder Kaufmann ? 12. Wohnt er
noch in der Schillerstrasse ? 13. Wo reist er im Sommer?
14. 1st das Silber weiss oder gelb ? 15. Haben die Wtirmer
Fliigel ? 1 6. Wo leben die Wiirmer ? 1 7. Warum weint das
Madchen? 18. Warum schiittelte der Arzt den Kopf f
19. Sind Sie jetzt mit Ihrer Arbeit fertig ? 20. 1st der
Lehrer mit der Arbeit zufrieden ?
/>. 1. My parents love me. 2. Our parents love us. 3.
The mother loves her daughters. 4. Her daughters love her.
5. They lov- one another. 6. The girl loves her mother.
7. The girls love their mother. 8. Do you (plur.) love your
parents? 9. Parents love their children. 10. Parents send their
children to school. 11. Birds have wings. 12. The wings of
birds are light and strong. 1 3. Is your father a merchant ?
14. No, he is a doctor. 15. He is travelling in Switzerland
now. 16. In summer he often travels in Germany. 17 We
are living in Schiller-street. 18. Why are you crying, Chlrles?
19. I am crying because I have hurt my hand. 20. I hurt
it as I was working with an axe..
378
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
EXERCISE XIII, a. (§§ 45-46.)
A. Continue the following : 1. ^d) \d)\dU geftevu bem ^ef)vtx
ein 33ud), bu, jc. 2. ^d) fdjirfte ifjin gcftern bie ^ud)ev, bu, jc.
3. ^d) l^abe if)m l^eutc bie 23ud)cr gefdjidt, bu, 2c. 4. ^i^d) ^a6e
fie iljm ge[d)idt, bu, 2c. 5. f^^mk ^6e id) i(jm bie md)cx
gefdjidt, l^eute ^aft bu, 2c.
B. Supply the proper form of the definite article in the
blanks: 1. gu — ^inbe. 2. 23et — geuftev. 3. Urn —
23aum. 4. 5lu§ — ©tabt. 5. SSiber — ^eiube. 6. aj^it —
geber. 7. ':Sjnxd) — ®trom. 8. ^iiv — 9JJanner. 9. (Bdt
— 3:oge. 10. 9^ac^ — ^mutter. 11. ©egen — jtaifer. 12.
Ot;ue — §anb[d;ur;e. 13. %u[^cv — ^oc^ter. 14. ^on —
eitcrn.
t
C. 1. tBir raaren geftevu 16ei meiuer tantc. 2. ®ie luoljut in
ber @tobt» 3. ®ie raol^ut feit bvei >r;reu iu ber (Bta'ot 4.
dlad) bem 9)Jittagge[fen madjten luiv niit \l)v eiuen ©vagievgang.
5. Unfere Zank l^atte eiue Df^eife nad) ^^eutfdjlaub gemadjt. 6.
(Bie er^d^lte (told) uu^ uiel uon i^rev ^teife. 7. Urn uier U^x
fc^idte fie um nad) ^:^an\c. 8. Uui fiiuf ll{)r raaren rair lyieber
gu §aufe. 9. 3Eir raaren uiit unfeveni 33e[ud)e (visit) fe^r jufrie-
ben. 10. W\x waxen ber ^ante fet;r bonfbav. 11. aj^eiue Zante
!aufte mir geftevu ein ®efd;ent 12. ©ie faufte e§ Dom £auf.
maun in bev ®d)iaevftva§c. 13. ©ie l^at e^ miv ^eute gefd)idt.
14. ©eftevn !aufte id) meiner ®d)n)eftev ein ©efdient 15, ^eute
^ahe id) eg i^r gefdjidt. 16 ©ic ift mir feljv baufbav bcifuv.
17. 2Ba§ fagte fie (ju) S^uen V 18. ®ic fogte : ,,^d) bin biv
fel^v banf bav. "
I). (Oral.) 1. Wo wohnt Ihre Tan to ? 2. In welohei-
Strasse wohnt sie ? 3. Seit wann wohnt sie in die.ser Strasse ?
4. Wann besuchten Sie Ihre Tante? 5. Waren Sie gestt'i!!
bei ilir ? 6. Machte Hire Tante einen Spaziergang mit Ihnen 1
7. Wann machten Sie einen Spaziergang? 8. Was erzahltc
EXERCISES XTII-XIV.
379
)cnt 2ef)xix
ex, bu, K.
ic 33u(i)er
le in the
3. Urn —
3. Wit —
9. (Beit
ifer. 12.
. 35on —
: luolint in
5ta't)t, 4.
asievgang.
iiodjt. 6.
I uiev lll;r
uir luteber
i'i)x jufrie;
dne jtonte
om ^auf;
e gefdjicft.
15, .'^eute
ax bcifuv.
d) bin biv
. welohei'
<: 8trasse ?
it Ihnen ?
} erzahlte
Ihnen Ihre TiinU) 1 9. Sind Sici niit Tlnem Besiiche zufrieden ?
10. Haben Siu jonials eino Rei.so nach Ueutschland geniacht 1
11. Wann haben Sic Ihicr Sch wester das Geschenk gekauft?
12. Von wem (whom) haben Sie es gekauft ? i;3. Wo
wohnt dieser Kaufmann ? 14. War Ihre Schwester fiir das
Geschenk dankbar ? 1 5. Was hat sie (zu) Ihnen gesagt ?
B. 1. Yesterday 1 bought my brother a present. 2. I
bought it from a merchant in the city. 3. I shall send it to
my brother to-morrow. 4. He is at my aunt's now. 5. He
has been at her house for three months. 6. We often visit my
aunt in the town. 7. After dinner we take a walk with her
through the town. 8. Yesterday ghe took a walk with us.
9. She told us a-great-deal (uiel) about her journey to Germany.
10. She often travels in Germany. 11. Have you ever taken
a journey to Germany ? 12. When did you send your mother
a letter? 13. Have you sent her a letter to-day? 14. To-
morrow I shall send her a letter. 15. She sent me a letter
yesterday. 16. I am very thankful to her for her letters.
17. I sent a letter home to-day.
EXERCISE XIV, a. (§§ 52-59).
A. Decline the following throughout : ber Rnahc, btefer
■D^enfci^, biefer .l^evv, [eine Zantc, Uin ©olbat, itjre (Sdjwefter,
mcine 33lume, ein ^ren^e, bte ©rdfin, biefev ©tubent.
B. Continue the following: 1. ^d^ tin ®olbat genjorbcn,
bu, jc. 2. 23{n t^ nad^ ^eutfc^Ianb gereift ? btft bu, k. 3. ^c^
bin nad) §au[e geeilt, 'an, k, 4. ^d) Vm biefem $errn ^eutc
kgegnet, bu, k.
C. 1. Waxk ift nadj Ottaiua gereift. 2. HJlavie l^at t^re tanien
in OttaiDtt befud)t. 3. @ie ift bei i^ren Zantm in Ottaiua
gerae[en. 4. %U fie bei if}ven Xanten xoax, ^atte fie uiel
55evgniigen. 5. SJlein 9kffe ift ®olbat geroovben. 6. 9Jceine
380
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
S^effcii finb ©olbotcii qciuoibcu. 7. 3>cr i)ic[fc be^J (^ha^en {ft
etubcut. 8. ^ic 'mmncn im ©arteii bicfcv 4)ame fiiib [cI;ou.
9. !3)ie mmnen bicfev 4^amen finb fcfjv fd)ou. 10. 3){e 33nrcn
nub .^afcn lebcn im ^albe. 11. ®ev ©olju biefe^ .r^evni ift arm
gciDovben; ev f;at [ein C^igeutum uev[d;iuenbet. 12.'3)er '^^reuile
ift ein a:)elb. 13. ^k ^^reuf^en finb .)>lbeu. U. 5Biv reben
uiel uon ben Zljatm ber §elben. 15. hex ^^atcr meine^ 9^ef[en
ift mein 33ruber. 16. 3)ie (Sof^ne meiner ©d^juefter finb meine
9^cffen. 17. ^:)enk finb wix bem ©rafen begennet. 18. !3)ie|c
^amen finb in ber jlirc^e geioefen. 19. ®ie 9JJe[[ev nnb 0a6e(n
finb auf bem 2:i)d;e. 20. ^^ahcn @ie bie ^ebevn bcs jinaben
obev be^ 3}Jdbdjcn^ ?
J). (Oral.) 1. Wo sind die Federn dieses Knaben ? 2. Wo
sind die Mes>.or und Gabeln ? 3. War die Tocliter dieser
Dame in der Kirche ? 4. Sind die Grafinnen in Berlin
gewesen? 5. Hat der Sohn des Giifen die Wissenschaften
studiert ? 6. Wo hat Thr Neffe die Wissenschaften studiert ?
7. Wem sind Sie heute begegnet ? 8. Wo wohnt Ihr Neffe ?
9. Wo wohnen Ihre Neffen ? 10. 1st der Sohn dieses Herrn
reich Oder arm? 11. Wo leben die Baren und Hasen ?
12. Wohin (to where) ist Marie gereist ? 13. Wen hat sie
da besucht ? 1 i. 1st sie bei ihrer Xante gewesen 1 15. Wann
ist sie nach Haiise gereist ?
£J. 1. My sisters have been in Berlin. 2. They have
visited their aunts in Berlin. 3. They have been at their
aunt's in Berlin. 4. The nephew of the count has become a
student 5. He has studied the sciences in Berlin. 6. I met
him on the street when i was in Berlin. 7. This gentle-
man's son was rich, but he became poor. 8. Do you admire
this flower ? 9. Do you admire the flowers of this garden ?
10. Who has had this boy's pens? 11. Have you had the
books and pens of the student? 12. The son of my brother
or of my sister is my nephew. 13. My nephews are the sons
'•hofen ift
lib [d;bn.
:n ift arm
Sir reben
:e^ S^effeii
tub meine
18. 5^ie[e
b &aMn
i ^tuaben
f 2. Wo
er dieser
1 Berlin
ischaften
studiert ?
r Neffe?
3s Herrn
Hasen 1
hat sie
'. Wann
ey have
at their
ecome a
). I met
gentle-
admire
garden 1
had the
brother
:he sons
EXERCISKS XIV -XV.
381
of my brothers or my sisters. 11. We spc^ak much of the
deeds of the Prussians. 15. These soldi(>rs are heroes. 1(5.
We admire and praise the deeds of heroes.
EXERCISE XV, a. (§§ 60-65.)
A. Decline together throughout: b'er ©ebanfe, inein 9?ac^=
hax, biefer mdjftahc, [ein better, i^r %uqc, fein %mxtc, uufer
Ji. Supply the definite^ article in the blanks: 1. ^c^
fdjirfte — md)cx an — M^rer (plur.). 2. i&v legtc — gebern auf
— Xifc^. 3. @eorg jogte — §unb Ijinter — Ofen. 4. — Xa-
nieii ge^en (go) nad) J)au[e. 5. — ^erren finb in — 2Salbe.
6. — 33ilb ^cingt iiber — ^enfter. 7. ^6) fteUe — (Stiif^le neben
— Zi^d), 8. ^or — tird)e fk^t (stands) ~ 5Ikum. 9. (5r
eilte liber — gluj?. 10. — ma'od)m ftelite — ^Uimen oor —
^enfter.
C. 1. @r fc^reibt (writes) tm D^antcn be§ taiferS. 2. ^iefc
Jlnaben lernen 3)ie DIamen ber ©fitter ber dUmcw 3. Itnfeve
3Settern finb je^t bei un§. 4. 3^{e ^mutter meineS q3etter^ ift
meine ^ante. 5. 'Xcx 9^effe beg ®oftorg ift ©olbat geraovben.
6. ®ie @i)r;ne unfere^ m6)hax^ mol)mn jet^t in ber (Btaht 7.
2Bir njerben morgen unferc S^odjbarn befndjen. 8. ^ie 5tugen
meine§ ^rofefforg finb fe^r \d)\md), 9. 2Bir legten bie 33iidjer
ber ^^rofefforen auf ben ^i[d). 10. ©inb fie nodj auf bem tifdje ?
11. mx lernen uiel oon unferem ^:|3rofef[or. 12. ^(m g^ontag
gefjen rair jur ©c^nre. 13. (?g fk^m jiuei 33(iunie vox unierer
3:^iir. 14. BiDifc^en bm 23aumen fteljen ^tuet ^iinfe. 15. ^x
fkiikn bie S3an!e ^njtfdien W 33aume. 16. 'Xk SBanfcn finb
nodj nic^t offen. IT. Da§ 33ilb yon mdmx mntkx (jcingt an ber
3Banb neben bem genfter. 18. 2Cir Ub.a im ^riebcn mit unferen
^Qd)finrn.
D. (Oral.) 1. In wessen Namen schreibt er ? 2. Hat
dieses Kind schon die Namen der Buchstaben gelernt ? 3. Wo
382
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
wolint j(3tzt dcr Yctter des Doktors ? 4. Wo wohncn dit^
VetUn-n Hirer Nachbarn ? 5. Lebt dieser Maim im Frieden
mit seineii Naclibar-i ? 6. Be.suclien 8ie oftniaLs Ihre Nachbar-
innen? 7. Warum sind die Augen des Professors schwach?
8. Wohin haben Sie die Biicher der Professoren g(^legt ? 9.
Wo stehen die Banke? 10. W^ohin haben Sie die Banke
gestellt? 11. Sind die Banken am Sonntag offen ? 12. Wo
hangt das Bild von unseren Eltern ? 13. Haben diese Worter
viele Buchstaben? 14. Wo arbeitet der Gartner? 15. Geht
er in den Garten, um zu arbeiten ?
-£'.1.1 speak in the name of the emperor. 2. Mary has
learned the names of the letters. 3. Our neighbours visited
us yesterday. 4. Our neighbour's daughters will visit us
to-morrow. 5. My cousins are at our house now. 6. The
father of my cousins is my uncle. 7. I have learnt a great
deal from my professors. 8. My eyes are weak because I have
studied too much. 9. Are my books on the table? 10. No,
I have laid them on the bench near the door. 11. I shall
hang this picture on the wall. 12. The banks will not be
open on Monday. 13. The gardener goes into the garden to
work. 14. He is working in the garden now. 15. The garden
is in front of the house.
EXERCISE XVI, a. (§§ 70-75.)
A. Give, with the definite article, the nom. sing., the gen.
sing., and the nom. plur. of: 33vuber, ©lurne, 2Balb, 9lpfeU
baum, SKagen, ^anb, ^orf, 9Za^6ar, ©olbat, ^uc^ftak.
Refer each of the above to its corresponding model.
B. 1. aSa^renb meiner dtti^e Bcfu^te ic^ bie ® tabic ^Berlin unb
gJarig. 2. ®ie @tabt SSerlin tft bie §auptftabt !3)eutfd)ranbo.
3. mdm @rtern rao^nen in Devlin, 4. 3)er di^ein tft ein %hi\^
(iiUropao. 5. 2Sir Beujunbcrn bie Sd^onl^eiten bes ucijeiuee. G.
3)ie 23evge bcv ®d;iue{a fi"^ auc^ [el;r fd)on. 7. StaxH 33vubev
EXERCISE XVI.
383
Imcn (lit^
Friedeii
Nachbar-
schwach?
legt ? 9.
e Banke
12. Wo
3 Worter
15. Geht
^ary has
s visited
visit us
6. The
a great
le I have
10. No,
, I shall
. not be
arden to
e garden
the gen.
e.
jvlin unb
'd)lanbo.
lies. 6.
33vubev
unb Souifen^ Sdjiucftern fiub jet^t ki meincin 35etter Wax an\
il3e|ud). 8. 9}JuUcv^ lunrcn and) gcftern bei i(;m. 9. i'Duife Ijat
i&iiiahctl) ^himen jum ©ebuvt^tatj gefdjicft. 10. ®ie l;at i()v
©lumen \tatt md)ex gefdjirft. 11. iBegcu beg 9fiegen§ ^at fie
eiifobet^ nidjt k[ud)t. 12. M) t;ai)e ed;illev^ 3Sevfe unb ^Surns'
@ebid)te in meiner ©tMiotljef. 13. !j)ie itonigin uon (gnglonb
l^eifet (the name of the Queen of England is) i^jictorta (nom.).
14. S)ev toiler con !5)eutfd)ranb ^ei^'t 2iBiir;erm. 15. ®ie etra^en
2:orontog finb fdjon unb Breit. 16. 2Bir berounbern aud) bie
©trafeen oon ^ari§. 17. ^>d) le[e t^eute bie 33riete be^ (Jicero
anftatt bev Oteben beg ©emoftljeneg.
6\ (Oral.) 1. Wo wohnen Ihre Eltern ? 2. Wie heisst
(cf. 13 and IJf above) die Hauptstadt Deutschlands % 3. Haben
Sie jemals Berlin und Paris besucht % 4. Haben Sie auch die
Stadt London besucht? 5. Wann haben Sie die Stadte Berlin
und Paris besucht? 6. Wo ist der Rhein ? 7. Haben Sie
die Schonheit des Rheines bewundert? 8. Was sagen Sie
von den Bergen der Scbweiz ? 9. Wo sind Karls Bruder?
10. Sind Louisens Schw astern auch bei Ihrem Vetter Max
auf Besuch ? 11. Wer hat Louise Blumen zum Geburtstag
geschickt? 12. Weshalb hat Elisabeth Louise heute nicht
besucht? 13. Wer hat Ihnen Schillers Werke geschenkt?
14. Wie heisst der Kaiser von Deutschland ? 15. Wie heisst
die Konigin von England? 16. Wie heisst die Hauptstadt
Frankreichs ?
D. 1. The capital of Germany is Berlin. 2. The capital of
France is Paris. 3. I have visited the cities of Paris and
Berlin. 4. My parents live in Berlin. 5. The Rhine is very
beautiful. 6. Do you not admire the beauty of the Rhine ?
7. Yes, and I admire also the mountains of Switzerland.
8. Charles' sister is now in Switzerland. 9. The Miillers are
travelling in France. 10, What is the name of Louisa's
brother ? 11. What is the name of the emperor of Germany?
384
SUPPLKMKNTAHY EXKUCISKS.
12. AVliat is tlic luiiiK^ of tin; ({xuHm (►£ Knglaiul / 1.'}. Tho
capital of France is eall(«(l Paiis. 1 L Tho, stivctH of Paris
are wicJe and iMviutiful. 15. ai,o stn^ts of Toronto aro wide
too. 1(). On account of tho rain wo sliall not visit our friends
to-day. 17. We sliall not tak(^ a walk during tho rain. 18.
My father will send Fred to-day instead of George.
EXERCISE XVII, a. (§§ 79-88.)
A. Continue the following : 1. $IBo'5 fiir eineu ^^^nt l)aU id) ?,
—l)aft bu, 2c. 2. 5lBeld)e^ [inb iiieiue .Omii'lcljur^e ?, lucldje^ [inb
beine, k. 3. ^d) ^a^k, ^a^ ev hant fei, \>n, jc. 4. ^d) [agte
cr fei frauf, bu, k. 5. ^c^ fragte, ob (whether) er txanf ]d,
bu, K.
i?. 1. 2Bev ift biefe ^amc ? 2. $©effen ^od)ter ift fie? 3.
2Bem nerjorcn biefe ^cbeni ? 4. §a^a§ Ijobeit eie ju mir gefagt ?
5. Sorouf fel3eu fic^ bie iltuber in ber @d)ure ? 6. @ie fel^n
fid) auf etitljle ober ^^nnfe. 7. SS^^etcfier .C^rv raor geftern Bei
^^nen ? 8. Seldjev uon bic[eu .Oen-eu ift iiarls 3.^ruber ? 9.
aBeld;e ^ebev Ijat Staxl ? 10. 2Beld;e von meincu g-ebern Ijat er ?
11. 35^eldjem ^}JMbd;eu fdjidt 9J?avie 23rumen ? 12. Seldjem
uon biefeu 9J?dbd)en fdjidt fie ^numen ? 13. 2Betd)en ^veunb
Befudjen @ie Ijeute ? 14. mddjm von unferen ^reuuben Befu.
djen luiv Ijeute ? 15. 3i^erdje^ md) Ijat ber IMjrer geljoBt ?
16. 2Beld)e5 von biefen 33iidjent Ijot er geljobt ? 17. SeldjeS
ift ^Ijre (Sdjiuefter ? 18. ^dd)c^, finb ^^re eoufinen ?
19. ma?j fiir eineu .r^ut l)at '^ol)ann gefouft ? 20. 2Bag fitr
.f^onbfdjurje l)at er gefouft? 21. Sag fitr eine 23rume ift bie
^ifie ? 22. SSa§ fiir Si^ctter merben luir niorgen Ijahcn ? 23.
9BGg fiir iliuberu gebeu luir ©efdjenfe ? 24. (Sr fagte : ,,mdn
SBoter ift nidjt feljr luoljL" 25. (?r fogte, bQ§ fein Q^ater ntd)t
rao^l fei. 26. (^r fagte, feiu ^kter fei nidjt wol)l 27. ^d;
fragte mcinen ?freunb, oh fcln ^iater uid)t iuoi;l fei. 28. (Sr
fagte, fein ^ater fei feit brei 3:agen front
EXERCISKS XVII-XVIII.
385
1.*}. Tho
of Paris
ai'o wide
ir friends
lin. 18.
a6e id) ?,
tdjea [inb
^d) [agte
vanf fet,
fie ? 3.
gcfagt ?
ok fel^en
fteru Bet
er ? 9.
I;at er ?
©eldjem
^veunb
m Befu;
gerjoBt ?
SeldjeS
Lifinen ?
\^a§ H'lv
ift bie
? 23.
,,3!)?etu
er ntdjt
27. ^d;
28. (5r
(7. 1. Whose (laiijL^liter is tliis girl? 2. Who are her
parents? 3. Whidi stiek iM'iongs to Charles? 4. Whieh of
these sticks 'oelongs to hiui ? 5. Whicli friends sliall w(^ visit
to-day ? G. Which (phtr.) of our friends shall we visit to-day ?
7. To whom shall we send these flowers ? 8. What did the
pupils say to their teacher ? 9. About what are the pupils
reading in school to-day? 10. Which books has your father
bought you ? 11. Which of these books has he bought you?
12. Which is my pen ? 13. Which are my pens ? 14. What
kind of a carpet have you bought for your room ? 15. What
kind of curtains have you bought? IG. What kind of pupils
does the teacher praise? 17. What kind of weather shall we
have to-day? 18. What kind of a man is Mr. Miilier ?
19. Our neighbour's father is ill. 20. Our neighbour said
(that) his father was ill. 21. He said : " My father has been
ill.'' 22. We asked him if his mother was ill too. 23. He
answered that she had been ill. 24. He said that she was
well now.
EXERCISE XVIII, a. (§§ 89-91.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) UuK gern 'A:)eut\d), hu,
jc. 2. ^c^ mad;e gern bee. a}Jorgeu§ eineit (Spo^iergaug, bu, 2c.
3. ^eute uor ad)t Xagen wax id) in O^ranfreid), bu,' k.
4. ^eute iiber ad)t Jage ;yerbe id) hd meinen eUern fein, — —
hu h ' jeiuen, jc.
B. State the rule for the gender of : ber ^anbfc^u^, ha^
©efdjeuf, bie Itniuerfitat, bie ©djonljeit, bie 33lume, bag C^igeutum,
^a§ ^rciuleiii, bcr ©arten, bag Oiubern, ber ^an'o, ber finger,'
hie ^ugenb, bie imelobie, bie ^?adj6arin, bie i^raft. .
C. 1. ®er ©arten ineiner mad)haxin ift \d)o\u 2. mix 6e=
luuubern hie ©c^on^eit itjreg ©arteng. 3. ^axie mad)t gern
einen vipa^iergang mit bent .tod)terd)en unferer OJadjbarin. " 4.
mH^dm kxnt gern ^mtid), 5. (Sr lernt jefet jeine mtion.
38r,
SUPPLEMFNTAUY EXERCISES.
6. eeine 2dt\on ift fd)U)cr, obcv cv (cvnt fie ncni. 7. aJiein
ed)iucftcvd;cii [picU cine yjt'clobic aiif bcm .Ulai)icr. 8. ;)d) l^bve
gcvii biefe ^JJiclobie. 9. ^Ticfcv .C^anbfdjutj c^dpvt mciucnr^d)iuc).
teid)cn. JO. Tuin, ev geljbit jcucm '(Ifiaulciu. 11. 3>og ^aiib
Quf bem C^ut bici>:i ^vanleind ift iiid;t fd)oii. 12. ^d) legte
eineu i^onb von ©oet()e^ ii^evfeu auf ben Zi\d), 13. 3^ic ^Iraft
bcv eouue ift im eommev fetir gioH. 14. ^-^cute oor od)t Zac^en
raiifte id) eineu 3:eppic^ fiir meiii 8 d; la f dimmer. 15. ^cute
iiber ad)t tage veifen luir md) J>ufe. 16. !5^iefe i^eute l)abcn
i^x eigeutiim uevfdjiuenbct. 17. Xa^ ^tubevii ift l;eute feiu
SSergniigeu, benu ber $Binb ift fet;r ftarf.
D. (Oral.) 1. Lernstdu jetzt deine Lektion ? 2. Lernst
du sie gern ? 3. 1st sie heute leiclit oder schwer ? 4. Wer
spielt auf dem Klavier ? 5. Was spielt sie auf dem Klavier ?
6. Horen Sie gem diese Melodie ? 7. Gehort dieser Handschuh
dem Tochterchen unserer Nachbarin? 8. Wem gehort er ?
9. Bewundern Sie nicht die Sehonheit dieses Frauleins ? 10.
Wo hat Ihr Schwesterchen dieses Band gekauft ? 11. Welchen
Band legten Sie auf den Tisch ? 12. Wann ist die Kraft der
Sonne sehr gross? 13. Wann kauften Sie diesen Teppich ?
14. Wofur kauften Sie ihn ? 15. Hat Ihre Tante ihr
Eigentum nicht verkauft ? 16. Warum ist das Rudern heute
kein Vergnugen ? 17. Wo werden wir heute iiber acht Tage
sein?
B. 1. Our lesson is easy to-day. 2. A week ago to-day it
was very hard. 3. We like to learn our lesson when it is
easy. 4. My little sister is learning German in school. 5.
After school she often takes a walk with our neighbour's little
daughter. 6. This young lady is very beautiful. 7. Do you
not admire the beauty of this young lady? 8. I admire the
ribbon on her hat, but I do not admire her. 9. The power of
the sun is vM great in winter. 10. I do not like to hear this
tune. 11. This young lady is always playing it on the piano.
EXERri8p:S XVIII-XIX.
387
'.'2. My uncle has sold his property. 13. This carpet is very
fine; I shall buy it. i;. I like to row on the river. 15.
Rowing is a pleasure. 16. A veek from to- lay we shall bo at
our uncle's.
EXERCISE XIX, a. (§§ 92-99.)
A. Complete the following: 1. ^d) cvfannte bicfen S^mn
nid)t, bu, K. 2. S^abt id) il;m basJ (S5elb uid)t gcfaabt, Ijaft bu,
2c. 3. ^d) ^abe bie 3Jad)vid)t gtbvadjt, bu, jc.
J^. Complete the following by supplying suitable relative
pronoun forms : 1. 3)ev Wdnn, — ()ier wax, 2. 3)ie ^rau,
bei un§ ift. 3. 3)cr S^cvx, — eoljii (jier xvol)nU 4. ®cr greunb,
— id) eiii ©cfdjeuf fd)i(fe. 5. !5)ie greimbc, — mix ®e[d;enfe
[djicfen. 6. 3:)cr ©chiller, — bev Server lobt. 7. ®er :ecr;rer,
— ben (Sd)iUer lobt. 8. !5)er ©tirtner, — meinen 3[kter lobt.
9. T)k ^ame, — n)ir bte sytumen fc^irften. 10. 3)ie Jante, —
aJJaric be[ud)te. 11. S^ie 2:ante, — 33ilb \ia ^ngt. 12. ^a^
^ilb, — ba ^ngt. 13. ;l)ag 33uc^, — ber i'efiver brauc^t.
14. !3)tc 23{lber, — ba ^ngen. 15. ^te mdjex, — ber Mjxcx
hxaud)t 16. 5tflcg, — id) fagte.
C. 1. §ier ift ein 33rief, ben mcin Onfef miv gefanbt l^at.
2. 3)ie 9^ad)ric^t, bie bavin fte()t, ift traurig. 3. Xk geber, bie
id) r^atte, ift auf bem Xifdje. 4. ^ie SDame, beven !^od)ter bei
ung roar, ift je^t in ©nglanb. 5. Xcx ^err, befl'en ®or;n roir
befuditcn, ift fe^r reid;. 6. 3)er ^aufniann Ijat ben 3:eppic^ nid)t
gefdjidt, roetdjen id; beftellte. 7. ^iennen (Sie ben .^^errn, ber
geftern ^i^r max ? 8. ^^vd) evfannte bie 3)amen nid)t, bie un^
begegneten. 9. ®er ^^vv, bent roir bcgegneten, l)ut urn n\d)t
erfannt. 10. Wix erfannten bie ^erven nid)t, bcnen luir begeg?
finb. 11. Xev X)iener Ijat aUe^5 gebrad)t, xm^ lutv beftellt Ijabeu.
12. SDa^ ^Bilb, lueldjeS ber 90^alcr gebrad;t l)at, Ijiinc^t an bev
^anb. 13. SDag ^ilb, H^ an ber 2Banb pngt, -{^at ber Wlakt
geftern gebrac^t. 14. 3)er ®raf ^at fein ©igentum t)er[d)n)en'.
388
SUPPLKMENTARY KXKUCISES.
bet, m^ Mr fd)abc iff. ir,. Tcr Vofthote \)at bcu !^^iicf qe=
l)iad)t, luoiQuf mil- luartetcn. Ki. ^mv feiuc (^vcuubc f)at, ift {d)v
ungliicflid) (unfortuimtc).
/>. (Oml.) i. Kunnon Si(; don Mann, (hm wir be^egnot
Hind ? 2. Ist er nicht dcr Bnuler der Uanic, dio g('st(rrn Ixji
Ihnen war? 3. Wtu- hat da.s ii.icli, das dor Lchrcr hraucht?
4. Halx'n Sio dio Biichcr, die ich })raucli(! ? 5. Wio liciHst der
Herr, dossen Sohn \m Ihnen auf licsuch ist ? G. Wio hois.st
dio Damo, doron Bild an der Wand hangt ? 7. Wio hoisst
der Maler, wc^U-hor das Bild genialt liat ? 8. Wer hat den
Brief gcbradit, worauf wir wartcteii ? 9. \\^) wohnon die
Freundinnon, dcncn Mario dio Bhiinon gosandt liat ? 10. Hat
der KaufmaTin alios gosandt, was wir Ix^stollton ?
B. 1. Tho gentleman who was here is a doctor. 2. The
lady who was with him is his sister. 3. Did you recognize the
gentleman whom we met? 4. No, but I recognized the lady
whom wo have just met. 5. The ladies wliom we have just
met did not recognize us. 6 Where is the letter which the
postman brought ? 7. My little sister has the books which I
need. 8. Who painted the picture which hangs near the
window ? 9. Where is the picture hanging which the painter
brought yesterday ? 10. The friend whose property we have
bought is now in Germany. 11. The lady whose beautv we
have admired is a countess. 12. She has wasted her property,
which is a pity.
EXERCISE XX, a. (§§ loo-iii.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) fang Wone Sieber, bu,
K. 2. .r^nbe id) fdjfine IMebcr gefungen ?, laif hn, jc. 3. ^d)
bin auf Vic Chbe gefallen, hu, k. 4. ;^d) rucvbc fingen uub taiu
sen, bu, K. 5. einge eiii fdu i--^ 2id, fiitge cv, jc.
Give the past participle il
uerbrenueu, beffellen.
iUn,
EXEIU'ISK XX.
389
Ji. 1. 9J?avic Ijat fc()onc ^Mumeii. l'. Ww Ijabcn flute« 33rot
unb fiiid)c auild). 3. ,Vi) fiille Da«S (Mlao mit fiifdicm ^I^qiicv.
4. ,r->ciT ^OJfiiUev ucrfaufl j^utcu altcu ^iiJciii. 5. (Vanc^ l)at
[djiucve ^-?lufnabcu neinad)t. 0. iiU^ l)a6cii (^utc lVad)btuii. 7.
.£)cute Ijahcn lutv [d)onc?J liBetter. 8. iTicfc ed)uler (;ol)cu qute
i\ebcvn aOer [d)rcd)te'j ^i^npicr. 9. ^d; l)a6c (\iite\\ Alafc unb
gutesJ islcifd;. 10. Tcv il^ote brr.ditc unci \d)icd)tc 9?ad)vid)t.
11. Vicbcv (dear; T^ntcr, Ditte, faufe mir biefe il^lunieu. 12.
$tebe 9Jhiucv, faufe mir [d)oue .Ulcibcv. i;i. (Mutcu ^JJiovc^cu,
Wcbc Aienubc. 1 L Ta^ Sl'ui'o ift au[ ciueu ^tciu rtcfalleu, unb
Ijcii \Ui) oie .^;>aub ucrlctjt. 15. :^d) luiiibe (^e| uneven Ijahcn, mnn
id) nidjt fvnuf geu'efeu uiiive.
C (Oral.) l.WaH fiiivBlumoii hat Thr Scliwestercln'ii ? 2.
Haben die Kinder r^ute fri.sohe ^lilch ? 3. Haben sie auch
gutes Brot ? 4. Was fiir Lektioneii halx'n die Schiiler heute
gehabt ? 5. Was fiir Wetter werden wir mor^'en habiiii 1
6. Hal)en Sie gutes Pai)i(>r, mein Herr ? 7. Was fiir Tinte
haben Sie ? 8. Was fiir Kiise verkauft Herr Miiller ? 9. Was
fiir Kleider hat dir deine Mutter gekauft ? 10. Hat der
Brief gute oder schlechte Kachricht gebracht I 11. Sind neue
Freunde immer gute Freuride ? 12. Hat der Redner etwas
Wichtiges gesagt ? 13. Liebe- Bruder, was hast du mir
gebracht ? 14. Wie hat sich das Kind die Hand verletzt ?
B. 1. My little sister has pretty flowers. 2. The children
have good milk and fresh bread. 3. Please fill my glass with
fresL water. 4. We have had hard exercises to-day. 5. They
will not be so hard to-morrow. 6. Our teachers have indus-
trious pupils. 7. Large trees do not always have good fruit.
8. Mr. Braun sells good cheese. 9. Dear mother, have you
brought me good news ? 10. The orator said a great deal,
but he said nothing important. 11. Good old wine is always
dear. 12. If I had good paper and good ink, I should do my
exercise now. 13. Good morning, dear father. 14. Do you
390
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
think we shall have fine weather to-day ? 15. George's sister
has fallen on a stone, and has hurt her head.
EXERCISE XXI, a. (§§ 112-114.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) luerbe beftraft, bu, k.
2. ^ct; bin von bem 2d)xtr beftraft luorben, bu, jc. 3. !^d) luerbc
immer oom I'e^rev hcftxa\t, bu, :c. 4. (5^^ u)trb miv erlaubt, einen
(Spa^^iergaug ju madjeu, e^ tyirb biv, 2c. 5. Tlan glaubt mir nidjt,
man glaubt bir nid)t, k, 6. 9UJeine 5lr6eit ift fcl;ou gemadit,
beiue, 2C.
i?. 1. ®ag jlinb raivb gclobt, lueit ce> ortig ift. 2. ^ie Jtinbcr
lucvben Dom Sel)ver gelobt. 3. Tk ©djiilcv finb von ben Vetjvevn
beftvaft luorben. 4. Wix luerbeu beftraft luevben, luenu luir tvdgc
f»nb. 5. ^iv tuuvben iiiiniev uon unferen (gltern gelobt, menu luir
tlci^tg luareu. 6. ^a§ §au§, luorin mix xDot)ntm, ift oerfouft
ujovben. 7. ®a§ §aug meiner ^ante rairb oerfauft roerben.
8. Unfere :i^efttouen finb fdjon genmdjt. 9. @ic raerben immer
Dor bem 3D^iitag^effen gemadjt. 10. @g murbe nad) einem ^Irjte
gefdjidt. 11. (Sg ift unij gefogt morben, \)a^ @ie franf feien.
12. (S§ mivb mir nidjt geglaubt. 13. 9D?on glaubt bief^m
^naben nid)t. 14. ©inb bie Soben fdjon gefc^loffen (closed) ?
15. dlcln, aber fie merben foeben ge]d;loffen. 16. ®ie[eg 33ilb
murbe uon meiner ©djiuefter gemalt. 17. ®ie 23ilber, bie von
biefem ^iinftler gemalt morben finb, finb fd)on uerfauft. 18.
"J^iefe U!^r murbe mir von meinem ^ater gefd)enft. 19. ©ie
murbe mir geftern ge[d;idt.
C\ (Oral.) 1. Wer loht das Kind ? 2. Von wem wird
das Kind gelobt ? 3. Warum ist das Kind gelobt worden 1
4. Wird deine Schwester gelobt werden 1 5. Von wem wii-d
sie gelobt werden ? 6. Warum wurden die Schiiler bestraft ?
7. Warum sind sie bestraft worden ? 8. Ist dieses Haus
verkauft 1 9. Wann wurde es verkauft ? 10. Wird das
Haus Ihrer Tante morgen verkauft werden ? 11. Wann
EXERCISES XXr-XXII.
391
e's sister
, bu, 2C.
]d) luerbc
ibt, einen
iiir nid)t,
gemocfjt,
ie ^inbcr
uir tvdge
mnn mix
oerfouft
roerbcn.
n iinmer
em ^Irjte
nt feten.
t bief^m
slosed) ?
[e§ 33ilb
bie Don
ft. 18.
19. ®ie
!m wird
vorden ?
^m wird
testraf 1 1
s Haus
ird das
Waiiii
werden Ihre Lektionen gelernt ? 1 2. Sind sie schon gelcrnt ?
13. Warum glaubt man diesem Madchen nicht ? 14. Von
wem ist Ihnen gesagt worden, dasz ich nicht zu Hause
sei? 15, Von worn wurde Ihnen diese Uhr geschenkt?
16. Wann ist «ie Ihnen geschickt worden ? 17. Wird heute
viel stTidiert
Note. —When the participle is clearly a Predicate Adjective,
translate "to be" (the copula) by "sein," otherwise by "werden,''
e.g.. The soldier is wounded, Der Soldat ist verwundet. The house
was (being) built, Das Haus wurde gebaut.
I). 1. The father praises the child. 2. The child i^ praised
by its father. 3. The pupils are punished by th?ir teacher.
4. This pupil has been punished by his teacher. 5. He will
be punished if he is lazy. 6. They will be punished if they
are not industrious. 7. They were always punished when
they did not do their exercises. 8. Their exercises are done
already. 9. Our lessons are always learnt before dinner.
10. My uncle's house has been sold. 11. These houses will
be sold. 12. I think they are sold already. 13. By whom
were they bought? 14. The shops are clcs.-I already. 15.
This man is never believed; he never tells the truth. 16. By
whom was this watch given to you ? 17. When was it sent
to you? 18. By whom was it brought? 19. A doctor will
be sent for. 20. We w<^re told yesterday that your father
was ill.
EXERCISE XXII, a. (§§ 115-118).
A. Continue the following: 1. 3<d) bin ouf ber ©trajje
auggeglttten, bu, 2c. 2. ^d) litt [rii^ev uiel an ^a^ntue^, bu, k.
3. ^d) Ijabe ba§ gelbe 33anb abgefdmitten, bu, jc. 4. ^rf) ritt
burc^ bie [d^oue, grof^e @tabt, bu, jc. 5. ^d) ^be mein ^au§
angeftvid^cn, hu. I;aft hcin, ic.
B. 1. l^iu bofev ,r)unb ijat bo.? flciuc .ftiub gebiffeu. 2. ^er
bofe §unb ^at eiu tkim^^ kinh gebiffeu. 3. '^ie bi)|eu Jjunbe
392
SUPPLEMENTARY EXEUCISES.
l)at)cu bie flcincn .^iubcr gcbiffen. 4. !3>a^ ndnc .^inb won biefcr
Qvincu <\rau luuvbe von emcm bbfcu ,f>imb ncfcifjcn. 5. ':5)Qci
a)Mbd)cu [d)nitt eiii '^tiirf uom nelbcii ikiibc ab. G. ^cr eorjii
bicfccj nrnicit anauucd iff rrant. 7. (Mcffcvii Ijnbcn luir uiciutu
Oiifel ill ber etobt bc[ud)t. 8. mdnc nvof^cn ^H-iibcr finb ouf
bev Uuiucvfitnt. 9. mavk Ijat \l)x [djoncs iicucd .Ulcib .^crviffcu.
10. eic ift eiu uuavtigcd iliiib. 11. ^d) l;abe miv locate cine
gutc, ncuc ^-cbcv oeFoiift. 12. -Die ^ilufnoben bicfer flcif^incn
©djiilcr fiiib [el)r gut gcmadjt. 1.3. Tcv flute altc Velji-cr bbt
feiue flcif^iflcu ed)ulcv. 14. T^cv 'X^atcv gicbt [einen flcinigcu
^iubcvu ciu l)ubid)ec^, (Me[d)euf. 15. ^icfe vcidje '^anie uxjljut iu
eineni fd)oucu, gvof^u J^oufe. 10. (Mcfteni Ijat fie il;vev Xodjtev
cine pvad)tifle, golbcue ■^•eber gcfdjcuft.
C. (Oral.) 1. AVen hatdor boso Himd gobissen? 2. Eh war
ein baser Hund, nicht wahr ? 3. War es ein kloines Kind, das
gebisseii wurde ? 4. Was fiir Hundo habon die kleinon Kinder
gebissen ? 5. War es der Hund der alten Frau, von dem das
kleine Kind gebissen wurde ? G. Die Tochter dieser arni(>n
Frail ist krank, nicht wahr ? 7. War die Tochter Ihrer arnum
Naclibarin nicht krank 1 8. Wer hat ein Stiick vom gellx'n
Bande abgeschnitten ? 9. Wann haben Sie Ihren guten alten
Onkel besiicht ? 10. Wohnt dieser gute Onkel nicht jetzt auf
dem Lande ? 11. Wo sind jetzt Ihre grossen KSchwestern ? 1 2.
Ist die kleine Marie nicht ein unartiges Kind 1 13. Weshalb
sagen Sie, dass sie ein unartiges Kind ist? 14. Wo ist die
gute, neue Feder, die Sie sich gekauft haben? 15. Sind Sie
mit den Aufgaben dieser fleissigen Schiiler zufrieden ? IG. Wo
wohnt diese reiche Dame? 17. Was fiir eine Feder hat sie
ihrer jungen Tochter gekauft? 18. In was fiir einem Hause
wohnt Ihre Nachbarin ?
i>. K This (bie§) is a cross dog. 2. lie l,r.„s bitten a little
girl. 3. The little girl has been bitten l)y a cross dog. 1. The
cross dogs will bite us if we tease (necfcn) them. 5. The little
on biefcr
5. Tia^
ex ^ofjii
r mciuLU
[iiib ouf
^crviffcn.
eute eine
fleifiigcn
)rcr loht
flcinigen
\Vf)l)nt in
Xodjtev
, Eh war
ind, das
Kinder
dem das
' arnieii
r arnicn
. gellx'ii
3n alteii
etzt auf
•n? 12.
Veshalb
ist die
lind Si(^
16. Wo
hat sie
I Hause
a little
1. The
le little
EXERCISES XXII-XXIII.
393
daughter of this rich lady was bitten by a cross dog in (auf)
the street. 6. Was your neighbour's little daughter not ill ?
7. Where does your good old uncle live now ? 8. He lives in
a large city in Germany. 9. Little Mary is a naughty child.
10. She has torn her new dress. 11. Where is your new pen ?
12. I laid it on the large table in the library. 13. Are you
satisfied with the work of these industrious pupils ? 14. Who
lives in this fine, large house? 15. A rich lady from (aug)
Germany and her daughter live in it. 16. She has given
her nephew a fine gold watch. 17. Where are your young
nephews now ? 18. They are in a good school in Berlin.
EXERCISE XXIII, a. (§§ 119-120.)
A. Supply suitable possessive pronoun forms in the blanks •
1. ^c^ madie meine 3lufga6e ; ^o^ann mad)t — ; Waxk ma6)t
- ; fie madjm _. 2. Waxk l^at i\)x 33uc^ ; ^o^nn ^t - ; id;
fiabe - ; ^te l)ahm -. 3. ^c^ [age eg ju meincm ^rcunbc ;
hnMt eg su -; fie fagt e§ ju -. 4. ^c^ Uhtc meine
©diuler ; er lobte - ; fie lobten - ; (Sie lohUn - 1 mx
lobten — .
£. 1. ^d) fc^rie6 geftern an meinen 3Sater, unb @eorg fd^rieb
an feinen. 2. mdn ^akx ift iel^t in ^arig, aber ber feinige ift
m ©erlm. 3. ©eovg Ijat gute§ papier, aBcr mein§ ift fe^r
fd)led)t 4. ©eine ^inte ift rot, unb bte meinige ift fd)wax^.
5. 5j)tefe,r ^^nt ift nieiner ; rao ift ber ^tirige ? 6. Set§en (Sic
mix ^r)re mdjcx, unb id) raerbe ^§nen hie meinigen auc^ tet^en.
7. ®ie 5rpfel unfereg mad)Ux^. finb retf, aber hie unfrigen finb
nod; nic^t reif. 8. ®{e ^(;rtgen finb auc^ reif, nic^t n^aBr ?
9. aJJeme It^r ift am ©olb; feine ift am ©ilber. 10. 2«arten§
2:ante unb hie nteinige mad;en etne dieife aufammen na^ ^arig.
11. 3Jieine Zank ift fd)on ha geroefen, aber hit i^rtge nidit
12. mx lohen unfeven l'el;rer, unb (Sie loben ben .^^rigen
13. !Die ^ent\d)en lieben if)r ^^atexlanh, unb luir licben 'ha§
394
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
unfcre. 14. ^c^ bin m'lt mciner 9trbett fertic^ ; .^arl ift mtt
fcincr and) fevtig, abev l^ouife ^ot bie t()vige nod) nidjt geinarf)t.
C. (Oral.) 1. Sind Sie mit Threr Arbeit fertig? 2. 1st
Louise mit der ihrigen fertig 1 3. I.st Karl mit der seinigen
aiich fertig ? 4. Warm wirst du an deinen Vater schreiben ?
5. Wann hat dein Freund an den seinigen geschrieben ?
6. Sind diese Handschuhe die Ilnngen ? 7. Wo sind die
meinigen ? 8. Hat Georg audi die seinigen ? 9. Hat Marie
auch die ihrigen ? 10. Meine Tinte ist schwarz ; ist die Ihrige
schwarz oder rot ? 11. Wessen Buch haben Sie ? 12. Wessen
Biicher hat Louise? 13. Sind die meinigen auf dem Tische
in der Bibliothek ? 14. Wo sind die meinigen ?
D. \. 1 have written to my parents. 2. George has written
to his. 3. They have written to theirs. 4. Your teacher is
young, but mine is old. 5. This hat is yours ; where is mine ?
6. These gloves are yours ; where are mine ? 7. If they lend
us their books, we sliall lend them ours. 8. Charles has
learnt his lesson. 9. I have learnt mine too. 10. Louisa
hasn't learnt hers yet. 11. Your aunt has been in Paris, but
mine has not been there yet. 12. My aunt and yours took a
journey to Germany togetli^}r. 13. My book is on the bench.
14. Has George his? 15. We haven't ours yet. 16. Ours
are on the table in the library. 17. I have lent mine to my
brother George. 18. I lend my books to him, and he lends his
to me. 1 9. What sort of paper do you want, blue or white ?
EXERCISE XXIV, a. (§§ 121-124.)
A. Decline throughout : ber ^ranfe, ein ^Blinber, bie .^xanU,
bcr Bevii^mte ^iinftlev, ba?. [d)one hlanc 5tugc, bev fdjone Ijolje
33onm, ein 9tei|enbev, ber ITentfdje.
B. Continue the following: 1. ,^\d) go|,' bno "ii^nffev an^i,
bn, K. 2. ^d) rod) bie fd)one Oiofe, bu, jc. 3. ^jd) fled)te eineu
EXERCISE XXIV.
395
[ ift mtt
nad)t.
2. 1st
seinigen
ireiben ?
irieben 1
sind die
,t Marie
ie Ihrige
Wessen
a Tische
! written
acher is
is mine ?
ley lend
rles has
. Louisa
iris, but
I took a
) bench.
6. Ours
i to my
ends his
[• white 1
hte Ijolje
jev auoi,
l;te eium
ilvaii^ au^ Diofeit, bit, 2c. 4. ^d) bcqof^ bie 33tumeu im (sjavtcu,
bu, 2C. 5. ,3d) {juk bee '^lOcubci bie Jtiilje nemolfeu, bu, k.
C. 1. 3)ie[e gate 2)ame bc[urf)t bie ^Ivnufeu im ^-^ofpitol.
2. ®{e bvingt ben llvanfeu jebcu Za^ ^Mumeu. .3. Unter ben
£ranfen ift ein armei ^linbev. 4. Cfr ift ber guten ^ome feljr
bontbar, unb l^at il^r befljalb einen fdjonen fteinen koxh
ge[lod)ten. 5. ©in beriifjmter ^itnftler woljnt neben un§.
6. mx fennen biefen bevitljmten 9JJann ganj gut. 7. (Sjv ift ein
:Deutfd)er. 8. ^iele ©eutfdje ^ahcn hiaut ^itugen. 9. Unfer
^ad)hax ^at and; fdjone, blaue 5tugen unb langeg, blonbeg ^aar.
10. @ein §au§'ift jet^t ge[d)lo[[en, benn er befudjt bie ^arifer
3lugfteUung. 11. ®er 9teif enbe, ber geftern bet un§ tear, loirb
au6) Vic 5lu§fteaung befuc^en. 12. ^n unferem ©arten fte^t dn
fd)oner, ^o^er 5lpfel6aum. 13. (gg finb oiete reife 3ipfel barauf.
14. 5ll§ i6) auf bem ^anhc wax, IjaU id) oft bie itii^e gemolfen,
unb bie 53tumen begoffen.
JJ. (Oral.) 1. Warum ist das Haus Ihres Nachbars
geschlossen ? 2. Wohin ist er gereist ? 3. Welche Ausstellung
besucht er 1 4. Ist Ihr Nachbar nicht ein deutscher Kunstler ?
5. Ist er nicht ein beriihmter Mann ? 6. Was fur Augen hat
er ? 7. Was fiir Haar hat er ? 8. Haben die Deutschen oft
grosse, blaue Augen 1 9. Heisst dieser Reisende nicht Miiller ?
10. Besucht er auch die Pariser Ausstellung? 11. Wie heisst
der arme Blinde, der uns soeben begegnet ist ? 12. Sind viele
Kranke in diesem Hospital ? 13. Besucht deine Mutter die
Kranken im Hospital ? 14. Bringt sie den Kranken Blumen?
15. Wie heisst der Blinde, der ihr den Korb geflochten hat?
16. Haben Sie den schonen Apfelbaum bemerkt? 17. Ist das
grosse Gebaude in dieser Strasse nicht eine Kirche ? 18. Wer
begiesst die Blumen ? 19. Wer hat sie gestern begossen ?
^. 1. This artist is a celebrated man. 2. I think he is a
German. 3. He has large blue eyes and long blond hair.
396
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
4. He lives in a large house beside ours. T). In front of his
house stands a tall tree. 6. He is not at home now and his
house is closed. 7. He is in Paris. 8. He is visitiiiir the
Paris exposition. 9. His wife (jvvau) is a kind lady. 10. She
visits the sick, and brings them bread and wine. 11. A
patient in the hospital has woven a pretty little basket for
her. 12. He is a blind man. 13. The blind often weave
baskets. 1 4. The gardener was watering the flowers. 1 .^. The
maid was milking the cows. 16. Are the cows milked ?
17. A:.^ the flowers watered ? 18. Yes, the gardener has
watered them. 19. He always waters them in the evening.
20. When I was at my uncle's I used to water the garden
every evening.
EXERCISE XXV, a. (§§ 125-131.)
A. Supply comparative and superlative forms in the blanks :
I. ®er veidjc STconn, bev — Wlann, bev — 9Jlann. 2. (§:in
alteg ^kib, tin — ^leib, ein — jtleib. 3. ^d) bin gvof^, \)u
hift — , er ift — . 4. S)iefer 33aiun tft I)oc^, jener i\t — , ber
S3aum vox bem §au[e ift — . 5. ^axk ift ftavf, I'ouife ift — ,
(Sophie ift — . 6. ^d) lenie uiel, bu lernft — , er lernt — .
B. 1. Die ^oge finb Icinger iir griiljUng al^ im SSintev, aber
tm ©ommer finb fie am Idngften. 2. ^m ©ommer l^oben loir
bie langften ^age unb im SBintev bie fiivgeften. 3. Da§ ^Better
ift im (Bommer am mdrmften, unb im SBinter am fdlteften.
4. !lDie (Slbe ift ein bveiterer glu^ aU bev dll)dn. 5. ^c^ ^abe
meine ht\tc i^eber uerloren. 6. ^d) ^abe bie ^cber uevloren, bie
am beften fd)rieb. 7. SiJJein dltefter 33niber befudjt jel^t hk
Unioerfitdt. 8. SJleine jiingfte @d)iuefter ift in 33evlin auf ber
(Bd)uU, 9. Unfer S^an^ ftel^t ber ^ircjie ndl^er al^ bag S^jvige.
10. Unferc ^tufgaben finb (jeutc fd^raerer, aU fie geftern raaren.
II. ^d) rtloiifip. fig finh ficute pfien fn Iptfbt ^fc^ rtpftprn 19 9^ir
l^aben immer am ^reitag bie l'eid)teften ^ilufgaben. 13. ®a§
EXERCISE XXV.
S97
eifeii ift iiiitaicf)cv aU ba^ ©olb ; c^ ift ba^ uiUjiarf)fte 3!}Jctaa.
14. !l)ag i)iiil3lid)e ift beffer al^ ba^ ec^oiie. 15. iifiiv 3ogeu
unfeve luiinnfteii .Hleibev an, m'li bo^ iBettev (iuf^eift fait lyar.
16. Ta- Sivanh ocvUevt jeben Xag ilraft ; ev ift t;eute [djiucidjer
alg geftevn.
C. (Oral.) 1. Wanii ist das Wetter am warmsten ? 2.
Sind die Tage langer iin Winter als im Sommer ? 3. In
welcher Jahreszeit {season) haben wir die kiirzesten Tage?
4. In welcher Jahreszeit sind sie am liingsten ? 5. Ist der
Sankt Lorenz langer als die Elbe? 6. Ist er auch breiter ?
7. Ist er der breiteste Fluss Amerikas ? 8 Wo ist jetzt Karls
jiingster Bruder ? 9. Wo ist seine alteste Sch wester ? 10.
Welche von Ihren Federn haben Sie verloren ? 11. Welclies
ist das niitzlichste Metall ? 12. Welches ist am schwersten,
das Blei oder das Gold? 13. Sind Ihre Aufgaben eben so
schwer im Sommer als im Winter? 14. Warum ziehen die
Leute heute ihre warmsten Kleider an ? 15. Weshalb hat
Georg sei ne Handschuhe ausgezogen ? 16. Ist dieser Apf elbaum
hoher aL ^ener ? 17. Giebt der hochste Baum immer die besten
Apfel ?
D. 1. The tallest trees do not always bear the best apples.
2. This is a tall tree. 3. The apples on it are extremely
small. 4. The days are longer now than they were in winter.
5. The weather too is warmer. 6. The nights are longest
in winter, and the days coldest. 7. My best gloves are
lost. 8. I put them on yesterday. 9. I took them off in the
garden, and lost them in the grass. 10. Iron is the most
useful of the metals. 11. It is not so valuable (tuertuon) as
gold, but it is more useful. 12. Mr. Miiller is a richer man
than Mr, Braun. 13. My youngest brother is as tall as I am,
but he does not weigh as much. 14. lie weighed more two
years ago. 1 5. The largest people are not always the strongest.
398
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
EXERCISE XXVI, a. (§§ 132-144.)
A. 1. T)a^^ ift mciiic ,Vbcv. 2. '^Mco [iub mciiic bcftcn i^cbern.
3. 3)a^ ift bei[el6c ,^>cn-, ber nm gcftciii bcgcgnetc. 4. !l)tt§ finb
bicfclbcn S)amen, bie gefteru ?ibenb im itonjert gefuugcii Ijabcu.
5. ®ieg ift bie ^rau eine^ berii^mten ^unftier^, uub bag ift bie
^xau eiueg veidjen ^aufmanneg. 6. @old) gute ©dngerinneu
\)ahe id) uie geprt. 7. 2)crienige, iyelcl;er reid) ift, ift nid)t immer
aufrieben. 8. 2Ber arm ift, ift nid^t immer ungliidlid;. 9. Unfer
^am ift uerfauft morben, roie and) ba^jenige, juorin rair uor ^loei
>^ren iuol;nten. 10. 3)ieier SfJing ift lyertuoUer, aU berjenige
meiner ©d)n)efter. 11. 2)ergleidjen D^iuge finbet man nid)t in
ben fleinen Sdben. 12. 2Bir ()aben unferc 33iid)er, raie aud;
biejenigen ber anbern ®d)uler, au\ bem ^ifc^e gefunben. 13. ^er
^err, ber ertrunfen ift, ift ber[el6e, mit bem id) md) 2)eut[c^raub
reifte. 14. Cicero unb 35ergil maren beru^mte 9tomer ; biefer
tear ^iditer, jener mar ^ebner. 15. ^d) erinnere (mid)
beffen), mag unfer alter .Seper »on i^nen erja^lte. 16. Sffiir
]^a6en nie [0 einen guten :ge^rer geljabt, alg ben. 17. S^erjenige,
hen mir je^t ^ben, gibt ung immer [djmere 5lu[gaben, unb ift
babei auc^ [e^r ftreng.
B. (Oral.) 1. Wer waren Cicero und Yergil ? 2. Was war
dieser ? 3. Was war jener ? 4. Wer hat Ihnen von denselben
erzahlt? 5. Erinnern Sie (sich dessen) noch, was er von
denselben erzahlte? 6. War er ein guter Lehrer? 7. 1st
derjenige, den Sie jetzt haben, nicht besser ? 8. Der Lehrer,
den Sie jetzt haben, ist derselbe, den Sie seit einem Jahr haben,
nicht wahr? 9. Ist der nicht sehr streng? 10. Haben Sie
jemals einen so prachtigen Ring gesehen? 11. 1st er nicht
wertvoller, als der der Frau Miiller? 12. Haben arme Leute
solche Ringe? 13. Sind das meine Biicher auf dem Tische?
14. Wohin hat Georg mein Buch und dasjenige meiner
Schwester gelegt ? 1 5. Ist der, der arm ist, immer im^liicklich ?
16. War das deine Tante, die uns auf der Strasse begegnete?
It i^cbern.
3)a§ finb
eii l)abcu.
lag ift bie
ttgerinnen
d)t immer
9. Un[er
' uor ^raei
bevjenige
: n\d)t in
toie aud;
13. !3jer
utfc^laub
: ; biefer
cc (mid)
16. mx
)crjenige,
, unb ift
if^.^as war
enselben
er von
7. I.st
Lehrer,
r haben,
-ben Sie
3r nicht
e Leute
Tische ?
meiner
icklich ?
;egnete ?
EXERCISES XXVI-XXVII.
399
17. Tst (lies nicht mcinc Foder ? 18. Tst jeno Dani(^ nidit dio
Frau ('iru!.s Ijcriilimton Kiiii.stlcr.s ?
0. 1. Cicero and Vergil wore Romans; the latter was a
poet, and the former an orator. 2. I remember what I learnt
about them in school. 3. Do you not admire this ring ?
4. Yes, I have never seen so fine a ring. 5. Is it finer thin
your aunt's ? 6. Only very rich people have such rings. 7. Who
is the lady whom we just met ? 8. That is the lady who sang
such a beautiful song at the (ini) concert. 9. I do not think
that is the same lady. 10. I found your book on the table,
and your brother's on a bench. 11. This is not my pen ; it is
my sister's. 12. He who is rich is often unhappy. 13. Those
who are poor are often happier than the rich. 14. Which
Mr. Miiller did you know? 15. I knew the one who was
drowned last year, when he was travelling in Switzerland.
EXERCISE XXVII, a. (§§145-159.)
A. Continue the following : 1. ^^c^ ^be jemanb gel^olfen, bu,
ic. 2. ^d) ^be nid)tg lueggeiuorfeu, 'ou, k. 3. ^c^ marf ctma§
auf hm Xifc^, bu, jc. 4. ^ebermann lobte mtc^, — lobte bic^,
K. 5. ^d) lourbe niemonb ^elfen, bu, jc. 6. ^d) oerlor feing
von meinen 33udjern, bu, k.
R 1. ^ebevmonn ^at btefen iungen §crrn gem. 2. Tlan
fogt md @uteg oon i^m. 3. $Riemanb [agt etu)a§ gegen i^.
4. ajJan rei^t i^m gem @elb, mnn er fein§ ^t. 5. (Sr ^ilf;
and) benjentgen gem, bie ntc^t§ ^ben. 6. ^eberniann rutrb
Sr;nen bosfelbe von i(jm [agen. 7. Wlc^xm von meinen g^reunben
^aben mir ©efdienfe ^um @eburt§tag gefdjidt 8. (Sinige baoon
finb fefir mertooa. 9. Wlan [agt, baj^ man fid) am letditeften
erfaltet, itjenn man miibe ift. 10. mand)ex ^at eine '>ilxheit
begonnen, biefer nic^t ooaenbet ^at 11. Giner oon biefen
5{pfeln ift uerbovben ; idj luevbe i^n raegtuerfen. 12. ^d) l;abe
fc^on me^rere baoon meggeioovfen. 13. 2Bevfen @ie feine ivcQ,
400
SUPPLEMENTARY EXIillCISES.
bic nod) flut fiiib. 14. '^hw mcnij^c Vcute i)ahcn biefcn '2ommcv
^^ovi'^ i)t|iict)t. 15. i^ie .Uauflciitc l)abcu beol)alb miv lucuii^ (Mclb
ciuj^cnonimcii. Ki. ii^cuilpft beffer al'5 c\ai' nid)tci. 17. ;^ebcv;
maun lobt bic 8d)u lev, bic flcif^ij^ [iiib. IS. 3iicmaub luiib
gclobt, bcv [eiiie ^ilufgabeu n\d)t rid)tig madjt.
6*. (Oral.) 1. Sagt man viel Gutes von den iloisHigen
Schuloi-n? 2. Worden sie von jcdcrinann gelobt? 3. Wird
jemand gelobt, der nicht gut arbeitet ? 4. Sagt man etwaa
Gutes von den triigen SuhiiU'i'n ? 5. Von wem sagt man
nichts Gutes ? 6. Jedermann hat Herrn Miiller gern, nicht
wahr ? 7. Hilft er gern jederinann ? 8. Leiht cr einem gern
Geld, wenn man keins hat '( 9. Hat irgend jemand diese
sell were Aufgabe rich tig gemacht ? 10. Wurde irgend jemand
gestern vom Lehrer gelobt 1 11. KSind einige von diesen Apfeln
verdorben 1 12. Sie haben mehrere Freunde in Paris, nicht
wahr 1 13. Hat Karl eins von seinen Biichern verloren ?
14. Wann erkaltet man sich am leichtesten ? 15. Hat dieser
General nicht manche Schlacht gewonnen 1 16. Haben Sie
etwas verloren, mein Herr ?
D. 1. Nobody likes this young man. 2. People (man) say
a great deal of bad about him. 3. Everybody says something
against him. 4. Nobody says any good of him. 5. He helps
nobody. 6. He has never helped anybody. 7. He gives
nothing to the poor. 8. My sister received (er^lten) several
presents on her birthday. 9. Some of them were very pretty.
10. One of George's books is spoilt. 11. Somebody found it
in the grass under a tree. 12. One takes cold easily when one
is tired. 13. We have taken (madjen) many a journey to
Switzerland. 14. That lady has lost something, and she is
looking for it. 1 5. The maid is helping her to look for it.
16. Nobody has helped us to do our exercises. 17. We have
been promised help.
EXERCISE XXVIII.
401
Wird
gives
EXERCISE XXVIII, a. (i,i^ 163-167.)
A. Cinitimn' (lu« folic. vvin^' : I. ,^\d) lpicii)c uom bcut[d)CU
£oi[cr, bii, K, 2. ;\d) fom inimcv bed imn(^ciid an, bu, jc.
3. ^d; I;nl)e eiii 9)k[icv nc6vod)cu, bad filiif Wiaxt lueit iuav,'bu*
K. 4. j;ia6e id; bcu iuuflcii 3Jiaun enipfoljleii V, t;aft bu, jc.
//. 1. i9m minnte \)at [ed;^ig ©cfunbcn. 2. (?ine etunbe
Ijat [edj^ig ^JJ^imitcii. -A. {^m lag l)at uier imb jioan^ig etimben.
4. (fine 5l9od)e l)at ficbcii 'lage. 5. {S:in monat l)at gciubljulid)
b'-ei[^ig !lage. 0. !5)ev Wlomt ^ebruar ()at eutiueber adjt imb
5iuanjig obev neun imb ^wan^iq ^oge. 7. ^n einem (^^alt\ai)vc
(leap year) Ijat ev neun unb ^luan^ig ^age. 8. ^ier von ben
9JJonaten l)ahcn nuv brciilig Xage. 9. C^in ,/Dortar" dou unferem
©elbe Ijat rimibeit „^fentd." 10. Sir aiifjten nad) (by)
„ bollard'' unb „(5entd.'' 11. ^n ^eutfc^tanb acirjtt man
bad @elb nac^ 9Qkvfeu unb ^fennigen. 12. ^n einer 9)Jarf finb
^unbert ^i^fennige. 13. (fine ^axt ift ungcfnlji- fo uiet toert, aid
fiiuf unb siuanaig ,,^mt^^^ von unferem @elbe. 14. Um
„ bollard " in 9J?avfen ^u mec^[eln, multipiciert man mit uier.
15. Um 9^arten in „ bollard " ju med^feln biuibiert man im
©egenteil mit oier. 16. 3um 23eifpiel, M. 7,20 betragt
(amounts to) in unferem ®elbe einen ,,T)oHax" adjtjig ,,(?entd."
17. a^ein 33ater i)at fein ^aud fiir ^e^n taufenb brei ^unbert
unb fiinfjig a^arf uerfauft. 18. 2Bie mel mad)t bad in
5(merifanifd)em @elbc ?
C. (Oral.) 1. Count in German up to 30. 2. Repeat in
German: 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 1000. 3. Wie
ziihlt man das Geld in Deutschland ? 4. Wie viele Pfennige
hat eine Mark ? 5. Wie viele Pfennige sind in drei Marken ?
6. Wie viele Marken sind vier " Dollars " wert ? 7. Wie
wechselt'man Marken in "Dollars"? 8. Wie wechselt man
" Dollars " in Marken ? 9. Wie viel von unserem Gelde sind
M. 8,60 wert? 10. Wie viel haben Sie fiir dieses Buch
402
8UPPLKMKNTAKY KXKUCM8KS.
bczalilt ? 11. \Vi(i vicl jiat das f luus Tlircs NuchlMirs ^('kostct ?
12. Wio vicl (Jcld luitdcr Die!) <,'('.st<)lili'n '? \:\. Wic vicl war
(las Fciist<T wort, das «;(0)ro('luii wunic ? I \. Sprii-lit dcr
Ltihror vorn doutsclu^n (jlcldc; odcr voiii kanadisclu'ii ? 15.
Welche Monatc halM^ii iiur droissi^ Tago ? 10. Wanii hat dcr
Monat Fcbruar mmn und zwanzig Tagii? 17. Wio viele
Minutcn sind in scclis Stundcn ?
D. Give tlio value in German money of : 1. One cent.
2. Five cents. 3. Ei<,dit cents. 4. Eleven cents. 5. Eightciui
cents. 6. Twenty cents. 7. Thirty cents. 8. Seventy-five
cents. 9. Ninety dollars. 10. One hundred and four dollars.
E. 1. The month of February has usually 28 days. 2. In
a leap year it has 29 days. 3. The months [of] S(?ptember and
October have together Gl days. 4. There are 86,400 seconds
in a day. 5. How much did the book cost which was stolen
from your library 1 6. He who steals is a thief.
EXERCISE XXIX, a. (§§ 168-181.)
A. Continue the following: 1. '^d) e[fe nidjt }^kiid) gcnug,
bu, K. 2. ^d) lei'e faft bte ^awi^c Beit, bii, jc. 3. ^d) lag uier
SBodjen im §o|'pital, bit, jc. 4. Gublid) bin id; genefeu, eubtid)
bift bu, K. 5. ^d) l)ahc bcu (^vembeii urn ^evjeif^ung gebeteu,
bu, 2C.
B. 1. %\ii (Sd^iilev finb fd)on gefommen. 2. ©iuigc fiben in
ber (Sc^ule uub bie aubeven fpielen vox ber ^Iji'ir. 3. ^Ug id)
l^eute juv @d)ulc tarn, \a^ ein Settler an ber ©traf^e. 4. ^ebeu
9!}Zovgen fmbc id) i()n ba, unb er erjaljU alien biefelbe ©e[d)ic^te.
5. (?^r fagt, ba|J| er ben gonjen 3Binter im ^^^ofpital gclcgen Ijabe,
unb Ijabe jebt nidjt gcnug ju effen. G. 9iur uienige Seute glauben
il)m. 7. G^ gtebt :^cute, iueld)e betteln, bie nidjt rairflic^ arm
finb. 8. liefer hat mid), iljm ein paor ^^fennige ober etmu^ 33rot
iu geben. 9. '^Bcnn ^ meinen (^^clb6eittel nidjt uergeffe- ^citte, [0
l^dtte id) iljm chva^ ®elb gegekn. 10. ^d) gab i^m abev ein
EXERCISES XXIX-XXX.
gckost-rt I
(• vici war
•richt ilvv
1011? 15.
in luit (U'r
VVio viele
)no cent.
Eightoon
veiity-fivo
ir dollars.
s. 2. In
inbor and
s(3Cond.s
'^as stolen
403
\d) genug,
i) lag uiev
:n, eublid)
3 gebeteu,
^c [it^en in
J. m^ id)
4. ^eben
3efd)ic^te.
:gen i)ahc,
k glaubeu
•flic^ arm
tiDu^ Srot
' '^(itte, fo
I abet ein
rocnig 33rot imb ciu paav .^iifdjcu, bic id) Bci miv r^atlc. 11. Q^v
Ijat allc^ il3vot gcgcffen, bcmi ev luar kijv I)imgvig. 12. ilv [agtc,
cv luiivbe mciuc C^Jiite iiidjt uevgcfjeti.
C. (Oral.) 1. IIa))en Sio (hn Bottler gesohen ? 2. Wo
sitzt or ? 3. 1st or krank g<;wes(«n ? 4. Wio lango hat or im
Hospital golegen ? 5. 1st or niolit cndlich gtmoson ? G. Hat
or jotzt nicht genug zu essen ? 7. Uni wan bittot er alle, die
or sioht ? 8. Sass er gostorn an dor Strasso ? 9. Sitzt er
jeden Tag da? 10. Sitzt >r die ganzo Zoit an dor Strasse?
11. Habon Sio Ihm etwas gegobon ? 12. Woshalb halnm Sio
ihra koin Geld gegoben ? 13. Hatton Sie koins boi sich
{with you)'i 14. Wio vioie KirscluMi haben Sic ihm gegobon?
15. Hat er alio Kirschen gloich gegesson ? 1(5. Hat er audi
alios Brot gegesson ?
D. 1. There are people who beg who are not poor. 2. Not
all the people who beg are poor. 3. Some people have not
enough to eat, but they do not beg. 4. The beggar of whom
this school-boy tells was really poor. 5. He had lain in the
hospital a whole year. 6. At last he had got well. 7. He
sat in front of the school, and asked the people for something
to eat. 8. Many people went past, and gave him nothing.
9. Some believed his story, and gave him a little money.
10. The school-boy saw that he was weak and hungry. 1 1. He
gave the poor sick-man a icw cherries. 12. It was not much,
but it was all he had with him. 13. He had forgotten his
purse. 14. All his money was in his purse at home. 15. All
this happened yesterday. 1 o. The poor-man does not always
forget the kindness of the lich.
EXERCISE XXX, a. (§§ 182-186.)
A. 1. ^d) l)ahc eijicii 'i^vicf nn meinen iHrubcr ju fdivciben.
2. '^d} [d)vei6e ifjiit breimal bev ^^i3odje, urn iljiu ^^u er^idt^leu, lua^
ic^ jeben Xag madje. 3. ^eute Mn id) md) ber (Bta'ot gefaf)ren.
404
SUPPLKMKNTARV EXERCISES.
4. ^unft neun nijv ftanb ber "Bac^cn vox bcv 3:(juvc. 5. ^d)
ftic(j ein, unb bcv .Hutfd^er ful^r ah. 6. 3^ie ©tabturjr fdjlug
tjolb 5cr;u, als loir aufamen. 7. ^d; I)Iic6 einc ^i^ievtelftunbe
beim ed;neibcv, urn mciucii neueu 5(n^ug (suit) an^uprobiereu
(try on). 8. Qx luivb M. 75,00 roftcii. ' 9. lliii seljii Winut.n
Dor 5e(;u luar ic^ beim ,Outmad;er. 10. Wi iljm Ijahc id) miv
cincu ^iit bcftellt, bcv M. 9,50 fofteii luirb. 11. llm ciii "^kxtd
auf elf bc[ud)te id; ,^um ^wciicn mal bcii ?trU. 12. ^d) Ijattc
i(;ii [d)on uov ad)t ^agcu jitm crften mnl befudjt. 13.^ Uin ein
^iertel auf eiu^ Ijahc id) 511 mitten^ oeneffcu. U. ®ie 9ied;uimg
betrug M. 3,75, mit 25 ^4?fennig '4:iinfnelb. 15. $Rad) bem
©ffen bin id; im ^avt fpa^ieven nefaljveu, unb uni 25 9J£inuten
Dov fed;g luar id) tuiebcr ,^u .r)aufe. IG. 'a: ami l)ahe id) eine
^ofje 3:r;ee (^ctrnnfcn, unb jet^t luerbe id; nieiuen ^Brief fdjveiben.
i?. (Oral.) 1. Hcute liaben wir den zelinten, nicht wahr ?
2. Wie viel Ulir ist es nach Ihrer Ilhr ? 3. Sind Sie heute
nach der Stadt gc^faliren ? 4. Uni wie viel Uhr sind Sie
abgefahren? 5. Urn wie viel Uhr sind Sie angekoi.imen ?
6. Bei wem sind Sie ziierst gewesen ? 7. Wie lange sind Sie
beim Hutmaclier geblieben ? 8. Wie viel kostet Ihr neuer
Anzug ? 9. Urn wie viel Uhr sind Sie beim Schneider
angekomnien? 10. Wo waren Sie urn ein Viertel auf elf?
If 1 1 . Uin wie viel Uhr essen Sie gewohnlich zu Mittag 1 12. Una
wie viel Uhr haben Sie lieute zu Mittag gegessen ? 13. Wie
viel Trinkgeld liaben Sie dem Kellner gegeben ? 14. Was
haben Sie nach dem Essen gemacht ? 1 5. Waren Sie vor sechs
Uhr zu Hause? 16. Haben Sie heute Abend zwei Tassen
Thee getrunken ? 1 7. Weshalb schreiben Sie an Ihren Bruder ?
C. 1. My brother writes to me twice n week. 2. He tells
me what he does every day. 3. The day before yesterday he
drove to the city. 4. The clock was striking ten when he set
out. 5. He visited liis tailor and his hatt(M'. 6. He remained
only a iiuarter of an hour at the hatter's. 7. At the tailor's
EXERCISES XXX-XXXI.
405
5. m
d)v f dj lug
:vte(fhmbe
iprobiereii
JJ^inutcit
e id) mir
In ^iertel
^d) Ijattc
. Uin ein
!)Jed)uung
lad) bem
3)£inuten
id) eine
|d;reiben.
t wahr ?
ie heute
sind Sie
ouimeii ?
sind Sie
ir neuer
Lihneider
Eiuf elf ?
12. Uiii
13. Wie
4. Was
'or sechs
Tassen
Briider ?
Fie tells
rday he
I lie set
3maiTie(l
tailor's
he ordered a suit which will cost eighty-five marks. 8. His
new hat will cost him twelve marks and a half. 9. He dined
at a quarter to one. 10. The bill amounted to five marks and
forty-five pfennigs. 11. Hg gave the waiter thirty or (bis) forty
pfennigs. 12. After dinner ho visited the doctor. 13. He
will visit him for the third time a week from to-day. 14. At
ten minutes to four he went for a drive in the park. 16. In
an hour and a half he was at home again. 16. Then he dj-ank
two cups of tea, and wrote a few letters. 17. All that is
interesting (iutereffant) (for) him, perhaps, but it is not interest-
ing (for) me.
EXERCISE XXXI, a. (§§ 187-188.)
A. @iu (5belmann (nobleman) ging radr^rcnb grower ©onnens
Ijil^e (heat of the sun) in [eincm ©orten fpc^ieveu unb \a^ ben
©cirtner, ber biejcn 33eiud) nid)t txwaxkt i)atk, unter einem
^kume [djlafen. Bornig ging ev auf il;n log (go at, attack)
unb rief : „ ©djelm H liegft l)ier, anftatt 3U avBeiten ; bu uerbienft
\M)t, ha^ hid) bie ®oune he]d)eint'' S)er ©cirtner antwoxtcH:
,, ©erobe be§l;alB \)aht id) mid) in 'i)tn (^d)aik\x gelegt."
B. Continue the following: 1. ^d) ging ini ©arten [pajiercit,
bu, K. 2. ^c^ fdjlafe unter einem 33aume, \i\\, jc. 3. ^d)
\d)\it\ unter einem 33aume im ©arten, \i\i, jc. 4. ^d) ging auf
"t^txv ©(irtner lo§, )i\x, jc. 5. ^d) liege l;iev m\Mi ^u arbeiten,
bu, }c. 6. Give the principal parts (§ 28) of fa^, liegft,
kfc^eint.
G. (Oral.) 1. Von wem erzahlt man diese Geschichte ?
2. Wo ging der Edelmann einst spazieren ? 3. War das
Wetter sehr heiss ? 4. Wen sah der Edelmann ? 5. Was
machte der Gartner 1 G. Erwartete er wohl diesen Besuch ?
7. Gefiel dem Herrn das Betragen {conduct) des Giirtners ?
8. Auf wen ging der Ilerr los ? 9. Was rief er dem Gartner
■/Ml 10. Arbeitete der Gartner? 11. Was that er, anstatt
I
406
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
zu arbeiten ? 12. Wohin hatte er sich gelogt ? 1 3. Wo lag
er ? 14. Besclnen ihn die Soiino ? 15. Logte er sich in den
Schatten, auf (hi.ss die Sonne ihn nicht bescheine 1
D. 1. How are you to-day ? 2. Have you gone for a walk?
3. We went for a walk in tlie garden. 4. I shall go for a
drive. 5. The gardener is sleeping. 0. 'J'lie gentleman calls
his gardener. 7. He does not let him sl(;ep {infin). 8. The
gardener runs to him. 9. He attacks the gardener. 10. He
calls to him : " You are lying in the shade ; you were sleeping
instead of working ; tliis does not please me ; why did you
lie down (fid^ legeii) under a tree («cc.)'?" 11. The gardener
begins to speak, and answers thus : " I am in the wrong ;
I do not deserve that the sun should shine-on me ; therefore
I lay down in the shade."
^. 1. A lazy gardener was working in the garden of a
nobleman. 2. He had cut down (umljaiien) a tree, and was
tired. 3. He lay down under a tree, and was sleeping.
4. His master went for a walk in the garden. 5. He found the
man lying (infin.) in the shade. 6. He went at him angrily,
and called to him. 7. " Rascal, why are you lying here 1
8. You were sleeping instead of working. 9. Such people
don't deserve that the sun should shine-on them." 10. The
gardener began to speak, and said. 11. "You are right; I
was lying in the shade, because I did not deserve that the
sun should shine-on me, and therefore I lay down under a tree."
J
% i
EXERCISE XXXII, a. (§§ 189-194.)
A. Continue the following: 1. ^d) bttte um ©ntfd^ulbigung
(pardon), bu, k. 2. ^d) 6ot bem airmen ein ^iM 33vot, bu, k.
3. !^d) bete immev niovgeuS unb abenb^j, bu, k. 4. ^d; hat um
O^-ntfd^ulbigung, hu, u\ 5. !^d) Ijahc sn (^ott K^chcki, hn, k.
6. !^d) lag uutcv ciiicm bicfcu ^-Ikume, bu, ic. 7. 'M) l)ahc oubcvt-
l)a\h (^tuubeu ba (3elc(3eu, bu, jc. 8. '^d) legte 'oa<j iBud) auf beu
J
EXKUCISE XXXII.
407
tiid), bit, K. 0. ^d) (enc mid) iini selju lU;v ju ^^ette, bu (cgft
bid;, K. 10. ^d) ^^og bic lUjv au^ ber :iu[d)e, bu, ic. 11. ^c^
aeigte ir;m beii ^s3cg iiad) bcv i^tahi, bu, jc. 12. ^d) l)ahe mcine
C^aiib|d)ur;e au^ge^ogeu, bu Ijaft betuc, jc. 13. ^^d) ^kl)c meine
C^aub|d)ur;e aii^., bu _ beiue, k. 14. ^^d) Ijabc uie in meiucm
icbcu gcbgen, bu - in beiuem, jc. 15. ^d) l)kh einen bicfen
33aiim urn, bu, jc.
^. 1. We offered the poor-man bread, but he begged uS ror
money. 2. Daniel was a pious (fvoniui) youtli, and prayed
every day, in the morning, at noon and in the evening.
3. Our neighbou.-'s gardener lay under a tree the-other-day and
slept. 4. He lay down there (bofjiu) because he was lazy. 5. More-
over, he was tired, for he had cut down a tliick tree. 6. He
had already been sleeping for two hours, when liis master went
into the garden. 7. The latter drew his watch from his
pocket, showed it to him, and asked him how long he had
slept. 8. The gardener lied and said he had slept only a
quarter of an hour. 9. There lies the tree which the gardener
cut down yesterday. 10. My books are lying up-stairs
in my bed-room. 11. Your books are lying down-stairs in
the school-room (©c^utftuk) ; I laid them there myself. 12.
The boys were plcijing outside, whilst the girls sat in-doors
and studied. 1 3. Our house is built partly of stone and partly
of brick. 14. To the right of our house stands a church, and
to the left a school. 1 5. I like to drink tea better than coffee,
especially in the evening. 16. In the beginning I found the
German language very difficult. 17. I like to^learn French
best of all the languages. 18. Our cousins will visit us shortly.
19. They will remain with us at least three weeks. 20. It-is-
to-be-hoped (Ijoffeutlid;) they will come this week. 21.* They
will luirdly arrive before (uor) tlu^ 20t]i. 22. What this man
said .seemed extremely improbable. 23. T do not think that
lu' would knowingly tell an unti'uth.
408
SUPPLKMENTARY KXEKCISKS.
EXERCISE XXXIII, a. (§§ 195-196, 200-201.,
A. Observe the following: 1. '^d) loci^ mcinc ^cftiou, T
know my lesson. 2. ^d) !cnnc bicfcn tr^evvn nicljt, 1 do not
know this gentleman. 3. ^d) Um melne ^eftion nid)t lernen,
I cannot learn my lesson. 4. ^d) imi^' lueiuc Seftion lerncn, I
must (am compelled to, have to) learn my lesson. 5. ^d) mag
bie[c Sehion nidjt, 1 do not like this lesson. 6. ^d) mag [ie
nid)t ternen, I do not like to learn it. 7. (?r bavf [pa^^iereu
gel)en, He may (is allowed to, permitted to) go for a walk.
8. ©arf i^ fvagen mo ©ie maven? May I ask where you were?
9. ^d) fod bieje >^e!tion levnen, I am to (ought to, am told to)
learn this lesson. 10. ^d) mill meiue i'eftion levnen, I will
(wish to, intend to) learn my lesson. 11. ^d) mevbe fie uor
ge^ \Xf)X levnen, I shall learn it before ten o'clock.
B. Continue the following: 1. ^d) meij^ mo bie[ev J^evv
n)ol)nt, bn, 2c. 2. ^d) tenne \)a^ ,g)an§, movin ev moljnt, bu, jc.
3. ^d) bavf l^ente nid)t auggel)en, hu, k. 4. ^d) fann biefen (Sal)
md)t vcx\td)cn, bu, k. 5. ^d) mag gevn be^ movgen^ fpajteven
ge^en, 'ou, k. 6. ^d) mag biefen C^evvn nidjt, hn, k, 7. 'M)
mu| Dor funf Uljv ju ^aufe feln, bu, k. 8. ^d) fott "ocn ganjcn
^ag ju §aufe bleiben, bu, k. 9. ^d) mitt tjeute xcd)t fleiBig
arbeiten, bu, 20. 10. ^d) mevbe movgen obev iibevmovgen
ttbreifen, ^n, 2C»
C 1. I must now write a letter to my father. 2. I am to
write this letter before (the) tea (5lbenbeffen). 3. I cannot find
my pens. 4. Will you lend me a pen? Charles will not lend me
his. 5. With pleasure (3Sevgniigen), but you must not lose it.
6. I do not like this pen ; it is too soft (meid)). 7. Nobody
likes to write with a bad pen. 8. We know this lady, but we
do not know where she lives. 9. Can you tell me where she
lives? 10. Mary cannot learn this hard lesson. 11. Are we
to study the whole evening? 12. No, you may go for a walk-
after dinner ((Sffen). 13. May I go out w^ien I have w^-itten my
EXERCISES XXXIII XXXIV.
409
?cftiou, I
1 do not
i)t lernen,
lerucn, I
^d) mag
i) inac^ [ic
[pa^^ieven
• a walk.
^ou were?
1 told to)
n, I will
DC fie uor
efev .^evv
it, bu, K.
iefen (Sat^
[pajiemt
. 7. 'M)
en gan^cn
d)t fleiBig
krmorgeu
, I am to
mnot find
t lend me
3t lose it.
, Nobody
y, but we
Adhere she
, Are we
or a walk
'itten my
exercise? 1 i. You may go out now if you wish. 15. I do
not wish to go out yet. 1 G. Do you like to take a walk in the
morning? 17. Can you {2 sing.) not take a walk with me,
George ? 18. We must not remain [any] longer ; we must go
now. 19. When will you (2 siny.) learn your lesson, Louisa?
20. You must know it to-morrow. 21. Louisa must know her
lesson before six o'clock, or she will not be allowed to go to the
Cms) concert. 22. Thou shalt not steal. 23. Charles is not to
lend his books to the other boys. 24. We will not lend you
{2plnr.) our books. 25. We do not like to lend our books.
26. Do you know where (luorjin) I laid my gloves? I cannot
find them. 27. Does Mary know where they are? 28. I
know not what I shall do. 29. May I ask you to lend me
some money ? 30. I do not know you, and therefore I do
not know how I can lend you money.
EXERCISE XXXIV, a. (§§ 197-202.)
A. Observe the following: 1. m^ id) Jung max, fonnte x^
fe^r gut fdjicimmen, When I was young I could swim very well.
2. ^c^ fijnnte beffer fd)reiben, loenn \6) tint gute '^eber Ijaiit, I
could write better if I had a good pen. 3. ^d) ^abe nie gut
[c^reiben fonnen, I have never been able to write well. 4. ^c6
^(itte \n^ ^onsert gefjen fonnen, luenn ic^ geraoat ^citte, I could
have gone to the concert if I had wished. 5. ^c^ wevbe morgen
ni^t tn§ ^onsert gel^en fonnen, I shall not be able to go to the
concert to-morrow. 6. %{^ ^inb muf^te id) \x\\l) ^u 33ette getjen,
When I was a child I had to go to bed early. 7. ^d; mitfete
au .^oufe bleiben, loenn \^ meine ^tufgobc nidjt mad)te^ I should
have to stay at home if I did not do my exercise. 8. ^d) ^abe
meine 5Iufgabe abfdireiben miiffen, I have been obliged to copy
my exercise. 9. ^d) ^citte ju J>ni|e blciben miiffen, luenn \d)
meine 5lufga6e nid;t gemad)t l)Uit, I should have had to remain
at home if I had not done my exercise. 10. ^d) mevbe nod)
110
SUFPLKMENTARY KXEIKMSKH.
^tDci (Btuubcn av6citcn niiiffeu, I shall liavo to work two hours
nioro. 11. ^^Uo .Uinb modjte id) uidjt $iiv Sd)ulc a,d)cn, aber id)
mu^te, As a child I did not like to go to school, hut I had to.
12. !^d) mod)te ^-jjari^ bc[ud)en, lucnn id) (^clb qcnui^ Ijiittt, I
should lik(3 to visit Paris if 1 had fuiough money. 13. ^d)
Ijahc l)eute nid)t au^geljen nii3(^cu, T liavo not cared to go out to-
day. 14. ^d) (jcittc 'Oa^ ]d)cn mbo^cn, I should like '.-> have seen
that.
B. Continue the following: 1. ^d) !onnte nidjt frii()ei
!ommeu, bu, 2C. 2. !^<d) Ijahc nid)t fviitjev fommeu touueu, bu, 2C.
3. ^d) fouute nidjt fo eine ^(ufgabe inadjeu, bu, 2C. 4. ^^d) Ij'dttc
jo eine ^^(utgabe utd)t mad)en tonnen, bu, 2c. 5. !^d) loevbe biefe
^lufgabe uie madjpu fftunen, bu, 2C.
(7. 1. I was unable to come, because I was ill. 2. I have not
been able to go out this week. 3. Mary would not be able to
do such an exercise. 4. She could have done it if she had
taken pains (fid) 3[Riit)e geben) 5. We shall never be able to
learn all these words. 6. I could write better two years ago
than [I can] now. 7. We could write better if we had better
pens. 8. I could have bought that house for 5000 marks if I
had wished. 9. I could not buy it now for twice-as-much
(bofj Doppelte). 10. We shall not be able to go to school to-
morrow. 11. Charles has been obliged to copy his exercise.
12. We should have to copy our exercises if we did them badly.
13. We always had to copy our exercises when we did them
badly. 14. Th(>se exercises are badly written ; we shall have
to copy them. 1 5. We have been (jbliged to write every exercise
twice. 16. We did not wish to do it, but we have been obliged
to do it. 17. If the weather had been cold, we should have
had to stay at home. 18. We had to stay at home, because the
weather was ho cold. 19. We must stay at liome. 20. We are
not allowed to go out in the evening. 21. As [a] child George
was la/y, and did not like to study. 22. I should like to take
KXKHCISKS XXXI \ -X.X'XV
111
WO hours
, aber id)
I had to.
()dtte, I
13. ^c^
JO out to-
vdvc seen
)t friiljci
m, bu, 2C.
evbe biefe
have not
)e able to
she had
e able to
years ago
ad better
narks if I
e-as-much
school to-
exercise.
em badly,
did them
hull have
y exercise
sn obliged
)uld have
'cause the
}. We are
Id George
ke to take
a walk after dinm«r if the weather is Hj.p. l';!. SImmiM you like
to go with me? L>1. T do not ean^ to go for a wulk when it is
dark. 25. ] should have liked to visit BerUn when I was in
Germany. 1>G. 1 liad to come home earlier than T liked ((]efaUcn).
27. Could you lend me a good pen ; T should like to write to
my father. 28. You might write with this [one]. 29. 1 hav(.
tried to wi-ite with it, but I have not Ixvn able to do it. 30.
Do you think you will be able to do this exercise, without
mistakes ?
EXERCISE XXXV, a. (gj^ 197-202.)
A. Observe the following : 1. Xa^^ .fliub buvfte nie fpiit
auf61etben, The child was nc.ver allow.vl to stay up late. 2. iS^
biivfte aufbleikn, wmi eg luoUte, It might (would be permitted
to) stay up if it wished. 3. ^dj ^Be feine dlomam lefeii biivfen,
I was not (have not been) allowed to read any novels. 4. ::^d)
lydtk fie gelefen, jyeun tc^ geburft tjcitte, I should have read them
if I had been allowed. 5. ^c^ lyevbe Ijmte ahmh Pi^^geljen
biirfen, I shall be allowed to go out this evening. 6. T^er
Sefiver [agte, t^ fotte feine ^tonmue lefcu, The teacher said
I should not read any novels. 7. liefer Oting foil Ijunbcvt
^avt gefoftet ^oben, This ring is said to have cost a hundred
marks. 8. ^n Ijiitkft beiuein i^ruber rjclfen foUeu, You ou-ht
to have helped your brother. 9. ^d) lUolUe iljin l^elfeu, abix^id)
fonute e§ md)t, I wanted to help him, but I could not. 10. (5r
follte mix fein 33u^ Icifieu, ahcv cv ^at nid)t geiuollt, He was to
lend me his book, but he would not. 11. liefer a)?anii iviii
bev eol)n eim^^ ©vofeu fein, akr niemanb glaubt iljin, lliis man
asserts that he is the son of a count, but nobody believes him.
12. Saffen @ie mid) ^I^r neneS mc\in' feljen, Let me see your
new knife. 13. i^affen ©ie e6 \a nidjt au[ hm 33oben fallen, Be
.sure you don't let it fall on the floor. U. ^d) Ijahc mix einen
neuen 5lnsug niodjen loffen, I have had a new suit made for me.
412
SUPPLEMENTARY EXER(MMEvS.
I'). '>Bo ift bcv ^^lu^U(^, bcii ^ic (id) l)al)cn imulicii luiJcnV Wlicrci
is tlio suit you luivo liad uv.uU) (tor yourself) ?
n. Contimu^ i\w following: 1. ;\d) bihftc biefcii ^Komon
Icfcu, lucmi id) luolltc, bu, 2C. 2. ;\d) l)attc c-C) il)iu (^Icid) [ac^cn
foUcn, bu, K. .'5. ^Vi) i)«l>c Co uid)t neuuiUt, u)cil id) d uid)t
(^ciDolU l)obc, bu, 2C. 4. M) t)"^^c il)u txi'i uid)t tl)uu laffcu, bu,
K. 5. .^^icv ift baCi .r-^au^ri, ii)cld)C':i id) uiiv Ijabc baucu Infjcu, l)icv
ift — , u)cld)C'j bu biv, H\
C. 1. We were only allowed to read novels in the holidays.
2. T should (u)iivbc) read this novel if 1 mciv, allowed (subj.)
3. I should hav;3 read it if I had been allowed. 4. I shall
be allowed to read it in the holidays. 5. 1 might (would be
permitted to) read it if I wished. G. I should (univbc) read
it if I were allowed [to do] it. 7. Tlu^ teacher said that I might
(biivfcn) read it. S. Are you allowed to read novels when
you should be writing {iujlu.) your exercises. 9. You should
not read novels when you have something else to do. 10. We
should not sit up late to read novels. 11. If everybody
did what he should, the world would be much better. 12. You
should not have sat up so late to read novels. 13. My brother
should have helped me to do my exercises, but he would
not [do] it. 14. He was to help me; he promised to (e<3).
15. I told him that he should have helped me, but he only
laughed. 16. This lady is said to be the daughter of a
countess, but I do not believe it. 17. She is said to have
been six years in America. 18. Her relatives (33eri»anbte)
are said to have Ix^en very rich. 19. The child wished to sit
up late, but it was not allowed to. 20. George wished to
get (l)abeu) thirty marks from me, but I did not want to lend
him so much. 21. We did not go for a walk ; George could
not, and I would not (per/.). 22.1 wouldn't, becausa I wouldn't ;
that is all. 23. This man asserts that he has learnt German,
but he knows nothing about it. 24. He pretends to have
EXKUCISKH XaXV-XXXVF.
4\:\
Wlic
I'd
dioman
.\d) fac^cu
eei uid)t
tficu, bu,
ffcu, Ijiev
liolidays.
d (subj.)
. I shall
vould be;
I'bc) read
b I might
els when
)U should
10. We
very body
12. You
y brother
le would
1 to (e^).
b he only
iter of a
to have
erwanbte)
ed to sit
vished to
it to lend
rge could
wouldn't ;
German,
to have
been two years in (Jernutny. 25. Are you having a house ],uilt
mthisstnrt? 2(1. Wlurr, is the house, wl.icl, the count has
had built for hin,s(>lf? 27. L(.t n.e see the present your father
gave you. 28. T^ct us take a walk through tlu; city. 29. If
you let n.y pen fall, I shall not let (cilaubcu) you use it again.
EXERCISE XXXVI, a.
NoTi;. The follcvvin^r ,„nf imuMis jmssa-cs an^ int.'iul.-d to servo as -i
trans,,,,,,, to the IJeu.le,., unci „..y l'- u.lv.,.t,ageo„sly use 1 o" , ae c-e
in M.a.nma,-, ,ansIa.,on, <„al wo.k, an.l cunpos'itio,,/ A few wo, Is no
eM^;;' u/^hj^;;;;:;:t ;:^:^;^'-y -« ^-^'--^ ^^y — k a.^! Z
A. {im ^Mfdjof frnntc eiu Atinb von ncuii ,^n(jven : „9J(Vin
fleincr (Svcuiib, [in^e uiir, wo i^htt wohnt, unb id) iDevbe b'ir eiiic
Vlpfclfine^ flc()cn."-,(S^uabiGeV-' ^^err-'/' autwoxtctc bn^^ ^{inb,
„u)cuu eie miv aber fagcn, luo (S3ott nidjt ift, \o lucibc id; ^ftncn
R iSln ^hMcv evmaljiites feineu ^otjn, ^^ aiv -iiftdjen, unb
ev5(i[)(te iljin bie (Me|d)id)te uou eincr ^sevfon, iuc(d;e rriif) morgeuo
cine il^ovfe^ mit (Mdb gcfunbcii Ijabc-.^^o/' faqte bcr JUiabe,
.bie ^;uT|on, lucldje ba^ ®elb oevloveu Ijat, ift akv bod; nodi
frii{;cr ttuf(]cftanben. "
C, ^cfiiug fam eineS ^Iknb^ nod; ^^aufe unb flopfte on feine
^r;iivc. S^cr 5>^cbicnle fal; aug bem g-enfter, evfaunte feineu ^^ervn
tm ST mfeln nid;t nnb rief : „Xcv ^id)kv ift nid;t gu ^aufe."—
„@d;abet5 nid)tS^" antioortete I'effing, ,id) u^evbe ein anbermal
tt)iebev fonimen, " nnb ging rnl;ig fort.
B. llnter bent gro§en ^JuPaunie^ bei ber (Ec^eune^ unfre§
9kd)bavg fanben jiDei itnaben eine dln^, „eie gel;ort mix, " rief
ber eine, ,bcmi id; ^abe fie ^uerft gefefien." „9^ein, fie gef)i)rt
mir," fd;rie ber anbre, „benn id) ^ht fie Qufget;oben'. " 33eibe
gerieten in eincn I;eftigen ©treit.^ ^^^d; tuill bem etreit tin
Gnbe madjen/' fogte ein gri3Berer 5;unge, ber thtn ba^u^ lam.^
@r fteate fid; ^raif d;en bie jruei tnoben, fnadteio bie )Ru^ unb
fprnc^ : „rie eine ©d;aleii gel;6rt bem, ber iiie ^u^ guerft faf) ;
I
414
S U I' I' I , K M IINT A H V KX K UC IS KS.
bic nnbvc viduilc (\c\mt bcm, bcv |"ie ^^ucxii nii|l)ob ; bcii .Ucru>''
nbcv l)cl)oUe'"' id) [iir bcii Uvtciloipvud) ","
J^. Kin KijjiIm', dci- voii scincn KItci'ii auf ciiu'ii Jjihrniurkt
,£?c'sandt wur, uin verscliiodene^'^ Artikcl zu vt'ikiiufcn, wurdo
auf dein Ileiinwog^" von eincm IIuuIm'I''" /u Pf«'rd ani^cluilton.
Der Knaho licf^^ davon^^, so schnoll ilin seine Fiiss(^ tiagon
Uoniitcn, \vui-d(! alK'i" bald cinijjcliolt'''. Del" I Jim her sticg^^
ab-" und f«>i(l(U-t(!-' das Geld dcs Knaben. Da zo^' dit'sor
seinon GcKUxHitcl licraus und strcuto den TnliMlt-"- dcssclbon
auf doni l^xxlcn umlior. Wabrcnd das Geld nun von deni
IMubci- aufgolosen-^ wiu'do, s})iang der Knabc blit/scbnoll aif
das Pfci'd und galoppiorte davon. Zu Ilause angekonnnen,
wurde das Pfei'd in doni 8t;dl angebundcn ; darauf v/urdon di(5
Satteltaschen-^ untersucht'^^ und es fand sicb ausser z\v(u gela-
denen Pistolen eino bcdeutende-^ Sunnne bares Geki darin.
F.
Du Bachk'in^'', silberhell-^ und kkir,
Du eilst voriiber innuerdar-'*.
Am Ufer steh' ich, sinn'^^ und sinn':
Wo konnnst du her, wo gehst du bin?
Ich konmi' aus dunkler Felsen Schooss ;
Mein Lauf geht iiber Blum' und Moos;
Auf meinem Spiegel schvvebt so mikl
Des blauen Himmels freundlijh Bild.
.X <
D' rum hab' ich fiohen^^ Kindersi i'^^;
Es treibt'^- mich fort-^-, weiss nicht wohin.
Der mich gerufen aus dem Stein,
Der, denk' ich, wird mein Fiihrcr^^ sein.
' orange.
my lord, -''exhort, ''purse, ^it doesn't matter, •'wahiut-
tree. "barn, '^quarrel, ^conie up, come along, ^"crack open. i^«;hell.
'^kernel, ^^keep. ^^scntence, judgment, ^^different, various, ^''way
home, -"robber, ^-run away, "overtake. ^-dlHmount. -'dcinand.
^^contents. -''gather up. ^4 gjj^(|j|ig.}jj^g 25 i^gj^j.(.|j 26pQ,J^.i^^^J^.r^^|J]e_
^"brooklet, streamlet. ^silvery bright. ^''forever'. ^"think, nmse.
^Hhc happy spirit of «i child, ^^drive onward.
•Xi
guide.
irni.'irkt
, \viir(l<»
'lull ton.
tragcn
sti('g2o
J (licsor
vsst'llK'n
>ii (k'ln
noil a if
Diiniioii,
don di(5
^ei gela-
[ durin.
''walnut-
11 shell.
1'' way
iloiiianil.
iderable.
GliRMAN RKAI)1:R.
I.
Hotfappd^en.
(5«J mv einrial eiiic Heine fiif^e Vjvm, t?ie ()atte ietermnnn lieb, foj
bfv )tc nur onfab, nm aUerliebften aber ihre ®ropmuttcr, tie luufjte
nar wi&jt, tViivJ fie allei? bent .Hinte j^et^en fo(Ue. (Sinmal fd)cnftc f!e
c/ v.y()m ein ^ci>pcl|en^ »on rotcm ©animet, unl^ iveit i()m ba^ fo )vol)I
flanb, nnb e^ nirfit^ anbercf nte()r tragen lyolfte, l)ief) e^ nnr bag 6
.^otfapprf)en. Sined laj^e^J f^rac^ feine g}httter ju ibm Jonim,
3iotfap)3cl)en, ba l)nfl bn ein @tiicf ^i\d)tn unb cine g(afc{)e SBein,
Orini]' bag ber ©vo^mutter t)inaug ; fie ift franf unb fd)ivacl) nnb
./'•'. tv j^,irt) fid) baran la ben. SWfl^t)tc| aiil bevor eg Ium^ wirb, unb -^
:.ity:\ n?enn bu (jinaucfommjil, fy (^e^ ^iibfe^ fittfom unb (auf nid)t oomiOv^
' • ^'^'^ ^^' I£H2 P'^^^f* ^" ""^ S»-''^t>nd)ft bag «Hag unb bie ®ro§mutter
i^at nid)tg. Unb n?enn bu in i|re (SmbiJomnifl, fo »ergi^ nic^t " <«^
guten ?)torgen ^u fagen unb'^uH' nid)t erft in aUc'^en berum."
„3cl) tt)t(( fc^on aik^ gut mad)en/' fagte 9flotf;ip))d>en jur ^^utter,
unb gab i()r bie ^anb barauf. Xie ©rojjii-.utter aber n)cl)ntci5
braufien im 2Ba(b, eiue ^albe. (Stnnbe »om X)orf. 2Bie nun 3*lot='
fappd)en in ben SBalb Urn, begegnete i()m ber 2Qotf. S^lotfappc^cn
aber wn^te nid)t, \\)iU bag fiir ein bojeg 3:ier tvar, unb fiird)tete ftc^
nid)t ttor i()m. „®uten Jag, Slotfappc^en/' fprad) er. ,,(Srt)oncn
i:an!, 3^oIf." „2Co t)inaug fo friil), Slotfapp^en '^" „3ur ®ro§=2o
mutter." „2Bag tragfl bu unter ber &^^tV' „jlud)en Uub
SGein: geflern l)a1)m tvir gebaden^ba foU fid) bie franfc unb fd)mac^e
®ro^mutter tt^iU su gut t()un, unb ftd) bamit ftarfen." „dlf>U
fiipp^en, n?o wo^nt beine ©ropmutter ?" / „5^oc^ etne gutc
35iertclftunbe meiter im S3alb, unter ben brei grs^fjen Sid) baumen, 25
415
41(3
9lotfd|)|id)ett*
ba ftoht ihr .»>»uii<, imtni ftiit> tii' "Jhjfdu'ifcn l»»iv< UMrfttii ja iviffcii/'
fiiflte aiotfappdu'ti. Xcr ^A>olf taii)tc bci fid) „taiJ ^uiij^c j.irtc
Uf, 'X)m], tiiiJ tfl cin fetter iM|Jen, ber unrt> noit) beffer frf^niecfen aU
t»ie Slltc : tu mupt v'jj liftii] nnfanjK", t^amit bu bcitc erfd)iuippft."
80 Da fliitii er ein 2i:seild)cn neben Stotfappdien, bann fprad) cr „9bt-
fa))pd)en, flet) einntat bie fdunicn ilMumen, bie vi\\c\^ um()er ftetjen,
Wiuum jimfft bit biit nid)t um? id) flirtubc bu l)i)v\t c^ax nid)t, rvie
bic 5)oj^Ieiii fu licHid) ffiiiien'c' bu jicl)ft ja fiir bic^ Ijin aU menu
bu 3ur ed)ule niiuift, uiib ift fu luftu] t)aufuMi in bem S^alb."
85 JRotfappd^en fd)(un bic ^lui^en auf, uub aU cd fat) tvie bie ®onnen«
Prat)Ien burd) bie 23aumc l)in uub t)cr tan^ten, uub allc^J ^olt fdumer
S3tumen jlaub, tadjtt ti „mnn ic^ ber (yropmuttcr einen frifd)en
(5trau§ mitbriujie, ber ujirb i()r aud) ^reubc mad)cn ; eg ift fo friit)
am ZaQ, ba§ id) boc^ ju red)ter 3eit aufomme/' lief oom SCege ah
40 in ben SBatb l)ineiu uub fud)te ^IMumeu. Hub lueun ecJ eine
gebroc^en t)atte, meinte e5, weiter t)iuauiJ ftaubc eiue fd>i)ucre, uub
lief baruad), unb j^criet immer ticfer in ben 2BaIb t)iuein. X)er
$QoIf aber ging gerabe^JwegiJ nac^ bem J^aud ber (yro^mutter, unb
llopftc an bie J^iire. „2Ber ift braupen?" „jRotfappc^en, bad
45briugt ^ud)en unb SDein, mad)' auf." „X)riid' uur auf bie
^liufe/' rief bie ©rof mutter, „id) hin ju fr^mad) unb fann ni^t
auffle{)en." Der SBoIf briicfte auf bie ^(iufe, bie 3:biirc fprang
auf unb er ging, o^nc ein aCort ju fprecfcen, gerabe 3um aSett ber
©ropmutter unb »crfc^Iudte fte. T>ann ti)at er i^re ^(eiber an,
50 fe^te i^re ^aube auf, tegte ftc^ in it)r 33ett unb 309 bie 5Dor^ange
»or.
Sluiuippc^en aber mar nac^ ben Slumen l^erumgeraufen, unb aU
eg fo yiet gufammen !^atte, ba^ eg feine me^r tragen fennte, fiel i^m
bie ©ro^mutter iuieber ein unb eg mad)te fii^ auf ben 2Beg ju i^r.
56 (Sg tuunberte fid), ba§ bie 3;()iire aufflanb, unb tvk eg in bie (^tnU
trat, fo fam eg i^m fo feltfam barin oor, bag eg bac^te ,,ei, tt>it
angj^Ii^ tuirb mirg ^wte ju "iWut, unb Un fonjl fo gerne M bfr
fioilapp^tn.
417
\^( jurtc
ccfcn aU
)iuip)jft."
n „d\ot-
iid)t, tvic
lU menn
5onnen=
i fitijner
frifcbcn
: fo friii)
BJcj^e ah
e& einc
ore, unt)
t. 3)cr
ter, unb
)en, t)a^
auf tie
itn nic^t
fprang
iBett ter
iter an,
or^angc
unt alg
fiel t^m
3U i^r.
; <Stube
,ei, mie
&ei tfr
^^hotlmuthM!" (S^ riff „iiuten Wor^un!" bcfam nber fcine 'ilnt^
wort. Xarauf ^ini] i\^ s«>" '-^^ctt unt 309 tie ^i^orl)antie ,u«rucf :
ta Iflfl tic (i)ro§m!«ttcr, unt l)atte tie Ipaubc tief {n<5 CWefic^t ^iefe(jtoo
unt fa^ fo uninterliii) auv<. „(Si, Wropmuttcr, m^ Ija^ tu fiir
grope Dt)ren!" „Xap id) tid) bejTer t)oren fann." „(Si, ®ro§*
mutter, mi ()iift tu fur grof^e 5(ugen !" „Vi\^ ic^ tid) bejfer
febcn fann.^' „(5i, (SJropmuttcr, wai ()aft tu fiir (^rope .pante!"
„Tci^ ic^ tid) beffcr pacfcn fann." „2lbcr, ©ropmuttcr, wad t)aft66
tu fiir cin entfetUid) grojjei? ^JOJauI !" „i:a9 id) tic^ kffcr freffen
fann." jlaum ^atte tcr SCoIf tad gefac^t, fo t^at er einen ®a^
am tent ^^cttc unt ijerfd)(ang tad arinc 9totfdppcl?en.
2©ie ter 2Co(f fein ©cliiftcn gejlint l)atte, legte er fid) wieter in«
33ett, fd)lief ein unt ftng an iibcrUnit ju fd)narc^en. Tev 3ager7o
giUi^ eben an tern ^ani oorbei unt tad)tc „tuie tic altc i^vau
fc^narc^t, tu mupt tod) fe()cn ob il)r (ttoaa fe()(t." X)a trat er in
tic (BtnU, unt wit er i)ov tad 33ett tarn, fo fa^ er tap ter SCoIf
tarin lag. „?5intc ic^ tid) ^ier, tu alter ©iinter," fagte cr, „id^
^abe tid) lange gefud)t." ^f^un njoUte cr feinc S3iid)fc anlegcn, ta 75
ftel i^m ein, ter SBolf fijunte tie ©ropmutter gefrejyen ^aUn, unt
ftc ware noc^ au rettent fd)op ni^t, fontcrn nal)m cine (Sc^eerc
unt ftng an tern fc^Iafenten SGoIf ten S3auc^ auf^uf^neiten. 2Qie
cr cin paar ®d)nitte getl)an ^atte, ta fa| er tad rote ^appc^cn
lcud)ten, unt noc^ ein paar @d)nitte, ta fprang tad ^Mtc^enso
]^eraud unt rief „ac^ wie war tc^ erf^roden, wie ward fo tun!el in
tern aColf fcinem Seib!" lint tann tarn tie altc ©ropmuttcr
auc^ noc^ lebentig ^craud unt fonnte faum atmen. ^Hotfappc^cn
aber l)olte gefc^wint grope ©teine, tamit fiiaten fte tern SColf ten
Seib, unt wic cr aufwai^te, wottte er fortfpringen, aber tic (Steincss
waren fo fc^wer, tap er gleid^ nieterfan! unt f!c^ tot ftel. /
^u ,v„,,,i »w.v vivi vugnugi, cci o"yci 3^9 van z^zij pen yeij
al unt ging tamit ^cim, tic ©ropmuttcr ap ten ^u6^tn unt tran!
418
JRotfii|)|irf)ciu
ben K^tin, bcii <'Kotfap).Hi}f" (K^radU I)attf, unt> crboltc ftd> Juict»cr,
90 3lotfappcl)cu abcr tnd)tc ^tu ivillft tcin Vcbtiij^ nid)t jvictcr aUctu
oom JCcc^e nl^ in t>en ^GaliD (.»i!fen, ivcnn biv^ tie 'i)}hitter »cr6oten
di ivirt) nuc^ erjnhlt, ba9 cinntal, aii 3'^otfai>pd)e!i bcr n(tcn
©ro^mutter luieber Ci)ebrtdcnc(3 lMad)tc, cin anbcver JGoff it)m
95augefprod)en unb Cv^ yom JBcge I)a('e ablciten tvodcn. 9f{Lnfap))d)en
aber ^ittete ftc^ unb (^ing gerabe fort fciuc«5 SBeoi^ unb fagte bcr
®ropmuttcr, ba§ eg bem SGolf begcgnet tvare, bcr ibm gutcn lag
genjitnffbt, abcr fo boci au5 ben ^Ixu^cn gegucft t)dtte: ^tueun^
nic^t auf ojfner ©tra^e geivefen ivare, er t^iitte mid) gefreffen."
ioo„^omm/' fagte bie ©ropmutter, „tt?ir \vo\kn bie Jbiire «erfd)Iie§en,
baf er ni(^t l)ereiu fann." 33alb barnad) flopfte bcr 2Bolf an unb
rief „mad)' auf, (Dro^mutter, ic^ bin bag 3flotfappd)en, ic^ bring'
bir ^cUdtnt^." <Bk fc^ivtegen aber ftill unb niad)tcn bie 3:i)iire
ni(^t auf: ba fc^lit^ ber ®raufo))f etiute Wal urn bag ^au^,
losfpraug enblid) aufg Tad) nnl) moUte warten hi^ 9lotfappd)en
abenbg na^ ^aug gingc, bann njotltc er i()m nad)fc^Ieid)en unb
ttjotltg in ber 3)un!ell)eit frejfen. 5(ber bie ©ropmutter mer!tc,
wa^ er im @inn ()atte. ^Inn ftanb yor bem ^an& tin grower
(Steintrog, ba fprac^ fie ^u bem ^inb „nimm ben Simer, ^Jiot-
uofappc^en, gej^ern i:)aV i&i SGiirfle gefoc^t, ba trag bag Staffer, jvorin
fie ge!od)t ftnb, in ben Irog." 9lotfap).^d)cn trug fo lange, big ber
grope grope 3:rog ganj ttoH tuar. Va fticg ber ®eruc^ yon ben
SGiirften bem 2Colf in bie Sf^afe, er fc^nupperte unb gudte l)inab,
cnblic^ maAte er ben ^alg fo lang, bap er fid) nid)t me()r t)alten
iisfonnte unb anfing ^u rutfd)cn: fo rutfd)tc er oom Vci6:) ()erab,
gerabe in ben gropen Xrog ^inein unb ertranf. 9f?otfappd)en aber
a\nci frohlirb nads f)(iuA. iiii'h tU^{ i'^nt titim»nr»^ »»*-m-i<j? »i! 9p!h
II.
VOk's 6er Zllte mad^t, iff s tmmer redjt
Sine ®cfd)i^te werte ic^ tir er3al)(cn, bic i^ ()orte, al^ ic^ nod)
ein ^inb ivar ; jefccvjmal ivenn i(^ an tie 03c[d)ic^te tac^te, fom e^ -
mir "ooYf aU oh fte immcr [d)ijner n?erbe; benn eg gc^t mit ®e^
fd)id)tcu, mie mit t)ielen SHeufc^en, fie werben mit Jurfe^nScm
3(tter fd)oner. . p
2luf t>em l^anbe &ifi tu getutg fd^on geiucfen; bu wirfi tt>o^I aud^
fo ein red)r alteg Sauern^aug mit einem (Strcl)bad) geft|cn i^ahtn,
SDZoog unt) tranter n?ad)fen »on felbft auf bcm 1)ad)e; ein (Storcb-
neft befiubet, fi^ auc^ auf bem ©ipfet be^felben, ber ^torcb ift
wnenibe^rlid^ ! Die 2Banbe vcd .paufe^ [tub fdifef.; bic genfteno
niebrig unb nur eiit ein^igeg gcnfter ijl fo ^"genSiei, ba§ eg
geoffnet ipcrben fanu; ber 33adofen ragt aug ber Sflnb ^er^or;
ber gliel^eftaitm l)anc|t liber ben 3aun ()inaug unb unter feinen
Jrod^m am gu§e besg Banned ifi ein 'Se{4 in n?eld)em cinige
tntcn riegen. (^in alter ^unb, ber aUc unb ieben'^miVellit, iflie
auc^ ba.
©erabe fo dn 33internl)aug ftanb brau^en auf bem Sanbe unb in
biefem ^laufe a^o^nten tin ^aar alte ?eule, dn 33auer unb fcine
%xan. mk wenig fte au^ l)atten, ein @tiic! tuar bocb barunter,
bag ent6el)rlic^ ivar—ein ^Pferb, bag fid) »on bem (55rafe ni^rte,2o
wel^eg eg an ber ?anbftra§e fanb. Der alte 33auer ritt jur
@tabt auf ^iefem ^ferbe, oft (ie^en eg and) fcine 9^a(^krn ijon
il)m unb efmiefen ^m alten Seuten mand)en anbern I)ienft ^afiir.
M(\p am ientiinftiaf en iviirbe eg moftl fcin. iiscnn fte bn^ m^r't)
^"'^^^ite^f I'ber eg gegen ttm'ag anbereg yertaufd)ten ma il)neu 25
mcl)r nu|en fiJnnte. 5lbcr \m^ lonnte bag mi)\ fein ?
419
420 Bic'S bcr mtc mar^t, ip'8 immcr tcrjt
„Dag njirfl tu filter am Ibeflen iviffcn/' facjte i^m bie ^rau.
„^eute ifl gcrabc 3a^rmarft, rcitc ^ur ®tat)t, gieb ba^ ^ferb fiir
@elt) ^in, ober mac^c cinen gutctt 3:auf«^ ; Ovie J?u ei5^tiu^;inac^j^,
somir ijl'g rcd^t."
©iefniipftc i^m fcin |)aWtuc^ ""^' JSSf . ^.^^^f^^"^ fie bcjfer
al« cr ; fJe fniipfte e« i^m mit eincr 3)o|)|)eIfd)Ieifc urn ; bag njar
fc|r pbf^ ! eie ftric^ feincn ^ut glatt mtt i^rer flad)cn ^anb
unb gab i^m bann einen ^up gum 5lbfc^icb. Darauf ritt cr fort
35 auf bem ^ferbe, njelc^e^ t?erfauft obcr oertaufc^t njcrbeu follte.
Die Sonne branntc ^eij, feini SBoIfe war am ^immel gu fe^en.
2luf bcm SCegc luar eg fe^r jkiiSg, ijieic Seute, bie ben 3jki«arft
befuc^en iroUten, fu^ren, ritten ober gingen gu 5u§. gfirgenbg
gab eg ©c^atten gegen bit Sonne.
40 Untcr anbern ging and:) einer beg SBegeg ba^in, ber einc ^u^ ^n
SJJarfte tricb. X)ie ^u() mar fo fc^on tuie eine ^u^ nur fein fann.
„Dic giebt gett)i§ auc^ gute Wliiii)," bac^te ber ^auer, „bag ware
cin gang guter Jauf^, bie ^u^ fitr bag ^ferb."
„Jpeba, bu ba mit ber ^u^ V fagte cr, „ttjei§t bu wa^ ? Sin
« 5^ferb^Jo|Ite ic^ meinen, foflct me:^r alg eine ^u^, aber mir ifl: bag
glel^Tltig, id) l^abe me^r ^u^tn tton ber ^u^ ; ^afl bu i?ufl, fo
taufd)cn njir."
„greili(^ will i^ bag/' fagte ber ^ann mit ber ^u^, unb bann
tauf^ten fie. .
50 1;ag war alfo abgemae^t unb ber 33auer ptte nun umfe'^ren
fonnen, benn er ^atte nun bag getban, wag, er tt)u foHte ; aUtin
ba er flc^ einmal auf tm 3a^rmar!t befeitet iatte, fo woflte er au(^
^in, biog urn i^n anaufe^en, unb beg^alb ging er mit feiner ^u^
nac^ ber Stabt.
55 X)ie c^wl fiU)rcab fc^ritt er rafc^ gu, unb nac^ fur^cr 3eit waren
5tau.
ert) fiir
;e beffer
x& toax
er fort
>
1 fe^en.
)rmarft
t fann.
3 n?arc
' (Sin
ift bag
ufl, fo
) bantt
fe'^rctt
atleitt
r au(^
r ^u^
warctt
99Bic'g iier ^Htc motit, ift'g immcr xt^U 421
flc eittem 5)?annc siir ectte, ber ciii (2d)af trieb. (S<j tvar ciu gute»5
@d)af, fett, irnt) ()atte gute SGoKe.
^a^a^? moAte id) l)akn/' bad)tc unfcr 33aucr, „c5 tviirbc an
unferem ^iltc genug (35ra$j ftnbeit unb ma^rcnb beg SCintcrg
angetne^fencr, eirt @d)af aU cine ^ui) ^u kjl^i."
„2Coacn it)ir taufd)en ?" fprad) er 311 bent ^^annc mit bem ©Aafe.
£>a^u mx ber mmn^ fogleid) kreif unb ber 3:auf(^ fanb flatt.
Unfer 33auer gtng nun mit bcm (Bd}ii\c auf ber Sanbftrafie loeitcr.
,u .--.^v--
S3alb fa^ er akrmalg einen 9}?ann, ber ijom gelbe auf biees
Sanbftra^e trat unb eine grope ®cin^ unter bem 5lrmc trug.
„Va^ ijl tin fc^mereg Ding, bag bi|^^ l^aJJ^ eg l^at gebern unb
^(tt, bafj eg dne guft ift; bie jyurbe fic| fe()r gut""augne^men, njenn
fte bei ung bayeun an eiuer^^emc am SBaffer ginge. 2)ag ware
m^ fiir meine Sllte; n)ie oft ^at fie ni^t gefagt: mnn tt>ir nurro
j|l"L^i"lSfi?J^"- ^^^^ ^'^"" ^^ ^ielleic^t eine Befommen— unb
ic|i.g, fotl fit fie ()aben.— SBoden i»ir taufc^en ? 3^ gcbc bir bag
@(^af fiir bie %9|^nb fd)i)nen T)anf ba^u." 'Dagegen ^atte ber
anbere ni(^tg ein/umenben unb fo taufc^ten fie, unb ber ©auer befam
bie ®ang. ^5
3e^t war er f^on nal)e M ber Stabt; bag ©ebranae auf ber
8anbftra§e nal)m tmmer su ; ^enfi-^en unb 33ie^ brangten fic^; fie
gingen auf ber ©trape unbtangg ber 3aune, ia,.fie gingen fo'goT
*?cr^ilo^ ^^^^^^ ^artoffelfelb t)incin, m ein tin]ifti ^u|n an einer
@c^nur ging, bamit eg iiBer bag ©ebrange nic^t etfc^rclctt'unb ftc| so
njd)t |erlaufen fotlte. T)ag j^u^n ^atte zimn tureen ©djojanj, eg
Min^elte mit einem 5j[ugc unb fa^ fe^r "ftug'aug. „^rud, fiucf!"
fagte bag ^u^n. 3Bag eg fid) babei bac^te weip i^ nid)t ^u fagen,
abcr alg unfer ^amx ..3 f,^A^ t>ad)te cr fog(eid) : ^'^a^ ifl bag
fc^onfic Jpul)u, bag i^ fe gcfc^cn ()a6c, eg ifl fogar fc^oncr alg begse
422
mit'a bcr mtt Mittcit, iiV^ immcr vt(i)t.
ftut»et
ev5
f farrerg ^^citnc. S^aci ^uI)njitoc{)tc id) Men ! Sin ^')u()ii fti
iinmer jlorner, c^ faun ^id)^fa^"\db\t ernat)rcn ; id) gKiute,
anirt'e ein guter Jaufdi [ein, ivcnn id) c^ fitr bic (5Jan^ bcfommen
fonntc—SBoUen \mx taufd)cn?" frac^te er^ „Iaufd)en?" fra^tc
»ober antere, „ia, ba^ ivare gar nid)t iiM.'' Unt) fo taufc^tcn ffc.
t)a^ mv fc()r ^ief, wa^ er auf bcr 3^c{fc ^ur ©tabt ii%ftmd)t
()atte ; l)cip mv ei and) nub cr n?ar nmbc. din i^nin! unb etiua^
3um (SlJcn t()alen il)ur$iotf Kilb l^efanb rr fid) am 2Birtgl)aufe. (Sr
mUk ebcn Ijincinge^en, alg bcr .^ncd)t ^cranfam, imb fie kgcgneten
95 fic^ in ber 2:()ure. 2)er ^ned)t trug eincn gefiiUten <Bdd,
„Sai3 ^afi bu in bent ®acfe?" fragte ber 33auer.
„35erfrii)j)jeUe Slpfcl/' anta>ortete bcr ^ncd)t, „einen gan^eu ^ad
loott, genug fiir bie @^n?dne."
"%^t-^^. ^^^ ^"^^ ^" ^^''^^^ 33erfd)jt»enbung. S^cnn nuv mcine
100 5nte bai)eim bag fer)en fijnnte. 55LH-ige^ 3al)r trug ber dte 33aunt
am (BtaU nur eiuett^dnjigen 5(pfel; ber n.>urbc a^kjoWn iinb
jlanb auf bm (pri^^^^^ m er ganj fert^afb unb ^cr^ef* Ta^ {^
bo^ immer '2Bol)Iftaiit, fagte meine 5Hte, ^ier fonnte fie akr erft
2Bol)(ftanb fe^en, einen ganjen (Bad uoU ! SCe(d> eine greube
105 luiirbe fie beim SlnMid l^aben !"
„a?a(3 tviirbct i^r fiir ben <Bad ^oU geben?" fragtc ber ^net^t.
„2Bag id) gefce ? 3d) gebe mein ^wljn in ben Jaufd)/' unb er
gab bag ^^ufui in ben Jaufd), befam ^i^^fM^J iinb trat mit biefen
in bag 2Cirtgt)aug. Ten Bad Iet)nte exTdjMiali an ben Dfen. er
iiofelbfl trat an eincn Jifd). 'Lev V^cn war ahcv {)ei§, baran l)atte er
ui^t gebad)t. di aniren oiclc ©aftc 'Smvefntb ; ^ferber)anbter,
Od^fentrctber unb jtvei ^alanber, bie J,V«mn fo reid), ba§ i^re
3:afcben »on ©olbftucfen itropn unbia|[^|j(a^tcn.
©ggg ! ging eg am Dfcn ; bie 5ivfe( ftngen an gu liraten.
.15 „5Cag ifl bcnn bag?" fragtc einer.
n'^^r Jviffen ®t?/' fagte unfcr 3?auer;— unb nun ersatjltc er bie
ad
aSie'g bcr mtt mai^t, iffg immcr rcr^t 423
flanje ®efd)ic^te t)on bcm ^fertc, bag er gegcn eine ^u^ ^ertaufc^t
Ant) fo ftjeitcr ^eruntcr big ^u ben Slpfeln.
„3a, ba jmrb beine 2((tc bic^ tti^lg au'^^^ltcn, menn bu naA
^aufe fommfl/' fagten bie gnglanbcr. ,3^
.2Ca^? 2lugf(^e(ten?- fagte ber mte, Jujfen n>irb ffc mtc^ unb
jagcn : SBie'g ber 2llte madbt, ifr^ immer rec^t."
3oaeipir^.et^' fasten bie Snglunber. ,^«„bert ?)fu„b
ober erne Jonnc Wn^ten @o(be^, wenn Sie moHen."
„(Sm ^c^effel ge/Tqt fc^on/' entgegnete ber 33auer, ,,ic^ fann itur 125
ben (3c()effet 2tpfel bagegen fel^en, unb mic^ fe(&ft unb meine alte
g:au baau ; bag, ba(^te tit, ware boc^ auc^ gute/'STp)'
,,®ut! 2(ngenommen!" fagten bie Snglanber unb bie S3ette luar
gemac^t.
Der 2Bagen beg mn^ |i!|? Sfer unb bie Snglanber unb beri3o
33auer jliegen ein ; »ormartg ging eg unb kib l^ielten jlc »or bem
^augc^en beg 33auerg an.
„®utett menb, mtt,"
,,®uten 2l&enb, 2l(ter."
„!Dcr 2;auf^ if! fd^on gcmacBt."
rv . < ' O / / , 136
: r'4?^r^''"^ ®^^)llC f«9te bie erau t^n ^uma^^^b?
unb beac^tete meber ben ®acf no^ bie fremben (3a^k.
,,3(^ ^a6e bag 5)ferb gegen tint ^u^ getaufd^t."
.®ott fei Vantl m gute gjiilc^ bie n^ir nun Uhtn merben
unb auc^ 33utter uub ^t auf bem ^if^^e! 'S^a^ mx tin^^&ruo
2;auf(t V
„3a, after bie ^u^ tauf^te ic^ luieber gegen tin Sc^af."
.2lc^, bag i|l urn fo BefiTer!" eno^e bie 5rau, „bu benfji tmmer
^ ' ^''^'^i V"--«'vi^ <«eiui:gt'nug; luollene (strumpfe
unbtvoaene^anbfc^u^e! I)ag giebt bie .^u^ic^t f SCtebuboAus
an aUeg benfft" ^
m^
424 mit'i ber %lit maH^t, tfl'8 immct xti^U
„W>tx tai @c^af ^abc ic^ miebcr gcgen cine Q5an« ticrtaufc^t."
„5lIfo biefcg 3a^r njerben wir wirfUd^ ®anftbraTcn ^^aben, mcin
licber Sitter! Du benfjt immer baran, mir eine greube au ma(^cn»
150 SCic Verrli^ ij^ ta^ ! 2)ie ®an« fann mon an einer Seine gc^en
unb ftc ttoc^ fetter wcrben laffcn, be^or ton fie lirdtcn."'^
„5lber bie ©and ^abc ic^ gegcn ein J^u^n ttertaufi^t," fogte ter
mann.
„Sin ^u^n! bad war cjnjuter laufc^!" cntpcgnete bie fjrau.
165 „T)a&^^ni^n legt (Sier, bie brutet cd au«, wir frTegen ^itc^Iein, n?ir
frilgen einen gan^en ^ii^ner^of ! 2lc^, ben ^abe ic^ mir erj^ re^t
0ett)iinf(^t!"
»/3«f «6er bag J^u^n gab ic^ wicber fiir einen <Bad 'ooU r>tx*
.^t^^'^lriippelter Si^jfel ^in." *
160 „2Cag ? 3e^t mu§ ic^ bi(^ erjl rc^t fitflfen!" ttcrfe^tc bie grau.
„'3Jlnn (icbed, guted S^Jann^en! 3c^ werbe biretmad erja^len.
©ie^fl bn, aU bn fort njarfl ^eute morgcn, ba^te id^ baritber nac^,
jie ic^ bir ^ente abenb etwag red)t ®uteg gu cjfen mac^en fiJnnte.
5pcS^unb eier mit S^i^n, bac^te i^ bann. I)ie Sier ^atte id^
165 unb ben <Bptd and:), nur bie 3tt?iebeln fc^lten mir. (So ging t^
benn ju bed ©c^ulmeiflerd grau, fie ^at Btviebein, bad n?eig ic^,
aber fie i|l geigig. 3(^ bat fie, mir ein ^aar Bmiebeln an lei^en.
Sei^en? gab fie mir jur Slntttjort. 5^ic^tg, gar nid^td njac^fl in
unferem ©arten, nic^t einmal ein oerfriippelter 5l|)fel ; nid^t einmal
170 einen fol(^en fann idb 3l«e« lei^en, tiebe f^rau. 3e^t !ann id^
aber il^r ge^n, ia, einen gangen (Bad ttofl lei^en. £)ag freut mid^
an fel^r ; id^ fonnte mic^ a« 3;ob lac^en!" nnb fie liigte i^n wieber
'^eralic^.
„Da« gefaUt nnd!" riefen bie Snglanber. „3mmer alter itnb
.ifc.-»t».- »[» JV4/VJI vvir
wvtv ivvii.
jle einen ©d^effel ®clbmitnaen an ben 53auer, ber nid^t au^gefd^oUen^
(onbern geliipt wnxU*
IScnebtg«
425
6en, mcin
I mat^cn.
fagtc ber
tie fjrau.
^Icin, n?tr
erfl rcd^t
ttottjjer*
Die grau.
erja^len.
iber nac^,
tt fonntc.
gtng tc^
n?eig ic^,
|U let^en.
ttjcic^fl in
'i)t cinmal
!ann ic^
Tcut mx^
)n ttjieber
alter itnb
j5efd)oUen,
3a, bag (o^nt ftc^ immcr, wenn bie grau c« einfle^t unb eg aud^
immer fagt, ba§ ber gj^ann bcr flugflc unb fetit I^un immcr rcc^t
i"^^' 180
III.
Das ncue Kleii).
$6rc n>a3 bcr 9«onb mir craa^U: 3d^ ^aBc ben ^'abetten
Dffiaier werben unb fic^ jum erjlcn mal in feine prac^tigc Uniform
neiben fet^en : id^ ()abc bag junge TObd^cn in i^rcm 33raut|taate
gefet)cn unb beg prften jungc 33raut qIMU^ in i|rem 33raut-
anaufje ; aber nic ^abe ic^ eine ©eligfeit erMidt, a^nlic^ bcr eincg 5
flcinen i?icr|a^rigcn 5f«ab^cng, ii?cld)cg id) (jcutc STbcnb beobadtetc.
@ie ^attc ein ncucg blaucg ^Icib er^alten unb einen neucn mo^a-
^ut ; ccr (Btaat mx cften angclcgt unb aUt riefcn nac^ Sic^t, bcnn
beg 5JJonbeg ©tra^Icn, bie bur^ bag ^cnflcr brangcn, marcn nic^t
IcU gcnug, gana anberc gic^ter mn^kn angcBrannt tucrben. Daio
[lanb bag flcinc 5)?ab(^cn [Icif tuie einc ^uppe, bie 5lrme angfllid^
i)on bem ^leibe ab augftrcdcnb, bie ginger hjcit augcinanber
9cf|)rci3t. D mclc^e (Scligttit firat)Uc aug if)ren Slugen, aug i^rem
ganjen ®efici)t! „9J?orgen follfl bu in bem ^(eibe augge^cn,"
fagte bie Sautter, unb bie ^(eine blicfte auf ju i^rem ^ut unbis'
micber nieber an i^rem ^(eibe unb lac^elte felig. „gjZutter!" rief
fte, „mag luerben ml^l bie ffeinen ^iinbc^en benfen, mnn jie mid^
in biefem <Btaak erHidfen?"—"
„3d^ t)aBe/' fagte ber 5JJonb, „bir ijon '^omptii, biefer Seiche
ubt, in bcr Jiui^c ber icOenbigeii i^tabte augge)Mt, erja^ft;
i(^ fenne eine anbere nod) Jeltfamcre, fie ift feine geid)e, aber bag
®ef))en)"l einer @tabt. UberaU, wo bie etrat)Ien ber ©pring-
i'^e
^encbtg*
sbrunncn in ?0?armorbccfcn ^latfc^crn, !ommt ea niir tior, aU ^9vtc
ic^ bad S!)?arct>en tton t>cr fd^wimmcnbcu (Stabt. 3<i/ ^cr ©tra^t
t)p«f 2Qaffcrg mag »on i()r cqd()Ien, tic SBetlcn bed (Stranded mogcn
tjon i()r ftugcn. liber tcr glac^c ted ^Jieered ruljt oft ein 9lebcl,
tad ijt \l)v 5Citwenf^Icicr ; ter S3rdutigam ted Peered ifl tot, fcin
io©d)lo^ unt) fcine ©tabt ifl feiii 3J?aufoIcuni. ^ennft tu tiefc
©tabt? 9lic t)ortc fic tad 3floUen tcr 3ftdtcr oter ten ^uff^Iag
ted ^fertcd in U)vcn ©tra^cn, tort fc^wimmt nur tcr 3if(^ ^crum,
lint gf[venjlcrt)aft flicgt tic fd)ii?ar3c ®ontel libcr tad griinc
S^ajjer. 3d) wiO/' fagtc tcr "iJJlont, „tir tad gorum tcr ©tatt,
15 ten groften ^la^ terfelben, seigen, unt tu irirfl ti(^ in tie ®tatt
tcr 5)ldrd)en »er[e0t gtauten. 'Ba^ ®rad njuc^ert 3tinfd)en ten
brciten ^Hefen, unt in ter 5}corgentdmmerung flattcrn 3;aufcntc
»on 3;aubcn urn ten freifte^enten, t)o^en 3;urm lucrum. 5luf trei
(Sciten bij^ tu tton 53ogengdngen umgeben. Untcr i()ncn [t^t ftiU
20 tcr litrfc mit fetner (angen ^feife, ter fd)onc ©ricc^enfnabc (c^nt
ft(^ an tic ®dule unt ktrac^tet tic aufgeric^tetcn Sropbden, tic
^ol)cn SiHaften, 5tnten!en an tie ijcrfc^wuntcnc Wa6:)t t)u
glaggcn l)dngen gkid) 3:rauerfIor t)erab. @in ?0^dtc|ctt ru'^t tort
and, tic fd)Jvcren (Simer, mit SBaffer gefiillt, t)at ftc :^ingefc^t, tad
25 3o(^, an tvcld)em fte tiefelben gctragen i)at, rul)t auf ciner i^rcr
©(^uttern, [ic Iet)nt ftc^ an ten Siegedmaft. Sd ifl !ein gecnfd)Io§,
fontcrn cine ^lird)c, tic tu »or tir erblirfft, tic t>ergottcten ^uppctn,
tic gidnscuten ilugetn ringdum gtdnsen in meinem 8id)tc: tic
^rdd)tigen elKrneu S^loffc tort ol>en l^aUn 9leifen gemad)t, wic tad
30 cl)crnc ^fcrt im '3J?drd)cn, fie ftnt erft ()ier()cr, tann fort i)on ^icr
unt njieter i)icr|er gercift. @ie()fl tu tic Imntc ^ra^t tcr ^O^aucrn
unt ter genjlcr ? Sd ()at tad 5lnfel)en, aid ob tad ®cnie ten
?aunen eined tinted nad)gegefcen pttc, intcm cd ticfen fcltfamcn
S^emvei fd)miicftc. ®iei)ft tu auf tcr ©duic ten gcfliigclicn "oiuc-n?
35 Tad 05olt gidnjt nod), tie gliigct aber fint getninten, ter nm ift
tot, tcnn tcr .f^ijuig ted ^:»Zccred ijl tot, tic grojen J^aUcn jic^en
SlotMi^ilb.
427
^ mogen
tot, feitt
bu tiefe
5uff^Iag
> ^crum,
i griinc
r (Statt,
le ®tat»t
c^en ten
taufenbe
5luf brci
[ ft^t ftia
ibc (e^nt
^aen, tie
t. X)ie
:u^t t>ort
ifc^t, btti?
Iter i^rer
jcnfd)to^,
:ft)te: tie
ttjic bag
i)Ott ^ier
Wlamxn
kttic ben
feltfamen
!2on)e ift
;ett jie^en
toerebet, unb tvo fru()cr bie t)crrlirf)jlen (Siemnlbe prongten, fctieint
ie^t bfc nacfte SJiauer burd^. t)cx Sajaarunc frf)Iaft iinter bcm
53ogengangc, bcffcn gu^tobcn friiher nur bcr t)urnel)mfic 5lbel
bctrcten burfte. 5tug bent tiefen Srunnen obcr ami) ijieUeic^t and 40
ben ($)efangniffen bei ber ©eufjerbriide tont 3ammer, roie ,m ber
3cit/ als bad 3;ambourin au^ ben bunten ®onbc(n erfc^otl, aU ber
53rautring \)on bem j^Ianjenbcn 53uccntoro jur SIbrIa ^inunterflog,
aur 2lbria, ber ^^nigin ber mmt, Slbria ! ^uUe bic| in 5^e()el !
Sa^ ben 2Bitwcnfcl)leier beinen S3ufeu i3cr()iillen, l)ange il)n iiber46
bag ?0^aufoleum beineg S3rautigam{J : bag nmrmorne gefpenftige
^jnebig."
V.
KotI|fd?tIb,
„3(^ tt)ia bir ein 33ilb aug ^'^ranffurt Itcfern/' [agte ber mont).
„^cfonberg ein (SJebaube &etrad)tete ic^ bort, eg mx nici)t ©oet^e'g
©eburtg^aug, nic^t bag alte S^iat^aug, biirc^ beffen gegitterte genfter
bie ge^ornten ©d^abel ber Deafen noc^ ^ervorragen, bie bei ber
.^aiferfronung gckaten unb preiggegeben tuurben ; nein, eg njar 5
ein biirgerlic^eg Jpaug, griin ange[trid)en unb eiufac^, na^e an ber
f^malen 3ubengaffe, eg war 3flot^fc^iIb'g ^aug.
3c^ blidte burc^ bie geijffnete I^iir, bie Sreppc war ^etl erleuc^tet,
Sebiente nttt brennenben ^er^en auf [c^wercn filbernen ^eu^tern
ftanben ba unb neigten fic^ tief locr ber alkn ^xau, bie auf cinem 10
2;ragfejyet bie 3:reppe l)inunter gebrad)t wurbe. T)tx 33efi^er beg
^aufeg ftanb mit entblo^tem ^opfe unb brittfte e^rerbietig einen
^n^ auf bie ^anb ber ^llten. (£g war feine ^JJutter, fie nicfte ii)m
unb ben 35ebienten freunbli(^ gu, unb fie fii(}rten fie in bie enge
bunHe ®ajfe in ein fieineg Jpaug; eg war i^re 2Col)nung; biens
batte fie i^re J^Hnber geboren, »on ^ier aug war il)r (31M aufge=
blii^t J wpUte fie bie ijerac^tete ©ajfe unb bag Heine ^aug yerlaffen,
428
^er Oiir*
[o n)urt)c bad (^li'uf auc^ fie verlaffen ! Tai wax nun i^r Wlaiibe."
20 — Tcr 'iJJiout) fvjiiljlte wcitcr nict)td; gar ju fuq war fein 53e[u(t)
^eutc Slbcnt) ; ic^ aber tacbte an tie altf ^van in ter eugcn, tterad)-
tetcn ®affe ; nur c i n SJurt, unt il)r glua^^entecf fyawi flante an
tcr I^cmfe; nur cin 5Bort unt> it)rc SDilla lage am (i)oIf »on
9leapel.
25 „5Qcnn ic^ t)a« geringc ^aud tterlic§c, au« bem ta« C^Mud
• meiner ®ij()ne cm|jorbIi'tt)tc, t)a iwiirbc tad ©liicf fie oerlajfen ! "
— Sd tjt ein 5lbcrfllaube; abcr tjon tcr 5(rt, t)a§, a"-"n man tie
©efdii^tc fennt unt tad 33ilt crblicft; swci JCorte aid Unterfc^rift
geniigcn, y m ed ju i)crpc()cn : „S i n e ^ u 1 1 c r."
, VI.
Der Bar.
(5d war in cincm ^roijinsialflattc^en, fagtc tcr iB^iont, frcilic^
ttjar ed im ocrgangcncn 3a^re, abcr tad t^ut nic^td ^ur ©acbc, ic^
fat) ed fet)r teutUc^ ; ^eute 5lbent lad id) in ten Beitungen ta»on,
aber ta war ed lange nic^t fo teutlic^ : 3" tcr (S^aflftubc faf tcr
5 33arenfii{)rcr unt af fein 5lbentbrot ; ter 33ar ftant traupcn l)inter
tern ^olsflo^c angebuntcn, tcr arme ft^, tcr nicmant ctwad ju
Icitf t()at, obwo()t er grimmici Qtnvi^ audfa^. ^htn in ter Dac^*
lammcr fpiclten in mcinen 8trablcn trei ficiw .ttnter; tad altcflc
moc^te fcd)d ^aljvt alt fein, tad jiungfte ni^t me^r aid jwei.
lo^Iatfc^; !(atf(i^! fam ed tic Zvtppe. t)inauf; wer fonntc tad wol)t
fein? X)ie 3:{)iir fprang auf— ed war ter ^e|, ter gro^e aottige
^ar! Sr ^attc 2angcwcilc gcl)abt iinten im ^ofc unt I)atte nun
ten 3Gcg jur 2:re))pc l)inauf gefuntcn; id) l)abc aUi^ gcfct)en,
fagtc ter ^OZont. X)ic .Winter erfc^raten fe^r iibcr tad gro§c
15 jottige Jier ; Jetcd frod^ in feinen Sinfet, er enttccftc fie abcr adc
tret unt befc^niiffcUe ftc, t^at i^ncn abcr nic^td ju Icitc. „t)a&
ifl gewip ein grof er ^unt," ta(^ten fie, unt tann fircic^cUcn fie
^imnteliffi^Iuflel.
429
n ^efuct)
I, tjerad)-
fliinbe an
i)oIf »on
a« (5Mucf
rlajfen ! "
man t)tc
lUcrfc^rift
5ad)c, i(^
t fa^ t>cr
icn l){ntcr
etiua^ ju
er ©ac^==
fl^ altefle
t)a5 n?ol)l
pc jottige
jatte nun
9efe()en,
fl^ gro§e
a^er ade
:. „t)a&
^elten fte
Urn; er Uc\k fid) auf t>eu gugbotcn, >?cr flcinftc 3uniie fJettcrtc auf
i()n ^inauf unt) fpie(t« mit fcincm j^oltdorfic^cn ^upfrfjcn ^2>Ciflci?en
in bem Vic^ten fc^jvarsen fti^. ^e^t na^m tcr altef^c .^nabe feine 20
Irommel ur\t> fc^Iug tarauf, tap e« tro^ntc ; ter S5ar ert)ob flc^
auf ben ^Interfiipen nnt ftng an ^u tanjen; e« n?ar aUerliebjl
ansufil)cn. 3et)cr ^nabc nai;m |e^t fein ®ettjet)r, auc^ ber S3ar
mupte eind ^aben, unt) er ^telt C(5 rcc^t orbentlid) fefl ; c(8 ttjar ein
prac^tii^er ^amcrab, ben fie gefunbcn l)atten; unt) bann marfd)ierten 2b
fie: „C£ing, ^tvei, (§,mi, ^ujei!"—
Da griff jemanb m bic Zt^ux, fie ging auf, e^ mv bie SKutter
bwr jlinber. Du i)attcfl fie fctjen foUen, i^ren lautlofen @djrec!
fel)cn, bag freibetuei^e ®efid)t, ben ^albgeiJffneten ^unb; bie flieren
2Iugen. 5lber ber f (einfle 3unge nicf tc [celenyergniigt unb rief ganj so
laut in feiner ©prac^e : „2Bir fpielen nur ©olbaten!"— Unb
bann tarn ber 33arenfiU)rcr !
VII.
fjimmelsfdjluffeL
Der ^eilige ^etrud ()attc einmal au^mart^ su t^un, barum fleUte
er ben S|erub mit bent grof en ^^lammenfc^ttjcrt an^ ^immzUt^ov
unb fprad^ : „U^ niemanb herein, aU mx einen (S(^Iit|fel mitbringt
unb fclbft auffci)liegt; benn alien 9)^eufct)en, bie ^eute fterben foKen
unb in ben ^immel ge^orcn, njerbe id^ einen J^immeUfd[)IiiffeI 5
fenben. Unb wer feinen @d)liiffel t)at, gel)ort nic^t in ben JpimmeL"
9?ad)bem er bas gefagt ^atte, ging er fort.
a^ (cbten nun auf ber Srbe ein clter $?otfe nameui? 3iirgen unb
fein 2Ceit), bie tt?o()rien in nnm fleinen, blanfen Jpau^c^en, m
man auf bie Dime ^inau^faf) unb bag Tim branben ^orte. Dort 10
3urit(f, bag fel)r gliidlic^ war, benn fic Hebten fid) innig, l^atten
430
$itnmcl0f4lufjeU
{mmer ?cit) unt) Srcutc ^ufammen ^ftra^en unt) cinattber nie eitt
bofe« ftOort gefnqt. Unt |c alter fie wurtcn, tefto iuniger licbten
isfie ffc^ unt) teflo jncl)r Ijingen ftf am £ebcn. |(
®erat»e an tern lai^c, tc. tcr ^ciligc '•Petru^J nici^t im ^immcl
war, fut)lte tcr altc SiJi^^^fn^ ^^^ cr fterbcn miiffe, unb a wurte
i^m fc^r fc^auT, wic oft cr and? ^wif^cn t>ett 5CcUen tern lot) itii
Slugc gcfcl)aut t)atte. „?fb' wol)\, VA^i& 5Bcib," fagtc er traurig,
<>o„le6'»ot)I unti auf 3Cietierfel)cn!" Tanx: tjcrlor cr bad ^^cwu^tfcin.
9la(^ cincr JBeile offnctc cr noc^ cinntal tic ^lucjen unt) fprac^ nttt
fc^ioac^cr ©timmc : „Vu ! . . . bring mir t»a3 gvOpc 9lc^ ^cr, t)a(5
mill ic^ mitnc^mcn, tenu cincn ?otfen brauc^en fic im J^immcl
nid)t; aber wain t)cr liebe ®ott bovt, ta§ fc^ mtc^ auc^ aufd
25gifd)cn oerftcl)c, »crn>cntct cr mic^ tiel!lcid)t aU ^immcldfi|'d)cr,
tenn 'iJJJii^iggang giebt'a im ^Immel nic^t." '£)ann fcuf^te cr cin
Ic^tcd ^al unt) (tarb.
Slid cr gcftovbcn mar unt) fic^ cben auf 'tin 2Ccg nad) tcm
^immcl mac^cn moUtc, fam cirt (Snc;lcin flcflogen, brac^te cincn
sogoltcncn (Sd)liiffct uiib fagtc: „Sinen f^oncn ®ru§ torn Ijciligcn
^ctrud, unt) er ^dttc (jeratc bcutc aucimartd 3U t()un; tarum
modUet ibr nur felbft bad -'pimmcidtl)or auffc^Uepcn unt o^nc
Umftanbe cintrctcn.''
Dcr altc 3«i'i^f" banftc unt ftccfte ten Jpimmeldfc^IuflfcI in fein
ssSBamd, tann lut cv tad fd)n?erc 5^c^ auf tie ©c^uUcrn unt btQann
tic brcitc SJolfenftva^e binauf^uftcigcn. Stuf tcm ^egc fc^autc cr
immcr urn unt fprad) bei fic^ : ./^J^einc Slltc mirt gemi^ bait
nad)tommcn, tcnn fic iibcrlcbt mcinen 3:ot nid)t langc." Sr
gclangtc aber toc^ bid and gro^c ^'^immeldt()or, o^nc ta§ i^m
ioicmant nad)gcfommen ware, unt ta cine Ijoljerne f^cint ta»or
jiant, warf er tad ^(^ auf ten Sutcn, fe^tc ftc^ nietcr unt
wartete. Denn cr molltc nid)t ot)ne fein 2©cib in ten Jpimmcl
cittgetiett unt tac^te: „Senn fic ^erauffommt unt fie^t tad pra4>J'gc
2:^or, gctraut fic ftc^ oicUeic^t nic^t aufjufd^liegcn."
^tmmcl0fd)luffe(.
431
@fii biUiertf nidjt laiii^c, fo fal) er jiMiutnt>, t)fr fid) inii^fam fcic.s
©trapc l)prauffd)lcpt)te; c^ luar intccJ iiU-^t feln SiJcib, foutcrn f{n
©olt)at, eiii noc^ iunacci, frifi^ed ?3l;'t, aUx mitten burd) t)ie 53rufl
gefc^offen. Gr fliiotc [ic^ aaf u-itt, it ©abol unt) flol)ntc bcl fcbem
@(^ritt, tenn tie 20imti.- branntc luic ^ciier. TO cr ans
^inmtimjov Qeian^k, foimte er nid)t ^inein, tveil cr reinciuo
^imme(i^fd)luJTeI t^atte. ta le()nte cr ftd) and It or, fd)Io§ bie
Slugen unt) 3ittertc am gaujen Seibe, benn eg war fc()r fait, unt>
ba« gicber fd)uttelte i^ii.
X;em alten 3ur(^en t^at U& ^m \mi), njie er il)n fat), unb er
bacltc : ,,®anft ^etriid t)at gett)i§ ocrgeffen, ba^ ber fo fc^neU jierben 56
ttJurbe, fonfl tiatte cr iljm iinm ^i»',.netdfc^luf]rel gefanbt. X)cnn
cin cl)r(td)cr ©olbat, bcr im offenen ^am))fe fattt, i3el)ort boc^ in
ben dimmer!"— Unb eg ver^telt ftd> auc^ wtrf(id) fo: bcm ^tm-
meleiVfovtner war c3 gan^ nub gar entfaKen, ba^ ber braoe ^rtegg*
mann ()eute flerben wiirbe; er ^at auc^ immer gar fo ^icl jn benfeneo
unb gu forgcn !
„3c^ njitt einmat bcm ^eiligen ^etrud ind ^anbmert grcifen/'
bac^tc ber gutmutige 3urgen unb erl^ob fid), gab bcm (Solbaten
fcinen cigcnen ©c^Iiiffel unb fprady: „®el)t nur (){uein, {()r l)abt'i3
notiger aU tc^, unb la^t cud) ijon ben dngcln ^immclebalfam auf 65
bieSCunbc traufetn!" //
3)cr eolbatbanfte unb fc^lop auf; auf bcr ®d)wetrc afecr wanbtc
cr |ic^ urn unb fagte : „2BoUt tl)r nic^t auc^ g(cic^ mitfommen ?"
Tia rfef ber gngcl mit bcm glammenfc^wcrt, ber Winter bem
I^orc (ianb: „^nv mv eincn ec^liiffcl l)at, barf ^crcin!" unb7o
fc^Iug bag Zf)ox 3u, bap eg frac^tc.
92ac^bcm bcr alte 3«rgen wteber etnc SBcilc gooartet ^attc, fa^
cr wirflic^ cin alk^, gebudteg SJiiittcrc^cn bie Bolfenftrape ^crauf-
ficigen unb erfannte, ba§ eg fein 2Gcib war. T>a (ief er %
cntgcaen, fc fc^nett feinc alten 33einc H)n tragcn wotttcn, Mnb76
umarmtc fie, unb bcibc frcuten ftd^ fe^r.
yf*.
432
^immclnfi^mifel*
I
„(^W gffif^ t)iucln!" fviv^te er, <iU cr t^^r <\m^ l)inaufvic()oIf'»tt
^rttte, „t>cim ciJ ijl fait nut) uiuuirfd) l)ier aufmu" Xa fie aber
^orte, ta§ er fcinen (Sc^Iujyet ^erfAcuft Ijcitk, mlite ftc nic()t
8ol)incin9el)cn, fonbcrn hit il^n, t>cn iljriijcn su iiel)meu. ©ic tinirc
ol)nct)ic^ miibe uitt) miipte »ort)cr tin iucuig aii^ritt)en, faiite fie,
Sr «a()m akr il)ren ^immel^frf)lu|jel nid)t; unt) fo Hic^en fie fccitc
augcn, fc0tcn ftc^ ncben einanbcr auf tie l}or3erne 33anf unt)
iDartetcn.
86 !Da fa^cn ftc ein ^inb :^crfomuicn, bad ^attc Monte ?oc!en unt
gro^c, blaue Slugen unt) ging im (Sterbel}enitcl)en. SD^it teni ^{pfel
t»e($ Jpembd)en0 trodnetc e(3 t)ic 3:t)rancn, tie il)m iiber bic ^acfen
linaMicfen.
„2lrmeS ^inb, nje^ijalb n^cinjl bu fo fet)r?" fragtc bic 5Ilte.
90 „SCctl ic^ ijon meincm Wattivdjcn l)at>e fort miiffen/' eranberte
ba0 ^ittb.
„^er licbc ^ott |at eg fo gcwom," fagtc bie ^Ilte, unb cr wirb
fc^ott nnjlen, tuarum. „Teg^)aIb lueine nic^t mcl)r, niein ^inb!
3c^ tviU bir au(^ eine Wlntkv fein, big beine njirnid)c SJiutter nad)-
95fommt. (3df nur gleic^ in ben ^inimet ()inein, bann befommft bu
cin faax fd)one, n?eipe giiigei unb anrft ein (Sngelein.— !Du {)aft
bo^ beinen ^immelgfc|liijfel nid)t oerloren?'' i
„(5r ifl mir au^ bcr ^anb gcfallen, unb {^ babe it ' ntc^t me^r
ftnben fihuien," fagte bag ,$ltnb unb begann aneber ^u njeinen.
100 2IIg bic 2Ute bag t)orte, nal)m ftc t()rcn eigr.cn ©c^liiffcl, f^Io^
bic 3;t)iir auf, unb bag ^inb ging in ben ^immel ein.
^a fagen fie nun, bie bciben Sllten, ne!en cinanber auf ber
^anf, unb feincg l^attc einen J^immelgfc^IiijfcL @g tvuvbe aber
9'Jad)t unb tt?ar jo ftnfter, ba^ fie ftd) fiir^tcten. Xann famen bie
106 (Sterne gcrotlt unb poUerten in ilbren ^abnen. Unb bie gutcn,
ttlten Scute tjcrlorcn ganj ben Mut unb bcgannen leife ^u tt^eincn.
$immcl!if4iufie(«
433
■v^C()0lf<'tt '
ftc aber
I'tc nid)t
5ic tviirc
ao^k fie,
[te bcitc
mi unt)
tfen itnt
111 3ipfel
jvanberte
cr Wirt
(I mnt)l
ter nad)*
mmft t)u
c^t me:§r
en.
auf ber
vbe afeer
imen bie
e autin,
ceincn.
5l6er ttcr licbc ©ott t)ortc auf feinem %i)xom t>05 SBeinen unt
fjjra.l; : „(Sl)crub, tuer tveint ijor t)cm Jptmmcl^t()orc?"
Da cqai)Ue i^m ber 6()erub toa^ gefc^c^en wax, bcnn er ^atte
atteg burd)^ (Sc^luffetloi^ mit angefe^cn. 511^ ber liebc ©ott bag no
\)ernal)m, ftieg cr f^ncU tjon feinem I^rone, fam felbfl and J^im-
mcIdtt)or unb ()ie§ bic bciben 2tlten cintreten.
Unb 3itrgcn ttjurbe ivirtlic^ ^immclgftf^cr, bcnn er l^atte fcin
9Je0 ni^t ttergeffen, fonbern in ben ^immet mit ^ereingenommen.
Da mu§tc er bie feurigen 1;^ranen bed ^eiligen Saurentiud, bic aU ii5
©ternf^nuvpcn im J^immetdraum um^erfc^mimmen, mit feinem
gro^en 9?c^e ftfc^en, bamit nid)t atlju ijiele auf bie Srbe ^inunter*
regneten.
9?a^ eincr 3fit bcmerfte aber ber liebc ®ott, ba§ bicfc 5(rbeit
fiir ben atten Wlann ^u :^art unb mii^coott war; be^tjalb rief eri2o
i{)n ju jtc^ in bie @d)ar ber 5lugeriva()(ten unb eriaubte i^m, eincm
i)on ben Sngletn, bie ju ^n^m bed gottlic^en 3:t)roned mufijieren,
ben gro^en 33rummba^ su l)alteu ; unb ba^J Snglein fpieltc noc^
ttiel' fc^i)ner aU »orl)ev, benn ed fonnie nun ben giebelbogen mit
beiben ^anben fii^ren ivie cine (Sage. Da fam fii^ ber a(te 126
3iivgen gar wi^tig i)or unb fprad) oftmald ^u feinem SBeibe:
„^aU i^ bir'cs nic^t immer gefagt? ^Jiu^iggang giebt'g im
^immcl nic^t!" —
Der golbene ^immeUfd)Iiiffet aber, ben bag arme «Kinb tjerloren
^atte, war burc^ bie SCoIten auf cine griine SBiefe ^inabgefatlen. i30
Dort tjerwanbelte er fii^ in eine fleine, gelbe 33hime, bie itberall
blit^t, wo gute ^enfd)en wo{)nrn. Unb wer bie S3(ume fte()t,
yergigt fiir eincn 5lugeublid \oa^ ii)n bcbriicft, unb traumt Don
eincr fd)i3neren 3«f"«ft.
><
434
^aS eifcrne llreu).
VTir.
Das etfcrnc l{rcu5.
@tiva ein 3iit)»^ "^f^ 53ecnt»J4U.n(5 "tjci bciit[c^«=fran5i)rifci)en ^riege^
flc^t einnial ein pommerfd)er (l)ut0()crr an einem ^orgcn unter
[eincn Ivbcitcru anc^ einen pcmil 3;agcli)()ner, fcer ^a3 eifcrne
^reua auf ter S3ruft ()atte. 51(3 gcierftunbe iuar, ruft er i()n ; vin't>
sbamit ber manlfaulc ^ommer an^ 9iet)Ctt fDmmt, giebt er il)m juerft
etma^ Drtentlic^e^ in tien ^DJagen, bcnn 'tann fiingt bie ^iit)Ic an
gu kufcn.
X)a fragtc er i^n benn, tuie er ^itm eifcrnen ^reu^ gefommen fei.
„^a/' meintc ter ^ommer, „tiajj i[t einc langc ©cfc^ic^tc — benn
10 id^ l^abe e0 »om ;^5nig 2ffiiU)cIm fclber gefriegt uxCo jiuar fiir^
6in()auen."
I)arauf t^ut tcr Rummer einen <S(^Iucf am t)em ^ruge unb
erja^U bann weiter :
Sg njar nac^ t»er ©(^kc^t »on ($(^nn1pign9, in ber bie SBiirt-
i5temberger [ic^ fo hxa'o unb topfer gcluilten fatten unb nur »on
ber Ufeffm^t guriirfgebrangt tuurbcn. T)(i tt)irb feci «n^ gum
Sloancieren gefclafen. ?0^eine ^'ompngnie mii§tc au^fc^warmen,
unb ic^ fudjtc uiir Derfung, ba^ id) bequem fd)iepen fonnte. „3e^t
gilt'g, 3ungen<5/' fagte unfer ^auptmann, aid bie grangofen
dimmer met)r l)erau<?famen, „bie miiffcn aufge()altcn werben, 'bi^
bie ^amerabctt l^eran fmb. ©c^ic^t gu, njad bad ^tuQ f)alt(n
Witt." 3^ [(^ittte meinc ^atronen t>or mic^ l)in, attc rcc^td, ba§ ic&
nur fo ^ugreifen 6raud)e unb fd)ie§e loi?. 1)a tommen akr immer
me^r grangofen t)evaud; bent Dberft ttjirb bie @a^c bebenflic^,
25 unb er lagt gum 3wi^«cf9fi)^« btafen. 3i^ V^^^ ^^^ — ^c"f^
a&er: „Sinpai!en bie patronen all' ift rtid)t angenet)in, unb Hegen
lajfen ba0 liebe ®ut fannft bu and) ni^t— alfo bu lii^t ben ^erl
^aS eifcrne Itteuj.
435
unt)
Hafctt unt) Meibjl ^ier unb ttcrfc()ic9cfl bctne ^atronen, bann fannft
t)u bic^ immcr noc^ ^uf bic .^acfen macftcn." 3^ bir [o cbcn rcc^t
im @c^ie§cn, ba fommt unfer 5lbiutant ^ergcfprencjt unb f(^reit:3o
„^erlg, guriic!, ()abt jk benn feine D{)ren?" „5ld) m^," fag' i(^
unb bre^e mi^ fo l)a(kec^tg ()crum, „id) will nur evft bic ^atronen
oerfd)iepcn." Unb fort tuar ber ^Ibfutant, unb nidU^ mc^r su
fc^cn. Bulc^t "^tn ic^ gana allein gewefcn unb »or mtr atleg rot
oott granjofen, faum amanaig ®d)ritt wcit. 2Btc i(^ bic le^tcss
^atrone oerfd)ojTe«. ^^ ^f^ff ^^) • //^"« <*^f^ ^P'^ ^^^^ 3«it» ^^^^
bu bid) tvegmad)ft." 3c^ ne()mc alfo bie ^a^^n unter bic 53cine
unb fpringc njic cin ^irfc^ l)inter bent JRegimcntc ^cr. T)ic
granaofcn fd)ojycn mir nac^, bag war cin ^agelwetter, akr atlc^ s«
^od^, unb id) fontmc ganji ntuntcr beim 9iegimcntc an. 2Cic i(^40
eintrctcn mU, fc^ ic^ ben ^^bjutanten mit bem DBcrflen ^arlicrjn
unb ntit bcr ^anb aufmic^ beutcn. Da benf i(^ : „5l^a--ic^t
gicbt'g toa& in bic ^rcibc »on tvegcn bcm ^^lic^tpariercn." ij
Unfcr Dberft ttjar cin frcuaBrattcr ?f??ann, bcr fommt auf mic^
jugcrtttcn unb lac^t iibcr baiJ ganjc ©cfti^t unb fagt : „^txl, (inb 45
beinc ^noc^en no^ allc bei cinanber?"
„Sn Sefet)I, ^crr Dberftl" fagc id).
Da lac^t cr wicbcr unb fagt : „yia, ^crl, ba fannfl bu mc^r aU
S3rot cffcn."
3d) bcnfc: „^a— bic^mal ifl bie ©a^c glatt abgelaufcn unbeo
bcm 5lbfutantcn fcinc ^laufc^crci ^at boc^ nid)tg genit^t."
Da ^ei§t'g am folgcnben Stag ^I6^ti(^ : „(Scine 5J?afcflat bcr
."^onig fommt."— 9la— bag war fo cine grcubc, aU bcr altc ^crr
fam. (5r ful)r ijorbci, unb ic^ ^attc mir fd)on dn paax ^artoffctn
tierma^rt, benn t^ t)attc cincn ^eibcnmafigcn hunger. Da fommtss
plofetid) unfer ^tbiutant auf mid) krangefprcngt unb fagt, ic^ folic
auf ber SteUc ju Seiner 5]'iajeftat fonimen.
Sfla, i(^ benfc, ber ©^lag foil mid) riit)ren, aber ic^ fammic
436
2!oS cifcmc ^rcuj*
ml^ wfcbcr unv fagct ,,3u SSefe^I ! 3(^ ^abe ja nic^ts 236fc0 Be
eoganaen."
X!cr 5lt>iutflnt grinfle abcr fo mit bcm ©efldfjte, als njotltc cr
fagcn: „2Barte, ^erl, nun ^abc i^ bi(^ gcfriegt fitr tag S'lid^t-
pariercn, tu foCfl bo^ nic^t fo lei^t nje^fommcn." 3c^ tiaU
wa^r()ofHg ntd^t getacfot, taf cin ?0?enfd) [o ^intert)aUii5 fein fann.
86 5llfo mir [!nt> tie 33eine luacfetig, unb id) irerbc fo in ein ^aug
gcfii^rt \tn'i> banit in einen ©aal, ta ^afg gcroc^en, bap einem bag
SCaffer im ^aut aufammengelaufen ift, fo gut.
3c^ bcnfc eben : „9la, n?er ba mitcffett fonnte/' ba mu§ ic^ f^on
ing 5^ebcn3immcr. 3e^t fommt ber J^ijnig auf mid^ ju wnb ifi fo
7ofrcunbIi^ ttjic bie liebc (Sonne unb fagt: „5}?ein ©o^n, ttJie ioax
benn bic ©efc^i^tc geflcrn mit ben ^atronen ? (ix^ai)k mir einmal
aOcg mag bu meift, ganj gena'\"
„3u S3efel)I, 5}?aieftat/' fage id), unb erja^Ic fo atlcg gerabe
njie'g gen?efen i% unb ba§ i^ bag (Signal n)ot)I ge()ort, aBer bag
Tsliebe ©ut nid^t pttc liegen lajfen luotlen, unb mie ber Slbjutant
ge!ommen unb gef^vieen ^atte: „3uriic!, ^ertg!"— ba ^atte id)
atlerbingg geglaubt, ba§ feine 3eit ^um ^om^jlimentmad^en fei, unb
pttc fo gefagt: „%d) wag— ic^ i)erfrfne§e crfl meine ^atronen.
Dag ifl bag ©anje gemefen, ^err ^iinig, tueiter ^ab' ic^ nic^tg
80 i)crbro(^en»"
Da (ad)te ber ^i)nig iiBer bag ganjc ©eftci^t unb fagte: „Dag
^afl bu feraij gemac^t, mein @o|n." 3c^ benfe: „5^a— nun ifl'g
gut, nun mag ber Slbjutant fagen, ivag er njitt." Da fragt mid)
©einc ^riajcjlat: „^a|t bu fc^on ^u SHittag gegejfen, mein (BoljnV
86 „3u 33efc^I, (Sure maU^'dt ! " fag^ i^, M ^^n nod) jlodnitd^tern/'
„Du l^ajl tt>ol)l tiid)tigen hunger?" fagte Seine mait^'dt weiter.
„3a/' fag' i^, „unb ber Durfl ift and) nid)t fd)red)t."
Da lac^te ber ^iinig Jwieber iiberg gan3e ©efic^t unb fagte, id)
foUc mitejfen. //
^a0 ctfcrnc Itreu).
437
3c^ fe^e mtc^ benit an ben fd^oncn, grofen Jifc^ mit at(* ben 90
l^o^cn J^erren unb (3tmxaU. Da tvar ©uppe, Srbfenfuppe, akr
nic^t tton ber 33er(tner SrbiJwurfi. (S^ war abcr bcr letter nur
l)alb ooU, bag ic^ bac^te: „333enn bu uur me^r 'oon ber ©uppc
l^aben fonntefl."
2l(g i(^ fafl fcrtig rt>ax, rief ber ^ijnig ^criiljer : ,MW^^ i*" 95
nod) ttwa& (Suppe i^aben, mein ®o^n?"
„3« 33efe^I, (Sucr SJiaieftaV fagc i^ ^ttjcnn noc^ cin M^cfeen
ba ijl."
2)a lac^ien bit ^erren, unb eincr toon ben ^ammerbienern
brac^te mir no(^ [0 cimn ZtUtx tooH. ^err, bic ©uppe fc^mecft mirioo
^eutc no(^ gut im ^alfe !
T)a fommt bann Siner therein unb kingt einen ^alb^bratcn,
fajl fo C(ro§ ttJte ein Dc^fenyiertel, unb ein anberer nimmt fo ein
grof eg Wlt^ix unb fa&elt ^crunter tmmer ein ©tiicf auf bag anberc
auf etncn gro§en Shelter. 105
„^a/' benfc t(^— „ber »erfte^fg [d)on bejfer aU ber mit ber
©uppc."
X)er groge Metier fommt an mic^ juerfl, unb id) ne()me tl)n ijor
mid^ unb bann auc^ fo ein ^[fiettc^en mit .^artoffeln baju. 3c^
benfe jttjar: „(Sg i[t ein bi^^en toiel, aber bu barffl bii^ :^icr nid^t no
lumpen taffen," unb ejje ju. Die i)eUen Xropfen finb mir auf ber
©time geftanben, Big bie ^appc^en atle gegejfen njaren. SBic icb
bcnn nun fertig mar, unb ber ^evr nebcn mir f^enfte immer tapfer
cin, ba§ tc^^g gut t)erunterfriegte, fragt mi(^ ©eine DIJJaieftat ber
^onig: „2Bic ift'g, mein ®obn, mod)teft bu noc^ met)r ^aUnV 115
3«^ fage : „3u 33efe()(, ^J^ajeftat, mmi no^ ein U^^^n ba ift."
Da (ac^ten alie J^crren an^ ijoUcm ^alfe, unb and) @eine ^afefidt
fagte : ,,'^cm, eg ift gut fiir I)eute, mein (Sobn, je^t fotf ein anbereg
®cvic^t fommeu." 120
438
9lmiima*
^ia, id) wax frol), ta§ (.& mit bent ^albcibratcn aUt tear, unb
tenfe: „2Cag mvt) nun fommcn?"— t»a tritt cin l)ot)er Offigier mit
©d^niiren auf ten Sc^ultern an mic^ l)cran unt) ^ncjt mir ba«
eifcrne ^rcnj an.
125 2Bie ic^ wicbcr bei meinem Stcgimentc anfomme, ta lac^tc tcr
Sltijutant ttJieter libera i^an^e ©efic^t unt) fcrct)te fcincn ©ciinauabart
l)ernm unt gab mir t>ic Jpanb. 3rf) freute mic^, tap cr tvieber gut
tt)ar, unt» feine ^(aufd)erei bei 2)iajeftat fl)m torb nid)t3 cjenu^t unt)
ic^ fiir^ Sinl)auen an bcr lafcl auc^ noc^ bat? eifcrne ^rcus »on
.80®ciner SOcajeftat felbft gctriegt i)attc.
©0 tp e^ iiefommen unt nid}t anter«. —
IX.
ZTtcottana.
X;ic ticfc SBtrtin flanb, mit einer fc^nccnjci^cn (Bd^iirjc anget^an,
i)or tcr 3:i)iir ter 2CaIt)fdbenfe. !I^ie ?infe ^attc fte in tic (Scitc
gcflemmt, au^ tcr SflcAtcn aber ma(^te fie cin ^Dad^Iciu fiir tic
5(ugcn, an^ tcncn fie fc^arf au^Iugtc, ob nic^t ©ape m^ tcr (£tatt
5im Sln^ugc fcicn. 5lbcr auf tent 2Beg, tcr fic^ turc^ SBogen
rcifenbcr M)vm teit ^iigct t)crauf^og, jvar fcine ?0?enfd)cnfceIe
^u cnttccfcn. ©g h?ar cin fd)a>iilcr ©ommcrnad)mittag, unt tie
@tattlcute fiirc^tetctt n)oI)I tie fc^tvarjblaucn SBolfcn, tie fid) itbcr
ten be»t)i»Itctett ^itgcln a>ic cin mad)tigeg ©cbirgc aufgctiirmt
10 l)attcn.
Sbcn iwoflte tie mi^mutige SQBirtin in tag ^nntve teg ^aufeg
guriidfel)rcn, dU smifdKu ten ^ornfcltcrn cine flcinc ©cflalt ftd^tbar
a^urte, judd)c auf tie ©d^cnfe 5ufd)ritt. ;Dcr 5ln!i)mmling tuar cin
lunged 33iirfd)d)cn von l)od)ftcng ijicrjclm 3a^rcn. @r trug ciiip
i5bunte SKi'tt^c auf tcni braunen J?rau£!fopf unt fcibivang eiucii
fnotigcn 8tcif in tcr 3lcd)tcn. 3©iirtcooU griipent l)iclt er fciuni
Dttcotiana*
430
jar, unb
^\tx mit
niir ba^
icl)tc ter
taujbart
eber gut
u0t unt
iget^an,
ic ©cite
fiir t)ie
r Stabt
SBogcn
i)enfeelc
unb bie
d) itber
getiirmt
jtd^tBar
wax ein
I eiueii
Sfn^ug, fuc^te f!t1j int ©artcn t)intcr bcm ^au3 efnen fd^attigcn
W^ unb bcfieate SBtcr.
Die SCirtin brac^te bag ^Jcrlanj^tc unb fat) Iad)crnb ^n, toit lev
®afl mit (^ro^tv Umfianblic^feit cine (a^tgc Xabafgpfeife 3ufam*2o
ntcnf^raubtc unb fte ftopftc. X)ic ^feife mt mit buntcn Ouaflcn
gcjiert unb auf bem g)or3ctIanfo))f mv bcr ^ijnig ®ambrinng
abgemalt, 5Dic SGirttn fe^te ben fc^aumenben Sicrfrug auf ben
lifc^, fa^tc: „2Bol)l bcfomm'g/' unb lifp bann ben 53urfc^cn bei
^feife unb 9J?a^frug aaein , bag mar i^m eben rcrf)t. ' Sr t§at25
einen tud^tii^en ©c^lucf, bann flcmmte er ben (iabogen auf bcit
2ifd^ unb qualmte n?ie ein (Sc^Iot. Unb wie cr fo bafa§ unb [ic^
iibcr bic Stauc^molfen freute, vie empornjirbelfm unb in Maulic^ca
©treifen fi^ ijer^ogen, Urn fid) ber ^nitpi fo ert)aBen \>ox, ttjie
Siii^ auf feinem SOoIfenttjron. so
3e^t entflieg bem ^fcifenfojjf ein ivunberfc^oner bfauer min^d,
Slber er aerflo^ nid)t, njie bag fonf^ ju gefc^e^en pflcgt, fonbern er
i)erbi^tete fic^ ^u einem 5^ebelfnaul unb ttjurbe grofier unb immer
grower; bann tnlk ftc^ bic 2Bolfe mie ein ?5enfieri3or^ang, unb »or
bem erjlaunten ^naben ftanb eine aierlic^e SJJabd^engeflalt, etmass
eine Sttc ^o^.
!Dic ^leinc trug tin ^attanafarbeneg ^ledfc^cn unb in ben brau=
nen Sodfen ein 3)iabem »on 33ernftein, an ben (Sc^ultern r)atte fie
citt ^aar gliiget au^ eigaretten)japier unb in ber ^anb ^ielt fie
cine blii^enbc Jabafg^flanjc. 40
2)ag nicblid>e ^fJiabc^en fnirte, unb ber 33urf^e 309 ^ofli^ feinc
S^ulic. T)ann t()at bic ^(eine i^ren ^JZunb auf unb forac^ :
„3^ Un bic 2abafelfc 9?icotiana. min ^err unb ©ebietcr,
^iinig ^naf^er ber ®elbc, feubet mid) 3U euc^. 3()r ()abt iOin
^tnk sum erflen mal ein 33ranbopfer 9ebrad)t, unb ber muc^45
luifs vjimiDi'S t)t Dig 3u il)m gcbrungen. (*r entbietct cuc^
feincn ®ruf unb labt cuc^ ein, ijor feinem J^ron au crfc^einen.
<5eib i^r QcwiUt, mir ju folgen, fo witl i^ euc^ ju ^ofe aeleiten." / /
440
9{tcotiana,
60
Zix ^mU tvar tin te^er^tcr S3urf(^e, iinb t>a« 9lkntcuer toav
Boganj na^ fcincm ©inn, tarum fprac^ cr ol)ne ^i^Qf^^" ifW ^^^^^
fein 33icr au^ unb ertldrte flc^ fiir reifefculg. „^aU i^r tticHcic^t
einen Drac^cntuagcn ^ur J;anti, ?^ran(ein 9?icotiana?" fragte cr.
„9?cin, ten traud)t'^ ntd)t/' ewiterte tic (SIfc. „3d) ^a6c, wic
3br fel)t, ?5lit(^el, nnt) unig euc^ antctrifft, fo ifl and) Iciest gc^ot-
66 fen. <Bc^t end) nnr rittling^ auf (Encr ^fcifenro{)r unb fa^t bic
Ouoflen nnc tic 3»^ft fi»f^ ^fertc^. 8o ijt'e! rcd)t. 5'^nn gc&t
ad)t nnt i^evlievt nid)t tag ^leid)gewid)t. @i^t i^r feft?"
/»3<i/ S^anlein ?f?icoHana."
^ic SIfc f^ttjang il)ren 33IiitenflcngeI nnt fang :
„Vtx <Sd)nlt)nb\ jnm 3flan(^en noc^ nic^t rcif,
@tiet)(t fctnem 5Bater tic Jiabaf^pfeif
Unt crgij^t ft(^ fc^r
■Winter tcr <Stattmauer
SBci einer ^fcif 3:abaf."
Xtx Spott i)erbro§ ten innc^en 53nrfc^en; unt cr l^atte am
licbften anf tag 5Ibentencr gana -Ccqic^t gcleiftct, akr ter gnt*
fc^ln§ tarn ^n f)jat. SBic cine anffliegente ^ra^c cr^ob fi^ tic
2;aba!g^fcifc, anf m\dm cr rittlingg fa§, nnt fort ging'g turc^ tic
Snft tvie SBintegfanfen. !Die Slfe f(og tvegtveifcnt ijoran.
70 5lnfang0 i)ieU jic^ ter JRcitcr tapfer, aU cr aber ^on nngcfa^r
auf tic Srtc binabfc^antc nnt fa^, n)ic SCatter nnt Sicfen, @tattc
nnt l^orfer nnter i^m t)tnglitten, ta begann eg tt)m ft^winteUg ju
tucrten, nnt franipf^aft nmtlammertc cr tic ©pi^e fcincr ^feife. —
O tu »ertDunfd)tcg 5lbcntcncr !
75 SCciter ging tic toUe ?nftfa()rt, immer wetter nnt immer '^o^cr.
3e^t famen fte an cine 2Gonenfd)i(^t, nnt sanir njaren eg ZahaU*
ttjolfen, tag fpitrte man am ®ernc^.
„Salt fint wix gur Stellr/' fprac^ tie @Ife, „nnr WlntV Unt
tamit gtng'g in ten Cualm t)inein, ta^ nnfer 5lbenteurcr jtt
80 crjiicfcn »crmcintc. 3itternt unt bcbent fd^Iop cr tic Slugcn.,
65
9lic0tiano*
441
tcucr ttjar
3a/' tranf
agte cr.
I Mi, tt)ic
lb fapt bic
S'^un ge&t
4t
ptte om
ter (Snt-
o'6 fi^ tie
3 turc^ t)ie
t ungcfa^r
en, (Stattc
nnbelig ju
^feife,—
titer '^o^er.
!0 2:abaf^*
t!" Unt>
tteurer jtt
iu^en.,
50a rief t)ie m^min: „^aUl" utCt) »ie ein geWultc* «Hog MieJ
We 2:a6afi?pfeife mit i^rem JHefter (Ic^en.
Der ^xmt offnete bie Slugen. 25or i^m faf auf ciner riefl0en
ZaMixoUt StonxQ ^nafler. (Sein 2lntli0 mx gebraunt »ie ange-
rauclter S^eerfc^aum, gclb njar fein 9r?antel, auf tern ^aupte trug er £6
eine Jlrone au« ^arfunfeljleinen, wie lebenbige ^o^Ien anjufc^auen,
unb 3tt)if(^ctt ben 3a^nen Wt er eine mad^Hae Stak!i3»)feife, beren
^opfnjieeinJ^od^ofenglii^te.
,,@ei gegruft!" fprac^ ber ^onig au bem Slnfommling, ber j!(^
»or ©^wtnbel unb Slngfl faum noc^ auf ben -Seinen ^alten fonnte.w
„X)tin mxkt ^o|e e^re. 3^ ^aU bic^ a« meinem 5)feifenftoj)fer
erforen/' i » i m
9«{t biefen SCorten ergriff ^nafler ber ©erte ben aitternben
Sungen beim ©(^opf unb mt m f^wefeenb iiber feinen qual-
menben ^feifenfo»)f. ^er ©epeinigte mUtt fd^reien, aber SRau^ofi
unb ^i^e fd^Ioffen i^m ben mnnt>i er metnte, fein le^te^ ©tiinblein
fei gefommen.
3:)a auf einmal brang ^n feiner ««afe ein lieMid^er 2)uft tt)ie »on
fr{f(^ gebranntem ^affee. Sl«^ ^o„ig ^„a|ier fc^ien ben ®eruc^
wa^raune^men, benn er lieg bie |)anb, njelt^e ben ^feifenjlopfer loo
^ielt, jlnfen unb n^anbte fein ©afic^t nac^ ber ^ic^tung, i)on j»etAer
ter Duft promte. ^
„^eine geinbin, bie gee SWoffa !" murmerte er ingrimmig.
eine Blaulid^e SCoIfe, bie parfenben SCo^Igeru^ tjerkeitete
mutt ^eran, unb auf ber SCotfe \a^ eine fc^iine, fc^maragefleibete 105
5rau mit fanft Micfenben Slugen. 3n ber |)anb trug jle einen
flropen, ftrberncn ^affeeliiffel.
.Wt tin I" rief bie gute gee. „Mt tin, graufamer ^onig
""* ^'-'" ^Fici (icyi unrer meinem v^^u^."
@ie Berii^rte ben ^rm beg ^iJ„igg mit bem (SilBerBffel j bie 110
^ciujt, bie ben @c^o))f be^ Surf^en ge^alten ^atte, offnete ftt^, ««b
442
$er (9olbtiautn«
fopfiiber, fopfunter ftiir^te ticfcr in bie fAtt>inteInbe Xiefe, ba§ i^m
^oren unt @cbp»* ttfrgiiii
Sr fd)lug ^art auf aU cr unten att*nm Mnt> t)tt« brac^te i^n
ii5n>lcber ju Sefinnung. !Danf cinem C|iu.ft!'d)en Bwf^^tl njar er an
bcrfelbcn ©tcOc nieDerf^cfluqt, »ou ttjdcfjer er ntit bcr GIfc -Hico-
tiana aufgcflogcn ttjar. 5Il« cr urn [Ic^ blicftc, fant) er fii^ unter
tern 3;ifd?, an bent er eine 55t?rtclfluntie juoor trinfcnb unt)
rauc^cnt) gefeffcn ()atte, neben i^m auf tern 3^ot)i:n la^ tie jer*
i2obro^cne ^feife. Sr froc^ unter bent Sifc^ ^^erttor unb ric^tete (ic^^
auf. 5lrme unb S3einc waren '^eil, aber unfdglid^ n?e^ n?ar e«
bent arnten aungen ju 9J?ut. i!Jiut)fetig \A)Upp\t er f!(^ bis su
bent naci^llen 33aum, an beffen Stamm er feine ntit 5lngflfc^n>et§
ubergojfene ©tirn le^nte.
126 3n ber I^iir bcr 2BaIbf(^enfe aber erfci^ien bie bicfe SBirtin,
eine raud^enbe (B6)aU in bcr J^anb t)altcnb. „Jpicr, jungcr J^err,"
fprac^ f!c mitleibig, ,M^t i^ 3^nen cine Za^t f^wargen ^affee
gelod^t. 3c=^ ^aU mir'S gleic^ geba^t, ba§ bie ®efc|ic^te ein fol(|e3
(Snbe ne^men wiirbc."
130 Unb ntilb la^elnb flo§te fie bem 3erfnirf(^tett ben f^warjen
Jranf ber S3eru^igung iiber bie bleic^en ?ippen.
X.
Der (Bolbbaum.
Das Gemach, in welchem unsre Geschichte beginnt, sah
sehr einfach und i^clitern aus. An den geweissten Wanden,
deren einzigen Schmuck ein paar vergilbte Landkarten bilde-
ten, standen zwei schmale Betten, ein Biicherbrett und ein
5 Kieiderschrank, auf welchem eine Erdkugei Platz geiunden
hatte. Die Mitte des Zimmers nahm ein langer, mit vielen
ir er an
fc DRico*
ii) unter
nit) unt>
vie jcr*
mar ed
^ Ms 3U
iflfc^njeif
SBirtin,
!r J^crr,"
in ^affcc
n folc^ed
c^warjcn
^cr ®oIb6aum*
443
int, sah
A^anden,
Bn bilde-
und ein
[eiunden
it vielen
Tintenklexeii gezierter Tisch ein, und an dem Tisch sassen auf
harteii HoizstUhlen zwei Knaben von etwa zwolf Jahren.
Der Blonde briitete iiber einer schwiorigen Stelle des Cor-
nelius Nepos und walzte seufzeud di*-^ sriiwere L dkon ; derio
Braune aber miihte sich, aus einer nrunstelligen Zahl die
Kubikwurzel zu ziehen. Der Piniwlogf hieas Hans, der
Mathematiker Heinz.
Zuweilen hob n die Knaben ihre ivopfe in » e Hohe und
blickten sehnsiichtig aach dem geoffneten Fenster, durchis
welches die Fliegen suramend ein- und ausflogen. Im Garten
lag goldener Sonnenschein auf Biiumen und 'lecken, und wie
zum Hohn blickte in bluhender Hollerzweig in das i^ nudier-
zimmer der beidcu HoflFi -ingsvoUen. Noch eine Stunde
mussten die Armen siti n uud schwitzen, b^vor sie in's Freie20
dui'^ten, ui I die Minuten schlicheii dahin e die Schnecken
an don Stachelbeerljiischen draussen im Garten. An eine
eigenmachtige Abkiirzung der Arbeitszeit war auch nicht zu
denken, den^i im Nebenzimmer sass am Schreibtisch der 'i;
Doktor Schlagentzwf ', dem die Knaben zur Zucht und Lehre25
iiberantwortet waren, md die Verbindunsrsthiir stand offen, so *
dass der Doktor sich zu jeder Zeit von der An ' esenheit seiner
Schu^zbefohlenen iiberzeugen und ihr Trei* en nberwachen
konrite.
„Hannibal hatte auch was gescheiteres thun koniien /iNgo
iiber die Alpen i ziehen," knirschte ffans, und „neunmai
einundachtzig ist siebeahundertneunundzwanzig," murraelCe
Heinz mit dumpfer Stimme. Dann blic ' ten sie beide von
ihrer Arbeit empor, schauten sich an und gahnten.
Plotzlich vernahmeu sie ein lautes Summen. Ein Gold- 35
kafer, der draussen auf -^em liolleibaum gesessen haben
mocntej hatte sich in's Zimmer verin " Dreimal schwenkte
I
444
2)er (iolbliaum.
er sich im Kreis um die Kopfc der Knalx^n, und dann —
plums — lag' er im Tintciifass.
40 „Eigentlich geschieht es ihm ganz reclit,** sagte Heinz,
„warum bleibt er nicht, wo es ihm gut geht. Aber in Tinte
ersaufen, das ist doch ein zu olender Tod. Wart', Kamerad,
ich werde dich retten."
^^^t. Er woUte dem zappelnden Kafer mit dem Stahlfederhalter
46aus der Tinte helfen, aber schneller vollbrachte Huns das
Rettungswerk mit dem Finger. Und dann trock iten die
Knaben den armen Sclielm sauberlich mit dem Loschblatt
- ab und sahen zu, wie er sich mit den Vorderfiissen putzte.
„Er hat einen roten Spiegel auf dem Brustschild
sound schwarze Horner," sagte Hans, indem er seinen tinten-
geschwarzten Finger am Haupthaar abwischte, „es ist der
Goldkaferkonig. Er wohnt in einem Schloss, das ist aus
Jasminbliithen gebaut und mit Rosenblattern gedeckt. Gril-
len und Heimchen sind seine Musikanten und Johanniswiirm-
66chen seine Fackeltrager." ||
„Du bist ein Faselhans," sprach Heinz.
„Und wer dem Goldkaferkonig begegnet," fuhr Hans fort,
„der ist ein Gliickskind. Gieb acht, Heinz, uns steht etwas
bevor, ein Abenteuer oder sonst etwas Absonderliohes, und
60 heute ist noch dazu der erste Mai, da geschieht mehr als ein
Wunder. Sieh, wie er uns mit den Fiihlhornern winkt und
die Fliigeldecken hebt. Jetzt wird er sajh gleich verwandeln
und vor uns stehen als Elfe mit einem Konigsmantel angethan
und einem Goldhelm auf dem I^opf.*'
65 „Fortfliegen wird er," sprach Heinz und lachte. „Schnurr
— da hast du's."
Die Knaben traten an's Fenster und sahen dem Kafer
nach. In weitem Bogen durchschnitt das blitzende Kleinod
^♦v V
t)tx ^olbbaum.
446
die Luft und verschwaiid jtiiiaeitM der Garteiiinauer. Jetzt
wurde iin N el )enzi miner ein Rauspern vernehinbur, und die 70
beidon Schiiler kehrten eilig zu ilireii Biichern zuriick.
„Da hahen wir dM„s Wunder," fluwterte Hans seinem Kame-
raden zu und zeigte auf das Tintenfass-.
Aus dem Tintenfass heraus ragte ei'i ghines llcis, das
wuchs zusoherr's und stieg zur Decke hinan. j | 75
„Wir triiumen," sagte Heinz und rieb sich die Augen.
„Nein, das ist ein Marchen," jubolte Hans, „ein lebendigea
Marchen, und wir spielen mit."
Und dac Reis wurde starker und trieb Aeste und Zweigo mit
Blattern und Bliiten. Die Decke des Zimniers verschwand, go
die Wande wichen, und eine dammernde Waldhalle uniting
die staunenden Knaben.
„Vorwarts!" rief Hans und zog den widerstrebenden Heinz
mit sich fort. „ Jetzt kommt das Abenteuer."
Die bliihenden Gestrauche thaten sich von selbst aus- 86
einander und bffnefcen den Knaben einen Pfad. Gebrochen
biinkte das Sonnenlicht durch Jas Gitterdach der Waldbaiime
und malte tausend goldene Augen auf das Moos, und aus
dem Moos stiegen Sternblumen von brennenden Farben, und
griines, krauses Geranke sclilang sich um die bemoostenoo
Stamme. Droben aber in den Zweigen flatberten singende
Vogel in schimmernden Federkleidern, und Hirsche, Rehe
und andere Waldthiere sprangen lustig durch die Biische.
Jetzt lichtete sich der Wald, zwischen den Stammen biinkte
es wie Feuerschein, und Hans raunte seinem Gefahrten zu : 96
„ Jetzt kommt's."
Sie betraten eine Waldwiese, in deren Mitte ein einzeliier
Baum stand. Aber das war kein gewohnlicher Baiim ; das
war der Wunderbaum, von dem Hans so oft gehort hatte, der
44G
^cr ^olbftaum.
I
lOoBauiu mit den goldoiieri Bliittern. Die Kiiaben standen starr
vor Stauneii.
Da trat hinter dem Staiiim ein Zwerg liervor, nicht grosser
als ein dreijiihriges Kind, aber nicht dickkdp% und platt-
fiissig, wie genieiniglich die Zwerge sind, sondorn schlank und
i05zierlich gewachsen. Er trug einen griinen Mantel und einen
Goldhehn, und die beiden Knaben wussten, wen sie vor sich
batten.
Der Zwerg trat ein paar Scbritte vor und verneigte sich.
„Die verzauberte Prinzessin harrt auf ihren Erlos^r," sprach
iioer, „wer von euch beiden will das Wagestiick unternehmen?"
„Ich," sprach Hans mit freudiger Stinime. Und alsbald
fiihrte der Zwerg ein Rosslein heran, das war milchweiss und
biss in einen goldenen Ziigel.
„Thu's nicht, Hans !" mahnte Heinz angstlich, aber Hans
li5sass bereits iiu Sattel. Wiehernd stieg das Zauberpferd in
die Hohe, dann warf es den Kopf zuriick und nmnte mit
fliegender Mahne in den Wald hinein. Ein leuchtender Gold-
kafer aber flog als Wegweiser voraus. Noch einmal wandte
Hans den Kopf zuriick und sah seinen Kameraden unter dem
i20Goldbaum stehen dann verlor er Baum und Freund aus dem
Gesicht.
Das war ein lustiger Ritt. Hans sass so sicher und fest im
Sattel, als ob er statt eines Rosses die gewohnte Schulbank
unter sich gehabt hiitte. Wenn er daran dachte, dass er
i25noch vor einer Stunde beim Cornelius Nepos geseufzt und
vor dem Doktor Schlagentzwei gezittert habe, musste er
lachen. Der kleine Schulknabe in dem kurzen Jackchen
war zum stattlichen Reitersmann geworden mit Koller und
Mantel, Schwert und Goldsporen. So flog er hin Jurch den
130 Zauberwald.
^cr ©albboum.
447
en starr
grosser
i platt-
mk uud
id einen
vor sich
te sich.
' sprach
imen?"
alsbald
dss und
r Hans
iferd in
ite mit
r Gold-
wand te
iier dem
us dem
fest im
lulbank
iass er
'zt und
sste er
ickchen
er und
•ch den
Jetzt erhob sein Riissloin ein frohlichos Gewieher. Der
Wald wurde liclit. Noch ein paar Spninge, und Uoss und
Reiter liielten vor einoni .schimuioinden Schloss. Bunte
Fahnen weliten von den Thiirnien, Horner und Trompeten
schallten, und auf dem Soller stand die Prinzessin und liess I3t
ein weisses Tucli wehen. Sie sah fast aus wie Nachbars
Lenchen, mit der Hitter Hans gespielt hatte, als er noch ein
Knabe war und in die Schule ging, nur war sie grosser und
tausendmal schonei.
Hans sprang aus dem Sattel und eilte mit klirrenden Sporen 140
die Marmortreppe hinan. In dem geoffneten Schlossthor
stand ein Mann, vermuthlich derlgofmarschallider Prinzessin,
der kam unserm Hans sehr bekannt vor. Tu^XtTliJl
Und der Hofmarschall streckte seine Hand aus, fasste
Ritter Hansen am Ohr und rief : 145
„Eingeschlafen ist der Schlingel. Wart' ich will dich !"
Da war der Zauber zu Ende. Hans sass wieder an dem
tintenbeklexten Tisch, vor ihm lag der Cornelius Nepos und
das lateinische Lexikon, ihm gegeniiber sass Heinz und
schrieb, dass die Feder knirschte, und neben ihm stand der 150
Doktor Schlagentzwei und blickte durch seine Brillenglaser
den Traumer unheimlich an.
Als endlich die Stunde der Freiheit geschlagen hatte und
die beiden Knaben draussen im Garten unter dem Hollerbaum mL
ihr Vesperbrot vcrzehrten, theilte Hans seinem Freund mit, 155
was er getraumt hatte.
„Das ist wunderbar," sagte Heinz, als Hans geendigt hatte,
„h6chst wunderbar. Den gleichen Traum habe audi ich
gehabt. Nur der Schluss ist anders ; ein Zauberschloss
kommt in meinem Traum niclit vor." I60
„Erzahle !" drangte Hans.
448
Sorelei*
,,uis zum Ooldbauni stiinrufc inein Trauin genau mit dem
deinigen iiberein. Du stiegst auf das weisse Pferd und rittest
fort um die Prinzessin zu erlosen. Ich aber — "
165 „Nun?** fragte Hans gespannt.
„Ich biieb zuriick, schiittelte den Baum und steckte niir
alle Taschen voll goldene Blatter. Dann weckte mich der
dumme Doktor, und da war es mit der Herrlichkeit vorbei."
„Heinz," sprach Hans feierlich, und fasste den Freund bei
170 der Hand. „Wenn zwei einen und denselben Traum haben,
so geht er bestimmt in Erfiillung. Der Traum war ein
prophetischer. Denk' du an mich."
Dann assen die Knaben die Reste ihres Vesperbrotes auf
und wandten sich dem Ballspiel zu.
175 Gingen die Traume der Kna}>en in ErfwJIung 1 Ja. Hans
wurde ein Dichter und liess sein Rosslein durch den griinen
Marchenwald traben. Heinz aber, der im Traum den Gold-
baum geschiittelt hatte, wurde sein Verleger.
XI.
€orekl
3d^ ttjeig ttici^t, was foil e« ^eteuten,
!Daf ic^ fo traurig bin ;
@itt ^atj^en aus aUcn Beitett,
Dag fommt mir nicfct aus tern ©inn.
T)xt guft ifi tiil)( unb eg bunfelt,
Unb ru|ig fltcft ter ^^tin t
T)tx ®{|)fc( tesf Sergei funfelt
5tm 2tBenbfDnttPiifffcpiM-
Hans
Su atei mte eitie liBIume.
2)ort obcn n?unt)cr&or,
©ic fammt t()r goIbcneiS ^aor.
(Sic fammt eg mit goltenem ^amme,
Unb ftngt ein Siet baki,
I)ag l^at etne tvunberfamc
©cwdtige ^elobci.
2)ctt ©c^iffer fm Hcineit ©(^tffe
grgrcift eg mit njilbem 3Kel) ;
(Sr fc^aut ni^t bie gelfenriffe,
(Sr fd^aut nur ()inauf in bic ^o^\
3c^ glauBe, bie SBctten ^erfe^Iingen
Sim Subc (5(^iffer unb Ma^n,
Unb bag |at mit i^rem (Singcn
X)ie Sorclei get^an.
449
IQ
15
XII.
Du btst u)k due Blame*
Du Mfl wie eine SBIume
<Bo ()olb unb fc^on unb rHiij
3d^ fs^au' blc^ an, unb 2Gct)mut
©c^le'c^t mir ing ^eia l)incin.
?Wir {ft, arg ob it^ b{< ^anbe
Wufg ^aupt bir legen kUV,
93etenb, ba§ (SJott bid^ er^afte
. t- f ^ f
U ^ ^M^
>Z/V vun uHv ja;vu UUD yyiP*
I
450
^aS <S4Iog am SReere*
^m.
to
XTTT.
Des Sdjdfers Sonntagslieb.
3c^ bin atlein onf wetter gtur ;
S'Jocfc einc 9J?orgengIocfe nur,
S'lun otitic na^ unb fern.
5lnktenb !nie' td^ :^tcr.
O fitgeg ®raun, gel)eimeg 3Be^n !
9lli3 fnfcten 5SieIe ungefe^n
Unb beteten mit mir.
Dcr J^itttmcl naf^ unb fern,
dx tjl fo War unb feierlic^,
60 gana, al« ttJoUf er offncn |!c^.
t)ai ifl ber Slag be^ ^errn.
■
XIV.
Das 5d?Io§ am 2tTeere.
^ajl bu bag @c^lof gcfe^cn,
J)ag l^o^e @c^Io§ am SDicer?
©olben unb roffg m^m
T)it 3Colfen briilber !^er.
@« m6(^tc f!c^ nicber netgcn
3n fiJicgclfhre glut,
(S3 moc^te f^;eben unb (leigcn
5\n ber 2lb«>iibittDlfcii (SiluL
%ai Sd)Iog am 9Rccrc*
Unb ten 9J?ont> bariibcr (Ic^en
Unt) S'lcbel tveit iim()fr."
^er SCint) unb tc^ ?0^eere« SCaUcii,
®abcn ffe frifdjeu Jllang ?
SScrna|mfl tu ani l)o^en fallen
@aiten unt ^eftgcfang ?
„I)Ie SBinbe, tic SBogcn aHc
Sagen in tiefer JRu^^
Sincm illagclict (tug tcr ^aKc
^ovf i(^ mit Zijxdmn ^n,"
(Sa'^efl tu okn gc^cn
!i:en ^onii^ unt fein ®ema!^I,
!J^cr rotcn *i!0'?antel 2Ce^en,
Der goltnen kronen ©tra^l ?
git^rtcn fie nic|t mit SBonnc
Sine fd^onc Sungfrau tar,
J^errli(j^ n>ic tie ©onnc,
©trai^Ient im goltcncn J^aar?
„2Bo^( fa^ id^ tie (Sftcrn beite,
O^ne tcr .kronen iMc^t,
3nt fd)iD'pjen J^rauerHeite ;
2)ie Sungfrau fal) i^ nic^t" 1 1
451
10
16
25
80
452
5)a8 Sr^log ©onrourt
XV.
10
15
20
Das 5djIo§ 3oncourt
*
3c^ traiim* afg ^int) mic^ jurudfc
Unt) fd^iittle mein gtttfcg J^aupt :
SBie fud^t i{)r mic^ ^cim, t.()r 53ilt>er,
Die laug' i^ ijcrgcpn gegtauM?
^oc^ ragt au^ fc^att'gcn ©e()cgett
@in fc^tmmcrnbcg (Sc^bft l^erijor,
3<^ fenne Die iiirme, bie Binncn,
Die fieinenie 53iucfc, bag I^or,
@g fc^aucn ttom SBappenf^ilbc
5)ie Sotucn fo trautid^ mic^ on,
3c| grille bie rtlten 58efanntctt
Uttb eile ben 33urgl)of ijimn,
t)0vt Itegt bic (S|)()iny am Srunncn,
2)ort flriint ber gcigenbaum,
^ort Winter biefeit gcnflcrn
Sertraumf ic^ ben erflen 2;raum.
3c^ trcf in bic ^Burgfapeac
Unb fuc^c beg 5I()n^errn ®rnb ;
SDort ift'g, bort ()dngt »om 5>fei(cr
2)ag alte ©ewaffen ()eraK
9?0(^ (efen umflort bie Sliigen
Die 3iige ber 3nfci)nft nic^t,
2Cie l^ell burc^ bie bnnten ©d^ciben
S)a0 l*i(S^t bariiber auc^ brid^t.
^ic Stcriic.
©0 flel)fl bu, (Sc{>(o^ meiner 5Sater,
9)?ir treu unb fefl in bent (Sinn,
Unb bifl tton ber (Srbc i)erfd)ttjunben,
3^er g)fl«g gc^t uber bic^ ^in.
<Sei frurf)tbar, o tcurer Soben,
3cl) feghe bi^ mtib unb gerii^rt,
Unb fegn' i^n giinefac^, mer immer
Den 5)flug nun uber bic^ fii^rt.
3c^ obernjitt auf mic^ raffen^
5J?ein ©aitenfpielin ber J^onb,
Die 5Beifin 1)cr (^rbc burc^t^meifen
Unb ftngen ijon Sanb ^u Sanb.
453
80
85
XVI.
J)te Sterne.
3c^ fe^e oft nm 5!)?itternflc^t,
SCenn ic^ mein 2Beif gsU^an,
Unb nicmanb me^r im ^aufe mat^t,
Die ©tern' am ^immel an.
©ie ge^n ba, ^in unb ^er acrjlrert,
28te hammer auf ber glur,
3n a^ubeln auc^ unb aufgerei^t
2Die ^erlen an ber ©c^nur ;
Unb funfein atle n?eit unb breit
Unb funfeln rein unb fd^on ;
3a) feV bie gro^e ^errlic^feit
Unb fann micb fatt nid)t fe^n.
30
454
15
20
!r)ann fagct unter'm ^inimcl^jclt
Wltin ^erj mir in ter S3ru[l :
„(50 (^ibt wad 33e[f' red in ter 2Ce(t
Sl(« afl i()r *3c^mcr3 unt Sitjl."
%i) n?erf' mic^ auf mein Sager l)in
Unt) liege lange n?ad),
Unb fud)e ed in meinem ©inn
Unt) fe^ne mid) banad).
10
15
XVII.
Der Htcfe (Boliatl?.
2Car einfl tin di\(\t ®otiat^,
®ar eiu gefa^rltd) Wann ;
6v ()attc ^rcjyen nn bem ^ut
Unt) cinen ^Iun!er t>ran,
Unt) einen Sled »on ©olbc fd^tDcr,
2Ber sal)U t)ic X)inge alle l)ei' ?
9(n feinen ©c^nurvbart fa^ man nur
^iJiit ®rafcn unt mit ©rau^,
Unt) babci fa:^ er ^on 9latur
®ar njtlt) nnb grimmig au^,
@ein (Sarra^ wax, man glaubt e^ faum,.
(So grog fc^ier ali? ein JGekvKium.
@r ^rtttc ^nod)cn n?ie ein ©flul
Unt) cine fred)e Stirn,
Unt) ein entfei^Iid) grof e^ ?(}?aul,
"1)0* nur ein Heine^ ^ixn ;
2)cr Wicfc ©oHatJ,
®a6 3ct)em efnen JWippenPog
Unb flunfcrte unt pxai^ltt grop.
©0 !am er aUc Jagc ^er
Unt) fprac^ 3frael J^oI)n :
,,2Ccr ijl bcr 3J?ann, tvcr wagt'^ mft m{r?
©ei'5 SSater otcr @o^n I
(Sr fommc ^er, tcr Sumpen^imt),
3^ ttjerf'i^n nieber auf ben ©runb."
T)a fflm in feinem 8diafcrrocf
(Sin Oiingling aort unb fein ;
Sr ^attc nic^tg alg eincn ©totf,
Die ©c^Icuber unb ben (Stein,
Unb fjjrac^ : „<Du |aft t,iel etofa «nb mel)T,
3^ fomm' im 5^amen ©ottejj ^er."
Unb bamit fd^Ieubcrt' er auf i^n
Unb trafbie ©tirnegar;
Da ftel ber grope (Sfel |in,
©0 lang unb bic! cr ttjar ;
Unb Daoib f)ant in guter JRul)
3l)m nun ben ^o})f noc^ ah baau.
Jrau nic^t auf beinen STreffen^ut,
9?oc^aufben ^(unfer b'ran ;
(Sin gropcg gj^aul e^ auc^ nic^t t^nt,
T)a0 tern' »om langen SJ^ann,
Unb ijon bent fleinen lerne rvo^l,
2Bic man mit S^ren fec^ten foil.
455
20
25
86
40
456 mipion.
XVIII.
JTlignon.
»flfnnfl tu tatf ?ant>, wo tie Gitronen Hut)n,
3i>i tunfein Vaub tie (J)olt'eran^fn Atiit)n, ^ '^ - '
(Sin fanftiT Sl^inti \)om blauen .^"^inmiel n>fIU,
Die 'iJJJvrtc fliU unt) I)ud) tcv ^orbecr fli1)t?
6 Jlennfl t)u ccJ iuo()t ?
T>a^in ! 'Dfll)iu !
5)Zo(^f ic^ mit bir, u mciu ©diebter, 3icl)u.
.tlennfl bit ta<J SSm& ? 5luf ©iiulen rubt fcin Dad),
SiJ i^Kiu^t tcr ©aal, eiJ fd)iuimcrt tag O^emflc^,
10 Unt> *i)J?armevHIter flebn unt> fet)n niict) an:
„3C4U^ hat man tir, t)u armckJ jlint, get^au?"
^cnnfl t>ii cv5 m\)\ ?
1)at)iu ! 3)fll)in !
W6d)V id) mit bir, o mein 33cfc^it^er, ^iet)n.
16 ^ennfl t>u ben ^qvc^ nnb feincn SBoIfenfteg ?
T>a^ *i))?aultier fuii^t im 9?cbfl feincn 3^e(^;
3n ^^i3blen irot)nt ber Drad)en alte 5Brut;
(Svj ftiint ber ^^cU unt iiber i:^n bie glut.
,^ennp bu eg ti>obI ?
80 2)a^in! Da^in!
@ebt nnfer SBeg ! o S3atcr, Ia§ un^ 3iel)n I
■
vM. ••
Der (frlfuiiig.
457
XJX.
Dcr c^rlfonig.
ai^er reitct fi |>(if mrf- .-ftt unt> 2i:;int)?
(Sr i)at ^en .Hmibeii luoyi m tern ?lrm,
CSr fagt I ffc^cr, er l;alt il)ii juorm.
„Sicl)ft, i3atcr, feu ten (Srifunig nif{)t?
I^cu (Sdcnfonig mi* 'run' mt 8rf)iveif ?"—
„„T)n Hekg Jlinb, fomm, get)' ma mir I
(i^hx fd)()ae (Spicle fpiel' id^ mit t)ir, lo
9J?nnc^' hirttc 53himen ffnb an bcm (Straiib,
9)i'einc Gutter l)at mand) giilten ©etuant." " —
„^ein 2>ater, mcin ikter, unb t)orefl bu n{c(^t,
aCrt^ Srlenfonig mir leife tterfjjric^t?"
„®ei nil)ig, bleibe rnt)ig, mein jtinb ! 15
3ii barren 33Iattern faufcit ber 2Binb."—
„ „2QiUfl, feiner ^nnbe, bu mit mir ge^n,
mmxt %iid)kv follen bic^ ttjarten fd)on ;
9}?eine 2;oc^ter fiil^ren ben nac^tricl)en ^dijn,
Unb tDiegen unb tan^m unb ftngen bic^ ein.'' " 20
„^e{n 3Sater, mein 50ater, unb fier)fl bu nicfct bort
(SrlBnigkj 'Xocf)ter am biifteren Ort?" —
„^?ein <Boi)n, mein eobn, ic^ fel)' ec< (leruni ;
(Scj frf)einen bie alten E^eiben fo gran."—-
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
1.25
IM
•** ■"A
2.0
1.8
U IIIIII.6
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
33 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 87i2-4503
4^
■<("
iV
^\
^^
^^''^'°«(^''^
4
^
Wo
i(<9
W
1%.
25
458 $cr Sttitgcr.
„ „3(^ lie&e t){c^, mid) reiat Mm fd^onc ©cflalt,
Unb biflbu nid)t triUig, fo trauc^' i<^ ®en?alt.""-
„5)?ein S3atcr, mein 33ater, je^t fagt er mi* au !
ifrlfonig ^flt mir cin Seit)^ get^an !" —
J)cm Sfttcr graufet'g, er rcitet gefc^ivinb,
Sr l)att im 5lrmc bag ac^jenbe .^inb,
gmic^t ben ^of mit 5!«u^' unb 5^ot j
3n feinen 2(rmen bag ^inb war tot
' XX.
10
■
Dcr Sanger.
„5Cag ^or' id^ brauf en »or bcm I^or,
2Cag auf bcr ^riirfe fc^atlen ?
Sag ben ®efang i)or unferm D|r
3m ®aale tvieberbaflpn!"
2)cr ^onig fpra^'g, ber ^age lief; g >u,<<i ^>vi..vc
2)er .^na5e fam, ber ^onig rief :
„Saft mir herein ben SlUen!"
„®egriiget feib mir, eble ^errn,
©egritjt i^r, fd)ijne 2)amen !
SBelc^ rei(^cr ^immel ! ©tern bei ©tern
2Cer fennet il)re 9?amen ?
3m (Saal ijoU ^rad)t wnb J^errlic^feit
<B6)\k% ?lu(^cn, eu(^ ; ()ier ifl nid)t Beit,
(Sic^ flaunenb m ergu^en."
YAlvv'
2>cr (Ranger*
!X)er (Sanger briicff' tk SJHuQcn ein
Unb fd^lug in ijoUen SToncn ;
Die flitter fd)auteu mut()ig bretn,
Unt) irt ben (5c^oo§ bie ©(^oncm
Der ^iinig, bcm bag Steb gcftel,
Sic^, i^n gu c^ren fiir bad ©piel,
Sine golbne ^ette reid^en.
,;Dte golbuc ^'ette gib mix nic^t,
:Dic ^ettc gib ben mUkvn,
SSor beren fii^nem 5ttngef!(^t
2)cr ^einbe Sangen fplittern ;
®ib [ic bem .^angler, otn bu ^ajt,
Unb Ia§ i^n noc^ bie golbne Sajl
3u anbern Saflen trugen.
3c^ finge, Jt?ie ber 33oge( jtngt,
!I^er in ben Btt^cigcn iro^nct;
J)ai3 Sieb, bag and ber ^e^Ie bringt,
3jl So^n, ber reic^li(^ lo^net.
SDod^ barf i^ bitten, bitt' i* eing :
8a§t mir ben bej^cn SBed^er 2Cein«
3n purem ®oIbc reic^en,"
dv fe^f {|n an, er tranf i^n mi ;
„D Jrant oott fu§er Sabc !
D tuo^t bcm ^o(^begliicften ^ani,
2Co bai3 ifl Heine ®aU I
(£rgel)t'g euc^ m^, fo ben!t an ntid^,
Unb banfet ®ott fo warm, aU ic^
giir biefen 3;runf euc^ banfe."
459
15
20
25
80
85
40
460
2)er afinBling nm ©oi^e.
XXI.
10
16
20
Der 3iin9ltng am ^ad?e.
©lumen mnti cr fJd^ ^um ^rana,
Unb er fa| fie fortgerijfen,
STret&en in ber SCetlen lanj.
Unb fo flie^en meinc Za^i,
me bic Queue, rafllog r)in !
Unb fo Hcic^et meine Sugenb,
ma bie ,^ranae fd^neti mm^n,
graget nic^t, tiarum td^ traurc
3ttbeg Meng SBliiten^eit!
2iae0 freuet fi(^ unb ^offet,
SCcnn cer 5ru()Hng fic^ erneuh
Sl^cr biefc taufenb ©timmen
!Der ertuoc^enben 5latur
SBedfen in bcm Hefen 33ufen
^ix ben fcfenjeren Summer nur.
3Bag fotr mir bie f^reube frommen,
©ie bcr fc^one Sen^ mir 6eut?
(Sine nur ifl'g, bie id) fuc^e,
©ie ifl naf) unb ewig tueit
©e^nenb keif idf) meine Strme
SfJad^ bem teuren @(^attcnbi(b,
C9, ic^ fann eg nti^t erretd^en,
Unb bag J^era MeiM ungejlitlt!
2)cr aungling cm ®or^c.
461
Unb »ev(a^ bcin ftol^c^ @cl)lo9 '
SBIumen, bie ber ^en^ c^cboren,
(Streu' id) bir in beinen ©c^oo^.
^or^, ber ^atn crfc^alit ijon Sicbern,
Unb bic Ouctle ricfelt Har !
JRaum ifl in ber fletnfien ^iitte
giir eiu gliidlic^ liebenb ^aar.
2b
80
COMPOSITION EXERCISES
BASED ON
THE GERMAN READER.
Note. -Words in [ ] are to be omitted in German ; thrvse in ( ) are to
be inserted in German ; words connected by hyphens are to be
rendered by a single word in German.
EXERCISE I.
(Wie'a der Alte macht, ist's immer recht, pp. 419-425.)
In an old cottage with crooked walls and low windows,
where an elder-bush hung over the hedge, and ducks swam in
a little pond, [there] lived an aged couple, a peasant and his
wife, who were quite contented and happy, although they
possessed very little indeed.
There was one thing, however, which they thought they
could do-without (enthehren) • this was a horse, which lived
on iyon) the grass on the side of the high-road, and they deter-
mined {beschliessen) to sell it for money, or exchange it for
something more useful.
So the wife said to her old [man] one day : " Take the horse
to (the) town, for to-day is fair [day], and sell the horse, or
exchange him for something else ; no matter what you do, I
shall be satisfied," and kissed him good-bye. \\
It was very hot and dusty, and [there] were many people
riding, driving and walking to the fair. Among others he saw
a man driving a cow to market, and thought it would be a
very good bargain {Handel, m.) to exchange his horse for this
cow. So he proposed (vorschlagen) this exchange [to] the man,
463
464
COMPOSITION KXErjCISES.
whoof courso w.-ia viwy ^'lad to make so profitable {vorteilhaft)
a bargain, and the peasant thouf^ht it would l)o very nice to
have tlie fresh milk from the cow, even though tlio horse was
wortli more.
^ This being settled, the peasant thought he would like to go
and have-a-look-at the fair, and so he drove his cow along to the
town.
After a short time he met a man driving a sheep. Then he
said [to] himself, that perhaps a sheep would be even {noch)
better than a cow; for it could find grass enough by their
hedge, and in the winter they could take it into the house.
So he asked the man if he would exchange. Of course the latter
was quite {gem) ready to do this ; so the exchange was made,
and the peasant went on with the sheep.
Presently, however, he overtook (einhokn) another man,
carrjang a fat goose under his arm. " Aha ! " he cried-to
(zurufen) the man, "what a fine fat goose you {Ihr) have under
your arm ! My old [woman] has long wished-for a goose (for-
herself), and she shall have one, if you will exchange the goose
for this sheep." The other had no objections to this, and so the
peasant got his goose, ]
As he trudged (schreiten) along with the heavy goose under
his arm, our good peasant saw in a potato-field a fowl tied to
a string, so that it could not run away. It had a short tail, and
looked very wise, and he thought he had never seen so fine a
fowl in his life. So he asked the owner (Eigentumer) of the
fowl if he was willing to exchange it for his goose. The latter
said he had no objections, so they exchanged.
Our old [man] had now done a good deal of business, and,
being very hot and tired, he was very glad to see the tavern ;
for he had a good appetite, and a mighty thirst too. As he
was just going to enter, he met the hostler [Knecht) in the
door, carrying a sack. The peasant asked him what was in
EXERCISE I.
46r»
goose
the sack, and the other reph-.v! that it was withered apples f„r
the pi^rs. The peasant considered this a great waste. " Wliy
(ei)," he erierl, « our old tree at home only bore a single apple
last year, which we kept carefully uiitil it was quite decayed.
What would my old [woman] say, if she saw a whole sack-full i
How delighted she would be, to be sure ! " Then the hostler
asked him what he would give for the sack-full ; whereupon
the old peasant replied that he would gladly give him his fowl.
Having concluded (schliessen) the bargain he went into the
tavern, and set his sack against the stove. There were many
guests present, and among them two Englishmen, who of
course were, as usual with Englishmen, so rich that they
didn't know what to do {anjmigen) with their money.
Now, the stove being very hot, the apples in the sack soon
began to roast and sizzle (zischen).
"Why (na), what in all the world is that noise?" asked one
of the Englishmen.
" Those are my apples," said our peasant ; and then he told
them the whole story of all the business (Handel) he had done
(machen) during the day, from the horse down to the fowl.
I' Well (na)," said the Englishmen, laughing, "we will bet
[with] you a hundred pounds in gold, or whatever you like,
that you'll get [a] jolly-good (iuchtig) scolding (Schelte, f.)
from your old [woman] when you get home."
" Scolding ! " cried our friend, " not in the least ! I'll bet
my peck of apples against a peck of your gold, and myself and
my old wife into-the-bargain, that she will kiss me instead of
scolding me, and say : ' Whatever the old [man] does, is always
right.' "
" Done ! " said the Englishmen, and the bet was made.
So the old peasant got into the carriage with the English-
men and drove back to his cottage.
466
COMPOSITION EXERCrSES.
m
■I'
When they arrived there, tlie ohl people bade (hlrten) each
other good evening, and tht; peasant told his wife that the
exchange had heen (effected. His wife said she was (juite cer-
tain that he had done what was best, and embraced and kissed
him without looking at either the strange guests or the sack.
When the old [man] told his wife he had exclianged the horse
for a cow, she rejoiced at the good milk, butter and cheese
they would now have. Then he confessed {bekennen) that he
had exchanged the cow for a sheep. " So much the better,"
replied his wife, adding that he always thought of everything,
and that they could now have woollen stockings, and gloves.
"Yes, but I gave the sheep for a goose."
" Well (ei), well ! " said the old [woman], " how splendid !
Who would have thought of that but you ! Now we can have
[a] real roast-goose, and the feathers into the bargain ' I will
make a pillow (Kop/kissen, n.) [for] you of them, so that you
may sleep better than on the hard pillow of straw."
" I'm afraid I shall have to sleep on the old hard pillow, for
I changed the goose for a fowl."
"Why, (ja) that was an excellent bargain," rejoined his
wife, "for a hen will lay (lays) eggs and hatch (hatches) them,
and then we shall have chickens, and a whole poultry-yard.
I have been wanting that for years (jahrelang).
"Yes, but I gave the fowl for a sack of withered apples.
What do you say to that, old [woman] ?"
"What do I say to it? Come here, and let me give you a
good kiss, my dear, good husband ! Do you know, after you
had gone this morning, I thought to (bei) myself: 'How I
should like to make something really nice for my old [man] to
eat when he comes home this evening, bacon and eggs with
onions.' But alas ! I had no onions. So I went to the
schoolmaster's wife, for I know thaiu she has onions, and
asked her to lend me a few. But she is very stingy, and
EXERCISE II.
4G7
rlen) each
tliat tiio
quite cer-
md kissed
' the sack.
I the horse
nd cheese
i) that he
e better,"
*^erything,
id gloves.
splendid !
} can have
i« I will
I that you
pillow, for
joined his
les) them,
iltry-yard.
Bd apples.
^ive you a
after you
: *How I
I [man] to
eggs with
nt to the
ions, and
ingy, and
declared that she hadn't even a withered apple in her garden.
And now I can lend her a whole sack full ! Oh, I'm so
glad," and she kissed her husband again heartily.
"Why that is splendid!" cried the Englishmen, and
cheerfully paid a peck of gold-pieces to tiie peasant.
Most stories contain {enthalten) a moral (Lehrey f.) ; this
one contains several :
First, that we should never bet; for (the) betting is a
dangerous game, at which (the) one party {Teil, m.) must
always lose; and it is always uncertain who will gain the
wager. Moreover, betting is an attempt to get something
for nothing ; which is always wrong.
Secondly, if man and wife were always as willing to trust
each other as these two simple but good old people, many
marriages {Ehe, f.) would be happier than they are.
And lastly (endlich) the old [people] lost nothing after all ;
for the peck of gold was worth a great deal more than the
horse which the peasant had traded-off for the cow, and so
forth.
But I am afraid that this last remark contradicts the first
moral which I drew from the story ; and the moral of that is:
Never draw a moral, unless you are sure it will fit.
EXERCISE II.
(Veiiedig, pp. 425-427.)
The city [of] Venice is very different (vsrschieden) from all
other cities in the world. It is actually (wirklich) in the
water, for it is built on a number {Menge, f.) of small islands in
the Adriatic Sea {Meer, n.). The city originated {entstehen) in
the 5th century before Christ, the f(yunders {Grilnder) having
taken refuge {Zvflncht) there, in order to escape from the Huns
( Ifunne, pi. -n), who under ^ ttila were ravaging {verheeren) the
A
468
COMPOSITION EXERCI8K8.
north of Italy at that time. The first officer {Ikamte, adj.
subst.) of tlio now state was culled the Doge or Duke. During
the Middle- Ages (Mittelalter, n. sing,), Venice y)ecame one of
the inoHt powerful states in Europe, and occupied {einnehmen)
the same position {Stellnng) which England occupies in our
own age {Zeitalter, n.) as mistress {Heherrscherin) of the sea
(Meer). This supremacy [Ilerrschaft) began, just as that of
England [did], with the extension {Anabreilung) oi its commerce
( HanJel, m. ). In the 1 2th ai d 1 3th century this supremacy
attained (erreicheri) its greatest height (llohe, f.). In [the year]
1177 Pope Alexander III. bestowed-upon {verleihen + dat.)
the Doge a precious (kostbar) ring, with which he {diesrr)
annually celebrated (feiern) the nuptials {Ilochzeit, f. sing.) of
Venice with the ocean. This ceremony (Feier, I ) was attended
by (verbinden mit) great splendour and pomp {Ilerrlichkei.).
The Doge, accompanied by a retinue {Gp/ohje, n.) of Senators
(Sena'tor), went (fahren) out on the high sea in a magnificent
ship called the Bucentaur, and threw a precious ring made
(verfertigen) for the purpose into the ocean, as [a] symbol
( Vorbild, n.) of the rule of the republic over the waves.
In 1 204 the Doge Dandolo waged (/uhren) a victorious war
against the East-Roman (ostromisch) or Byzantine {byzantinisch)
empire (i?eic/i,n.), at the i.',onc\\ii^ion{Beendigiing) of whi^h a largo
portion of that [empire], including {um/a'ssen) the Peloponnesus
or Morea and the islan* 1 of Candia or Crete (Kreta) was annexed
{annekticrt) to the republic. It was in this war that the famous
bronze (broncen) horses, which still stand above the portals
{Thor)oi (the) St.-Mark's-church {Markus-Kirche) were brought
to Venice. Napoleon took (fuhrte) them off to Paris in 1797,
but they were brought back and placed in (afi + acc.) their
former position (Statte) ngain in 1815 by the Emperor Francis
II. of Austria. Venice was a repu])lic, or rather {vielmehr) its
form-of-government was that of an oligarchy. This is a Greek
word signifying (bedeuten) the rule (Herrschn/t) of a small
amte, adj.
During
Tie one of
nnehmen)
OS in our
i tlie sea
.a that of
commerce
upremacy
[the year]
n ^- dat.)
e (dieser)
sing.) of
I attended
rlichkeiJ).
Senators
agnificent
ing made
i] symbol
'■es.
rious war
%ntinisch)
i'"h a largo
)ponnesus
3 annexed
be famous
le portals
e brought
sin 1797,
cc.) their
r Francis
Jmehr) its
s a Greek
f a small
EXERCISE II.
469
^gering) nuu.ber {Anzahl, f.) of citizens. The Doge was elected
by {durch) tiio votes {^timme, f.) f the iNobles {Adel, m. ding.)
alone; in later times the real pcnver was in tlie hands of a
body called the Council of Ten. Life and pro,,erty {GiU, n.) be-
came very insecure, as anybr.dy might bo denoanced {angehen)
to this council in secret by unknown persons. Venice was
annexed by A^x^ivm iti 1796 by {darch) the treaty of Campo
Forinio, and incorporated [with] {einverleiben + dat.) the
Kingdom of Italy in 1866.
The oommerce of the republic had been declining {sinken),
ever {achoyi) since the discovery of a new route ( Weg, m.) to India
round the Cape oi Good ilope by Vasco de Gama -n 1497, and
the loss of her mastery of the seas, and Venice now possesses
but the memory of its past glory, and is, as Hans Andersen
says, only the ghost of a city. There remain, however, many
beautiful edifices which bear-witne>.s of her former magnifi-
cence ; for instance, the Palace-of-the-Doges, with its grand
staircase and splendid halls. Tnis palace is connected with a
dreadful prison by a bridge, called the Bridge of Sighs, because
over this bridge, it is said, prisoners who had been condemned
{verdammt) to (the) death were led to hear their sentence
{Urteil, n.), and then led back to be executed (hinrichten).
The church of St. Mark, the patron saint of Venice, wnose
body is said to rest in its walls, is one of the most beautiful
and gorgeous churches in the world, and has bee>i described
by the celebrated English critic {Kritiker), the late {verstorbm)
John Ruskin, in his [well] known work, "The Stones of
Venice." In front of it rise up (emporragen) two immensely
high masts, erected (errichten) to celebrate the conquests
[Eroherung) acquired (erring^n) by Venice in the beginning of
the 13th century. On the so-callod Piazzetta, which leads
from this church past the palace to the Grand Canal, there is
a column, on which stands the winged lion of St. Mark.
470
COMPOSITION EXERCISES.
The streets of Venice are perhaps (irohl) tlie most remark-
able [thing] in tliis wonderful city. The paved [gepjlastert)
streets are for pedestrians {Fitsz(jan<jer) only. All others are
water-streets, or canals {Kanal, in., pi. "-e). The only horses
in Venice are the bronze [ones] alread)' mentioned {nennen)^
and a few of these animals which are kept in the public
gardens as curiosities (Merkwiirdif/keit), just as lions, elephants
and other foreign animals are kept in the zoological gardens of
London, New York and other cities. All the traffic ( Verkehr^
m.) of Venice is carried-on {hefUrdern) by-means-of boats.
These boats, which are called gondolas, are painted black, and
have a sort [of] cage in which the passengers {Passagier, m.,
pi. -e) sit. Larger vessels {Fahrzeug, n.) are used for the trans-
port-of-merchandise {G iltertra7ispoi% m.). [It is] only a few
years ago [that] small steamboats have been introduced, which
traverse the larger canals.
EXERCISE III.
(Rothschild, pp. 427-428.)
There are two cities witii the name [of] Frankfort — one
on the Main, the other on the Oder [f.]. The former is better
known than the latter. An ancient story tells how [the]
Emperor Charles the Great, king of the Franks {Franke, pi. -w)
was once pursued by the Saxons {Sachse, pi. -w), and escaped
(entkommen) over ihe Main at this spot. The king prayed to
God in the night to deliver him from the hand of his enemies,
and the ford {^Furt, f.) was discovered by-means-of (durch) a
hind (Ilindin), which some of his men (Leute) saw crossing
the river. The grateful monarch called the place Frankfort,
or the Ford (Furt, f.) of the Franks, and erected a chapel
here in commemoration of (zitm Andeiiken aw -H ace.) his
deliverance (Retinng). He subsequently {apilter) built a
palace here, and occasionally resided in this town.
KXEKOISK IV.
471
Prom the time of the emperor Charles IV. fdownl to the
ena of the .8th century, the election of the emperlrLd the
imperial-coronation were always held at Frankfort. Here on
the 28th of August, 1749, was born the greatest Germ!"
poe , and one of the greatest poets of the world-Johann
Wo,fg„.g o the. The h„u.se in which he was lK.rn, and in
which he lived until his twenty-sixth year, is kopt jiist as it
w,,s when the poet lived in it, and is perhaps the most
interesting place in the city.
J^U rlr'r ^f •"■^ P"""' "^ ^^^n^io,t still retains (bei-
hehdt^n) all [the] principal-features (Ilauptzug, m.) of a
medieval (-rr^UMUrlich) town-narrow, dark, crooked streets
and old-fash,oned {ahn^dM) houses. But the narrowest and
darkest of these streets has disappeared, though only in this
nineteenth century, before the progress {FoHschritt) of civil-
ization (Kultur) and religious toleration (Toleranz). I mean
the Jews -street, in which all Jews without distinction,
whether rich or poor, were compelled until this century to
live. This street was closed (gesperrt) at both ends by gates
which were Jocke,! on Sundays and holidays, and at sunset
on every week-day, and any Jew who was found beyond
(aus^rhalh) these bounds at such times was punished In
Italy this Jews'-street was called ghetto.
From this narrow street iu Frankfort originated the greatest
bank-ing-house (7WAa„.) of this age. This was the family
Lof] Rothschild, concerning the founder of which Hans Ander
sen tells this touching story of maternal love.
It
EXERCISE IV.
(Himmclsschlussel, pp. 429-4.'!,?.)
IS a
very old ti-adition (Hn-gi^, f.) t!
keeper {Pfmlner) of the
enter there
allowed to
gate-of-heaven, and that
■iiat St. Peter is th(
no one is
without his permission (Erlaubnis, i
)■
472
COMPOSITION EXERCISES.
This charmiMg story by Ertl refers {sich heziehen) to (an/+ acc.>
this tradition, and tells how one day Peter had so much
business (pi.) to do {verrichten) elsewhere, that he had to
send every person who died that day a key, and ordered the
angel at the gate to admit nobody who had not such a key.
Now it happened that on this day an old pilot called
Jiirgen felt that he was dying ; so he bade farewell to his wife,
whom he loved dearly (innig), until they should meet again
in heaven.
Immediately after his death an angel came flying down
from heaven with a golden key, bringing a greeting from
St. Peter, and told him that he must open the gate with
this key himself.
On his road up to the gate-of-heaven, Jiirgen kept looking
round to see whether his dear old wife was not following him,
for he was sure that she would not survive him Ions:. When
he arrived at the gate without her appearing, he sat down on
a wooden bench in front of it to wait for her ; for he thought
perhaps she might be afraid to enter alone, the gate being so
splendid, and guarded moreover by an angel with a flaming-
sword.
It was not long before he saw some one dragging him-
self up the road-to-heaven with difficulty, leaning on a sword,
and groaning at each step. This was a brave young soldier
who had fallen on the battle-field for his native country so
suddenly that Peter had not had time to send him a key.
The old pilot was sorry for him (leid thun), for his wound
burned like fire, and he trembled violently. So Jiirgen gave
the soldier his own key, and told him to (that he should) go
in and get the angels to drop balm on his wound. The soldier
accepted the offer (Anerhicien, n.) with thanksj and asked his
benefactor ( Wohlthdter) to come in with him ; but the angel
EX'^RCISE IV.
in/+ ace. ^
so much
le had to
'dered the
a key.
lot called
o his wife,
leet again
473
ing down
ting from
gate with
pt looking
wing him,
g. When
t down on
le thought
>e being so
a flaming-
ging
him-
n a sword,
mg soldier
jountry so
key.
his wound
irgen gave
should) go
rhe soldier
asked his
the angel
shut the door in his face, crying that no one was allowed fto
comej in who had not a key. '■
So the old man sat down again on the bench to wait for his
wife ; and it was not long before he saw her coming up As
soor, as he caught-sight-of (erblicken) her, he ran to meet her,
and they were both very glad.
But when he wanted (wolkn) her to (that she should) go in
alone, because he had given his key to the soldier, she refused
to go in without him. She said she would rather rest awhile
as she was very tired, and begged him to take hers. But he
togetheT '' '""* '" ""^ ^'^ '''* ^°™ "'' *« '«''<=''
Presently a little blue-eyed child with golden curls came
along the road-to-heaven, walking in its little-shroud, and
weeping bitterly. The old woman wiped away the tears that
were running down the poor child's cheeks, and asked it why
It wept^ ..Because I had to leave my darling mother,"
answered the child. Then the old woman tried to console the
htt e one and promised to be a mother [to] it, until its own
mother should follow.
Then the child took the key and entered in at the gate, and
the angel with the flajning-sword shut the gate again
Now the two old [people] were left (bleiben) alone outside,
for the angel would not let them in without [a] key. Then
the night came on, and it grew very dark and cold, and the
poor old fisherman and his wife felt (zu Mute sein) verv
miserable, and at last they began to be very [much] afraid
and to weep. ' '
Presently, however, St. Peter came back, and saw the old
couple sitting on the bench and weeping. Then he asked them
how It came that they were sitting outside in the dark, cold
night, instead of going into heaven ; for he was quite sure that
he had sent both .f them a key-to-heaven.
474
COMPOSITION EXERCISES.
As soon as the old [people] h;id told him their story, how
the fisherman had given away his key to the soldier, who had
died so suddenly on the battle-tield, and his good old wife had
given hers to the poor little child that had lost its own on the
way-to-heaven, the heavenly-porter unlocked the gate for them,
and let them in ; and a specially good place was given them
among the Elect.
But the key the child had dropped (let fall) on its way up
to the gate-of-heaven turned into a beautiful flower, properly
{eigentlich) called primrose (Primel) ; but its popular-name
(Volksname) in Germany is [the] Key-to-heaven.
EXERCISE V.
(Das eiserne Kreuz, pp. 434-438.)
The Iron Cross is a military (militarisck) distinction (Aus-
zeichnung), which is given in the German army {Armee, f.), as [a]
reward (Belohnung) for brave deeds performed (ausge/uhrt) on
the battlefield. It is of iron, not of gold or silver, like (the) most
war-medals (Kriegsmedaille, f.), to indicate that it is a mark-
of -honour (Ehrenzeichen, n.), the value {WerL m.) of which does
not depend (abhangen) on (von) the value of the metal of (aus)
which it roMsists (fies^eAen). It corresponds to (entsprechen +
dat.) the Victoria Cross, which is so [much] coveted (begehren)
a distinction in the British army. Many stories are told of the
brave deeds for which the latter distinction has been bestowed
(erteilen). In the last Boer-war (Burenkrieg) in South- Africa
it was bestowed, among others, on (dat. without prep.) the
only son of [the] Field-Marshal Lord Roberts, who sacrificed
{aufopfern) his young life in an attempt ( Versuch) to save the
British guns (Geschutz, n.) at the disastrous {unglucklich)
battle of Colenso, under General Buller, on the 15th of
December, 1899.
This story, by Dr. Emil Frommel, the famous court-preacher
(Ilo/prediger) at Berlin, shows how brave deeds are sometimes
EXERCISE V.
475
ry, how
^ho had
I'ife had
1 on the
3r them,
5n them
way up
properly
ar-name
m (Aus-
?.),as[a]
lihrt) on
he) most
a mark-
lich does
of (aus)
rechen +
tegehren)
Id of the
)estowed
h-Africa
•ep.) the
acrificed
save the
lilcklich)
15th of
preacher
imetimes
done without the doers knowing that they are doing anything
else but their duty {PJlicht, f., und Schuldigkeit).
During an engagement {Treffen, n.) in the great war which
was waged between France and Germany in the years 1870 to
1871, a Pomeranian regiment had been sent out by its Colonel
with the orders {Befehl, m. sing.) to hold a certain post {Posten,
m. ) against the French, until their comrades had come up. Th J
French troops {Trnppe, f.), however, advanced {vorrucken) in
such groat numbers {Anzahl, f. sing.), that the conimanding
{kommandieren) officer at length commanded his adjutant to
give the men {Leute) the order to retire. One soldier, however,
refused (sich weigern) to obey this order, because [he said] he
had no time to pack up his cartridges, which he had spread
out in front of him {sich) for convenience' {Bequemlichkeit)
sake, and did not want to let the king's property fall into the
hands of the enemy. So he first shot off {abschieszen) all [the]
cartridges, and then ran back to the regiment as fast as his
legs could carry him. Although the Frenchmen shot at {nach)
him, [so] that the bullets flew in a regular {ordentlich) hail-
storm, they shot too high, and he reached his regiment
unharmed. As he came up, he saw the Adjutant talking to
the Colonel, and at the same time pointing to him with his
finger. Our hero thought that the Adjutant was reporting
{anzeigen) him to (6e^) the Colonel for {wegen) disobedience
(Ungehorsam, m.), and was much relieved {erleichtert) when the
latter received him kindly, for it had never occurred to the
Pomeranian that his action had been particularly brave.
On the following day it was suddenly reported that the
King of Prussia, who. afterwards became the first German
Emperor, was coe.I vq. To the great surprise ( Verwmiderung)
of our hero, he (dieser) received the order from the Adjutant
-_ i...,h<x..^ij vo me xi^ing. xxc stui (noc/i immer) sup-
posed that the Adjutant was determined {entschlossen) that he
should be punished for his disobedience, and was very [much]
476
COMPOSITION EXKRCISES.
fri^^litoiunl, and at the same timn aii^ry at {iiher ■{■ tivc.) tho
Adjutant for {weyen) his suppostid [vrrnH'iiU) malice {/)otihtiit).
There was, however, no help for it (cs lirss sick aber dabei
iiichts 7nachen), so with [a] heavy heart tho soldier went to the
house in which his Majesty was cjuaitered. Hero he was
taken (fiihren) into a large room (Sanl, m.), where King
William received {emp/av(jen) him with a kind smile, and
ordered him to relate the wliole story of the cartridges, just as
it had taken place. So the P<»ineranian told the whole story,
adding : " It is true, your Majesty, that I spoke rudely to the
Adjutant when he ordered me to retire (sich ziiruckziehen),
and said that I wanted to shoot off {verschie^zev) all the car-
tridges first; but that is the only crime ( Verbrechen) that I am
guilty of." ,
To this (hierauf) the king replied, smiling, that the soldier
had done well, and enquired whether he was hungry. "Yes,
your Majesty," replied our hero, ";ind I have a fine thirst
too." At this ifeply his Majesty laughed very lieartily, and
invited the soldier to dine with him and the ofiicers of his staff
(Generalstab, m.). So this private (gemein) soldier had the
honour of sitting at the same table with the King of Prussia
and his (dessen) most distinguished generals and officers. He
thought, however, that the man who brought him the soup
was very stingy, as the plate was not half full ; and when the
King asked him if he would like some more, he replied,
"Please, [your] Majesty, if there is any left." At this the
King and the other gentlemen laughed again, though the
Pomeranian did not understand why.
Presently a man came in with a mighty roast-of-veal, which
was set-down (hinsetzeri) on the side-board {Bnffett, n.), where-
upon another man took a huge knife and began to carve-off
{abschneideji) one slice {Stuck, n.) after the other on to a large
plate, and our hero thought this man understood [his] business
(es) better than the one with the soup.
RXERCI8E V.
477
Now Oonnaii customs at table are difforoiit in many points
{Stiirk) fr-om ours. At a lai-^^'e dinner-party {Tm-Jiyesel hchaft),
the host, or [cslse] a servant carves off at one time {anf einmal)
enough slices for six or seven guests, and lays them upon a
plate, and from this plate, which is passed around (hrmmrei-
chen), each guest takes as many pieces as he wishes, and lays
them on his own plate.
The Pomeranian had of course never before {noch nie) been
at a great dinner-party in his life, and therefore supposed that
the whole pile of meat was for him alone. Ke therefore took
the plate to himself. Although he thought it was rather much,
still he considered himself as in honour bound (verpjlichtet)
to eat it all, and was resolved not to be beaten in such distin-
guished (vornehm) company. The exertion (Anstrenguny) was
so great, that the pei-spiration {Schweiss, m.) stood in great
beads on his bi-ow, but with great difficulty he finished {voll-
hrinyen) the heavy task {Arbeit).
Then the King asked him once more if he would like some
more, to which the soldier again replied, "Yes, please, your
Majesty, if there is any left." At this the King laughed
loudly, holding his sides, and all the other gentlemen laughed
with [him]. But our hero did not know what they were
laughing at.
"No, my son," said his Majesty, "I think {cjlauhe'n) you
have had enough of that; now you shall have something
eL;e." Then an officer of high rank {Rang, m ) stepped up
to the Pomeranian hero, and hung the Iron Cross on him.
It sounds hardly credible {glaublich), but this man always
believed that this distinction Lad been conferred on {zuerfeilen
+ dat.) him on account of his pegging-away at table, and had
not the remotest idea {Ahnung) that it had been given him for
his bravery in the battlefield.
478
COMPOSITION EXERCISES.
EXERCISE VI.
(Das Schloss Boncourt, pp. 452-453.)
This ballad {Ballade, f.) was composed {dichten) by Adelbert
von Chamisso, and describes his recollections of the pleasant
chateau of Boncourt in France where he was born ; for
Chamisso, though a German poet and author (Schri/tsteller),
was [a] Frenchman by birth. His paternal castle hud been
destroyed (zerstoren) in the hor/ors {Schrecken) of the great
French Revolution, and his parents had been obliged to flee ;
they emigrated {auswandern) to Germany, and their son was
brought up (erziehen) as [a] German.
In a dream the old-man (Greis) seems to see once more the
gleaming walls of the castle, the towers and battlements of
which still seem so familiar. In his dream he crosses (gehen)
over the stone bridge, and passes-through (durchschreiten) the
great gate, over which is carved (geschnitzt) his ancestral
(ahnherrlich) coat-of-arms ; the lions in this coat~of-arms look
down upon him like old acquaintances, and with a hearty
greeting he hastens on, and walks up the castle-yard. Here
he finds more old friends : the figure of the sphinx at the
well, and the fig-tree, which is still flourishing. What,
however, seems to interest the dreamer most is the chapel
with its coloured windows. Here his ancestors were buried ;
and from the pillar above the grave the armour which the old
knight wore on the battlefield and in (bei) the tournament
{Turnier, n.) hangs down.
The dreamer's eyes are bedimmed (trilhen) with tears, so
that he cannot read the inscription on the monument {Denk-
malf n.). Alas ! all these glories have disappeared from [the
face of] the earth. But the poet, in the goodness-of-his-heart
{Her zensg lite), bears-no-malice {grollt nicht) against (mit) the
destiny {Geschick, n.) which has befallen him, and closes his
poem with the kindly {fromm) prayer that the peasant who
EXERCISE VII.
479
^delbert
pleasant
)rn ; for
ftsteller),
lad been
le great
I to flee ;
son was
nore the
nents of
J (gehen)
iten) the
mcestral
■ras look
1 hearty
. Here
1 at the
What,
} chapel
buried ;
I the old
rnament
bears, so
t {Denk-
rom [the
bis-heart
mit) the
[oses his
lant who
now guides the plough over the still dear spot (Statte), where
once the castle of his fathers stood, may be happy, and that
the soil may be fruitful and bring its owner, whoever ho may
be, not a curse (Fluch, m.) but a blessing (Segen, m.).
Charaisso is the author ( Ver/asser) of a curious and delight-
ful novel, " Peter Schlemihl," the hero of which has sold his
shadow to the Evil [One], and in-consequence (folglich) knows
happiness no longer; for nobody will have anything to do
with a person who has lost his shadow.
EXERCISE VII.
(Der Riese Goliath, p. 454-455.)
Tlie story of the great fight {Kampf, m.) between David,
who was afterwards King of Israel, and Goliath, the giant of
Gath, is to be found in the seventeenth chapter of the first
Book of Samuel, about as follows :
The Philistines (Philister), a heathen people (Volk, n.), who
were always making war on (gegen) the people [of] Israel,
were gathered [together] at Schochoh in Judah, and Saul and
the men of Israel had their camp in the valley [of] Elah.
And there went a giant out of the camp of the Philistines,
named Goliath, of Gath, who was over six cubits (Mle) high
(lang). And he had an helmet (//e?m, m.) upo^i his head, and
was clad with a coat of mail (Panzer). And the staff
{Schaft, m.) of his spear {SpiesSj m.) was like a weaver's beam.
The poet, Matthias Claudius, who treats (hehandeln) the
story from the comic side, adds {hinzufilgen) that this giant
had a moustache, at the sight (Anblick) of which every one
was terrified. He swaggered and bragged, and told the
Israelites to choose a man for themselves, to fight with him.
And he defied {Hohn sprechen + dat.) the army {Ueer^ n.) of
Israel.
480
C0MPO8ITI0IT EXERCISM.
JSM%
^1
Bub the Israelites wore all muoh frightened at this h\g man,
and nob ono of them had the courage to accept his challange
{Serau^orderung).
Now a certain young lad, David by name, who had been
sent by his father Jesse {lsai\ from the little town of Beth-
lehem with corn, bread, and other provisions ( Vorrdte), for
his elder brethren, who were serving (dienen) with Saul's army
against the Philistines, heard the bragging of this giant, and
wondered that the men of Israel fled before him. And David
asked who this Philistine was, that he defied the army of the
living God.
Then King Saul sent for {holen lassen) David. And David
said to Saul : " Let no man be afraid of this Philistine,
no matter how loudly he brags ; for thy servant {Knecht) will
go up and fight {kdmpjhi) with him in the name of the Lord.
And Saul said unto David : " Thou art not able to go up
to fight against this giant ; for thou art but a boy, and he is a
warrior (Krieger) from [his] youth up."
Then David told Saul how he had slain a lion and a bear
that had taken a lamb out of his flock, and David said : " The
Lord who delivered {erretten) me from the lion and the bear
will deliver me from the hand of this Philistine." And Saul
said unto David : *' Go, and the Lord he with thee." Then
Saul offered David his armour {Rustung)y also a helmet, and a
coat of mail. But David refused to accept these, because he
was not used to them, and took his staff (*S'<a6, m.) in his hand,
and chose five smooth stones out of the brook, and put them
in a shepherd's bag {Tasche^ f.), and his sling was in his hand.
Now when the big Philistine beheld David he despised him,
and cried : " Am I a dog, that thou comest to me with staves
(Stecken) ?" And the giant cursed (Jluchen) David by his gods,
and said unto him : " Come hither to me, and I will give thy
flesh unto the birds under heaven, and the beasts on the field."
EXBR0I8B VIII.
481
Then :aid David to the Philistine : "Thou comest to me with
sword and spear and shield ; but I come to thee in the name
ot the Lord [of] liosts (Zehaoth), the God of the army of
Israel, whom thou hast defied. This day the Lord will give
thee into mine hand ; and I will smite thee, that all the earth
may know that there is a God in Israel."
And David put his hand in his bag, and took thence a stone,
and hurled i\ against the giant, and smote him in the forehead,
that the stone entered (fahrett) into his forehead ; and the big
man fell upon his face to the ground.
So David prevailed (siegen) over the wicked PhilitLine, who
had blasphemed {lastern) against the God of Israel, and slew
(erschlagen) him, but David had no sword.
Therefore David ran up, and took (the) giant's sword, and
cut (hauen) his head off therewith.
But when the Philistines saw their champion (Kiimpe) was
dead, they fled. And the men of Israel pursued (ver/olgen)
them, and slew thousands of them.
EXERCISE VIII.
(Mignon, p. 456.)
This beautiful poem (Gedicht, n.) occurs (vorkommen) in
Goethe's novel "Wilhelm Meister." While Wilhelm, the
hero of the novel, was travelling about with a company of
actors (Schauspieler), he saw one day in a strolling (/ahrend)
company of jugglers (Gaukler) - young girl of about {etwa)
twelve years, dancing a so-called egg-dan- 'T^krtanz). A
number {AnzaM) [of] eggs had boen laid ,, .g {Teppich)
spread on the floor. Between these eggs the onild had to sten
{treteyi) very cautiously in {helm) dancing, and to take care
that she did not step on the eggs and break them (to piece.,.
One day Mignon stubbornly {elgensiunig) refused (stcA weigem)
482
COMPOSITION RXKRCISE8.
ij
to perform {auffUhren) tin's dance, and the leader of the com.
pany be^an to beat her cruelly, whereupon Wilhelm took hor
part (aich annehmen + gen. of pers.), and bought her from
{abkauf en -\- ({o.t. of pers.) the nwin. Wilhelm took the pool'
^hild to himself, and treated hor rvith great kindness, as
though she were his own da'\ghter.
It turned out {sich ergeben) afterwards that she had been
stolen (rauben) by gypsies {Zigeuner) from her parents, who
were very aristocratic people, and lived in a beautiful castle in
Italy. These robbers had carried her off (entjuhren) over the
Alps to the North, where she had been purchased from them
by the leader of the troupe (7V?*j5>/;e)-of -jugglers, with (bei)
which Wilhelm had discovered lier. In this troupe there was
also a strange {fiigenartig) old-man (Greis), a harper (Ilar/ner),
with long white hair and beard, half insane (tvahnsinnig), who
had committed without knowing it some mysterious (geheim-
nisvoll) crime (Verbrechen, n.). The thought of this crime
embittered (verbittern) his life, and drove him to [the] despair
(Verzweijiung) and [to the] suicide {Selbstmord^ m.). It is he
who sings the beautiful ballad, "The Minstrel," also contained
in this selection (Auswahlj f.).
The ballad of Mignon describes in beautiful language the un-
happy girl's dim recollections of (an + ace.) the lovely country
of her birth — Italy, the land of beauty and of n,rt, as well as
(tvie auch) of the splendid house in which she liveo ; I loving
parents, surrounded by every luxury [Luxus, m.) ^vhich wealth
can give, and of the cloud-capped-path over the high mountains,
over which her captors f Entfuhrer) had brought her. Each
stanza (iS'rophe, f.) concludes with the touching appeal (Bitte)
to (an + ar.O' li<:r kfid new master (fferr), whom she calls her
beloved, ]« " o;'otector, and her father, to take {filhren) her
back to tlictu beautiful country, where she had passed such a
happy childhood.
i,^^
EXEROIRE VIII.
483
as
But tlie poem oxpreases rtt-the-Hamo-timo tho yeai .ling
{Sehnen, n.) of the author (bidder) himself for {nach) that
land, the honi {lleimaidtte) of art and beauty, which he had
so long desired to see with his own eyes. A few years later
Goethe at-last (endlich) had the opportunity to spend a year
or more in that lovely country, and to observe the beauties of
art and nr^ure there. This was a great advantage ( Vorteil, m.)
for his poetry ; and here he completed three of his finest dramas
(Schauspiel, n.),
ABBREVIATIONS.
-»<>•-
that is.
L German :
2lum. = Mnmerfuni], note.
21. Z. = antes leftamcnt, Old Testament.
a. a. D. — am nngefiilirten Crte, in tlie
place referred to.
bfll., bergl.= berflleidien, the like.
b. = any case of the definite article,
b. 1^.= hai [;eif)t,
b. i, = ba§ ift,
b. 3. = biefcS ^^nl)ve<3, of this year.
b. 9Jl.= bicfeS OTonatS, of thismontli.
Tr. = J)oftor, Doctor.
GtD., eiur. = Guer, (Sure, ©urer (in titles).
fl. = (Sulbcii, florin.
^r. = '(vrau, Mrs.
j^r^r. = J^reiljerr, Baron.
grl. = ^raulein, Miss.
gcb. = gclioren, born.
gcft. = geftovben, died.
@r.= ©lofdien (a coin).
If., I^etl. = Ijeiliiv holy, saint.
^r., $ini. = i'crr, .^I'nn, Mr.
i. 3. = im ^afjvc, in the year-
Raip. =: 5IaviteI, chapter.
Six. = .Rieujcv (a coin).
I.= lies, read.
3)1., 9}if., M. = Warf (money).
3JJffr.= SDlanuffript, manuscript.
ajtaj. = aJJnieftat, Majesty.
31., 31. 9J. = 3Jome, name.
n. Cl)r. = ttac^ (il)rifto, after Christ.
9i. 3. = Diartifcfirift, postscript.
9i. 3:. = 51euc§ Jeftament, New Testa-
ment.
m., ^;5fb. = <JJfuiib, pound.
^|>f. — 'i'feimig, penny.
pp. = unb fo nu'iter, and so forth.
Se., er. = Seine, Seiner, his (in titles)
®. = Seite, page.
St., S!t.= Sanlt, Saint.
f. = fiche, see.
f. 0. = ftcl)e cben, see above.
f. 11. = ficl)e unten, i
f. m. u. = ftel)e lueiter unten, )
Z., Xf)., a:i)I.= 2cil, Xl)eH, part.
Xi)lr. = 2l)a[n- (money).
u. a. m. = unb anberc me^r.
u. bgl. m.= uub berg[eid)cn mel^r,
u. f. f. = unb fo fort,
u. f, XV. = unb jo ttjeiter,
33. = aSer§, verse.
0. GI;r. = t)or COvifto, before Christ.
»ergl., »g(.= oergleid^e, compare.
0. 0. = Don obcn, from the top.
t). u. = »on imtcii, from the bottom
j. 93. = jum 93cifpiel, for example.
see below.
et
ca-
tera.
II. Latin (in addition to others which are used in English also) :
A. C. = Aftfio Christ i, in the year of Our Lord (Christ).
a. c. = a»ni curreniis, of the current year.
S. T. = Sah'o T/i'u/o, without prejudice to the title (used in addresses where the proper
title of the person addressed is uncertain).
VOCABULARY.
GERMAN— ENGLISH.
Explanations.—]. The numerals refer to the ,\
2. All verbs are weak and regular, unless referred to a § ;
the conjugation of others will be found under the § indicated.
3- A — indicates that the word in question is to be supplied ;
under masc. and neuter substantives, the terminations of the
gen. sing, and nom. plur. are given ; thus : JBagcu (— g ;— )
means that the gen. sing, of 2Bagcn is SCacjen^, and the nom.
plur. the same as the nom. sing. The sign'- indicates Umlaut
in the pi, e.g.: G>3rtrten, (-3 ; ") means that the gen. sing, of
this word is C^artciitS a-nd the nom. pi. ®arten ; ®i'm (-e^ ; -e)
means: gen. sing. (So()neg, nom.pl. (5o()ne ; under fem. substs.
the pi. only is given.
4. With adjectives, -er indicates Umlaut in the compar. and
super].
5. Proper names are not given when they are the same in
German as in English.
et
• ca-
tera.
21.
m, off, from.
2l'beut>, m. (-c^; -e), evening;
l^eute — ; this evening.
2(bent)brot, n. (-eiJ ; -e), supper.
abe;*t)i3, in the evening.
2l6ent)fonnenfd)ein, m. (-eg),
evening sunshine.
5l'bentcuer, n. (-g; — ), ad-
venture.
5l'benteurcr, m. (-g ; — ), ad-
venturer.
flber, but ; however.
^I'berglaiibc, m. (-n and -ns),
superstition.
abermalg, again, a second time,
once more.
abfa^ren (186; fein), to set off,
depart, go ; set sail.
aM)iiltcn (188), to hinder, deter.
aM)aucn (188), to hew off, cut
off.
ab^elfen (159), to help, re-
medy ; bent ift lei^t ah^uUU
fen, that is easily remedied.
ab()oleit, to call for.
abtul)Un (ftcb), to (get) cool.
Stbfitrgunj^, / (-en), abbrevia-
tion, curtailment.
aManfcn (188; fein), to run
off; come off, turn out, end.
aMeiten, to lead away, lead off,
abmaAen, to finish, dispose of,
settle.
485
486
VOCABULARY.
aBmalen, to portray.
abreifen (fein), to set out, start,
depart.
5l6fc^iefc, m. (-ti), farewell.
abfc^ncifeen (118), to cut off.
abfo'nbcrlic^, peculiar, special.
aUxodmn, to dry.
abnjifc^en, to wipe off.
abaie^en(131),topulloff, takeoff
ad), ah ! oh ! alas ! — jua^ !
pooh ! nonsense !
ac^t, eight ; — Slage, a week.
Slci^t,/, attention, care ; f{(^ in
— nel)men, to be careful,
take care ; — gcben, to pay
attention.
(ici^^cn, to moan.
abbieren, to add. '
2lt>cl, m. (-g), nobility.
Slbjuta'nt, m. (-en; -en), adju-
tant.
Slbreffc,/ (-n), address.
5lt)ria,/, Adriatic (sea).
af)a', aha ! ho ! ho !
2l6n^err, m. (-n ; -en), ancestor.
a^ntic^, like, similar ( -f- dat.)
Si^re,/ (-n), ear (of grain).
3irgebra,/, algebra.
flttetn', adj., alone, only ; conj.,
but, only.
(iU{n, c, eg), all, (the) whole;
atlc 31oge, every day; aUt
fein, to be at an end, be all
gone (vulgar).
2lUeg, n. sing., all, everything.
attert»in(;g', adv., certainly, of
course.
aHerlie'bfl, dearest of all ; most
lovely.
a'lIjn^iele,too many altogether.
2ll|jen (pi. only), Alps.
aU, than, as ; as a ; when ;
aii ob, as if.
al^balb, immediately, at once.
alfo, thus, so; so then, ac-
cordingly.
nit C'er), old, ancient.
Sitter, n. (-g), age, old age.
5lmcrtfaner, m. (-g, — ), Ameri-
can.
an (dat. or ace, 65), on, at
(227), to, towards, in, by,
near, of (231).
anbetfen, to bark at.
anbetreffen (167), to regard,
concern.
anbieten (131), to offer.
cinbtnben (1 44), to tie up, fasten.
Slnblid, m. (-eg; -c), sight, pros-
pect, view.
anblicfen, to look at.
anbrennen(99),to kindle, light.
5lnben!en,w. (-g; — ),memorial,
memory.
anber,other; ni(^tg — g, nothing
else.
cinbern, to alter, change; eg
Vd^t ftc^ nid^t — , it cannot
be helped.
anberg, otherwise.
anbert^alb, one and a half.
Slnfang, m. (-eg; -e), commence-
ment, beginning.
anfangen (188), to begin, com-
mence ; to go about a thing,
attempt.
anfangg, in the beginning, at
first.
anfajjen, to seize, take hold of,
grasp.
angemeffen, appropriate, suit-
able.
VOCABULARY.
487
angene^m, pleasant, agreeable.
Slngcftdjt, n. (-eg; -cr), face,
countenance,
anget^an, clad, dressed.
^H%/- ("e), fright, terror, fear,
dread.
angftUd^, frightened, timid,
anxious.
2lngftfc^n?ft§, m. (-c^), sweat of
terror, chill of dread,
an^altcn (188), to continue;
to stop.
mt^'dnc^tn, to suspend, hang
upon.
2lnl)o|)e,/ (-n), hill.
anfaufcn (fid)), to settle, buy-
up property.
anfleiben (fid^), to dress.
anflopfen, to knock at the
door.
antommcn (167; fetn), to ar-
rive.
<i-^ Slttfommling, m. (-e5 ; -e), ar-
rival.
anlcgcn, to lay on, put on
(clothes); bic 33it(^fc — , to
take aim with a gun.
annel)mctt (167), to accept.
anraui^en, to colour (a pipe).
attric^tett,to cause (trouble, etc.)
anfd)affen, to provide, procure.
anfc^auen, | *^ ^^^}j ^^' ^^-
anfe^en (181), { ^^.™'
' ^ ^ -" j consider.
2lttfe^cn, n. (-g), appearance,
respect, influence,
anfe^en, to put (a cup, etc.),
to (i)he lips).
anftre!(ten (118), to colour,
paint (a house, wall, etc.).
ant^un ( 1 96),toputon(clothes).
Slntli^, n. (-eg ; -e), face, coun-
tenance.
antreffen (167), to meet with,
find.
Slntwort,/ (-en), answer, reply,
antworten (dat.), to answer,
reply.
a'lwefenb, present.
5l'nnjcfen^eit,/, presence.
an^ie^en (131), to draw on;
put on (clothes).
Sln^un, m. (-eg, -e), suit (of
clothes) ; approach ; tm —
fein, to be approaching, to
threaten (of a storm).
3(pfel, m. (-g ; '-'), apple.
Slpfelbaum, m. (-eg ; h), apple-
tree.
^pxiV, m. (-g), April.
5lr'6eit,/ (-en), work; labour;
task.
arfeeiten, to work.
3lrbeitcr,m. (-g; — ), workman.
2lrbcttgaeit, /. (-en), time for
work, working hours.
%x&j\UW,m. (-en; -en), architect.
5Irie (trisylL)/. (-n), air, song.
arm (-er), poor.
2lrm, m. (-eg ; -e), arm.
51rt,/ (-en), kind, sort, species.
avtig, well behaved ; — fein, to
behave one's self properly
(of children).
5lrU, m. (eg; -e), physician,
doctor.
5lfc^enputte(, n. (-g), Cinderella.
5lfftett(^en, n. (-g; — ), small
plate or dish.
'vl|t, m. (eg; "C), bough, branch.
^Iftrolog', m. (-en; -en), astro-
loger.
488
VOCABULARY.
atmen, to breathe.
aucfe, also, too, even; ten — ,
whoever ; mir fint e^ — , so
are we.
aitf, (dat. or ace.) on, upon (65);
for; in (230); at (227, 3);
to; open; — brci 2Coc^cn,for
three weeks (fut, 229, 6, 2);
— t)a^, inorder that; — bem
Sanbc, in the country.
auf6Iei&en (120), to stay up,
sit up, remain up.
aufblidfcn, to look up.
aufblii^cn (fein), to begin flour-
ishing.
Slufcnt^utt, m. (-C3 ; -e), sojourn,
stay; delay. (
aufcffen (181), to eat up, con-
sume.
auffltegen (131, fein), to fly
upwards.
Slufgabe,/ (-n), task, lesson,
exercise.
aufgeben (181), to give up.
aufge^en (188, fcin), to open ;
to rise (of the sun, etc.)
auf^alten (188), to stop, delay,
check.
au^i^'dnoitn, to hang up.
auf§c&cil (131), to raise up,
lift up, pick up; abolish,
annul, cancel; keep, pre-
serve.
auf^orctt, to cease, stop.
aufmad^en, to open ; fic^ — , to
set out, start.
aufmerffam, attentive; eitten
anr etiuag — madmi, to call
the attention of anyone to
anything.
9lufmcr!famfeit,/. (-en), atten-
tion; kindness,
aufraffen (ffc^), to rise, rouse
one's self,
(tufrei^cn, to string (on a cord).
aufrtc^ten,to raise, erect; flc^ — ,
to rise,
auffc^ieben (131), to put off,
postpone, delay,
auffcblagen (186), to strike up-
wards ; bie Slugen — , to raise
the eyes; (fein), to strike
the ground (in falling).
ouffc^Iiefen (123), to unlock,
open.
auffd)neiben (118), to cut open.
auffe^en, to put up, set up;
put on (of a hat).
a«ff|)nngen(144; feitt),tojump
up; to fly open, open sud-
denly.
auffte^cn (186; fcitt), to rise,
get up; to stand open.
auffieigen (120; fein), to rise,
ascend, mount,
auftrcten (181 ; fein), to appear.
auft^un (196), to open.
auftiirmen, to pile up, heap.
aufwadjen (fein), to wake up,
awake.
aufaie^en (131), to wind up (of
a time-piece).
2{uge, n. (-i?; -n), eye; spot.
3lugenM{(f,772.(-eg; -e),moment,
instant.
m^ {dat., 46), out of; from, of;
out.
nu^Briiten, to hatch out.
litsvVl iivi^z/t.-y-tl? , t /^CApiCOOluIi.
au^einanber, apart, asunder ;
ftc^ — t^un,tospread,openup.
m), atten-
•ise, rouse
3n a cord).
3ct;f{c^ — ,
► put off,
strike up-
— , to raise
to strike
ling).
o unlock,
cut open.
, set up ;
), to jump
Dpen sud-
, to rise,
)pen.
), to rise,
JO appear.
n.
, heap.
wake up,
nd up (of
; spot.
, moment,
from, of;
ut.
!pres3ion.
asunder ;
l,openup.
VOCABULARY.
489
au€txtoa^Un, to choose, select ;
bie— ten, the Elect, the Sain ts
auiSfliegen (131 ; ^ein), to %
out, fly abroad.
Slu^flug, m. (-eg ; -'e), excursion,
pleasure-trip ; tinm — ma-
c()en, to take a pleasure- trip.
^U^ahe,/. i-n), edition.
au^d)m (188; fein),to go out.
au^gejei'c^net, excellent.
au3gleitett(118; fein), to slide,
slip.
au^Iaffen (188), to omit, leave
out.
auglofc^en, to put out, ex-
tinguish.
auMuQtn, to look out, peep out.
au^nc^meii (167), to take out,
to except ; ft c^ Qut ~, to look
well, be effective,
augru^cn, to rest, repose,
au^fc^elten (159), to scold, chide,
au^fc^roarmen (fein;, to extend
in skirmishing order.
au0fe^en (181), to look (like,
nad^).
2lugfic^t,/(-en), view, prospect,
au^fpred^cn (1 67), topronounce.
au^ftellen, to lay out, expose,
exhibit.
Slu^fletlunji,,/: (-en), exhibition,
au^ltreden, to stretch forth.
au0tnnfen (144), to drink up,
empty.
amwaxi^, abroad.
m^tn, outside, without,
au^er (46), outside of, except,
besides.
au§erbalb {gen.), outside of.
au^mentig, by heart,
aui^aeic^nen, to distinguish.
aug^ieben (131; fem), to re-
move {intr.)
aoancieren, to advance.
m,j: C'e), axe.
33ac{\ m. (-eg ; "e), brook.
Saife,/ {-n), cheek.
bacfcn(186, R. 1), to bake,
baclofen, m. (-g; '^)^ baking
oven,
^arfflein, m. (-eg ; -e), brick.
53al)n,/(-en),path, way, course,
career.
Srtt)nl)of,m. (-eg; '^e), railway-
station.
^alt> (efter, am ef)eflcn), soon,
shortly.
33aafpiel, w. (-eg; -e), game of
ball.
^^n ("er), timid, anxious,
afraid.
33ant>, n. (-eg, -c), bond, tie;
(-eg ; -tx), ribbon ; m. (-eg j
-e), volume.
33auf, / (-en), bank; (M,
bench.
kv, (paid in) cash, ready (of
money).
53ar, m. (-en ; -en), bear.
53arenfii()rer, m. (-g ; — ), bear
leader.
33ar6ier, m. (-eg ; -e), barber.
33ancfe, m. (-eg; '^c), stomach,
belly.
6auen, to build.
33auer, m. (-n or -g ; -n), peas-
ant, cuuniryman.
Sanernl)aug, w. (-eg; %), peas-
ant's house, farm house, hut.
53nuin, m. (-eg; '-^e), tree.
490
VOCABULARY.
53au^)ta^, w. (-e« ; -e), site.
bcac^tcn, to consider, observe,
notice.
t)eIJen, to tremble.
53cAer, m. (-g; — ), goblet,
beaker, cup.
bcbfluerU; to pity; regret; (id))
betauvc, I am sorry.
Betcnfcn (99), to consider.
bctenflic^, serious.
beteuten, to indicate, mean.
bcUenen, to serve, wait upon ;
fid) — , to help one's self.
S3et)iente(r), m., servant {adj.
subst.)
33et)ingung, / (-en), condition.
l>ct)rii(fen, to oppress, trouble.
bccilen (fid)), to hasten, hurry.
93ccnt)iguttc|, /. (-en), ending,
completion.
S3eere,/ (-n), berry.
SBefet)!, m. (-e<J, -e), command,
order; gu — , at (your) ser-
vice, what is (your) plea-
sure?. Yes, sii..
Befe^Icn (167), to command.
befinben (fid), 144), to find one's
self, be situated ; be.
beflei§en (fid), 118), to apply
one's self.
beftietigen, to satisfy, content.
beciegnen (dat; fein), to meet.
!bec|el)en (188), to commit (a
crime, etc.)
'6egtc§ni(123),towater(flowers,
etc.)
beginnen (158), to begin.
bcgleiten, to accompany.
53egteitung,/ (-en), accompani-
ment,
Bcgnitgen(j!c^—mit),tobe satis-
fied, be contented (with).
«8egriff, m. (-c^; -e), idea, no-
tion ; im — fein, to be upon
the point of, be about (to).
bc^aupten, to assert, afiirm; to
maintain.
M}tvit, courageous, plucky.
bet)utfam, careful, cautious.
bei (46), by, at, about ; with ;
— 3;ifd)e, at table ; — mein*
em Dnfel, at my uncle's;
— mir, with me; at my house ;
about me ; — ftc^, to one's
self; — einanter, together,
on hand; — fc^onem ^Better,
in fine weather.
beite, both, two.
beibccJ, n. sivg., both.
33eifatl, m. (-e^), applause.
S3ein, n. (e^; -e).. leg; t)ic ^acfctt
unter oie — e ne^mcn, to take
to one's heels.
bcina'^e, almost, nearly.
bei^cn (118), to bite, champ.
beifle'^en (186; dat.), to assist,
aid.
befannt, familiar, well-known.
53cfannte(r), acquaintance {adj.
subst.).
33efannlf(^aft,/ (-en), acquaint-
ance.
befennen (99), to acknowledge;
confess.
belommen (167), to obtain, get,
receive, have ; n? 0^1 be!omm'^,
may it do you good.
bellen, to bark.
bemerfen, to perceive, observe,
remark.
! bcmooji, moss-covered, mossy.
VOCABULARY.
491
bcmii^cn (ftc^), to take pains,
try.
Beo'bacfttcn, to observe.
bcquem', convenient, comfort-
able, commodious.
bcreit, prepared, ready.
bcreiten, to prepare.
\>txtiti, already.
S3cr9, m. (-e^; -e), mountain,
hill.
fccrgcn (159), to hide.
S3ern|lein, m. (-eg), amber.
bcrjtcn (159), to burst.
33cru^igung,/, quiet, comfort,
ease of mind.
bcrit^mt, famous, celebrated.
berii^ren, to touch.
befc^ciftic^en, to occupy, employ;
bcfrf)aftigt, busy, employed,
Befc^nitffeln, to sniff at, smell
at.
S5efd)it^er, m. (-g ; — ), protec-
tor.
kftnnen (ficfe ; 158), to deli-
berate, reflect.
33eftnnunc5,y!, consciousness, re-
flection.
kft^en (181), to possess, own.
Seft^er, in. (-^; -), possessor,
owner.
befonter^, particularly, especi-
ally.
beforgen, to attend to.
befvred)en (167), to discuss.
beffer (sec gut), better.
bcft (superl. of gut, which see),
best; gum SBej^en, for the
benefit of; am bej^cn, best
/r^i oll\
befteben (186), to undergo, pass
(an examination); — aii^,
to consist (of) ; — auf ( +
ace), to insist upon.
befteigcn (120), to ascend.
tu'ftcttcn, to order.
beftimuit, fixed, certain.
bcftrafen, to punish.
[nfreiten (118), to defray.
33efud), m. (-eiJ; -e), visit, visi-
tors; — l)aben, to have visi-
tors; — c mad)en,make calls;
bei 3emanb auf — fcin, to be
on a visit at any one's.
be)'ud)en, to visit; tie llui^cr-
fttat — , to study at the uni-
versity.
bcten, to pray, say prayers.
betrac^ten, to observe, consider.
betrageu (186), to amount to;
firf) — , to behave.
33etragen, n. (-^), behaviour,
conduct.
betreffeu (167), to concern; wa^
m\6) betrifft, as for me.
betreten (181), to enter.
betriigen (131), to cheat, de-
ceive.
Sett, n. (-e^ ; -en), bed.
53ett(er, 7ii. (-^ ; — ), beggar.
beijo'r, before.
bcoo'rftet)ett (186), to be in
store.
beivalbet, wooded.
benjegen (131, R.), to induce;
to move.
bettjeifen (120), to prove, de-
monstrate.
betuunbern, to admire.
Senju'f tfein, n. (-g), conscious-
ness.
bejablen, to pay (ace. of thing;
dat. of person and ace. oj
492
VOCABULARY.
I
thing when both are present,
otherwise ace. of per sort) .
53cial)Iun(5,/. (-en), payment.
33ibli0tt)ef'/ (-f»)' ljl>niry.
bicgcn (131), to bend.
33icr, n. (-cs ; -e), beer, ale.
SBicrfru^, m. (-(H; '-'c), beer-mug.
bieten (131), to offer, bid.
33ilt>, w. {-ii; -cv), picture, por-
trait, image.
bilteit, to form, shape, make,
constitute.
$8ilt)uug,/, education.
S3iUet' {pron. bill-yett), ?^ (-tci3;
-te), ticket.
tifli^, cheap.
binben (144), to bind, tie,
fasten. ''
Ibiunen {dat.\ within.
Ibi^ (34), till, until, up to, as
far as; jttjci — trei, two or
three; — ju, — nad), as far
as.
Sifcbof, m. (-eg, -e), bishop.
bi§cl)en, n. (indecL), little, bit.
bitten (181 ; for, urn), to ask,
beg; (i^) bitte, if you please,
please {lit., I beg, pray) ;
njenn ic^ — barf, if you please
{lit., if I may ask).
SBiffen, m. (-g ; — ), bite, sup.
blanf, bright, shining, clean.
blafen (188), to blow.
«8Iatt, n. (-eg ; -er), leaf.
blau, blue.
blaulic^, bluish.
Heiben (120; fein), to remain.
Meicb, pale.
btcicben, to bleach.
SBIeifiift, m. (-eg ; -e), lead-pencil.
Hidnx, to look, glance.
blinb, blind.
Minfen, to blink ; to peep.
blin^eln, to blink, wink.
Sli^, m. (-eg; -e), lightning,
flash.
bli^en, {impers.), to lighten,
flash.
blont), fair.
blo§, naked, mere; ac?v., merely,
only.
b(iil)en, to bloom, blossom,
flourish.
33lninp,/. (-tt), flower.
33lumento^i, m. (-eg), cauli-
flower.
Slut, n. (-eg), blood ; fin jun*
geg — , a young fellow.
53liite,/. (-n), blossom, flower.
Sliitenflen.qcl, m. (-g ; — ),
flower-stalk.
-Sliiten^ett,/, blossoming time.
58ot)en, m. (-g; — ), ground,
soil, earth, floor.
33ogen, m. (-g ; — ), arch, curve.
33ogen^an(^, w. (-eg ; -e), arcade.
bombarbicren, to bombard.
33o!jt, n. (-eg ; Sole or -c), boat.
bofe, bad, evil, wicked ; cross,
angry.
33ofemid)t, m. (-eg; -er), villain.
Sote, m. (-n ; -n), messenger.
branben, to roar (of the break-
ers).
33ranbopfer, n, (-g ; — ), burnt-
offering.
braten (188), to roast.
braucben {gen. or ace.), to re-
quire, want, need, use, make
use of ; {impers. ), be neces-
sary ( +acc. of thing).
braun, brown.
VOCABULARV.
m
braunen, to turn brown, bronze.
^vaut, /. C'e), bride, spouse,
affianced lady.
SrautaujUCJ, m. {-(S; -c\ bridal
costume.
33rautigam, m. (-evJ ; -e), bride-
groom, spouse, affianced.
S3rautring, m. (-eg ; -e), bridal
ring, wedding ring.
Sruutftaat, m. (-eg), bridal
array,
brao, excellent, good, upright,
honest.
btcd)en (167), to break; to pick
(flowers, etc.)
Brett, broad, wide.
Breiten, to spread.
brennen (99), to burn, be burn-
ing.
Srief, m. (-eg; -e), letter, epistle.
SSritlengfag, n. (-eg; -er), spec-
tacle-glass.
bringen (99, 2), to bring, take.
33rot, n. (-eg ; -e), bread ; loaf.
S3riidfe,/ (-n), bridge.
23rut)er, m. (-g ; -), brother.
S3rummba§, m. (-^z^ ; ^'ge), bass-
fiddle.
S3nmnen, m. (-g ; — ), well.
Sruft,/ (-e), breast, bosom.
SBrujtfc^ilt), m. (-eg ; -e), breast-
piece, cuirass, breast-plate.
S3rut,/, brood.
bruten, to brood ; to hatch.
S3ucentor, m. Bucentaur (the
barge of ^ tate from which
the Doge of Venice per-
formed the ceremony of
marrying the Adriatic").
53uc^, n. (-eg ; '^er), book.
^Biic^erbrett, n. (-eg ; -er), book-
shelf.
33ucf)crfrcunb, m. (-eg ; -e), lover
of books.
33itct4)anblcr, m. (-g ; — ), book-
seller.
33ud)()anMung, / (-en), book-
shop.
^«cl)fe, / (-n), box; gun,
rifle.
biicfen, to bend, bow.
bunt, many-coloured, bright,
coloured, motley.
53iireflu (pron. bu-ro'), n. (-g;
-g), (business) office.
^"^^9^/ (en), castle ; borough,
biirgerlid), citizen-like, plain,
ordinary.
33urgernieifter, m. (-g; — ),
mayor.
33urgl)of, m. (-eg; ^'e), castle
yard, courtyard.
^Surgfapelle,'/ (-n), castle
chapel.
Surfd)(e), m, (-n; -n), boy,
fellow, chap.
53itrfd)c^en, n. (-g; — ), little
fellow.
53ufc^, m. (-eg ; -e), bush, shrub.
S3ufen, m. (-g ; —), bosom.
Sutter,/, butter.
a.
Sfte'rub, m. (-g), cherub.
ef)o!oIate,/, chocolate.
Shrift, m. (-en ; -en), Christian,
digarettenpapier, n. (-eg), cigar-
(Sitrone,/ (-n), lemon, citron.
Souftne,/ (-n), cousin.
494
VOCABULARY.
X).
ta, there, in that place ; here;
then; conj., as, when, be-
cause, since.
tobci, thereby, thereupon, at
the same time, on this oc-
casion.
^^^d^j, n. (-eg ; -cr), roof.
'Dact)fammcr,/. (-n), attic.
Dadjlein, n. (-d; — ), little
roof.
tdfiir, for that, for it, for them
{oj' things).
tagegen, against that, to that.
t»a^er, thence, hence, therefore.
ta^in, thither, along.
t)aiingel)en (188 ; fein),to walk
along, go alqng ; pass away.
bal^eim, at home.
tamit, therewith, with it, with
that, in order that, so that
{conj.).
tammevnt), darkling, dim.
!DanivferUnie, /. (-n), steam-
ship-line.
ranipffdnff, n. (-e« ; -e), steam-
boat, steamer.
tona^, after that; afterwards.
!Danf, m. (-eg), thanks, grati-
tude ; fc^oneu — , many
thanks !
bantbar, thankful, grateful.
X^antbarfeit, / thankfulness,
gratitude.
tanfen (dat), to thank ; id)
tanfe (3^nen), (no) thank
you.
t-ann, then.
tar, there.
t)aran, thereon, on it, etc.
taraiif, thereon, ^ it, on them
{of things), etc ; tluueupon.
tarin, therein, in that, in it.
farnad), after it, etc.
taviiber, over that, over it;
about it, ; ', it.
tarum, therefore ; about it.
tauintcr, among them,
tag, n, o/tcr, which see.
tafelb^, there, in that place,
taft^en (181), to sit (there),
tauern, to last, en lure.
t)a§,that; (auf) — , in order that.
ba»on, thereof, of it, etc.
ta^or, in front of it, etc.
taju, to it, etc.; in addition
(to that), besides, for this
purpose.
Xecfe, f. (-n), ceiling,
tecfen, to cover.
Xccfung,/., covering, cover,
bcin, tcine, bein, thy.
t>eintg(e), thine,
benfen (99; gen. or usually
an -f ace. ), to think ; fid) — ,
to imagine,
benn, for, conj.
ter, Die, tag, def. art, the (4 ;
44); rel. pr., who, which,
that (92, 93, 95) ; dem. pr.,
the one, he, she, it, that
(133; 140-143).
terb, coarse, sturdy,
terjcnige, ttejenige, tagjenigc
(135; 140), that, this, the
one ; he, she, it.
tcrfelbe, tiefelbe, tagfelbc (136;
143), adj. andpr., the same;
he, she, it, etc.
tcg'balb, for this or that reason,
therefore, on that account.
VOCABULARY.
495
:, on them
luueupoii.
it, in it.
over it ;
DOUt it.
n.
see.
tt place.
(there).
re.
Drderthat.
etc.
etc.
I addition
!, for this
, cover.
r usually
ik; fid)—,
t.y the (4 ;
o, which,
[ dem. pr.,
, it, that
ta^lenigc
, this, the
[elbc(136;
, the same;
tiat reason,
t account.
tejlo, (all) the, so much the;
— bcffcr, so much the better ;
Je mc^r — bejjer, the more,
the better.
be^ivcgcn, on that account.
tieuten, to point.
bcutlid), clear, distinct; clearly,
distinctly.
beutfcb, German; auf T;eiitfcfc,
tm Teutfd)en, in German.
teutfcfc-franaofifc^, Franco-Ger-
man.
'Deutfd)'(ant), n. {-i), Germany.
Diabcm', n. (-e^ ; -e), diadem.
X)iamant', m. (-g or -en ; -en),
diamond.
t)id)t, thick, dense.
I^id^ter, m. {-i, — ), poet,
bid, thick, stout,
bidfopftq, thick-headed.
Dteb, m. (-eg ; -e), thief.
Dicner, m. (-^ ; _), servant.
X)ienj^, m. (-eg ; -e), service.
3)iengtag, w. (-e^; -e), Tuesday,
biefer, t)iefe, W\t^ (t>teg), (6;
134, 140, 143), this, that;
the latter,
tie^'mal, this time,
tie^'fcitg, adv., on this side.
I)ing, n. (-eg ; -e and -er), thing.
X)irne,/ (-n ), girl, maid, wench,
bittibieren, to divide,
boc^, yet, however, but, after
all, pray, well, just, I hope.
3)ortor, m. (-g ; Dofto'ren),
doctor.
1)onner, m. (-g ; — ), thunder,
tonnern, to thunder.
Donnergtag, m. (-eg; -e), Thurs-
day.
'Coppelfc^Ieiff, / (-n), double
bow.
I)orf, n. (-eg ; ^er), village.
tort, there, yonder, in that
place.
Trad)e, m. (-n ; -u), dragon.
X)rad)enwagen, m. (-0 ; — ),
dragon-chariot.
trangen, to press, urge, c^cwd,
push.
braufn^n, outside.
bref)en, to turn, twist.
bret, three.
breifad), three - fold, triple,
treble.
breiid()rig, three-year-old.
breimal, three times, thrice.
breinfdjfluen, to look on, look.
bret§ig, thirty.
brefd)en ( 1 59), lothresh, thrash.
brtngen (144; im^an or fein),
to press, pierce, penetrate.
britte^alb, two and a half.
broben, above.
bro^nen, to rumble, ring, re-
verberate, hum, buzz.
britben, over there, over the
way.
Txud, m. (-eg), printing, print.
briiden, to squeeze, press, im-
print (a kiss).
bu, thou, you.
bumm (-er), stupid.
bumpf, hollow (of sound),
stupid.
2)une, / (-n), dune (sandbank
blown up by the wind on
the sea-shore).
- — ....... ...viiv, ii i v/\./iil y ,
I^unfeUjeit,/, darkness, gloom,
bunfein, to grow dark.
496
VOCABULARY.
biitin, thin.
turct) (34), through ; by.
burd)aui3', absolutely, entirely ;
— nicbt, by no means, not
at all.
turd)fd)nei't)cn (118), to cut
through.
turc^fd^mei'fen, to roam over,
traverse.
burcl)fucl)'cn, to search through.
biirfeu (196-202; permission),
to dare ; be permitted, al-
lowed ; tarf id) '^ may 1 1
tiirr, dry.
!X)urfl, m. {-(&), thirst; —ijaUn,
to be thirsty.
biijlcr, dark, gloomy. ,
t)tt0'cnt), n. {-ta ; -e), dozen.
@.
e6cn, adv., even, just; exactly;
fo — , just now.
@(fe,y! (-n), corner,
c'tcl, noble.
@'t)elftein, m. (-e^ ; -e), precious
stone, jewel,
e^c, afl?v. andconj., ere, before,
c'l^ern, (of) bronze,
^^l^f//- (-tt)/ honour, respect.
e(>ren, to honour, esteem,
e^rerbietig, respectful,
c^rlic^, honest ; — ma^rt am
langjlen, honesty is the best
policy.
@i, n. (-eg ; -er), egg.
ei ! ah ! oh !
Stc^e,/ (-n), oak.
@id)baum, m. (-ed ; -e), oak-tree,
eigen, own.
ctgenmad)t{(^, of one's own
power, arbitrary.
fi'f^enttic^, retd, actual, ; tidv.
really, strictly spt^aking.
(Siflcntum, n. (-e« ; ''er), prop-
erty, possession, estate.
(Silc,/ haste, hurry; tua<5 l)aft
t>u fiir — ? what is your
hurry?
eilen, to hasten, hurry,
cilicj, hasty, speedy ; ci< — ba*
bfU, to be in a hurry, be in
haste.
(Jimcr, m. (-g ; — ), pail,
ein, einc, eiii (9), a, an; one;
t»ie (Siiien, some,
eincinter (dat. and ace), one
another, each other ; bei — ,
together, "all there."
(Sinbant), m. (-eci; "e), binding,
einbinben (144), to bind (a
book).
einbrirt(;en(144; fein)/oenter
by force ; rush in ; press in,
penetrate,
ciner, eine, im(t)i (150), pron.,
one {eqiuvaletit of wuwx).
etnbriideii, to press in ; to close
(the eyes),
einfad), simple, plain,
eittfaden (188; fein), to occur,
come to mind ( -f- dat. ; im-
pers.).
ctnfdltig, simple, silly,
einfliegen (131; fein), to fly in.
@influ§, m. (-feg, ^'fc). influ-
ence.
cin(^e6en (188; fein), to go in,
enter,
einbalten (188), to hold in; to
sto'. ..
ir "
ctnbaum (188), to hew away,
slash away, peg away.
VOCABULARY.
497
finige, somo, several, a few.
einlaDen (186), to invito.
einmal, once; aiif — , at once.
Sinmaleinfif, n. (imlecL), mul-
tiplication-table.
elnnc^imcn (167), to take up,
occupy.
einpiicfen, to pack up.
einrec^nen, to reckon in ; com-
prise in account.
cinric^tc! , to arrange.
eiufcl)cnfen, to pour in, fill.
einfd^Iiifen (188; fein), to fall
asleep.
einfcijlai^en (186, fcin), to strike
(of lightning).
einfc^reiben (120), to book, in-
scribe, check (luggage).
einfel)en (181), to perceive,
comprehend, see.
einfcitig, one-sided.
einfinjien (144), to sing to sleep.
ctnft, once upon a time.
einjleif^en (120; feinX to mount
into, get into (carriage, etc. ).
eintanjen, to dance to sleep.
eintrcten (181; fein), to enter.
Sin'trittgeya'men, n. (-g; _)^
entrance-examii ition, ma-
triculation-examination.
etnimba(^tj{(^, eighty-one.
einrtjenten (99), to object.
einnjtegcn, f-^ rock to sleep.
Sinirot^ner, m. (-^; — ), inhabi-
tant.
ein>Iii, solitary, single, iso-
lated.
(in^i^, single, only.
^mil^, m. {-ti; h), entry;
— ^alten, make entry, march
in.
(Sii?, n. (-f(j), ice ; ice-cream.
Gifcn, n. (-kJ), iron.
(Sifcnbabn,/ (en), railway.
eifcrn, (of) iron.
eleyiant', elegant.
(Sn^Diien, m. {-^; --), elbow.
e'lenb, wretched, miserable.
C5If, m. (-en; -en)Hairv, sprite,
GIfe,/(-n) I elf *
^«e,/ (-n), yard.
(£(tern {no sing.), parent!*.
empfel)(en (167), to recommend.
emv^ftiitcn (144), to feel, ex-
perience.
cmpo'r, up, upwards, on high.
em)?o'rbliil)en (fein), to begin
flourishing, flourish.
cnipo'ninrbeln, to roll upwards.
(int)e, n. (-« ; -n), end, termin-
ation; ein — nel)meii,tocome
to an end; \\\ — , at an end ;
am — , after all.
entlic&,atlast, finally, at length.
enc|(e), narrow.
en()el, m. (-& ; — ), angel.
(5n(;(e)rein, n. (-&; —), little
angel.
(Sn'nianber, m. (-g; — ), Eng-
lishman.
cnn(ifd), adj., English; auf
(^niilifd), in English,
entbe^rliit, unnecessary, super-
fluous,
entbieten (131), to send (greet-
ing),
entblo^en, to uncover, bare,
entfeerfen, cc discover.
(5nte,/ (-n), duck.
(Sntenbraten, m. (-^ ; _), roast
duck,
entfoden (188; fein), to escape
498
VOCABULARY.
(the memory) ; (i ifl niir — ,
I have foi*gc>tten.
entilf'v^cu, towards.
Cttti^c>n>^ebcn (188; fctn; dat.),
to go to meet.
entflc'iicuTommen (167; fciii ;
dat.), to come to meet.
cntgc'cjeulaufeu (188; fcin), to
run to meet.
entv^Ci^tcn, to reply, rejoin.
entfdjlic^eii (fid); 123), to re-
solve, decide.
entfd)lufj, m. {-)(i; "\c), re-
solve, deteriiiiuation.
entfftUid), terrible, tlreadfu'l.
entfd)ultiiicn, to excuse.
entflcii^en' (120; fciii), to rise
from ( + dat. )
entwetcr, either; cnttvcter...
olDcr, either ... or.
enttrcrffU (159), to draw (a
plan, etc.) ; design.
entuuft, delighted, charmed.
er, he ; it.
crblicfcrt, to behold, see.
Srbfe,,/. (-n), pea.
(Srtfcnfuppc, f. (-n), pea-soup.
SrbiJlinirfl, /. ("c), pea-sausage
(used for soldiers' rations).
(5vt>beben, n. (-^ ; — ), earth-
quake.
(Srtbcere,/ (-n), strawberry.
iixt(,J'., earth, ground.
Srtfugcl, /. (-n), terrestrial
globe.
crftnt)en (144), to invent.
(Srftntun^,/ (-en), invent'on.
(Srfoli^, m. (-eg ; -c), success.
ClflllliU \lOL ; |iiu;, tu iiCuze,
be frozen.
SrfitHunQ,/ (-en), fulfilment,
accomplishment; in — 9et)eii,
to be fulfilled.
crp,cl)t<; (188 ; fcin), to go, fare
{impers. +dat. of pern.).
ixc\Hi\\ (fid)), to delight, take
pleasure.
cvi^rcifeu (118), to seize. .
cvl)alH'n, lofty, exalted.
crl)aUni (188), to receive, get,
keep, preserve.
evl)cbcn (131), to raise; pd) — ,
to rise.
ovbelou (ftdO, to recover.
crinneru, to remember; to re-
mind (of, K\\\+aci\); fid) — ,
to remember, recollect ( -f-
(jen. of thing).
crfiilteu (fid)), to catch cold.
(Svfiiltuni^,/ (-cu), cold.
crfenncn (1)9), to recognize.
cvlwircn, to explain, declare.
crIuu'Pijicu (ftclO* to inquire ;
fid) bci icnianti nad) ehvad— ,
to inquire of anyone about
anything.
erf it vcu or erficfcn ( cvf or, ei'ter cu),
to choose, select.
criaubcn {dat. o/pers.), to per-
mit, allow.
erlcbcn, to experience.
(Srt(en)!ouijl, m. (-ecs), erlking,
alderking (a mischievous
sprite).
crleud)ten, to illuminate, light
up.
erlijfen, to release, rescue.
(Sriijfer, m. (-ij ; — ), rescuer.
port.
ernennen (99), to nominate,
n—Qd)n\,
<> g^.
fare
)(')S.)
gl><'>
take
ize. .
d.
eeive,
get,
56 ; fid) — ,
ver.
er ; to re-
••); fid)—
jollect ( 4-
3h cold,
jld.
ognize.
declare.
I inquire ;
'one about
or,cvtercn),
s.), to per-
), erlking,
lischievous
nate, light
escue.
rescuer,
(urish, sup-
nominate,
VOCABULARY.
499
appoint ; gum (^outoerneur
— , to appoint (as) govcuTior.
erncucu, to renew.
crobcrn, to conquer, overcome.
crrcid)cn, to reach.
cvfaufeu (123; fcin), to he
drowned, drown.
erfd)atlen (131 ; fein), to re-
sound, sound.
erfd)cincn (120; fcln), to ap-
pear.
erfd)nappen, to snap up.
erfc^rccfcii (107; fcin), to be
frightened.
erj^, first; fitrd erfle, for the
present; tcr crfte bffte, the
first which comes to hand ;
adii, first, only, not before,
not till ; really.
crj^rtunen (fcin), to be amazed.
erflcn^, first, in the first place.
erftidcn (fein), to choke, be
choked.
ertrinfen (144 ; fein), to drown,
be drowned.
cnund)cn (fcin), to awake.
cninit)Ieu (ju), to elect (as).
crtuartcn, to expect, wait for.
erwcifcn (120), to prove, to
show ; cincn X)icnft — , do a
service.
criuibern, to answer, reply.
enwiinfclKn, to wish for, desire.
cqdl)Icn, to relate, narrate, tell.
eg (38, 39), it ; they ; he ; she
(of diminutives), there ; cr
ifl— , itishe; e^ flint) ban-
ner, thev are men.
@fc(, m. (-5 ; — ), ass, donkey.
effcn (181), to eat; ju ^J^ittai^
— , to dine.
G iff n, n. (-«), eating, food, meal.
ctlid)c, some, a few, several.
ctiua, nearly, about.
ctiuag, something, anything ;
some, any.
cuer, cure, euer, your.
(f uropa, n. (-g), Europe.
cmicj, eternal, everlasting.
(ira'men, m. {-^ ; — ), exam-
ination.
Srcmplar', n. (-g ; -c), copy (of
a work, etc.).
S.
f^flbrif,/. (-en), factory.
gadcltraflcr, m. {-a ; — ), torch-
bearer.
^a'tni, m. (-« ; ''), thread.
5ai)ne,./: (-n), flag.
fa()rett(186; fein),togo, drive,
ride (in a conveyance) ;
travel ; sail.
^a^xtj. (-en), journey, voyage;
ride, drive.
^aU, m. (-eg ; -c), fall ; case,
event ; in tent ^aUt, in that
case.
fallen (188; fein), to fall; ftd>
tot — , to be killed by a fall.
fatig, in case.
?5ami'He,/ (-n), family.
fangen (188), to catch.
^arbe,/ (-n), colour.
3a'fel^ang,w. (-en; -en), drivel-
ler, idiot.
faffen, to seize, grasp.
faji, almost, nearly; — nie,
hardlv ever.
?!auft,/'(''e), fist.
?^cbruar, m. (-g), February.
fcd)ten (124), to fight, fence.
I
jg
•
500 VOCABULARY.
geber, / (-n), feather; pen; | geuerfd^ein, wi. (-eg), firelight.
^|H
^^^^^^H^i '
spring.
feurtg, fiery, ardent, spirited.
^^^H
< gfi'erfleit), n. (-eg ; -er), feather
?5teber, w. (-g ; — ), fever.
^^^H
robe.
giebclfeogen, m. (-g; — ), fiddle-
^^^^H
gee,/ (-U\ fairy.
bow.
^^^M
Oeenfrf)lof , n. (-[eg ; -fer), fairy
ftnben (144), to find; meet
^^^^H
castle.
with ; think, be of opinion.
■
fe^Ien, to be wanting, lacking,
to ail (dat. of per s.).
fcierlic^, solemn,
fciern, to celebrate.
i5tnger, m. (-g ; — ), finger,
ftnfter, dark, gloomy. '
i^\]dt), m. (-eg ; -e), fish.
^H
1
geterflunte,/ (-n), leisure hour
(when work is done).
fffc^en, to fish, angle.
gifc|en, n. (-g), fishing, angling.
^I^H
geiertag, m. (-eg ; -e), holiday.
flac^ (-er), flat, level.
^^^1
gcigenbaum, m. (-eg ; ''e), tig-
gtad)e,/. (-n), surface.
^^^^^^^B
tree.
Stagge,/ (-n), flag.
^hH
fein, fine, delicate, refined.
glammenjc^trert, n. (-eg ; -er),
[lfl[
pretty.
flaming sword, sword of
H^^H
geint), m. (-eg ; -e)\__„^^
gcinfcin,/ (-nen) J^^^^^y-
flame.
^^H
glafd)e,/ (-n), bottle.
^^H
5elb, w. (-eg ; -er), field.
flattern, to flutter.
^^H
Oelf(en), m. (-eng or en; -en),
flec^ten (124), to weave.
^^^1
i rock.
gteifcb, n. (-eg), meat.
^Hb
gelfenriff, m. (-eg; -e), rocky
fleiftg, diligent; industrious;
^^H
1 reef.
diligently, etc.
^^H
■ genfter, n. (-g ; — ), window.
f^Heberbaum, m. (-eg; -e), elder-
^^H
gen(leri3or^ang, m. (-eg ; -e),
tree, alder; lilac.
^^H
window curtain.
gliege,/ (-n), fly.
^^H
1 ?5f^^f"/ P^- (^<^ sing.), vacation,
fliegen (131 ; fein), to fly.
^^H
holidays.
fliejen (131; fein), to flee.
^^B
f^erne,/ (-n), distance ; in ber
^liefe,/ (-n), flag-stone.
^^H
— , at a distance.
fliefen (123; fein), to flow.
^^m ,
' fcttig, ready, done ; — fein
flo^en, to pour.
^^H
(mit),tohave finished (with).
giote,/ (-n), flute.
^^B
fejl, fast, firm.
^liigel, m. (-g ; ), wmg.
^H
geftgefang, m. (-eg ; -e), festive
glitgeltede, / (-n), wing-cover-
W^m
song.
ing.
^H
gej^Iic^tett,/ (-en), festivity,
gett, n, (-eg ; -e), fat.
flunfern, to brag.
\^\WX,f. (-en), meadow, plain.
■■^
^B
fett, fat.
giu§, m. (-[eg ; "fe), river.
L
($ener, n. (-g ; — ), fire.
t
fliiftern, to whisper.
VOCABULAHY.
501
irelight.
jpirited.
ver.
-), fiddle-
id ; meet
opinion,
nger.
I*
-angling.
-fg ; -cr),
word of
e.
iistrious ;
■e), elder-
fly.
flee.
le.
flow.
ing.
Qg-cover-
, plain,
ver.
5tut,/ (-tn), flood, tide, wave,
billow.
folgen (fein; dat), to follow.
goreUe,/ (-n), trout.
format', n. (-eg ; -e), size (of a
book).
fort, forth; away, gone; on;
n?ir mil jfen — , we must be off.
fortfa^ren (186; fein), to con-
tinue ; to drive away.
fortfliegen (131 ; fein), to fly off.
fortge^en (188; fein), to go
away,
fortreipen (118), to tear away;
carry off.
fortfpringen (144; fein), to run
away.
fortnja^renb, perpetual, con-
tinual, incessant.
gorum, n. (-g), forum, market-
place, public square.
fragen (186), to ask questions.
Sragen, n. (-g), questioning,
asking questions (action of).
?5tanfrei5, n. (-g), France.
grango'fe, m. (-n ; -n). French-
man.
fransijfifc^, French.
gran, /. (-en), woman, wife,
lady, madam, mistress, Mrs.
Sraulein, /*. (-g; — ), young
lady. Miss; mein — , Mis .
frc(f>, bold, insolent.
frei, free; im — e, into the open
air.
freige&ig, liberal, generous.
5rct^eit/(-en),freedom,liberty.
freilaffen (188), to set free,
liberate.
freijlel^ent), standing alone, iso-
lated.
frcitid^, to be sure, indeed, of
course.
Sreitag, m. (-c« ; -c), Friday,
fremb, strange, foreign.
Oremfce, (adj. suhst.) m. or /.,
stranger, foreigner.
?5rcmt)l{ng, m, {-ti ; -c), stranger,
frejfen (181), to eat (said of
beasts), devour,
ereube,/ (-n), joy, delight,
freubig, glad, joyful,
freuen (ft'rf) ; at, uUx + acc), to
rejoice, be glad; eg freut
mi(^, I am glad,
greunt, m. (eg; -e), friend; \^
bin ein — tton, I like,
^reunbin, / (-nen), friend
(female),
freunblid), friendly, kind.
greunt)fd)aft,/( n), friendship.
Oriebe(n), m. (-ng or n), peace,
grietrid^, m. (-g), Frederick.
griet)ri^ftrafe,Frederick-street.
^rieren (131), to freeze; feel
cold; eg friert micfe, I feel
cold; mtcfe friert, I am cold,
frtfd), fresh.
%x% m. (-eng), Fred, Freddy,
frofe, joyful, glad; frozen
?D?uteg, cheerfully.
fro{)lic^, joyous, merry,
frommen, to be of use, avail
{impers. +dat. o/pers.).
gruc^t,/ ("e), fruit.
frucbtbar, fruitful, fertile.
frit^, early; fritter, earlier;
formerly.
?5viibling, m. (-eg ; -eV spring,
friib'ftiirfen, to breakfast.
?^nitg, m. (-eg ; '^e), fox.
fiit;len, to feel
502
VOCABULARY.
gii^t^orn, n. (-eg ; -er), feeler,
antenna (of an insect).
fut)ren, to lead, guide,
git^rerin,/ (-ncn),leader, guide.
fiiUcn, to fill,
fiinf, five.
fiinf*<'balb, four and a half,
fiinfjig, funfji(^, fifty,
funf cln, to flash, sparkle, gleam.
gunfe(n), m. (-n« or n; -n),
spark,
fitr (34), for.
gurd)t,/ fear (of, »or).
fiird^ten, to fear ; firf> — ^or
( + c?a<.), to fear, be afraid
of.
%\xx% m. (-en; -en), prince,
sovereign.
^n% m. {-ii ; "t), foot,
gu^oten, m. (-« ; — ), floor.
®.
mUJ. (-n), gift,
ga^nen, to yawn.
(i)am&ri'nug, m., a mythical
king of Brabant, reputed
inventor of beer.
®aniS,/. C'e), goose,
©anfcbraten, m. {-€ ; — ), roast
goose.
Qan^, adj., whole, entire ; the
whole of; ao?v., quite, wholly,
altogether, entirely.
Qani unt> gar, altogether, oat
and out.
gar, even ; very ; — nicfct, not
at all ; — nic^t^, nothing at
all.
©artcn, m. (-^ ; -), garden.
®artenmauer, / (-n), garden
wall.
Partner, m. (-i ; — ), gardener,
(^affe,/. (-n), street.
&a% m. (-es ; -c), guest.
®aftt)aug, n. (-ed; "er), inn,
hotel,
©aflflube, / (-n), guest-room,
parlour of an inn.
®aul, m. (-eg ; -e), horse, nag.
©ebadeneg, n. {a<^j. subst),
baked meats, cakes and
pastry.
gebdreu"(167), to bear, bring
forth.
gebcn (181), to give; im-
pers., eg giebt, there is, there
are; n?ag giebt'g ? what's
the matter; je^t — waS in
tie ^retbe, now there'll be the
mischief to pay (viii., 43 ».
(Sebieter, m. (-g ; — ), lord,
master.
®ebirgc,rt. (-g; — ), mountain-
range.
®ebot, n. (-eg; -e), command-
ment.
gebiicft, bent, bowed down.
®eburtg^aug, n. (-eg ; -'er), house
where a person was born.
©eburtgtag, m. (-eg; -e), birth-
day ; jum — , as a birthday-
present.
©etanfe, m. (-ng or -n; -n),
thought, idea.
getei^cn (120; fein), to thrive.
get)en!en (99), to intend; to
remember (-HS'e^.)
®et)t(^t, n. (-eg ; -e), poem.
©etrange, n. (-g; — ), throng,
crowd, press.
gebr^ngt, packed, compressed,
crowded,
VOCABULAKY.
503
inn,
©ebutb,/, patience.
gefa^rlici), dangerous ; adv.,
dangerously.
©efa^rte, m. {-n; -n), com-
panion.
gefaUen (188), to please, suit;
n)ie ciefaQt eg 3t)ncn in ^o&^
ton ? ho w do you like Boston ?
gefddig, pleasing, complaisant,
kind; ifl tern .i;->ciTn etma?—?
will the gentleman be help-
ed to anything 1
gcfatligfi, if you please.
®efan9ntg,w.(-feg; -fe), prison,
gaol.
flcfIii(jeU, winged.
©efii^l, n. (-eg; -e), feeling,
emotion,
gegcn (34), towards, against,
about; for.
gcgenii'ber, opposite ( + dat.).
(jegittert, latticed.
®e|e(^e, n. (-g ; —\ hedge, en-
closure, precinct.
9C^en(188; fe{n),togo; walk;
to fare, be; wit qel)t eg
3^nen? how do you do?
how are you 1
ge^orcn (dat.), to belong (to).
pe^ornt, horned.
®"9f/ / (-n), violin.
®eigenfpiel, n. (-eg), violin-
playing,
gci^tg, miserly, avaricious,
niggardly,
gelangen (fein), to reach,
ficlb, yellow.
®elt), w. (-eg ; -er), money.
(Bmmtel, m. (-g ; — ), purse.
9f»f<^ett, convenient ; oppor-
tune; nic^tg fonnte mir ge-
legener fein, nothing could
suit me better,
geleiten, to accompany, escort.
®eliebte(r), m. {adj. subsL), be-
loved, lover.
geHngen (144; fein), to succeed;
eg gelingt mir, I succeed,
gelten (159), to be worth, to
be at stake; fe^t gilt'g, now
you'll have to fight,
©eliiften, n. (-^), lust, appetite,
desire.
^mad:), n. (-eg; -er), room,
apartment.
®cma|)r, m. (-eg ; -e), husband.
©ema^I, n. (-e<?; -e), spouse
(husband or wife).
©ernalbe, n. (-g ; _), painting,
picture,
gemeiniglic^, commonly, gener-
ally, usually.
®emiife, n. (-g; -), vegetables,
genau, precise, exact ; precise-
ly, exactly, carefully, min-
utely.
©eneral, m. (-eg ; -e), general.
genefen(181; fein), to get well,
recover (from an illness).
®eni'e, n. (-g; -g), genius {pron.
® as in French).
gcniefen (123), to enjoy; to
eat or drink,
genug, enough,
genitgen, to be enough, suffice
{ + dat. of per s.)
©eometrte',/, geometry.
@epd(f, n. C-egV hlfrrrjio-p K'»f^-
gage,
gerafce, adj., straight; adv.,
exactly, just.
504
VOCABULARY.
gcrofcc^mecjtS straightway,
straight, directly.
® era life, n. {-a}, tendrils, creep-
ers.
gcratcn (188; fcin), to get (into,
etc.), hit upon, get acci-
dentally.
©eraufd), n. (-e« ; -c), noise.
®erid)t; n. {-t^ ; -(), dish, mess,
food.
geriitjl, small, trifling, mean,
sHght ; niitt iiu — fteii, not
in the least.
gem, (^crnc (lieber, am lictftcn),
with pleasure, willingly,
gladly; eliva^ — l)abcn, to
like anything ; — lernen, to
like to learn, study ; tacJ ift
— miJCilid), that is very prob-
able.
©erftc,/, barley.
©erui, m. {-(i ; ^e), sense of
smyll ; smell, odour.
aefaljcn, salt, salted.
©efanci, m. (-eg; -e), song;
singing.
®efd)aft, n. (-eg; -e), business;
mercantile establishment ;
shop, store.
©efct)aftgangele(^en^ett, / (-en),
business matter, business
engagement,
gefrf^eben (181 ; fein),to happen;
eg gefdyie^t i^m recl)t, it serves
him right.
(\efd)eit, sensible, clever.
®efd)en!, n. (-eg; -e), gift,
present.
®efdnrf)te,/ (-n), history, story,
affair,
©efc^inad, m. (-eg), taste.
(5)efd^inette, ri. (-g ; —), jewels,
jewelry.
gefc^ult, trained, cultivated.
jicfd)tinnt), quick.
®efd)tuifter, pL, brothers and
sisters.
«3efeUfrf)rtft, /. (-cu), company,
xrty.
,jd)t, n. (-eg; -er and -e),
face, countenance ; (sense of)
sight, (power of) vision ;
®efid)tcr, faces ; Ci)e[td)te, vi-
sions.
iiefpannt, anxious.
i^efpe'uft, n. (-eg; -cr), ghost,
spectre.
gefpenfterl)aft, j ghostly, spec-
l^efvenftig, / tral.
C^efpielc, m. (-n ; -n), playmate.
(^efta'It,/. (-en), shape, figure,
form.
ge'ftern, yesterday.
(i^eftriiud), n. (-eg; -c), bush,
thicket.
®efunt»t)eit,/, health.
getrauen (fid)), to venture.
'6en)affen,n, (-g), armour, weap-
ons.
©ewalt,/. (-en), force, violence.
geamltig, mighty, powerful.
©eivani, n. (-eg; -cr), gar-
ment.
®etvel)r, n. (-eg ; -e), gun, small
arms.
©etuie^er, n. (-g), neighing,
whinnying.
getDiUt, willing.
rtomi«M(>n n .58^. to win. ffain.
gen)i§ (gen.), certain (^ot); cer-
tainly, surely.
getviffen^aft, conscientious.
VOCABULARY.
505
), jewels,
vated.
lers and
lompany,
and -i),
^sense of)
vision ;
ific^tc, vi-
■), gliost,
y, spec-
>laymate.
e, figure,
(), bush,
til re.
ur, weap-
violence,
rerful.
"er), gar-
un, small
neighing,
in. ffain.
[oi); cer-
tious.
©emitter, n. {-& ■ ~), thunder-
storm, storm.
®ett)o^n^eit, / (-en), custom,
habit; bie — ()aben, to be
accustomed.
gejDObnlic^, usual, customary;
ordinary, common ; adv.
generally, usually,
gemo^nt, accustomed,
piemen (123), to pour.
($)ipfeI,m.(-£<; —), summit, top,
peak.
®ittert>iid^, n. (-h), latticed
roof, leafy tracery (of tree
tops),
glaii^cn, to shine, glitter,
(plangent), brilliant,
©lag, n. {-H ; ^'er), glass,
glatt, smooth, slippery.
®Iaiibe(n), m. {-m or \\), faith,
belief.
oiianhtn (dat. of pers.), to be-
lieve; think,
gleic^, like, similar ; the same,
identical; adv., at once,
at the same time, immedi-
ately, directly ; fo — , imme-
diately, etc.
gletc^en (118), to be like, re-
semble (+</«<.).
©leic^Cjcnjic^t, n. (-e^), equili-
brium, balance.
9leirf)gtltig, indifferent.
C|Ieiten(118; fe{n),to glide, slip,
.qlimmen (123), to glimmer.
®Iurf, n. (-eg), (good) fortune,
good luck; success; — jDiin-
ff&ett, to congratulate, wish
success to { + dat. of pers.).
gliidltc^, happy, fortunate; suc-
cessfully. I
®ru(f«finb, n. (-eg ; -er), lucky
child, lucky fellow.
9lut)en, to glow; to be red-hot.
(^ult>, n. (-eg), gold.
®olt)baum, m. (-eg; "c), gold
tree,
golten, of gold, golden.
(^olt()cIm, m. (-eg ; -e), golden
helmet,
©olbfafer, m. (-g ; ~), rose-
chafer, golden beetle.
@olt)!aferfiJn{(^, m. (-eg; -c),
king of the golden beetles. '
golblocfig, with golden curls,
©olbmiinae,/ (-n), gold coin,
(yolboran.qe, / (-n), golden
orange (/?row. g as in French).
©olbftiicf, n. (-eg; -e), gold piece
(coin).
©olbfporn, m. (-eg; -e a^id
-f))oren), golden spur.
®0lf, m. (-eg ; -e), gulf, bay.
©onbel,/. (-n), gondola.
®ott, m. (-eg ; ^'er), God, deity;
ber (iebe~, [the dear] God
(comp. Fr. «le bon Dieu").
gottlic^, godlike, divine.
®oui)erneur', m. (-g ; -e), gov-
ernor {pron. as in Fr.)
®rab, n. (-eg ; ^'er), grave,
graben (x86), todig.
®rab, m. (-eg ; -c), degree,
©raf, m. (-en ; -en), count, earl.
C^rdftn,/ (-nen), countess,
©ramma'tif,/ (-en), grammar.
®rag, n. (-eg ; ^'er), grass,
©rafen, n. (-g), horror, fright,
shudaenng.
gratuUeren { + dat.\ to con-
gratulate,
grau, gray.
506
VOCABULAHY.
'i<*
1
(3xaiiUp\, m. {-ti; -e), gray-
head.
®rau^, m. (-c«), dread, awe,
dismay,
graufant, cruel.
graufen, to feel horror, be ter-
rified, shudder {imj)ers. +
dat. o/pers.).
grcifcn (118), to grasp, seize,
touch; einemin^^antivcr! — ,
to interfere with anybody's
business,
grci^, gray, old.
®ricd)enf nabe, m. (-n ; -u),Greek
boy.
©dfc^entant), n. (-e^), Greece,
©rillc,/ (-n), cicada, cricket,
grim mig, furious, grim, savage,
grinfcn, to grin,
gro^ (-cr, sup. gropt), great,
large, big, tall.
®ro§mutter, / {"), grand-
mother,
gritn, green.
©runt), m. (-eg ; "e), ground.
griint»lid); thoroughly,
griinen, to be green, flourish.
®ru§, m. (-eg; -e), greeting,
salutation,
grii^en, to greet, salute, bow
to ; 3f)r §rcunt> la^t <Sie — ,
your friend wishes to be
remembered to you.
g«(Jen, to look, peep.
§JuitGrre,/ (-n), guitar,
gut, adj., good; kind; adv.,
well ; [o — flirt nut?, to be
so kind as to ; ftd) etamg ;^u
— t()un, to indulge one's
self, enjoy one's self, have
some good of a thing.
®ut, n. (-C(3 ; -cr), estate ;
property.
®utcg, n. {adj. stihst.) good
(thing).
gutiniitig, good-hearted, good-
natured.
®utg^err, m. (-n ; -en), landed
proprietor, squire.
^.
^aax, n. (-eg ; -e), hair.
1:)i\hin (24), to have; JRe^t — ,
to be (in the) right; Un-
rc(^t — , to be (in the) wrong;
jijflg — ©ic ? what is the
matter with you ?
^adej. (-n), ) heel ; ftc^
|)acfen,m.(-g;— ), I auftie —
ma^ett, bie — an)ifd)ett tie
S3einc ne^mert; to take to
one's heels.
^afen, m. (-g; -), port, har-
bour, haven.
.^afer, m. (-g), oats.
|)agel!orn, n. (-eg ; -cr), hail-
stone.
^agetn, to hail.
.Ipagetmetter, n. (-g; — ), haiJ
storm.
^airt, m*. (-eg ; -c), grove.
)^aih, half ; — brei, half past
two.
()att)geoffnct, half open.
^albre^tg, half right.
^aifte,/ (-n), half.
^alle,/. (-n), hall.
^aU,m. (-eg; -e), neck, throat.
^algtu^, n. (-eg ; -er), necktie.
l)aU, halt ! stop ! hold !
t)aUen (188), to hold ; to think ;
— fiir, consider; ic^ l^alte
VOCABULARY.
507
estate ;
3t.) good
id, good-
), landed
r.
JRec^t —
ght; Un-
e) wrong;
it is the
eel ; ^^n
auf tic —
ifd)cn tic
take to
Dort, har-
'-er), hail-
—), hail
•ove.
half past
sn.
ck, throat.
'), necktie.
Id!
; to think ;
; ic^ ^altc
t)ifl toon {i)\n, 1 think highly
of him (esteem, value liim
highly); to stop, halt; |td)
— , to behave, bear one's
self; m^ tag 3eu3 — wiU,
as fast as you can (viii., 21 ).
^ant,/ ("c), hand; ^ur — , at
hand.
^antler, m. (-g; --), dealer,
shop-keeper.
^antfc^u^, m. (-eg ; -c), glove.
^ant)t)crf, w. (-eg; -e), work,
handiwork, trade ; einem iiig
— (^rcifen, to interfere with
a person's business.
f)anQin{l88;intrans.), to hang,
besuspended; tag33ilt^anj3t,
the picture is hanging.
^'dn^m (tran8.)j to hang, sus-
pend.
^ang, m. {-zn^ ; -en), Johnny,
Jack.
^appc^cn, n. (-g; — ), slice, bit.
^arfe, / (-n), harp.
^arfenbegleitung,/, accompani-
ment on the harp.
l^arren, to wait, tarry (aiif-t-
acc).
]^art C'er), hard, severe.
^afe, m. (-u ; -n), Lare.
l^ajfen, to hate.
^a\x^t,f. (-tt), cap, mob-cap.
^auen (188), to hew, cut, chop.
^aupt, n. (-eg; -er), head;
chief.
^au)>t^aar, n. (-eg ; -c), hair of
the head,
^auptmautt, w. (-e^ : -Teute),
captain,
^auptflatt,/ C^e), capital,
^aug, w. (-eg j -er), house ; ^u
^m\i, at home ; narf) .<?aufe,
home.
^;aufrf)CU, g. (g; ~), little
house, cottage, hut.
{)au9cn ( = l)ier au^eu), out-
side.
l)aoa'nafarben, havana-coiour-
ed, cigar-brown.
t)e(^en (131), to raise lift.
^-)ecfe,/ (-n), hedge, fence.
l)eta', halloh ! heigh !
J^eer, ?z. (-eg ; -e), army.
I)cftij5, violent, heavy ; heavily
(of rain).
^eite, m. (-n ; n), heathen.
^eite,/ (-n), heath.
^citenmapitj, heathenish, im-
mense, enormous.
^eil, whole, unharmed.
l)eiltg, holy; ter — e ^ctrug,
St. Peter.
^eim, homewards, home.
^eim^en, n. (-g ; — ), cricket.
fteimlic^, secret.
()etmfu^en, to visit, haunt.
•^einrid), m. (-g), Henry.
^ein^, m. (-eng), Harry.
heifer, hoarse.
^ei§, hot.
l)ei|en (188), to be called, be
named ; mean, signify, call;
bid, order ; eg ~t, it is said,
they say ; xo'xt {)t\^i tag auf
2Deutf^ ? how do you say
that in German? n)ie l^eift?
what is the n^me of? tc&
l^etpe 51., my name is A.
-|)e!t, m.. (-en ; <\\), hero.
^elfen (159; dat), to help,
avail, be of use; remedy,
supply.
508
VOCABULARY.
l)cU, briglit ; brightly.
^emt), rt. (-ed ; -cu), nhirt.
J^cnit)d)en, w. (-0 ; — ), little
shirt.
^cnnc,/ (-11), hen.
t)cr, hither, to this place.
^erab, down (towards).
t)crabfteigcn (120; fein), to de-
scend.
^cran, up, up to, along.
l)evan!ommen (167; fein), to
come up (to), come along,
approach.
^crauf, up (towards).
^erauftommen (167; fein), to
come up (to), rise.
:^erauf[d)leppett, to drag up (to-
wards).
^erauffteigen(120; fcin), to rise,
rise up, ascend.
:^erauf3iel)en (ftc^; 131), to lead
(up) ; {see ix., 6).
^ivaui, out (tov/ards).
l)erau^fommen (167; fein), to
come out, come forth.
iperbft, m. (-eg ; -e), autumn.
|>ert)e,/. {-u), flock, herd.
^evcin, in (to, towards).
^ercintommen (167; fein), to
come in, enter.
!^creinnet)men (167), to tase
in.
^erfommen (167 ; fcin), to come
hither, come along, come
up, come forward,
^err, m. (-n ; -en), master ;
gentlemaVi; Lord; Mr.; 3i)r
— 53ater, your father.
^errli(^, glorious, splendid.
^errUd[)feit,/. (-en), glory, splen-
dour.
()erfprengen (fein), to galop
along, galop up (to).
beriiber, over (towards), across.
beruin, around, about.
l)erum(aufen (188 ; fcin), to run
about.
t)erunter, down, off.
t)erunterfrie9en, to get down,
swallow.
t)ertjor, forth.
l)ert)orrcgen, to stand forth,
project.
^eryjortreten (181 ; fein), to come
forth, come forward.
.Iperg, n. (-cng ; -en), heart.
I)er3a^(en, to count up.
i)tx^\i6^, heartily, exceedingly.
<Sen, n. (-eg), hay.
t)ente, to-day ; — 5lbent), this
evening, — ?!)(orgen, this
morning; — iiber ttierje^n
ZaQt, this day fortnight;
^eul^ntage, now-a-days.
^ie, here ; — ^u San^e, in this
country.
bier^er, hither.
^iermit, herewith, with this.
|>immel, m. (-g; —), heaven,
sky.
^immelg balfam,m. (-g), heaven-
ly balm.
^immel^fifd)er,m. (-g; -—), fish-
erman in heaven.
^immcUpfortner, m. (-g ; — ),
heavenly porter, janitor of
heaven (St. Peter).
^immeUraum, m. (-eg ; -'e), space
of heaven, heaven.
Jpimmelgfcblitffel, m. (-g; — -),
key to heaven ; primrose.
VOCAUULABY.
609
galop
, across.
), to IQII
i down,
I forth,
to come
1.
art.
edingly.
»nt), this
tn, this
t)ierje^n
rtnight ;
lys.
, in this
ti this,
heaven,
, heaven-
—), fish-
(-« ; -)>
mitor of
-'e), space
(-«; ~)>
imrose.
^immeI<5tt)or,n.(-eC;-c), heaven's
gate.
J^intmctf^cU, n. (-e«), canopy of
heaven, sky, fumanjent.
!^in, hence, away from j off,
away ; down ; along ; —
wnt) ^er, up and down.
t^inah, down (from).
^tnabfoKcn (188; fcin), to fall
down,
^inabtaufen (188; fein), to run
down,
'^inabfcbauen, to look down,
^inan, 1 ,
?{nauf>P' "P^^^^«-
^tnaufgc()en (188; fein), to go
up.
()inauf^c(fftt (159), to help up.
^inauffietgcn(120; fein),torise,
rise up, climb up, ascend,
^inau^, out (from),
^inau^fommen (167; fein), to
come out, get out (of the
door),
^inaugfekn (181), to look out
(at the window, jum genfier).
l^inein, into.
^ineinge()en (188; fein), to go
into, enter.
^ine{ngeraten(188; fein), to get
into.
^ineinlaufen (188; fein), to run
into.
^infaUen (188; fein), to fall
down,
^ingeben (181), to give away,
give up.
^inneben (188; fein), to go
(hence) ; go anywhere ; p< .ss
away.
l)ing(eih'n (lift: fffrt), to glide
along.
()infe0en,to8etdown, put down,
place.
r)inter (65), behind.
J£)intcrfup, m. (-ci5 ; "c), hind-
foot.
Ijinter^altip, sneaky, deceitful.
^inunter, down (from).
^innnterflieiien (131 ; fein), to
fly down.
^Inuntcrregnen, to rain down,
pour down.
Jpirn, n. (-c«), brain.
^irfd), m. {-t€ ; -e), stag, deer.
Jpi^e,/ heat.
l)0(^ (loses c in inJlectio7i; corn-
par. t)i>ber, sup. l)ocbft), high.
t)0d)6eglit(ft, highly fortunate,
highly delighted, very happy.
Jpocbofen, m. (-^; -), furnace,
forge.
IbiJc^ft, very, exceedingly, most.
I)orf)ften0, at most.
^of, m. (-eg; -'e), court, yard,
courtyard, farm, farmyard.
ftoffen, to hope.
l)of'fentlid), adv., (it is) tc be
hoped, I hope.
.^of[nung,/ (-en), hope.
i)pffnungg»oa, hopeful.
I)oflid), courteous, polite,
^ofmarfcliaa, m. {-H ; -e), court
marshal.
^6l)e,/ (-n), height; in tie—,
up, aloft.
V^{)tx,compar. of i^n^:;, which see,
^ob(c,/ (-n), cave, cavern.
^D^n, m. (-et^), scorn, mockery;
— fpred^en ( + dat.\ to flout,
mock, jeer at.
510
VOCABULARY.
^1
l^olt>, fair, lovoly, IwauUious.
^Olcn, to (go and) bring, fetch ;
get ; — (affen, to Kond for.
^oUcrbaum, m. (-ti ; "(), elder-
tree ; lilac-tree.
i^oUcrjJueii^, m. (-cd ; -e), elder-
bough, lilac-branch.
SqoIi, 71. {-ti), wood.
^ijljcrn, wooden.
^oh[lo§, m. {-ti; "i), wood-
pile.
^ol^jtul)!; m. {-ti ; "t), wooden
chair.
^Ord), hark !
l^ord)eu, to hearken, listen.
l^orcn, to hear ; to listen ; [ilijf il
— , to hear say, hear.
i>rn, n. {-ti ; "ex), horn.
]^iibf(i, pretty, nice.
J^uffdjlag, rn. (-e«; -e), hoof-
beat.
^iij^cl, m. {-&; — ), hill, mound.
J^u^n, n. {-e€ ; "er), fowl ;
chicken.
ipiit)nerl)of,m. (-c^; ''e), poultry-
yard.
^iillen, to veil, cover up,
shroud.
.^unt, m. (-e^ ; -c), dog.
^itnbd)en, n. (-^; — ), little
dog; doggy.
^unbert, hundred.
^unbcrt, n. (-e^ ; -e), hundred.
J^ungcr, m. (-g), hunger; ic^
|abc — , I am hungry.
l^ungrig, hungry.
^i\t, m. (-c^ ; "e), hat.
l^iiien, to guard, keep ; fid) — ,
to be careful, avoid.
^iitte,/ (-n), hut, cottage.
3.
tit, I.
it^m, dat. 8i7ig.o/tx,ti, which sfifi.
ii^x, pera. jyroii., to her, her
[dat. sing.); you (nom. pL).
i^r, i^re, ibr, poas. adj., her;
its; their.
3^r, 3t)rc, ^\!)X,po8s. adj., your.
i^rer, i^re, il)re^, \po88.pron.,
i^re (bcr, tie, \>a^),\ hers; its;
il)rigc(t)cr,t)ie,ta«)J theirs.
3^rcr, 3t)re, 3^red,]/>o««.
3^re (ter, btc, bn^), \pro7i.,
3^nge(t)cr,t)ie,t)ai3) J yours.
3^rctiviUcn(um), for your sake,
immer, always ; at all times ;
no^ — , atill; — me^r, more
and more,
in (65; dat. or ace), in, at;
into, to.
intern', while, whilst.
int)e'^(fen), meanwhile; whilst,
inner, inner, interior; tad — c,
the interior, inside,
inner^atb (gen.), on the inside,
within,
in nig, hearty, ar ^tionate.
3nfd^rift,/. (-en), inscription.
3nfirument', n. (-eg; -e), instru-
ment,
intereffant', interesting,
irgent ciner, — jemant; any one
at all.
3rlant, n. (-«), Ireland.
3taHcn, n. (-€), Italy.
3.
3a, yes, indeed, certainly, you
know ; did I (etc.) not; ja*
ttJO^t, yes indeed, yes to be
sure, yes certainly.
VOCABULARY.
511
3flrfii)en, n. (-5 ; — ), little
jacket.
jaf^cn, to hunt, cliase, pur.suo.
3ai^fll, ;/. (-c), hunting (uct of).
3iiger, m. {-a ; — ), liunter,
huntsman.
3fl^r, n. {-(&; -c), year.
2ai)xmaxU,m. {-(&; "e), (yeaily)
fair.
3a'fob, m. (-(?), James.
3antmer,m. (-i3),misery, wretch-
edness.
Sa^nti'nHiite,/ (-n), jessamine
blossom,
faivo^l, fiee |n.
je, ever (at any time); the
(before comparative degree^
1 26, 4) ; — gwei, two at a
time,
jcbenfatt^, certainly, at all
events,
jcber, iebe, j;cbe«, every, eacli,
every ono, any.
Ictermann (-i3), everyone, every-
body,
jcbcgmal, on each occasion,
every time,
female, ever, at any time,
icmant), somebody, some one,
any body, any one.
jettcr, jcnc, jencg, that, that one,
that person; yonder; the
former.
Icnfeit(^), on the other side,
beyond,
ff^t, now, at present.
3oc^, n. (-e5, -e), yoke.
3ol)nnn', m. (-^), John.
'^nf»(l'tintiSmitrmi4\otl n (~A • ^
glow-worm,
lu'bein, to shout with glee.
3iibfiijVi|To, / (-11), the Jews'
street, ghotto (wIkm-o all
Jews wore compelled to
dwell in the various cities,
until recent years).
3u'flfnt»,y:, youth.
3u'lt, w., July.
Jung C'er), young.
3unge, m. (-n; -n a7id \\i), boy,
lad.
3unnfraw, / (-cii), virgin,
maiden.
3ungling, m. (-c^; -e), young
man, youth.
3"'ni, w., June.
3i'ngen, m. (-^), George.
^.
.Jtafcc'tt, m. (-en ; -en), cadet.
Jlafer, m. (-«; — ), chafer,
beetle.
^affec, m. {-i), coffee.
^a'ffeeloffcl, in. (-^; — ), coffee-
spoon.
^at)n, m. (-c« ; "t), boat.
.flaifer, m. (-^; — ), emperor.
Jlaiferfronung,/ (-en), corona-
tion of an emperor.
^alb^braten, m. (-g ; — ), roast
of veal.
^aI6efote(ettp/(-n), veal-cutlet.
Fait (^'er), cold.
^amcra't), m. (-en ; -en), com-
rade,
^amin', n. (-eg ; -e), fireplace,
^amm, m. {-ti ; '^e), comb,
flint men, to comb,
^ammerbiener, m. (-^; — ), va-
^ampf, m. (-eg; -e), combat,
fight, struggle.
K-
512
VOCABULARY.
^anjllct; m. (-^ ; — ), chancellor.
Stappt,/ (-n), cap.
Stappd^trifT},. {-c ; — ), little cap.
Maximal' , m. (-le; -c), cardinal.
Jlarfu'nfelftein, m. (-e^; -c), car-
buncle.
^axl, m. {-&), Charles.
^arte,/ (-n), card.
Jlartoffel,/. (-n), potato.
^arto'ffelfeib,w. (-eg ; -er;,potato-
field.
^afc, m. (-g ; — ), cheese.
faufen, to buy.
tannXf hardly, scarcely.
^c^Ie,/ (-n), throat.
fe^ren, to turn.
fein, feiiie, fein, no, not a, not
any.
feiner, feinc, !cin(e)6, pron., no-
body, not anybody, no one,
none, not one.
^cUncr, m. (-g ; — ), waiter.
fcnncn (99), to know, be ac-
quainted with.
^enntnig, / (-fe), knowledge ;
pi. acquirements, attain-
ments.
^erl, m. (-eg; -c and-i), fellow,
chap.
^eqe,/ (-n), taper, candle.
^iitt,f. (-n), chain.
^int), n. (-eg ; -er), child.
^trc^e,/ (-n), church.
,^lang, m. ^-ed : -e), sound,
tone, note.
(^(agelieb, n. (-eg ; -er), mourn-
ful song, dirge, plaint.
flar, ciuar.
oviu|je,y. (-n), Class.
^lafjlter, m. (-g; — ), classic
writer, classic.
ffatfd), slap !
,^Iat)ier', tt. (-eg ; -e), piano.
^Ictb, n. (-eg; -er), dress; jo^.
clothes.
!(eiben, to clothe, dress.
^Ieiterfd)raiif, m. (-eg; "t),
clothes-press.
ffein, small, little.
^(ei'not), n. (-eg; -e and -ten),
jewel,
f lettern (feitt or l)aBen), to climb.
flimmen (123; fein or l)aUx\),
to climb.
flingeljt; to ring (said of small
bells) ; eg fliUi^elt, there is a
ring (at the door, etc.).
Jlingen (144), to sound.
^liufe,/ v'-n), latch, handle.
flirren, to clank, rattle.
floijfen, to knock.
flud, cluck !
flug C'er), wise, clever.
I^nckbt, m. (-n ; -n), boy.
^noM, m. (eg; -e), loud quick
sound ; clap, thunder-clap.
,^n after, m. (-g), (canister) to-
bacco.
^ne(^t, m. (-eg ; -e), (farm) ser-
vant, man-of -all- work; hos-
tler (of an inn),
fneifen (118), to pinch.
^nirpg, m. (-eg ; -c), little in-
significant chap, mannikin.
fnirfcfcen, to grind the teeth,
creak, squeak.
fniyen, to make a courtesy.
.^noc^en, m. (-g ; — ), bone.
fnuticj, knotty.
lUU'pfcn, t-o button ; to tie,
fasten.
jloc^, m. (-eg ; -e), cook.
VOCABULARY.
513
fodicn, to cook, boil.
^ol)Icn {i)l.)i coal.
JloUer, m. (-cl ; — ), jacket, jer-
kin, doublet.
hornet', m. (-en ; -en), comet.
fommen (167; fein), to come;
arrive; — tajfen, to send for ;
n>ie fommt ba^ ? how is that?
^ompagni'e,/ (-n), company (of
soldiers).
^om|)Iime'ntma(^en,n. (-i?),mak-
ing compliments, being po-
lite.
^onig, m. (-ed ; -e), king.
^onigin,/ (-nen), queen.
^onig^mantel, m. (-£<; "), king's
mantle.
^onigftrape,/ King-street.
fonnen (196 !202; ability, etc.),
to be able, can ; know, be
versed in, know how.
^on^ert', n. {-ti ; -e), concert.
^opf, m. (-c«J ; ''c), head, bowl
(of tobacco-pipe).
^opfd)en, n. (-0 ; — ), little
head.
fopfii'ber, fopfu'nter, head over
heels.
^orb, m. (-e« ; 'e), basket.
^orn, n. (-e^ ; -cr), grain, corn.
^ornfclb, n. (-c^; -tx), corn-
field, grain-field.
^oj!en, pi, expenses.
foften, {ace. of pers. and of
thing), to cost.
XxCL^tn, to crack, crash.
^ra^e,/ (-n), crow.
fram|jf^aft, convulsive.
h'anf (tt), ill; sick; ^rante,
{adj. subst.}f sick person, pa-
tient.
^ranf^eit, / (-en), disease, ill-
ness.
.^ran^, m. (-Ci? ; -e), wreath, gar-
land.
h'Ciu^, curly.
.Jlrau^fopf, m. (-e^; "c), curly-
head.
^raut, n. (-eg ; ''er), herb.
.R'reite, /, chalk ; chalk-mark
used in tavern reckonings ;
je^t giebt'iS \va^ in tic — , now
there'll be the mischief to
pay.
freitemeif , white as chalk, pale
as a sheet.
Jtreig, m. (-eg ; -e), circle.
^reuj, n. (-eg; -e), cross; bag
cifcrne — , the iron cross (a
Prussian decoration given
for personal valour on the
battlefield, corresponding to
the Victoria Cross in the
British army).
tveiigbrao, thoroughly good, ex-
cellent.
friec^en (123; fein or :^aben), to
creep, crawl.
StxitQ, m. (-eg ; -e), war.
friegen, to get.
^deggmann, m. (-eg; -er and
— leute), warrior, soldier.
^ri'tifer, m. (-g ; — ), critic.
^rone,/ (-n), crown.
^rug, m. (-eg ; "e), jug, mug.
.^ubi'fnjurget,/ (-n), cube-root.
^ii(^C,/. (-tt), kitchen.
^'mbe»t, m. (-g ; — ), cake.
^iid)Iciu, n. (-g; — ), chicken,
chick.
.tlui^ef, / (-n), ball; bullet;
globe.
514
VOCABULARY.
j^^jj^^
^ul),/ C'e), oow.
fiil^i, cool.
fii^n, bold.
Summer, m. (-i), grief, sorrow.
jtunfl,/ (-e), art.
J^unjllcr, m. (-^ ; — ), artist.
^U|)pel;/ (-n), cupola, dome.
furj (-cr), short.
lurjlid^, not long ago, lately,
recently.
^u§, m. (-fe« ; -fe), kiss.
fiiflfcn, to kiss.
JJutfc^er, w. (-d; — ), coach-
man, driver.
8a^e,y!, refreshment. ;
lac^cln, to smile.
lac^en {gen. or iifecr + acc), to
laugh (at).
Satfeg, m. (-e0 ; -c), salmon. .
labctt (186), to load ; to invite.
Sftteit; m. {-i), window-shutter
{pi. — ) ; shop, store {pi. -).
^a^ix, n, (-g ; — ), couch, bed.
Samm, n. {-ti ; "tx), lamb.
Sanb, n. (-c« ; '-er and -e), land,
country; country (opposed
to town); auf tent — t, in
the country ; auf« — Qf^i^,
to go into the country ; ju
— e, by land ; ^ier gu — c, in
this country.
Sonbfartf,/ (-n), map.
fianbfc^aft,/ (-en), landscape.
Sanbflrafe, /. (-n), highway,
road.
laxiQ (-cr), long, tall.
!ttng(c), adv. long, a long time
or while, fo:* a long time ;
fo — , as long as; lange iiid)t,
not for a long time, not by
a long way.
?angei»et(e,/, ennui; — l)abcn,
to be bored.
longfam, slow.
lang^, along.
langji, long ago, long since.
Sanje,/ (-n), lance, spear.
Sarm, m. {-t^), noise.
lajTen (188; ::00, 7), to let,
allow ; leave ; have (a thing
done); fagen — , to send
word; fommett — , to send
for; tc^ kffc bad 33ud) ein-
bittten, I am having the book
bound; eS I'd^t ftc^ nid)t
leugneu, it cannot be denied.
8afl,/ (-en), load, burden.
Cajler, n. (-g ; — ), vice.
Satein, n. {-&), Latin.
lateittifc^, Latin.
Saul>, n. (-e^), leaves, foliage.
2auf, m. (-eg ; "t), course.
(aufen (188; fein), to run.
Saune, /, (-n), whim, humour,
caprice.
Saureni^iug, m., Lawrence.
taut, loud, aloud.
lauten, to ring (of large bells),
toll.
lautlog, silent, dumb.
Sajjarone, m. ( — ; -i), lazz,a-
rone, Italian beggar.
,t1>tn, to live; be alive.
Seben, n. (-g), life.
leben'big, alive, lively.
2ebeW0^l,7i.(-g),farewell, adieu.
Sebtag {indecl.), life, whole life.
Seber, n. (-g), leather.
lecjen, to lay, put, place, set.
Iel)nen, to lean, set, prop.
VOCABULARY.
515
Sel^re,/ (-n), teaching, instruc-
tion, doctrine.
Secret, m. (-g ; — ), teacher,
master.
£etb, m. (-eg ; -er), body.
Seiche,/ (-n), corpse.
Ici(^t, light, easy ; readily.
Seiti, n, (-eg), sorrow, harm,
injury.
Icib {used as pred. with fetii,
Werten and t^un), sorry,
grieved; eg ifl, eg t^ut mir
— , I am sorry ; j;emant>(en)
etwflg gu — e t^un, to hurt,
harm anyone.
Iciten (118), to suffer, endure;
an ctwag — , to suffer from
anything.
(eiber, alas ! unfortunately !
8eit)g,w. {of adj. leit>, see above),
harm, injury.
leil^en (120), to lend; to bor-
row.
Seine,/, (-n), line, cord, string,
Icifc, gently, softly, in a low
tone.
Sciflen, m. (-g; — ), (shoemak-
er's) last.
leipcn, to accomplish ; SSergi(()t
— (aitf+ctcc), to decline.
Seftion',/ (-en), lesson.
Scnc^en, /*. (-g), Nellie.
8en3,m. (-eg; -e), spring, spring-
tide.
tcrnen, to learn, study.
Icfcn (181), to read.
Sefen, n. (-g), (act of) reading.
le^t, last, final.
leu^ten, to shine, flash.
Seud^ter, m. (-g; — ), candle-
stick.
Sente, pL (no sing.), people,
persons.
Sejriton, n. (-g ; -fa), lexicon,
dictionary.
Sic^t, n. (-eg ; -er and -e), light;
candle,
({(^t, light, bright ; thin, clear
(of a forest),
lic^ten, to clear (a forest); fid)
— , (of the forest) to grow
light, show a clearing,
lieb, dear, precious ; — ^abett,
to love.
?iebe,/, love, affection ; — ju,
love of or for.
tiefeen, to love.
Heter (comp. of gem); conj.,
rather ; ic^ ge^c — , I prefer
to walk,
liefclic^, lovely.
£iet>, n. (-eg ; -er), song,
liefern, to deliver, supply,
liegen (181 ; fein, t)aben), to lie;
be ; be situated,
linf, left ; bic — e, the left hand,
linfg, to or on the left.
iipptj. (-n), lip.
loben, to praise.
8o^, n. (-eg ; -er), hole.
Sodfe,/. (-n),curl, lock (of hair).
Soffel, m. (-g ; — ), spoon.
So^engrin, m. (-g), name of an
opera by Wagner
go^n, m. (-eg ; -e and -e), re-
ward, pay.
lo^nen, to reward, repay; fi(^
— , to be worth while.
Sorbeer, m. (-g ; -n), laurel.
:tpriiti,/., ijoreiei (witcii oi rne
Rhine).
So'rcni, m. {-tn^), Lawrence.
516
VOCABULARY.
lo^, loose, slack ; tufl^ tjl — ?
what is the matter ?
Sof^blatt, 71. (-eg; "er), sheet
of blotting paper.
lofcn, to free, redeem; ein 33i(-
Ict — , to buy a ticket.
Iogfc^ie§en ( 1 23), toshoot quick-
ly, shoot away.
Iqgfpringcn (144; fein; auf +
acc), to spring upon, leap
upon.
Sotfe, m. (-n ; -ti), pilot.
Souife,/ (-ng), Louisa.
8ijtt)e, m. (-tt ; -n), lion.
8ut)tt)icj, m. (-g), Louis ; Lewis.
8uft,yi (-e), air, atmosphere.
Suftfa^rt,/ (-cn),aerial journey.
lugcn, to look, peep, peer.
liigcn (131), to lie, utter a
falsehood.
Siigner, m. (-g ; — ), liar.
Ium))Ctt, to treat shabbily ; t)U
tflrffi t)ic^ nirf)t — laffcn, you
mustn't let yourself be beat-
en (p. 437, 1. 110).
2umpen:§unt), m. (-eg ; -e), raga-
muffin, beggarly fellow.
£ufl,y! C'e), lust, pleasure, de-
light ; — ^aben JU, to have a
mind to.
lujltg, merry; flc^ iibcr einen —
ma6^tn, to make sport of
one.
m.
madden, to make ; arrange ;
cause, give ; be (in arithm.
calculations); tc^ mad^c mir
nic^tg barauci, I care nothing
for it; cine ©eercife — , to
take a voyage; einen ©pa* |
jiergang — , to take a walk;
ftc^ auf ben 2Ceg — , to set
out.
^a6)t,/. C'e), might, power.
mad)ttg, mighty, powerful.
''})iat)d)en; n. (-^ ; — ), girl.
^}JZa'i)(l)engeftalt,/ (-en), girlish
figure.
SJJa^t), yi (-e), maid, maid-ser-
vant.
5>?agen, m. (-6 ; — ), stomach.
Wai, m. (-eg or -en), May.
Wi%m,f. (-n), mane.
ma^nen, to warn, admonish.
^ajeflat',/ (-en), Majesty.
^al, n. (-eg; -e), time (occa-
sion); lyxm le^teu — , for the
last time.
malen, to paint.
'2)?a!er, m. (-g ^ — ), painter.
Walcrei',/ (art of) painting.
man, pron.^ one, we, you, they,
people; — Jacjt, they say,
people say, it is said.
man(^(er), adj. and pron.,
many a.
^O'Jangel, m. (-g ; ''), want.
9}?ann, m. (-eg ; ''ev), man; hus-
band.
?0'?ann(l>en, n. (-g; — ), little
man, mannikin ; dear hus-
band.
?!)?antel, m. (-g ; ";, cloak, man-
tle.
5Jlar^ett, n. (-g ; — ), fairy-tale,
story.
?D?arckntt)aIb,m. (-eg; -ev), fairy
forest, enchanted wood.
^3)^ir(^arete, / (-ng), Margaret.
^Jcavie,/. (-ng), Mary.
'^axt,/. ( — ), mark (a coin =
VOCABULARY.
617
100 pfennig or about 25
cents).
SJlarft, m. (-c<J; ''e), market, fair.
9J?armorbecfen, n. {-i; — ), mar-
ble basin.
9J?armorMtt), n. (-c^; -er), mar-
ble statue.
marmorn, (of) marble.
5)^armortrep|)e,^.' (-n), marble
staircase.
marfc^iercn (fetn or ^aben), to
march.
Waxi, m. (-c^), March.
'^a\(X\\, ply measles.
WlA\i, m. {-ti ; -en), mast.
^a^, n. (e^ ; -e), measure.
WlafitniQ, m. (-ci< ; "e), pint-
mug.
SWat^emati!,/, mathematics.
3JZat()entati!cr, m. (-^; — ), ma-
thematician.
3J?atrofe, m. (-n ; -n), sailor.
^Q,yx\, n. (-eg; "er), mouth,
muzzle (of an animal).
maulfaul, slow of speech, taci-
turn.
SJ'JauUier, n. (-eS ; -e), mule.
^au^ff. (''f), mouse.
SlJiaufoIe'um, n. (-0; -een), mau-
soleum, tomb.
^Heer, n. (-t€ ; -c), sea, ocean.
fO^eevf^auni; m. (-e^), sea-foam ;
meerschaum.
mc^l, n. (-eg), flour.
me{)r, more ; nid)t — , no longer,
not now.
me{)rere, several; mcbrereg, sev-
eral things, a good (ieal.
me-^rmalg, several times.
meiben (120), to avoid.
5/?eiIe, / (-n), mile (German),
league,
mcin, mcinc, mcin, my.
meine (ber, tie, bag), mine,
meincn, to think, be of opinion,
suppose, mean ; say ; bag
foUtc ic^ — , I should think
so (emphatic).
mcinetmegen, for my sake ; for
all I care,
meiuige (ber, bic, bag), mine.
'Mtinvin^,/. (-en), opinion,
meifl (superl. of ijiel), most;
am — en, most, most of all;
— eng, for the most part,
geneially, usually.
Wlti^fx, m. (-g ; — ), master,
melten (124), to milk.
9Jcelobie',\/ (-n), melody, tune,
?iJ?elobei',/ air.
iJJlelone,/ (-n), melon.
^mo^tj'. (-n),multitude,crowd ;
great quantity or number.
^Otenfd), m. (-en; -en), human
being, man; person; pl.^
mankind, people.
?!J?enfd)enfceie, / (-n), human
soul.
mer!en, to observe, notice, re-
mark,
meffen (181), to measure,
^effer, n. (-g ; — ), knife.
9J?etaU', n. (-eg ; -e), metal,
mtcten, to rent, hire.
mild!) J., milk.
milcl)iuet§, milk-white.
milb(e), mild, gentle.
Million',/ (-en), million.
Wnutz,/. (-n), minute.
^O^inutenjeiger, m. (-g; — ),
minute-hand.
518
VOCABULARY.
mir {dat ofi^), (to) me.
mtf'mutig, cross, disappointed.
mtt (46), with; by (in multi-
plication); ac?v., along with.
mitbringen (99), to bring along.
mitcffen (181), to eat (in com-
pany) with others.
mitfommen (167; ffin), to come
along.
mitlcitig, sympathetic, com-
passionate.
mitnc^mcn (167),to take along.
ntitfpiclcn, to take part in
play; play a part.
^ittaQ, m. (-eg ; -e), mid-day,
noon ; ,^u — cjfen, to dine.
SJJittagscjycn, n. (-0 ; — ), din-
ner.
9)'?itte,y!, middle, midst, centre.
mitteilcn, to impart.
mitten, in the middle or midst
of; — im SCinter, in the
middle of winter.
^itternac^t,/ (-e), midnight.
5JiittW0d^, m. i-i), Wednesday.
mogen (196-202; preference,
liking), to be able ; may ;
like ; id) mag bag nic^t, I do
not like that; ic^ mijd^te, I
shojild like.
moglid^, possible; bag tfl gem
— , that is very probable.
^ofta, m., Mocha (coffee).
^lonarcb', m. (-en; -en), mon-
arch.
^o'nat, m. (-eg ; -e), month.
'3Jionb, m. (-eg ; -e), moon.
?(Wontag, m. (-eg ; -e), Monday.
ilJcuog, n. (-eg ; -e), moss.
^orgcn, m. (-g ; — ), morning;
guten — , good mornin
beg — g {or morgeng), in the
morning.
g;
morgen, to-morrow ; — friit),
to-morrow morning; ^eutc
— , this morning.
?i)torgeubdmmerung,,/., morning
dawn.
^orgenglode, / (-n), morning
bell.
miibe, tired, weary.
W\x^t, f. (-n), trouble ; nid)t
fcer — ttjert, not worth while.
mii^en (fut), to take trouble,
try hard.
mii^eiJoU, laborious, tiresome,
troublesome.
m\x\)\t,f. (-n), mill.
mii^fam, "» tedious, slow, diffi-
mii^feltg,/ cult.
multiplijteren, to multiply.
9J?unb, m. (-eg), mouth.
mitngen, to coin.
munter, cheerful, awake, safe
and sound.
murmein, to murmur, grumble.
^ufff',/, music.
muft!alifd), musical.
^uftfant', m. (-en ; -en), musi-
cian.
mnftjieren, to make music.
mitjfen( 196-202; necessity), to
be obliged or forced, must.
?i3'?ii^iggang, m. (-eg), idleness.
^Ut, m. (-eg), mood, courage,
spirit ; mtr ifl fc^Ieci^t gu — e,
T feel ill ; frozen — eg, cheer-
fully.
mnttg, courageous, spirited.
ivZuttev,/ ("), mother.
5y?iitter($en, n. (-g; — ), mother
darling; little old woman.
VOCABULARY.
619
; in the
— friit),
aorning
tiorning
e; nid)t
h while,
trouble,
resome,
w, diffi-
ke, safe
rumble.
l), musi-
isic.
5sity), to
d, must,
idleness,
courage,
1 3U — e.
'.^, cheer-
rited.
, mother
woman.
SJJii^e,/ (-n), cap.
SW^rte,/ (-n), myrtle.
nad^ (46), after; according to;
by (of a time-piece); past
(of hour of day); to (before
proper names of places) ; —
J^aufc, home.
ytad^iiav, m. (-g and -n ; -n),
neighbour.
nad&bem', conj., after.
nad^benfen (99), to think, re-
flect.
nac^gcbcn (181), to yield.
na^gc^cn (188; fcin), to go
after; go or be too slow (of
a time-piece).
na^fommctt (167; ^dn + dat.),
to come after, follow.
^a^mittaQ, m. (-e^ ; -e), after-
noon ; beg — g, in the after-
noon.
5^ad^d^t,/ (-en), news.
nac^fc^te^eit (123 -f dat.), to
shoot at, shoot after.
nflc^fc^leic^ert(118; ^iin + dat.),
to sneak after.
nad^fefien {I8l+dat.), to look
after, follow with the eyes.
ncjd^fl (superL o/naf)), next.
M6^^i, m. (adj. suhst), fellow-
creature, neighbour.
ncic^flcng, shortly, soon, very
soon.
5f?a(t)t,/ C^c), night.
ncic^tlid^, nightly, nocturnal.
nadft, naked, bare.
naj^(e), (na^er, nac^fl), near.
^^^tf-) nearness ; neighbour-
hood ; in meiner — , near
me; in my neighbourhood,
nci^ren, to nourish, feed.
5lame, m. (-n^ (yr n; -n), name,
title,
nameng, by name.
S^lafe,/ (-n), nose.
5fJatnr',/ (-en), nature,
natitr'tid^, naturally, of course,
I suppose.
^ta'>pt\,n. (-g), Naples.
««ebel, m. (-g ; — ), fog, mist,
vapour.
9?cklfnaul, m. (-eg ; "t), ball of
mist.
Sf^ebelflreif, m. (-eg ; -c), streak
of mist,
neben (65), beside, besides;
near, alongside of, by.
^iebcngimmer, n, (-g; — ), small
room at the side, adjoining
room,
nebfl (51), together with, in-
cluding.
9leffe, m. (-n ; -n), nephew,
ne^men (167), to take; fid^ in
Slc^t — , to take care, beware,
neigen, to incline, bow.
nein, no.
ncnnen (99), to call, name,
netto, net {commercial term).
5^e0, n. (-eg ; -e), net.
neu, new.
neultrf), lately, the other day,
not long ago.
neun, nine,
neunmal, nine-times.
neunfteKta, of nine places,
neunte^aib, eight and a half,
nic^t, not ; — me^r, no longer;
— nja^r? is (it, etc.) not (so)?
520
VOCABULARY.
■
^lic^tparierett, n. (-«), disobedi-
ence ; refusal to obey orders.
nid)t^ {indecl.)^ nothing,
nicfen, to nod.
nie, never,
nieter, down.
«nictcrlantc (t)ic), pi, The Ne-
therlands.
ntct)erftiir3cn(fein),to fall down,
tumble,
nicblirf), neat, pretty, charming,
ntcbrti^, low, lowly,
nie'maut), nobody, no one, no
person, not anybody, etc.
ni'rgenti^, nowhere,
noc^, still, yet, even ; — eiti,
one more, another; — tU
nja^, something (anything)
more; — einmal, over again ;
— ^eute, before the end of
the day, before the day is
over; — immcr, up to the
present time, still ; — ttor
i)ier;5e^n Jagen, only a fort-
night ago.
«nort>'eifcnfea^n,/ (-en), North-
ern-Railway.
5f^ot, / (-c), need, necessity,
trouble ; — tt)un, to be ne-
cessary,
ttotig, necessary; — l^atcn, to
have need of.
9?ooember, m. (-«), November,
niic^tern, sober ; hungry, fast-
ing ; plain, commonplace.
5'^u'mero, (indecL), number
(Lat.).
nun, now.
nur, only, just.
«Ru§,/ (")», nut.
9^uf^ec!e,/ (-n), nut-hedge.
nii^en,)to be of use, profit,
nu^cn,j avail.
9lu^en, m. (-^), profit, use.
nit^Hc^, useful.
D.
ob, whether, if.
obcn, above, up-stairs ; nad^ — ,
upward.
Dberft, m. (-en; -en), colonel.
1^^'5'|although.
!Dd)fe, m. (-n ; -n), ox.
Od)f entreibcr, m. (-5 ; — ), ox-
driver, drover.
C)d)f entoicttel, n. (-g; — ), quar-
ter of beef.
ober, or.
Dfcn, m. (-« ; -), stove.
offen, open.
Dfftjier', m. (-e^ ; -e), officer.
offnen (fid?), to open.
oft C'er), often, frequently.
oftmal^, often.
D'^eim, m. (-e« ; -e), uncle.
o^nc (34), without ; but for.
ojnctie^', as it is, anyway.
O^r, n. (-c(5 ; -en), ear.
Onfet, m. {-€ ; — ), uncle.
Opfcr, n. (-g ; — ), victim.
ortentti A, proper, genuine, real.
JDrt, m. (-e^ ; -e andHx), place,
spot.
^aax, n. (-eg ; -e), pair, couple.
paax, adv., few, several,
fagc, m. (-n ; -n), page, at-
tendant (g soft as in French.)
^ala'fl, m. (-e^ ; "t), palace.
VOCABULARY.
621
3, profit,
use.
colonel.
— ), quar-
^e.
officer.
ently.
uncle,
but for.
yway.
ir.
mcle.
ictim.
mine, real,
-er), place,
uir, couple,
sral.
page, at-
iw French. )
palace.
^antoffel, m. (-e ; -n and — ),
slipper.
fapkt', n. {-(€; -t), paper,
^apft, m. (-c« ; -:;, pope,
^arig', n. (»on — ), Paris,
parltercn, to talk, chat, jabber,
pajfenb, fit, suitable.
fatxom,/. (-n) cartridge,
pcinigen, to torment,
^ela, m. (-eg ; -e), fur, skin.
§)crle,/ (-n), pearl,
^ctrug, m., Peter,
^ctj, m. (-cne), Bruin.
t)fat), m. (-c« ; -e), path, road,
^farrer, m. (-«; ~), parson,
minister, clergyman.
5)feife,/ (-n), pipe,
pfeifen (118), to whistle,
^feifenfopf, m. (-eg; ^'e), pipe
bowl.
^feifenro^r, n. (-eg ; -e cwc^ -c),
pipe stem.
5)feifen|lopfer, m (-g; — ), pipe-
stopper.
3)fei(er, m. (-g; _), pillar,
column.
pfennig, m. (-eg ; -e), the one
hundredth part of a mark,
penny.
5)ferb, n. (-eg ; -e), horse.
5)fert)efca()n, / (-en), tramway,
tram ; street-cars, horse-
cars.
^fert)e^anbrer,m.(-g; _),horse-
dealer.
Wfluine,/ (-n), plum.
|)flegen (weak), to attend to;
to be accustomed, be wont.
Wm, ^n. (-eg ; -e), plough,
^funb, 71. (-eg ; -e), pound,
^^ilologe, m. (-n ; -n), philolo-
gist, student of philology;
student of languages,
^^ilofop^ie',/ (-n), philosophy,
^(an, w. (-eg; -e or -c), plan,
design,
planet', m. (-en ; -en), planet.
pldtfrf)ern, to splash,
plattfii^ic;, flat-footed.
^Ifl0,m. (-eg ; -e), place ; square;
— nel)men, to sit down, be
seated,
platen (fein), to burst,
^la^regen, m. (-g ; — ), shower,
down-pour,
plautern, to chat, talk,
^laufciierei', / (-en), tale-bear-
ing, tattling.
pto^Iirf), sudden.
plmni, plump !
|)oltern, to make a noise.
fommtv, m. (-g or -n; -n),
Pomeranian,
pommerfc^, Pomeranian,
portion',/ (-en), portion, plate
(of meat, etc.).
5)or3etta'n, n. (-eg), porcelain.
5)or3eaa'nfopf, m. (-eg ; -e), por-
celain pipe-bowl,
f oft,/ (-en), post, post-office.
?)ofibote, m. (-n ; -u), postman.
5)rad)t, / (-en), magnificence,
splendour,
prad^tig, magnificent, splendid,
prfl^len, to boast, brag,
prani^en, to be splendid, re-
splendent, brilliant,
^reig, m. (-eg; -c), price; prize.
l)retfen (120), to nraise.
preiggeben (181),' to give up,
give away,
^rinaejjin,/. (-nen), princess.
522
VOCABULARY.
froccnt', n. (-c« ; -e), per cent,
^rofcjfor, m. (-« ; -en) T^rofessor.
^romotjlcrcn, to take . degree,
graduate,
^ropt^e'afdj, prophetic.
«»rot)ina,/. (-en), province,
^rottinjtalflabtcben, n. (-d ; — ),
provincial town,
^ublifum, n. (-«), public ; audi-
ence,
^unft, m. (-e« ; -e), point ; —
gc^n U()r, at ten o'clock pre-
cisely.
«pitnftlid)teit,/, punctuality,
^uppe,/. (-n), doll,
pur, pure,
pu^en, to poliah, dean.
Qua'bcrflein, m. (-e^; -e), cut-
stone, freestone.
£)ualm, m. (-e^), thick vapour,
smoke.
qualmen, to puff out clouds of
smoke.
Ouaflc,/. (-n), tassel.
QucUe,/. (-n), fountain, spring,
source.
quetlen (124; fein), to gush,
flow.
giabatt', w. (-eg ; -e), discount,
abatement,
giat^, n. (-e<? ; -er), wheel.
rac;en, to project.
3llant), m. (-e^ \ "er), edge, rim,
brim,
rafdn quick, rapid,
rafttog, restless.
3flat, w. {<i), counsel, advice.
raten (188), to counsel, advise.
S«atl)aii«, n. (-eiJ ; ''er), town-
hall.
3ftauit, m. (-e«), smoke.
raud)cn, to smoke.
giauct)wolfe, / (-n), cloud of
smoke.
3flaum, w. (-efi ; • e), room, space,
raunen, to whisper,
^flupe,/ (-n), caterpillar.
.v,ufpern (fidj), to clear the
throat, hem.
gHecl)nen, n. (-i), arithmetic
3Red)nung,/ (-en), account, bill,
reckoning; calculation; ein
©trid) t)urd> t)ie — , disap-
pointment; fc^reikn (Sie t»a«
auf meinc — , charge that to
me.
rec&t, right; tie — e, th3 right
hand ; adv., quite, very,
me^t, n. (-ei? ; -e), right ; —
^aben, to be right, be in the
right.
rect)tg, to (on) the right,
red^t'geitig, at the right time,
punctually.
9^et)e,/ (-n), speech; oration,
reben, to speak, calk.
gHeformatten', / (-en), reform-
ation.
9lcgen, m. (-g), rain,
gie'gentropfen, m. {-i ; — ), drop
of rain,
regieren, to reip;n, rule, govern.
JRegierung,/ (-en), government,
reign; unter ber — , in the
reign (of),
gtegiment', n. (-c5 ; er), regi-
ment,
regnen, to rain.
VOCABULARY.
623
advise,
town-
oud of
I, space.
ar.
jar the
letic.
int, bill,
ion; cin
, disap-
(Sic ta^
J that to
hs right
very,
ght; —
36 in the
it.
ht time,
oration.
, reform-
— ), drop
!, govern,
ernment,
-f in the
er), regi-
SWc^, n. (-CiJ ; -f), roe, deer.
reiben (120), to rub.
rcic^, rich, wealthy.
reidjcn, to reach, hand.
rcif, ripe.
reifcn, to ilpen, mature.
3flei^(c)n, m. (-^ ; — ), dance.
rein, clean, pure.
fReii, m. {-ti), rice.
JHcig, n. {-ti ; -er), twig.
9leife,/ (-n), journey, voyage ;
cine — mac^en, to take a
journey.
reifefcrtig, ready to start (on a
journey).
3flcifefoflen, pi, travelling-ex-
penses.
rcifcn (fcinanc?^at)en),to travel,
journey, go.
3'leifentie(r) {adj.suhst), travel-
ler.
reipcn (118), to tear, pull.
rciten (118; fein and ^abcn),
to ride.
Sleiter, m. (-3 ; — ),] . ,
9lcitcrgmann,m(-e«; l"^®^'
;^er and -leute), J Norseman.
reijen, to charm, allure, tempt.
rcnncn (99; fein and l^aben),
to run, race.
9?ej^, m. (-e«; -c), remainder,
remains, rest.
SReftauration', / (-en), eating-
house, restaurant.
retten, to save, rescue.
fjitiimxo^imxl, n. (-eg ; -e), life-
saving work, work of rescue.
reuen (impers.), to repent; eg
reut mt^ {+gen.), I repent
(of).
ffH^tin, m. (-eg), Rhine.
SH^cumattgmu^, ?». {rjen. — ),
rheumatism.
ric^tig, right, correct ; correct-
ly > — 9ft)f n, to be correct
(of a time-piece).
JRic^tung,/ (-en), direction.
viid^tn (123), to smell.
JRiefe, m. (-n ; -n), giant.
riefeln, to ripple.
^^^H> gjg^-ntic, enormous.
9lint)fleifd), n. (-eg), beef.
9ling, m. (-eg ; -e), ring.
JHingel, m. (-g ; — ), ring, curl.
ringen (144), to wring, wrestle.
ringgum', all around, round
about.
vinnm (158; fein), to run, flow.
aiippenflof , m. (-eg ; -e), blow
in the ribs.
^litt, m. (-eg ; — e), ride.
Slitter, m. (-g ; — ), knight.
rittlingg, astride.
3flo(!, m. (-eg ; -c), coat.
3flo(f(^en, 7i. (-{'.; —), little coat,
jacket; gown; skirt.
rotten, to roll.
ffioman', m. (-eg ; -e), romance,
novel.
JRomer, m. (-g ; —), Roman,
Slofa^^iit, m. (-eg ; -e), pink hat.
3^ofe,/ (-n), rose.
Stofenbtatt, n. (-eg; -er), rose-
leaf.
rofiq, rosy.
Slo^, n. (-fe^ti; -fe), horse, steed.
Slof tein, n. (-g ; — ), little horse,
pony.
rot, adj., red.
jHot1appci)en, n. (-g), L'ttle Red
(Riding) Hood.
Slot'wein, m. (-eg; -e), red- wine.
524
VOCABULART.
I
JRiibf,/ (-n), turnip ; j^elbc — ,
carrot..
^Jlubin', m. (ciJ ; -c), ru))y.
JKilbel, m. (-<J ; — ), herd, flock,
rubcrn, to row.
rufcn (188), to call.
0lu^e,/, rest, qc'et.
ni^eit, to rest, repo.^e.
rul)t(^, quiet.
SHu^m, m. (-e«), praise,
rii^rcn, to move, touch, aflect,
strike,
runb, round.
9li!fTe, m. (-n ; -n), Russian,
rutfc^m (fein), to slide, slip.
(Saat, m. (-ed ; @atc), hall.
(3at)el,m. ( vJ; — ), sword, sabre.
fdbelu, to cut, hew, hack.
^CL6!it, f. (-n), thing, matter,
affair, business ; bi^ tu tei ^
ncr — gewi^? are you certain
of your information ? etc.
©adf, m. (-eg ; -e), sack, bag.
©flQfr/ (-"). saw.
fagcn, to say, tell ; — ^ijren,
to hear say, hear.
©a^nc,/, cream.
®aite, / (-n), chord, string;
stringed instrument.
<SaitcnfpieI, n. {<i ; -t), string-
ed instrument ; lyre.
fammeln, to gather, collect;
jlc^ — , to collect one's self,
gather one's wits together.
fammtlirf), complete (of literary
works).
[an ft, soft, gentle.
(Sanger, m. (-«?; — ),\.5in„er
©angenn,/ (-nen), j ^
®an!t, saint.
(Sara,./! (if), Saniii.
(8arra<J, m. (-fc»j ; -fe), sword,
sabre,
fatt, satisfied,
battel, m. {-i ; -), saddle.
3a^, m. (-ei3 ; "e), sentence ;
leap, jump.
faufcn (123), to drink (of
beasts).
(5au(e,,/! (-n), pillar, column.
fiinfeln, to rustle.
(5(feate(n), m. (-n or -n« ; ''n),
damage, injury, harm, mis-
chief ; (i iji f^ate, it is a
pity.
©dnitel, m. (-3 ; — ), skull.
(Sd)af, n. {-(& : -e), sheep.
(Sc^afer, m. (-ij; — ), shepherd.
(Sc^afernnf , m. (-ciJ ; "e), shep-
herd's coat.
frf)affen (186), to create.
S(l)ale,/ (-n), cup, dish.
fit^atlen, to sound, resound.
(Scatter, m. (-5; — ), wicket,
ticket-office.
fc^amcn (f!d) ; gen. or iiber +
ace), to be ashamed.
@(^ar, / (-en), host, company,
crowd.
fc^arf ("er), sharp.
(Sdjattcn, m. (-g; — ), shade,
shadow.
(Sc^attenbtlb, n. (-eg; -er), shad-
owy image.
fc^attig, shady.
fi^anen, to look, see, behold.
fd)aumen, to foam.
(Sd)eere,/. (-n), scissors.
VOCAnULARY.
525
®cl)effcl, m. (-»J ; — ), pock.
®d)cibf,y! (n), wiiuiow-pfine.
frt)cibcn (120), to separuto.
fc^ctncn ('20, dat.), to sliine;
to appear, seem.
(5d)c(in, m. (-c^ ; -c), scamp,
rascal, fellow, chap.
fc^eltcn (159), to scold.
©c^cnfe,/ (-u), inn, tavern.
fc^cnfcil {dat.ofpprsonandacc.
of thinrj), to give, make a
present of, present; to pour
(out of one vessel into an-
other).
f^ercn (131), to shear.
fdjicfen, to send.
fc^ieben (131), to shove, push.
f(^ief, crooked, awry.
fc^icr, almost, nearly.
fc^ic§cn (123), to shoot.
(Sc^iff, n. {-H; -e), ship, vessel.
©c^iffer, m. {-i ; — ), boatman,
sailor.
<Sc^ilt), w. (-c^; -I ), shield.
<Sc()ilt), n. (-ec; -cr), sign-board.
(Sd)iIt)frote,/ (-n), tortoise.
fd^immern, to shine, glitter,
gleam.
(Sd)rarf)t,/ (-en), battle.
fd^Iflfcn (KS8), to sleep ; jicf) —
Icgen, — geben, to retire to
rest, go to bed.
@d)Iafrocf, m. {-t^; -e), dressing-
gown.
<Sd)(af'3tmmer, w. (-S; — ), bed-
room.
(Sc^Iajl, m. (-e« ; -e), blow ;
stroke (of paralysis).
fc^Iageu (186), io beat, strike.
@c^IaJ:^entglDci, m. {comic pro}^.
name), Thrashem.
fc^lanf, Hh'ruier, graceful.
fd)(ecb^ bad.
fd)leiiiHMi (1 18; fcin), to slink,
sneak ; creep, crawl.
fd)leifcn (118), to sharpen,
grind,
f^leppen, to drag, haul.
®rf)Ieuber,/ (->»), sling,
fi'^leiitcrn, to hurl, fling, sling.
fd)(ic§en (123), to lock, shut,
close ; to conclude, finish.
fd)limm, bad.
Sc^linv^el, m. {-i ; — ), rascal,
scamp.
fd)(in}<en (144), to sling; to
twine ; to swallow.
8d)litten, m. {-i ; — ), sleigh.
®c^(itt'fd)ul)Iaufen, w. (•v?)/(act
of) skating.
@d)Io§, n. (-)eii; -for), castle,
pala'^e.
@d)lof5ti;yr, n. {-(S ; -e), castle-
gate.
(S(5lot, m. (-f« ; -e and -'c),
flue, chimnev.
(Bd)(iicf, m. (-e^ ; -c), swallow,
draught, pull.
@d)Iu^, m. (-[eiJ; "t), ending,
conclusion.
<Sc^(iiffe(, m. (-« ; — ), key.
@d)IiiffelIo(^, Qi. {-ti ; "ex), key-
hole.
fd)mal C'er), narrow.
id)inerfen; to taste, reli?! ; Juie
fc^mecft ^bmn tiefcv? f how
do you like (the taste of)
this?
©c^mcicbelei', / (-en), flattery,
fc^meirijein (dat.), to flatter.
fd)irci§cn (118), to throw,
fling.
526
VOCABULARY.
fc^meljcu (124 ; intr., fein ; tr.,
^aben), to melt, smelt.
(5d)mcr3, m. (-e^ or -twi ; -en),
pain.
®Amu(!, m. (-e^), ornament.
fc^miicfcn, to ornament, adorn.
frf)nar^en, to snore.
®d)naust)art, m. (-ed; -e), mous-
tache.
©^nci!c,/ (-n), snail.
*5^nee, m. (-g), snow.
[(^nteiueif, snow-white, snowy.
[d)neibcn (118), to cut, reap;
ft(^ in tie J^anb — , to cut
one's hand.
©(^neifcer, m. (-^ ; — ), tailor.
fd)neien, to snow.
fc^nell, quick ; quickly.
(Sc^ncUsu^, m. (-e^; -e), ex-
press-train.
(5(^nitt, m. (-e^ ; -e), cut.
fitnuppern, to sniff, smell about.
@d)nur, / (-e), string, cord ;
shoulder-strap, shoulder-
cord (of a staff-officer's uni-
form).
fc^nurr, whirr ! whizz !
©(^nurrfeart, m. (-c^; ''e), mous-
tache.
fc^on, already, as early as,
readily, easily, indeed ; —
lange,. for a long time (past).
[c^i)n, tine, beautiful, hand-
some.
@c^onf)eit,/ (-en), beauty.
©c^opf, m. {-ti ; -t), crown (of
the head),
(Scfeoof , m.. {-ti'/'i), lap, bosom.
^d)Om, ill. (-rt;-n), Scofcchman.
^^ran!; m. {-ti ; h), chest,
cupboard, wardrobe.
fcl)raut»en, to screw.
©d)recf(en), m. (-(j), fright,
terror.
fd)recf en (<n ) tofrighten, startle.
f^rciben (120), to write (to,
dat. or an -I- ace. ofpers.).
©Areibtifc^, m. (-e5 ; -e), writ-
ing desk.
fd)reien (120), to cry, scream,
shout.
fd)reiten (118; fein), to stride,
step, stalk.
©^riftfteUer, m. {-i ] — ), writer,
author.
(5d)ntt, m. (-eg; -e), stride,
step, pace.
©c^u^, m. (-eg ; -c), shoe.
(Sc^ulbanf,/ (-c), school-bench.
(Sd)ulbub(e),m. (-n; -n), school-
boy.
(Sennit, /, guilt ; (-en), debt ;
f^ult an etroaa fein, to be to
blame for anything
©c^ule,/ (-n), school.
fd)ulen, to school, train.
(Sd)iiler, m. (-g; — ), pupil,
scholar, school-boy.
(Sd^ulfnabe, m. (-n; -n), school-
boy.
©c^ulmeiftcr, m. (-g; — ), school-
master.
(Soulier,/ (-n), shoulder.
(Sd)iirje,/ (-n), apron.
®(^ufter, m. (-g; — ), shoe-
maker, cobbler.
fc^iitteln, to shake.
fd)iitten, to spill; to empty out.
(S^u^, m. (-eg), protection.
(£i:fcu^L'icfoI)icttc(i7 {y,dj. suhst.)f
ward, proteg^.
fc^iuac^ C'er), weak, infirm.
VOCABULARY.
527
fright,
startle,
ite (to,
ers.).
), writ-
scream,
stride,
writer,
stride,
)e.
l-bench.
, school-
), debt;
to be to
, pupil,
, school-
►,school-
ler.
), shoe-
pty out.
tion.
irm.
<B^\vad)i\/. (-n), weakness, in-
firmity.
(3d)a>ai^ev, m. {-$ ; "), brother-
in-law.
©c^tuaU^e,/ (-n), swallow.
(Bd)wan^, m. (-cs ; "e). tail.
fc^roarj ("er), black.
fc^njarjHau, bluish-black.
fc^war^geneibet, clad in black.
((^meben, to hover ; be sus-
pended.
(Sct)iveif,m. (-e^; -c),tail; train.
fcbrocifen (ffin), to wander.
fc^Jueigeii (120), to be silent,
keep silence.
®d)tDcigen, n. (-g), keeping
silence, (act of) silence.
©c^weiii, n. (-e^ ; -e), pig.
@^Wci?,/, Switzerland.
©^ttJctle,/ (-n), threshold.
fd)»ellett (124; fein), to swell.
fc^rocnfcn, to swing, wave; to
turn, v/heel.
fc^JDCr, heavy, hard, difficult.
f(^njerli(^, hardly, scarcely.
(Sc^ttjcrt, 'if. (-eg ; -er), sword.
<Sc^mefter,/ (-n), sister.
[{^Wtcdg, difficult.
fc^tDtmmen (158; ^akn and
feitt), to swim, float.
©d^njimmcn, n. {-^}, swimming
(act of).
©c^ttJtnbcl, m. (-g), giddiness,
dizziness.
fd^njinbcn (144; fein), to vanish.
fd^Wingctt (144), to swing,
brandish, flourish, wave ;
fld^ — , to leap, bound,
fc^wi^en, to sweat, perspire.
)'d)wijren (131), to swear.
fd)ani(, sultr}', close.
fed)g, six.
(See, m. (-1? ; -en), lake.
iSee,y.' (-n), sea, ocean.
iSeele,/ (-n), soul.
feelenyergniigt, highly de-
lighted.
©eereife,/ (-u), voyage.
<5egelfd)iff, n. (-ec; -e), sailing-
vessel, ship.
fegneu, to bless.
fe^en (181), to see, perceive,
look, behold.
fel)nen (fid)), to long, yearn.
fe&n'fud)tig, longing, yearning.
fe^r, very, very much, exceed-
ingly.
felig, blessed, blissful, happy.
(Seiigfeit,/ (-en), bliss, happi-
ness.
fein, feine, fein, his, its, one's,
hers.
fein (52 ; fein), to be ; (asaux.),
to be, have.
felt (46), since ; — ttjann, since
when, how long; — a^t
Jagen, for a week past.
fcitbem', conj., since.
@eite,./! (-n), side.
r*^n'}-self; adv., even.
felten, seldom, rarely.
feltfam, rare, strange, curious,
remarkable,
fenben (99), to send.
@ert)iette,/ (-n), table-napkin.
fe0en,toset, put, place ; tostake;
fld^ — , to seat one's self, sit
down,
feuf^en, to sigh.
I
528
VOCABULARy.
Scufjerbriicfc, /, Bridge of
Sighs,
fid), pron. refl. (ace. and dat.),
one's self, himself, herself,
itself, themselves ; to him-
self, themselves, etc.; re-
cipr., one another.
fic^cr, safe, secure.
fidjtbar, visible, in sight.
fie, she, it; her, it; they, them.
(£ie, (polite for tu and it)r),
you.
ftcben, seven.
fieben^unbcrtneuttunbjtuattaig,
seven hundred and twenty-
nine.
©ieb'cntet, n. (-g ; — ), seventh
part.
ftebcn (123; fein), to boil.
©iegc^maft, m. (-(^ ; en), tri-
umphal mast.
(Signal, n. (-eg ; -c), signal.
©ilber, n. (-&), silver.
©ilberloffel, m. (-&; — ), silver
spoon.
ft'Ibern, (of) silver.
flncjen (144), to sing.
finfen (144; fein), to sink, fall.
©inn, 7n. (-eg ; -e), sense, mind.
ftnnen (158), to reflect.
ffttfam, modest, proper.
ft^cn, (181), to sit.
©flatoc, m. (-n ; -n), slave.
©mara'gb, m. (-eg; -e), eme-
rald.
fo, so, thus, in such a manner,
indeed (not translated in the
apodosis to a conditional
clause)', - — CuCU, just, just
now; — cin, eine, ein, such a.
foba'lb, as soon as.
fofo'rt, immediately, directly.
foga'r, even.
foglei'c^, immediately, directly.
(Sobn, m. (-eg ; "e), son.
foU^(er), adj. and pron., such.
•Soltiat', m. (-en; -en), soldier.
foUcn (196-202 ; duty or obli-
gation), to be in duty bound,
be to ; shall ; be said to.
@oUer, m. (-g ; — ), loCt, garret,
balconv.
(Sommer, m. (-g ; — ), summer.
(Sommernac^mittac;, m (-eg ; -e),
summer afternoon.
font) em (after negatives only),
but.
(SDnnabent, m. (-eg ; -e), Satur-
day.
Sonne,/ (-n), sun.
(Sonnenlii^t, n. (-eg ; -ev), sun-
light.
@onnenfd)ein, m. (-eg), sun-
shine.
<3onntag, m. (-eg ; -e), Sunday.
©onntaggUeb, n. (-eg ; -er), Sun-
day hymn.
fonfi, else, otherwise ; gener-
ally, usually ; — nod), any
more, any other, any besides.
fonjltg, other, different.
©ojj^ie,/ (-ng), Sophia.
for gen, to care, be anxious.
forg'faltig, careful ; carefully.
fpat, late.
fpa^ieren (also — geben, 188),
to take a walk, go for a
walk, go walking; — fat)ren
(186), to go for a drive.
Spu^ier'ganfi, m. (-eg ; "e), walk ;
einen — mad)en, to take a
walk.
VOCABULARY.
529
(Spec!, m. (-ti), bacon
©peifefarte,/ (-n), bill of fare.
fpeifen, to eat, dine.
©perling, m. (-e^ ; -e), sparrow.
©p^iny,/ (-c), Sphinx.
©jjtegcl, m. {-i; —), mirror.
fpicgelflar, clear as a mirror.
©ptel, n. (-eg ; -e), play, game,
sport.
fpielen, to play.
fptnnen (158), to spin.
®pi^e, / (-n), point; mouth-
piece (of a pipe).
fpltttern, to split, shiver.
(Sporn, m. (-ee ; -cawc^(5poren),
spur.
(Spott, m. (-eg), mockery, scorn,
jeer.
@prac^e,/ (-n), language.
@pra^ta(ent', w. (-eg ; -e), talent
for (learning) languages,
©pradj'ftwtiium, n. (-g; -ten),
linguistic study,
fprcc^en (167), to speak, say,
tell ; to speak or talk to or
with.
@pre(^en, n. (-g), speaking (act
of), speech.
fpreijen, to spread out.
fprcngcn, to burst ; to gallop.
©pri^ttjort, n. (-eg ; ^'er), pro-
verb.
fprte^en (123; fetn), to sprout,
©pringbrunnen, m. (-g; _),
fountain,
fpringen (144; fein), to spring,
leap, jump, run.
wj.'vu;;y, in. \^tv , c^, leap, jump;
crack,
fpiiven, to notice, perceive.
(3taat, m. (-eg ; -en), state ; fine
clothes.
(Stac^elbeerhifd), m. (-eg; -e),
gooseberry bush,
©tatt,/ (-e), town, city.
(Stabtteute, pi., city people.
(Stabtmauer,/. (-n), town wall.
(Stabt't^or, n. (-eg; -e), town-
gate, city-gate.
(Stabt'u^r, / (-en), town-clock.
^ta^I, m. (-eg), steel.
^ta^Ifeber^alter, m. (-g; — ),
(steel) penholder.
(Stall, m. (-eg ; -e), stable, stall.
@tamm, »w. (-eg; -e), stem,
trunk.
(Stanb, m. (-eg; -e), stand;
condition; ju — e fommcn,
to be completed, be done;
im — e fein, to be able, be in
a position to.
ftarf (-er), strong, powerful;
severe,
ftarfen, to strengthen, invigor-
ate,
jlarr, staring, rigid,
flatt, instead of ( +gen.).
jlatt'ftnben (144), to take place,
happen,
flattlic^, stately, handsome,
ftaufeig, dusty.
ftaunen, to be surprised, as-
tonished, amazed.
<Staunen, n. (-g), surprise,
amazement.
jted)en (167), to sting,
fledfen, to stick ; to put in.
Hen (186; fein or UUn), to
stand, be ; to be situated.
ftet)Ien (167), to steal,
f'.eif, stiff, rigid.
530
VOCABULARY.
fteigcn (120; fetn), to rise,
climb, mount, ascend, de-
scend, get down or off,
alight ; to rear (of a horse).
(Stein, m. {-ti ; -e), stone.
ftetnern, (of) stone.
(Steintrog, m. (-e^; -e), stone
trough.
©tette,/ (-n), place, spot ; pas-
sage; auf ter — , immedi-
ately, at once ; jur — fciu,
to have arrived, be there.
Piellen, to put, place, set (up-
right).
ftcmmcn, to rest (the arms).
flerben (159 ; fein), to die.
@tcrbe:^embd)en, n. {-i ; — ), lit-
tle rhroud.
©tern, m. (-H ; — e), star.
<3tcrn&Iume,/ (-n), star-flower,
aster.
®ternf(^nu|>^e,/ (-n), shooting-
star, meteor.
I^ter, staring, fixed.
fliU, still ; quiet, silent.
©title,/, stillness, silence.
fliflen, to satisfy.
(©timme,/ (-n), voice.
jltmmen, to be in tune ; agree.
©time,/ (-n), forehead.
©tocf, m. (-e^ ; -'e), stick, cane.
flocfnii extern, absolutely fasting.
jlo^nen, to groan, moan.
@tot3, m. (-ei?), pride.
jlolj, proud, haughty.
jtopfen, to stuff, fill (a pipe).
©torcfc, m. (-e^ ; -e), stork.
@torcl)neft, n. (-e^ ; -er), stork's
nest.
jlorcn, to interrupt, disturb,
trouble.
jlo^en (188), to push, kick,
strike, bump, knock.
©trnl)(, m. (-e^ ; -en), ray, beam ;
jet (of water).
ftra()len, to beam.
©trant), m. (-e^), shore, beach.
(Stra§e,/ (-n), street, road.
jlreben, to strive, endeavour.
ftrecfen, to stretch, extend.
flvei(^eln, to stroke, pat.
1^1 eleven (118), to stroke.
©treifen, m. (-g; — ), stripe,
strip, streak.
flrciten (118), to quarrel.
ftreng, severe ; severely.
flreuen, to strew, scatter.
©tric^, m. (-eg ; -e), stroke,
dash ; cin — buret) tic 3fle(^*
nung, disappointment.
@tro()bad&, n. {-t^ ; -er), straw
roof, thatch.
©trom, m. (-eg; "e), stream,
current.
jlromcn, to stream.
flro^en, to be full, bulge out.
©trum))f, m. (-eg; -e), stock-
ing.
<Stufce,/ (-n), room,
©tiidf, m. (-eg ; -e), piece,
©tiicfc^en, n. (-g ; — ), little
piece, morsel, bit.
©tubent', m. (-en; -en), student,
©tubium, n. (-g; ©tubien),
study,
flubieren, to study,
©tubteren, n. (-g), studying
(act of).
©tubter';5immer, n. (-g ; — ),
study (room).
®tut)I, m. (eg ; ''e), chair,
©tunbe, / (-n), hour; lesson;
VOCABULARY.
631
li, kick,
c.
Y, beam ;
J, beach,
road,
avour.
end.
,t.
ce.
, stripe,
el.
Y-
er.
stroke,
Qt.
'), straw
stream,
je out.
, stock-
36.
), little
student.
5tut)ien),
tudying
-«; — ),
air.
lesson ;
an hour's walk (about four
English miles).
(Stuttbenjeiger, m. {-i ; — ),
hour-hand,
©titntlein, n. (-g ; — ), hour,
©turnt; m, (-c^; -e), storm,
tempest,
jliirjen (fcin), to fall, plunge,
jiu^en, to support.
fuMra^icren, to subtract.
fuAcn, to seek, search, look
for.
futttmen, to hum, buzz,
©iinbcr, m. (-d ; — ), sinner.
@up))e,/ (-n), soup, broth,
fiif , sweet.
%((boil, m. (-g), tobacco.
%((balt\\t,f. (-n), tobacco-fairy.
Jabafgpfeifc, /. (-n), tobacco-
pipe.
Slabaf^pflattjc, / (-n), tobacco
plant.
Slabaf^roIIe, / (-n), roll of to-
bacco.
3;aBaf(Stt)or!e, / (-n), tobacco-
cloud.
ta'bcitt, to blame, find fault
with.
3;afel, / (-n), table, tablet,
slate, blackboard ; dinner-
table.
2:ag, m. (-eg; -c), day; ar^t
— e, 1 week ; feit ad^t — en,
for a week past; ein — urn
ben Cinbern, every other (al-
ternate) day ; nUe brei — t,
every third day.
3;ac;eIo^ner, m. (-«?; — ), day-
labourer.
3^flge«an'6ru^, m. (-eg), day-
break.
JamBourin', n. (-eg; -e), tam-
bourine.
%anit,f. (-n), aunt.
%CLX\.i, m. (-eg ; -e), dance.
tanjcn, to dance.
tapfer, brave, valiant.
J^apferfeit, yi, courage, valour.
Jafd^e,/ (-n), pocket.
Saffe,/ (-n), cup.
2^aube,/ (-n), pigeon, dove.
Saud^er, m. (-g ; — ), diver.
tauen, to thaw.
STaufd), m. (-eg ; -e), exchange,
bargain; in ben — , into
the bargain.
taufc^en, to exchange.
tflufenb, thousand.
tanfenbmal, a thousand times.
%t\6!i, m. (-eg ; -e), pond.
%tx\, m. and n. (-eg ; -e), part,
portion.
teilen, to divide, share ; to part,
separate.
teilg, partly, in part.
l^etegrapV, m. (-en; -en), tele-
graph.
S^eleiJ'^on', n. (-eg; -e),telephone.
JeUer, m. (-g ; — ), plate.
J^empel, m. (-g ; — ), temple.
3;eppi*, m. (-eg ; -e), carpet.
3^efiament', n. (-eg ; -e), testa-
ment, (last) will.
tcuer, dear, precious, costly,
S^al, n. (-eg ; -er), valley.
3^^aler, m. (-g ; — ), dollar.
%\)<k{, f. (-en), deed; exploit,
achicvcincnt.
lt)ee, m. (-g), tea.
2;:^emfe,/, Thames.
532
VOCABULARY.
Zi^Ot, n. (-eS; -c),gate, gateway.
%i^ex, m. (-en ; -en), fool.
I^rane,/ (-n), tear.
I^ron, m. (-e« ; -e), throne.
t^un(196), to do; c3 tt)ut inir
leit, I am sorry, regret ; je*
mant)(en) etma« ^u (eite — , to
harm, hurt any body; tue|
— , to hurt; fid) etwa^ ju
gut — , to enjoy one's self.
VC)yxxt,f. (-n), door.
%\tx, n. (-e^ ; -e), animal, beast,
tief, deep, profound.
Stiefe,/ ( n), depth, abyss.
Zintt,/. (-n), ink.
tintenbefleyt, ink-spotted.
SEintenfap, n. {-[eg; '^fer), ink-
stand.
Hntengefc^tvar^t, ink-stained.
2;intenHc(fg, m. (-e^ ; -s), ink-
spot, blot.
3;if(^, w. (-eg ; -e), table.
ZM, m. (-& ; —), title.
SToc^ter,/ ('-), daughter.
Slijc^terc^en, n. (-g; — ), little
daughter.
Sot), m. (-eg), death,
ton, mad, crazy.
3:on, m. (-eg ; -e), tone, sound,
note,
tonen, to sound, resound.
Sonne,/ (-n), barrel, tun.
Sorontoer, adj., (of) Toronto,
tot, dead,
tiiten, to kill,
traben, to trot,
trfli^e, idle, lazy, indolent,
trajien (186), to carry, wear.
Irai^fefffl, m. (-g; — ), sedan-
chair.
Zxant, m. (eg; "e), drink,
draught,
trauen, to trust.
Srauerflor; m. (-eg), mourning,
crape.
3;rauerfleib,n. (-eg; -er), mourn-
ing apparel,
trauern, to mourn,
triiufeln, to drop, drip, distill,
trauiic^, familiar.
Zxanm, m. (-eg ; -e), dream,
trdumen, to dream.
Zx'dumtx, m. (-g ; — ), dreamer,
tranrig, sad, sorrowful, me-
lancholy.
Srauung, / (-en), marriage
(-ceremony),
treffen (167), to hit, strike,
happen upon, meet with;
hit upon, fall in with,
treiben (120), to drive ; to put
forth (buds, etc.).
Sreiben, n. (-g), conduct, ac-
tions.
Jreppe,/ (-n), stairs, stair-case.
Srejfe,/ (-n), lace, galloon.
2;rejtent)ut, m. (-eg ; -e), galloon-
hat, laced hat.
treten (181; ^aben awe? fein),
to tread, step,
treu, faithful, true,
triefen (123 and weak), to drop,
drip,
trinfen (144), to drink.
Irinfen, n. (-g), (act or habit
of) drinking.
Sviufgeitv n. (-eg ; -er), drink-
ing-money, gratuity, tip.
trodnti!, to dry.
Srog, m. (-eg ; -e), trough,
irommd,.;; (-n), drum.
VOCABULARY.
633
drink,
ourning,
, mourn-
, distill.
'earn.
[reamer,
u], me-
larriage
strike,
'j with ;
h.
; to put
act, ac-
lir-case.
OOll.
»alloon-
d fein),
bo drop,
r habit
drink-
tip.
Zxomptit,/. (-n), trumpet.
Jropt^ae,/ (-n), trophy.
Iropfen, m. (-cs ; — ), drop
tro^ (223), in spite of.
3;runf,m. (-eg), drink, didught.
%vun'Unhoit},m. {-ei ; -e), drunk-
ard.
%U^, n. (-eg ; -er and-e), cloth;
handkerchief.
titc^tig, thorough, good.
Zu'^ev^,/. (-en), virtue.
Sliirfc, m. (-n ; -»), Turk.
2;urm, m. Teg ; -e), tower.
tiirmen, to pile up.
U.
nUl, n. (-g ; - ), evil.
itbel, bad, evil.
iiber (65), over, above, all
through, by way of, about,
concernir ^ ; ^eute — brei
2Bo(^fn, this day three
weeks,
iibera'U, everywhere.
iibera'ntwortf n,to entrust, hand
over.
iibergtc'iJen (123), to pour over,
deluge, cover.
iiberei'itfiimmcn, to agree.
ubcr^aupt', in general, gener-
ally ; as a matter of fact, at
any rate.
u'bcrlaut, very loud, too loud.
iibede'ben, to survive.
yXhtxma^t,/., superior force.
ii'fcermorgen, the day after to-
morrow.
iiberre'beu, to persuade.
iH^etfefe'ettf co tra^nslate • xw^i
T'eutf^e — , to translate into
German.
iiBernja'c^en, to watch over,
supervise,
iibeqeu'flen, to convince.
U'6er3icl)er, m. (-g; — ), over-
coat,
iibrtg, remaining, left over;
bag Ubrige, the remainder,
what is left ; — fcleibcn, to
be remaining or left.
U6ung,/ (-en), exercise; prac-
tice.
Ufcr, n. (-g ; — ), bank, shore.
U^r, f. (-en), clock, watch ; \xm
t)ier — , at four o'clock ; njie
ijiel — ift eg ? what o'clock
is it?
urn (34), around, about; for
{of price) ; at, about {of
time).
nma'rmen, to embrace,
umfa'ngen (188), to surround,
enclose, envelop, embrace,
include,
umflo'rt, shrouded, misty,
umgc'ben (181), to surround,
um'gud en (ftc^), to look around,
nm^er', around, about,
um^cr'fc^njimmen (158; fein),
to float about,
u'mfe^rcn (fein), to turn back,
umna'm mem, to em brace, grasp,
u'mfniipfen, to fasten around,
tie on.
um'fc^auen(ft(^),to look around,
look back.
Um'jlant), m. (-eg ; -e), circum-
stance ; pi. ceremony.
carefulness, ceremonious-
ness.
I
534
VOCABULARY.
um'tvenben (99), to turn round.
unt), and.
uncntbc'^rltc^, indispenp-^ble.
un0Cfa'{)r, about, nearly; »on
— , by accident, accidentally.
ungcfet)en, unseen.
ungefli'nt, unsatisfied.
un^ci'mlic^, uncanny.
Unifo'rm,/ (-en), uniform.
unmog'lic^, impossible; i(^ fann
— , I cannot possibly.
Un'rec^t, n, (-eg), wrong; —
!^a6ctt, to be (in the) wrong.
unfa'gltd), inexpressible, un-
speakable.
unfer, unfcre, unfcr, our.
unten, below, down-stairs.
unter (65), under, beneath,
below; among; — ter 9te=
gicrung (Slifabct^g, in the
reign of Elizabeth.
untcrne^'mcn (167), to under-
take.
Untcrne^'men, n. (-§), enter-
prise, undertaking.
Un'tcrf4ieb, m. (-e^ ; -e), differ-
ence.
Un'tcrfc^rift,/ (-en), signature;
explanatory word or phrase
written under a picture, etr-
Utt'wa^r^eit, / (-en), untruth,
falsehood.
un'nja()rf^ctnnc^, improbable.
Utt'weit (gen.), not far from.
un'ttjirfd^, unpleasant, uncom-
fortable, nasty.
itn'jufrieten, discontented, dis-
satisfied.
itr'tfiltn, to judge.
U. f. tt>., ahbrev. for uiic fp
tueitcr, and so forth, etc.
35.
5!>ater, m. (S ; -), father.
55ene't)ig, n. (-g), Venice.
oeraj^ten, to despise, scorn.
tterberc^en (159), to conceal,
hide.
tterbteten (131), to forbid.
5)erbiut)unggt{)itr, / (-en), con-
necting door.
tterblii^en, to fade.
yerbre^cn (167), to commit a
crime or fault.
ijcrbreiten, to spread.
tjerbrennen (99), to burn, con-
sume with fire.
tterbcrben (159), to spoil (intr.);
— (weak), to spoil (tr.), in-
jure.
ttcrbii^tett, to condense.
t)ertricfcn (123), to vex.
25ereinigten ©taaten (bie), pL,
The United States.
ijergan^en, past, last.
luerc^eben^, in vain.
^ei'gel)en (188, fein), to pass
away, perish.
ijergelten (159), to requite, re-
ward.
i;>ergcffen (181), to forget.
t>ergilbt, yellow, faded.
^ergnugen, n. (-g), pleasure,
delight, amusement.
ttergnitgt, pleased, merry.
oergolbet, gilded.
ttcrl^altcn (ficb, impers., 188),
to be, be the case.
3^erI)aUn{g, n. (-fees -fO* ^ii*"
cumstance.
t>erbei'raten (ffd) mit), to marry.
ijert)i4ucn, to conceal, hide.
VOCABULARY.
535
»erirren (fl*), to go astray,
lose one's way.
iJerfaufen, to sell; tiefeg .^aiici
^1^ 3" — , this house is for
sale.
Hvtxuppdt, spoiled, dried up.
tjerlan^en, to ask, demand, re-
quire.
tJcrlaffeii (188), to leave, de-
sert, quit; ftc^ — auf ( +
ace), to rely upon, depend
upon.
tJerlaufen (188, firf»),to lose one's
way, run away, go astray
^ivUQn,m. (-g; —), publisher.
tterleiben, to render disagree-
able, spoil.
»erle0en, to hurt, wound
tterlicrcn (131), to lose.
^Serlufl, m. (-e^ ; "?), loss.
tJermeinen, to think, suppose.
^ermieten, to let, rent.
ttermtttelft (-f-^m.), by means
of.
^ermutlid^, probable.
tJerne^mbar, perceptible, audi-
ble.
»erne^men (167), to perceive,
hear, learn.
»crneti^en(ft(^), tobow, makea
bow.
t>ernunftlg reasonable.
tterobet, desolate, deserted.
t>errcifcn (fetn), to go on a
journey.
ijcrreift, absent on a journey.
»erfammelii, to collect, assem-
ble.
ijerfcbenfen, to give away
^^rm^en (123), to shoot off,
shoot away.
yerfd)rie§en (123), to lock up.
^er)d)Iin.qen (1 44), \to swallow.
yer|(()lucfen, / devour.
Oerf^reiben (120), to prescribe,
oerfc^menbcit, to squander,
waste.
3?erfrf^jtjcntui^, /: (-en), waste,
extravagance.
oerfc^winben (144; fd,,), to
disappear, vanish.
»erfe0en, to move, transport;
answer, reply, rejoin.
»erfpre(f)en (167), to promise.
'^(vMtn, n. (-^), hide-and-
seek.
^erfjeften (186), to understand;
fid) — niif i + acc), to be a
judge of, know how.
ijerflorben, deceased,
ijerfuc^en, to try.
i?ertaufitpn, to exchange.
iJertraumcn, to dream away.
yen»ant>e(n, to change.
»enpa(n-en, to keep, stow away
safely.
5Bcriimutte(r), (adj.subsiX rela-
tion, relative,
oenuenben (99), to make use of
Oermiiufrf)t,cursed, confounded
ycraaubent, to charm, enchant.
'Otv^Hmn, to swallow, devour
»eraei()ert ^20; dat. of pers.),
to pardon, excuse.
torpveness; um — bitten,
to beg pardon.
iJerjie^en (131, ficft), to with-
draw-, disappear.
^et^ireifefn, to despair.
^efperbrot, n. (-eg), supper.
SSettcr, w. (-g; -n), cousin.
536
VOCABULAKY.
3?ic^, 1.. (-c»l), cattle, l^easta.
ttlef (met)r, meift), much, many,
a great deal ' i > ' - Ut)r,
what o'clock.
ttieUeicfct', perhaps, possibly.
Viclmal, tticlnial<5, many times,
frequently, often.
»ier,four.
Vicrja^rig, four-year-old.
SSiertel, n. {-a; — ), fourth
part, quarter.
SSiertcIfluu'bc,/ (-n), quarter of
an hour,
tjlcrje^n, fourteen ; — 1a(^f, a
fortnight.
mUaJ. (55iUen), villa.
SSiolonceU', n. (-t^ ; -e), violon-
cello.
SSogcl, w. (-« ; -)r bird.
»oU {+gen. or OOU or uncled
aubsL), full.
\)otIbrin'gcn (99), | to finish,
tootlc'nten, ) complete.
^Ott (46), of, from, by, about,
concerning.
t)or (65), before, of, in front
of, ago; — ac^t Za^tn, a
week ago.
'^^^<^^'f \ahead, in front.
ttorbci', over, past.
»orbcigct;en (188; fctn), to go
by, pass by, pass.
ijorbcreiten, to prepare (for, ciuf
+ ace).
3Sor'terfu§, m. {-ti ; "e), fore-
foot.
^orfa^uen (186 ; fein), drive up
to the door, etc.
»orc;ct)en(188; fcin), to go (or
be) fast (of a time-piece).
VOr'(\eftcrn, the day before yes
tciday.
ttorl)nbcu (24), to contcihplate,
intend.
<Bort)ani^, m. (-c^ ; -e), curtain.
Vorl)cr', before, formerly.
\3ijrlg, preceding, last.
yorfommen (167 ; , in), to seem,
appear ; to occ r.
OOrldufig {a-lv.), temporarily,
for the present,
^^orlefcn (181; +fJat. of j)er-
son), to read to.
55ormunt); m. (-e<5 ; -cv), ^^rard-
Jan.
ttur'nct^m, distinguished, prorn^
inent, aristocratic.
<8orrat, m. (-e«J ; -c), stocP , pro-
vision.
yor[{d)tic|, cautious, prudent.
5^orftat)t,/ C'e), suburb,
oorftellen, to present, intro-
duce,
ttorteil^aft, advantag6ous.
yortreten (181 ; fein), to step
forward, advance,
ttoriibcr, past,
ttoriibcrflie^cn (123; fein), to
flow past.
ttoriibcrgc^en (188; fein^to go
past, pass by ; am ^aufe — ,
to go by, go past, the house.
yorwarti?, forward, onward, on.
ttor;|ie()cn (131), to prefer; to
pull to (of a curtain, etc.).
m.
itjcirfs, awake.
Wacfocn, to be awake,
wadelig, shaky
tpadjfen (186), to grow.
VOCABULARY.
637
re yes-
i. plate,
urtain.
r.
seem,
3rarily,
of per-
<i;rard-
cP, pro-
dent.
, intro-
us.
to step
"ein), to
n), to go
)aufc — ,
le house,
v'ard, on.
'efei ; to
a, etc.).
w,
iggon,
v.
carriage.
):QaQtn, to dare, venture,
rtjogcn nai), to wi gh.
2Pagcftucf, n. (-a- p; ad\en.
ture, daring deed,
ipa^len, to choose, sel^^ot.
lUfl^r, true, real; rid't — ? ar
(f etc.) not? is it not so/
ira^ien, to last, continue.
>t)a()rcut> (228), during ; while.
n>»4i()a'fti55, ti uc, real, act .al ,
adv., upon my word.
^a^xlnit,/. (-en), truth,
wa'^rne^men (hu), to perceive.
waf)rfrf)cin r^, probable.
iBaijtitbaitg, w. f-eg; ^'er or-
phan-asylum, orphana-, .
3Balt», m. (-e^ ; ^'er), forest, wood.
2QaIt)bflum, m. (-ecs; ^'e), forest
tree.
2Bart)()(j!Te,/:(-n),forestavenup.
aC Ibfitenfe,^: (-n), tavern in
the woods.
SCaroHer, n. (-ed; -e), forest
animal, wild animal.
SBalbtviefe,/ (-n), forest-merd-
ow, glade.
W alien, to move gently, roll •
wave, heave; walk.
^al^cn, to roll, turn over.
aSamc n. (-eg; ^'er), jacket.
scant),/ (-'e), wall.
2Bant)(c)rer, m. (-g ; — )^ tra-
veller.
ttJiini when?
Sappenfc^ilb, n. (-eg ; -c i ), shield
with p.! rnorial bearings, es-
cutcheon.
toaxm C'er), warm.
marten ( + gen. (yr auf-f ace),
to wait for, wait on, tend,
nurse { + acc.).
ttJarum, why, wherefore.
n?ag, what, th. * which, v hich,
that \ — fiir ein, eine, ein,
what kind oi .^^ what.
^■M9 (adv.), why?
lOiig ( = ctmag), something, any-
thing.
mjcben (186), to wash.
SCaflfer, n. (-g; — ), water; ju
— , by water,
meben (131), to weave.
SCeierbaum, m. (-eg; '-e), weav-
er's beam.
ii?ect)fel()aft, changoable.
tredfen, to wake, awake, waken.
SCed'u^r, / (-en), alarm-clock,
meter, neither; - -. . . „o(^,
neither . . . nor.
SICeg, m. (-eg ; -c), way, road ;
\i^ auf ten — mac^en, to set
out, be off.
tOtQ, away, off.
megcn (223), o account of,
because of, fc the sake of,
for; i)on — , on account of.
wegfommen (167; fein), to • ome
away, get off.
megmnc^en flcfe to get off, f^et
out, make on*- self scarce.
tDegjppifenb, showing the vay,
leading, iding.
SBenmeifer, m. (-g; _), leader,
guide.
2Ce()(c), n. (-g), sorrow, pain,
woe.
n}e6(f), ;>ainful, sore; — tt)uit.
to hutt, pain,
mel^en, to blow ; to wave.
SDe^mut,/, melancholy, sorrow.
538
VOCABULAHY.
^t{)n, n. i-i), breath.
SOebr,/. (-en), armour, defoiicP.
JliJeib/'M. (-Ci>; -cr), woman;
wife.
WeiclKU (11^), to yield, vauisli.
il'icifec, / (-n), pasturage, pas-
ture ; willow.
2lJcil)uad)tcn, />/., Christmas.
ttjeil, because.
iBcile, /. i-n), while, space of
time.
Sl^ein, w. (-cc ; -c), wine.
tueiuen, to weep, cry.
Seinfartc, /: (-u), wine-card.
tvcife, adj., wise.
5Cieifc, / (-n), manner, mode,
way*; iiuf ticfe — , in this
way.
weifen (1 20), to point out, show.
tvci^, white.
iuei^e"/ to whitewash.
mit, far ; broad; wide; far off;
afar, distant.
JBeite, / (-n), distant place;
width ; wide space,
wetter, farther, further,
^eijen, m. (-<J), wheat.
m\d)iv, wel(i)e, ivelAc^, rel.
pi'on., who, which, that ;
interi'ogative adj., which?
what? jvclcb, adj. {in excla-
mations), what a ! what !
JGellc, /: (n), wave, billow.
SCelt, / (-en), world ; auf fccr
— , in the world,
wcnten (90), to turn ; fid) — ,
to apply (to, an + ace),
tomio^; little J few.
ttjenn, when, whenever, as soon
as; if ; — and), even if.
tvcr, who; whoever; who?
mxUn (150), to sue (for =
urn),
tverteu (159 ; fcin), to become,
grow ; {as aux. of Jut. tense)^
shall, will (201) ; {as aux. oj
the passive voice, 11 'J- 114),
*to be ; — auiJ, to Ixicome of.
tuerfen (159), to throw, toss.
SCerf, n. {-ti ; -e), work.
I. rt, worth, worthy.
JVCffen, whose ; who.se
we^bnlb, whercfoio? why?
alette,/, (-n), wager, bet.
iuettcn, to wager, bet.
JCetter, n. (-c ; — ), weather; bei
^lipj-em — , in this weather.
iuid)tip, weighty, important,
anfeer {ace; 34), against, con-
trary to.
njiterftre'ben, to resist, be re-
luctant.
n)ie, how ; how ? ; as, like ; —
fc()r md), however much,
roiebcr, again, once more,
ivic'tcr^allen, to echo, resound;
be repeated,
wie'terfe^en (181), to see again,
meet again.
2©ie'ter[el)en, n. {-i), meeting
again ; auf — , good-bye till
we meet again, au revoir.
wie(^eu (131), to weigh,
wiegcn {weak), to rock.
tvtcl)ern, to neigh.
SJiefe,/. {■\\\ meadow,
ti^tlt*, wild, savage.
2GiU)clni, m. {-^), William.
SBille, m. (-11^ and -n ; -n), will ;
wish; iim. . .w\\\n\{->rgen.),
for the sake of.
widig, willing.
VOCABULARY.
639
(for =»
)econie,
. tenne),
aiix. oj
oine of.
, toss.
et.
blier; bci
sather.
rtant.
ist, coii-
, be re-
like ; —
nuch.
►re.
resound ;
ee agaii),
meeting,'
i-bye till
revoir,
h.
liani.
-n), will;
{ + gen.),
mnt, m. (-f« ; -f), wind.
mnUn (Ut), to wind.
2Cinfcei$fiUifen, 7*. (-c); rushing
or roaring of the wind ;
Wie — , as swiftly as the
wind,
luinti}^, windy.
SCinffl, m. {-a ; — )^ corner,
nook.
n)infen, to wink, beckon, signal.
2Cinter, m. (-<j ; _)^ winter.
Wir, we.
Wirflifb, adv., really, truly.
Wirbcin, to whirl, curl.
SQirt, m. (-ed ; -e), host, land-
lord.
mvtittj. (-nen), hostess ; land-
lady.
2Ctrtd6rtii(8, n. (-eg; %)^ inn,
tavern.
ttJifc^cn, to wipe.
ft>i|Ten (19G), to know (said
of knowledge) ; uidjt bap ic^
wn^te, not that I know of
SBiJTenfrf^aft,/ (-en), science.
miffentlid), knowingly.
SCtttwenfitleler, m. (-«; — \
widow's veil.
wo, where • where ?
S3orf)e,/ (-n), week.
2Goge,/ (-11), wave, billow.
W0h\,pred. adj., well {of health) ;
mix ifl md)t — gu mut, I do
not feel well ; — , adv., well,
then, indeed, I suppose ; fa
— , yes, to be sure.
SGo^Ic^eruc^, m. (-eg ; ^'e), pleas-
ant odour.
comfort, prosperity.
Wo^ncn, to dwell, live, reside.
©obninii^, / (-en), dwelling,
hou.st), residence.
SOoIfe,/ (-n), cloud.
2Dolfenfrf)i4)t, / (-en), layer of
clouds.
SBoIfenflejL m. (-eg ; -e), cloudy
path.
20olfenflra§e,/ (-n), street of
clouds.
5ffio(fcntl)ron, m. (-eg; -e),
throne in the clouds.
'Boilt,/., wool.
luoden, woollen, of wool.
moUen (190-202), to will, de-
sire, wish, want, intend,
mean, like; — (Sie ein (^lag
SOnffer? will you have a
glass of water ?
2Conne, / (-n), pleasure, de-
light.
woran, whereon, on which, on
what, of what,
moranf, whereon, on which,
for which, on what,
njornug, wherefrom, f ff)m what,
of what.
iDorin, wherein, in which, in
what.
SCort, n. (-eg; '^er a7id -e),
word.
n)oriiber, about what, at what,*
over what,
tuuffcern, to increase rapidly,
grow luxuriantly.
2Bunbe,/ (-n), wound.
2Bunber, n. (-g ; »_), wonder,
miracle,
mnnberbar, wonderful, strange,
remarkable.
^Qnnberbaum, m. (-eg ; -e), ma-
gic tree.
540
VOCABULARY.
ttjunbern (f((^), to wonder, be
astonished (at, iiber + ace);
?^ ivunbert mid) (irtdpers.), I
wonder.
njunberfam, wonderful, won-
drous.
tt)unt)erfd)on, most beautiful.
S55unf(^, m. {-ti ; -e), wish.
tt)itnf(i^en, to wish, desire, want;
©liid — , to congratulate,
w'ish success.
njitrtettoll, dignified.
2Curm, m. (-e6 ; -er), worm.
SBurjl,/ (-c), sausage.
SCursel,/ (-n), root.
2But,/, rage, fury.
tviitcnt), furious.
^a%f. (-en), number.
ja^len, to pay.
ga^Icn, to count.
3a^tt, m. (-eg ; h), tooth.
3a^nnje:^, n. (-eg), tooth-ache.
ga'plJeln, to kick, struggle.
jort (-er and -er), tender,
gentle.
3auber; m. (-g), charm, magic,
enchantment.
3auberpfert), n. (-c^; -e), en-
chanted horse.
3cukrfc^Io§, n. (-[eg ; -fer), en-
chanted castle.
3aukrtt)alb, m. (-eg ; -er), en-
chanted wood.
3aun, m. (-eg; "t), hedge, fence.
3e()n, ten.
3et(ien, n. (-g ; — ;, sign.
iti^tn, to show.
ipttipn ^90^. to afifiuse.
3cit, / (-en), time ; ju aUtn
— en, in all ages.
3eitung,/ (-en), newspaper,
jerbrec^en (167), to break to
pieces,
aerfatlen (188; fein), to fall to
pieces, decay,
gcrfliefen (123; fein), to flow
away, vanish,
jerfnirf^t, crushed, dejected,
jerreifen (118), to tear (to
pieces),
jerrinnen ( 158 ; fein), to vanish,
run away (of liquids),
jerftrenen, to scatter, disperse.
3eug, n. (-eg ; -e), cloth ; stuff;
wa& bag — fatten toitl, as
hard as you can.
3eug, m., Jupiter,
jie^cn (131), to draw; pull,
take; extract; doff (one's
cap) ; (fein), to move, march,
jteren, to adorn,
gierlic^, elegant, graceful.
3immer, n. (-g ; — ), room.
3innc,/ (-n), battlement.
3ipfcl, m. (-g ; — ), point, tip ;
corner,
jittern, to tremble,
jogern, to hesitate, delay,
jottig, shaggy.
ju (46), to, at; — meinem
Dnfel, to my uncle's; —
berfelbcn 3ftt, at the same
time ; adv., too ; closed,
shut,
jntrincien (99), to pass, spend
(said of time).
3uc^t,/, discipline.
3ucfer, m. (-g), sugar,
guerft', first, first of all.
Vocabulary.
641
iu aUtn
taper,
treak to
5 fall to
to flow
ected.
ear (to
) vanish,
s).
iisperse.
ti; stuflf;
mU, as
w; pull,
ff (one's
}, march.
ful.
oom.
ent.
)int, tip ;
lay.
- meinem
cle's ; —
bhe same
; closed,
ss, spend
^ueffen (181), to go on eating.
3ufaa, m. (-eg ; h), chance, ac-
cident,
aupftcrn, to whisper to.
aufolge (gen. or dat; 223), in
consequence of, according to.
Sufriebcn, contented, satisfied.
3«g; wi. (-eg; h), feature;
character; train.
Biigcl, m. (-g ; _), bridle, rein,
gugretfen (118), to reach out,
put out the hand,
au^oren, to listen,
3ufunft,/, future,
aule'^t, at last,
gumaiten, to shut, close,
3une{)men (167), to increase,
gunicfen, to no(i to.
auraunen, to whisper to.
auretten(118; fein), to ride up
(to).
Suriidf, back.
Suriidbringen (99), to bring
back.
3uritcfb{ei6en(120; fein), to re-
main behind; remain at
home.
auriicfbrangen, to force back,
auriicf.qe^en (188; fein), to go
back, retire, retreat,
auriicfte^ren (fein), to return,
aurudfummen (167 ; fein), to
return, come back,
auriidregen, to put by, lay up.
aufammen, together,
aufflmmenraufen (188; fein), to
run together.
anfnmmenfclrouben, to screw
together.
aufammenflopcn (188), to col-
lide.
aufc^iden, to send to { + dat)
aufc^ie^en (123), to go on shoot-
ing.
aufd)lagen (186), to shut
quickly.
3ufd)Iie§en (123), to lock up,
fasten, shut.
aufd)reiren( 118; fein), to stride
up, stride on.
awfe^en a 8 1 ), to look on, watch.
aufe^enbg, while one is looking,
perceptibly.
au)pred)en (167 + c^a^.), to ad-
dress, speak to.
auijo'r, before.
aumci'Ien, sometimes, at times
aumenben (99), to turn to-
wards, take to, have re-
course to.
anjanaig, twenty.
amar, true, truly; to wit,
namely.
3njed, m. (-eg ; -e), aim, object.
anjei, two.
Bweig, 7n. (-eg; -c), branch,
bough, twig.
attJciteng, secondly,
3tt)erg, w. (-eg ; -e), dwarf.
3n)iebel,/ (-n), onion,
att>iefad), double,
anjingen (144), to force.
att)ifrf)en (65), between.
attJolf, twelve.
11.
ENGLISH— GERMAN.
A.
able, fa^ig, ge[(^icft ; to be — ,
!i)nnen, 196; im (Stonbefein.
about, prep, (around), uiu, 34,
226, a ', (the person), bet,
46, 226, rf; adv., (nearly),
ungefdt)r ; ettoa, 226, 6, c ;
to be — to, im ^egriffe fein.
above, prep., iiBer, 65.
absent, abn)cfenb ; mind-
ed, jerftrcut. .
abuse, v., mi^^an'bctn.
accept, annel^men, 167.
accompany, beg lei ten (trans.).
account; on — of, luegen, 223;
1c)a[h{tn), ^alber, 223 ; on
that — , be§n)egen, bc§!^alb.
accusation, ^nflage, /. (-n).
accuse (of), anflageu {gen. of
ihiny), befdjulbigeu {gen. of
thiTig).
accustomed, gen)of)nt ; to be — ,
bic @en)Dt)ni)eit ^bcn.
acknowledge, auerfennen, 99.
acquaintance, 33efanntfd)of t, /.
(-en) ; to make the — of,
tennen lernen.
acquit (of), lo§fpred)en (167;
gen. of thing).
act, V. |anbeln ; to — amiss,
mt^'^anbeln.
add, abbieren.
address, subst., 5lbref|c, /. (-n).
address, v., anreben.
admire, berounbem.
advance, Dorriirfen {intr.; fein).
advantage, ^^orteil, m. (-e§ ; -e).
advantageous, Dor'tetl^aft,
advice, diat, m. (-e§).
advise, raten (1^8; dat.).
affair, <Ba(S)C,f (-n).
afraid ; to be — (cf), ftd^
fiird)ten {oox + dat.).
after, nacf), 46.
afternoon, 0k(i)mtttog, m. (es ;
afterwards, na6\)tx, l^ernad),
barauf.
again; njteber, nodimot^.
against, wiber, gegen, 34.
ago, DOr {prep. + dat.), 65;
many years — , vox uielen
^o()ren ; a week — to-day,
t)eute t)or adjt ^ogen.
agreeable, angenetjui.
ail, fefjlen ; what — s you ?
wa^ fe^lt ^i)nm ?
alas ! act) !
all(the),aajme§; atter, atte,
alleg ; — the same, einerlei.
allow, erlauben {dat.) ; laffen,
188; tobe— ed,biivfen, 196.
Alma (river), 5llnta, /I
almost, faft, beinabe.
alone, allein.
along, lang§, entlang, 223.
alphabet, 5llp{)abet', n. (-e§ ; -e).
already, fd)on.
il2
VOCABULAHY.
543
always, tmmcr.
America, 3lmeri!a, n. (-§).
amiss; to act — , mife'fianbeln,
209.
among, amongst, unter, 65.
a, an, ein, eine, ctn.
ancient, alt; the — s, bic 3lltcn,
pi.
and, unb.
anecdote, 2(nefbote,/ (-n).
angry, 6ofe ; be — at, bofc [cin
fluf ( + acc. of per s.).
animal, Zkx, n. (-e§ ; -e).
another (a different one), ctn
anbcrcr; (one more), noc^
ein, eine, ein.
answer, subst., %ntwoxt, f.
(-en),
answer, v., antrcortcn {dat)-,
bcantroorten {ace. of thing,
dot. of per s.).
answering (act of), Slntroorten,
n. (-§).
ant, 5lmeife, / (-n).
any {partitive, 2, 2); trgenb,
ein, eine, ein; — thing, ir;
genb etroag, tivoa^ ; — thing
but, ntd)t§ raeniger al§ ; pi,
welc^e, etnige ; not — body,
not — one, nicmanb ; not
— , fein, !ctne, Uin,
j'-partment, ©cmoc^, n. (-t9 ;
-er).
appear, fc^einen, erf d^einen, 120.
apple, 3lpfel, m f-s ; ') ; —
-tree, ^ip^dhaam, m, (-e§ ;
^'e). ^ '
apply to anyone, ftc^ an je;
manben (acr.) menben. 99.
appoint (as), crnennen (99;
a"m, aur).
approval, iBeifatt, m. (-e§).
April, 2lprtr, m. (-§).
architect, 2lrc|tteft', m. (-en;
-en),
arm, 3lrm, w. (-e§ ; -c) ; — s,
pi. 2Baffen.
army, 5lrmee,/ (-n).
arrival, 3lnfnnft, / (-e).
arrive, anfommcn (167; [ein).
art, ^unft, /. (^'e).
article, 3lrti'fel, m. (-§ ; — ).
artillery, Slrtiaerie, /. ; ©es
fc^ii^, n. (-e§).
artist, ^unftler, m. {-§ ; — ).
as, 241, ttl§ ; roie ; fo ; ba ;
— soon — , fobalb (roie) ;
— a,at§; — . . . — , (eben)[o
... rate or al§.
ascend, auffteigen, fteigen (120 ;
[ein).
ashamed; to be — of, fic^
[c^dmen (gen. or iiber -f- ace. ).
ask,fragen, 186; —for, hitten
(181, urn); oerlangen (nad)).
asking questions (act of),
gragen, n. (-§).
assert, bel^aupten.
assist, betfte^en (186 ; daf.).
astonish ; to be — ed (at), fid^
wunbern (nUx + acc.).
astonishing, erftaunenb.
at (of locality), in, an, auf, ju,
227, a; {of Ime) urn, §u,
bet, 227, b; (of price) nm,
227, c ; not — all, gor
nid^t ; — my brother's, bci
ntetnem ^ruber ; — last, —
ken
<y^h
I c^m /v4 .. „ ,.
.Svr;
544
VOCABULARY.
attack, v., angrcifcn, 118;
subst.y 3lngriff, m. (-c^ ; -c).
attempt, aubst.f SScrfud^, m.
(-c§ ; -c).
attendant, S3eg(ctter, m. (-§ ;
-)•
attention, ^ufmerffam!ctt, /.
(-en) ; to pay — , %6)t geben
(181 ; auf + acc).
attt ^*-ive, aufmerffam.
August, 5tuguft', m. (-§).
aunt, 5tante,/. (-n).
author (of a particular work),
35crf affer, m? (-§ ; — ).
autumn, •l^erbft, m. (-i^ ; -c),
avoid, ntciben, oermeiben, 120.
away, fort, abwefenb ; — from
home, »on §aufe.
B.
back, adv., juriirf.
bad, badly, fd^lcc^t.
bag, (Sact, m. (-c§ ; -e).
bank, ^anf,/. (-en).
bark (of trees, etc.), SBaum;
rinbe, /. (-n).
basket, ^oxh, m. (-e§ ; -e).
battery, S3atteric, /. (-n).
battle, (Sc^lai^t,/ (-en),
be, fein, 52; raerben (159; as
aux. of passive, 112, R. 5);
ftcl^en, 186 ; there is, there
are, c§ giebt, e§ ift, etc., 220;
{of health) fid) befinben, 144;
how are you? tt)ie get)t e^
;3{|ncn ? I am to, ic^ foil,
bear, suhd., 33ar, m. (-en ; -en).
bear (briL\g forth), v., gebciren,
167.
beat. «.. fAIaacn. 186.
l)eautiful, fd^on ; the — , ba§
©c^onc.
beauty, ©d^onl^cit, /. (-en),
because, rocil ; ba.
become, roerbcn (159; fein);
(suit) fte^cn (186; dat).
bed, §8ett, n. (-c§ ; -en) ; to go
to — y 5U ^tiii ge^en, fic^
fd)Iafen (egen ; in — , ju
S3ette.
bee, S3icne,/. (-n).
beef, 9fttnbfleifi), n. (-e§).
beer, S3ter, n. (-e§ ; -e).
before, prep.^ Dor (65 ; dat. or
ace); conj., beoor ; el^e (ba^).
beg (ask), bitten (181 ; for,
um) ; to — pardon, urn
SSer^eil^ung Utkn ; — (for
alms), bettcln.
beggar (-man), S3ett(er, m. {-§ ;
— ) ; woman, 39cttkrin,
/ (-nen).
begin, anfangen, 188; bcginnen,
158.
behave, fidf) betragcn, 186.
behind, l^inter (65; dat. or
ace).
believe, glaubctt (dat. of per-
son).
belong (to), gcl^oren (dat.).
beloved, geliebt, raert.
below, prep.^ unter (dat. or
ace; 65); untevl)alb (gen.;
223) ; adv.y unten
besides, adv., aufjerbem.
between, jniifd^en (dcU, or ace.;
65).
beverage, ©etrcin!, n. (-e§ ; -e),
bid, V. (order), l^eigen, 188.
biff, grofe.
VOCABULARY.
646
;-en).
; fcin);
iat. ).
); to go
— 5"
:§).
).
; dat. or
1 ; for,
Ion, urn
— (for
, m. {-§ ;
Jetttcrin,
cginneu,
186.
dat. or
of per-
lat.).
{dat. or
ih (gen.;
n.
.or (HOC.;
[-c§ ; -€).
, 188.
bill, 9^cd^nun9,/(-en).
bird, «ogcl, m. (-§ ; '-').
bird-cage, 2?ogcl6auer, n. (-§ ;
/•
birth-day, ®e6urt§tag, m. (-c§ ;
-e) ; as a present, jum
®e6urt§tag.
bishop, 33tfc|of, m. (-c§ ; -'e).
bite, y., bei§en, 118.
bitter, bitter,
black, adj., fd^rcar^ (-cr).
black, V. (of boots), iuict)[en.
blame, u, tobeln.
blindly, blinblingS.
blow, v., blafen, 188.
blue, blau.
board ; on — (of a ship), am
33orb.
boat, 33oot, n. (-e§ ; -e or S3ote).
bodily, forperlid^.
bombard, u, bombarbicien.
bone, Itnoc^en, w. (-§ ; — ).
book, S3ud), n. (-e§ ; -er).
bookseller, ©ucbbanbler, m.
born, joar^., geBoren, 167.
borne ; having been — down
by the stream, com ©trome
fortgeriffen.
botanist, S3ota'nt!cr, m.(-§ ; — ).
both, beibe ; atte beibe, htxhti'.
bough, %\i, m. (-e§ ; h).
Boston, 33ofton, n. (-g) ; the
— vrain, ber 3ug Don (nad^)
SL'iJltjon.
boy, £nabc, m. (-n ; -n).
brave, tttpfer.
bread, 5Brot, n. (-e§ ; -c).
break,brcc^en,167; —through,
einbrecben (fein).
breakfast, v., frii^fturfcn ;
«^6s^., ^ru^ftitcf, n. (-c3).
bridge, ©riicfc,/. (-n).
bring, bringcn, 99 ; lolen ; to
— with one, — along,
mttbrtngcn ; to — in, ^cr^
einbrtngcn ; to — up, l^crs
aufbringcn.
broad, brctt.
brother, 33rubcr, m. (-§ ; -).
brother-in-law, ©cbujaqcr, m.
(-§ '.%
build, bttuen.
building, ©ebaubc, n. i-% ; — ) ;
(act of), 33aucn, n. (-§).
bullet, ^ngcl,/. (-n).
burn, brennen (99; mffr.)
oerbrennen (99; tr. and
intr.).
business, ©efc^cift, w.(-e§; -e).
business-matter, @e[c^aft§5
angelegen^ett,/. (-en),
but, ttber; ollein (341, 1);
fonbern (on^y a/i5er a negor
tive, 236, R. 1).
button, ^nopf, m. (-e§ ; -e).
buy, faufen.
buying (action of), ^oufen, n.
(-§).
by, 228; (near by), bei {dat.);
(of agent with pass, voice)
»on (dat.); (of meoMs or
instrument) burc^ {ace), mit
{dat.); — rail(way), mit ber
©ifenba^n.
C.
call (out), rufcn, 188 ; (name),
ncnnen, 99; be — ed, l^eis
pCn^ X-yJXJ.
546
VOCABUi.AIty.
call, subst, (visit), S3e[urf), ni.
(-eg ; -c).
can, fbnncn, 196-202.
cannon, ^anone,/. (-n).
capable, fci^ig {gen., or + J^u).
capital, subsL, .l^aiiptftabt^ /.
cardinal-point (."^'je point).
care, ''}i6)t, /. ; to take — , fid)
in 5ld)t ne^men, 167; do you
— to? iiabcu @ic iln\t ju V
for all I — , mcinetroegeu.
carpet, ^teppic^, m, (-c^ ; -e).
carriage, 3Eagen, m. (-§ ; — ).
carry, trocuctt, 186 j to — up,
l)tnauftiagen,
case, %a\l, m. ( c§ ; -c).
castle, ®ci)(o^, n. (-ffe§ ; -ffer).
cat, ^ai^e, /. (-n).
catch, fangen, 188; — cold,
ftd^ erfciitcn.
cause; to — to, loffen (188;
4- injin.).
celebrate, f eicrn ; — d, beriil^mt.
century, ^a()vt)unbert, n. (-e^ ;
certain, — ly, gett)i§, jebenfallg.
chair, ©tulfjl, m. (-c^ ; "e).
chancellor, .^anjler, m. (-§; — ).
change, v. tr., cinbern ; v. i^itr.,
fid) dnbern.
Charles, Bdxl, m. (-§) ; little
— , ^avlc^en, n. (-§).
charming, adj., rcijenb.
cheap, biKtg.
cheese, ^a\t, m. (-§ ; — ).
cherry, ^irf^c,/. (-n).
chicken, ^u^n, n. (-e§ ; -er).
child, ^tnb, r.. (-e§ ; -er).
Christmas^ 9S-3ifenod>ten ''^I.
church, Sx\v6)c,/. (-n).
Cinderella, ?lf d^enputtcl, n, (-§).
city, ^sptabt,/. (-C).
claim to be, iwoUeu, 196.
clear, f(av.
clever, gc|'d)idt.
cHmate, Jllima, n. (-^).
climb up, {)inaufflcttern.
cloak, aiioutel, m. (-^ ; '').
clock, llt)X,f. (-en).
close, 3nmad)en ; fdjliej^en, ^us
fd)lie9en, 123.
cloth, Xnd), n. (-eg; -e or "er).
clothes, Itleibcr, w. pi. {see
^leib).
cloud, 2BoIfe, / (-n).
coachman, jtutfd)er, m. (-§; — ).
coal, ^'ol)len, pi.
coat, 9fiod, m. (-e§ ; -c).
coifee, Jlaffee, m. (-§).
cold, fait ("er) ; to catch — ,
fic^ er fallen.
colour, i^arbe, /. (-n).
combat, It^ampf, m. (-eg ; -e).
come, fommen (167; fein) ; —
in, i^ereinf ommen ; — here,
^ierl^er fommen ; — down,
l^ernnterfommen ; — out,
l^eraug fommen ; — back,
priidfommen ; — again,
mieberf ommen ; what is to
— , bag 33ei)orftel)enbe.
coming (act of), ^bmmen, n.
(-g).
command, v., befel^len (167;
dat.).
commandment, (5^ebot, n. (-e§j
company, (^efetffdjaft, /. (-en),
complain- flaxen (iib*'.r -i- acc.V
, n,(-3).
)6.
%
Ben, au;
or "er).
p/. (see
I.
i-tch — ,
m); —
— here,
down,
— out,
back,
again,
it is to
e.
men, n.
(167;
n. (-e§j
/: (-en).
VOCABULARY.
647
complete, DoCfftdnbig.
concert, ^on^evt', W. (-e^ ; -e).
condition, 53cbinqunq,/. (-en).
confusion, ^^kviuivium^,/. (en);
^eftiiv.^un(^,/. (-en).
congratulate, ©Uicf luiinfdjen,
gvotnUeren {dat.).
conscious, beiDUJjt ( i-(/en.)
consequence; in — of, 3ufo(Qe,
223.
consider, betiadjten ; r;aUcn
fiir, 188.
consist (of), 6eftet)en (an§), 18G.
contented, jufvieben.
contradistinction, ©egenfat^,
m. (-eS ; -e).
contrai-y ; on the — , im ©e;
gentell.
convent, Jltofter, n. (-§ ; -).
convince (of), iibev^cu'gen ( +
gen. of thing, or oon).
cool, adj., fill) I.
copy (of a book, etc.), subst.,
eremplav', n. (-e^; -e); v.,
ab[d)reiben, 120.
corner, C5cfe,/. (-n).
correct, adj., ri(i)ttg.
cost, v., toften ( + ace. or dat.
of person).
counsellor, D^otgeber, m. (-s ;
-)♦
count, suhst., @vaf, m. (-en;
-en),
countess, ©vafin, /. (-nen).
country, Sonb, w. (-e§; -'eu or-e ;
in the — , ttuf bent :?anbe;
man, iBauer, m. (-n or
-§; -n).
couple, ^aar, n. (-e§ ; -c).
CO ui tier, «yy[Ujig, 7n. (-Cs j -c)»
cousin, 33etter, m. (-§ ; -n) ;
Confine, / (-n).
cover, v., berfen.
create, fd)affen, 180.
creditor, ©laubiger, m.(-§; — ).
creep, h'iec^en (123 ; fein).
crime, 33er6rec^en, n. (-^ ; — ).
crop, crops, @rnte, /.
cry (call), rufen, 188; (weep),
raeinen.
cup, Xa\'\t,f (-n).
curtain, i:I5ort;ang, m. (-e^; '-e).
cut, fd)netben, 118; — off,
o6frf)neiben; to — one's
hand, fid) \\\ bie i^-anb
fc^neiben.
D.
danger, @efo()r, /. (-en).
dangerous, gefd()rl{d).
dare, fid) unterftefjen, 186;
bi'irfen, i96.
daughter, %o6;)itx,f. (").
day, 5tcg, m. (-e^ ; -e) ; in
broad — light, htx ()ettem
^age.
dead, tot,
deal ; a great — of, oiel.
dealer, ,!^dnbler, m. {-% ; — ).
dear, lieb, teuer.
dearly-bought, teuev.
decide, intr., fid) entid)(ic§en,
123; — d, af^'., entfd)ieben.
defence, 33erteibignng, /. (-en),
definition, definition, /. (-?n).
deserve, oerbienen.
desire, suhst., ikvlangen, n.
desperate, oerjweifctt.
devote, jDibineu*
548
VOCABULARY.
^
I
diamond, 'Diamant', m. (-3 or
-cii ; -en),
dictionary, ©ortcrbud), n. (-e§;
'^ev).
die, fterBcn (159 ; fein\
difference, Untcrfd^tcb, m. (-c§ ;
difficult, fdinjer.
dig, grabcn, 186.
diligence, ^lei^, m. (-e§).
diligent, flei^ig.
dinner, 9Jiittag§effen, n. (-§ ;
— ).
disagreeable, unangcnel^m.
disappoint, enttdufc^en.
discover, entbecfen.
discoverer, ©ntbedf cv, m. (-§ ;
-).
discovery, (Sntbecfung, / (-en).
disgrace, ©c^anbe,/. (-n).
displeased, nnjufrtebcn.
dissatisfied, unjufrteben.
distant, entfernt.
disturb, ftoren.
diver, iaud)er, m. (-§ ; — ).
divide, teilen.
divine, gottUc^.
do, t^n, 196; (make), ma=
d)cn ; (as aux. is not trans-
lated by a separate form;
see 31, R. 3) ; how — you
— ? w)te get)t e§ ^^nen ?
doctor, ®of tor, m. (-§ ;
!l)ofto'ren) ; (physician),
%x^t, m. (-e§ ; "e) ; that is
Dr.B.,bagiftbevSr)o!tov23.
dog, §nnb, m. (-c§ ; -e).
dollar, ^l^aler, m. (-§ ; — ).
door, $;J)ur(e), /. (-en) ; at the
A«* Wy
doubt, s?^6«<., 3"'2ifc'^/ wi. (-§ ;
-).
doubt, v., graeifeln (an + dat.);
I have no — of it, id) (jabe
feinen B^ocifel baran.
down, l^crunter ; — -stairs,
untcn, l^inunter, l^eruntcr.
dozen, ^u^enb, n. (-e§ ; -c).
draw, jie^en, 131; geid^nen.
dress, £(eib, qi. (-e§ ; -ev).
dress, a>. tr., anfleiben; v. intr.,
fid^ anfleiben.
drink, trinfen, 144; — {of
beasts)f faufen, 123.
drive, v. tr., treiben, 1 20 ;
intr. (go in a conveyance),
fal^ren(186; fein); go for
a — , fpajieven fo^ren.
driving (act of), gotten, n. (-§).
drop, ^ropfen, m. (-§ ; — ).
drown, intr.; be — ed, er;
trtnfen, 144.
duke, ^erjog, m. (-e§ ; -e or -c).
during^ tt)a{)renb (gen.; 223).
duty, g^fli^t, / (-en),
dwelling-house, SCBo^nl^auS, n.
(-e§; '^er).
E.
each, iebcr, jebe, jebe§; —
other, etnanber.
eagle, 5lbler, m. (-§; — ).
ear, t)l)X, n. (eS ; -en),
early, frii^.
earn, oerbicnen.
earth, (Srbe, /.; quake,
©rbbeben, w. (-^ ; — ).
east, Dft(en), m. (-en§ or -en).
=J>
,*lTr
VOCABULARY,
549
{of
eat, cffen, 181; rcffcn, 181
{said of beasts).
effort, ^^Inftrcngun;], / (-en),
S3cmul)ung, /. -en); 33er=
fud), m. (-cS; -e).
either, entraeber ; — ... or,
cntroebcr . . . obrc.
elect (as), ernjd^lcr (jum).
elm, Ulme, /. (-n).
else, or — , fonft.
embarrassment, S^erlegen^cit,
/• (-en).
empemr, ^aifer, m. (-§ ; — ).
endure, auSftel^en, 186.
enemy, geinb, m. (-e^ ; -c).
engaged, perfagt; I have an-
other engagement, I am —
elsewhere, id) Un anber^iuo
oerfagt.
English, englifd^; _ (lan-
guage), (Snglifdi (be^ (Jng=
l{fd)cn); in— ,auf (Snglifd);
into — , in§ (fngli[d)e.
Englishman, ©ngldnbcr, m.
(-§; — ).
enjoy, genie^en (123; gen. or
more generally ace.)
enough, genug ; be — , suffice,
geniigeit.
err, irren.
escape, cntflte^cn (131 ; [ein;
dat.)
esteem, ac^ten.
etc., u. f. ID. {ahhrevMtion for :
unb fo iveiter).
Europe, ©uropa, n. (-?y).
even, adv., f ogar, fel^ft : not — ,
nid)t etnmal' ; — if, xmxw oudj.
evening, 5l6enb, m. (-e^ ; -e).
©Ve»* i** ipmnlfa
every, jcbcr, jcbc, jcbc§ ; —
body, — ono, jebermonn,
jcbcr, jcbiDcber, jeglid^er ;
— week, aUe a6.)i tagc.
everywhere, libera U.
ev\\,8uhst.,'^o\t^,n.{adj.mhst.)
exactly, gcrabc, cbeii.
examination, (Srainen, n. (-§ ;
/•
examine, unterfud/en, bcob's
ad)ten.
exceeding, — ly, ()od)ft, fclir,
du^ei'ft.
ex'.ept, au§cr (c?a^.; 46).
excuse, v., cnt[d;ulbigen {tr.\
t)cr5ei^en(120; dat.); suhst.,
(5nt[d)ulbigung, / (-en),
exercise, subst., 3tuf gabe,/. (-n).
expect, erroarten.
expense, Soften, pi; at the
— of, auf Soften,
eye, Stage, n. (-g ; -n).
F.
fail (in business), fatlieren.
fall, faacn(188; fein).
family, garni lie,/, (-n).
famine, ^un'gcr^not, /. (''e).
far, lueit ; as — as, big noc^
{dat.); not — from, unfevn,
uniDeit {gen.; 223).
farewell, :^ebeiuo(j(, n. (-g).
fast (quick), gefdjiuinb, fd)ne(I.
father, 5Bater, m. (-g ; -).
favour, ©efatten, m. (-g : — ).
fear, v., furd)ten {trans.); fidj
fiirc^ten {vox + dat.)
fear, subst., gurc^t,/; for — ,
an§ gurd)t.
iuawier, oeoer,/. (-n).
550
VOCABULARY.
February, /^cbvuav, m. (-8).
foel, fiit)leu ; (perceive), cmp;
finbcn, 144; infr.{ofhpMlih),
fid) befinbeu ; ,^u 'iyhite [cin ;
I— ill,mivift[d)lccl)t5ii^JUeutc.
few, ii)cui(^, iucui(]c ; a — ,
cinige, eiii poQv.
field, i^elb, ?i. (ec ; -cr).
fight, fcd)ten, 124;ftveitcn, 118.
fill, fiiUcii.
find, fiiiben, 144; — out, au6;
fiubcii; cifal)vcu (l^!0); —
again, luiebcvfiiibeii.
fine, fd)oii.
finger, ij^inger, m. (-§ ; — ).
finish, uollcu'bcu; to luive — ed
(with), [evtig feiii (mit) ;
— ed, fevtig.
fire, ^eucv, n. (-§ ; — ).
first, adj., ber, bie, basi erfte ;
adv., juevft; evfteii^ ; — of
all, ;^uerft.
fish, '^i[d), m. {-t% ; -c).
fishing (act of), '^if d)en, n. (-§).
fit for, — to, gut iM,
five, fiinf.
flatter, fd)meid)etn {dat.).
flatterer, (^d)meid)lev, m. {-% ;
-).
fleet, suhst., %Uiit, f. (-u).
floor, ^ll^boben, m. (-§ ; -).
flour, SJlel^t, n. (-e§).
flow, v., flie^en (123; feiu).
flower, SSUnne, /. (n).
fly,fliegen(131; fein); — away,
iDeg^iegeu.
follow, folgett (fein ; dat.).
foot, ^u§, m. (-c^ ; -e).
for, 229, prep, {in hehalf of),
tvix (nf^r.; 34); {of purpose)
ju {dat.\ 46); — reading,
JiUm i'cfcn ; (( ' pant lime)
fcit(c?a^.; 40); — three days
(past), feit bvci Xogcn ; {of
fut. time) aw] {ace. ; 229, A),
2); — three days (to come),
auf brei 'Joge.
forbid, ocrbicteu (131 ; dat.).
force, jraingeii, 144; to be
— <1, obliged (to), miiffen,
196-202.
ford, %nxt, f. (-en).
forest, iBalb, m. {-t% ; -er).
forgery, ^-i^evfdl[d)ung, / (-eit).
forget, uergcffen, 181.
forgive, Dcrgeben (181 ; dat.).
former, jener, jene, jetted.
fort, ^t\\t, f (-n), ^eftung,/
(-en).
fortieth (part), ^^iei^igftel, n.
(-§ ; -).
fortnight, uierjetju ^age.
fortunately, gliicfUd^eriueife ;
gliidf lidiev 2Bci[e.
fortune, good- — , ©liidf, n.
(-e§).
four, uier.
fox, }^i\6:^%, m. (-e§ ; -c).
France, '^vanfreid), n. (-§).
Francis, ^van^, m. (-en§).
Fred(dy), %x\%, m. (-en^).
Frederick, ^vtebrid), m. (-§);
Frederick-street, bie %x\t\ii
ftd)ftvaj^e.
free, fret.
freeze, frieven, 131.
French, franco fifd) ; — (lan-
guage), ^ran3ofi|c^, n. (be^
Sranjofifdien).
fresh, fvtfd).
▼C BUI ART.
651
Friciay, i^rcitac^, m. (-c§ ; -e).
friend, %veun'o, m. (csl ; -c).
friendJesK, freunbloS.
friendly, |i anbUd).
fric Kshi %xv ''M\tJ.{-tn),
fnghtet' ^^ crfd)rc(fen;
to be- (. •' [(^vecfen, 167.
frog, grofc^, »«. (-eg ; "c).
>ra {direction)^ uon, oug
(c?a<. ; 46); (caw^^e) am-,
(time) ttber ( + acc.; 65); a
week — to-day, i^twit iibcr
ad)t5tagc; {disease) an {dat.-,
65); cv' n biefer Jtranf^cit
geftorbeu, he died of ffiat
disease,
front; in— -of; not \u.aL or
ace. ; 65).
f"»y, gttnj.
funeral, 33cgra6nt§, w. (-fe§;
■fe).
furious, — ly, raiitcnb.
future, Su^unft,/.
G.
gallop, gttloppteren; fprengen.
garden, @artcn, m. (-g ; -).
gardener, ©cirtner, m. (-g; — ).
gather, fainnteln.
general, ©eneral', m. (-eg ; -c).
generally, geraofjnlic^.
generous, freigeMg.
gentleman, ^err, m. (-n ; -en).
George, @eorg, m. (-§).
German, adj., beutfd^ ; —
(language), ^eutfd), n. (beg
©eutfc^en); in — , auf
3)eutfc| ; into — , tng
3)eutfci^e.
Germany, 3)eutfc6lanb, w. (-g).
get(bec()mG),n)eibcn(159; fcin).
giH a)?dbd)cn, n. (-g ; — ).
give, gei)fn, 18T ; - p, aufs
gcben,
glad, fro^ (grer^.); be —, fic^
freucn ; I am — , eg freut
mid) ; I should be — to,
should like to, ic^ m6rf)tc gern.
glass, ©lag, n. (-eg ; "er).
glove, .f^anbfdiu^, m. (-eg ; -e).
go, ge^cn (188; fein); reifeit
(fein m- ^ben); — away,
Jucgge^en, fortgeljen;— back,
aurudge^en; — out, (^in)s
augge^en ; — down, ^n\x\u
terge^en; — up, ^inauf=
ge^en ; — past a place, aw
einem ^la^c oorilbergetjen ;
— • for, fetch, l^olen.
goal, Biel, n. (-eg ; -e).
God, god, @ott, m. (-eg ; '-er).
Goethe, ©oet^c, w. (-g).
gold, subst., @olb, n. (-eg).
gold, adj., golden, golben.
good, gut; be — enough,
l^o6en @te bie ©iite; —
morning, guten 90^orgen.
goodness, @iite, /.
graceful, — ly, anmutig.
grand-parents, ©ro^el'tetrt, pi.
grapes, %xa\xhtn, pi.
grass, f .ag, n. (-eg ; -er).
grateful, banfbar.
great, gro^ (^'er, gro§t).
green, griin ; suhsL, mm, n.
(-^).
grind, fc^letfen, 118.
ground, 33oben,r?i.(-g); ©rbe,/
grow, raac^i'en (186 ; fein) 186 ;
roerben (159; fein).
I.
<b^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
^^
^r
fe
/
1.0
I.I
•^4 5
-m
.i2
IM 1125
2.0
IL25 i u
1.6
riiuujgiHpiJiC
Sciences
Corporation
^
r<N^
A'
iV
^N
^v^
•«^\ "^^
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
%^
o
t
652
VOCABULARY.
guess, raten, erratcn, 188.
guest, @aft, m. (-e§ ; -'c).
H.
habit, @cn)of|n()ett, /. (-en);
to be in the — of, bie @c>
wo\)nf)cit f)ahen ^n, etc.;
pflegen.
half, adj., i)a\h ; — an hour,
cine l^albc (Stunbe.
half, subsL, $dlftc, / (-n).
hand, Qanh, /. (->.).
handsome, f(i)on.
handwriting, ^anbfc^rtft, /.
(-en),
hang, V. tr., ^ngcn ; v. intr.,
I^angcn, 188.
happy, gliidfUd^.
harbour, ^afen, m. (-§ ; -).
hard, fd)n)cr.
hardly, faum.
hare, S^a\c, m. (-n ; -n).
harvest, subsL, (Stnte, /. (-n);
v., crntcn.
haste, @itc, /. ; to make — ,
cilcn.
hat, ^ut, m. (-c§ ; -e).
have, ^aUn, 24; fein, 52, 53;
laffcrt, 188, 200, 7 ; to —
to, be obliged to, mitffen,
196-202; will you — a cup
of tea? raoUcn ®ic eine
Xaffc Xiice ?
hay, ^cu, n. (-c§).
he, cr; bcr; — who, berjes
nige raelci^er, etc., luev.
head, ^ofi, m. (-eg ; -c).
health, ©cfunb^eit, /
hear, prcn ; to — say, fagett
|)oven.
hearing, ®t^ox, n. (-e§).
heart, ^erj, n. (cnS ; -en);
by — , auSraenbig.
heat, JpifeP, /.
heath, .^eibe, /. (-n).
heaven, .l^immcl, m. (-§ ; — ;.
heavy, \S)wex ; — ily, fci)n)cr;
(of rain) ftar! ; heaviest of
all, am atterfd)n)crflen.
help, subst.f «^ilfe, /.
help, v., {)elfcn (159; dat.);
it cannot bo — ed, e§ Id^t
fic^ nic^t (inbern.
Henry, .l^cinric^, m. (-§)>
her, pers. pron., fie (ace); i^r
(dat.).
her, jooss. ai/., i^v, iljvc, il^r.
here, l^tcr.
hide, V.J tjerbevgen, 159.
high, 1)06), t)i)l)er, ^o6)\t (loses
C in inflexion) ; to think
— ly of, ciel \)(!i\izn con, 188.
him, ii^n (ace), ti)m (dat).
himself (he), er felbft; (to, for)
— , fid) (ace. or dat.).
his, poss. adj.y [cin, feine, fein.
his, poss. pron., fetner, feine,
feincS ; ber, bte, ba§ feine ;
ber, bie, bd§ feinige.
hoarse, l^eifer.
hold, mten, 188; — together,
jufammen^alten.
holiday, ^eiertag, m. (-e§; -e);
— s, i^erien, pi.
home, .^eimat, /.; adv., nad^
§aufe ; at — , §u ^aufe ; to
go — , nad) .l^aufe gel)en, 188.
honest, e^iltc^, rebli^, aufs
rid)tig.
honey, Jjonig, m. (-cS).
VOCABULARY.
653
, -en);
f dliBcr ;
^iest of
dat.) ;
3.); t§r
\t (loses
) think
m, 188.
it.).
(to, for)
K, fein.
', fcine,
§ feine;
Dgether,
■c§; -c);
mfcj to
en, 188.
hope, «2«6s^., §offnung, / (-en);
v., 1^ off en.
horse, gjferb, ti. (-e§ ; -e).
hospital, ^ofpital, ©pitaL w.
(-e§ ; -'er).
hostess, SBirtin, f. (-nen).
hot, ^ei^.
hour, (Stunbe,/(-n); hand,
©tunbenjeiger, m. {-§ ; — ).
house, ^am, n. (-e^ ; %) ;
at your — , bei ^^nen.
how, wk; — do you do ? )uie
ge^t eg ^^nen ? mc befinben
©ie fic^ ?
however, ahtx ; jebod^,
howl, l[;eulen.
human, menfcbltc^ ; —being,
3D2enfd), m. (-en ; -en),
hundred, ^unbert; 52*65^., ^uns
bert, n. (-eg ; -c).
hunger, ^mqev, m. (-§).
hungry, ^ungrig ; be — ,
i&unger ^aben.
hunter, ^ciger, m. (-§; — ).
hunting (act of), ^agen, n.
(-§); (chase) ^agb, / (-en);
go — , auf oie ^agb ge^en.
huntsman, ^dger, m. (-g; — ).
hurry, ei(e,/; lamina—, id)
h'xn in ber @ile, td^ l^abe eg eifig.
hurt, v., Derle^en; raeb ihm
(99 ; dat.)
husband, Mmn, m. (-eg ; -er).
hussar, §uf ar, m. (-en or -g ; -en).
I.
I, td^.
ice, ©ig, n. (-eg).
idea, ;;)bee, / (-n), ©ebonfe,
m. (-ng or -n ; -n).
idle, faur, trage.
idleness, idling, 9)H§iggang,
m. (-eg),
if, wenn; (whetlier), oh.
ignorant, unrotffenb.
ill, fvanf ; — -health, fcfilecfttc
©efunb^eit, / ^
illness, Bxann)Cit, /. (-en),
imagine, ^i6)(dat.) benfen, 99.
immediately, (fo)gleic^.
importance, SBic^tigfeit, /.
important, raic^tig, bebeutenb.
impossible, unmoglid).
in, in (dat.; 65); auf (dat.; 65,
230, a); — the country,
ouf bem Sortbe.
inch, 3oa, m. (-eg),
induce, beiueqen, 131.
industrious, flei^ig.
industry, g^ei§, m. (-eg),
inform, mitteilen.
inhabitant, @inn)oT)ner, m
(-§ ; -).
ink, 3:inte or !5)tnte,/
innocence, Unfd)ulb, /
inquire, fic^ erfunbigen, fragen.
inside of, inner^alb (gen.; 223).
insist on, hefki)m (186; auf -t-'
ace.)
instead of, ftatt, anftatt (gen. :
223). '
intend, beabfic^tigen, oor'^aben,
24, gebenfen, 99.
intention, 5tbftd)t, / (-en),
interrupt, unterbred/en, 167.
into, in (ace; 65).
invent, erfinben, 144.
invitation, (Sinlabung, / (-en),
invite, einloben, 186.
iron, gifen, n. (-5); adj., cifern.
554
VOCABULARY.
!.» ,,
it (38, 39), c§ ; cr ; ftc ; bcr,
biC; baSfcIbc ; in — , borin ;
for — , baf iir ; of — , baoon ;
with — , bamit; to — , ba§u.
its, po88. adj., feitt, it)r.
itself (nom.), C§ felbft {dat.,
ace), fi*^).
J*
James, S^J^'^^* *^- (■^)*
January, 3anuar, m. (-g).
John, 3o^ann', m. (-g), 3o^an*
journey, SRcife,/. (-n).
joyous, frotjlic^.
July, 3u'H, 7?i. (-^).
jump, [pringen, (144; fein); —
down, ^cruntevfprmgcn, t)in*
unterfpringen.
June, 3u'ni, m. (-«).
just, gerabe, ekn ; — now,
foeBen, — as, efeenfo.
justify, rec^tfertigcn.
K.
kick, flo^ctt, 188.
kind ; what — of, toni fitr (ein,
einc, ein) ; of many — s, i)ic=
lerlei ; adj., gut, freunb(td) ;
to be so — as to, fo gut fein
unb.
kindness, ®ittc,/, 03utigfeit,/,
greuttblid)!eit,/
king, ^onig, m. (-e^ ; -e); King-
street, t)ie ^onigjira^e.
kingdom, ,^6ttigrcic^,n. (-eg; -e).
knife, ?!}?e|Jer, n. (-g ; — ).
knock down, ^eruntcrfd)lagett,
186.
know (of acquaintance), !en-
ntw, 99 ; (of knowledge ac-
quired by mental effort)
ttjiffctt, 196; — how, fott*
nen, 196.
knowledge, ilentttttiS, / (-fe),
SBiffenfdjaft,/. (-en),
known, feefannt.
L.
lady, Dame,/ (-n); young —
(Miss), graulein, n. (-g; — ).
lake, ©ee, m. (-3 ; -en).
landscape, Sanbf^aft,/ (-en).
language, (©^radje,/ (-It).
lantern, ?a<:rne,/. (-n).
large, gro§ (-er, gro^t).
last, le^t, ttorig; at — , enb*
Uc^ ; v., bauern.
late, fpat.
lately, neultc^, fitrjltc^.
Latin, suhst, Satein', n. (-g).
Utter, the — , tBHT. doiM^
laugh, kc^en; — (at), tdcS&en
{gen. or iiber -face.) ; he — s
at (makes sport of) you, er
madjt |!(^ iiber @te lufttg.
lawyer, ^Iboofat', m. (-en ; -en).
lay, tegen.
lazy, faul, trage.
lead, 33lei, n. (-eg).
lead, v., fii()ren.
lead-pencil, S3leifttft, m. (-eg ; -e).
leaf, ^latt, n. (-eg ; -er).
learn, lemen.
learned, adj., getefirt.
learning (action of), Semen,
n. (-g).
least ; at — , ttjenigfleng.
leave, laffen, 1 88 ; — behind,
desert, abandon, i)er(affen ;
— out, auglajfen.
left, (inf ; be — , iibrig Meiben
(120; fein).
f
VOCABULARY.
555
3w, fon*
^oung —
/ (-en),
(-n).
).
n. (-^).
t), tdd&en
) ; he — 8
f) you, cr
lufti^.
f-en ; -en).
er).
), Semen,
— behind,
»cr(affen ;
:tg fcleiben
leg, S3c{n, n. (-ti ; -e).
lemonade, I'imonobe,/ (-n).
lend, lei^n (120; dat. o/pers.)
lesson, Slufgabe, / (-u) ; M-
Hon,/ (-en),
let, lajfen, 188.
letter {of alphabet), 33ud)fta6e,
.... (-n^ or -n; -n), (epistle),
33rief, m. (-eg ; -c).
liar, gugner, m. (-g ; — .).
library, ^mioti^d'J. (-en).
lie (be recumbent), liegen, 181 ;
—down, ftc^ ^iulegen.
life, Seben, n. (-g ; — ).
lighten (flash), bli^en.
lightning, 3311^, m. (-es! ; -e).
like, mogen, 196-202; gem ^a^
ben, 24; I should — , i^
ntod^te (gem); to — to learn,
gem lemen ; I — music, id)
bin (in greunt) ijon Wlu^il;
how do you — Londo'^.? ivie
gefaUt 3§nen Sonfcon ?
lily, Silie,/ (-n).
Liraburg, adj., Simburger.
lion, goire, m. (-n ; -n).
listen to, an()oren (tr.).
literature, giteratur',/ (-en).
little {of size), thin ; {ojquan-
titji) ttjenig.
live, Xt^in-, (dwell), ttjo^nen.
living, le'bent), leben'feig.
locality, ®egent),/ (-en).
London, Ronton, n. (-$) ; adj.,
Sontoner.
long, adj., (ang (''cr); ac^v.,
lange (-r); have you been
here — ? fint) @ie fc^on knge
^ier ? he has not been here
for a — time, er ifl lange
nic^t ^ier gemefen ; three
months —er, nud^ brei 9)?o*
nate; no — er {lit., not
more), nic^t uie^r.
long for, v., fic^ fet)iien nac^.
look for, [lichen, fuc^en nac|;
— like, nugfe^^en (ivie or
md)), 181 ; it — s (appears,
seems) like rain, eg ft el) t nad)
JRegen aug ; — up, ()inanf*
fe^en, 181.
lose, ijerlieren, 131.
lost, tterloren.
loud, — ly, laut.
Louisa, gouife,/ (-ng).
love, v., lieben.
lo>ver, unter, nicber (adjs.),
M.
magiiificent, prad)tig.
majesty, ^JJajeftot',/ (-en),
make, mac^en.
man, ^ann, m. (-eg; ''er); (hu-
man being), ^})?enfc^, m. (-en ;
-en); —kind, SJJenfd),^.; men
(soldiers), ©olbaten; little
— , '3)?dnn(ein, n. (-g ; — ).
manikin, ?0?annlein, w. (-g ; _).
manner, 5Cetfe,/ (-n); in that
— , aufbtefe ^i\\i,
many, »ie(e ; — a, — a one,
mand)er, manege, iiiand)eg.
March, Waxi, m. (-eg).
Margaret, ?D?argarete,/ (-ng).
market, ?!J?ar!t, m. (eg ; "e).
marriage (-ceremony), 3;rau--=
wng,/ (-en).
married, oerbeiratet.
marry, ^eiraten, i)er()eirflteu (ftc^
mit).
marsh, @unipf, m. (-eg ; -'e).
Mary, SJ?arie,/ (-ng).
i i4
556
VOCABULARY.
matter, 'Ba^t,/. (-n) ; what is
the — ? wag gicbtg ? tpa^ ifl
log? what is the — with
you? mi fet)(t3fenen?
May (month of), Wai, m. (-eg
or -en).
mjiy, v., tiirfen; fonnen; mo*
gen, 196-202.
mayor, 53urgermci|lcr, m. (-g;
/♦
me, nii(^ (ace), mir {dat).
mean ; in the — time, unter*
tej^en; by — s of, ttermit-
telfl, \)crmoge, gren., 223.
mean, v., meinen ; to — to,
intend to, tvotlen, 196-202.
meat, gleifc^, n, (-eg).
meet, v., begegnen (dat.) fein);
to go to — , cntgegcn gc^en
(188; dat.', fein).
meeting, QSerfammlung,/ (-en).
melon, *iJ)?elonc,/. (-n).
mental, geijltg.
merchant, ^aufmann, m. (-eg ;
-leute).
mere, — ly, b(o§.
merry, merrily, lujltg.
messenger, 53ote, m. (-n ; -n).
metal, ^etatl', n. (-eg ; -e).
microscope, ^Wifroftop', n. (-eg;
-0-
middle, SJ^itte,/; in the — of
summer, mitten im @ommer.
mile, ?U?etle,/ (-n).
milk, '3J>i(d),/.
mine, meincr, meine, meineg ;
ter, W, bag meine ; t»er, t)ie,
bag meinige.
minute, ^innte, / (-n); —
-hand, SJ'Jinutcnjeiger, m. (-g;
misfortune^ Ungliirf, n. (-eg).
Miss (young lady), graulein,
n. (-g ; — ).
mistake, gc^Ier, w. (-g ; — ).
mock, fpotten {gen. or iiber-f-
acc).
moisten, bene^en.
moment, Slugenblicf, m. (-eg ; -e).
monarch, 3)?onarc^', m. (-en;
-en).
Monday, ?Olontag, m. (-g ; -e).
money, ©elt), w. (-eg ; -er).
month, ?0^onat, m. (-eg ; -e) ; a
- - ago, ttor einem SUionat.
more, me^r; one — , noc^
einer.
morning, ^fj^orgcn, m. (-g; — );
in the — , beg SJJorgeng;
good — , guten SJJorgcn.
mostly, meifieng.
mother, ^iutter,/ (-').
mountain, ^erg, m. (-eg ; -e).
mourning, %XCi\xtx,f.
Mr., .^err, m. (-n; -en),
much, ijiet ; very — , fe^r ; as
— , eben fo ttiet.
music, ^fHufiff/
musician, "iS^n'ftfer, m. (-g ■— ).
must, miiffen, 196-202.
my, poss. adj., mein, meine,
mein {also expressed hy dat.
of per s. pron. -\-def. art.)
myself (I), (ic^) felbft.
N.
name, siibst., 9?ame, m. (-ng or
-n; -n) ; nennen, v., 99; what
ia the — of? tt)ie ^ei§t?
what is your — 1 mie ^eif en
@ie?
nation, Nation,/, (-en).
*
I. (-e«).
graulein,
5; — ).
rr uber +
i.(-e^;-e).
m. (-en;
(-« ; -e).
-er).
jJ; -e); a
!)?onat.
— , noc^
(-«;-);
rgen.
■e^ ; -c).
I)-
fe^r; as
J,
I, meinc,
? by dat.
art)
I. (-nS or
99; what
le ^ei§t?
){e |cif en
Vocabulary.
657
native town,®e6urt0flat»t/(-e)
natural, nntiirlic^.
naughty, unflrtig.
near, prep., neben (dat. or ace. :
65).
necessity, ^fJot,/ (-c).
need, v., branch en ; be in — of,
betiirfen (196 ; ^en. or ace);
in — of, betiirftig (gen.)
neglect, v., oernad^laffti^en.
neighbour, 5f?ac^bar,wi. (-«; -n) ;
— (/m.),9f?ac^knn/(-nen).
neither, ttjeter; — . . .nor, tve*
ber. . .ncc^.
nest, gf^eji, n. (-e« ; -er).
never, nie; jiieuiaU; — yet,
noc^ nte.
new, neu.
news, «nac^rt^t,/ (-en),
newspaper, 3Htung,/. (-en),
next, nad)fl (see na^e).
Niagara Falls, t>ic ^xaciaxa''
eaae.
niece, 5f?t(^te,/ (-n).
night, mm, / (^'e); at — ,
nadU(3; bed ?'?a(^td.
no, adj., feiu, feine, fetn ; adv.,
nein; —body, — person, nie=
mant), feiner, feine, !eined;
— more, — longer, ntc^t
mc|r; — , thank you, i(^
banfe (3f)nen).
noble, ettel.
noise, ?arm, m. (-eg),
noon, 5^ittacj, m. (-eg ; -e).
north, 'm^xl), m. (-eg); Shorten,
m. (-g),
not, nid)t; — a, !ctn, feine,
fetn; —yet, nod) nid)t; —
at all, gar nid)t; are (you,
etc.)—? nic^t wa^r?
nothing, nic^tg.
notwithstanding, ungeac^tet
{gen.; 223).
novel, suhsL, iRoman', m. (-eg ;
-0-
November, S'loocinber, w. (-g),
now, |e0t.
nowhere, nirgenfeg.
nut, ««uf,/ C^fc).
O.
oak, Sic^e,/ (-n).
ot>ey, ge()orc^en {dat.)
oblige, t)crbint)en, 144; be — d
or compelled (to), niiijfen.
occasion, subst., ®elegenl)cit,
/ (-en); v., t)erurfad)en.
o'clock, ll^r {invariable); what
— is lO? jvie ^iel U^r ifl eg.
of (231), ijon (c?ai;.;46; 231)
{material) oug (cfa^.; 46)
{cause) an {dat.; 231, c/)
the treaty — Paris, ter 25er
trag ^u f arig ; the battle—
Waterloo, t>ie @d)Iacf)t bet
3CaterIoo ; — the Alma, an
ber 9({ma.
oif, ab.
offer, bieten ( 131 ; dat. o/psrs.);
anbieten (131; dat. of per s.)
officer, Offtgier, m. (-g ; -e).
often, oft (-er), oftmalg, ntanc^^
mal.
oh! D!
old, alt C^er).
on, 232, auf, an {dat. or ace. ;
65); (of time) an {dat; 232,
a); {about) iiber {ace; 65).
once, cinmal.
one, eing; etn, eine, etn; the
small — , ber, bte, bag ^leine;
658
VOCABULARY.
i*
I
— and the same, ein^ ; —
and a half, antcrt^alb.
only, nur; {of time) crft; not
— . . .but also, jiid)t luir. . .
fonterii and).
open, adj., offen; v., aufmad)fn;
offneii.
opinion, *D}?cinun(^,/ (-en).
opportunity, ©clegcn^eit, /
(■en).
oppressive, briicfenb.
or, obev ; three — four, brct
bis x>ier ; either... — , ent*
iveber . . . obcr ; — else, fonfl.
orator, Stebner, m. (-g ; — ).
order, v. (command), t)efcl)Icn
(167 j dat. of pers.)\ (pre-
scribe), yerorbuen, beftellen.
other, anber; every — day,
einen Zap, urn ben anbern.
otherwise, fonft ; anber^.
our, adj., nnfer, nnfere, unfer.
ours, pron., unfer, nnfere, nw^
fcre^; bcr, bie, bag unferc;
ber, bie, bag unfrit^e.
out of, C[\x^ {dat; 46);
{or at) the window, juin
genfter ^inaug.
over, liber {dat or ace, 65);
— there, — the way, britben.
overcoat, U'berrocf, m. (-eg ; -e);
U'berjie()er, m. (-g ; — ).
own, adj., eii^en.
paint, nialen ; to — (other than
pictures), aujheiiten, 118.
painter, ^a\tx, m. (-g ; — ).
painting (art of), 9}ialerei',/.
palace, ^alaft', m. (-eg ; -e) ;
(Sd)(o§, n. ( feg ; -fer).
pale, b(eid).
paper, ^a)>ier, n. (-g ; -e) ;
news—, 3eitunc},/ (-en).
paradise, ^arabieg', n. (-eg; -e).
pardon, 5Der3Ci()nng,/
parents, Sltern,jp/. only.
Paris, ^arig', n. (oon $artg).
Paris, adj. ( = Parisian), ^ar*
ifer.
part, %t\\, m. and n. (-eg, -e);
for the most — , meifteng,
uieiftenteilg.
party, ^efellfAaft,/ (-en).
pass, V. tr., {of time, to spend,
etc.), jnbriniien 99, 2; —
(an examination), befiel)en,
186; intr., vergci)en (188;
fein); tterflie^cn (123; fein);
— through, bur^fommen
(167; fein).
passing, adj., ttoritberf|e|)cnb.
past, oert^angen, luoriiber, »or=»
bet ; to go — the house, am
^anfe ooritberge^en, ijorbei-
ge^en.
patient, ^ranfe, adj. subst
pay, beja I) ten {ace. of thing,
dat. of pers. ; ace. of pers.
when pers. only is mention-
ed); — attention, 5l(^t iK^
ben (181) ; — a visit, einen
33efud) mad)en {dat of pers.);
befnd)en {ace. of pers.).
paying (action of), SBejaljlen,
n. (-g).
peace, ?^riebe(n), m. (-n or -ng).
pear, 33irne,/ (-n).
peasant, 58a uer, m. (-n or -g ;
-n).
pen, 5eber,/ (-n).
people {pl.\ !2eute, pi. {no
VOCABULAKY.
550
siuff.); — (inrle/.), man ; —
say, man fagt ; — , nation,
^>elf, n. (-e^ ; ^'er).
pepper, ^feffer, m. (-S).
perfect, — ly, (^an^, ijoUfommcn.
perhaps, ttieafirf)t'.
permission, (SrlauOniGf,/
permit, criauben (dat. o/pers.).
person, ^ex\on',f. (en),
personal, pfrfiinlirf).
philosopher, ^^i(ofopf)',m. (en;
-en),
physician, Slr^t, m. (-eg ; -e).
pick up, aufi)eben, 131.
picture, 53ilt), n. (-eg; -er);
(painting) ©enuilbe, n. (-g;
/•
piece, (Stiicf, w. (-eg ; -c).
pigeon, Zanhe,/. (-n).
pinch, fneifen, 118.
pity, v., betauern ; it is a — ,
eg i\t fcbobe.
place, subst., ^(aft, w. (-eg;
-'e); Drt, m, (-eg; -e or-'er);
to take ■—, ftattffnben, 144;
in that — , ba, bafelbft,
tort,
place, v., fiellen, fe^cn.
plant, ^flan^e,/ (-n).
plate, 3;eUer, m. (-0 ; — ).
play, v., f)jtelen.
pleasant, angene^m.
please, "(^efaUen (188 ; dat.); (if
you) please, (id)) bitte, tuenn
ic(> mkn barf, flcfadigft.
pleasure, 25ergniigen, n. (-g);
trip, (short) excursion,
Slugflug, m. (-eg, -e).
plum, «Pflaunie,/ (-n).
poem, ®efctd^t, n. (-eg ; -e).
poet, Dic^ter, m. (-g ; — ).
point; cardinal _ (of the
compass), jpimme (giieiKnb, ./.'
(-en) ; to be upon the — of,
im ^^ej^riffe fein.
poison, subst., ©ift, n. (-eg ; -e);
^•, vergiften.
policeman, ^oliselticner, m.
(-g; — ); ©rt)u^mann, m.
(-eg; -{cute).
poor, arm ("er).
position, (Stetle,/ (-n); etel-
I"»g./ (en).
possess, beffl^cu, 181.
possible, moj^lifb.
post, — office, fc%/. — man,
VofiMe,m. (-n;-n); by re-
turn — , mit umge()en\)er f ofl,
umiic()enb.
postage-stamp, 33riefmarfe, /
(-n).
postpone, auPieben, 131.
pound, ^fnnb, n. (-eg).
power, .^raft,/ ("e).
praise, v., bben ; prcifen, 120.
pray, v., beten; interj., bitte!
precise, — ly, (^enau.
prefer, voraiet)en, 131 ; I — to
walk, id) (^ebe lieber iju gu§.
prepare; to — for, fic| tjor*
bereiten niif (ace).
presence, @eiienn?art,/
present, adj., gecicnjrartig ; for
the — , fiir'i? grfte.
present, subst., ©cfd^enf, '>^
(-eg ; -e).
president, 5)rafibent', m. (-en;
-en),
press (urge), v., brtncjen, 144.
pretty, |>iibfcb, fd)i)n ; ^adv. (tol-
erably), jiemlicb.
prevent, tjer^inbern.
;
560
VOCABULARY.
V,
i
1>
price, fx({«, m. {-ti ; -e).
prince, ^vix% m. (eii ; -en);
^riii^, w. (-en ; -en),
prison, ©efangnid, n. (-fefii; -fe).
probable, probably, n)a()r|d^eiii=
li(^ ; probably, wo^l.
professor, ^rofejyor,w. (-«;-en).
promise, v., t)erfpre(t)en, 167.
propose, t)orfd)Iagen, 186.
proud (of), fiolj (auf + acc.)
proverb, ©pricfewort, n. (-c^:
^'er).
province, ^vovin\',/. (-en),
prudent, ijorfici^tig.
Prussia, ^reu§en, n. (-^).
Prussian, subst, ^rcupe, m.
(-n ; -n).
public, offcntlic^. '
punish, bcflrafen, flrafeii.
punishment, ©trafc,/ (-n).
pupil, (Sc^itlcr, m. (-g ; — ).
pure, rein,
put on (coat, etc.), an;|ie^cn,
131 ; (hat), auffe^en.
Q.
quality, gfcjenfrfjajl,/ (-en),
quarrel, v., flrciten, 118; f{^
jlreitcn (mit).
quarter, 35iertel, n. (-i; — );
— of an hour, SSicrteljlunbe,
/ (-n).
queen, Mn\Q\n,f. (-nen).
quick, — ly, fct)netl ; quickly,
quit, v., ^ertaflfen, 188.
quite, ganj.
R.
railway-station, S3a^n|of, m.
rain, szibst, JRcgen, m. (-«) ; v,
regnen.
raise, l)eben, 131.
rather, et)cr, Heber.
raven, Mcib(, m. (-n ; -n).
read, lefen, 181 ; to — to, ijor-
lefen (dat. of per s.)
reading (act of), ficfcn, n. (-^).
ready, fertig, bercit; readily,
leid)t.
reason, (35runt>, m. (-ed ; -e).
receive (get), erbaltcn, 188;
empfaiigen, 188; befommen,
167 ; — (as a host), aufn?^-
mcn, 167.
recover (from illness), qenefen
(181; ffin).
red, adj., rot(-er); aubat, 'S{\ii,n.
Reformation, ^Reformation, /
(-en),
refuse, intr., fld^ ttjeigem.
regard, anfe^tn (181 ; fitr -f-
acc.)', betrad^ten (ate),
regret; I regret, ed tl)ut mir Ieit».
reign, S^e(|ternng,/ (-en),
relate, erja^len.
related, »ern?ant)t (dat. or mit).
rely upon, fic^ ttertajfen (188;
auf-t-acc).
remain, bleiben (1 20; fein); — at
home, — behind, juriidfblei*
ben; — over,iibrig bleiben; —
standing, ftet)en (186) btetben.
remarkable, merfn?iirfcig.
remember, fld^ erinnem (gen.);
erinnern (ace); I wish to be
— ed to him, \^ lajfe i^n
grii^cn.
remind of, erinnem Ci,n{-{- ace.)
rent, v., ttermietctt.
repeat, iviebert^o'len.
VOCABULARY.
561
reply, subat, %ntmxt, /. (-en).
reply, v., onttporten, erwitern,
tterfe^cn.
report, v., bcrid^ten.
representation, 33orflcaung, /
(-en).
resemble, aimUd) fein (c'at.);
gletc^en (118; dat.)
reside, ttJO^nen.
resist, roiberjle'^en (186; dat.)
resolve, v., fic^ entfdjlie^en, 123.
rest ; all the — , atte anbern ;
retire to —, flc^ fc^Iafcn
(188) legen.
return, tjergelten (159); — good
for evil, S3ofeg mit ®utent
©ergelten; by — of post, mit
umge^cnber ^ejl, um9el)cnb.
reward, subst, ^ot)\\, m. (-U),
rheumatism, 3^()cuinatigmu«,m.
(beg — ).
ribbon, 5©anb, n. (-eg ; "er).
rich (in), ret(^ (an4-o?a«.)
rid, log ; to get — of, log tt)er=
ten ( -i- ace.)
ride, reiten (118); (in a con-
^ veyance), fasten (186; fein).
riding (act of; not in a con-
veyance), 9leiten, n. (-g).
right {adj.), red)t; (correct),
rtd^Hg; in the — way, auf
bie rirfjtic^c silBeifc ; subst,
S^ec^t, rj. (-eg; -e); to be (in
the) — , 'Siz^i ^aben.
righteous, gercc^t ; the — (man),
ber (S^ered^te.
ring, subst, 9llng, m. (-eg ; -e) ;
— , v., la u ten (of a large
bell), flingeln (of a small
bell); there is a — at the
door, eg tlingelt.
ripe, reif.
rise (g«?t up), aufflel)en (186 ;
fein); (ascend), auffteiaen
(120; fein).
river, ^lup, m. (-feg ; '^fe).
road, «roe9,m.(-eg;-e);®trage,
Roman, .Corner, m. (-g ; — ).
room, (apartment), ©tube,/
(n) ; dimmer, n. (-g ; — ).
rose, 3*lofe,/ (-n).
row, v., rubern.
run, laufen (188; fein); —
after, nac^Iaufen (188; fein;
dat.); — away,bat)on'laufett.
Russia, Sflu§lflnb, n. (-g).
Russian, subst., ^Huffe, m. (-n;
-n).
S.
oad, traurig.
safe, f!cl)er.
sailing-ship, ^cgelfc^iff, n. (-eg ;
sale; f or — , ju tjerfaufen.
same, adj. and pron., ber, 'Qk,
bflgfelbe; ber, bie, bagfelbipe;
ber, bie, bag namlic^e ; at the
— time, ju fifei^er 3eit; all
the — , one and the — ,
einerlei.
Sarah, ©ara,/ (-g).
satisfied, gufricben.
Saturday, @onnabenb,»w. (-eg);
(Samgtag, m. (-eg),
save, rctten; I — d his life, ic^
rettetc ib;m bag :3eben.
say,, f^S'^n ; to hear — , ^a^tn
^oren ; (assert, claim to be),
wottcn (196-202); to be said,
fotlen (196-202).
/
562
VOOABULAHY.
scholir (pupil), <Bd)u\tr, m. (-t ;
school, ©cbiilf,/ (-tt); —boy,
©djiilcr, m. {-i ; — ).
scold, fd>elten, 159.
Scotland, ©rfjottlant), n. (ij).
scream, fdjrcieii, 120.
searcli (for), fu^ctt.
seat one's self, sit down, fid)
fe^en.
second, num. adj., jivfitf.
second (of time;, aubst., tge*
fiinbf, /. (-n).
secret, — ly, gel)eint, l)eiinlid).
see, feben, 181.
seek, fud)i'n.
seem, fd)einfn, 120.
self, felbfl. '
sell, tterfrtufen.
send, fd)icfen ; — to, 3ufd)icffn;
— word to, beiiad)rid)tii^cu
(ace. o/pers.); — for, ^olflt
Inffen (188), fd)icfen nad).
September, September, m. (-^).
servant, Diener, m. (-g ; — );
X)icnftbotf, m. (-« ; -n) ; ^^Jkat),
/ C^e).
serve, tienen (dat.) ; — (of a
meal), fcroifren.
set, tr. (of a time-piece), flef:=
leit; intr. (of the sun), uti'=
teri^e^en (188;fi'in); —free,
befreien.
settler, 5lnftet)Ier, m. (-ji ; — ).
seven, ficbeit.
several, eini(^e; etli^c; me()verc.
shake, f^iittellU
shall, foHen (196-202).
she, fie.
shield, @cbilb, m. (-eg ; -e).
ship, ©c^iff, n. (-eg; -e).
Hhoe, (»dMib, m. (-e« ; -e).
siioemaker, 3d)ufter, m. (-« ;
— ); 'cd)ul)uiad)cr,m. {-t ; — ).
shoot, fdncpen, 123.
shop, Vuten, tn. (-g ; ").
shore, Ufer, n. (c .; — ).
short, hwy, — ly, nad)ftn»J.
shout, fd)rcicn, 120.
show, jjcij^en.
shutter, ^abfll, m. (-<? ; — ).
siiy, intr. (of horses), fd)eu
tverben (159; fein;.
sick, frant; the — (man), t)er
^Iranfe.
side, 8nte, / (-n); on this —
of, prep.. ttie«J,:it {(/en.; 223);
on that — of, jirep., jcilfk'it
(gen.; 223); on this — , adv.,
t)iei5|citg; on that — , adv.,
jenfeitg.
sign, 8ubi<t., ^nd)m, n. (-g ;
— ); V , anter^eid)'nen.
silence, (gi-^r. Hgen, n. (-c).
silent, ftumm.
silly, ciufiiltif^.
silver, (Silbcr, n. (-g).
since (241), prep., feit idat;
46); adv., feitbem; conj., ta.
sing, flu(^eu, 144.
singer, ©angerin,/ (-nen).
single, einjig.
sink, finfen (144; fein).
sister, ©c^ivefter,/ (-n).
sit, fi0ett, 181; — down, fid)
fe^cn; — up, remain up,
aufblciben (120; fein).
six, fcc^g.
skate, v., ®c^Iittfd)ii^ I'aufcn
•188; fein).
skill, ©efdndlt^feit,/
slave, (5f(a\?e, m. (-n ; -n).
I
VOC'ABTILARY.
603
fil)eu
slay, tfjtfn.
sleep, v., frf^Iafftt, \H8; subst,
sleighing, @ct)itttenbabn,/
r!lipper,fnntoffel,w.(-«;-nor— ).
slow, — ly, langfam.
small, f(?in.
smelt, fd)uie(^cn.
smile, v., ladiedt ; mbaty ?ii(ft«
fin, n. (-€),
sneak, fd)lcici^en (118; fetn). .
snow, snbst.y (Scgnec, m. (-d);
v., frf)ueicu.
so, fo ; — are -ve, tvir finb ed
and),
soldier, (Soltxif, m. (-fit ; -ett).
some, einii^e, ctlid)e, njcldie,
mflnd)e, itwa€; irgenb ein,
eine, cin ; — one, — body,
jeuiflnb, — thing, — what,
cttua^ ; — where, trc^enbtro ;
— of ic, 'ta'oon ; for — time
(past), jcit cintf^er ^eit
son, @ol)n, m. (-e« ; ''e) ; little
— , @o^nc6en, n. (-g ; — ).
song, ?ieb, ri. (-eg ; -er).
soon, bait (comp. e^er, superl.
am e^cften); as — as, fobalt.
Sophia, (Jopbie,/ (-n^).
sorry ; I am — , e^ ifl mir Icit,
e« ttnit mir leib.
sound, — ly, fefl.
sour, faucr.
South, (Siit(cn), m. (-«).
Spain, 8panifn, »?. (-g).
ST>eak, fprec^cn, 167, rften ; —
with or to, fprc^en {ace. of
pers. ).
speaking (act of), ©pred>cn, n.
(-«).
spectacles (pair of), 33ri (I e/ (-n ).
speech, JRfbe,/ (n).
spite; in — of, trofc (gr^n.; 223).
spoil, r tr., ofiieiten.
.sport ; iv> mak J — of any one,
ffcb iibcr temant(cn) \acc.\
luflig mac^cn.
spread (out), fid) tjerbreltcn.
spring, v.. fprinc^fti (144 ; jein);
subat., ^rii^Iin^^, m. (-e«;-e).
square (in a town), ^la^, m.
(-6(8 ; '-'e).
St. Lawrence, <Sanct Soren^^m.
stand, |lct)en, 186.
start (for), abrfifen(nad) ; fein).
state (condition), 3«|lfl"i^ "fn
{-ti ; "e).
statesman, (Staatdmanu, m.
{-H-, -er).
stay, b(eiben(120; fcin); — up,
aufbleiben; — away, fert*
bleibjn.
steal, j^e^Ien, 167.
steam engine, ^Damtofmafd^itte,
/. (-n).
steamer, !Dampffd)tff,n.(-e«; -e).
steel, (2tal)l, m. (-fg).
stick, subst., (Stocf, m. (-cd; -e).
still, adv., nod), bod) (195);
nod& immer.
sting, {lec^en, 167.
stocking, (Strumpf, m. (-eg ; -e).
stop (<;ease), v. intr., auf^orcn.
storm, (Sturm, m. (-eg; "t).
story, ^efc^ii^tP,/ (-n).
stove, Dfen, m. (-g ; -),
stranger, gremtltng, m. (-eg;
-e); t^remtc (adj. subst.)
stream, ®trom, m. (-eg ; '-e).
street, (Strafe,/, (-n).
strong, ftarf (-er).
student, (2tubettt',m.(-ett; -en).
564
VOCABULARY.
«ss
study, substt (Stutium, n. (■« ;
@tut)ien); (room), ^Stuticr*
jimmer, n. (-g ; — ) ; «., flubier*
en; — (prepare) for, flc^
toorbcrdten aiif (4-acc.)
studying (act of), sufts^., @tu -
bicrett, n. (-«).
submit, ffc^ untcrttjer'fcn, 159.
subscribe, untcrf^rei'beit, 120.
succeed, gelingen (m/?er5., 144;
• feitt); I — , cs (^etingt mir.
such, fold^, folder, fotd)e, folc^e^;
fo.
sudden, — ly, plij^Ui^.
suflfer, leibcn, 118.
suftico, geniigen (dat)
sufficient, ^tnreid)ent).
summer, ®ommer, m. {-i; — ).
sun, (Sonne, / (-n); — dial,
©onnenu^r,/ (-en) ; — set,
(Sonnenuntcrgang, m. (-eg).
Sunday, ©onntag, m. (-e^ ; -e).
support, untcrftii^'en.
sure, [ic^cr ; to be — , freilid^ ;
Switzerland, bie (Sd^njeij (bc^
©c^a^eij),
T.
table, Jtfd^, m. (-eg ; -e).
tailor, Sc^neiber, tn. (-g ; - ).
take, net)men, 167; — a walk,
cinen ©pajiergang macl)en ;
fpfljieren ge^en (188; fein); —
a voyage, einc <Secreife ma*
(^en; — up, (^in)aufnc:^men;
— care, flc^ in 5lc^t net)men ;
— place, flattftnben, 144; —
talk, fpred)en, 167.
tall, gvo§ (-er, superl. gro^t).
tea, 3;^ee, m. (-«).
teacher, 2el)rer, m. (-« ; — )»
tear (to pieces), j.rreifKn, 118.
telegram, .sw6s«., "Depeidjc,/ (-n).
tell, fagen (dat. qfpers. or ju);
tx^ai)Un {dat. 7/ pen..)
teller, (it^ai)kv, m. (-g ; — ).
tempest, ©turm, m. (-ed ; -e).
ten, jel)n.
terrible, — ly, fiirc^terlic^.
than, aU ; alg ba§.
thank, banten (^a<.); no —
you, \6) ban!e (3^nen).
that ( 1 40), demonstr. co?/., biefcr,
biefc, biefeg ; jcncr, |enc, jeneg;
rel. pron., ber, bie, bag ; ivel*
d^er, wM)(, tt>cl(t;eg; c?e-
monstr. pron., bcr, bie, bag ;
con;., bafi.
the, ber, bie, bag; adv., \t, bejlo;
urn fo.
their, i^r, i'^re, i^r.
them (ace), fte; (dat), i^nen.
then, tann ; since — , feitbcm.
there, ba ; — is, — are, eg iji,
eg fiub ; eg gie&t, 2iiO.
therefore, barum.
thereupon, barauf.
they, fie, eg ; (indef.), man.
thief, 1)ieb, m. (-eg ; -e).
thin, biinn.
think, benfen, 99; — of, lenfen,
gen. or au-l-acc. ; (believe),
glaukn ; I should — so, bag
foKte ic^ meinen; — highly
of, esteem, etc., Jjtel l^altcn
(188; won).
third, brittc.
thirsty, biirfiig ; to be — ,
Vmilt ^akn, 24.
VOCABULARY.
565
thirty, brci^ig.
this, adj. and pron., biefct;
bicfc, biefe^.
those, bieienii^cn ; bie ; jienc.
though, obglcic^.
thousand, taufent); subsL^ lau*
fent), n. (-c^ ; -c).
three, brei.
through, burc^ {ace. ; 34).
throw, njcrfen, 159; fd)mci§en,
118; — away, njcgrverfen.
thunder-storm, ®ewittcr, n.
Thursday, DotttterStflg, m. (-eg;
-e).
tie, binben, 144.
till, m, 34.
time, 3fit,/ (-f^); (occasion),
9)kl, n. (-e^; -e); what —
is it? njtc »icl Ut)r ifl e^ ?
for the third — , gum brittcn
'MaU; atther'ght — , rec^t*
jciti^; at the same — , gu
9lci(^er 3"^*
tired, miibe.
title, 3^ite(, m. (-g ; — ).
■,Oy 233, 311 (dat; 46); (m«A
names of places) nac^ (c?a<. ;
46); nn, auf, in (ace; 65,
233) ; — the concert, in«!
^onjert; (before inf.) ^u, 272-
274; (r>/'jo?*r^o5e)um3U,273.
to-day, ^eute.
to-morrow, ntorcjcit; — morn-
ing, ntorgeu friil).
too, 3U ; (also), auc^.
top, ®if)fel, m. (-^ ; — ).
tortoise, <B6:>iMv'6f^,f. (-n).
towards, gegeu (aco.; 34).
town, (Strtbt,/ (-e); —-hall,
JRat^au^, n. (-e^ ; -er).
tragedy, Jraucrfplel, n. (-c^;
-e); Irflf^oble,/ (-n).
train (on a railway), ^UQ, m.
(-e^; -c); the Boston — , bcr
3«9 toon (nad)) 33ofton.
translate, iiberfc^'en.
transparent, bur^'flc^tig.
travel, reifen (^oben or fein).
traveller, S^leifenbe, ao^'. subst.
treasure, Scba0, m. (-ecs; -e).
treaty, 3?ertra.q, m. (-ec ; -e).
tree, 53aum, m. (-e^ ; -e) ; little
— , 33dumd)en, n. (-f ; — ).
triumph, Iriumpb', m. (-c£5; -e).
true, lua^r; (faithful), trcu
(dat.)
trunk (of a tree), S3aumjlamm,
m. (-e^ ; -e).
trust, v., trauen (o?a«.)
truth, 2Bn()rtieit,/ (-en),
try, loerfucften.
Tuesday, !E)ien«tag, w. (-c«; -c).
two, jnjei ; beibe ; — at a time,
it gmci ; • — and a half, brit*
te()alb.
U.
umbrella, ^legcnfd^irm, m. (-c3;
urcle, O^cim, m. (-eg; -c);
Dnfef, m. (-3 ; — ).
under, uuter (dat. or ace; 65).
understand, begreifeii, 118;tter«
[te^en, 186; to make one's
self understood, fid) verfianb*
lid) mad)en.
undertaking, Unteme^'men, n.
unfortunate, Uttgliicfiid) ; — ly,
leiber.
unhindered, unge^inbert
566
VOCABULARY.
I. 'I
United States (The), tie 55cr*
eini^teu (Btaattn,
university, Uni^erfitat',/ (-en),
until, conj., big (ba§).
untruth, Unwa^r^eit,/ (-en).
upon, auf (t^a<. or ace. ; 6.")).
upper, ober.
up-stairs, oben, nac^ oben, ^in-
auf.
use ; of no — , un'nit^.
useful, nii^Iii^; the — , bag
9lii^ti(^e.
utmost, moglicbfl.
V.
vainly, in vain, ^ergebfic^ j
»ergebeng.
valley, Z^a\, n. (-eg;'"er).
venture, v., njagen.
verse, 35crg, m. (-eg ; -e).
very, fel^r; rec^t; — much, fe^r.
vex, argern ; be — ed (at), \\6^
argern (iiber-hacc.)
victory, ©ieg, m. (eg ; -e).
village, Dorf, n. (-eg ; -cr).
vinegar, Sffig, w. (-g).
violet, 5BeiIc^en, n. (-g ; — ).
virtue, lu^qent),/ (-en).
visit, 33efud), m. (-eg; -e); to
be on a — at any one's, bei
lemant auf S3e[ucf) fein ; v.,
befudjen; einen 53efuc^ nb^
flatten, madden {dat. ofpers.)
visitor; to have — s, ^efu^
^aben.
voice, @ttmme,/ (-n).
voyage, JReife, / (-n), ©eereife,
/ (-n).
w.
wait for, ttjarteu ttnf {ace.)
waiter, j^cUner, m. (-g ; — ).
walk, suhgt.^ (Spajiergang, m.
(-eg; -'e); take a — , einen
^pajiergang maci^cn ; fpogter-
en ge^en (188; fein).
walk, v., ge^en (188; fein);
fpajieren geben.
walking (act of), ®c^en, n. (-g);
©pajierengei^cn, n. (-g).
want, tt)iinfci^en;n?onen,l 96-202.
wanting; to be — , fel^Ien((ia<.),
mangeln {dat.)
war, ,^rieg, m. (-eg ; -e).
warm, — ly, warm (-er).
warning, fcamung,/ (-en),
waste, »erfc^njent)cn.
watch, suhst, \[%x, f. (-en);
3;afc^enu:^r, / (-en); u, be^*
njad^en.
watchful, tuacfefam.
watch-key, U^rfd^liiffel, m. (-g;
-)•
water, SlJajfer, n. (-g ; — ).
waver, fc^manfen.
way, 3Beg, m. (-eg ; -e) ; (man-
ner), 3Ceife, / (-n) ; in this
— , auf biefc SBetfe.
we, luir.
weak, (in), fc^wad^ {an + dat.)
wear, v. intr. (of clothes), fid)
tragen, 186.
weather, S^i^etter, n. (-g); in
fine — , bei fd)6nem Sl^etter.
Wednesday, ^}?ittlt)od^, m. (-g).
week, 5Qod)e, / (-n) ; ad)t
2;age ; for a — past, feit
acbt iagen.
weigh, intr., ttjiegen, 131.
welcome, tviUfom'men.
wall nrir^ofl.
"•'"3 ; "•
adv., gut; as — as, foiool^l
alg ; — known, befonnt^
VOCABULARY.
567
f
West, S©e(!(en), m. (-^).
wet, nap ("er).
what, interrog. pron., wad?
interrog. adj., trelc^er, ttjcldje,
ttjclc^cd ; —kind of, toai fiir
(ein, cine, ein); rel. pron. ( ■--
that which), tua^; — a!
h)ei^ ! — is that in German 1
n)te ^cift bag auf DcutfA ?
when, interrog., tuann ? »u ttjel*
c^er 3cit? con/., menu: a(g,
58.
where, ttjo.
whether, ob.
which, interrog. adj., ttJcId^er,
tt)c(cfec, JDclc^ee; re/, jp-on.,
iwelcfccr, toetc^e, tveldjeg; ber,
btc, bag ; that — , tuag.
while, whilst, wa^renb (bfl§),
inbeffcn.
whistle, pfetfcn, 118.
white, n)ei§.
who, interrog., xotx ? re?, pron.,
raelc^er, xod^t, raelc^eg; ber,
bie, bag; he — , the one — ,
tt)er.
whole, ganj ; the — of, ganj.
whom, racn (ace), roem (rfa^;.)
whose, interrog., weffen ? reZ.,
beffcn, m. w. sing.; beren,/.
why, roarum ? n)e§^al6 ?
wide, breit.
will, rooaen, 196-202.
William, SBil^elm, m. (-§).
willing; to be — , raoHen, 196.
wind, SStnb, m. (-eS; -e).
wind up, auhteficn, 131.
window, gcnftcr, n. (-§ ; — ).
windy, rainbig.
wine, ^txxi, m. (-e§ j -c).
wing, gluger, m. (-S ; — ).
winter, SBintcr, »w. (-§ ; __).
wise, iBctfc; flug ("cr).
wish (for), tDunfc^en.
with, 234, mit (dat.; 46); bet
(G?a^.; 46).
without, o^ne {ace; 34).
witty, roi^ig.
wolf, 3Bolf, m. (-e§ ; ^'e).
woman, grau, /. (-en).
wonder, 5Bunbev, n. (-§ ; —\ ;
I — , eg iBunbert mid^, id^'
rcunbere mtc^; ~ of the
world, SBeltDunbcr, n. (-g ;
-).
wood, SBatb, m. (-eg ; -er).
word, SSort, t?. (-eg; -e or
'er); to send — , benad)rtc^=
tigen.
work (labour), 5Ubcit, /. (-en);
(thing done), ilBerf, n. (-eg;
-e); v., arbeiten.
world, SBelt, / (-en); in the
— , auf ber SSelt.
worth, adj., raert ; — while,
ber SSlix^t raert.
wound, v., oerrounben.
wring, ringen, 144.
write (to), fc^retben (120; dat.
or an + ace. of pers.)
writing (act of), ec^retben, n.
wrong ; to be (in the) — , Utts
red)t ^aben.
Y.
yard (meas^re)^ ^Mt,f. (-tt).
year, ^a^r, n. (-eg ; -c).
yellow, gelb.
yes, ja.
w^M
«68
TOOABULART.
yesterday, ge'fteni; — '8, oon
geftern, gcftrig.
yet, noc^ ; not — , nod^ nid^t.
yonder, bort
you, 38, 40, i^r; ®ic; bu; cud^;
®ie; bic^; ^l^ncn; bir.
young, jung (-cr) ; — man,
wangling, w. (-c§ ; -c).
your, 40, 43, cucr, cure, cucr;
bctn, bcine, bcm ; 3^r, 35re,
yours, bcr, hit, ba§ eurc, cus
rigc; bcr, bic, baS ^^rc,
Si^rigc ; bcr, bic, bo§ bcinc,
bctnigc; curcr; betncr; ^l^rcr.
youth (time of), ^ugenb, / ;
(young man), ^iingling, m.
-I
^¥, 3i^^%
I ill
eurc, cus
ba§ bcinc,
itgcnb, / ;
tgling, m.
INDEX.
N -Vot T'T" T 'A **^^^r^*^°"« ^"'^ su),sections. unless otherwise specified!
N. - Note ; R. = Remark ; O. = Observation; p. =. page.
-I
Abbreviations, p. 404.
o6er, conj.,286.
Ablaut, 105, R , 110.
'About,* how rendered in
Germ., 226.
Absolute accusative, 255; ab-
solute superlative, of adjs. ,
127,2; ofadvs.,190,4-6.
Abstract substs., take article,
44,1 (3): plural of, 66,3;
App. H.
Accentuation, p. 10; in com-
pound verbs, 117, 3, 204,
205, 3, 208, 209, 212; of
compound adv. prefixes,
206, 2, N. r.
Accusative, use of, 8, 262-
255; place of, 296, 4; af-
ter preps., 84, 50, 65,
228, 19, R. 2; expresses
time, 184,1 ; measure, 185,
4; after reflexive verbs,
216; after .mpers. verbs,
217, 2, («), 219, 220; after
adjs., replacing gen., 244,
R. 1, 2; double ace, 258;
after intrans. verbs, 264;
cognate ace, 254, 1; ad-
verbial ace, 265; absolute
ace, 256, 2; before advs.
of direction, 224, 1.
Address, modes of, 40, 48,
47.
Adjects, place of, 296, 1,
297, R. 1.
Adjectives, when spelt with a
capital, pp. II, ,2; predi-
cative, not declined, 14,
100; place of, 18, 20,0.
3, 295, 296, 8; attributive,
decl. of, 101; strong, 102,
weak, 116, mixed, 116, ta-
ble, 121, general remarks,
122; place of, 290, (3),
N. 2, 298, 1, 299; in-
declinable in ser, 122, 9;
as advs., 122, 8 ; of colour,
122, 3; in sel, sen, ser,
122, 6 ; a succession of,
122, 5; after pers. prons.,
122, 10; after indef. prons.
and numerals, 122,11, 12;
after roeld^e, 122,13; used
I as substs., 122, 2; compa-
rison of, 125-127; without
Umlaut, App. L. ; incapa-
ble of comparison, 161,
N. ; adjs. used as attri-
butes only, 160 ; as predi-
cates only, 161; as pre-
fixes to verbs, 206, 4, 212;
governing gen. and ace,
244; dative, 261; preps.,
291; possessive adjs., 43,
44, 6, (a); interrogative, 84-
86 ; appositive adj., 290 ;
concord, 288; derivation,
by suffixes, 318, by pre-
fixes, S!1tt; composition,
820.
Adverbial clauses, 806.
Adverbial conjunctions, co-
ordinating, 287; throw the
subject after the verb, R. 1.
Adverbial expressions, place
of, 45, 297.
Adverbs, 187 ; place of, 45,
297; formation, 182, (a),
183, (c), 189; compari-
son, 128, 190 ; numeral
adverbs, 18'^, 188; idio-
matic uses of certain ad-
verbs, 195 ; advs. with an
accusative, 224, 1; with
preps., 224, 3, 4.
=age, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, (e).
Agent, with passive, 112,
R. 3.
»al, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
'all ' expressed by gatij, 170,
1; 'at all,' 167.
aCein, conj., 286, 241, 1.
ttUer, -e, -eS, 169;aller*be.
fore superlatives, 127, 1,
N. ; oUeS of a number of
persons or things, 162, 2;
before adjs., 122, 12.
Alphabet, German, pp. i, 5,
13-
al§, conj., 239, 3 {3); after
a comparative, 126, 1 ; dis-
tinguished from roenn and
tDonn, 58, 241, 6, 8 ;
'but,' 241, 19; al§ clause
replaces Engl. part, of time,
9S-1. 1 (fr\ . jj,»„j.._:
an opposition, 289,6; with
comparative clauses, 806,
R. 4.
570
INDEX.
!ii
4i
'J
i
M ha%, after adjs. with ju,
878, N.
alS Ob, aid loenn, 289) 3, (i),
and R. 4.
cm, before a superl., 127, 1,
(6), 128, 190, 3.
«n, prep., 65 ; expresses
date, 184, 2, (a); of loca-
Uty, 227, (a), 2, 282, (c),
2, 288, (c), 2; of cause,
with diseases, 281, (c) ;
with names of battles, 231,
(</), 2 ; after verbs and
adjs., 244, 246, 1, 291, 6,
8,9,12.
»att, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
attber, ordinal numeral, 166,
1, N. ; anberfeits, 288 ;
cnbert^alb, 188, (6), R. 2.
ongeftd^tS, 223, 20.
onftatt, 22&, 14; governing
an infin. or ba^ clause, 276.
'any,' how rendered in Ger-
man, 2, 2, 167, 180.
Apposition, appositive sub-
stantive, 289 ; participle,
280, (3), 281, R. 3; ad-
jective or participle, 290;
clauses, 804.
•or, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
Article, not used before words
in partitive sense, 2, 2 ; de-
finite, declension, 4; agree-
ment, 6, 1; repetition of,
I, 2 ; use, 44 ; contraction
with preps., 84, R., 46,
R. 1, p. 83, O., 66, R.;
with proper names, 44, 2,
S, 78, 76, 2, 5, 78; for
poss. adj., 44, 6.
Article, indefinite, declen-
sion, 9 ; use, 44, 4, 6.
Aryan languages, 822, 2, 3.
' as,' how rendered in Germ.,
taa A ajt-t s-ii
Associalives, how formed,
815,2,(3).
>a{l, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
pat, foreign substs. in, declen-
sion, 22, 2, 6.
' at,' of time of day, 184, 3,
(c)', how rendered in Germ. ,
227 ; after verbs, etc. , 291 ,
1.
'at all'; see 'all.'
Attributive adj., see Adjec-
tive.
and), adv., after rel. prons.,
96, 6, idiomatic use of,
195, 9; conj., 286, 287,
R. 2, 288.
auf, prep., 65; with abs.
superl. of advs., 190,6; of
locality, 227, (a), 3, 230,
(«), 282, (c), 238, (c), 2 ;
of future time, 229, (3),
2 ; after adjs. and verbs,
245, 1,291,2, 7, 10; after
reflexive verbs, 216, 1, (6).
auf bag, 289, 3, (6), 268, 3.
ou3, prep., 46 ; of cause,
229, (c).
oufeett, adv., 189, 3; com-
parison, 180.
aufeer, prep., 46.
auger^alb, 228, 3.
fiugerft, with absolute superl.,
127, 2, 190, 4.
Auxiliary is verb in com-
pound tenses, 26, 82.
Auxiliary verbs of mood, see
' Modal Auxiliaries.'
Auxiliary verbs of tense, 25,
53; place of, with Modal
Auxiliaries, 199, 3; omitted
in dependent clauses, 287.
balb, comp?j-ison of, 190;
bolb . . . bolb, 288.
(bar, sufiix of adjs., 818, 1.
'be,' with p. part., how ren-
dered in Germ., 112, R. 5.
be;, insep. prefix, 85, R. 6,
204 ; meaning of, 814, 1.
bci, prep., 46; = 'with,'
' about,' 226, (</) ; of time,
227, (6), 3 ; idioms, 228,
(i), W,282, (^>; of bat.
ties, 281, (d), I.
bcibc, beibeS, 165, 3.
beigen Model, 118.
beoor, 241, 13, 14.
binnen, 51, 1.
bis, prep., 84, 50,4; conj.,
289, 3, id).
bleiben Model, 120.
Slume Model, 56.
'both. . . and,' 288.
' but,* rendered by al3, 241,
19.
'by,' with passive, 112, R.
3 ; how rendered in Germ.,
228.
Capitals, use of, p. 11 ; 122,
2, 9, N., 11, O.
Calling, verbs of, 242, 8,
258; with p. part., 281, 6.
Cardinal numerals, 168,165 ;
gender as substs., 80, 2,
(c), 166, 10.
Cases, use of, 8 ; syntax of,
242-265; place of , 296.
Cause, adverbial expressions
of, 284, 1, (3), 806, R. 2 ;
their place in a sentence,
45, Rule 5.
.d^en, substs. in, declension,
16,17; gender, 89, 3, (a);
subst. suffix, 812, 2 ; pro-
duces Umlaut, 826, R. 2,
(c).
Choosing, verbs of, 242, 3,
N., 263.
Clauses, conditional, 69, 267,
293, (a), 3; proportional,
see ' Comparative clauses,'
below; dependent, preced-
ing principal, 298, (6), R.
4, 294, (3), R. 2, 806;
with benn, 241, 18, 293,
(c), R, ''r ; incomplete or
elliptical, 299; order of
clauses, 802-806; ^posi*
l,(</); of time,
idioms, 228,
, id); of bat-
165, a
118.
,14.
60, 4 ; conj.,
120.
56.
'288.
I by al3, 241,
sive, 112, R.
sred in Germ<,
t, p. ii; 122,
O.
of, 242, 3,
part., 281, 6,
als, 163,166 ;
ubsts., 80, 2,
8; syntax of,
ace of, 296.
ii expressions
'), 806, R. 2 ;
n a sentence,
n, declension,
ler, 89,3,(a);
812, 2; pro-
It, 826, R. 2,
s of, 242, 3,
onal,69,267,
proportional,
ative clauses,'
ident, preced*
, 298, (d), R.
R. 2, 806;
241, 18, 293,
19; order of
-806; apposi*
INDEX.
tlve, 804; relative, 806;
•ubjective, objective, ad-
verbial, 806.
Cognate accusative, 264, 1.
Collectives, declension of
those with prefix ©Cs, 16,
17, 2 ; gender, 89, 3, (d) ;
concord of with verb, 286,
R. 4; formation, 816, 2,
Colour, adjs. of, used as
substs., 122, 3.
Comma, before dependent
sentences, 98, 3, N., 801,
N. 5 ; before infin. clauses,
273, R. 2.
Comparative degree, 126,
126; declension of, 126, 5.
Comparative clauses, with
befto, etc., 126, 4, 293,
(-5), R. 4,N. 3; 806, R. 4
andN.
Comparison, of adjs., 125-
130; of equality, 126, 3,
241, 8; irregular, 129; de-
fective, 130 ; of advs.,
128, 190; adjs. imapable
of, 161, N.
Compass, points of, p. 104,
top; gender, 80, 1, (<:).
Complex sentences, 802-
806.
Composition of words, 818-
821; of numerals, 165,
6-7, 182, 183; of Verbs,
203-213; of substs., 819;
of adjs., 320 ; of advs.,
821.
Compounds, accentuation of,
p. 1 1 ; how formed, 818-
821 ; primary and secon.
dary, 819, 1, N. i, 2 ; spu-
nous, 819, 2, N.
Compound substantives, of
irregular declension, 68 ;
of irrpcniloi* n'on/^^.. OA ^
"" o c,'- ',WfS,
App. I., p. 388 ; how
formed, 819.
rompound tenses, formation.
26, 108 ; construction, 26,
83.
Compound sentences, 802.
Compound verbs, 203-213,
separable, 109, 117, 205-
207; inseparable, 86, R.
6, 109, 204; compounded
with substs., 206, 3; with
adjs., 206, 4, 212 ; sepa-
rable and inseparable, 208 ;
with double prefixes, 207,
213 ; with mig., 209; with
^er. and I)in*, 210 ; from
compound substs., 211.
Concord, of Subject and
Verb, 285 ; other concords,
288.
Conditional clauses, 69, 239,
R. 1, 2, 4, 267, 293, (a),
3, (i), R. 4, N.I. 2; emp-
tied, 268, 2, N., 298, (c),
R. 2 ; use of f in, 69, N. ;
298, (d), R. 4, N. 2.
Conditional conjunctions, 59,
239, R. 1, 2, 4.
Conditional mood, formation
of tenses of, 26, 2, 3;
shorter forms, 111, 112,
R. 1 ; in Modal Auxilia-
ries, 199,4; use, 268, 267.
Conjugation of verbs ; see
"Verbs," "Modal Auxili-
aries."
Conjunctions, 285-241 ; co-
ordinating, proper, 236;
not counted, 293, (<5), R.
2; adverbial, 237, 293,
(i), R. 2 ; correlative, 238 ;
place of, 298, 3.
Conjunctive Mood, see
" Subjunctive."
Considering, verbs of, 242,
3, 253.
Consonants, pronunciation,
p. 9, top; digraphs and
trigraphs, pp. 5, g, j^.
doubling of, in verbs, 118,
R. 1, 123, R. 1, 167, A.,
R. 2, 181,0.6.
571
Construction of Sentences,
292-806; principal, 20,
26, 293, (6), 294, («.
296, 2, 297, R. 1, 2; de,
pendent, 82, 33, 293, (c),
294, (f), 296, 2, 297, R. 2,
806 ; direct interrog. , 23,
293,(«),i,294,(a),295,
2, 300; indirect statements,
87, 293, (r),R.l; indirect
questions, 88 ; relative
sentences, 98, 305 ; im-
perative, 293, («), 2; of
clauses with benn, 293,
(c), R. 4; of incomplete
clauses, 299; general re-
marks, 301 ; compound and
complex, 802, 803; see
also "Clauses," "Condi-
tional clauses."
Contracted form of strong de-
clension, 70, R. 3.
Contraction of def. art. and
preps., 34, R., 46, R. 1,
p. 83, O., 65, R.
Coordinating Conjunctions,
proper, 236, adverbial,
237, correlative, 238.
Copula, 292; place of, 293,
301, 1.
Correlative prons., 43, R. 3,
4; conjunctions, 238; clau-
ses, 241, 9, 293, (i), R. 4,
N.3.
Countries, names of, gender,
80, 3, (c); see also "Places,
names of."
i
sb, suffix of substs., 812, 1.
ba, adv.fVdth prep, annexed,
38, R. 5, 142; conj, 289,
3, (<5); various uses of,
241, 12, (d), 20; with
preps., representing an in.
fin. or ba| clause, 277; re.
places Engl. part, of tim^
and cause, 284.
bamit, conj., expresses pui*
pose, 239, 3, (3), 268, 3.
572
INDEX.
oaS before the verb fein, 1 «t ■
of a number of person* o*
things, 102, 'A
baft, conj., omitted, 81, 8,
241,3, >;, 266, K. '2; use,
280, {b), 241, 3; express-
ing purpose, 268, 3.
baft clauses governed by
preps., 224, 2, («); for in-
fin., 272, R. 1, 296, 276,
R. 2, 277.
Date, how expressed, 184,
2, {a).
Dative, uit of, 8, 248; place
of, 296, 4 ; ethical dat.,
249; dat. after verbs, 250 ;
after adjs., 251 ; after
preps., 46, 51, 65, S28 ;
after reflexive verbs, 216,
2 ; after impersonal verbs,
217, 2, {b), 219, 1} after
fein and luerbcn, 217, 2,
(c); after interjections, 240,
4, (3).
^iimi)ten, see beitc'^fen. biln*
len.
»be, subst. suffix, 812, 1.
Declension ; see " Substan-
tives," "Adjectives," ''Pro-
nouns," "Numerals."
Definite Article; see "Arti-
cle."
Degrees of comparison; see
"Comparison,"
bcm after fein, 250, (e),
268, G.
Demonstrative pronouns; see
" Pronouns."
benn, conj., 286; adv. conj.,
237,239,241,7,18,298,
(c), R. 4.
bennoc^, adv. conj,, 287.
Dependent seuteuces ; see
" Construction," " Sen-
tences,"
Dependent iue«tions ; see
" Constrif^ion," " Sen-
tences," "Indirect ques-
tions."
ber, bie, ba«; see "Article,
definite"; demonst. pron,,
182, 188. 185, 2, 140, 1,
(«), (^), 142, 148, 1, 2;
after loer, 162 ; relative
pron., declension, 08 ; use,
05, 140, 2 ; replaced by 100
before preps., 05, 2 ; used
for roer, 806, R, 3, N.
bcrfllcic^en, rel, pron., 97;
demonstr. pron., 182,
189, 2.
beicn, gen. pi, of demonstr.
pron., when used, 188,
2, N.
Derivation, 807-817 ; of nu-
merals, 182, 188; of advs.,
189; see also "Adjective,"
etc.
bcricjiiiic, 182, 185, 140,
1. {b).
bcro, 49.
bcrfelb(ifl)c, 182, 186; re-
places poss. adjs. and pers.
prons., 148, 2-4,
be3fllcid(;en, rel, pron,, 97;
demonst. pron., 189, 1;
adv., 189, 1, N.
beffcn, used for gen. of «jel»
ci^er, 95, 1, («); precedes
its case, U5, 8; of neut.
pers. pron., 143, 1; for
poss. adj., 143, 2.
beffciiungcacf)tet, adv. conj.,
237,241,21,
befto, 126, 4, 287, 241, 2,
293, (/'), R. 4, N, 3.
beudjtcn, 99, 2,
biefcr Model, 6.
bicfcr, declension, 6; use,
132, 184, 140,1, (a), 141;
replaces pers. prons. ,148,3.
bie§feit(§), 228, 12, R,
Digraphs, consonantal, pp, 4,
8, 14,
Diminutives, gender, 89, 3,
(a); formation, 812, 2;
origin, 826, R, 2, (c).
Diphthongs, pp. 4, 6, 14,
Direct objects, clause or neut.
pron. as, 260, R. 2; infio.
as, 272, R, 2; see also
"Accusative," " Cases,"
"Object."
Direct questions; see also
" Questions," " Interroga-
live Sentences."
Direction, expressed by l^in*
and \)tx* before verbs,
210; with an accusative,
224, 1.
Distance, measure of, 186, 4.
bod^, adv., idiomatic use,105,
8; adv. conj., throws subj.
after verb, 287, R. 3, 298,
{b), R, 3 ; in questions,
800, 2, N. I.
Dorf Model, 86,87; origin
of Umlaut in, 826, R. 2,(5).
Double Accusative, 258.
" Gender, 91 ; App, J.
" Plurals, 64; App. G.*
" Prefixes, 207, 210,
218.
" Vowels, pp. 4, 6, 14;
do not take Um-
laut, p. 12.
bvet, declension, 165, 2.
bilnfen, 99, 2.
burd^, prep., 84; prefix, 208.
biivfcn, conjuKation of, 196-
199; use, 200, 1.
e, in conjugation of verbs,
81,R. 1,85, R. 2-4,107,
R. 1 ; in imperative, etc.,
167, B., R. 3, 181, O. 4;
in subjunctive, 81, R. 2,
107, O. 3; in dat. of
substs., 21, («), O. 4, 46,
R. 2; in adjs,, 102, R.
2, 122, 6, 125, R. 5, 6,
126, 5; in poss, adjs., 48,
R, 2 ; in poss, prons., 119,
(a) Obs.. ic). N. i: re-
presents Umlaut of a, 826,
R.3.
se, adjs. in, declension, 102,
:lauM or neut
', R. 2; infia.
2; see also
' " Cases,"
is; see also
' " Interroga-
j."
;ssed by l)iu»
efore verbs,
ii accusative,
re of, 186, 4.
atic use,105,
throws subj.
7, R. 3, 298,
n questions*
I) 87 ; origin
126, R. 2,(5).
ve, 268.
91; App. J.
B4;App.G.*
207, 210,
pp. 4, 6, 14;
t take Um-
. 12.
166, 2.
; prefix, 208.
ion of, 196*
).l.
3n of verbs,
R. 2-4, 107,
jrative, etc.,
, 181, O. 4;
, 81, R. 2,
in dat. of
0, O. 4. 46,
s., 102, R.
56, R. 5, 6,
ss. adjs., 48,
prons.,119,
N. i: re.
ut of a, 826,
ension, 102,
INDEX.
R. 2 ; comparison, 196,
R. 6.
•e, substs. in, declension, 64,
67, 1, 61; gender, 89,2,
u); subst. suffix, 812, 4.
ctien, 106, 2.
ebenfo, 287, 241, 8.
e^e, conj., 241, 13, 14; com-
parison, 180.
•ei, substs. in, gender, 89, 2,
(«) ; subst. suffix, 812, 6.
tin, see "Article, Indefi-
nite."
ein, numeral, 168,166, 1;
with def. art., 166, 1, (c),
einanber, 42, 2. [and N.
einer, indef. pron., 145, 160;
cardinal numeral, 168,
166, 1, {6).
einerlet, 182, (c), N.
einerfeita, 288.
einige, einigeS, etlic^c, etii.
d^eS, indef. pron., 146,
162; numeral, 168, 178,
180 i before adjs., 122, 12.
einmal, 182, (a), N. 2, 3.
ein« in counting, 166, 1, (d).
einft, 182, (a), N. 2; 187,
1. w.
•el, substs. in, declension,
16, 17 ; fems. in, 67, R.
2;gender, 89,1, («), App.
I.; adjs. in, declension,
122, 6; comparison, 125,
R. 6; subst. suffix, 812, 6.
»el, verb-stems in, drop c, 85,
R. 4.
»e(d)ett, diminutive suffix
812, 2, N. a.
Elliptical constructions, 59,
289, R. 2, 4, 266, N. 4,
267, 6, N., 268, 2, N.,
269, R. 6, 278, 298, (S),
R. 4, N. 2, 299.
»eln, verbs in, conjugation,
86,'R.4; formation.aila.
»em, substs. in, declension,
16,17,69,1; gender, 89,
1. (a).
«tnp., Insep. prefix, 86, R.
e, 204; meaning, 814, 2.
»en, substs. in, declension,
16,17; gender, 89, 1, (a),
App. I.; adjs. in, declen-
sioM, 122, 6; comparison,
126, K. fl; not used as
predicates, 160; advs. in,
189,3; subst. suffix, 812,
7; adj. suffix, 818, 2.
•en fo" »ea in gen. sing, of
adjs., 102, R. 1.
»enb, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, (i); subst. suffix, 812,
18.
Endings of weak verbs in
simple tenses, 86 ; of strong
do., 107; of substs., 70;
of adjs., 121.
English, its relations to Ger-
man, 822.
Enlarged form of strong de-
clension, 70, 4.
»en«, termination of advs.,
188, (r),189, !,(«'), 190, 7.
ents, insep. prefix, 86, R. 6,
204 ; meaning, 814, 2.
etitGcgen, 61, 2.
eiitlaitfl, 228, 19, R. 2.
enttoeber... ooer,288,286,
R. 6, N. I.
sCiij, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (e).
er», insep. prefix, 86, R. 6,
204; meaning, 814, 3.
scr, substs. in, declension;
16,17;fems. in, 67, R. 2,
gender, 89, 1, (a), App. I. ;
adjs. in, declension, 122,
6; comparison, 126, R. 6,
126, N. ; subst. suffix,
812, 8.
ser, verb-stems in, drop t,
85, R. 4.
ser, Plural ending, 86; ori-
•erei, subst. suffix, 812, 6,
N.2.
»ern, Adjs '', not used as
573
predicates, 160; »dj, ■u^
fix, 811, 2.
•ern, Verbs in, conjugation,
86, R. 4; formation, 811,2.
erft, adv., idiomatic use.
19fi» 4.
erftena, &dv., distinguished
from juerft, !96, 6, N.
®ri», subst. prefix, 816, 1.
e«, neut. pron., uses of, 89;
omission of, 118, 2, N. j
for a number of persons or
things, 162,2; as subject
of impersonal verbs, 217,
220, 2, R. 2, N.; afte<
adjs. governing ^en., S44,
R. 1; representing a fol.
lowing infin., 272, R. 2.
e3 giebt, eS ift, etc., 220.
effeu Model, 181.
Ethical dative, 249.
ctlic^e ; -e«, see einige.
etn)0, 187, II.T.,226,(4
ettoaS, indef. pron., 146,
149; indef. numeral, 168,
177 ; before adjs., 122, 11.
' even,' rendered by felbft, 42,
3, R.
' ever,' after rel. prons., 96, 6.
Exclamatory clauses, 269,
R. 6, 298, (A), R. 3, 800,
N.2.
»fac^, sfaitig, form multipii.
cative numerals, 182, (6).
faUen Model, 188.
falls, subord. conj., 289, 3
»faitig; see »fac^.
Factitive accusative, 268.
Factitive predicate, 268,
264, 3.
Family names, 74, 76, 4, 8.
fec^ten Model, 124.
'few,' how rendered in Ger.,
145, 152, 168, 178, 176.
'for,' how rendered in Ger.,
229; after verbs, subste.
and adjs., 291, 2-4
574
INDEX.
Foreign substs., accentua-
tion, p. lo, bottom; de-
clension, 22, 6, 87, 4,
App. 1).,67, 6, 68,1,77;
gender, 80, 2, {e).
Fractional numbers, 188, {a),
UeiUd), 187, IV.; does not
count as a member of a
sentence, 293 (3), R. 2,
N.
Frequentatives, how formed,
816, 2, (c).
frieren Model, 181.
'from,' after verbs, 291, 5.
fUr, prep., 84; not used of
purpose, 229, (a); after
verbs of considering, !b68.
Future Tense, how formed,
26,2; use, 261; replaced
by present, 257, 5.
Future-perfect Tense, how
formed, 26, 3 ; use, 262 ;
replaced by perfect, 269, 4.
gattj, indef. numeral, 168,
170.
ges, prefix of p. part., 80 ;
when omitted, 86, R. 5, 6,
109, 112, R. 2, 204; of
verbs, 85, R. 6, 204, 314,
4 ; with sep. verbs, 117,2,
205,2; withmi6=,209;of
substs., 815, 2 ; of adjs.,
316 ; declension of substs.
beginning with ge», 16, 17,
2,86, 37, 3; gender, 89,
3, (d).
gegen, prep., 34.
gegenUbef, 51, 4.
gel^ett with infin., 271, (c).
gemaB, 61, 5.
gen, 50, 2.
Gender of substs., according
to meaning, 80, and form,
89; of compound substs.,
90, 4, App. I., p. 388;
uoubie gender, 91, App.
J. ; general remarks on,
00 ; exceptional gender,
App. I.
Genitive, use of, 3, 248; af-
ter adjs., 244 ; after verbs,
24o ; adverbial, of time
a. id nianner, 184, 2, (i>),
189,2,246;ofpLice,246;
after reflexive verbs, 216,
216 ; after impers. verbs,
219, 2, (a); after interjec-
tions, 240, 4, (a); after
preps., 222, 228; unin-
flected appositive genitive,
289, 3, N. 2 ; ix>sition of
in a sentence, 296, 4-7.
genug, indef. num. and adv.,
168, 178 ; followed by
inf., 273, 3.
German language, its rela-
tions to English, 322 ; his-
torical sketch, 322-826.
Germanic languages, 322,
828; diagram of, p. 376.
gem, comparison of, 190, 1;
idiomatic use of, 195, 3.
Gerunds, or Infin. in -ing,
not to be confounded with
pres. part., 277, k.3, 4,6.
Gerundive, 282.
glautPit, infin. after, 275,
gteic^, prep., 61, 6. [R. 3.
»glcic^cn, 48, 97, 139.
©raf Model, 65.
Grimm's Law, 826.
grofe, comparison, 125, 5.
®runbfpracf)e, 322.
gut, comparison, 129; as
adv., 195, 10, N., 298, (3),
R. 2, N.
i), mute before consonants,
after vowels and after t, p.
9; when rejected after t,
p. 12.
i^aben, conjugation, 24 ; use,
25; with infin., 271, (d),
andR. 1,272, R. 2; omis-
sion of in dependent sen-
tences, 287, 298, (c), R. 6.
•^oft, suffix of adjs., 313, a
f)alb, numeral, 188, (a), N.
2. (i).
f)alb(en), ^alber, prep., 222,
228, 1.
' half,' how rendered in Ger.,
188, (a), N. 2 ; (/,).
half-hours, 184, 3, («).
i^cifien with infin., 271, (</).
*Oeit, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, (a); subst. suffix, 812, 9.
belfen Model, 159.
ber, prefix, 210.
l)ier, 187, II., (a); bef.re
preps., 142.
High German, history of,
324.
bill, prefix, 210.
fituten, adv., 189, 3; com-
parison, 180.
l^tnter, prep., 65; sep. and
insep. prefix, 208.
i)Oif), declension, 122, 7;
comparison, 129.
bod^ft, with absolute superl.,
127, 2, 190, 4.
'however,' adv. con)., how
rendered in Germ., 241,
15.
Hours of the day, 184, 3.
$unb Model, 21, (3).
^unbert, 165, 8, 10, (c).
Hyphen, its use in com.
pounds, 818, 3, N., and 4.
i, produces Umlaut, 326.
'id), substs. in, declension,
22, 2; gender, 89, 1, (a).
sid}t, subst. suffix, 812, 18;
adj. suffix, 318, 4.
sic, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (*).
5ter, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
sierett, foreign verbs in, take
no ge* in p. part., 85, R.
5 ; verb suffix. SI 1 ?.
'if,' when rendered by 06
241, 4.
INDBX.
575
djs.,318, a
88, (a), N.
prep., 222,
red inGer.,
; w.
3, (a).
. 271, 0/).
gender, 89,
ffix, 812, 9.
a) ; bef(Te
history of,
', 3; com-
1 sep. and
«.
122, 7;
►.
te superl.,
onj., how
rm., 241,
184, 3.
). (c).
in com-
N., and 4.
, 326.
eclension,
9, 1, (a).
312, 18;
L
• in, gen-
s. in, de>
s in, take
t., 35, R.
t 'J
i by oi
•ifl, 8ub9t«. In, <^<*clcn»Jon,
22,2; gender, is% !,(«);
adjs. in, not used as predi-
cates, 160; advs. in, superl.
of, 190, 6; suffix of poss.
prons. , 119, (<:) ; subst. suf-
fix, 812, 18; adj. suffix,
813,5; before »teit, 812,
iO, N. ; after »f)a\t, 313,
3, N. ; produces Umlaut,
826, (/).
3I)V0, 49.
»it, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 80, 2, (e).
imtticr, adv., 187, I., (<r);
after rel. prons., 96, ♦'..
Imperative Mood, true forms
of, 81, R. 4; endings, in
weak verbs, 35 ; in strong,
107 ; expressed by laffen,
200, 7, (a); replaced by
subjunctive, 268, 1; use
of, 269. [196.
Imperfect-Preseiit Verbs,
Imperfect Tense, formation,
in weak verbs, 30 ; in
strong, 104; endings, in
weak verbs, 85 ; in strong,
107.
imperfect Indicative, use,
268; distinguished from
Perfect, 269, 2, 3; replaced
by present, 267, 3.
Imperfect Subjunctive, for
conditional, 111, 268, 2,
N.; in hypothetical peri-
ods, 267, 2; to express
wsh, 268, 2; to express
possibility, 268, 5; origin
of Umlaut in, 826, (^).
Impersonal Verbs, 217 ; con-
jugation, 218 ; govern-
tnent, 219; 'there is,'
etc., 220; impersonal use
of passive voic 118, 2.
'in,' how rendered in Germ.,
2S0, 291, (j, 7.
in, prep., 65; rendered by
•at,' 227, («),!, and 4.
tin, substs. in, declension,
67, R. 8; gender, 89, 2,
(a); subst. suffix, 812,11;
produces Umlaut, 826,
Indefinite article, see "Arti-
cle, Indef." [180.
Indefinite numerals, 168-
Indefinite pronouns, 145-
157.
ttibcm, subord. conj., 289,
241, 16 ; replaces Engl,
participle, 284, 1, (a), {b).
inbeffcn, conj., 287, 239,
241, 15.
Indicative mood, use, 256;
tenses of, 267-262; in in-
direct statements, 266, R.
3 ; in hypothetical periods,
267, R. 5.
Indirect statement, 87, 265;
tense of, 266; construction
of, 298, {c), R. 1.
Indirect or dependent ques-
tions, 88, 293, (c) ; object-
ive, with infin., 276, R. 4;
use of Ob in, 277, R. 5.
Indo-European or Indo-Ger-
manic languages, 322.
Infinitive, place of, 26, 83,
295, 3, 299 ; endings, 85 ;
for p. part, in Modal Auxi-
liaries, etc., 199, 2; with
passive sense after laffen,
200, 7, {c), N. ; for im-
perative, 269, R. 5; as
subst., 270; without ju,
271; with ju, 272; of
purpose, 273; after substs. ,
274; accusative with inf ,
not used in Germ., 275; ...
objective indirect questions,
275, R. 4; governed by
preps., 276,277; infin. in
-ing, or gerund, 277, R.
3-^ ; in elliptical construc-
tions, 278 ; replaced by p.
part., 281, R. 6, 7; as
part of predicate, 296.
' ing.Mnfinitive in, or gerund
277, R. 3-6.
»<na, substs. in, declension,
22, 2; gender, 89, 1, (a),
subst. suffix, 812, 18.
inmitten, 228, 21.
tnnen, adv., 189,3; compa.
ri.son, 130,
inner^Qlb, 223, 4, and R.
Inseparable prefixes, 86, R.
fi, 109, 208, 204, 207,
209, 212, 218; meaning
of, 811.
Interjections, 240,
Inversion, inverted sentence
801, 2, N. 1,2.
Interrogative pronouns and
adjs., 81-86.
Interrogative sentences, con-
struction, direct, 23 ; 298,
(«), I, 294, («), 205, 2,
800, 801, N. 2 ; indirect
or dependent, 88, 275, R.
4, 277, R. 5,298, (f).
Intransitive verbs, used only
impersonally in the passive,
118, 2 ; accusative after
254.
sion, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (^).
siren, verbs in ; see sieren.
irOC"t>, 157.
sifd), adjs. in, not used as
predicates, 160; adj. suf.
fix, 313, 6.
Italics, not used in Germ.,
p. 12.
'it,' when rendered by er, fie
13.
\, pujduces Umlaut, 826.
\a, idiomatic 10'j, n.
ja, jaiuof ... ;-)« ted ar
member . .J98, {b),
R. 2, N.
je, before cardinal numerals.
166, 9.
ie . . . befto, 126, 4, 289,
3,(^),298,(<J), R.4,N.3.
^^f
m
676
f^*«lfD.idv.,lM, !,,(,),
t(*«r, d«clen»ion, 6; indef.
p.ot... 146, 1R8 ; indef.
num^rjJ, 108, 171; jebe«,
of a nun .ber of persons or
things, 162, 2.
lebermann, 146, 147.
jebod^, 287.
tebroeber; see jeber.
jegltc^er; seo kb«r.
jemanb, 146, 148.
jener, declension, 8 ; use,
182, 184. 140,1, (f), 141,
142.
fenfeit(6), 228, 13, and R.
le«t, 18V, I., (3).
lein, declension, 8; indef.
numeral, 168, 172.
feiner, indef. pron., 146;
used for niemaiib, 151.
«feit, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, (a); subst. suffix, 812,
10.
lennen, 196, R. 4, N, i
Anabe Model, 64.
fonimett, with p. part., %1,
R. 5.
Wnnen, conjugation, 196-
199 ; use, 200, 2, 202.
Iraft, prep., 228, 7.
INDEX.
16, 17; gender, 89, 8,
(a); subst. suffix, 812, 3;
produces Umlaut, 826, R.
2. (0.
Letters, German, shape and
pronunciation of, see In-
troduction, pp. i-ia,
liiit, 130.
»Icute, plurals in, 68, 1.
'Itd^, adjs. in, not used as
predicates, 160 ; superl. of
advs. in, 190, 5 ; suffix of
advs..l89, 1,(^); of r.djs.,
818, 8.
Ikbev, compar. of flern, 190;
use, 196, 3.
»Iinn, substs. in, declension,
22, 2 ; gender, 89, 1, (a) ;
subst. suffix, 812, 12.
»Iinga, suffix of advs., 189,
1. (r).
loben, paradigm of, active,
81 ; reflexive, 41 ; passive,
118.
•I, forms fractions, 188, (a).
langS, 228, 18, and R. 1.
Language, German, histori-
cal sketch of, 822-826.
Language-names from adjs.,
122, R. 2.
Languages, Indo-Germanic,
etc., 822,2,3; Germanic,
828.
- t'^ffcn, its use, for passive
voice, 114, (3); as Modal
Auxiliary, 200, 7.
laut, 228, 8.
fiautoerfcl^iebung, 825-
»Iet, forms variative -a'.i.tK-
rais, 1S2, (c). ,
•lein, substs. in, declension, I
•m, substs. in, declension,
69; gender, 89, 1, (a).
SWad^t, irregular compounds
of, 68, 2.
stnol, forms numeral advs.,
182, (a),
malev Model, 16, 17, App.
A.
man, indef. pron., for passive
voice, 114, (a); use, 145,
146 ; replaced by einer,
150 ; with imperative, 269,
R. 2.
mauc^er, indef. pron., 146,
164 ; indef. numeral, 168,
174 ; before adjs., 122, 12.
•mattn, substs. in, declen-
sion, 68, 1.
Manner, advs, of, 189;
their place in a sentence,
46 1 xivle 5.
Materials, names of, take
art., 44, 1, (6); plural of,
66,2.
'™»y,' when expreued by
bUrfcn, 800, 3, (i), N.
•meanwhile,' ho<v rendered
in Germ., 241, 16.
Measure, expressions of,
186; advs. of, 187, III.
nte^r, when used in compari-
son of adjs., 126, 2, 161,
N. ; adv. of quantity, 129,
N. I ; indef. numeral, 168,
179.
mef)rcre, -c9, indef. pron.,
146, 162 ; indef. numeral,
168, 176 ; before adjs.,
122, 12.
mcin Model, 8.
Middle High German, 824, 2.
aJliUion, declension, 166, 10,
W.
Minutes of the hour, 184, 3,
(6).
mifjs, verb-prefir., 204, 209,
814, 6; subst. prefix,
816. 3.
tnit, 46 ; after reflexive verbs,
215, 1, (a).
mtttel, comparison, 180.
triittelft, see tjermlttelft.
Mixed declension, of substs.,
60-68, 70; of adjs., 116.
121, in.
Modal auxiliaries, 196-202 ;
peculiar forms, 196, R. 1-
3; paradigms, 198; fur-
ther peculiarities, 199 ; idi-
omatic use, 200-202.
ModernHighGer. „ i.R;4,8.
Modification of vowels ; see
Umlaut,
mbgen, conjugation, 196-
199 ; use, 200, 3, 202.
Monosyllables, declension,
22, 1, 3, 5, App. B., C.,
E., 87 ; gender, 89, 1, («).
Month, day of, how ex-
pressed, 166, 3.
Mor'^-hs. nam<«si nf r. ,q.
top; gender, 80, 1,(3).
Moods of the verb, their use,
INDEX.
577
xpreMcd by
. W, N.
I'v rendered
16.
!ssions of,
187, III.
in compari-
26, 2, 161,
lantity, 12»,
imera!, 168,
idef. pron.,
if. numeral,
efore adjs.,
nan, 824, 2.
>n, 166, 10,
ur, 184, 3,
204, 209,
prefix,
ixive verbs,
1, 180.
ttelft.
of substs.,
»djs., 116,
196-202;
196, R. 1-
198; fur-
,199;idi-
202.
>n, 196<
1,202.
edension,
). B., C,
^9, 1, (a).
how ex-
h (*).
their use,
256 278; see alto "Con-
ditional," " Indicative,"
etc.
* most,' with absolute super-
lative, 127,2.
Motion, neuter verbs of, con-
jugated with fein, 68, (6).
tnUflen, conjugation, 196-
199; use, 200, 4, 202.
SDlut, fern, compound A of,
App. I, p. 388; ju j/<ute
fein, toerbett, 260, (e).
Mutes, progression or shift-
ing of, 826.
noc^, prep., 46, 184, 3,(3),
888, (c), I ; after adjs.,
244 ; after verbs, etc., 291,
8 ; after reflexive verbs,
215. 1. (a).
9lacf)bar Model, 62, 68.
nad^bem, subord. conj. clause
with, replaces Engl, perf.
part.,284, R. 1.
nac^ft, 51, 7.
no^e, comparison, 129.
5Rame Model, 60, 61.
Names, see "Materials,"
" Persons," " Places,"
" Proper Names."
ttamlid^e, ber, 18i, 187.
neben, prep., 65.
nebft, 61, 8.
nettnen, infin. with, 271, (d).
Neuter verbs conjugated with
fein, 53.
New High German, 824, 3.
ntd)t, place of, 12.
nic^t nur . . . fonbern md),
288.
iticf)t foroof)! . . . al8, 288.
nic^tS, indef. pron., 145,
149 ; before adjs., 122, 11.
tiic^t§befto:Deiuger, coord.
adv. conj., 287.
ttid^tS toeniger al8, 241, 19,
N.
nib, obsolete adv.» compari.
son, 180.
nie(mal4), 187,r.,(#)t
ntebfv, 180.
niemanb, 146, 148; re-
placed by feiner, 161, 1.
nimmer, 187, !.,(<:).
•nifl, substs. in, declension,
22,4; gender, 80, 2, (^),
:i, (c); subst. suffix, 812,
13 ; produces Umlaut, 826,
nod), adv., idiomatic use, 196,
7; conj., 287, 288.
Nominative, use of, 8, 242.
Number, in .Substs., 8; ex-
pressions of, 185.
Numerals, cardinal, 168,
165 ; ordinal, 164, 106 ;
Roman, how rendered in
Germ., 166,2, N. ; indefi-
nite, 168-180 ; derivative,
182, 188 ; multiplicative,
182, (i); variative, 182,
(c); fractional, 188, (a),
(6).
nun, 195, 1.
nur, 195, 12.
o5, prep., 61, 10 ; conj., 241,
4; when omitted, 289, R.
4, 267, R. 6, N.; in in-
direct questions, 277,
R. 5.
Ob and), 289, R. 3, 4.
oben, adv., 189, 3; compari-
son, 180.
oberfjalb, 228, 5.
oDgleic^, obfcf)on, obroo^I,
289, R. 3, 4.
Object, direct, see "Accusa-
tive"; indirect, see "Da-
tive " ; remote, with reflex-
ive verbs, 216.
Objects, place of, 45, 296,
297, R. 1, 2.
Objective clause before the
verb, 806.
Objective genitive, 248, 3.
ober, 286, 288.
'of,' how rendered in Germ.,
t, 46, R. 3;f81:omittea
before infin. clauses, S77,
R. 1 ; after verU, tie,
291, 8-11.
o^ne, prep., 84; governing
infin. or ba^ clause, 284*
a, (/■), 276.
o^nebem, 50, 3.
D^r Model, 62, 68.
Old High German, 824, 1.
*on, foreign mascs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
' on,' how rendered in Germ.,
282 ; after verbs, etc.,
201, 7.
•one,' rendered by e«, 89, R.
3; indef. pron., 145, 146,
150; not expressed after
adjs., 122, 4.
sor, foreign substs. in," de-
clension, 22, 6, 68, 3
Ordinal numerals, 164, 160.
Origin, genitive of, 248, 1.
Orthography, p. n ; recent
changes in, p. 12.
paar (ein), Indef, numeral,
178, 3, N.
Participial constructions,
English, how rendered in
Germ., 284; English pres.
part, after ' come,' 281, R.
5; not to be confounded
with inf. in -ing, or ge-
rund, 277, R. 3.
Participle, past, how formed,
in weak verbs, 80; in
strong, 106 ; of Modal
Auxiliaries, 199, 2.
Participles, place of, 26, 88,
288, 4, 296, 1, 3, and N.,
298, 299; endings, 80,
85; used as adjectives,
122,1; as substs., 122, 2;
comparison of, 126, 4 ; iso-
lated strong, 194, N. ; use
ot, 279-284; present part.,
280 ; not used vrith ' to be,'
81, R. 3; past, 281 ; with
578
INDEX.
Imperative force, 260, R. 5;
fut. pass, part., or gerund-
ive, 282 ; general remarks,
288; no perfect part, in
Germ., 284, R. 1; apposi-
tive participles, 280, (3),
281, R. 3, 288, 3, 290.
Partitive genitive, 248, 6.
Partitive sense, words used
in, take no art., 2,2.
Passive voice, 112-114; pa-
radigm, 112; agent witii,
R. 3; limitations of, 113;
substitutes for, 114; pass-
ive of transitive verbs, 113,
1 ; of intransitive verbs,
118, 2.
Past participle, see " Parti-
ciples."
'people,' indef. pron., 146,
146. i
Periphrastic forms of conju-
gation, English, 81, R. 3.
Perfect participle, none in
Germ., 284, R. 1.
Perfect tense, formation, 25,
1; use, 259; replaced by
present, 257, 4.
Personal pronouns, declen-
sion, 88; use, 89-42,44,
6, (6) ; place of, 45, Rules
3, 4, 294, (c), N., 296, 3,
4 ; replaced by demonstra-
tives, 148 ; after flleic^ett,
48; after f)albtn, roegen,
223, 1, 2, R. 3 ; omitted
with imperative, 269, R, 1.
Persons, before things, 46,
Rule 2, 296, 6; names of,
how declined, 73, 74, 76,
2-7; article with names of,
73, 1, 2, 76, 2, 6, 78.
Place, advs. of, 187, II.;
position in a sentence, 11,
46, Rule 6, 297, 3, and
R. 1.
Places, proper names of, 72,
76, 1 ; article with, 44, 3.
Pluperfect tense, formation,
25, 1; plupf. indicative,
use, 260; plupf. subjunc-
tive, used for conditional,
263, 267, 2, and R. 4; to
exnress a wish, 268, 2.
Plural, see " Concord,"
" Number," " Substan-
tives."
Possessive adjs., 48; agree-
ment, 48, 5; replaced by
def . art. , 44, 6.
Possessive case, rendered in
Germ, by the genitive, 8,
243, 4.
Possessive dative, 44, 6, 249.
" pronouns, 119.
Possibility, advs. of, 187,
VI.; expressed by impf.
subj., 268, 5.
Predicate, definition of, 292,
1,295; place of, 296 ; fac-
titive pred., 263, 254, 3.
Predicative nominative, 242.
Predicative adj., not de-
clined, 14, 100; place of,
18, 20, O. 3, 296, 3, 296,
8; factitive, 264,3.
Prefixes, of verbs, 203-218,
814; inseparable, 36, R.
6, 109, 204, 207, 208,
209, 212; meaning of,
314 ; separable, 117, 206-
208, 210, 296 ; separable
and inseparable, 208; com-
pound, 206, 2; double,
207 ; accent of,, 204, 206,
3 ; place of, 117, 295, 3,
and N. ; subst. prefixes,
816 ; adj. prefixes, 316.
Prepositions, governing accu-
sative only, 34, 60 ; dative
only, 46, 61 ; dat. or ace,
65 ; genitive, 222, 223 ;
contracted with def. a.-t.,
84, R.,46, R.l,p.83,0.,
66, R. ; general remarks
on, 224; joined to advs., j
224; governing the infin.,
224, 2, (i), 276, 277 ; I
English preps, und their
Germ, equivalents, 226-
234; place of, 46, 61,
228, 298, 2; after verbs,
etc., 291.
Present participle ; see
" Participial Construe-
tions, English," and
"Participles."
Present tense, endings, in
weak verbs, 86, in strong,
107; pres. indicative, 257,
267, R. 5 ; pres. subj. e-
places imperative, 268, 1,
269, and R. 2.
Preterite, see " Imperfect."
Primary Form of strong
declension, 70, R. 2.
Principal assertive sentences,
construction, 20, 26, 69,
N., 293, (3), 294, (3),
295, 2, 297, R. 1, 2, 301,
2, 802, R., 303.
Principal parts of a verb,
28.
Progression of mutes, 326.
Pronouns, agreement of, 13;
place of, 46, 296, 2-4;
personal, declension, 88;
use of e6, 89; use in ad-
dress, 40, 47, 49 ; dative
of, replaces poss. adj., 44,
6, (3); reflexive, 41, 4il;
reciprocal, 42 ; interroga-
tive, 81-88 ; relative, 92-
97, place of, 98; posses-
sive, 119 ; demonstrative,
132-148 ; indefinite, 146-
167; remarks on, 162.
Pronunciation, Introduction,
pp. I-I2.
Probability, expressed by
future, 261, 2; by future-
perfect, 262.
Proper names, declension of,
66, 1, 72-74, 76.
Proportional Clauses ; see
" Comparative Clauses."
Purpose, conjs, of, ggg, S|
INDEX.
579
I. und their
lents, 225-
f, 46, 51,
after verba,
pie ; see
Construc-
ih," and
;ndings, in
, in strong,
cative, 257,
s. subj. e-
ve, 268, 1,
nperfect."
of strong
R. 2.
; sentences,
0, 26, 59,
294, {b),
1, 2, 301,
•
af a verb,
tes, 326.
ent of, 13;
296, 2-4;
ision, 88;
Lise in ad-
:9 ; dative
. adj., 44,
41, 4;!;
interroga-
Uive, 92-
'; posses-
nstrative,
nite, 145-
,162.
oduction,
;ssed by
)y future.
insion of,
es
auses.
see
090 a
(3); expressed by ju, 229,
{a) ; by subj. with ba§,
etc., 268, 3 ; by infin. with
gu or urn . . . JU, 278, R.
1, 276, 1.
Quality, genitive of, 248, 6.
Quantity of vowels, pp. 9, 10.
Quantity, expressions of,
185.
Quarters of the hour, 184, 3,
{a).
Questions, direct, construc-
tion of, 28, 293, (a), 1,
294, (a), 295, 2, 800; in-
direct or dependent, 88,
293, {c).
Question-word, ccgins sen-
tence, 28, O. 2, 298, (a),
I, 294, {a).
Reciprocal pronouns, 42.
Reflexive pronouns, 41, 42,
44, 6, (3), N. ; used in re-
ciprocal sense, 42 ; place
of, 294, (c), N.
Reflexive verbs, paradigm of,
41 ; for passive, 114, (3) ;
use, 214 - 215 ; govern-
ment, 216.
Relative clauses, replaceEngl.
part., 284, 2, («); place of,
805, 306, R. 3, and N.,
R. 4.
Relative pronouns, 92-97 ;
place of, 98, "^94, (c), 305 ;
introduce dependent clau-
ses, 98 ; not omitted in
Germ. , 96, 7, O. ; concord
of, 95, 1, (3), 288, 2, N.
Relative superlative, of adjs.,
127; of advs., 190,3.
Roman numerals, how read
in Germ., 166, 2, N.
*3, plurals in, 77, 5.
•§, suffix of advs., 189, 1, 2,
821, 1, N. ; suffix in s-ihst.
comoounds. 319. 1. N. 2. ■x.
ffal, substs. in, declension,
22,4; gender, 89, 3, {c)\
subst. suffix, 812, 14.
>fam, adj. in, superl. of, 190,
5; adj. suffix, 818, 9.
famt, 51, 9.
»fc^aft, substs. in, gender,
89, 2, (a); subst. suffix,
812, 15.
fd^iegen Model, 128.
fc^Iagen Model, 186.
fd^ott, idiomatic use, 196, 6.
Script, German, pp. 13-16.
fe^r, with absolute super!.,
127, 2, 190, 4.
fein, * to be,' use as auy""a-
ry, 25, 4 ; conjugation,
62 ; verbs conjuga\.>^d with,
68; with post part., 112,
R. 5, (3) ; as impersonal,
217,220; with dat., 250,
{e)\ with infin., 272, R. 2;
omitted in dependent sen-
tences, 287.
fcit, prep., 46, 241, 12, (a) ;
conj., 239, 241, 12.
feitbem, adv. conj., 237 ;
subord. conj., 289, 241,
12, W.
*fe[, substs. IP gender, 89,
3, (<:); subst. suffix, 812,
14.
f elber, felbft, 42, 3, and R.
felbig, 186, N.
felbft; see f elber.
Sentences, construction of,
292-306; essential parts
of, 292 ; construction of
assertive principal, 20, 26,
59, N., 293, (3), 294, (3),
296,2, 297, R. 1, 801,
2, 306; of dependent,
82, 33, 98, 298, (<:), 294,
{c), 295, 2; relative, 98,
305, 806, R. 3 and N.,
R. 4; interrogative, 28,
88, 298, (a), I, 298, (<r),
294, (a), 295, 2, 800: ex-
clamatorv. 298. (liS. R, 3 :
expressing com'-nand or
wish, 298, (a), 2 ; condi.
tional, 69, 298,(a),3; po-
sition of verb in, 298; of
subject, 294 ; of predicate,
296 ; of objects, etc., 296;
of advs., etc., 297 ; of
other members, 298; in.
verted, 801, N. 1,2 ; com,
pound and complex, 802-
806.
Separable prefixes, when se.
parated, 117 ; place of,
296, Sand N., 808, 4.
'shall,* how rendered in
Germ., 201.
Shifting of mutes, 825.
'since,' how rende :•? iq
Germ., 241, 12.
fingen Model, 144.
Singular, see " Concord,**
" Substantives."
' so,' rendered by c8, 89, 3.
fo, after conditional and ad.
verbial clauses, 69, 289,
R. 2, 267, R. 3, 298, (3),
R. 4, N. I, 2, 294, (3), R.
2; replaces fold^ before ein,^
188, N. a; adv. conj.,
287.
fo . . . fo, 241, 9.
fo ein, followed by wie,
162, 4.
fogar, adv. conj., 287, R. 2.
(So^tt Model, 21 ; origin ol
Umlaut in, 826, R. 2, (a).
folc^(er), demonstr. pron.,
182, 188 ; followed by
rote, 162, 4 ; before adjs.,
122, 12.
foUen, conjugation,196-199;
use, 200, 5, 201, 202.
'some,* how rendered iu
Germ., 2, 2, 160, 162,
166, 168, 178, 177, 180.
fonber, 60, 1.
fonbern, 286, R. 1.
foroof)[ ... ale (aud^), 888;
38li. R fi.
580
INBEX.
Y|rinncn Model, 158.
)ftt^tn Model, 167»
tf» 6» p. S; in verbs, 1*8,
R. 2, 128, R. 1, Idl, 9.
1, 188, R. 3.
ftatt, see anftatt.
•ft, subst. suffix, 812, 1.
fte^en, with infin., 272, R. 2.
Stem of verbs, 27.
Strong declension; see " Sub-
stantives, declension of."
Strong conjugation ; see
"Verbs, conjugation of."
Subject, definition of, 392 ;
place of, 294 ; in principal
sentences, 20, 59, N. ;
in direct questions, 23,
O. 1; in dependent sen-
tences, 88, N.; inver-
sion of, 801, 2, N. I, 2;
expressed by nom. case,
8, 242, 1 ; agreement with
verb, 285; repetition of,
286.
Subjective clause, 806; rela-
tive, 806, R. 3.
Subjective genitive, 248, 2.
Subjunctive Mood, use, 264-
268, for conditional, 111,
268, N. ; in indirect state-
ments, 87, 266, 266; in
indirect questions, 88 ; in
hypothetical periods, 289,
R. 1, 267 ; for imperative,
81, R. 4, 268, 1, 269;
expressing a wish, 268, 2 ;
of purpose, 268, 3; after
a negative, etc., 268, 4; of
possibility, 268, 5; origin
of Umlaut in impf. subj,,
826, U).
Substantives, their declen-
sion, aWaler Model, 16,
17; Solin do., 21, (a), 22,
App. C. ; $unb do., 21,
(»), 22, App. E. ; J)orf do.,
86, 87; S^n^be, ®raf,
JBIume do., 54-57, App.
F. ; 3lame, yiai^bax, Df)x
do., 60-68, App. G.; with
Joublc plurals, 64, App.
C* ; Summary and tables,
70; essential parts, 71;
anom<dous, 66-69; substs.
without plural, 66 ; without
«ing.,67; of measure,weight
and number, 185 ; as verb
prefixes, 206, 3, 212; ir-
regular compound substs.,
68; appositive subst., 289;
derivation, by internal
change, 810; by suffixes,
812; by prefixes, 815 ;
composition, 819; see also
under " Accentuation,"
" Compound Substan-
tives," " Foreign Substan-
tives," " Gender."
Suffixes, of verbs, 811; of
substs., 8l2; of adjs.,
818.
Superlative degree, of adjs.,
relative, 127, 1; absolute,
127, 2; of advs., 190,
3-7.
*t, substs. in, gender, 89, 2,
(i) ; subst. suffix, 312, 1.
»t(it, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (e).
taufenb, 165, 8, and 10, (c).
teilS . . . teilS, 288.
Tense, in indirect state-
ments, S7 ; in indirect
questions,88; auxiliaries of,
use, 25, 53 ; place of with
auxiliaries of mood, 199, 3.
Tenses, simple, how formed
in weak verbs, 80 ; in
strong, 104-107, 110;
endings of, in weak verbs,
35 ; in strong, 107 ; com-
pound, how formed, 25,
108 ; construction, 26,
88 ; sequence of tenses in
indirect statements and
questions not observed in
Germ., 87, 2. 88, 2, 266,
4 ; of the indicative, how
used, 257-282 (see also
under the various tenses);
of the conditional, 268,
N.; the tense in indirect
statements, 87, 266; in
hypothetical periods, 267.
Terminations; see "End-
ings."
' than * after the compara-
tive, 126, 1, 241, 7.
'that,' how rendered in
Germ., 140.
' the ... the ' before compa-
ratives, 126, 4.
'there,' rendered by e3, 89,
1, R, ; ' there is, there are,' ,
220.
'they,' indefinite, 146, 146.
stl^um; see stum.
Time, expressions of, 184;
place of, 11, 45, 297, 2,
806, R. 2; advs. of, 187,
I. ; English participial con-
structions of, how rendered
in Germ., 284, («); time
of day, 184, 3, 285, R. 6,
N.3.
Titles of rank, 49 ; 7C, 5, 6.
' to,' how rendered in Germ.,
46, R. 4; 238.
Towns, names of, gender,
80, 3, (c); see also "Places,
names of."
Transitive verbs, English,
with object unexpressed,
rendered by reflexive verbs
in Germ., 216, 2; often
intrans. in Germ., 250, R.
1, 252, R.
Trigraphs, consonantal, pp.
4, 8, 14-
tro§, 228, 16, and R. 2.
stum, substs. in, declension,
87; gender, 89, 3, (i);
subst. suffix, 812, 16.
ilber, prep., 65 ; after inter-
jections, 240, 4, (a) ; after
INDEX.
681
verbs, etc., 891, 1; prefix,
208 ; after reflexive verbs,
216, 1.
urn, prep., 84, 184, 3, (c),
226. (a), (3), 227, (3), x;
after verbs, 291, 4; go-
verning an infin. of pur-
pose, 224, 2, (&), 274,
276; prefix, 208.
um fo, before comparatives,
126, 4, 241, 2, 298, (i),
R. 4, N. 3. [12.
um... roiHen, 228,22,R. 1,
Umlaut, pp. 3, 6, 12, 14; in
declension of substs., 17,
(a), 21, (a), 22, 86, 70, R.
6, App. A.,C. ; in subj.
mood, 107, O 2; in com-
parison of adjs., 125, R. 1,
in strong verbs, 186, 188,
192, R. 1 ; in Modal Aux-
iliaries, 196, R. 1 ; in deri-
vation, 808, N, 809, 811,
1, 2, 812, 2-4, 8, 11-13,
818, 5 ; origin, 826.
uit«, subst. prefix, 815, 4.
unb, 286.
unfetn, 228, 23.
sung, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, {a) ; subst. sufBx, 812,
17.
ungead^tet, prep., 228, 15;
conj. 289, 3, (/5), 241, 21.
units, before tens, 165, 7.
'unless,' how rendered in
Germ., 241, 18.
unten, adv., 189, 3; com-
parison, 180.
unter, prep., 65; prefix,
208.
untcrbeffen,adv. conj., 287 ;
subord. conj., 289, 3, (d),
241, 15.
unter^alb, 228, 6.
untneit, 228, 24.
ur?, subst. p'efix, 815, 6.
cur, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, W.
Urfprad^e, 828.
Variative numerals, 182,(<:).
nets, insep.verb prefix,35,R.
6, 204 ; meaning, 814, 6.
Verb, place of, 20, 82,38,
87, 2, 88, 2, 266, R. 2,
267, R. 2, 292,298,801:
English periphrastic forms
of, how rendered in Ger.,
81, R. 3; tenses of, 256-
262, 268, 266 (see also
under the various tenses);
moods of, 256-278 (see
also under the various
moods) ; concord of, 285 ;
when omitted, 269, R. 6,
287.
Verbs, stem of, 27; principal
parts of, 28; weak conjuga-
tion of, 80, 81 ; endings of
simple tenses, 85 ; verbs
conjugated vrith feitt, 53 ;
neut., of motion, etc., 53 ;
irregular weak, 99 ; strong,
108-108, App. L. ; bei^en
Model, 118; bletben do.,
120; fc^iefeen do., 128 ;
fed^ten do., 124; frieren
do., 181 ; fingen do., 144 ;
fpinnen do., 168 ; l&elfen
do. ,159; fpred^en do. , 167;
effen do., 181 ; |c^lagen
do., 186; faUendo.,188;
table of strong verbs, 192;
passive voice, 112-114 ;
reflexive verbs, paradigm
of, 41; use, 214-216; im-
personal verbs, 217-220 ;
compound verbs, insep.,
35, R. 6, 109, 204, 207-
209,211-213; separable,
117, 205-208, 210;
auxiliaries of tense, 25,
53 ; irregular strong, 194,
196; auxiliaries of mood,
196-202 ; verbs with two
nominatives, 242, 2, 3; with
genitive, 246 ; with dative,
250; with accusative, 252,
253; verbs of choosing,
848, N.; of calling, con.
sidering, 258 ; verbs fol-
lowed by the subjunctive,
265 ; by the infin. without
8U, 271; with 8«, 272;
prepositions after, 291 ;
derivation of, withouf
change, 808 ; with in-
ternal change, 809 ; by
suffixes, 811 ; by prefixes,
814.
uermittelft, 228, 9.
oerm5ge, 223, 10.
oiel, comparison of, 129 J
indef. pron., 145 ; indef.
numeral, 168, 176; before
adjs., 122, 11, 12.
Vocative, 242, 1.
t)olI, prefix, sep. and insep.,
208; adj., 244.
Don, prep., 46, 228, (a),
231, (d), 234; used foi
genitive, 46, R. 3; with
passive voice, 112, R. 3;
with names of places, 72,
3, 4; with names of per^
sons, 76, 6; replaces geni-
tive of quality, 248, 5, N. ;
after partitives, 248, 6, N.;
after »oll,244 ; after verbs,
245,2
Dor, prep., 65, 184, 3, (5),
284 ; after verbs, etc., 291,
5, 11; after reflexive verbs,
215, 1, (i).
corn, adv., 189, 8;compari.
son, 130.
Vowels, modified, pp. 3, 6,
12, 14; double, pp. 4, 6,
12, 14; importance of, p.
8, bottom ; long and short,
pp. 9, 10; see also "Um-
laut."
roa^rcnb, prep., 75, 2, 228,
17;conj.,239,3, (<5), 241,
13; replaces Engl, participle
of time, 284, 1, {a).
'.aamt, 58, 187, 1.,(rf).
rcarum, 88, R. 3, N.
682
W08, interrog, pron., declen-
sion and use, 88; some-
times -' why,' 88, 6, 162,
3; used for ettoa^, 149,
1; relative pron., 92, 96,
followed by ba3, 162, 1 ,
of a number of persons
or things, 162, 2; not gov-
erned by preps., 88, 3,
96, 7 ; constructio* of sen-
tences with, 98, 3.
too? fUr (ein), 86.
'we,'indef.,146.
Weak conjugation, see
" Verbs " ; declension, see
" Substantives," " Adjec-
tives."
toeber , . . nocf), 288.
roegen, 76,1, 228,2, and R.
3.
Weight, expressions of 186.
toeil, 289,3, (3), 241,17.^
toeld^er, interrog. pron. and
adj., 6, 81, 82, 84,86;
in exclamations, 86, 1, 2;
relativepron., 92, 94, 95;
indefinite pron. and num-
eral, used for ' some,"
146, 165, 180; before
adjs., 122, 13.
wenig, comparison of, 129;
indef. pron., 145; indef.
numeral, 168, 176 ; b fore
adjs., 122, 12.
tnenn, 68, 289, 3, (6), R. i-
4, 267 ; omission of, 289,
R. 2-4, 267, R. 2, 3, 6,
N.. 298, (a), 3, R. 4, N.
a, (c), R. 2, 394, (6), R.
2.
wenn aud^, tvonn flletci&,ttjentt
INDEX
fc^on, 289, 3, (6), and R.
3, N.
wenn . . . nic^t, 289, 8, (6),
241, 18.
roev, interrog. pron., 81, 88;
relative pron., 92, 96,186,
(i), N. ; followed by ber,
162, 1; replaced by ber,
806, R. 3, N. ; construe-
tion of sentences with, 98,
3.
rocrben, pres. and impf. of,
19 ; conjugated with fein,
68, (a); use as auxiliary
of tense, 25, 2; as auxili-
ary of passive voice, 112,
118; conjugation, 112;
as impersonal verb, 217,
2, (<:); withdat., 260, (e).
'when,' how rendered in
Germ., 68.
' whether,' expressed by mbs
gen, 200, 3, (c).
* while, whilst,' how rendered
in Germ., 241, 15.
'whole,' how rendered in
Germ., 168, 170.
roiber, prep,, 84 ; prefix,
204.
rote, in comparisons, 126, 3,
241, 6, 8 ; after folc^ ein,
fo ein, 162, 4; subord.
conj., 289, 3, (^); in com-
parative clauses, 806, R.
4, N.
roieber, prefix, 208, N. 2.
roienielfte, ber, 164, 166, 3,
N.2.
'will,' how rendered in
Germ., 201.
Wish, expressed by the Sub-
junctive, 268, 2; construe,
tion of sentences express-
ing, 298, (a), 2.
roiffen, 196, and N. i.
n>0, 187, II., (c); before
preps., replacing '"terrog.
prons., 88, 3, and relative
prons., 96, 2, 96, 7.
roo^r, comparison of, 190;
idiomatic use, 195, 10.
rooUen, its conjugation, 196-
199; its use, 200, 6, 201,
202.
roorben, for geroorben, in
passive voice, 112, R. 2;
when omitted, 112, R. 4.
' you,' how rendered in Ger.,
40; indef. pron., 146.
sjel^n, in compound num-
erals, 166, 5.
jers, insep. prefix, 86, R. 6,
204; meaning, 814, 7.
»5'g, in numerals, 166, 6.
au,prep., 46,227,(rt),4,(^),
2, (c), 228, (r), 229, (a),
230, (c), 282, (^), 288, (3),
(c), 2, (ii) ; with Infinitive,
272-277; place of, 109,
117, R. 2; with insep.
verbs, 206, 2 ; followed by
alg ba% or um ju, with
verbs of choosing, 242, 3,
N., 268 ; after adjs., 244.
auerft, 195, 5.
Siifolge, 228, 11, R.
SunadEjft, 61, 7.
Suroiber, 61, 3,
jroet, declension of, 166, 2.
groifd^cn, prep., 66.
22
54C812
• 2 ; construe*
ices express-
2.
dN. I.
(c) ; before
ing '"terrog.
1 and relative
96,7.
an of, 190;
195, 10.
gation, 196-
JOO, 6, 201,
worben, in
112, R. 2;
112, R. 4.
;red in Ger.,
™., 146.
ound num.
c, 85, R. 6,
814, 7.
, 165, 6.
'»(«), 4, (^),
, 229, (a),
5), 283, {b),
1 Infinitive,
e of, 109,
'ith insep.
followed by
I JU, with
ig, 242,3,
adjs., 244.
R.
f, 166, 2.